Ajustes Rele 670 ABB

Technical reference manual Line differential protection IED RED 670
Innovation
from
ABB
Document ID: 1MRK505183-UEN Issued: December 2007 Revision: B IED product version: 1.1
Copyright 2007 ABB. All rights reserved
COPYRIGHT
WE RESERVE ALL RIGHTS TO THIS DOCUMENT, EVEN IN THE EVENT THAT A PATENT IS ISSUED AND A DIFFERENT COMMERCIAL PROPRIETARY RIGHT IS REGISTERED. IMPROPER USE, IN PARTICULAR REPRODUCTION AND DISSEMINATION TO THIRD PARTIES, IS NOT PERMITTED. THIS DOCUMENT HAS BEEN CAREFULLY CHECKED. HOWEVER, IN CASE ANY ERRORS ARE DETECTED, THE READER IS KINDLY REQUESTED TO NOTIFY THE MANUFACTURER AT THE ADDRESS BELOW. THE DATA CONTAINED IN THIS MANUAL IS INTENDED SOLELY FOR THE CONCEPT OR PRODUCT DESCRIPTION AND IS NOT TO BE DEEMED TO BE A STATEMENT OF GUARANTEED PROPERTIES. IN THE INTEREST OF OUR CUSTOMERS, WE CONSTANTLY SEEK TO ENSURE THAT OUR PRODUCTS ARE DEVELOPED TO THE LATEST TECHNOLOGICAL STANDARDS. AS A RESULT, IT IS POSSIBLE THAT THERE MAY BE SOME DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE HW/SW PRODUCT AND THIS INFORMATION PRODUCT. Manufacturer:
ABB AB Substation Automation Products SE-721 59 Vsters Sweden Telephone: +46 (0) 21 34 20 00 Facsimile: +46 (0) 21 14 69 18 www.abb.com/substationautomation
Table of contents
Table of contents
Section 1 Introduction.....................................................................27
Introduction to the technical reference manual.................................27 About the complete set of manuals for an IED............................27 About the technical reference manual.........................................28 Design of the Technical reference manual (TRM).......................29 Introduction.............................................................................29 Principle of operation..............................................................29 Input and output signals.........................................................32 Function block........................................................................32 Setting parameters.................................................................32 Technical data........................................................................32 Intended audience.......................................................................33 Related documents......................................................................33 Revision notes.............................................................................34
Section 2
Local human-machine interface.....................................35

Human machine interface.................................................................35 Small size graphic HMI.....................................................................37 Introduction..................................................................................37 Design.........................................................................................37 Medium size graphic HMI.................................................................38 Introduction..................................................................................38 Design.........................................................................................38 Keypad.............................................................................................39 LED...................................................................................................41 Introduction..................................................................................41 Status indication LEDs................................................................41 Indication LEDs...........................................................................41 LHMI related functions......................................................................42 Introduction..................................................................................42 General setting parameters.........................................................42 Status indication LEDs................................................................43 Design....................................................................................43 Function block........................................................................43 Input and output signals.........................................................43 Indication LEDs...........................................................................44 Introduction.............................................................................44 Design....................................................................................44 Function block........................................................................51
RED 670
Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B
Table of contents
Input and output signals.........................................................51 Setting parameters.................................................................51
Section 3
Basic IED functions........................................................55

Analog inputs....................................................................................55 Introduction..................................................................................55 Principle of operation...................................................................55 Function block.............................................................................56 Setting parameters......................................................................56 Authorization.....................................................................................62 Authorization handling in the tool................................................63 Authorization handling in the IED................................................68 Self supervision with internal event list.............................................68 Introduction..................................................................................68 Principle of operation...................................................................68 Internal signals.......................................................................70 Run-time model......................................................................72 Function block.............................................................................73 Output signals..............................................................................73 Setting parameters......................................................................73 Technical data.............................................................................74 Time synchronization........................................................................74 Introduction..................................................................................74 Principle of operation...................................................................74 General concepts...................................................................74 Real Time Clock (RTC) operation..........................................75 Synchronization alternatives..................................................76 Function block.............................................................................80 Output signals..............................................................................80 Setting parameters......................................................................80 Technical data.............................................................................83 Parameter setting groups.................................................................84 Introduction..................................................................................84 Principle of operation...................................................................84 Function block.............................................................................85 Input and output signals..............................................................85 Setting parameters......................................................................86 Test mode functionality.....................................................................87 Introduction..................................................................................87 Principle of operation...................................................................87 Function block.............................................................................88 Input and output signals..............................................................88 Setting parameters......................................................................89 IED identifiers...................................................................................89
RED 670
Table of contents
Introduction..................................................................................89 Setting parameters......................................................................90 Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI)..............................................90 Introduction..................................................................................90 Principle of operation...................................................................90 Function block.............................................................................91 Input and output signals..............................................................91 Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO)..........................................91 Introduction..................................................................................91 Principle of operation...................................................................92 Function block.............................................................................92 Input and output signals..............................................................92 Signal matrix for mA inputs (SMMI)..................................................93 Introduction..................................................................................93 Principle of operation...................................................................93 Function block.............................................................................93 Input and output signals..............................................................93 Signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI).............................................94 Introduction..................................................................................94 Principle of operation...................................................................94 Function block.............................................................................94 Input and output signals..............................................................95 Setting parameters......................................................................95 Summation block 3 phase (SUM3Ph)..............................................97 Introduction..................................................................................97 Principle of operation...................................................................97 Function block.............................................................................98 Input and output signals..............................................................98 Setting parameters......................................................................98 Authority status (AUTS)....................................................................99 Introduction..................................................................................99 Principle of operation...................................................................99 Function block...........................................................................100 Output signals............................................................................100 Setting parameters....................................................................100 Goose binary receive......................................................................101 Function block...........................................................................101 Input and output signals............................................................101 Setting parameters....................................................................103
Section 4
Differential protection...................................................105
Line differential protection..............................................................105 Introduction................................................................................106 Line differential protection, 3 or 6 CT sets (PDIF, 87L)........106
RED 670
Table of contents
Line differential protection 3 or 6 CT sets, with in-zone transformers (PDIF, 87LT)...................................................107 Analog signal transfer for line differential protection (MDIF)..................................................................................108 Principle of operation.................................................................109 Algorithm and logic...............................................................109 Time synchronization...........................................................116 Analog signal communication for line differential protection..............................................................................117 Open CT detection feature...................................................120 Binary signal transfer............................................................122 Function block...........................................................................122 Input and output signals............................................................125 Setting parameters....................................................................130 Technical data...........................................................................143 High impedance differential protection (PDIF, 87)..........................143 Introduction................................................................................144 Principle of operation.................................................................144 Logic diagram.......................................................................144 Function block...........................................................................145 Input and output signals............................................................145 Setting parameters....................................................................145 Technical data...........................................................................146
Section 5
Impedance protection ..................................................147

Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic (PDIS, 21) .................................................................................................147 Introduction................................................................................147 Principle of operation.................................................................148 Full scheme measurement...................................................148 Impedance characteristic.....................................................149 Minimum operating current...................................................153 Measuring principles............................................................154 Directional lines....................................................................156 Simplified logic diagrams......................................................157 Function block...........................................................................161 Input and output signals............................................................161 Setting parameters....................................................................162 Technical data...........................................................................165 Distance protection zones, quadrilateral characteristic for series compensated lines (PDIS) .............................................................166 Introduction................................................................................166 Principle of operation.................................................................167 Full scheme measurement...................................................167
RED 670
Table of contents
Impedance characteristic.....................................................167 Minimum operating current...................................................171 Measuring principles............................................................171 Directionality for series compensation..................................173 Simplified logic diagrams......................................................175 Function block...........................................................................179 Input and output signals............................................................179 Setting parameters....................................................................180 Technical data...........................................................................185 Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic, PDIS 21.....186 Introduction................................................................................186 Principle of operation.................................................................187 Full scheme measurement...................................................187 Impedance characteristic.....................................................187 Basic operation characteristics.............................................188 Theory for operation.............................................................190 Function block...........................................................................201 Input and output signals............................................................201 Setting parameters....................................................................202 Technical data...........................................................................204 Mho impedance supervision logic..................................................205 Introduction................................................................................205 Principle of operation.................................................................206 Fault inception detection......................................................206 Function block...........................................................................207 Input and output signals............................................................207 Setting parameters....................................................................208 Phase selection with load encroachment (PDIS, 21).....................209 Introduction................................................................................209 Principle of operation.................................................................210 Phase-to-earth fault..............................................................211 Phase-to-phase fault............................................................213 Three phase faults................................................................214 Load encroachment..............................................................215 Minimum operate currents....................................................218 Simplified logic diagrams......................................................219 Function block...........................................................................223 Input and output signals............................................................223 Setting parameters....................................................................224 Technical data...........................................................................225 Faulty phase identification with load enchroachment (PDIS, 21)..................................................................................................225 Introduction................................................................................226
RED 670
Table of contents
Principle of operation.................................................................226 The phase selection function................................................226 Function block...........................................................................237 Input and output signals............................................................237 Setting parameters....................................................................238 Technical data...........................................................................239 Directional impedance Mho (RDIR)................................................239 Introduction................................................................................239 Principle of operation.................................................................240 Directional impedance element for mho characteristic, ZDM......................................................................................240 Additional distance protection directional function for earth faults, ZDA .................................................................242 Function block...........................................................................244 Input and output signals............................................................245 Setting parameters....................................................................246 Phase preference logic...................................................................247 Introduction................................................................................247 Principle of operation.................................................................247 Function block...........................................................................250 Input and output signals............................................................250 Setting parameters....................................................................250 Technical data...........................................................................251 Power swing detection (RPSB, 78)................................................252 Introduction................................................................................252 Principle of operation.................................................................252 Resistive reach in forward direction.....................................253 Resistive reach in reverse direction.....................................254 Reactive reach in forward and reverse direction..................255 Basic detection logic.............................................................255 Operating and inhibit conditions...........................................257 Function block...........................................................................258 Input and output signals............................................................258 Setting parameters....................................................................259 Technical data...........................................................................260 Power swing logic (RPSL, 78)........................................................261 Introduction................................................................................261 Principle of operation.................................................................261 Communication and tripping logic........................................261 Blocking logic.......................................................................262 Function block...........................................................................264 Input and output signals............................................................264 Setting parameters....................................................................265 Technical data...........................................................................265
RED 670
Table of contents
Pole slip protection (PPAM, 78)......................................................265 Introduction................................................................................265 Principle of operation.................................................................266 Function block...........................................................................269 Input and output signals............................................................269 Setting parameters....................................................................270 Technical data...........................................................................271 Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage and current based (SFCV) ...........................................................................................271 Introduction................................................................................271 Principle of operation.................................................................271 Function block...........................................................................274 Input and output signals............................................................274 Setting parameters....................................................................274 Technical data...........................................................................275
Section 6
Current protection.........................................................277
Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection (PIOC, 50)................277 Introduction................................................................................277 Principle of operation.................................................................277 Function block...........................................................................278 Input and output signals............................................................278 Setting parameters....................................................................278 Technical data...........................................................................279 Four step phase overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51_67)................279 Introduction................................................................................280 Principle of operation.................................................................280 Function block...........................................................................284 Input and output signals............................................................284 Setting parameters....................................................................286 Technical data...........................................................................292 Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection (PIOC, 50N)...........293 Introduction................................................................................293 Principle of operation.................................................................294 Function block...........................................................................294 Input and output signals............................................................294 Setting parameters....................................................................295 Technical data...........................................................................295 Four step residual overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51N/67N).........295 Introduction................................................................................296 Principle of operation.................................................................296 Operating quantity within the function..................................296 Internal polarizing facility of the function..............................297 External polarizing facility for EFGround Fault function.......299
RED 670
Table of contents
Base quantities within the function.......................................300 Internal EFGround Fault function structure..........................300 Four residual overcurrent stages..........................................300 Directional supervision element with integrated directional comparision stage ..............................................301 Second harmonic blocking element.....................................304 Switch on to fault feature......................................................306 Function block...........................................................................309 Input and output signals............................................................309 Setting parameters....................................................................310 Technical data...........................................................................317 Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection (PSDE, 67N) ..................................................................................318 Introduction................................................................................318 Principle of operation.................................................................319 Introduction...........................................................................319 Function block...........................................................................325 Input and output signals............................................................326 Setting parameters....................................................................328 Technical data...........................................................................331 Thermal overload protection, one time constant (PTTR, 26)..........332 Introduction................................................................................332 Principle of operation.................................................................333 Function block...........................................................................336 Input and output signals............................................................336 Setting parameters....................................................................336 Technical data...........................................................................337 Breaker failure protection (RBRF, 50BF)........................................338 Introduction................................................................................338 Principle of operation.................................................................338 Function block...........................................................................342 Input and output signals............................................................342 Setting parameters....................................................................343 Technical data...........................................................................344 Stub protection (PTOC, 50STB).....................................................344 Introduction................................................................................345 Principle of operation.................................................................345 Function block...........................................................................346 Input and output signals............................................................346 Setting parameters....................................................................347 Technical data...........................................................................347 Pole discordance protection (RPLD, 52PD)...................................347 Introduction................................................................................348 Principle of operation.................................................................348
RED 670
Table of contents
Pole discordance signalling from circuit breaker..................351 Unsymmetrical current detection..........................................351 Function block...........................................................................352 Input and output signals............................................................352 Setting parameters....................................................................352 Technical data...........................................................................353 Directional underpower protection (PDUP, 32)..............................353 Introduction................................................................................353 Principle of operation.................................................................354 Low pass filtering..................................................................356 Calibration of analog inputs..................................................357 Function block...........................................................................358 Input and output signals............................................................358 Setting parameters....................................................................359 Technical data...........................................................................360 Directional overpower protection (PDOP, 32)................................361 Introduction................................................................................361 Principle of operation.................................................................362 Low pass filtering..................................................................364 Calibration of analog inputs..................................................364 Function block...........................................................................365 Input and output signals............................................................366 Setting parameters....................................................................366 Technical data...........................................................................368 Broken conductor check (PTOC, 46)..............................................368 Introduction................................................................................368 Principle of operation.................................................................368 Function block...........................................................................370 Input and output signals............................................................370 Setting parameters....................................................................371 Technical data...........................................................................371
Section 7
Voltage protection........................................................373
Two step undervoltage protection (PTUV, 27)...............................373 Introduction................................................................................373 Principle of operation.................................................................373 Measurement principle.........................................................374 Time delay............................................................................374 Blocking................................................................................377 Design..................................................................................379 Function block...........................................................................380 Input and output signals............................................................380 Setting parameters....................................................................381 Technical data...........................................................................384
RED 670
Table of contents
Two step overvoltage protection (PTOV, 59).................................384 Introduction................................................................................385 Principle of operation.................................................................385 Measurement principle.........................................................386 Time delay............................................................................386 Blocking................................................................................388 Design..................................................................................388 Function block...........................................................................390 Input and output signals............................................................390 Setting parameters....................................................................391 Technical data...........................................................................393 Two step residual overvoltage protection (PTOV, 59N).................394 Introduction................................................................................394 Principle of operation.................................................................394 Measurement principle.........................................................395 Time delay............................................................................395 Blocking................................................................................398 Design..................................................................................399 Function block...........................................................................400 Input and output signals............................................................400 Setting parameters....................................................................400 Technical data...........................................................................403 Overexcitation protection (PVPH, 24).............................................403 Introduction................................................................................404 Principle of operation.................................................................404 Measured voltage.................................................................406 Operate time of the overexcitation protection.......................407 Cooling.................................................................................410 OEX protection function measurands...................................410 Overexcitation alarm............................................................411 Logic diagram.......................................................................412 Function block...........................................................................412 Input and output signals............................................................412 Setting parameters....................................................................413 Technical data...........................................................................414 Voltage differential protection (PTOV, 60)......................................415 Introduction................................................................................415 Principle of operation.................................................................415 Function block...........................................................................416 Input and output signals............................................................417 Setting parameters....................................................................417 Technical data...........................................................................418 Loss of voltage check (PTUV, 27)..................................................418
10
RED 670
Table of contents
Introduction................................................................................418 Principle of operation.................................................................419 Function block...........................................................................420 Input and output signals............................................................420 Setting parameters....................................................................421 Technical data...........................................................................421
Section 8
Frequency protection....................................................423
Underfrequency protection (PTUF, 81)..........................................423 Introduction................................................................................423 Principle of operation.................................................................423 Measurement principle.........................................................424 Time delay............................................................................424 Voltage dependent time delay..............................................424 Blocking................................................................................425 Design..................................................................................426 Function block...........................................................................427 Input and output signals............................................................427 Setting parameters....................................................................427 Technical data...........................................................................428 Overfrequency protection (PTOF, 81)............................................428 Introduction................................................................................429 Principle of operation.................................................................429 Measurement principle.........................................................429 Time delay............................................................................429 Blocking................................................................................430 Design..................................................................................430 Function block...........................................................................431 Input and output signals............................................................431 Setting parameters....................................................................432 Technical data...........................................................................432 Rate-of-change frequency protection (PFRC, 81)..........................432 Introduction................................................................................433 Principle of operation.................................................................433 Measurement principle.........................................................433 Time delay............................................................................434 Blocking................................................................................434 Design..................................................................................434 Function block...........................................................................435 Input and output signals............................................................435 Setting parameters....................................................................436 Technical data...........................................................................436
Section 9
RED 670
Multipurpose protection................................................439
11
Table of contents
General current and voltage protection (GAPC).............................439 Introduction................................................................................439 Inadvertent generator energization......................................439 Principle of operation.................................................................440 Measured quantities within the function...............................440 Base quantities for GF function............................................442 Built-in overcurrent protection steps.....................................443 Built-in undercurrent protection steps...................................448 Built-in overvoltage protection steps....................................448 Built-in undervoltage protection steps..................................449 Inadvertent generator energization......................................449 Logic diagram.......................................................................451 Function block...........................................................................456 Input and output signals............................................................456 Setting parameters....................................................................458 Technical data...........................................................................468
Section 10 Secondary system supervision.....................................471

Current circuit supervision (RDIF)..................................................471 Introduction................................................................................471 Principle of operation.................................................................471 Function block...........................................................................473 Input and output signals............................................................473 Setting parameters....................................................................473 Technical data...........................................................................474 Fuse failure supervision (RFUF).....................................................474 Introduction................................................................................474 Principle of operation.................................................................475 Zero sequence ....................................................................475 Negative sequence...............................................................478 du/dt and di/dt.......................................................................478 Operation modes..................................................................479 Dead line detection...............................................................480 Function block...........................................................................480 Input and output signals............................................................480 Setting parameters....................................................................481 Technical data...........................................................................482
Section 11 Control..........................................................................483
Synchronizing, synchrocheck and energizing check (RSYN, 25)..................................................................................................483 Introduction................................................................................483 Principle of operation.................................................................484 Basic functionality.................................................................484
12
RED 670
Table of contents
Logic diagrams.....................................................................484 Function block...........................................................................492 Input and output signals............................................................493 Setting parameters....................................................................495 Technical data...........................................................................497 Autorecloser (RREC, 79)................................................................498 Introduction................................................................................498 Principle of operation.................................................................499 Logic Diagrams....................................................................499 Auto-reclosing operation Off and On....................................499 Auto-reclosing mode selection.............................................499 Start auto-reclosing and conditions for start of a reclosing cycle ....................................................................................500 Control of the auto-reclosing open time for shot 1...............501 Long trip signal.....................................................................502 Time sequence diagrams.....................................................508 Function block...........................................................................511 Input and output signals............................................................511 Setting parameters....................................................................513 Technical data...........................................................................515 Apparatus control (APC).................................................................516 Introduction................................................................................516 Principle of operation.................................................................516 Bay control (QCBAY).................................................................517 Introduction...........................................................................517 Principle of operation............................................................517 Function block......................................................................518 Input and output signals.......................................................519 Setting parameters...............................................................519 Local/Remote switch (LocalRemote, LocRemControl)..............519 Introduction...........................................................................519 Principle of operation............................................................519 Function block......................................................................520 Input and output signals.......................................................521 Setting parameters...............................................................522 Switch controller (SCSWI).........................................................523 Introduction...........................................................................523 Principle of operation............................................................523 Function block......................................................................528 Input and output signals.......................................................528 Setting parameters...............................................................529 Circuit breaker (SXCBR)...........................................................530 Introduction...........................................................................530
RED 670
13
Table of contents
Principle of operation............................................................530 Function block......................................................................535 Input and output signals.......................................................535 Setting parameters...............................................................536 Circuit switch (SXSWI)..............................................................536 Introduction...........................................................................536 Principle of operation............................................................536 Function block......................................................................541 Input and output signals.......................................................541 Setting parameters...............................................................542 Bay reserve (QCRSV)...............................................................542 Introduction...........................................................................542 Principle of operation............................................................542 Function block......................................................................545 Input and output signals.......................................................545 Setting parameters...............................................................546 Reservation input (RESIN)........................................................547 Introduction...........................................................................547 Principle of operation............................................................547 Function block......................................................................548 Input and output signals.......................................................548 Setting parameters...............................................................549 Interlocking.....................................................................................549 Introduction................................................................................549 Principle of operation.................................................................549 Logical node for interlocking (SCILO)........................................552 Introduction...........................................................................552 Principle of operation............................................................552 Function block......................................................................553 Input and output signals.......................................................553 Interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE).........................................554 Introduction...........................................................................554 Function block......................................................................555 Logic diagram.......................................................................556 Input and output signals.......................................................561 Interlocking for bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC)...............................563 Introduction...........................................................................563 Function block......................................................................564 Logic diagram.......................................................................565 Input and output signals.......................................................569 Interlocking for transformer bay (AB_TRAFO)...........................572 Introduction...........................................................................572 Function block......................................................................573
14
RED 670
Table of contents
Logic diagram.......................................................................574 Input and output signals.......................................................577 Interlocking for bus-section breaker (A1A2_BS)........................579 Introduction...........................................................................579 Function block......................................................................579 Logic diagram.......................................................................580 Input and output signals.......................................................581 Interlocking for bus-section disconnector (A1A2_DC)...............583 Introduction...........................................................................583 Function block......................................................................583 Logic diagram.......................................................................584 Input and output signals.......................................................586 Interlocking for busbar earthinggrounding switch (BB_ES).......587 Introduction...........................................................................587 Function block......................................................................587 Logic diagram.......................................................................588 Input and output signals.......................................................588 Interlocking for double CB bay (DB)..........................................588 Introduction...........................................................................588 Function block......................................................................589 Logic diagrams.....................................................................590 Input and output signals ......................................................597 Interlocking for 1 1/2 CB (BH)....................................................600 Introduction...........................................................................600 Function blocks....................................................................601 Logic diagrams.....................................................................603 Input and output signals.......................................................610 Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking.............616 Function block......................................................................616 Input and output signals.......................................................616 Setting parameters...............................................................618 Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (SLGGIO)...................................................................618 Introduction................................................................................618 Principle of operation.................................................................619 Functionality and behaviour ................................................620 Graphical display..................................................................620 Function block...........................................................................622 Input and output signals............................................................623 Setting parameters....................................................................624 Selector mini switch (VSGGIO)......................................................624 Introduction................................................................................624 Principle of operation.................................................................625
RED 670
15
Table of contents
Function block...........................................................................625 Input and output signals............................................................625 Setting parameters....................................................................626 Generic double point function block (DPGGIO)..............................626 Introduction................................................................................627 Principle of operation.................................................................627 Function block...........................................................................627 Input and output signals............................................................627 Setting parameters....................................................................627 Single point generic control 8 signals (SPC8GGIO).......................628 Introduction................................................................................628 Principle of operation.................................................................628 Function block...........................................................................628 Input and output signals............................................................628 Setting parameters....................................................................629
Section 12 Scheme communication...............................................631

Scheme communication logic for distance protection (PSCH, 85) .................................................................................................631 Introduction................................................................................631 Principle of operation.................................................................632 Blocking scheme..................................................................632 Permissive underreach scheme...........................................632 Permissive overreach scheme.............................................633 Unblocking scheme..............................................................633 Intertrip scheme....................................................................634 Simplified logic diagram.......................................................634 Function block...........................................................................636 Input and output signals............................................................636 Setting parameters....................................................................636 Technical data...........................................................................637 Phase segregated scheme communication logic for distance protection (PSCH, 85) ...................................................................637 Introduction................................................................................638 Principle of operation.................................................................638 Blocking scheme..................................................................639 Permissive underreach scheme...........................................639 Permissive overreach scheme.............................................640 Unblocking scheme..............................................................640 Intertrip scheme....................................................................640 Simplified logic diagram.......................................................640 Function block...........................................................................642 Input and output signals............................................................642 Setting parameters....................................................................643
16
RED 670
Table of contents
Technical data...........................................................................644 Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for distance protection (PSCH, 85)....................................................................644 Introduction................................................................................644 Principle of operation.................................................................645 Current reversal logic...........................................................645 Weak end infeed logic..........................................................645 Function block...........................................................................647 Input and output signals............................................................647 Setting parameters....................................................................647 Technical data...........................................................................648 Local acceleration logic (PLAL)......................................................648 Introduction................................................................................649 Principle of operation.................................................................649 Zone extension.....................................................................649 Loss-of-load acceleration.....................................................650 Function block...........................................................................650 Input and output signals............................................................650 Setting parameters....................................................................651 Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection (PSCH, 85).....................................................................................652 Introduction................................................................................652 Principle of operation.................................................................652 Blocking scheme..................................................................653 Permissive under/overreach scheme...................................654 Unblocking scheme..............................................................655 Function block...........................................................................656 Input and output signals............................................................656 Setting parameters....................................................................657 Technical data...........................................................................657 Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection (PSCH, 85).................................................658 Introduction................................................................................658 Principle of operation.................................................................658 Directional comparison logic function...................................658 Fault current reversal logic...................................................659 Weak and infeed logic..........................................................659 Function block...........................................................................661 Input and output signals............................................................661 Setting parameters....................................................................661 Technical data...........................................................................662 Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase segregated communication (PSCH) ..............................................662 Introduction................................................................................663
RED 670
17
Table of contents
Principle of operation.................................................................663 Current reversal logic ..........................................................663 Function block...........................................................................665 Input and output signals............................................................665 Setting parameters....................................................................667 Technical data...........................................................................667
Section 13 Logic.............................................................................669
Tripping logic (PTRC, 94)...............................................................669 Introduction................................................................................669 Principle of operation.................................................................669 Logic diagram.......................................................................671 Function block...........................................................................674 Input and output signals............................................................674 Setting parameters....................................................................675 Technical data...........................................................................676 Trip matrix logic (GGIO).................................................................676 Application.................................................................................676 Principle of operation.................................................................676 Function block...........................................................................678 Input and output signals............................................................678 Setting parameters....................................................................679 Configurable logic blocks (LLD)......................................................680 Introduction................................................................................680 Inverter function block (INV)......................................................680 OR function block (OR).............................................................680 AND function block (AND).........................................................681 Timer function block (Timer)......................................................682 Pulse timer function block (PULSE)..........................................683 Exclusive OR function block (XOR)...........................................683 Set-reset with memory function block (SRM)............................684 Controllable gate function block (GT)........................................685 Settable timer function block (TS).............................................685 Technical data...........................................................................686 Fixed signal function block (FIXD)..................................................687 Introduction................................................................................687 Principle of operation.................................................................687 Function block...........................................................................687 Input and output signals............................................................687 Setting parameters....................................................................688 Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I..........................................688 Introduction................................................................................688 Principle of operation............................................................688 Function block......................................................................689
18
RED 670
Table of contents
Input and output signals.......................................................689 Setting parameters...............................................................690 Boolean 16 to Integer conversion with logic node representation (B16IGGIO)....................................................................................690 Introduction................................................................................690 Principle of operation.................................................................690 Function block...........................................................................691 Input and output signals............................................................691 Setting parameters....................................................................692 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion (IB16)........................................692 Introduction................................................................................692 Principle of operation.................................................................692 Function block...........................................................................693 Input and output signals............................................................693 Setting parameters....................................................................694 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation (IB16GGIO)....................................................................................694 Introduction................................................................................694 Principle of operation.................................................................694 Function block...........................................................................695 Input and output signals............................................................695 Setting parameters....................................................................696
Section 14 Monitoring.....................................................................697
Measurements (MMXU).................................................................697 Introduction................................................................................698 Principle of operation.................................................................700 Measurement supervision....................................................700 Service values (MMXU, SVR)..............................................704 Current Phasors (MMXU, CP)..............................................708 Voltage phasors (MMXU, VN and VP).................................709 Sequence quantities (MSQI, CSQ and VSQ).......................709 Function block...........................................................................709 Input and output signals............................................................711 Setting parameters....................................................................714 Technical data...........................................................................730 Event counter (GGIO).....................................................................730 Introduction................................................................................730 Principle of operation.................................................................731 Reporting..............................................................................731 Design..................................................................................731 Function block...........................................................................732 Input signals..............................................................................732 Setting parameters....................................................................732
RED 670
19
Table of contents
Technical data...........................................................................732 Event function (EV).........................................................................732 Introduction................................................................................733 Principle of operation.................................................................733 Function block...........................................................................735 Input and output signals............................................................735 Setting parameters....................................................................736 Fault locator (RFLO).......................................................................738 Introduction................................................................................738 Principle of operation.................................................................739 Measuring Principle..............................................................740 Accurate algorithm for measurement of distance to fault.....740 The non-compensated impedance model............................743 IEC 60870-5-103..................................................................744 Function block...........................................................................744 Input and output signals............................................................744 Setting parameters....................................................................745 Technical data...........................................................................746 Measured value expander block.....................................................746 Introduction................................................................................746 Principle of operation.................................................................747 Function block...........................................................................747 Input and output signals............................................................747 Disturbance report (RDRE)............................................................748 Introduction................................................................................748 Principle of operation.................................................................749 Function block...........................................................................756 Input and output signals............................................................757 Setting parameters....................................................................759 Technical data...........................................................................770 Event list (RDRE)...........................................................................771 Introduction................................................................................771 Principle of operation.................................................................771 Function block...........................................................................772 Input signals..............................................................................772 Technical data...........................................................................772 Indications (RDRE).........................................................................772 Introduction................................................................................772 Principle of operation.................................................................773 Function block...........................................................................774 Input signals..............................................................................774 Technical data...........................................................................774 Event recorder (RDRE)..................................................................774
20
RED 670
Table of contents
Introduction................................................................................774 Principle of operation.................................................................775 Function block...........................................................................775 Input signals..............................................................................775 Technical data...........................................................................775 Trip value recorder (RDRE)............................................................776 Introduction................................................................................776 Principle of operation.................................................................776 Function block...........................................................................777 Input signals..............................................................................777 Technical data...........................................................................777 Disturbance recorder (RDRE)........................................................777 Introduction................................................................................777 Principle of operation.................................................................778 Memory and storage............................................................778 IEC 60870-5-103..................................................................780 Function block...........................................................................780 Input and output signals............................................................780 Setting parameters....................................................................780 Technical data...........................................................................780
Section 15 Metering.......................................................................783
Pulse counter logic (GGIO)............................................................783 Introduction................................................................................783 Principle of operation.................................................................783 Function block...........................................................................785 Input and output signals............................................................785 Setting parameters....................................................................786 Technical data...........................................................................786 Energy metering and demand handling (MMTR)...........................787 Introduction................................................................................787 Principle of operation.................................................................787 Function block...........................................................................788 Input and output signals............................................................788 Setting parameters....................................................................789
Section 16 Station communication.................................................791

Overview.........................................................................................791 IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol.........................................791 Introduction................................................................................791 Generic single point function block (SPGGIO)..........................792 Introduction...........................................................................792 Principle of operation............................................................792 Function block......................................................................792
RED 670
21
Table of contents
Input and output signals.......................................................793 Setting parameters...............................................................794 Generic measured values function block (MVGGIO)................794 Introduction...........................................................................794 Principle of operation............................................................794 Function block......................................................................795 Input and output signals.......................................................795 Setting parameters...............................................................795 Setting parameters....................................................................796 Technical data...........................................................................796 LON communication protocol.........................................................796 Introduction................................................................................796 Principle of operation.................................................................797 Setting parameters....................................................................814 Technical data...........................................................................815 SPA communication protocol.........................................................815 Introduction................................................................................815 Principle of operation.................................................................815 Communication ports...........................................................823 Design.......................................................................................824 Setting parameters....................................................................824 Technical data...........................................................................825 IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol.....................................825 Introduction................................................................................825 Principle of operation.................................................................825 General.................................................................................825 Communication ports...........................................................835 Function block...........................................................................835 Input and output signals............................................................837 Setting parameters....................................................................842 Technical data...........................................................................846 Automation bits (AUBI)...................................................................846 Introduction................................................................................846 Principle of operation.................................................................846 Function block...........................................................................847 Input and output signals............................................................847 Setting parameters....................................................................848 Single command, 16 signals (CD)..................................................863 Introduction................................................................................863 Principle of operation.................................................................864 Function block...........................................................................864 Input and output signals............................................................864 Setting parameters....................................................................865
22
RED 670
Table of contents
Multiple command (CM) and Multiple transmit (MT).......................865 Introduction................................................................................865 Principle of operation.................................................................866 Design.......................................................................................866 General.................................................................................866 Function block...........................................................................866 Input and output signals............................................................867 Setting parameters....................................................................869
Section 17 Remote communication................................................871

Binary signal transfer to remote end...............................................871 Introduction................................................................................871 Principle of operation.................................................................872 Function block...........................................................................872 Input and output signals............................................................873 Setting parameters....................................................................875
Section 18 Hardware......................................................................879
Overview.........................................................................................879 Variants of case- and HMI display size.....................................879 Case from the rear side.............................................................881 Hardware modules.........................................................................886 Overview....................................................................................886 Combined backplane module (CBM).........................................887 Introduction...........................................................................887 Functionality.........................................................................887 Design..................................................................................888 Universal backplane module (UBM)..........................................890 Introduction...........................................................................890 Functionality.........................................................................890 Design..................................................................................890 Power supply module (PSM).....................................................892 Introduction...........................................................................892 Design..................................................................................892 Technical data......................................................................893 Numeric processing module (NUM)..........................................893 Introduction...........................................................................893 Functionality.........................................................................894 Block diagram.......................................................................895 Local human-machine interface (LHMI)....................................895 Transformer input module (TRM)..............................................895 Introduction...........................................................................895 Design..................................................................................896 Technical data......................................................................896
RED 670
23
Table of contents
Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization (ADM) .......................................................................................897 Introduction...........................................................................897 Design..................................................................................897 Binary input module (BIM).........................................................899 Introduction...........................................................................899 Design..................................................................................899 Technical data......................................................................902 Binary output modules (BOM)...................................................903 Introduction...........................................................................903 Design..................................................................................903 Technical data......................................................................905 Static binary output module (SOM)...........................................906 Introduction...........................................................................906 Design..................................................................................906 Technical data......................................................................908 Binary input/output module (IOM)..............................................909 Introduction...........................................................................909 Design..................................................................................909 Technical data......................................................................911 Line data communication module (LDCM)................................912 Introduction...........................................................................912 Design..................................................................................913 Technical data......................................................................913 Galvanic X.21 line data communication (X.21-LDCM)..............914 Introduction...........................................................................914 Design..................................................................................914 Functionality.........................................................................916 Technical data......................................................................917 Serial SPA/IEC 60870-5-103 and LON communication module (SLM) ...........................................................................917 Introduction...........................................................................917 Design..................................................................................917 Technical data......................................................................918 Galvanic RS485 communication module...................................919 Introduction...........................................................................919 Design..................................................................................919 Technical data......................................................................920 Optical ethernet module (OEM).................................................921 Introduction...........................................................................921 Functionality.........................................................................921 Design..................................................................................921 Technical data......................................................................922 mA input module (MIM).............................................................922
24
RED 670
Table of contents
Introduction...........................................................................922 Design..................................................................................922 Technical data......................................................................923 GPS time synchronization module (GSM).................................924 Introduction...........................................................................924 Design..................................................................................924 Technical data......................................................................926 GPS antenna.............................................................................926 Introduction...........................................................................926 Design..................................................................................926 Technical data......................................................................928 IRIG-B time synchronization module IRIG-B.............................929 Introduction...........................................................................929 Design..................................................................................929 Technical data......................................................................930 Dimensions.....................................................................................930 Case without rear cover.............................................................930 Case with rear cover..................................................................931 Flush mounting dimensions.......................................................933 Side-by-side flush mounting dimensions...................................934 Wall mounting dimensions.........................................................935 External resistor unit for high impedance differential protection...................................................................................935 Mounting alternatives.....................................................................936 Flush mounting..........................................................................936 Overview..............................................................................936 Mounting procedure for flush mounting................................937 19 panel rack mounting............................................................938 Overview..............................................................................938 Mounting procedure for 19 panel rack mounting.................939 Wall mounting............................................................................939 Overview..............................................................................939 Mounting procedure for wall mounting.................................940 How to reach the rear side of the IED..................................940 Side-by-side 19 rack mounting.................................................941 Overview..............................................................................941 Mounting procedure for side-by-side rack mounting............942 IED 670 mounted with a RHGS6 case.................................942 Side-by-side flush mounting......................................................943 Overview..............................................................................943 Mounting procedure for side-by-side flush mounting...........944 Technical data................................................................................944 Enclosure...................................................................................944
RED 670
25
Table of contents
Connection system....................................................................945 Influencing factors.....................................................................945 Type tests according to standard..............................................946
Section 19 Labels...........................................................................949
Different labels................................................................................949
Section 20 Connection diagrams...................................................953 Section 21 Time inverse characteristics.........................................969

Application......................................................................................969 Principle of operation......................................................................971 Mode of operation......................................................................971 Inverse characteristics....................................................................977
Section 22 Glossary.......................................................................991
Glossary.........................................................................................991
26
RED 670
Section 1 Introduction
Section 1
Introduction
About this chapter
This chapter explains concepts and conventions used in this manual and provides information necessary to understand the contents of the manual.
1.1
1.1.1
Introduction to the technical reference manual

About the complete set of manuals for an IED
The users manual (UM) is a complete set of five different manuals:
Application manual Technical reference manual Installation and commissioning manual Operators manual Engineering guide
en06000097.vsd
The Application Manual (AM) contains application descriptions, setting guidelines and setting parameters sorted per function. The application manual should be used to find out when and for what purpose a typical protection function could be used. The manual should also be used when calculating settings. The Technical Reference Manual (TRM) contains application and functionality descriptions and it lists function blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and technical data sorted per function. The technical reference manual should be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and during normal service. The Installation and Commissioning Manual (ICM) contains instructions on how to install and commission the protection IED. The manual can also be used as a reference during periodic testing. The manual covers procedures for mechanical and electrical installation, energizing and checking of external circuitry, setting and configuration as well as verifying settings and performing directional tests. The chapters are organized in the chronological order (indicated by chapter/section numbers) in which the protection IED should be installed and commissioned. The Operators Manual (OM) contains instructions on how to operate the protection IED during normal service once it has been commissioned. The operators manual
RED 670
27
can be used to find out how to handle disturbances or how to view calculated and measured network data in order to determine the cause of a fault. The IED 670 Engineering guide (EG) contains instructions on how to engineer the IED 670 products. The manual guides to use the different tool components for IED 670 engineering. It also guides how to handle the tool component available to read disturbance files from the IEDs on the basis of the IEC 61850 definitions. The third part is an introduction about the diagnostic tool components available for IED 670 products and the PCM 600 tool. The IEC 61850 Station Engineering guide contains descriptions of IEC 61850 station engineering and process signal routing. The manual presents the PCM 600 and CCT tool used for station engineering. It describes the IEC 61850 attribute editor and how to set up projects and communication.
1.1.2
About the technical reference manual

The technical reference manual contains the following chapters: The chapter Local human-machine interface describes the control panel on the IED. Display characteristics, control keys and various local human-machine interface features are explained. The chapter Basic IED functions presents functions that are included in all IEDs regardless of the type of protection they are designed for. These are functions like Time synchronization, Self supervision with event list, Test mode and other functions of a general nature. The chapter Differential protection describes the various differential functions as well as restricted earth fault protection. The chapter Distance protection describes the functions for distance zones with their quadrilateral characteristics, phase selection with load encroachment, power swing detection and similar. The chapter Current protection describes functions such as overcurrent protection, breaker failure protection and pole discordance. The chapter Voltage protection describes functions like undervoltage and overvoltage protection as well as residual overvoltage protection. The chapter Frequency protection describes functions for overfrequency, underfrequency and rate of change of frequency. The chapter Multipurpose protection describes the general protection function for current and voltage. The chapter Secondary system supervision includes descriptions of functions like current based Current circuit supervision and Fuse failure supervision. The chapter Control describes the control functions. These are functions like the Synchronization and energizing check as well as several others which are product specific. The chapter Scheme communication describes among others functions related to current reversal and weak end infeed logic. The chapter Logic describes trip logic and related functions. The chapter Monitoring describes measurement related functions used to provide data regarding relevant quantities, events, faults and the like. RED 670
28
The chapter Metering describes primarily Pulse counter logic. The chapter Station communication describes Ethernet based communication in general including the use of IEC61850, and horizontal communication via GOOSE. The chapter Remote communication describes binary and analog signal transfer, and the associated hardware. The chapter Hardware provides descriptions of the IED and its components. The chapter Connection diagrams provides terminal wiring diagrams and information regarding connections to and from the IED. The chapter Time inverse characteristics describes and explains inverse time delay, inverse time curves and their effects. The chapter Glossary is a list of terms, acronyms and abbreviations used in ABB technical documentation.
1.1.3
Design of the Technical reference manual (TRM)

The description of each IED related function follows the same structure (where applicable). The different sections are outlined below.
1.1.3.1
Introduction
Outlines the implementation of a particular protection function.
1.1.3.2
Principle of operation
Describes how the function works, presents a general background to algorithms and measurement techniques. Logic diagrams are used to illustrate functionality.
Logic diagrams
Logic diagrams describe the signal logic inside the function block and are bordered by dashed lines. Signal names Input and output logic signals consist of two groups of letters separated by two dashes. The first group consists of up to four letters and presents the abbreviated name for the corresponding function. The second group presents the functionality of the particular signal. According to this explanation, the meaning of the signal BLKTR in figure 4 is as follows: BLKTR informs the user that the signal will BLOCK the TRIP command from the under-voltage function, when its value is a logical one (1).
Input signals are always on the left hand side, and output signals on the right hand side. Settings are not displayed.
RED 670
29
Input and output signals In a logic diagram, input and output signal paths are shown as a lines that touch the outer border of the diagram. Input and output signals can be configured using the CAP531 tool. They can be connected to the inputs and outputs of other functions and to binary inputs and outputs. Examples of input signals are BLKTR, BLOCK and VTSU. Examples output signals are TRIP, START, STL1, STL2, STL3. Setting parameters Signals in frames with a shaded area on their right hand side represent setting parameter signals. These parameters can only be set via the PST or LHMI. Their values are high (1) only when the corresponding setting parameter is set to the symbolic value specified within the frame. Example is the signal Block TUV=Yes. Their logical values correspond automatically to the selected setting value. Internal signals Internal signals are illustrated graphically and end approximately. 2 mm from the frame edge. If an internal signal path cannot be drawn with a continuous line, the suffix -int is added to the signal name to indicate where the signal starts and continues, see figure 3.
BLKTR TEST TEST Block TUV=Yes BLOCK VTSU BLOCK-int. STUL1N BLOCK-int. STUL2N BLOCK-int. STUL3N & & >1 & t & TRIP START STL1 STL2 STL3 & >1
BLOCK-int.
xx04000375.vsd
Figure 1:
Logic diagram example with -int signals
30
RED 670
External signals Signal paths that extend beyond the logic diagram and continue in another diagram have the suffix -cont., see figure 2 and figure 3.
STZMPP-cont.
STCND & & & & & &
>1
STNDL1L2-cont. STNDL2L3-cont. STNDL3L1-cont. STNDL1N-cont. STNDL2N-cont. STNDL3N-cont. >1 STNDPE-cont.
1L1L2 1L2L3 1L3L1 1L1N 1L2N 1L3N
>1 1--VTSZ 1--BLOCK >1 & 1--STND BLK-cont.

xx04000376.vsd
Figure 2:
Logic diagram example with an outgoing -cont signal
STNDL1N-cont. STNDL2N-cont. STNDL3N-cont. STNDL1L2-cont. STNDL2L3-cont. STNDL3L1-cont.
>1 & >1 & & & 15 ms t 15 ms t 15 ms t 15 ms t STL1 STL2 STL3 START
>1 >1
BLK-cont.
xx04000377.vsd
Figure 3:
Logic diagram example with an incoming -cont signal
RED 670
31
1.1.3.3 Input and output signals
Input and output signals are presented in two separate tables. Each table consists of two columns. The first column contains the name of the signal and the second column contains the description of the signal.
1.1.3.4
Function block
Each function block is illustrated graphically. Input signals are always on the left hand side, and output signals on the right hand side. Settings are not displayed. Special kinds of settings are sometimes available. These are supposed to be connected to constants in the configuration scheme, and are therefore depicted as inputs. Such signals will be found in the signal list but described in the settings table.
CAP531 Name Inputs
U3P BLOCK BLKTR1 BLKST1 BLKTR2 BLKST2 TUV1PH2PUVM TRIP TR1 TR1L1 TR1L2 TR1L3 TR2 TR2L1 TR2L2 TR2L3 START ST1 ST1L1 ST1L2 ST1L3 ST2 ST2L1 ST2L2 ST2L3 en05000330.vsd
IEC 61850 - 8 -1 Logical Node
Outputs
Diagram Number
Figure 4:
Example of a function block
1.1.3.5
Setting parameters
These are presented in tables and include all parameters associated with the function in question.
1.1.3.6
Technical data
The technical data section provides specific technical information about the function or hardware described.
32
RED 670
Section 1 Introduction 1.1.4 Intended audience

General
This manual addresses system engineers, installation and commissioning personnel, who use technical data during engineering, installation and commissioning, and in normal service.
Requirements
The system engineer must have a thorough knowledge of protection systems, protection equipment, protection functions and the configured functional logics in the protective devices. The installation and commissioning personnel must have a basic knowledge in the handling electronic equipment.
1.1.5
Related documents
Documents related to RED 670 Operators manual Installation and comminssioning manual Technical reference manual Application manual Buyers guide Connection diagram, Single breaker arr. Three phase tripping arr. Connection diagram, Single breaker arr. Single phase tripping arr. Connection diagram, Multi breaker arr. Three phase tripping arr. Connection diagram, Multi breaker arr. Single phase tripping arr. Configuration diagram A, Single breaker with single or double busbars Configuration diagram B, Single breakers with single or double busbars Configuration diagram C, Multi breakers such as 1 1/2or ring busbar arr. Configuration diagram D, Multi breakers such as 1 1/2 or ring busbar arr. Setting example 1, 230 kV Short cable line with 1 1/2 CB arr. Identity number 1MRK 505 184-UEN 1MRK 505 185-UEN 1MRK 505 183-UEN 1MRK 505 186-UEN 1MRK 505 188-BEN 1MRK 002 801-BA 1MRK 002 801-CA 1MRK 002 801-DA 1MRK 002 801-EA 1MRK 004 500-82 1MRK 004 500-83 1MRK 004 500-84 1MRK 004 500-85 1MRK 505 175-WEN
Connection and Installation components Test system, COMBITEST Accessories for IED 670 Getting started guide IED 670 SPA and LON signal list for IED 670, ver. 1.1 IEC 61850 Data objects list for IED 670, ver. 1.1 Generic IEC 61850 IED Connectivity package Protection and Control IED Manager PCM 600 Installation sheet Engineering guide IED 670 products
1MRK 013 003-BEN 1MRK 512 001-BEN 1MRK 514 012-BEN 1MRK 500 080-UEN 1MRK 500 083-WEN 1MRK 500 084-WEN 1KHA001027-UEN 1MRS755552 1MRK 511 179-UEN
Latest versions of the described documentation can be found on www.abb.com/substationautomation
RED 670
33
Section 1 Introduction 1.1.6 Revision notes

Revision B Description No functionality added. Minor changes made in content due to problem reports.
34
RED 670
Section 2 Local human-machine interface
Section 2
Local human-machine interface

About this chapter
This chapter describes the structure and use of the Local human machine interface (LHMI) or in other words, the control panel on the IED.
2.1
Human machine interface

The local human machine interface is available in a small, and a medium sized model. The principle difference between the two is the size of the LCD. The small size LCD can display seven line of text and the medium size LCD can display the single line diagram with up to 15 objects on each page. Up to 12 SLD pages can be defined, depending on the product capability. The local human machine interface is equipped with an LCD that can display the single line diagram with up to 15 objects. The local human-machine interface is simple and easy to understand the whole front plate is divided into zones, each of them with a well-defined functionality: Status indication LEDs Alarm indication LEDs which consists of 15 LEDs (6 red and 9 yellow) with user printable label. All LEDs are configurable from the PCM 600 tool Liquid crystal display (LCD) Keypad with push buttons for control and navigation purposes, switch for selection between local and remote control and reset An isolated RJ45 communication port
RED 670
35
Figure 5:
Small graphic HMI
Figure 6:
Medium graphic HMI, 15 controllable objects
36
RED 670
2.2
2.2.1
Small size graphic HMI

Introduction
The small sized HMI is available for 1/2, 3/4 and 1/1 x 19 case. The LCD on the small HMI measures 32 x 90 mm and displays 7 lines with up to 40 characters per line. The first line displays the product name and the last line displays date and time. The remaining 5 lines are dynamic. This LCD has no graphic display potential.
2.2.2
Design
The LHMI is identical for both the 1/2, 3/4 and 1/1 cases. The different parts of the small LHMI is shown in figure 7
1 2 3
en05000055.eps
Figure 7:
Small graphic HMI
1 Status indication LEDs 2 LCD
RED 670
37
3 Indication LEDs 4 Label 5 Local/Remote LEDs 6 RJ 45 port 7 Communication indication LED 8 Keypad
2.3
2.3.1
Medium size graphic HMI

Introduction
The 1/2, 3/4 and 1/1 x 19 cases can be equipped with the medium size LCD. This is a fully graphical monochrome LCD which measures 120 x 90 mm. It has 28 lines with up to 40 characters per line. To display the single line diagram, this LCD is required.
2.3.2
Design
The different parts of the medium size LHMI is shown in figure 8The LHMI, exists in an IEC version and in an ANSI version. The difference is on the keypad operation buttons and the yellow LED designation.
38
RED 670
en05000056.eps
Figure 8:
Medium size graphic HMI
1 Status indication LEDs 2 LCD 3 Indication LEDs 4 Label 5 Local/Remote LEDs 6 RJ45 port 7 Communication indication LED 8 Keypad
2.4
Keypad
RED 670
39
The keypad is used to monitor and operate the IED. The keypad has the same look and feel in all IEDs in the IED 670 series. LCD screens and other details may differ but the way the keys function is identical. The keypad is illustrated in figure 9.
Figure 9:
The HMI keypad.
The keys used to operate the IED are described below in table 1.
Table 1:
Key
HMI keys on the front of the IED

Function This key closes (energizes) a breaker or disconnector.
This key opens a breaker or disconnector.
The help key brings up two submenus. Key operation and IED information.
This key is used to clear entries, It cancels commands and edits.
Opens the main menu, and used to move to the default screen.
The Local/Remote key is used to set the IED in local or remote control mode.
This key opens the reset screen.
The E key starts editing mode and confirms setting changes when in editing mode.
The right arrow key navigates forward between screens and moves right in editing mode. Table continued on next page
40
RED 670

Key Function The left arrow key navigates backwards between screens and moves left in editing mode.
The up arrow key is used to move up in the single line diagram and in menu tree.
The down arrow key is used to move down in the single line diagram and in menu tree.
2.5
2.5.1
LED
Introduction
The LED module is a unidirectional means of communicating. This means that events may occur that activate a LED in order to draw the operators attention to something that has occurred and needs some sort of action.
2.5.2
Status indication LEDs

There are three LEDs above the LCD. The information they communicate is described in the table below.
LED Indication Green: Steady Flashing Dark Yellow: Steady Flashing Red: Steady Trip command issued Dist. rep. triggered Terminal in test mode In service Internal failure No power supply Information
2.5.3
Indication LEDs
The LED indication module comprising 15 LEDs is standard in IED 670s. Its main purpose is to present an immediate visual information for protection indications or alarm signals. There are alarm indication LEDs and hardware associated LEDs on the right hand side of the front panel. The alarm LEDs are found to the right of the LCD screen. They can show steady or flashing light. Flashing would normally indicate an alarm.
RED 670
41
The alarm LEDs are configurable using the PCM 600 tool. This is because they are dependent on the binary input logic and can therefore not be configured locally on the HMI. Some typical alarm examples follow: Bay controller failure CB close blocked Interlocking bypassed Differential protection trip SF6 Gas refill Position error CB spring charge alarm Oil temperature alarm Thermal overload trip
The RJ45 port has a yellow LED indicating that communication has been established between the IED and a computer. The Local/Remote key on the front panel has two LEDs indicating whether local or remote control of the IED is active.
2.6
2.6.1
LHMI related functions

Introduction
The adaptation of the LHMI to the application and user preferences is made with: function block LHMI (LocalHMI) function block HLED (LEDMonitor) setting parameters
2.6.2
General setting parameters

Table 2:
Parameter Language DisplayTimeout AutoRepeat
Basic general settings for the localHMI (LHM1-) function

Range English OptionalLanguage 10 - 120 Off On -10 - 20 Step 10 Default English 60 On Unit Min Description Local HMI language Local HMI display timeout Activation of autorepeat (On) or not (Off) Contrast level for display
ContrastLevel
Table continued on next page
42
RED 670

Parameter DefaultScreen EvListSrtOrder SymbolFont Range 0-0 Latest on top Oldest on top IEC ANSI Step 1 Default 0 Latest on top IEC Unit Description Default screen Sort order of event list Symbol font for Single Line Diagram
2.6.3
2.6.3.1
Status indication LEDs

Design
The function block LHMI (LocalHMI) controls and supplies information about the status of the status indication LEDs. The input and output signals of LHMI are configured with the PCM 600 tool. The function block can be used if any of the signals are required in a configuration logic. See section "Status indication LEDs" for information about the LEDs.
2.6.3.2
Function block
LHMILocalHMI CLRLEDS HMI-ON RED-S YELLOW-S YELLOW-F CLRPULSE LEDSCLRD en05000773.vsd
Figure 10:
LHMI function block
2.6.3.3
Input and output signals

Table 3:
Signal CLRLEDS
Input signals for the LocalHMI (LHMI-) function block

Description Input to clear the LCD-HMI LEDs
Table 4:
Signal HMI-ON RED-S YELLOW-S
Output signals for the LocalHMI (LHMI-) function block

Description Backlight of the LCD display is active Red LED on the LCD-HMI is steady Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is steady
RED 670
43

Signal YELLOW-F CLRPULSE LEDSCLRD Description Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is flashing A pulse is provided when the LEDs on the LCD-HMI are cleared Active when the LEDs on the LCD-HMI are not active
2.6.4
2.6.4.1
Indication LEDs
Introduction
The function block HLED (LEDMonitor) controls and supplies information about the status of the indication LEDs. The input and output signals of HLED are configured with the PCM 600 tool. The input signal for each LED is selected individually with the PCM 600 Signal Matrix Tool (SMT). LEDs (number 16) for trip indications are red and LEDs (number 715) for start indications are yellow. Each indication LED on the LHMI can be set individually to operate in six different sequences; two as follow type and four as latch type. Two of the latching sequence types are intended to be used as a protection indication system, either in collecting or restarting mode, with reset functionality. The other two are intended to be used as signalling system in collecting (coll) mode with an acknowledgment functionality. The light from the LEDs can be steady (-S) or flickering (-F). For details, refer to Technical reference manual.
2.6.4.2
Design
The information on the LEDs is stored at loss of the auxiliary power to the IED in some of the modes of the HLED. The latest LED picture appears immediately after the IED is successfully restarted.
Operating modes
Collecting mode LEDs which are used in collecting mode of operation are accumulated continuously until the unit is acknowledged manually. This mode is suitable when the LEDs are used as a simplified alarm system.
Re-starting mode In the re-starting mode of operation each new start resets all previous active LEDs and activates only those which appear during one disturbance. Only LEDs defined for re-starting mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S) will initiate a reset and a restart at a new disturbance. A
44
RED 670
disturbance is defined to end a settable time after the reset of the activated input signals or when the maximum time limit has elapsed.
Acknowledgment/reset
From local HMI The active indications can be acknowledged/reset manually. Manual acknowledgment and manual reset have the same meaning and is a common signal for all the operating sequences and LEDs. The function is positive edge triggered, not level triggered. The acknowledgment/reset is performed via the Reset-button and menus on the LHMI. For details, refer to the Operators manual.
From function input The active indications can also be acknowledged/reset from an input, RESET, to the function. This input can for example be configured to a binary input operated from an external push button. The function is positive edge triggered, not level triggered. This means that even if the button is continuously pressed, the acknowledgment/reset only affects indications active at the moment when the button is first pressed.
Automatic reset The automatic reset can only be performed for indications defined for restarting mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S). When the automatic reset of the LEDs has been performed, still persisting indications will be indicated with a steady light.
Operating sequences
The sequences can be of type Follow or Latched. For the Follow type the LED follow the input signal completely. For the Latched type each LED latches to the corresponding input signal until it is reset. The figures below show the function of available sequences selectable for each LED separately. For sequence 1 and 2 (Follow type), the acknowledgment/reset function is not applicable. Sequence 3 and 4 (Latched type with acknowledgement) are only working in collecting mode. Sequence 5 is working according to Latched type and collecting mode while sequence 6 is working according to Latched type and restarting mode. The letters S and F in the sequence names have the meaning S = Steady and F = Flash. At the activation of the input signal, the indication operates according to the selected sequence diagrams below. In the sequence diagrams the LEDs have the characteristics shown in figure 11.
RED 670
45
= No indication
= Steady light
= Flash
en05000506.vsd
Figure 11:
Symbols used in the sequence diagrams
Sequence 1 (Follow-S) This sequence follows all the time, with a steady light, the corresponding input signals. It does not react on acknowledgment or reset. Every LED is independent of the other LEDs in its operation.
Activating signal
LED
en01000228.vsd
Figure 12:
Operating sequence 1 (Follow-S)
Sequence 2 (Follow-F) This sequence is the same as sequence 1, Follow-S, but the LEDs are flashing instead of showing steady light. Sequence 3 (LatchedAck-F-S) This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. Every LED is independent of the other LEDs in its operation. At the activation of the input signal, the indication starts flashing. After acknowledgment the indication disappears if the signal is not present any more. If the signal is still present after acknowledgment it gets a steady light.
Activating signal
LED
Acknow.
en01000231.vsd
Figure 13:
Operating sequence 3 (LatchedAck-F-S)
Sequence 4 (LatchedAck-S-F) This sequence has the same functionality as sequence 3, but steady and flashing light have been alternated.
46
RED 670

Sequence 5 (LatchedColl-S) This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. At the activation of the input signal, the indication will light up with a steady light. The difference to sequence 3 and 4 is that indications that are still activated will not be affected by the reset i.e. immediately after the positive edge of the reset has been executed a new reading and storing of active signals is performed. Every LED is independent of the other LEDs in its operation.
Activating signal
LED
Reset
en01000235.vsd
Figure 14:
Operating sequence 5 (LatchedColl-S)
Sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S) In this mode all activated LEDs, which are set to sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), are automatically reset at a new disturbance when activating any input signal for other LEDs set to sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S). Also in this case indications that are still activated will not be affected by manual reset, i.e. immediately after the positive edge of that the manual reset has been executed a new reading and storing of active signals is performed. LEDs set for sequence 6 are completely independent in its operation of LEDs set for other sequences. Definition of a disturbance A disturbance is defined to last from the first LED set as LatchedReset-S is activated until a settable time, tRestart, has elapsed after that all activating signals for the LEDs set as LatchedReset-S have reset. However if all activating signals have reset and some signal again becomes active before tRestart has elapsed, the tRestart timer does not restart the timing sequence. A new disturbance start will be issued first when all signals have reset after tRestart has elapsed. A diagram of this functionality is shown in figure 15.
RED 670
47
From disturbance length control per LED set to sequence 6
New disturbance
&
tRestart t
& 1 &
en01000237.vsd
Figure 15:
Activation of new disturbance
In order not to have a lock-up of the indications in the case of a persisting signal each LED is provided with a timer, tMax, after which time the influence on the definition of a disturbance of that specific LED is inhibited. This functionality is shown i diagram in figure 16.
Activating signal To LED
AND tMax t
To disturbance length control
en05000507.vsd
Figure 16:
Length control of activating signals
Timing diagram for sequence 6 Figure 17 shows the timing diagram for two indications within one disturbance.
48
RED 670
Disturbance t Restart Activating signal 1 Activating signal 2
LED 1
LED 2 Automatic reset Manual reset
en01000239.vsd
Figure 17:
Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within same disturbance
Figure 18 shows the timing diagram for a new indication after tRestart time has elapsed.
Disturbance t Restart Activating signal 1 Activating signal 2 Disturbance t Restart
LED 1
en01000240.vsd
Figure 18:
Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two different disturbances
RED 670
49
Figure 19 shows the timing diagram when a new indication appears after the first one has reset but before tRestart has elapsed.
LED 1

en01000241.vsd
Figure 19:
Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within same disturbance but with reset of activating signal between
Figure 20 shows the timing diagram for manual reset.

LED 1

en01000242.vsd
Figure 20:
Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), manual reset
50
RED 670

2.6.4.3 Function block
HLEDLEDMonitor BLOCK RESET LEDTEST NEWIND ACK
en05000508.vsd
Figure 21:
HLED function block
2.6.4.4

Table 5:
Signal BLOCK RESET LEDTEST
Input signals for the LEDMonitor (HLED-) function block

Description Input to block the operation of the LED-unit Input to acknowledge/reset the indications of the LED-unit Input for external LED test
Table 6:
Signal NEWIND ACK
Output signals for the LEDMonitor (HLED-) function block

Description A new signal on any of the indication inputs occurs A pulse is provided when the LEDs are acknowledged
2.6.4.5
Setting parameters
Table 7:
Parameter Operation tRestart tMax
Basic general settings for the LEDMonitor (HLED-) function

Range Off On 0.0 - 100.0 0.0 - 100.0 Step 0.1 0.1 Default Off 0.0 0.0 Unit s s Description Operation mode for the LED function Defines the disturbance length Maximum time for the definition of a disturbance Sequence type for LED 1
SeqTypeLED1
Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
RED 670
51

Parameter SeqTypeLED2 Range Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Step Default Follow-S Unit Description Sequence type for LED 2
SeqTypeLED3
Follow-S
Sequence type for LED 3
SeqTypeLED4
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED5
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED6
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED7
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED8
Follow-S
sequence type for LED 8
SeqTypeLED9
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED10
Follow-S
52
RED 670

Parameter SeqTypeLED11 Range Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Step Default Follow-S Unit Description Sequence type for LED 11
SeqTypeLED12
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED13
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED14
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED15
Follow-S
RED 670
53
54
Section 3 Basic IED functions
Section 3
Basic IED functions

About this chapter
This chapter presents functions that are basic to all REx670 IEDs. Typical functions in this category are time synchronization, self supervision and test mode.
3.1
3.1.1
Analog inputs
Introduction
In order to get correct measurement results as well as correct protection operations the analog input channels must be configured and properly set. For power measuring and all directional and differential functions the directions of the input currents must be properly defined. The measuring and protection algorithms in IED 670 are using primary system quantities and the set values are done in primary quantities as well. Therefore it is extremely important to properly set the data about the connected current and voltage transformers. In order to make Service Values reading easier it is possible to define a reference PhaseAngleRef. Then this analog channels phase angle will be always fixed to zero degree and all other angle information will be shown in relation to this analog input. During testing and commissioning of the IED the reference channel can be freely change in order to facilitate testing and service values reading. VT inputs are sometimes not available depending on ordered type of Transformer Input Module (TRM).
3.1.2
The direction of a current to the IED is depending on the connection of the CT. The main CTs are typically star connected and can be connected with the star point to the object or from the object. This information must be set to the IED. The convention of the directionality is defined as follows: A positive value of current, power etc. means that the quantity has the direction into the object and a negative value means direction out from the object. For directional functions the direction into the object is defined as Forward and the direction out from the object is defined as Reverse, see figure 22
RED 670
55
Definition of direction for directional functions Reverse Forward
Definition of direction for directional functions Forward Reverse
Protected Object Line, transformer, etc

e.g. P, Q, I Measured quantity is positive when flowing towards the object Set parameter CTStarPoint Correct Setting is "ToObject" e.g. P, Q, I Measured quantity is positive when flowing towards the object Set parameter CTStarPoint Correct Setting is "FromObject" en05000456.vsd
Figure 22:
Internal convention of the directionality in IED 670
With correct setting of the primary CT direction, CTStarPoint set to FromObject or ToObject, a positive quantities always flowing towards the object and a direction defined as Forward always is looking towards the object. To be able to use primary system quantities for settings and calculation in the IED the ratios of the main CTs and VTs must be known. This information is given to the IED by setting of the rated secondary and primary currents and voltages of the CTs and VTs. The CT and VT ratio and the name on respective channel is done under General settings/Analog module in the parameter settings tool PST.
3.1.3
Function block
The function blocks are not represented in the configuration tool. The signals appear only in the SMT tool when a TRM is included in the configuration with the function selector tool. In the SMT tool they can be mapped to the desired virtual input (SMAI) of the IED670 and used internally in the configuration.
3.1.4
Setting parameters
Dependent on ordered IED 670 type.
Table 8:
Parameter PhaseAngleRef
General settings for the AISERVAL (AISV-) function

Range 1 - 24 Step 1 Default 1 Unit Ch Description Reference channel for phase angle presentation
56
RED 670
Table 9:
Parameter CTStarPoint1
Basic general settings for the ANALOGIN12I (TA40-) function

Range FromObject ToObject Step Default ToObject Unit Description ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current
CTsec1 CTprim1 CTStarPoint2
1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
CTsec6 CTprim6
1 - 10 1 - 99999
1 1
1 3000
A A
RED 670
57

Parameter CTStarPoint7 Range FromObject ToObject Step Default ToObject Unit Description ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
CTsec12 CTprim12
1 - 10 1 - 99999
1 1
1 3000
A A
58
RED 670
Table 10:
Basic general settings for the ANALOGIN9I3U (TC40-) function

Range FromObject ToObject Step Default ToObject Unit Description ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
CTsec6 CTprim6
1 - 10 1 - 99999
1 1
1 3000
A A
RED 670
59

Parameter CTStarPoint7 Range FromObject ToObject Step Default ToObject Unit Description ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
CTsec9 CTprim9 VTsec10 VTprim10 VTsec11 VTprim11 VTsec12 VTprim12
1 - 10 1 - 99999 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00
1 1 0.001 0.05 0.001 0.05 0.001 0.05
1 3000 110.000 400.00 110.000 400.00 110.000 400.00
A A V kV V kV V kV
Table 11:
Basic general settings for the ANALOGIN6I6U (TD40-) function

Range FromObject ToObject Step Default ToObject Unit Description ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current
CTsec1 CTprim1
1 - 10 1 - 99999
1 1
1 3000
A A
60
RED 670

Parameter CTStarPoint2 Range FromObject ToObject Step Default ToObject Unit Description ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
1 1 -
1 3000 ToObject
A A -
CTsec6 CTprim6 VTsec7 VTprim7 VTsec8 VTprim8 VTsec9 VTprim9
1 - 10 1 - 99999 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00
1 1 0.001 0.05 0.001 0.05 0.001 0.05
1 3000 110.000 400.00 110.000 400.00 110.000 400.00
A A V kV V kV V kV
RED 670
61

Parameter VTsec10 VTprim10 VTsec11 VTprim11 VTsec12 VTprim12 Range 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 Step 0.001 0.05 0.001 0.05 0.001 0.05 Default 110.000 400.00 110.000 400.00 110.000 400.00 Unit V kV V kV V kV Description Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage
3.2
Authorization
To safeguard the interests of our customers, both the IED 670 and the tools that are accessing the IED 670 are protected, subject of authorization handling. The concept of authorization, as it is implemented in the IED 670 and the associated tools is based on the following facts: There are two types of points of access to the IED 670: local, through the local HMI remote, through the communication ports
There are different levels (or types) of users that can access or operate different areas of the IED and tools functionality; the pre-defined user types are defined as follows:
Access rights Read only Full access Read only + control Control from LHMI, no bypass All settings Application configuration (including SMT, GDE and CMT) User and password administration for the IED
User type Guest SuperUser SPAGuest SystemOperator ProtectionEngineer DesignEngineer UserAdministrator
The IED users can be created, deleted and edited only with the User Management Tool (UMT) within PCM 600. The user can only LogOn or LogOff on the LHMI of the IED, there are no users, groups or functions that can be defined on the IED LHMI.
62
RED 670
Section 3 Basic IED functions 3.2.1 Authorization handling in the tool

Upon the creation of an IED in the Plant Structure, the User Management Tool is immediately accessible, by right clicking with the mouse on that specific IED name:
Figure 23:
Right-clicking to get the User Management Tool IED Users.
By left-clicking on the IED Users submenu, the tool will open in the right-side panel:
RED 670
63
Figure 24:
User Manager Tool opened in the right-side panel.
By default, the IEDs are delivered so that users are not required to log on to operate the IED. The default user is the SuperUser. Before doing any changes to the User Management in the IED it is recommendable that the administrator uploads the Users and Groups existent in the IED. If situation requires so, one can restore the factory settings, overwriting all existing settings in the User Management Tool database. Even if the administrator empties the tool database, the users previously defined are still in the IED. They cannot be erased by downloading the empty list into the IED (the tool wont download an empty list), so it is strongly recommended that before you create any user you create one that belongs to the SuperUser group. If the administrator marks the check box User must logon to this IED, then the fields under the User Management tab are becoming accessible and one can add, delete and edit users. To add a new user, the administrator will press the button that is marked with a black arrow, see figure 25 on the User subtab:
64
RED 670
Figure 25:
User subtab and creation of a new user.
Upon pressing this button, a window will appear, enabling the administrator to enter details about the user, assign an access password and (after pressing Next and advancing to the next window) assign the user to a group:
Figure 26:
Enter details about the user.
RED 670
65
Figure 27:
Assign the user to a group.
Once the new user is created, it will appear in the list of users. Once in the list, there are several operations that can be performed on the users, shown in figure 28
Figure 28:
No. Description 1 2 3
Operations on users in the users list.
Delete selected user Change password Add another group to the user permissions
The Group subtab is displaying all the pre-defined groups and gives short details of the permissions allowed to the members of a particular group:
66
RED 670
Figure 29:
The Groups subtab.
It also allows the administrator to add another (already created) user to a group, in the same way it could assign one more group to an user, on the Users subtab. The Functions subtab is a descriptional area, showing in detail what Read/Write permissions has each user group, in respect to various tools and components. Finally, after the desired users are created and permissions assigned to them by means of user groups, the whole list must be downloaded in the IED, in the same way as from the other tools:
No. Description 1 2 Upload from IED Download to IED
RED 670
67
Section 3 Basic IED functions 3.2.2 Authorization handling in the IED

At delivery the default user is the superuser. No LogOn is required to operate the IED until a user has been created with the UMT(User Management Tool). See Application manual for more details. Once a user is created and downloaded into the IED, that user can perform a LogOn, introducing the password assigned in the tool. If there is no user created, an attempt to log on will cause the display to show a message box saying: No user defined! If one user leaves the IED without logging off, then after the timeout (set in Settings \General Settings\HMI\Screen\ Display Timeout ) elapses, the IED will return to a Guest state, when only reading is possible. The display time out is set to 60 minutes at delivery. If there are one or more users created with the UMT and downloaded into the IED, then, when a user intentionally attempts a LogOn or when the user attempts to perform an operation that is password protected, the LogOn window will appear The cursor is focused on the User identity field, so upon pressing the E key, one can change the user name, by browsing the list of users, with the up and down arrows. After choosing the right user name, the user must press the E key again. When it comes to password, upon pressing the E key, the following character will show up: $. The user must scroll for every letter in the pasword. After all the letters are introduced (passwords are case sensitive!) choose OK and press E key again. If everything is O.K. at a voluntary LogOn the LHMI returns to the Authorization screen. If the LogOn is OK, when required to change for example a password protected setting, the LHMI returns to the actual setting folder. If the LogOn has failed, then the LogOn window will pop-up again, until either the user makes it right or presses Cancel.
3.3
3.3.1
Self supervision with internal event list

Introduction
The self-supervision function listens and reacts to internal system events, generated by the different built-in self-supervision elements. The internal events are saved in an internal event list.
3.3.2
The self-supervision operates continuously and includes:
68
RED 670
Normal micro-processor watchdog function. Checking of digitized measuring signals. Other alarms, for example hardware and time synchronization.
The self-supervision status can be monitored from the local HMI or a SMS/SCS system. Under the Diagnostics menu in the local HMI the present information from the selfsupervision function can be reviewed. The information can be found under Diagnostics\Internal Events or Diagnostics\IED Status\General. Refer to the Installation and Commissioning manual for a detailed list of supervision signals that can be generated and displayed in the local HMI. A self-supervision summary can be obtained by means of the potential free alarm contact (INTERNAL FAIL) located on the power supply module. The function of this output relay is an OR-function between the INT-FAIL signal see figure 31 and a couple of more severe faults that can occur in the IED, see figure 30
Figure 30:
Hardware self-supervision, potential-free alarm contact.
RED 670
69
Figure 31:
Software self-supervision, IES (IntErrorSign) function block.
Some signals are available from the IES (IntErrorSign) function block. The signals from this function block are sent as events to the station level of the control system. The signals from the IES function block can also be connected to binary outputs for signalization via output relays or they can be used as conditions for other functions if required/desired. Individual error signals from I/O modules can be obtained from respective module in the Signal Matrix Tool. Error signals from time synchronization can be obtained from the time synchronization block TIME.
3.3.2.1
Internal signals
Self supervision provides several status signals, that tells about the condition of the IED. As they provide information about the internal life of the IED, they are also called internal signals. The internal signals can be divided into two groups. One group handles signals that are always present in the IED; standard signals. Another group handles signals that are collected depending on the hardware configuration. The standard signals are listed in table 12. The hardware dependent internal signals are listed in table 13. Explanations of internal signals are listed in table 14.
70
RED 670
Table 12:
Name of signal FAIL WARNING NUMFAIL NUMWARNING RTCERROR
Self-supervision's standard internal signals

Description Internal Fail status Internal Warning status CPU module Fail status CPU module Warning status Real Time Clock status Time Synchronization status Runtime Execution Error status IEC 61850 Error status SW Watchdog Error status LON/Mip Device Error status Runtime Application Error status Settings changed Setting groups changed Fault Tolerant Filesystem status
TIMESYNCHERROR RTEERROR IEC61850ERROR WATCHDOG LMDERROR APPERROR SETCHGD SETGRPCHGD FTFERROR
Table 13:
Card ADxx BIM BOM IOM MIM LDCM
Self-supervision's HW dependent internal signals

Name of signal ADxx BIM-Error BOM-Error IOM-Error MIM-Error LDCM-Error Description Analog In Module Error status Binary In Module Error status Binary Out Module Error status In/Out Module Error status Millampere Input Module Error status Line Differential Communication Error status
Table 14:
Name of signal FAIL
Explanations of internal signals

Reasons for activation This signal will be active if one or more of the following internal signals are active; INT--NUMFAIL, INT--LMDERROR, INT-WATCHDOG, INT--APPERROR, INT--RTEERROR, INT-FTFERROR, or any of the HW dependent signals This signal will be active if one or more of the following internal signals are active; INT--RTCERROR, INT--IEC61850ERROR, INT--TIMESYNCHERROR This signal will be active if one or more of the following internal signals are active; INT--WATCHDOG, INT--APPERROR, INT-RTEERROR, INT--FTFERROR This signal will be active if one or more of the following internal signals are active; INT--RTCERROR, INT--IEC61850ERROR This signal will be active when there is a hardware error with the real time clock.
WARNING
NUMFAIL
NUMWARNING RTCERROR Table continued on next page
RED 670
71

Name of signal TIMESYNCHERROR Reasons for activation This signal will be active when the source of the time synchronization is lost, or when the time system has to make a time reset. This signal will be active if the Runtime Engine failed to do some actions with the application threads. The actions can be loading of settings or parameters for components, changing of setting groups, loading or unloading of application threads. This signal will be active if the IEC61850 stack did not succeed in some actions like reading IEC61850 configuration, startup etc. This signal will be activated when the terminal has been under too heavy load for at least 5 minutes. The operating systems background task is used for the measurements. LON network interface, MIP/DPS, is in an unrecoverable error state. This signal will be active if one or more of the application threads are not in the state that Runtime Engine expects. The states can be CREATED, INITIALIZED, RUNNING, etc. This signal will generate an Internal Event to the Internal Event list if any settings are changed. This signal will generate an Internal Event to the Internal Event list if any setting groups are changed. This signal will be active if both the working file and the backup file are corrupted and can not be recovered.
RTEERROR
IEC61850ERROR WATCHDOG
LMDERROR APPERROR
SETCHGD SETGRPCHGD FTFERROR
3.3.2.2
Run-time model
The analog signals to the A/D converter is internally distributed into two different converters, one with low amplification and one with high amplification, see figure 32.
Figure 32:
Simplified drawing of A/D converter for the 600 platform.
The technique to split the analog input signal into two A/D converters with different amplification makes it possible to supervise the incoming signals under normal 72 Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B RED 670
conditions where the signals from the two converters should be identical. An alarm is given if the signals are out of the boundaries. Another benefit is that it improves the dynamic performance of the A/D conversion. The self-supervision of the A/D conversion is controlled by the ADx_Controller function. One of the tasks for the controller is to perform a validation of the input signals. This is done in a validation filter which has mainly two objects: First is the validation part, i.e. checks that the A/D conversion seems to work as expected. Secondly, the filter chooses which of the two signals that shall be sent to the CPU, i.e. the signal that has the most suitable level, the ADx_LO or the 16 times higherADx_HI. When the signal is within measurable limits on both channels, a direct comparison of the two channels can be performed. If the validation fails, the CPU will be informed and an alarm will be given. The ADx_Controller also supervise other parts of the A/D converter.
3.3.3
Function block
IS--InternalSignal FAIL WARNING CPUFAIL CPUWARN T SYNCERR RT CERR en04000392.vsd
Figure 33:
IS function block
3.3.4
Output signals
Table 15:
Signal FAIL WARNING CPUFAIL CPUWARN TSYNCERR RTCERR
Output signals for the InternalSignal (IS---) function block

Description Internal fail Internal warning CPU fail CPU warning Time synchronization status Real time clock status
3.3.5
Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600)
RED 670
73
Section 3 Basic IED functions 3.3.6 Technical data

Table 16:
Data Recording manner List size
Self supervision with internal event list

Value Continuous, event controlled 1000 events, first in-first out
3.4
3.4.1
Time synchronization
Introduction
Use the time synchronization source selector to select a common source of absolute time for the IED when it is a part of a protection system. This makes comparison of events and disturbance data between all IEDs in a SA system possible.
3.4.2
3.4.2.1
General concepts Time definitions
The error of a clock is the difference between the actual time of the clock, and the time the clock is intended to have. The rate accuracy of a clock is normally called the clock accuracy and means how much the error increases, i.e. how much the clock gains or loses time. A disciplined clock is a clock that knows its own faults and tries to compensate for them, i.e. a trained clock.
Synchronization principle
From a general point of view synchronization can be seen as a hierarchical structure. A module is synchronized from a higher level and provides synchronization to lower levels.
74
RED 670
Syncronization from a higher level
Module
Optional syncronization of modules at a lower level
en05000206.vsd
Figure 34:
Synchronization principle
A module is said to be synchronized when it periodically receives synchronization messages from a higher level. As the level decreases, the accuracy of the synchronization decreases as well. A module can have several potential sources of synchronization, with different maximum errors, which gives the module the possibility to choose the source with the best quality, and to adjust its internal clock after this source. The maximum error of a clock can be defined as a function of: The maximum error of the last used synchronization message The time since the last used synchronization message The rate accuracy of the internal clock in the module.
3.4.2.2
Real Time Clock (RTC) operation

The IED has a built-in Real Time Clock (RTC) with a resolution of one nanosecond. The clock has a built-in calendar that handles leap years through 2098.
RTC at power off
During power off, the time in the IED time is kept by a capacitor backed RTC that will provide 35 ppm accuracy for 5 days. This means that if the power is off, the time in the IED may drift with 3 seconds per day, during 5 days, and after this time the time will be lost completely.
RTC at startup
At IED startup, the internal time is free running. If the RTC is still alive since the last up time, the time in the IED will be quite accurate (may drift 35 ppm), but if the RTC power has been lost during power off (will happen after 5 days), the IED time will start at 1970-01-01. For more information, please refer to section "Time synchronization startup procedure" and section "Example, binary synchronization". The first message that contains full time (as for instance LON, SNTP, GPS etc.) will give an accurate time to the IED. The IED is brought into a safe state and the time is RED 670 Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B 75
Time synchronization startup procedure
thereafter set to the correct value. After the initial setting of the clock, one of three things will happen with each of the coming synchronization messages, configured as fine: If the synchronization message, that is similar to the other messages from its origin has an offset compared to the internal time in the IED, the message is used directly for synchronization, that is for adjusting the internal clock to obtain zero offset at the next coming time message. If the synchronization message has an offset that is large compared to the other messages, a spike-filter in the IED will remove this time-message. If the synchronization message has an offset that is large, and the following message also has a large offset, the spike filter will not act and the offset in the synchronization message will be compared to a threshold that defaults to 100 milliseconds. If the offset is more than the threshold, the IED is brought into a safe state and the clock is thereafter set to the correct time. If the offset is lower than the threshold, the clock will be adjusted with 1000 ppm until the offset is removed. With an adjustment of 1000 ppm, it will take 100 seconds or 1.7 minutes to remove an offset of 100 milliseconds.
Synchronization messages configured as coarse will only be used for initial setting of the time. After this has been done, the messages are checked against the internal time and only an offset of more than 10 seconds will reset the time.
Rate accuracy
In the REx670 IED, the rate accuracy at cold start is about 100 ppm, but if the IED is synchronized for a while, the rate accuracy will be approximately 1 ppm if the surrounding temperature is constant. Normally it will take 20 minutes to reach full accuracy.
Time-out on synchronization sources
All synchronization interfaces has a time-out, and a configured interface must receive time-messages regularly, in order not to give a TSYNCERR. Normally, the time-out is set so that one message can be lost without getting a TSYNCERR, but if more than one message is lost, a TSYNCERR will be given.
3.4.2.3
Synchronization alternatives
Three main alternatives of external time synchronization are available. Either the synchronization message is applied via any of the communication ports of the IED as a telegram message including date and time or as a minute pulse, connected to a binary input, or via GPS. The minute pulse is used to fine tune already existing time in the IEDs.
Synchronization via SNTP
SNTP provides a Ping-Pong method of synchronization. A message is sent from an IED to an SNTP-server, and the SNTP-server returns the message after filling in a reception time and a transmission time. SNTP operates via the normal Ethernet network that connects IEDs together in an IEC61850 network. For SNTP to operate 76 Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B RED 670
properly, there must be a SNTP-server present, preferably in the same station. The SNTP synchronization provides an accuracy that will give 1 ms accuracy for binary inputs. The IED itself can be set as a SNTP-time server. SNTP server requirements The SNTP server to be used shall be connected to the local network, i.e. not more than 4-5 switches/routers away from the IED. The SNTP server shall be dedicated for its task, or at least equipped with at real-time operating system, i.e. not a PC with SNTP server software. The SNTP server shall be stable, i.e. either synchronized from a stable source like GPS, or local i.e. without synchronization. Using a local SNTP server i.e. without synchronization as primary or secondary server in a redundant configuration is not recommended.
Synchronization via Serial Communication Module (SLM)
On the serial buses (both LON and SPA) two types of synchronization messages are sent. Coarse message is sent every minute and comprises complete date and time, i.e. year, month, day, hours, minutes, seconds and milliseconds. Fine message is sent every second and comprises only seconds and milliseconds.
IEC60870-5-103 is not used to synchronize the relay, but instead the offset between the local time in the relay and the time received from 103 is added to all times (in events and so on) sent via 103. In this way the relay acts as it is synchronized from various 103 sessions at the same time. Actually, there is a local time for each 103 session. The SLM module is located on the AD conversion Module (ADM).
Synchronization via Built-in-GPS
The built in GPS clock modules receives and decodes time information from the global positioning system. The modules are located on the GPS time synchronization Module (GSM).
Synchronization via binary input
The IED accepts minute pulses to a binary input. These minute pulses can be generated from e.g. station master clock. If the station master clock is not synchronized from a world wide source, time will be a relative time valid for the substation. Both positive and negative edge on the signal can be accepted. This signal is also considered as a fine signal. The minute pulse is connected to any channel on any Binary Input Module in the IED. The electrical characteristic is thereby the same as for any other binary input. If the objective of synchronization is to achieve a relative time within the substation and if no station master clock with minute pulse output is available, a simple minute pulse generator can be designed and used for synchronization of the IEDs. The minute pulse generator can be created using the logical elements and timers available in the IED.
RED 670
77
The definition of a minute pulse is that it occurs one minute after the last pulse. As only the flanks are detected, the flank of the minute pulse shall occur one minute after the last flank. Binary minute pulses are checked with reference to frequency. Pulse data: Period time (a) should be 60 seconds. Pulse length (b): Minimum pulse length should be >50 ms. Maximum pulse length is optional.
Amplitude (c) - please refer to section "Binary input module (BIM)".
Deviations in the period time larger than 50 ms will cause TSYNCERR.
a b
c
en05000251.vsd
Figure 35:
Binary minute pulses
The default time-out-time for a minute pulse is two minutes, and if no valid minute pulse is received within two minutes a SYNCERR will be given. If contact bounces occurs, only the first pulse will be detected as a minute pulse. The next minute pulse will be registered first 60 s - 50 ms after the last contact bounce. If the minute pulses are perfect, e.g. it is exactly 60 seconds between the pulses, contact bounces might occur 49 ms after the actual minute pulse without effecting the system. If contact bounces occurs more than 50 ms, e.g. it is less than 59950 ms between the two most adjacent positive (or negative) flanks, the minute pulse will not be accepted. Example, binary synchronization A IED is configured to use only binary input, and a valid binary input is applied to a binary input card. The HMI is used to tell the IED the approximate time and the minute pulse is used to synchronize the IED thereafter. The definition of a minute pulse is that it occurs one minute after the previous minute pulse, so the first minute pulse is not used at all. The second minute pulse will probably be rejected due to the spike filter. The third pulse will give the IED a good time and will reset the time so that the
78
RED 670
fourth minute pulse will occur on a minute border. After the first three minutes, the time in the IED will be good if the coarse time is set properly via the HMI or the RTC backup still keeps the time since last up-time. If the minute pulse is removed for instance for an hour, the internal time will drift by maximum the error rate in the internal clock. If the minute pulse is returned, the first pulse automatically is rejected. The second pulse will possibly be rejected due to the spike filter. The third pulse will either synchronize the time, if the time offset is more than 100 ms, or adjust the time, if the time offset is small enough. If the time is set, the application will be brought to a safe state before the time is set. If the time is adjusted, the time will reach its destination within 1.7 minutes. Synchronization via IRIG Synchronization with DNP3.0 The DNP3.0 communication can be the source for the course time synchronization, while the fine time synchronization needs a source with higher accuracy. The IRIG interface to the IED supplies two possible synchronization methods, IRIGB and PPS. IRIG-B IRIG-B is a protocol used only for time synchronization. A clock can provide local time of the year in this format. The B in IRIG-B states that 100 bits per second are transmitted, and the message is sent every second. After IRIG-B there is a number of figures stating if and how the signal is modulated and the information transmitted. To receive IRIG-B there are two connectors in the IRIG module, one galvanic BNC connector and one optical ST connector. IRIG-B 12x messages can be supplied via the galvanic interface, and IRIG-B 00x messages can be supplied via either the galvanic interface or the optical interface, where x (in 00x or 12x) means a figure in the range 1-7. 00 means that a base band is used, and the information can be fed into the IRIG-B module via the BNC contact or an optical fiber. 12 means that a 1 kHz modulation is used. In this case the information must go into the module via the BNC connector. If the x in 00x or 12x is 4, 5, 6 or 7, the time message from IRIG-B contains information of the year. If x is 0, 1, 2 or 3, the information only contains the time within the year, and year information has to come from the tool or HMI. The IRIG Module also takes care of IEEE1344 messages that are sent by many IRIGB clocks, as IRIG-B previously did not have any year information. IEE1344 is compatible with IRIG-B and contains year information and information of time-zone. It is recommended to use IEEE 1344 for supplying time information to the IRIG module. In this case, also send the local time in the messages, as this local time plus the TZ Offset supplied in the message equals UTC at all times. PPS
RED 670
79
An optical PPS signal can be supplied to the optical interface of the IRIG module. The PPS signal is a transition from dark to light, that occurs 1 second +- 2 us after another PPS signal. The allowed jitter of 2 us is settable.
3.4.3
Function block
TIMETIME TSYNCERR RTCERR en05000425.vsd
Figure 36:
TIME function block
3.4.4
Output signals
Table 17:
Signal TSYNCERR RTCERR
Output signals for the TIME (TIME-) function block

Description Time synchronization error Real time clock error
3.4.5
Setting parameters
Path in local HMI: Setting/Time Path in PCM 600: Settings/Time/Synchronization
Table 18:
Parameter CoarseSyncSrc
Basic general settings for the TimeSynch (TSYN-) function

Range Off SPA LON SNTP Off SPA LON BIN GPS GPS+SPA GPS+LON GPS+BIN SNTP GPS+SNTP Off SNTP-Server Slow Fast Step Default Off Unit Description Coarse time synchronization source Fine time synchronization source
FineSyncSource
Off
SyncMaster
Off
Activate IEDas synchronization master Adjust rate for time synchronization
TimeAdjustRate
Fast
80
RED 670
Table 19:
Parameter CoarseSyncSrc
Basic general settings for the TimeSynch (TSYN-) function

Range Off SPA LON SNTP DNP Off SPA LON BIN GPS GPS+SPA GPS+LON GPS+BIN SNTP GPS+SNTP IRIG-B GPS+IRIG-B PPS Off SNTP-Server Slow Fast Step Default Off Unit Description Coarse time synchronization source
FineSyncSource
Off
Fine time synchronization source
SyncMaster
Off
Activate IEDas synchronization master Adjust rate for time synchronization
TimeAdjustRate
Slow
Table 20:
Parameter ModulePosition
General settings for the TimeSynchBIN (TBIN-) function

Range 3 - 16 Step 1 Default 3 Unit Description Hardware position of IO module for time synchronization Binary input number for time synchronization Positive or negative edge detection
BinaryInput
1 - 16
BinDetection
PositiveEdge NegativeEdge
PositiveEdge
Table 21:
Parameter ServerIP-Add RedServIP-Add
General settings for the TimeSynchSNTP (TSNT-) function

Range 0 - 18 0 - 18 Step 1 1 Default 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Unit Description Server IP-address Redundant server IPaddress
RED 670
81
Table 22:
Parameter MonthInYear
General settings for the DaySumDSTBegin (TSTB-) function

Range January February March April May June July August September October November December Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Last First Second Third Fourth 0 - 86400 Step Default March Unit Description Month in year when daylight time starts
DayInWeek
Sunday
Day in week when daylight time starts
WeekInMonth
Last
Week in month when daylight time starts
UTCTimeOfDay
3600
UTC Time of day in seconds when daylight time starts
82
RED 670
Table 23:
Parameter MonthInYear
General settings for the DaySumTimeEnd (TSTE-) function

Range January February March April May June July August September October November December Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Last First Second Third Fourth 0 - 86400 Step Default October Unit Description Month in year when daylight time ends
DayInWeek
Sunday
Day in week when daylight time ends
WeekInMonth
Last
Week in month when daylight time ends
UTCTimeOfDay
3600
UTC Time of day in seconds when daylight time ends
Table 24:
Parameter NoHalfHourUTC
General settings for the TimeZone (TZON-) function

Range -24 - 24 Step 1 Default 0 Unit Description Number of half-hours from UTC
Table 25:
Parameter SynchType TimeDomain Encoding
Basic general settings for the TimeSynchIRIGB (TIRI-) function

Range BNC Opto LocalTime UTC IRIG-B 1344 1344TZ MinusTZ PlusTZ Step Default Opto LocalTime IRIG-B Unit Description Type of synchronization Time domain Type of encoding
TimeZoneAs1344
PlusTZ
Time zone as in 1344 standard
3.4.6
Technical data
RED 670
83
Table 26:
Function
Time synchronization, time tagging

Value 1 ms 1.0 ms typically
Time tagging resolution, Events and Sampled Measurement Values Time tagging error with synchronization once/min (minute pulse synchronization), Events and Sampled Measurement Values Time tagging error with SNTP synchronization, Sampled Measurement Values
1.0 ms typically
3.5
3.5.1
Parameter setting groups

Introduction
Use the six sets of settings to optimize IED operation for different system conditions. By creating and switching between fine tuned setting sets, either from the humanmachine interface or configurable binary inputs, results in a highly adaptable IED that can cope with a variety of system scenarios.
3.5.2
The ACGR function block has six functional inputs, each corresponding to one of the setting groups stored in the IED. Activation of any of these inputs changes the active setting group. Seven functional output signals are available for configuration purposes, so that up to date information on the active setting group is always available. A setting group is selected by using the local HMI, from a front connected personal computer, remotely from the station control or station monitoring system or by activating the corresponding input to the ACGR function block. Each input of the function block can be configured to connect to any of the binary inputs in the IED. To do this the PCM 600 configuration tool must be used. The external control signals are used for activating a suitable setting group when adaptive functionality is necessary. Input signals that should activate setting groups must be either permanent or a pulse exceeding 400 ms. More than one input may be activated at the same time. In such cases the lower order setting group has priority. This means that if for example both group four and group two are set to activate, group two will be the one activated. Every time the active group is changed, the output signal SETCHGD is sending a pulse. The parameter MAXSETGR defines the maximum number of setting groups in use to switch between.
84
RED 670
Figure 37:
Connection of the function to external circuits
The above example also includes seven output signals, for confirmation of which group that is active. The SGC function block has an input where the number of setting groups used is defined. Switching can only be done within that number of groups. The number of setting groups selected to be used will be filtered so only the setting groups used will be shown on the PST setting tool.
3.5.3
Function block
ACGRActiveGroup ACTGRP1 GRP1 ACTGRP2 GRP2 ACTGRP3 GRP3 ACTGRP4 GRP4 ACTGRP5 GRP5 ACTGRP6 GRP6 SETCHGD en05000433.vsd
Figure 38:
ACGR function block
SGC-NoOfSetGrp MAXSETGR en05000716.vsd
3.5.4
RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B 85
Table 27:
Signal ACTGRP1 ACTGRP2 ACTGRP3 ACTGRP4 ACTGRP5 ACTGRP6
Input signals for the ActiveGroup (ACGR-) function block

Description Selects setting group 1 as active Selects setting group 2 as active Selects setting group 3 as active Selects setting group 4 as active Selects setting group 5 as active Selects setting group 6 as active
Table 28:
Signal GRP1 GRP2 GRP3 GRP4 GRP5 GRP6 SETCHGD
Output signals for the ActiveGroup (ACGR-) function block

Description Setting group 1 is active Setting group 2 is active Setting group 3 is active Setting group 4 is active Setting group 5 is active Setting group 6 is active Pulse when setting changed
3.5.5
Setting parameters
Table 29:
Parameter t
General settings for the ActiveGroup (ACGR-) function

Range 0.0 - 10.0 Step 0.1 Default 1.0 Unit s Description Pulse length of pulse when setting changed
Table 30:
Parameter ActiveSetGrp
General settings for the NoOfSetGrp (SGC--) function

Range SettingGroup1 SettingGroup2 SettingGroup3 SettingGroup4 SettingGroup5 SettingGroup6 1-6 Step Default SettingGroup1 Unit Description ActiveSettingGroup
NoOfSetGrp
No
Number of possible setting groups to switch between
86
RED 670
3.6
3.6.1
Test mode functionality

Introduction
Most of the functions in the IED can individually be blocked by means of settings from the local HMI or PST. To enable these blockings the IED must be set in test mode. When leaving the test mode, i.e. entering normal mode, these blockings are disabled and everything is set to normal operation. All testing will be done with actually set and configured values within the IED. No settings will be changed, thus mistakes are avoided.
3.6.2
To be able to test the functions in the IED, you must set the terminal in the TEST mode. There are two ways of setting the terminal in the TEST mode: By configuration, activating the input of the function block TEST. By setting TestMode to On in the local HMI, under the menu: TEST/IED test mode.
While the IED is in test mode, the ACTIVE output of the function block TEST is activated. The other two outputs of the function block TEST are showing which is the generator of the Test mode: On state input from configuration (OUTPUT output activated) or setting from LHMI (SETTING output activated). While the IED is in test mode, the yellow START LED will flash and all functions are blocked. Any function can be de-blocked individually regarding functionality and event signalling. Most of the functions in the IED can individually be blocked by means of settings from the local HMI. To enable these blockings the IED must be set in test mode (the output ACTIVE in function block TEST is set to true), see example in figure 39. When leaving the test mode, i.e. entering normal mode, these blockings are disabled and everything is set to normal operation. All testing will be done with actually set and configured values within the IED. No settings will be changed, thus no mistakes are possible. The blocked functions will still be blocked next time entering the test mode, if the blockings were not reset. The blocking of a function concerns all output signals from the actual function, so no outputs will be activated. The TEST function block might be used to automatically block functions when a test handle is inserted in a test switch. A contact in the test switch (RTXP24 contact 29-30) can supply a binary input which in turn is configured to the TEST function block.
RED 670
87
Each of the protection functions includes the blocking from TEST function block. A typical example from the undervoltage function is shown in figure 39. The functions can also be blocked from sending events over IEC 61850 station bus to prevent filling station and SCADA databases with test events e.g. during a maintenance test.
Disconnection
Normal voltage U1< U2<
tBlkUV1 < t1,t1Min IntBlkStVal1 IntBlkStVal2 Time Block step 1 Block step 2
en05000466.vsd
tBlkUV2 < t2,t2Min
Figure 39:
Example of blocking the time delayed undervoltage protection function.
3.6.3
Function block
TESTTest INPUT ACTIVE OUTPUT SETTING en05000443.vsd
Figure 40:
TEST function block
3.6.4
88

Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B RED 670
Table 31:
Signal INPUT
Input signals for the Test (TEST-) function block

Description Sets terminal in test mode when active
Table 32:
Signal ACTIVE OUTPUT SETTING NOEVENT
Output signals for the Test (TEST-) function block

Description Terminal in test mode when active Test input is active Test mode setting is (On) or not (Off) Event disabled during testmode
3.6.5
Setting parameters
Table 33:
Parameter TestMode
Basic general settings for the Test (TEST-) function

Range Off On Off On Off On Step Default Off Unit Description Test mode in operation (On) or not (Off) Event disable during testmode Command bit for test required or not during testmode
EventDisable CmdTestBit
Off Off
3.7
3.7.1
IED identifiers
Introduction
There are two functions that allow you to identify each IED individually: ProductInformation function has seven pre-set, settings that are unchangeable but nevertheless very important: IED Type ProductDef FirmwareVer IEDMainFunType SerialNo. Ordering No. ProductionDate.
The settings are visable on the local HMI, under: RED 670 Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B 89
Diagnostics/IED Status/ProductIdentifiers They are very helpful in case of support process (such as repair or maintenance). TerminalID function is allowing you to identify the individual IED in your system, not only in the substation, but in a whole region or a country.
3.7.2
Setting parameters
Table 34:
Parameter StationName StationNumber ObjectName ObjectNumber UnitName UnitNumber
General settings for the TerminalID (TEID-) function

Range 0 - 18 0 - 99999 0 - 18 0 - 99999 0 - 18 0 - 99999 Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 Default Station name 0 Object name 0 Unit name 0 Unit Description Station name Station number Object name Object number Unit name Unit number
3.8
3.8.1
Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI)

Introduction
The SMBI function block is used within the CAP tool in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool SMT (please see the overview of the engineering process in the Application manual, chapter Engineering of the IED). It represents the way binary inputs are brought in for one IED 670 configuration.
3.8.2
The SMBI function block, see figure 41, receives its inputs from the real (hardware) binary inputs via the SMT, and makes them available to the rest of the configuration via its outputs, named BI1 to BI10. The inputs, as well as the whole block, can be tag-named. These tags will be represented in SMT as information which signals shall be connected between physical IO and the SMBI function block.
90
RED 670
Section 3 Basic IED functions 3.8.3 Function block

SI01SMBI INSTNAME BI1NAME BI2NAME BI3NAME BI4NAME BI5NAME BI6NAME BI7NAME BI8NAME BI9NAME BI10NAME BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8 BI9 BI10
en05000434.vsd
Figure 41:
SI function block
3.8.4

Table 35:
Signal BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8 BI9 BI10
Output signals for the SMBI (SI01-) function block

Description Binary input 1 Binary input 2 Binary input 3 Binary input 4 Binary input 5 Binary input 6 Binary input 7 Binary input 8 Binary input 9 Binary input 10
3.9
3.9.1
Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO)

Introduction
The SMBO function block is used within the CAP tool in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool SMT (please see the overview of the engineering process in the Application manual, chapter Engineering of the IED). It represents the way binary outputs are sent from one IED 670 configuration.
RED 670
91
Section 3 Basic IED functions 3.9.2 Principle of operation

The SMBO function block, see figure 42, receives logical signal from the IED configuration, which is transferring to the real (hardware) outputs, via the SMT. The inputs in the SMBO are named BO1 to BO10 and they, as well as the whole function block, can be tag-named. The name tags will appear in SMT as information which signals shall be connected between physical IO and the SMBO.
3.9.3
Function block
SO01SMBO BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4 BO5 BO6 BO7 BO8 BO9 BO10 INSTNAME BO1NAME BO2NAME BO3NAME BO4NAME BO5NAME BO6NAME BO7NAME BO8NAME BO9NAME BO10NAME en05000439.vsd
Figure 42:
SO function block
3.9.4

Table 36:
Signal BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4 BO5 BO6 BO7 BO8 BO9 BO10
Input signals for the SMBO (SO01-) function block

Description Signal name for BO1 in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for BO2 in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for BO3 in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for BO4 in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for BO5 in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for BO6 in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for BO7 in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for BO8 in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for BO9 in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for BO10 in Signal Matrix Tool
92
RED 670
3.10
3.10.1
Signal matrix for mA inputs (SMMI)

Introduction
The SMMI function block is used within the CAP tool in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool SMT (please see the overview of the engineering process in the Application manual, chapter Engineering of the IED). It represents the way milliamp (mA) inputs are brought in for one IED670 configuration.
3.10.2
The SMMI function block, see figure 43, receives its inputs from the real (hardware) mA inputs via the SMT, and makes them available to the rest of the configuration via its analog outputs, named AI1 to AI6. The inputs, as well as the whole block, can be tag-named. These tags will be represented in SMT. The outputs on the SMMI are normally connected to the MVGGIO function block for further use of the mA signals.
3.10.3
Function block
SMI1SMMI INSTNAME AI1NAME AI2NAME AI3NAME AI4NAME AI5NAME AI6NAME AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AI5 AI6
en05000440.vsd
Figure 43:
SMI function block
3.10.4

Table 37:
Signal AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AI5 AI6
Output signals for the SMMI (SMI1-) function block

Description Analog milliampere input 1 Analog milliampere input 2 Analog milliampere input 3 Analog milliampere input 4 Analog milliampere input 5 Analog milliampere input 6
RED 670
93
3.11
3.11.1
Signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI)

Introduction
The SMAI function block (or the pre-processing function block, as it is also known) is used within the PCM 600 in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool SMT (please see the overview of the engineering process in the Application manual, chapter Engineering of the IED). It represents the way analog inputs are brought in for one IED 670 configuration.
3.11.2
Every SMAI function block can receive four analog signals (three phases and one neutral value), either voltage or current, see figure 44 and figure 45. The outputs of the SMAI are giving information about every aspect of the 3ph analog signals acquired (phase angle, RMS value, frequency and frequency derivates etc. 244 values in total). The BLOCK input will reset to 0 all the outputs of the function block. The output singal AI1 to AI4 are direct output of the in SMT connected input to AI1 to AI4. AIN is always the neutral current, calculated residual sum or the signal connected to AI4. Note that function block will always calculate the residual sum of current/voltage if the input is not connected in SMT. Applications with a few exceptions (HEDIF, BBDIF) shall always be connected to AI3P.
3.11.3
Function block
PR01SMAI BLOCK DFTSPFC GRPNAME AI1NAME AI2NAME AI3NAME AI4NAME TYPE SYNCOUT SPFCOUT AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AIN NOSMPLCY en05000705.vsd
Figure 44:
PR02SMAI BLOCK GRPNAME AI1NAME AI2NAME AI3NAME AI4NAME TYPE
PR01 function block
AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AIN en07000130.vsd
Figure 45:
PR0212 function block
94
RED 670
Section 3 Basic IED functions 3.11.4 Input and output signals

Table 38:
Signal BLOCK DFTSYNC DFTSPFC
Input signals for the SMAI (PR01-) function block

Description Block group 1 Synchronisation of DFT calculation Number of samples per fundamental cycle used for DFT calculation
Table 39:
Signal SYNCOUT SPFCOUT AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AIN
Output signals for the SMAI (PR01-) function block

Description Synchronisation signal from internal DFT reference function Number of samples per fundamental cycle from internal DFT reference function Group 1 analog input 3-phase group Group 1 analog input 1 Group 1 analog input 2 Group 1 analog input 3 Group 1 analog input 4 Group 1 analog input residual for disturbance recorder
Table 40:
Signal BLOCK
Input signals for the SMAI (PR02-) function block

Description Block group 2
Table 41:
Signal AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AIN
Output signals for the SMAI (PR02-) function block

Description Group 2 analog input 3-phase group Group 2 analog input 1 Group 2 analog input 2 Group 2 analog input 3 Group 2 analog input 4 Group 2 analog input residual for disturbance recorder
3.11.5
Setting parameters
RED 670
95
Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default value InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available. Internal nominal frequency DFT reference is then the reference.
Table 42:
Parameter DFTRefExtOut
Basic general settings for the SMAI (PR01-) function

Range InternalDFTRef AdDFTRefCh1 AdDFTRefCh2 AdDFTRefCh3 AdDFTRefCh4 AdDFTRefCh5 AdDFTRefCh6 AdDFTRefCh7 AdDFTRefCh8 AdDFTRefCh9 AdDFTRefCh10 AdDFTRefCh11 AdDFTRefCh12 External DFT ref InternalDFTRef AdDFTRefCh1 AdDFTRefCh2 AdDFTRefCh3 AdDFTRefCh4 AdDFTRefCh5 AdDFTRefCh6 AdDFTRefCh7 AdDFTRefCh8 AdDFTRefCh9 AdDFTRefCh10 AdDFTRefCh11 AdDFTRefCh12 External DFT ref Ph-N Ph-Ph 1-2 Step Default InternalDFTRef Unit Description DFT reference for external output
DFTReference
InternalDFTRef
DFT reference
ConnectionType TYPE
Ph-N 1
Ch
Input connection type 1=Voltage,2=Current
Table 43:
Parameter Negation
Advanced general settings for the SMAI (PR01-) function

Range Off NegateN Negate3Ph Negate3Ph+N 5 - 200 Step Default Off Unit Description Negation
MinValFreqMeas
10
Limit for frequency calculation in % of UBase Base Voltage
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
96
RED 670
Table 44:
Parameter DFTReference
Basic general settings for the SMAI (PR02-) function

Range InternalDFTRef AdDFTRefCh1 AdDFTRefCh2 AdDFTRefCh3 AdDFTRefCh4 AdDFTRefCh5 AdDFTRefCh6 AdDFTRefCh7 AdDFTRefCh8 AdDFTRefCh9 AdDFTRefCh10 AdDFTRefCh11 AdDFTRefCh12 External DFT ref Ph-N Ph-Ph 1-2 Step Default InternalDFTRef Unit Description DFT reference
ConnectionType TYPE
Ph-N 1
Ch
Input connection type 1=Voltage,2=Current
Table 45:
Parameter Negation
Advanced general settings for the SMAI (PR02-) function

Range Off NegateN Negate3Ph Negate3Ph+N 5 - 200 Step Default Off Unit Description Negation
MinValFreqMeas
10
Limit for frequency calculation in % of UBase Base Voltage
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
3.12
3.12.1
Summation block 3 phase (SUM3Ph)

Introduction
The SUM3Ph function block is used in order to get the sum of two sets of 3 ph analog signals (of the same type) for those IED functions that might need it.
3.12.2
The summation block receives the 3ph signals from the SMAI blocks, see figure 46. In the same way, the BLOCK input will reset to 0 all the outputs of the function block.
RED 670
97

SU01Sum3Ph BLOCK DFTSYNC DFTSPFC G1AI3P G2AI3P AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 en05000441.vsd
Figure 46:
SU function block
3.12.4

Table 46:
Signal BLOCK DFTSYNC DFTSPFC G1AI3P G2AI3P
Input signals for the Sum3Ph (SU01-) function block

Description Block Synchronisation of DFT calculation Number of samples per fundamental cycle used for DFT calculation Group 1 analog input 3-phase group Group 2 analog input 3-phase group
Table 47:
Signal AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4
Output signals for the Sum3Ph (SU01-) function block

Description Group analog input 3-phase group Group 1 analog input Group 2 analog input Group 3 analog input Group 4 analog input
3.12.5
Setting parameters
Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default value InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available.
98
RED 670
Table 48:
Parameter SummationType
Basic general settings for the Sum3Ph (SU01-) function

Range Group1+Group2 Group1-Group2 Group2-Group1 (Group1+Group2) InternalDFTRef AdDFTRefCh1 External DFT ref Step Default Group1+Group2 Unit Description Summation type
DFTReference
InternalDFTRef
DFT reference
Table 49:
Parameter FreqMeasMinVal
Advanced general settings for the Sum3Ph (SU01-) function

Range 5 - 200 Step 1 Default 10 Unit % Description Amplitude limit for frequency calculation in % of Ubase Base voltage
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
3.13
3.13.1
Authority status (AUTS)

Introduction
The AUTS function block (or the authority status function block) is an indication function block, which informs about two events related to the IED and the user authorization: the fact that at least one user has tried to log on wrongly into the IED and it was blocked (the output USRBLKED) the fact that at least one user is logged on (the output LOGGEDON)
3.13.2
Whenever on of the two events described above happens, the specific output (USRBLKED or LOGGEDON) will be activated. The output can e.g. be connected on Event function block for LON/SPA. The signals are also available on IEC 61850 station bus.
RED 670
99

AUTSAuthStatus USRBLKED LOGGEDON en06000503.vsd
Figure 47:
AUTS function block
3.13.4
Output signals
Table 50:
Signal USRBLKED LOGGEDON
Output signals for the AuthStatus (AUTS-) function block

Description At least one user is blocked by invalid password At least one user is logged on
3.13.5
Setting parameters
100
RED 670
3.14
3.14.1
Goose binary receive

Function block
GB01GooseBinRcv BLOCK INSTNAME OUT1 OUT1VAL OUT2 OUT2VAL OUT3 OUT3VAL OUT4 OUT4VAL OUT5 OUT5VAL OUT6 OUT6VAL OUT7 OUT7VAL OUT8 OUT8VAL OUT9 OUT9VAL OUT10 OUT10VAL OUT11 OUT11VAL OUT12 OUT12VAL OUT13 OUT13VAL OUT14 OUT14VAL OUT15 OUT15VAL OUT16 OUT16VAL OUT1NAM OUT2NAM OUT3NAM OUT4NAM OUT5NAM OUT6NAM OUT7NAM OUT8NAM OUT9NAM OUT10NAM OUT11NAM OUT12NAM OUT13NAM OUT14NAM OUT15NAM OUT16NAM en07000047.vsd
Figure 48:
GB function block
3.14.2
RED 670
101
Table 51:
Signal BLOCK INSTNAME
Input signals for the GooseBinRcv (GB01-) function block

Description Block of output signals Instance name in Signal Matrix Tool
Table 52:
Signal OUT1 OUT1VAL OUT2 OUT2VAL OUT3 OUT3VAL OUT4 OUT4VAL OUT5 OUT5VAL OUT6 OUT6VAL OUT7 OUT7VAL OUT8 OUT8VAL OUT9 OUT9VAL OUT10 OUT10VAL OUT11 OUT11VAL OUT12 OUT12VAL OUT13 OUT13VAL OUT14 OUT14VAL OUT15 OUT15VAL OUT16 OUT16VAL
Output signals for the GooseBinRcv (GB01-) function block

Description Binary output 1 Valid data on binary output 1 Binary output 2 Valid data on binary output 2 Binary output 3 Valid data on binary output 3 Binary output 4 Valid data on binary output 4 Binary output 5 Valid data on binary output 5 Binary output 6 Valid data on binary output 6 Binary output 7 Valid data on binary output 7 Binary output 8 Valid data on binary output 8 Binary output 9 Valid data on binary output 9 Binary output 10 Valid data on binary output 10 Binary output 11 Valid data on binary output 11 Binary output 12 Valid data on binary output 12 Binary output 13 Valid data on binary output 13 Binary output 14 Valid data on binary output 14 Binary output 15 Valid data on binary output 15 Binary output 16 Valid data on binary output 16
102
RED 670

Signal OUT1NAM OUT2NAM OUT3NAM OUT4NAM OUT5NAM OUT6NAM OUT7NAM OUT8NAM OUT9NAM OUT10NAM OUT11NAM OUT12NAM OUT13NAM OUT14NAM OUT15NAM OUT16NAM Description Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool
3.14.3
Setting parameters
Table 53:
Parameter Operation
Basic general settings for the GooseBinRcv (GB01-) function

Range Off On Step Default Off Unit Description Operation Off/On
RED 670
103
104
Section 4 Differential protection
Section 4
Differential protection
About this chapter
This chapter describes the measuring principles, functions and parameters used in differential protection.
4.1
Line differential protection

Function block name: L3D-ANSI number: 87L IEC 61850 logical node name: L3CPDIF IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
3Id/I>
Function block name: L6D-ANSI number: 87L IEC 61850 logical node name: L6CPDIF
IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
3Id/I>
Function block name: LT3D-ANSI number: 87LT IEC 61850 logical node name: LT3CPDIF
3Id/I>
RED 670
105
Function block name: LT6D-ANSI number: 87LT IEC 61850 logical node name: LT6CPDIF
3Id/I>
4.1.1
4.1.1.1
Introduction
Line differential protection, 3 or 6 CT sets (PDIF, 87L)
The line differential function applies the Kirchhoff's law and compares the currents entering and leaving the protected multiterminal circuit, consisting of overhead power lines, power transformers and cables. It offers phase-segregated true current differential protection with high sensitivity and provides phase selection information for single-pole tripping. The three terminal version is used for conventional two-terminal lines with or without 1 1/2 circuit breaker arrangement in one end, as well as three terminal lines with single breaker arrangements at all terminals.
Protected zone
RED 670
Comm. Channel
RED 670 en05000039.vsd
Figure 49:
Example of application on a conventional two-terminal line
The six terminal version is used for conventional two-terminal lines with 1 1/2 circuit breaker arrangements in both ends, as well as multi terminal lines with up to five terminals.
Protected zone
RED 670
Comm. Channel Comm. Channel
RED 670
Comm. Channel
RED 670
en05000040.vsd
Figure 50:
Example of application on a three-terminal line with 1 1/2 breaker arrangements
106
RED 670
The current differential algorithm in RED 670 provides high sensitivity for internal faults, at the same time as it has excellent stability for external faults. Current samples from all CTs are exchanged between the IEDs in the line ends (master-master mode) or sent to one IED (master-slave mode) for evaluation. A restrained dual biased slope evaluation is made where the bias current is the highest phase current in any line end giving a secure through fault stability even with heavily saturated CTs. In addition to the restrained evaluation, an unrestrained high differential current setting can be used for fast tripping of internal faults with very high currents. A special feature with RED 670 is that applications with small power transformers (rated current less than 50 % of the differential current setting) connected as line taps (i.e. as "shunt" power transformers), without measurements of currents in the tap, can be handled. The normal load current is here considered to be negligible, and special measures need only to be taken in the event of a short circuit on the LV side of the transformer. In this application, the tripping of the differential protection can be time delayed for low differential currents in order to achieve coordination with down stream over current relays. A line charging current compensation provides increased sensitivity of the differential function.
4.1.1.2
Line differential protection 3 or 6 CT sets, with in-zone transformers (PDIF, 87LT)

Two 2-winding power transformers, or one 3-winding power transformer, can be included in the line differential protection zone. Both two- and three-winding transformers are correctly represented with vector group compensations made in the algorithm. The function includes 2nd and 5th harmonic restraint and zero sequence current elimination.
Protected zone
RED 670
Comm. Channel
RED 670
Comm. Channel
RED 670
Comm. Channel
en05000042.vsd
Figure 51:
Example of application on a three-terminal line with a power transformer in the protection zone
RED 670
107

4.1.1.3 Analog signal transfer for line differential protection (MDIF)
The line differential communication can be arranged as a master-master system or a master-slave system alternatively. In the former, current samples are exchanged between all terminals, and an evaluation is made in each terminal. This means that a 64 kbit/s communication channel is needed between every IED included in the same line differential protection zone. In the latter, current samples are sent from all slave IEDs to one master IED where the evaluation is made, and trip signals are sent to the remote ends when needed. In this system, a 64 kbit/s communication channel is only needed between the master, and each one of the slave terminals.
Protected zone
RED 670
RED 670
Comm. Channels
RED 670
RED 670
RED 670 en05000043.vsd
Figure 52:
Five terminal line with master-master system

Protected zone
RED 670
RED 670
Comm. Channels
RED 670 RED 670 RED 670 en05000044.vsd
Figure 53:
Five terminal line with master-slave system
Current samples from IEDs located geographically apart from each other, must be time coordinated so that the current differential algorithm can be executed correctly. In RED 670 it is possible to make this coordination in two different ways. The echo method of time synchronizing is normally used whereas for applications where transmit and receive times can differ, the optional built in GPS receivers shall be used. The communication link is continuously monitored, and an automatic switchover to a standby link is possible after a preset time.
108
RED 670
Section 4 Differential protection 4.1.2

4.1.2.1
Algorithm and logic
In the line differential function, measured current values from local and remote line ends are evaluated in order to distinguish between internal or external faults, or undisturbed conditions. The local currents are fed to the IED via the Analog Input Modules and thereafter they pass the Analog to Digital Converter, see figure 54.
RED 670
109
Figure 54:
The principle for the line differential function
The remote currents are received to the IED as samples via a communication link. When entering the IED, they are processed in the Line Differential Communication Module (LDCM) where they are time coordinated with the local current samples, and interpolated in order to be comparable with the local samples. 110 Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B RED 670
In the Pre-Processing Block, the real and imaginary parts of the fundamental frequency phase currents and negative sequence currents are derived. Together with the current samples, they are then forwarded to the differential function block where three different analyses are carried out. The first analysis is the classical differential and bias current evaluation with the characteristic as seen in figure 55. The line differential function is phase segregated where the differential current is the vectorial sum of all measured currents taken separately for each phase. The bias current, on the other hand, is considered as the greatest phase current in any line end and it is common for all three phases. The two slopes (SlopeSection1, SlopeSection2) and breakpoints (EndSection1, EndSection2) can be set in the PCM 600 tool or via the HMI. Current values plotted above the characteristic formed by IdMin and the dual slope will give a start in that phase. The level IdMinHigh is a setting value that is used to temporarily decrease the sensitivity in situations when: the line is energized when a fault is classified as external when a tap transformer is switched in
There is also an unrestrained high differential current setting that can be used for fast tripping of internal faults with very high currents.
RED 670
111
Operate current [ in pu of IBase] 5
Operate unconditionally UnrestrainedLimit
3 A 2 Section 1
Operate conditionally
IdMinHigh B
Section 2
Section 3 SlopeSection3
1 IdMin SlopeSection2 0 0 EndSection1 EndSection2 1 2 3
Restrain 4 5
Restrain current [ in pu of IBase]
en05000300.vsd
Figure 55:
where:
Description of the restrained-, and the unrestrained operate characteristics
slope = D Ioperate 100% D Irestrain

and where the restrained characteristic is defined by the settings:
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
IdMin EndSection1 EndSection2 SlopeSection2 SlopeSection3
The second analysis is the 2nd and 5th harmonic analysis on the differential current. Occurrence of these harmonics over a level that is set separately for each one will block tripping action from the biased slope evaluation.
112
RED 670
The third analysis is the negative sequence current analysis. Effectively this is a fault discriminator that distinguishes between internal and external faults. It works such that the phase angle of the negative sequence current from the local end is compared with the phase angle of the sum of the negative sequence currents from the remote ends. The characteristic for this fault discriminator is shown in figure 56, where the directional characteristic is defined by the two setting parameters IminNegSeq and NegSeqRoa.
90 deg 120 deg If one or the other of currents is too low, then no measurement is done, and 120 degrees is mapped Internal/external fault boundary
NegSeqROA (Relay Operate Angle)
180 deg
0 deg
IMinNegSeq
External fault region
Internal fault region
270 deg
en05000188.vsd
Figure 56:
Operating characteristic of the internal/external fault discriminator
Reference direction of currents is considered to be towards the line. Thus, when both currents to be compared have this direction, the phase difference between them will ideally be zero. In the opposite case, when one current is entering and the other is leaving the protected object, the phase difference will ideally be 180 degree. In case either the local or the sum of the remote negative sequence currents or both is below the set level, the fault discriminator will not make any fault classification and the value 120 degree is set. This value is then an indication that negative sequence directional comparison has not been possible to make, and it does not mean classification as external fault. When a fault is classified as internal by the negative sequence fault discriminator, a trip is issued under the condition that the dual slope restrained function has started , whilst a classification as external fault results in an increase of the restrained characteristic trip values IdMinHigh.
RED 670
113
With reference to figure 54, the outputs from the three analysis blocks are fed to the output logic. Figure 57 shows a simplified block diagram of this output logic where only trip commands and no alarm signals are shown for simplicity.
Figure 57:
Simplified block diagram
Remembering that current values plotted above the characteristic formed by IdMin and the dual slope in figure 56 are said to give a start, the output logic can be summarized as follows:
114
RED 670
A start in one phase, gives a trip under the condition that the content of 2nd and 5th harmonic is below the set level for these harmonics. Otherwise it is blocked as long as the harmonic is above the set level. However, when a line is energized the current setting value IdMinHigh is used. Effectively this means that the line A-B-C in figure 55 forms the characteristic. Current values above the unrestrained limit gives a trip irrespective of any presence of harmonics. Classification of a fault as internal by the negative sequence fault discriminator, will give a trip under the condition that a start has occurred in that phase. This means that any harmonic blocking is then overridden. However, occurrence of harmonics at the same time as the differential current is below the level IdMinHigh, will block a trip even though the fault is classified as internal. This latter condition is to prevent unwanted trips when energizing a line tap transformer. Classification of a fault as external by the negative sequence fault discriminator will cause IdMinHigh to be used as the lower limit for the restrained characteristic according to figure 55. Cross blocking will also be activated in this situation.
Compensation for charging currents can be selected active or not by setting ChargCurEnableYes or No. The compensation works such that the fundamental frequency differential current that is measured under steady state undisturbed conditions, is identified and then subtracted making the resulting differential current zero (or close to zero). This action is made separately for each phase. The magnitude of the subtracted pre-fault currents in Amperes can be read at any time as the service value ICHARGE. Values of the pre-fault differential currents are not updated under disturbance conditions. The updating process is resumed 50 ms after normal conditions have been restored. Normal conditions are only considered if there are no start signals, neither internal nor external fault is declared, the power system is symmetrical, etc. It is thus obvious that the change in charging current that the fault causes by decreasing the system voltage is not considered in the algorithm, a matter that is further discussed in the Application Manual for RED670. It shall be noted that all small pre-fault differential currents are subtracted, no matter what their origin. Besides the true charging currents, the following currents are eliminated: Small differential currents due to small errors (inequalities) of current transformers. Small differential currents because of off-nominal On-Load-Tap-Changer positions when a power transformer is included in the protected zone. Load currents of tap loads included in the protected zone.
RED 670
115

4.1.2.2 Time synchronization
In a numerical line differential protection, current samples from protections located geographically apart from each other, must be time coordinated so that the currents from the different line ends can be compared without introducing irrelevant errors. Accuracy requirements on this time coordination are extremely high. As an example, an inaccuracy of 0.1 ms in a 50 Hz system gives a maximum amplitude error approximately around 3% whilst an inaccuracy of 1 ms gives a maximum amplitude error of approximately 31%. The corresponding figures for a 60 Hz system are 4% and 38% respectively. In RED670 the time coordination is made with the so-called echo method, which can be complemented with GPS synchronization as an option. Each IED has an accurate local clock with a very small time drift. This clock makes time tagging of telegrams, and the echo method is then used to find out the time difference between the clocks in two ends of a power line. Referring to figure 58, it works such that the transmission time to send a message from station B to station A (T1 T2) and receive a message from A to B (T3 T4) is measured. The time instances T2 and T3 are taken with the local clock reference of station A, and the time instances T1 and T4 are taken with the local clock reference of station B.
A B T1
T2
T3
T4
en05000293.vsd
Figure 58:
Measuring time differences
Calculation of the delay time one-way Td and the time difference t between the clocks in A and B is then possible to do with equation 2 and equation 3, which are only valid under the condition that the send and receive times are equal.
Td = (T2 - T1 ) + (T4 - T3 ) 2 (T1 + T4 ) - (T2 + T3 ) 2
(Equation 2)
Dt =
(Equation 3)
116
RED 670
In RED 670 t is calculated every time a telegram is received, and the time difference is then used to adjust and interpolate the current measurements from the remote end before the current differential algorithm is executed. The echo method without GPS, can be used in telecommunications transmission networks with varying signal propagation delay as long as there is delay symmetry i.e. the send and receive delays are equal. The delay variation can depend on the signal going different routes in the network from time to other. When the delay symmetry is lost, the expression for t given above is no longer valid, and GPS synchronization of the local IED clocks must be used. Including the optional GPS, means that there will be one GPS receiver module in each IED, synchronizing its local IED clock. As GPS synchronization is very accurate, in the order of 1 s, all IEDs in the same line differential scheme will have the same clock reference. It is then possible to detect asymmetric transmission time delay and compensate for it. When the IED is equipped with GPS, this hardware is integrated in the IED. Besides the GPS receiver itself, it also consists of filters and regulators for post processing of the GPS time synch pulse, which is necessary to achieve a reliable GPS synchronization. Especially short interruptions and spurious out of synch GPS signals are handled securely in this way. When GPS synchronization is used, an interruption in the GPS signal leads to freewheeling during 8 seconds i.e. during this time the synchronization benefits from the stability in the local clocks. If the interruption persists more than 8 seconds, either fall back to the echo synchronization method or blocking of the line differential function is made, as selected through setting parameter GPSSyncErr. For a description of the time synchronization function, refer to section "Time synchronization".
4.1.2.3
Analog signal communication for line differential protection Communication principle

For a two-terminal line, the current from the local CT needs to be communicated over a 64 kbit/s channel to the remote line end, and the remote end current communicated back on the same channel. In case of e.g. a three terminal line another 64 kbit/s channel will be needed to exchange the same local current with the third line end current, etc. In one-and-a-half breaker arrangements, there are two local currents meaning two 64 kbit/s channels to each remote substation. Alternatively, it is possible to add together the two local currents before sending them and in that way reduce the number of communication channels needed. This is achieved by selecting proper setting for parameter TransmCurr (CT-SUM, CT-DIFF1 or CT-DIFF2). However, by doing it this way there will be reduced information about bias currents. For further information and discussions on this matter, refer to the Application manual for RED670.
RED 670
117
The communication can be arranged as a master-master system or a master-slave system alternatively. Figure 59 shows a master-master system for a five-terminal line. Here current samples are exchanged between all terminals, and an evaluation is made in each terminal. This means that a 64 kbit/s communication channel is needed between every IED included in the same line differential protection zone.
Protected zone
RED 670 Comm. Channels
RED 670
RED 670
RED 670
RED 670
en05000292.vsd
Figure 59:
5terminal line with master-master system
In the master-slave system, current samples are sent from all slave IEDs to one master IED where the evaluation is made and trip signals are sent to the remote ends when needed. In this system, a 64 kbit/s communication channel is only needed between the master, and each one of the slave terminals as shown in figure 60.
Protected zone
RED 670
RED 670
Comm. Channels RED 670 RED 670 RED 670
en05000291.vsd
Figure 60:
5terminal line with master-slave system
The master-slave configuration is achieved by setting parameter Operation in the slaves to Off for the line differential function, and setting parameter ChannelMode to On for the LDCMs in the slaves.
Test mode
The line differential function in one IED can be set in test mode. This will block the trip outputs on that IED, and set the remote IEDs in a remote test mode, such that injected currents will be echoed back phase shifted and with a settable amplitude. The trip outputs in the remote terminals will also be blocked automatically. For further
118
RED 670
information on this, refer to the Installation and Commissioning manual for RED670. The currents are sampled twenty times per power system cycle in the protection terminals, but the communication exchange is made only once every 5 ms. This means that at in each telegram sent, 5 consecutive current samples in a 50 Hz system and 6 consecutive current samples in a 60 Hz system (three phases each sampling instant) are included. Figure 61 shows the principle.
Current sample telegram sent Current sample telegram sent Current sample telegram sent Current sample telegram sent Current sample telegram sent Current sample telegram sent Current sample telegram sent Current sample telegram sent
Communication of current sampled values
10
15
20
25
30
35
Time (ms)
en05000290.vsd
Figure 61:
where: x
Communication of current sampled values.
is the current sampling moment
With redundant communication channels, as shown in figure 62, both channels are in operation continuously but with one of them favoured as a primary channel.
Redundant communication channels
Telecom. Network
LD CM LD CM LD CM LD CM
Telecom. Network
Primary channel Secondary redundant channel

Figure 62:
en05000289.vsd
Direct fibre optical connection between two terminals with LDOM over longer distances.
RED 670
119
In case communication is lost on the primary channel, switchover to the secondary channel is made after a settable time delay RedChSwTime. Return of the primary channel will cause a switchback after another settable time delay RedChRturnTime. For a three-, four- or five terminal line in a master-master configuration, a loss of one communication channel will not cause the line differential protection to be unserviceable. Instead it will automatically revert to a partial master-slave mode with the two IEDs that have an unserviceable communication link between them, will serve as slaves. For more details about the remote communication see Chapter "Remote communication". See also the Application manual.
4.1.2.4
Open CT detection feature

Line differential function in IED 670 has a built-in, advanced open CT detection feature. The open CT circuit condition will create unexpected operations for transformer differential protection function under the normal load conditions. It is also possible to damage secondary equipment due to high voltage produced from open CT circuit outputs. Therefore, it is always a requirement from security and reliability points of view to have open CT detection function to block the differential protection function in case of open CT conditions and at the same time, produce the alarm signal to the operational personal to make quick remedy actions to correct the open CT condition. The built-in open CT feature can be enabled or disabled by a setting parameter OpenCTEnable(Off/On). When enabled, this feature will prevent mal-operation when a loaded main CT connected to the differential protection is by mistake open circuited on the secondary side. It shall be noted that this feature can only detect interruption of one CT phase current at the time. If two or even all three-phase currents of one set of CT are accidentally interrupted at the same time this feature cannot operate and the differential function will give trip signal if the false differential current is sufficiently high. In order to ensure blocking of the differential protection for open CT condition this algorithm must operate within 10 ms in order to be able to prevent unwanted operation of the differential protection under all loading conditions. The principle applied in order to detect an open CT is a simple pattern recognition method, similar to the waveform check which has been with advantage used by the Power Transformer Differential Protection in order to detect the magnetizing inrush condition. The open CT detection principle is based on the fact, that for an open CT, the current in the phase with the open CT will suddenly drop (at least theoretically) to zero (i.e. as seen by the protection!), while the currents of the other two phases continue as before. The open CT function is supposed to detect an open CT under normal conditions, that is, with the protected multi-terminal circuit under normal load. If the load currents are very low or zero, the open CT condition cannot be detected. The open CT algorithm will only detect an open CT if the load on the power transformer is from 10% to 110% of the rated load. Outside this range an open CT condition is not even
120
RED 670
looked for. The search for an open CT starts after 60 seconds (50 seconds in 60 Hz systems) since the bias current enters the 10110% range. The Open CT detection feature can also be explicitly deactivated by setting: OpenCTEnable = 0 (Off). If an open CT is detected and the output OPENCT set to 1, then all the differential functions are blocked, except of the unrestrained (instantaneous) differential. An alarm signal is also produced after a settable delay (tOCTAlarmDelay) to report to operational personal for quick remedy actions once the open CT is detected. When the open CT condition is removed (i.e. the previously open CT reconnected), the functions remain blocked for a specified interval of time, which is also a setting (tOCTResetDelay). The task of this measure is to prevent an eventual mal-operation after the reconnection of the previously open CT secondary circuit. The open CT feature will work only during normal loading condition. Thus, the open CT feature will be automatically disabled for all external faults, big overloads and inrush conditions. The open CT algorithm provides detailed information about the location of the defective CT secondary circuit. The algorithm will clearly indicate terminal side, CT input and phase in which open CT condition has been detected. These indications are provided via the following outputs from the differential function: 1. 2. 3. 4. Boolean output OPENCT will provide instant information to indicate that open CT circuit has been detected Boolean output OPENCTAL will provide time delayed alarm that the open CT circuit has been detected. Time delay is defined by setting parameter tOCTAlarm Integer output OPENCTINPUT will provide information on which CT input open CT circuit has been detected (1=CT input No 1; 2=CT input No 1) 4. Integer output OPENCTPHASE will provide information in which phase open CT circuit has been detected (1=Phase L1; 2= Phase L2; 3= Phase L3)
Once the open CT condition is declared the algorithm will stop to search for further open CT circuits. It will wait until the first open CT circuit has been corrected. First of all it shall be noted that once the open CT condition has been detected it can be only automatically reset within the differential function itself. It is not possible to externally reset open CT condition. In order to automatically reset the open CT circuit alarm the following conditions have to be fulfilled: Bias current is for at least one minute smaller than 110% Open CT condition in defective CT circuit has been rectified (e.g. current asymmetry disappears) Above two conditions are fulfilled for longer time than defined by the setting parameter tOCTReset
After the reset the open CT detection algorithm will start again to search for any other open CT circuit within the protected zone.
RED 670
121

4.1.2.5 Binary signal transfer
There is space for eight binary signals integrated in the telegram of the line differential analog communication. For further information about this, refer to section "Binary signal transfer to remote end".
4.1.3
Function block
L3D-L3CPDIF I3P1 I3P2 I3P3 TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TRIPRES TRIPUNRE TRIPENHA START STL1 STL2 STL3 BLK2H BLK2HL1 BLK2HL2 BLK2HL3 BLK5H BLK5HL1 BLK5HL2 BLK5HL3 NSANGLE IDL1MAG IDL2MAG IDL3MAG IBIAS IDNSMAG ID2HL1 ID2HL2 ID2HL3 ID5HL1 ID5HL2 ID5HL3 IDL1 IDL2 IDL3 ICHARGE
en05000667.vsd
Figure 63:
L3D function block
122
RED 670
L6D-L6CPDIF I3P1 I3P2 I3P3 I3P4 I3P5 I3P6 TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TRIPRES TRIPUNRE TRIPENHA START STL1 STL2 STL3 BLK2H BLK2HL1 BLK2HL2 BLK2HL3 BLK5H BLK5HL1 BLK5HL2 BLK5HL3 NSANGLE IDL1MAG IDL2MAG IDL3MAG IBIAS IDNSMAG ID2HL1 ID2HL2 ID2HL3 ID5HL1 ID5HL2 ID5HL3 IDL1 IDL2 IDL3 ICHARGE
en05000666.vsd
Figure 64:
L6D function block
RED 670
123
LT3DLT3CPDIF_87LT I3P1 I3P2 I3P3 TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TRIPRES TRIPUNRE TRIPENHA START STL1 STL2 STL3 BLK2H BLK2HL1 BLK2HL2 BLK2HL3 BLK5H BLK5HL1 BLK5HL2 BLK5HL3 ALARM OPENCT OPENCTAL IDL1 IDL2 IDL3 IDL1MAG IDL2MAG IDL3MAG IBIAS IDNSMAG en06000254.vsd
Figure 65:
LT3D function block
LT6DLT6CPDIF_87LT I3P1 I3P2 I3P3 I3P4 I3P5 I3P6 TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TRIPRES TRIPUNRE TRIPENHA START STL1 STL2 STL3 BLK2H BLK2HL1 BLK2HL2 BLK2HL3 BLK5H BLK5HL1 BLK5HL2 BLK5HL3 ALARM OPENCT OPENCTAL IDL1 IDL2 IDL3 IDL1MAG IDL2MAG IDL3MAG IBIAS IDNSMAG en06000255.vsd
Figure 66:
LT6D function block
124
RED 670
LDL-LDLPDIF_87L CTFAIL OUTSERV BLOCK TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TRLOCAL TRLOCL1 TRLOCL2 TRLOCL3 TRREMOTE DIFLBLKD en05000394.vsd
Figure 67:
LDL function block
4.1.4

Table 54:
Signal I3P1 I3P2 I3P3
Input signals for the L3CPDIF_87L (L3D--) function block

Description Three phase current grp1 samples and DFT values Three phase current grp1 samples and DFT values Three phase current grp1 samples and DFT values
Table 55:
Signal TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TRIPRES TRIPUNRE TRIPENHA START STL1 STL2 STL3 BLK2H BLK2HL1 BLK2HL2 BLK2HL3 BLK5H BLK5HL1
Output signals for the L3CPDIF_87L (L3D--) function block

Description Common, main, trip output signal Trip signal from phase L1 Trip signal from phase L2 Trip signal from phase L3 Trip by restrained differential protection Trip by unrestrained differential protection Trip by enhanced restrained differential protection Common, main, start output signal Start signal from phase L1 Start signal from phase L2 Start signal from phase L3 Common block signal, due to 2nd harmonic Block signal due to 2nd harmonic, phase L1 Block signal due to 2nd harmonic, phase L2 Block signal due to 2nd harmonic, phase L3 Common block signal, due to 5-th harmonic Block signal due to 5th harmonic, phase L1
RED 670
125

Signal BLK5HL2 BLK5HL3 OPENCT ALARM OPENCTAL IDL1 IDL2 IDL3 IDL1MAG IDL2MAG IDL3MAG IBIAS IDNSMAG Description Block signal due to 5th harmonic, phase L2 Block signal due to 5th harmonic, phase L3 An open CT was detected Alarm for sustained differential current Open CT Alarm output signal. Issued after a delay ... Instantaneous differential current, phase L1 Instantaneous differential current, phase L2 Instantaneous differential current, phase L3 Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase L1 Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase L2 Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase L3 Magnitude of the bias current, common for L1, L2, L3 Magnitude of the negative sequence differential current
Table 56:
Signal I3P1 I3P2 I3P3 I3P4 I3P5 I3P6
Input signals for the L6CPDIF_87L (L6D--) function block

Description Three phase current grp1 samples and DFT values Three phase current grp1 samples and DFT values Three phase current grp1 samples and DFT values Three phase current grp1 samples and DFT values Three phase current grp1 samples and DFT values Three phase current grp1 samples and DFT values
Table 57:
Signal TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TRIPRES TRIPUNRE TRIPENHA START STL1 STL2 STL3 BLK2H
Output signals for the L6CPDIF_87L (L6D--) function block

Description Common, main, trip output signal Trip signal from phase L1 Trip signal from phase L2 Trip signal from phase L3 Trip by restrained differential protection Trip by unrestrained differential protection Trip by enhanced restrained differential protection Common, main, start output signal Start signal from phase L1 Start signal from phase L2 Start signal from phase L3 Common block signal, due to 2nd harmonic
126
RED 670

Signal BLK2HL1 BLK2HL2 BLK2HL3 BLK5H BLK5HL1 BLK5HL2 BLK5HL3 OPENCT ALARM OPENCTAL IDL1 IDL2 IDL3 IDL1MAG IDL2MAG IDL3MAG IBIAS IDNSMAG Description Block signal due to 2nd harmonic, phase L1 Block signal due to 2nd harmonic, phase L2 Block signal due to 2nd harmonic, phase L3 Common block signal, due to 5-th harmonic Block signal due to 5th harmonic, phase L1 Block signal due to 5th harmonic, phase L2 Block signal due to 5th harmonic, phase L3 An open CT was detected Alarm for sustained differential current Open CT Alarm output signal. Issued after a delay ... Instantaneous differential current, phase L1 Instantaneous differential current, phase L2 Instantaneous differential current, phase L3 Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase L1 Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase L2 Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase L3 Magnitude of the bias current, common for L1, L2, L3 Magnitude of the negative sequence differential current
Table 58:
Signal I3P1 I3P2 I3P3
Input signals for the LT3CPDIF_87LT (LT3D-) function block

Description Three phase current grp1 samples and DFT values Three phase current grp1 samples and DFT values Three phase current grp1 samples and DFT values
Table 59:
Signal TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TRIPRES TRIPUNRE TRIPENHA START STL1 STL2
Output signals for the LT3CPDIF_87LT (LT3D-) function block

Description Common, main, trip output signal Trip signal from phase L1 Trip signal from phase L2 Trip signal from phase L3 Trip by restrained differential protection Trip by unrestrained differential protection Trip by enhanced restrained differential protection Common, main, start output signal Start signal from phase L1 Start signal from phase L2
RED 670
127

Signal STL3 BLK2H BLK2HL1 BLK2HL2 BLK2HL3 BLK5H BLK5HL1 BLK5HL2 BLK5HL3 OPENCT ALARM OPENCTAL IDL1 IDL2 IDL3 IDL1MAG IDL2MAG IDL3MAG IBIAS IDNSMAG Description Start signal from phase L3 Common block signal, due to 2nd harmonic Block signal due to 2nd harmonic, phase L1 Block signal due to 2nd harmonic, phase L2 Block signal due to 2nd harmonic, phase L3 Common block signal, due to 5-th harmonic Block signal due to 5th harmonic, phase L1 Block signal due to 5th harmonic, phase L2 Block signal due to 5th harmonic, phase L3 An open CT was detected Alarm for sustained differential current Open CT Alarm output signal. Issued after a delay ... Instantaneous differential current, phase L1 Instantaneous differential current, phase L2 Instantaneous differential current, phase L3 Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase L1 Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase L2 Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase L3 Magnitude of the bias current, common for L1, L2, L3 Magnitude of the negative sequence differential current
Table 60:
Signal I3P1 I3P2 I3P3 I3P4 I3P5 I3P6
Input signals for the LT6CPDIF_87LT (LT6D-) function block

Description Three phase current grp1 samples and DFT values Three phase current grp2 samples and DFT values Three phase current grp3 samples and DFT values Three phase current grp4 samples and DFT values Three phase current grp5 samples and DFT values Three phase current grp6 samples and DFT values
Table 61:
Signal TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TRIPRES
Output signals for the LT6CPDIF_87LT (LT6D-) function block

Description Common, main, trip output signal Trip signal from phase L1 Trip signal from phase L2 Trip signal from phase L3 Trip by restrained differential protection
128
RED 670

Signal TRIPUNRE TRIPENHA START STL1 STL2 STL3 BLK2H BLK2HL1 BLK2HL2 BLK2HL3 BLK5H BLK5HL1 BLK5HL2 BLK5HL3 OPENCT ALARM OPENCTAL IDL1 IDL2 IDL3 IDL1MAG IDL2MAG IDL3MAG IBIAS IDNSMAG Description Trip by unrestrained differential protection Trip by enhanced restrained differential protection Common, main, start output signal Start signal from phase L1 Start signal from phase L2 Start signal from phase L3 Common block signal, due to 2nd harmonic Block signal due to 2nd harmonic, phase L1 Block signal due to 2nd harmonic, phase L2 Block signal due to 2nd harmonic, phase L3 Common block signal, due to 5-th harmonic Block signal due to 5th harmonic, phase L1 Block signal due to 5th harmonic, phase L2 Block signal due to 5th harmonic, phase L3 An open CT was detected Alarm for sustained differential current Open CT Alarm output signal. Issued after a delay ... Instantaneous differential current, phase L1 Instantaneous differential current, phase L2 Instantaneous differential current, phase L3 Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase L1 Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase L2 Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase L3 Magnitude of the bias current, common for L1, L2, L3 Magnitude of the negative sequence differential current
Table 62:
Signal CTFAIL OUTSERV BLOCK
Input signals for the LDLPDIF_87L (LDL--) function block

Description CT failure indication from local CT supervision Input for indicating that the terminal is out of service Block of function
Table 63:
Signal TRIP TRL1 TRL2
Output signals for the LDLPDIF_87L (LDL--) function block

Description General trip from differential protection system Trip signal from phase L1 Trip signal from phase L2
RED 670
129

Signal TRL3 TRLOCAL TRLOCL1 TRLOCL2 TRLOCL3 TRREMOTE DIFLBLKD Description Trip signal from phase L3 Trip from local differential function Trip from local differential function in phase L1 Trip from local differential function in phase L2 Trip from local differential function in phase L3 Trip from remote differential function Local line differential function blocked
4.1.5
Setting parameters
Table 64:
Parameter NoOfTerminals
Basic general settings for the L3CPDIF_87L (L3D--) function

Range 2 3 No Yes 50.0 - 9999.9 Step Default 2 Unit Description Number of current terminals of the protected circuit 2-nd local current connected to input channel 2, Yes/ No Base (reference) current of the differential protection
Chan2IsLocal
No
IBase
0.1
3000.0
Table 65:
Parameter Operation IdMin
Basic parameter group settings for the L3CPDIF_87L (L3D--) function

Range Off On 0.20 - 2.00 Step 0.01 Default Off 0.30 Unit IB Description Operation Off / On Oper - restr charact., section 1 sensitivity, multiple IBase Initial lower sensitivity, as multiple of IBase Time interval of initial lower sensitivity, in sec Unrestrained differential current limit, multiple of IBase Off/On selection for internal / external fault discriminator Internal/external fault discriminator Operate Angle, degrees
IdMinHigh
0.20 - 10.00
0.01
0.80
IB
tIdMinHigh
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
IdUnre
1.00 - 50.00
0.01
10.00
IB
NegSeqDiffEn
Off On 30.0 - 120.0
On
NegSeqROA
1.0
60.0
Deg
130
RED 670

Parameter IMinNegSeq Range 0.01 - 0.20 Step 0.01 Default 0.04 Unit IB Description Min. value of neg. seq. curr. as multiple of IBase Off/On selection of the cross -block logic Off/On selection for compensation of charging currents Off/On selection for delayed diff. trip command Below limit, extra delay can be applied, multiple of IBase Definite time additional delay in seconds Inverse Delay Minimum Time. In seconds 19 curve types. Example: 15 for definite time delay.
CrossBlockEn ChargCurEnable
No Yes Off On Off On 0.20 - 5.00
No Off
AddDelay
Off
IMaxAddDelay
0.01
1.00
IB
tDefTime
0.000 - 6.000
0.001
0.000
tMinInv
0.001 - 6.000
0.001
0.010
CurveType
ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Programmable RI type RD type 0.05 - 1.10
IEC Def. Time
0.01
1.00
Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) for inverse delays Sustained differential current alarm, factor of IBase Delay for alarm due to sustained differential current, in s
IdiffAlarm
0.05 - 1.00
0.01
0.15
IB
tAlarmdelay
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
10.000
RED 670
131
Table 66:
Parameter EndSection1
Advanced parameter group settings for the L3CPDIF_87L (L3D--) function

Range 0.20 - 1.50 Step 0.01 Default 1.25 Unit IB Description End of section 1, as multiple of reference current IBase End of section 2, as multiple of reference current IBase Slope in section 2 of operate-restrain characteristic, in % Slope in section 3 of operate- restrain characteristic, in % Max. ratio of 2nd harm. to fundamental harm dif. curr. in % Max. ratio of 5th harm. to fundamental harm dif. curr. in % Settable curve parameter, userprogrammable curve type. Settable curve parameter, userprogrammable curve type. Settable curve parameter, userprogrammable curve type. Settable curve parameter, userprogrammable curve type. Open CTEnable Off/ On Open CT: time in s to alarm after an open CT is detected Reset delay in s. After delay, diff. function is activated
EndSection2
1.00 - 10.00
0.01
3.00
IB
SlopeSection2
10.0 - 50.0
0.1
40.0
SlopeSection3
30.0 - 100.0
0.1
80.0
I2/I1Ratio
5.0 - 100.0
1.0
10.0
I5/I1Ratio
5.0 - 100.0
1.0
25.0
0.01 - 1000.00
0.01
0.02
0.01 - 1000.00
0.01
0.14
0.01 - 1000.00
0.01
1.00
0.01 - 1000.00
0.01
1.00
OpenCTEnable tOCTAlarmDelay
Off On 0.100 - 10.000
0.001
On 1.000
tOCTResetDelay
0.100 - 10.000
0.001
0.250
132
RED 670
Table 67:
Basic general settings for the L6CPDIF_87L (L6D--) function

Range 2 3 4 5 6 No Yes 50.0 - 9999.9 Step Default 2 Unit Description Number of current terminals of the protected circuit
Chan2IsLocal
No
2-nd local current connected to input channel 2, Yes/ No Base (reference) current of the differential protection
IBase
0.1
3000.0
Table 68:
Basic parameter group settings for the L6CPDIF_87L (L6D--) function

Range Off On 0.20 - 2.00 Step 0.01 Default Off 0.30 Unit IB Description Operation Off / On Oper - restr charact., section 1 sensitivity, multiple IBase Initial lower sensitivity, as multiple of IBase Time interval of initial lower sensitivity, in sec Unrestrained differential current limit, multiple of IBase Off/On selection for internal / external fault discriminator Internal/external fault discriminator Operate Angle, degrees Min. value of neg. seq. curr. as multiple of IBase Off/On selection of the cross -block logic Max. ratio of 2nd harm. to fundamental harm dif. curr. in % Max. ratio of 5th harm. to fundamental harm dif. curr. in % Off/On selection for compensation of charging currents
IdMinHigh
0.20 - 10.00
0.01
0.80
IB
tIdMinHigh
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
IdUnre
1.00 - 50.00
0.01
10.00
IB
NegSeqDiffEn
Off On 30.0 - 120.0
On
NegSeqROA
1.0
60.0
Deg
IMinNegSeq
0.01 - 0.20
0.01
0.04
IB
CrossBlockEn I2/I1Ratio
No Yes 5.0 - 100.0
1.0
No 10.0
I5/I1Ratio
5.0 - 100.0
1.0
25.0
ChargCurEnable
Off On
Off
RED 670
133

Parameter AddDelay Range Off On 0.20 - 5.00 Step Default Off Unit Description Off/On selection for delayed diff. trip command Below limit, extra delay can be applied, multiple of IBase Definite time additional delay in seconds Inverse Delay Minimum Time. In seconds 19 curve types. Example: 15 for definite time delay.
IMaxAddDelay
0.01
1.00
IB
tDefTime
0.000 - 6.000
0.001
0.000
tMinInv
0.001 - 6.000
0.001
0.010
CurveType
ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Programmable RI type RD type 0.05 - 1.10
IEC Def. Time
0.01
1.00
Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) for inverse delays Sustained differential current alarm, factor of IBase Delay for alarm due to sustained differential current, in s
IdiffAlarm
0.05 - 1.00
0.01
0.15
IB
tAlarmdelay
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
10.000
Table 69:
Advanced parameter group settings for the L6CPDIF_87L (L6D--) function

Range 0.20 - 1.50 Step 0.01 Default 1.25 Unit IB Description End of section 1, as multiple of reference current IBase End of section 2, as multiple of reference current IBase Slope in section 2 of operate-restrain characteristic, in % Slope in section 3 of operate- restrain characteristic, in %
EndSection2
1.00 - 10.00
0.01
3.00
IB
SlopeSection2
10.0 - 50.0
0.1
40.0
SlopeSection3
30.0 - 100.0
0.1
80.0
134
RED 670

Parameter p Range 0.01 - 1000.00 Step 0.01 Default 0.02 Unit Description Settable curve parameter, userprogrammable curve type. Settable curve parameter, userprogrammable curve type. Settable curve parameter, userprogrammable curve type. Settable curve parameter, userprogrammable curve type. Open CT detection feature. Open CTEnable Off/On Open CT: time in s to alarm after an open CT is detected Reset delay in s. After delay, diff. function is activated
0.01 - 1000.00
0.01
0.14
0.01 - 1000.00
0.01
1.00
0.01 - 1000.00
0.01
1.00
OpenCTEnable
Off On 0.100 - 10.000
On
tOCTAlarmDelay
0.001
1.000
tOCTResetDelay
0.100 - 10.000
0.001
0.250
Table 70:
Basic general settings for the LT3CPDIF_87LT (LT3D-) function

Range 2 3 No Yes 50.0 - 9999.9 Step Default 2 Unit Description Number of current terminals of the protected circuit 2-nd local current connected to input channel 2, Yes/ No Base (reference) current of the differential protection Off/On for elimination of zero seq. from diff. and bias curr Power transformer A applied on input channel X Transformer A rated voltage (kV) on winding 1 (HV winding) Transformer A rated voltage (kV) on winding 2 (LV winding)
Chan2IsLocal
No
IBase
0.1
3000.0
ZerSeqCurSubtr
Off On No Transf A 1 2 3 1.0 - 9999.9
Off
TraAOnInpCh
No Transf A
RatVoltW1TraA
0.1
130.0
kV
RatVoltW2TraA
1.0 - 9999.9
0.1
130.0
kV
RED 670
135

Parameter ClockNumTransA Range 0 [0 deg] 1 [30 deg lag] 2 [60 deg lag] 3 [90 deg lag] 4 [120 deg lag] 5 [150 deg lag] 6 [180 deg lag] 7 [210 deg lag] 8 [240 deg lag] 9 [270 deg lag] 10 [300 deg lag] 11 [330 deg lag] No Yes Step Default 0 [0 deg] Unit Description Transf. A phase shift in multiples of 30 deg, 5 for 150 deg
ZerSeqPassTraA
No
Yes/No for capability of transf A to transform zero seq curr Power transformer B applied on input channel X Transformer B rated voltage (kV) on winding 1 (HV winding) Transformer B rated voltage (kV) on winding 2 (LV winding) Transf. B phase shift in multiples of 30 deg, 2 for 60 deg
TraBOnInpCh
No Transf B 1 2 3 1.0 - 9999.9
No Transf B
RatVoltW1TraB
0.1
130.0
kV
RatVoltW2TraB
1.0 - 9999.9
0.1
130.0
kV
ClockNumTransB
0 [0 deg] 1 [30 deg lag] 2 [60 deg lag] 3 [90 deg lag] 4 [120 deg lag] 5 [150 deg lag] 6 [180 deg lag] 7 [210 deg lag] 8 [240 deg lag] 9 [270 deg lag] 10 [300 deg lag] 11 [330 deg lag] No Yes
0 [0 deg]
ZerSeqPassTraB
No
Yes/No for capability of transf B to transform zero seq curr
Table 71:
Basic parameter group settings for the LT3CPDIF_87LT (LT3D-) function

Range Off On 0.20 - 2.00 Step 0.01 Default Off 0.30 Unit IB Description Operation Off / On Oper - restr charact., section 1 sensitivity, multiple IBase Initial lower sensitivity, as multiple of IBase
IdMinHigh
0.20 - 10.00
0.01
0.80
IB
136
RED 670

Parameter tIdMinHigh Range 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 Default 1.000 Unit s Description Time interval of initial lower sensitivity, in sec Unrestrained differential current limit, multiple of IBase Off/On selection for internal / external fault discriminator Internal/external fault discriminator Operate Angle, degrees Min. value of neg. seq. curr. as multiple of IBase Off/On selection of the cross -block logic Off/On selection for compensation of charging currents Off/On selection for delayed diff. trip command Below limit, extra delay can be applied, multiple of IBase Definite time additional delay in seconds Inverse Delay Minimum Time. In seconds 19 curve types. Example: 15 for definite time delay.
IdUnre
1.00 - 50.00
0.01
10.00
IB
NegSeqDiffEn
Off On 30.0 - 120.0
On
NegSeqROA
1.0
60.0
Deg
IMinNegSeq
0.01 - 0.20
0.01
0.04
IB
CrossBlockEn ChargCurEnable
No Yes Off On Off On 0.20 - 5.00
No Off
AddDelay
Off
IMaxAddDelay
0.01
1.00
IB
tDefTime
0.000 - 6.000
0.001
0.000
tMinInv
0.001 - 6.000
0.001
0.010
CurveType
ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Programmable RI type RD type
IEC Def. Time
RED 670
137

Parameter k Range 0.05 - 1.10 Step 0.01 Default 1.00 Unit Description Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) for inverse delays Sustained differential current alarm, factor of IBase Delay for alarm due to sustained differential current, in s
IdiffAlarm
0.05 - 1.00
0.01
0.15
IB
tAlarmdelay
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
10.000
Table 72:
Advanced parameter group settings for the LT3CPDIF_87LT (LT3D-) function

Range 0.20 - 1.50 Step 0.01 Default 1.25 Unit IB Description End of section 1, as multiple of reference current IBase End of section 2, as multiple of reference current IBase Slope in section 2 of operate-restrain characteristic, in % Slope in section 3 of operate- restrain characteristic, in % Max. ratio of 2nd harm. to fundamental harm dif. curr. in % Max. ratio of 5th harm. to fundamental harm dif. curr. in % Settable curve parameter, userprogrammable curve type. Settable curve parameter, userprogrammable curve type. Settable curve parameter, userprogrammable curve type. Settable curve parameter, userprogrammable curve type.
EndSection2
1.00 - 10.00
0.01
3.00
IB
SlopeSection2
10.0 - 50.0
0.1
40.0
SlopeSection3
30.0 - 100.0
0.1
80.0
I2/I1Ratio
5.0 - 100.0
1.0
10.0
I5/I1Ratio
5.0 - 100.0
1.0
25.0
0.01 - 1000.00
0.01
0.02
0.01 - 1000.00
0.01
0.14
0.01 - 1000.00
0.01
1.00
0.01 - 1000.00
0.01
1.00
138
RED 670

Parameter OpenCTEnable Range Off On 0.100 - 10.000 Step Default On Unit Description Open CT detection feature. Open CTEnable Off/On Open CT: time in s to alarm after an open CT is detected Reset delay in s. After delay, diff. function is activated
tOCTAlarmDelay
0.001
1.000
tOCTResetDelay
0.100 - 10.000
0.001
0.250
Table 73:
Basic general settings for the LT6CPDIF_87LT (LT6D-) function

Range 2 3 4 5 6 No Yes 50.0 - 9999.9 Step Default 2 Unit Description Number of current terminals of the protected circuit
Chan2IsLocal
No
2-nd local current connected to input channel 2, Yes/ No Base (reference) current of the differential protection Off/On for elimination of zero seq. from diff. and bias curr Power transformer A applied on input channel X
IBase
0.1
3000.0
ZerSeqCurSubtr
Off On No Transf A 1 2 3 4 5 6 1.0 - 9999.9
Off
TraAOnInpCh
No Transf A
RatVoltW1TraA
0.1
130.0
kV
Transformer A rated voltage (kV) on winding 1 (HV winding) Transformer A rated voltage (kV) on winding 2 (LV winding) Transf. A phase shift in multiples of 30 deg, 5 for 150 deg
RatVoltW2TraA
1.0 - 9999.9
0.1
130.0
kV
ClockNumTransA
0 [0 deg] 1 [30 deg lag] 2 [60 deg lag] 3 [90 deg lag] 4 [120 deg lag] 5 [150 deg lag] 6 [180 deg lag] 7 [210 deg lag] 8 [240 deg lag] 9 [270 deg lag] 10 [300 deg lag] 11 [330 deg lag]
0 [0 deg]
RED 670
139

Parameter ZerSeqPassTraA Range No Yes Step Default No Unit Description Yes/No for capability of transf A to transform zero seq curr Power transformer B applied on input channel X
TraBOnInpCh
No Transf B 1 2 3 4 5 6 1.0 - 9999.9
No Transf B
RatVoltW1TraB
0.1
130.0
kV
Transformer B rated voltage (kV) on winding 1 (HV winding) Transformer B rated voltage (kV) on winding 2 (LV winding) Transf. B phase shift in multiples of 30 deg, 2 for 60 deg
RatVoltW2TraB
1.0 - 9999.9
0.1
130.0
kV
ClockNumTransB
0 [0 deg] 1 [30 deg lag] 2 [60 deg lag] 3 [90 deg lag] 4 [120 deg lag] 5 [150 deg lag] 6 [180 deg lag] 7 [210 deg lag] 8 [240 deg lag] 9 [270 deg lag] 10 [300 deg lag] 11 [330 deg lag] No Yes
0 [0 deg]
ZerSeqPassTraB
No
Yes/No for capability of transf B to transform zero seq curr
Table 74:
Basic parameter group settings for the LT6CPDIF_87LT (LT6D-) function

Range Off On 0.20 - 2.00 Step 0.01 Default Off 0.30 Unit IB Description Operation Off / On Oper - restr charact., section 1 sensitivity, multiple IBase Initial lower sensitivity, as multiple of IBase Time interval of initial lower sensitivity, in sec Unrestrained differential current limit, multiple of IBase
IdMinHigh
0.20 - 10.00
0.01
0.80
IB
tIdMinHigh
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
IdUnre
1.00 - 50.00
0.01
10.00
IB
140
RED 670

Parameter NegSeqDiffEn Range Off On 30.0 - 120.0 Step Default On Unit Description Off/On selection for internal / external fault discriminator Internal/external fault discriminator Operate Angle, degrees Min. value of neg. seq. curr. as multiple of IBase Off/On selection of the cross -block logic Max. ratio of 2nd harm. to fundamental harm dif. curr. in % Max. ratio of 5th harm. to fundamental harm dif. curr. in % Off/On selection for compensation of charging currents On/Off selection for delayed diff. trip command Below limit, extra delay can be applied, multiple of IBase Definite time additional delay in seconds Inverse Delay Minimum Time. In seconds 19 curve types. Example: 15 for definite time delay.
NegSeqROA
1.0
60.0
Deg
IMinNegSeq
0.01 - 0.20
0.01
0.04
IB
CrossBlockEn I2/I1Ratio
No Yes 5.0 - 100.0
1.0
No 10.0
I5/I1Ratio
5.0 - 100.0
1.0
25.0
ChargCurEnable
Off On Off On 0.20 - 5.00
Off
AddDelay
Off
IMaxAddDelay
0.01
1.00
IB
tDefTime
0.000 - 6.000
0.001
0.000
tMinInv
0.001 - 6.000
0.001
0.010
CurveType
ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Programmable RI type RD type
IEC Def. Time
RED 670
141

Parameter k Range 0.05 - 1.10 Step 0.01 Default 1.00 Unit Description Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) for inverse delays Sustained differential current alarm, factor of IBase Delay for alarm due to sustained differential current, in s
IdiffAlarm
0.05 - 1.00
0.01
0.15
IB
tAlarmdelay
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
10.000
Table 75:
Advanced parameter group settings for the LT6CPDIF_87LT (LT6D-) function

Range 0.20 - 1.50 Step 0.01 Default 1.25 Unit IB Description End of section 1, as multiple of reference current IBase End of section 2, as multiple of reference current IBase Slope in section 2 of operate-restrain characteristic, in % Slope in section 3 of operate- restrain characteristic, in % Settable curve parameter, userprogrammable curve type. Settable curve parameter, userprogrammable curve type. Settable curve parameter, userprogrammable curve type. Settable curve parameter, userprogrammable curve type. Open CTEnable Off/ On Open CT: time in s to alarm after an open CT is detected Reset delay in s. After delay, diff. function is activated
EndSection2
1.00 - 10.00
0.01
3.00
IB
SlopeSection2
10.0 - 50.0
0.1
40.0
SlopeSection3
30.0 - 100.0
0.1
80.0
0.01 - 1000.00
0.01
0.02
0.01 - 1000.00
0.01
0.14
0.01 - 1000.00
0.01
1.00
0.01 - 1000.00
0.01
1.00
OpenCTEnable tOCTAlarmDelay
Off On 0.100 - 10.000
0.001
On 1.000
tOCTResetDelay
0.100 - 10.000
0.001
0.250
142
RED 670
Table 76:
Parameter Operation testModeSet ReleaseLocal
General settings for the LineDiffLogic (LDL--) function

Range Off On Off On Block all Release local Step Default On Off Block all Unit Description Operation Off / On Test mode On/Off Release of local terminal for trip under test mode
4.1.6
Technical data
Table 77:
Function Minimum operate current SlopeSection2 SlopeSection3 EndSection 1 EndSection 2 Unrestrained limit function Second harmonic blocking Fifth harmonic blocking Inverse characteristics, see table 614 and table 615 Operate time Reset time Critical impulse time Charging current compensation
Line differential protection (PDIF, 87L, 87LT)

Range or value (20-200)% of Ibase (10.0-50.0)% (30.0-100.0)% (20150)% of Ibase (1001000)% of Ibase (1005000)% of Ibase (5.0100.0)% of fundamental (5.0100.0)% of fundamental 19 curve types 25 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Id 15 ms typically at 10 to 0 x Id 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Id On/Off Accuracy 2.0% of Ir at I Ir 2.0% of I at I >I r 2.0% of Ir at I Ir 2.0% of I at I > Ir 2.0% of Ir 6.0% of Ir See table 614 and table 615 -
4.2
High impedance differential protection (PDIF, 87)

Function block name: HZDxANSI number: 87 IEC 61850 logical node name: HZPDIF IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
IdN
RED 670
143
Section 4 Differential protection 4.2.1 Introduction

The high impedance differential protection can be used when the involved CT cores have the same turn ratio and similar magnetizing characteristic. It utilizes an external summation of the phases and neutral current and a series resistor and a voltage dependent resistor externally to the relay.
4.2.2
The high impedance differential function is based on one current input with external stabilizing resistors and voltage dependent resistors. Three functions can be used to provide a three phase differential protection function. The stabilizing resistor value is calculated from the relay operating value UR calculated to achieve through fault stability. The supplied stabilizing resistor has a link to allow setting of the correct resistance value. Refer to Application manual for operating voltage and sensitivity calculation.
4.2.2.1
Logic diagram
The logic diagram see figure 68 shows the operation principles for the high impedance differential protection function. It is a basically a simple one step relay with an additional lower alarm level. The function can be totally blocked totally or only tripping, can be blocked, by activating inputs from external signals.
Figure 68:
Logic diagram for High impedance differential protection.
144
RED 670
Section 4 Differential protection 4.2.3 Function block

HZD1HZPDIF_87 ISI BLOCK BLKTR TRIP ALARM MEASVOLT en05000363.vsd
Figure 69:
HZD function block
4.2.4

Table 78:
Signal ISI BLOCK BLKTR
Input signals for the HZPDIF_87 (HZD1-) function block

Description Group signal for current input Block of function Block of trip
Table 79:
Signal TRIP ALARM MEASVOLT
Output signals for the HZPDIF_87 (HZD1-) function block

Description Trip signal Alarm signal Measured RMS voltage on CT secondary side
4.2.5
Setting parameters
Table 80:
Parameter Operation U>Alarm
Basic parameter group settings for the HZPDIF_87 (HZD1-) function

Range Off On 2 - 500 Step 1 Default Off 10 Unit V Description Operation Off / On Alarm voltage level in volts on CT secondary side Time delay to activate alarm Operate voltage level in volts on CT secondary side Value of series resistor in Ohms
tAlarm U>Trip
0.000 - 60.000 5 - 900
0.001 1
5.000 100
s V
SeriesResistor
10 - 20000
250
ohm
RED 670
145
Section 4 Differential protection 4.2.6 Technical data

Table 81:
Function Operate voltage Reset ratio Maximum continuous voltage Operate time Reset time Critical impulse time
High impedance differential protection (PDIF, 87)

Range or value (20-400) V >95% U>TripPickup2/series resistor 200 W 10 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Ud 90 ms typically at 10 to 0 x Ud 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Ud Accuracy 1.0% of Ur for U < Ur 1.0% of U for U > Ur -
146
RED 670
Section 5 Impedance protection
Section 5
Impedance protection
About this chapter
This chapter describes distance protection and associated functions. It includes function blocks, logic diagrams and data tables with information about distance protection, automatic switch onto fault, weak end in-feed and other associated functions. Quadrilateral characteristics are also covered.
5.1
Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic (PDIS, 21)

Function block name: ZMQANSI number: 21 IEC 61850 logical node name: ZMQPDIS IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
5.1.1
Introduction
The line distance protection is a four zone full scheme protection with three fault loops for phase to phase faults and three fault loops for phase to earth fault for each of the independent zones. Individual settings for each zone in resistive and reactive reach gives flexibility for use onoverhead lines and cables of different types and lengths. Mho alternative Quad characteristic is available. The function has a functionality for load encroachment which increases the possibility to detect high resistive faults on heavily loaded lines(see figure 70).
RED 670
147
X Forward operation
R Reverse operation
en05000034.vsd
Figure 70:
Typical quadrilateral distance protection zone with load encroachment function activated
The independent measurement of impedance for each fault loop together with a sensitive and reliable built in phase selection makes the function suitable in applications with single phase auto-reclosing. Built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents overreaching of zone1 at load exporting end at phase to earth faults on heavily loaded power lines. The distance protection zones can operate, independent of each other, in directional (forward or reverse) or non-directional mode. This makes them suitable, together with different communication schemes, for the protection of power lines and cables in complex network configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal lines etc.
5.1.2
5.1.2.1
Full scheme measurement
The execution of the different fault loops within the IED670 are of full scheme type, which means that each fault loop for phase to earth faults and phase to phase faults for forward and reverse faults are executed in parallel. Figure 71 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for the basic five, impedance-measuring zones l.
148
RED 670
L1-N
L2-N
L3-N
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
Zone 1
L1-N
L2-N
L3-N
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
Zone 2
L1-N
L2-N
L3-N
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
Zone 3
L1-N
L2-N
L3-N
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
Zone 4
L1-N
L2-N
L3-N
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
Zone 5
en05000458.vsd
Figure 71:
The different measuring loops at line-earth fault and phase-phase fault.
The use of full scheme technique gives faster operation time compared to switched schemes which mostly uses a start element to select correct voltages and current depending on fault type. Each distance protection zone performs like one independent distance protection relay with six measuring elements.
5.1.2.2
Impedance characteristic
The distance measuring zone include six impedance measuring loops; three intended for phase-to-earth faults, and three intended for phase-to-phase as well as three-phase faults. The distance measuring zone will essentially operate according to the non-directional impedance characteristics presented in figure 72 and figure 73. The phase-to-earth characteristic is illustrated with the full loop reach while the phase-to-phase characteristic presents the per-phase reach.
RED 670
149
X RFPE R1+Rn RFPE
Xn =
X1+Xn
X0 - X1 3
Rn = f N f N
R0 - R1 3
R (Ohm/loop)
RFPE
RFPE
X1+Xn
RFPE
R1+Rn
RFPE
en05000661.vsd
Figure 72:
Characteristic for the phase-to-earth measuring loops, ohm/loop domain.
150
RED 670
X RFPP 2R1
(Ohm/phase)
RFPP
2X1
R (Ohm/phase) RFPP RFPP
2X1
RFPP
2R1
RFPP
en05000662.vsd
Figure 73:
Characteristic for the phase-to-phase measuring loops
The fault loop reach with respect to each fault type may also be presented as in figure 74. Note in particular the difference in definition regarding the (fault) resistive reach for phase-to-phase faults and three-phase faults.
RED 670
151
UL1
ILn
R1 + j X1
Phase-to-earth element
Phase-to-earth fault in phase L1
RFPE (Arc + tower resistance) 0 IN (R0-R1)/3 + j (X0-X1)/3 )
Phase-to-phase fault in phase L1-L2
UL1
IL1
R1 + j X1
Phase-to-phase element L1-L2 RFPP (Arc resistance)
IL2 UL2 R1 + j X1
UL1 Three-phase fault UL3
IL1
R1 + j X1
0.5RFPP
Phase-to-phase element L1-L3
IL3 R1 + j X1 0.5RFPP
en05000181.vsd
Figure 74:
where: n m
Fault loop model
designates anyone of the three phases (1, 2 or 3) and represents the phase that is leading phase n with 120 degrees (i.e. 3, 1 or 2).
The R1 and jX1 in figure 74 represents the positive sequence impedance from the measuring point to the fault location. The RFPE and RFPP is the eventual fault resistance in the fault place. Regarding the illustration of three-phase fault in figure 74, there is of course fault current flowing also in the third phase during a three-phase fault. The illustration merely reflects the loop measurement, which is made phase-to-phase. The theoretical parameters p and q outline the area of operation in quadrant 1 when varied from 0 to 1.0. That is, for any combination of p and q, where both are between 0 and 1.0, the corresponding impedance is within the reach of the characteristic.
152
RED 670
The zone may be set to operate in Non-directional, Forward or Reverse direction through the setting OperationDir. The result from respective set value is illustrated in figure 75. It may be convenient to once again mention that the impedance reach is symmetric, in the sense that it is conform for forward and reverse direction. Therefore, all reach settings apply to both directions.
X X X
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
en05000182.vsd
Figure 75:
Directional operating modes of the distance measuring zone
5.1.2.3
Minimum operating current

The operation of the distance measuring zone is blocked if the magnitude of input currents fall below certain threshold values. The phase-to-earth loop Ln is blocked if ILn < IMinOpPE. For zone 1 with load compensation feature the additional criterion applies, that all phase-to-earth loops will be blocked when IN < IMinOpIN, regardless of the phase currents. ILn is the RMS value of the current in phase Ln. IN is the RMS value of the vector sum of the three phase currents, i.e. residual current 3I0. The phase-to-phase loop LmLn is blocked if ILmLnAB (BC or CA)< IMinOpPP. ILmLn is the RMS value of the vector difference between phase currents Lm and Ln. All three current limits IminOpPE, IminOpIN and IMinOpPP are automatically reduced to 75% of regular set values if the zone is set to operate in reverse direction, i.e. OperationDir=Reverse.
RED 670
153

5.1.2.4 Measuring principles
Fault loop equations use the complex values of voltage, current, and changes in the current. Apparent impedances are calculated and compared with the set limits. The calculation of the apparent impedances at ph-ph faults follows equation 4 (example for a phase L1 to phase L2 fault).
UL1 UL2 ---------------------Zapp = -I L1 IL2
(Equation 4)
Here U and I represent the corresponding voltage and current phasors in the respective phase Ln (n = 1, 2, 3) The earth return compensation applies in a conventional manner to ph-E faults (example for a phase L1 to earth fault) according to equation 6.
U L1 Z app = ----------------------------I L1 + I N KN
(Equation 5)
Where: UL1, IL1 and IN are the phase voltage, phase current and residual current present to the IED KN is defined as:
KN =
X0 - X1 3X1
where X0 and X1 is zero and positive sequence reactance from the measuring point to the fault on the protected line.
Here IN is a phasor of the residual current in relay point. This results in the same reach along the line for all types of faults. The apparent impedance is considered as an impedance loop with resistance R and reactance X. The formula given in equation 6 is only valid for no loaded radial feeder applications. When load is considered in the case of single line to earth fault, conventional distance protection might overreach at exporting end and underreach at importing end. REx670 has an adaptive load compensation which increases the security in such applications. Measuring elements receive current and voltage information from the A/D converter. The check sums are calculated and compared, and the information is distributed into memory locations. For each of the six supervised fault loops, sampled values of voltage (U), current (I), and changes in current between samples (DI) are brought from the input memory and fed to a recursive Fourier filter.
154
RED 670
The filter provides two orthogonal values for each input. These values are related to the loop impedance according to equation 7,
X Di -- --U = R i + ---- -w 0 Dt
(Equation 7)
in complex notation, or:

X D Re ( I ) Re ( U ) = R Re ( I ) + ------ ----------------w0 Dt
(Equation 8)
X DIm ( I ) Im ( U ) = R Im ( I ) + ------ ---------------Dt w0
(Equation 9)
with
w0 = 2 p f 0
(Equation 10)
where: Re Im f0 designates the real component of current and voltage, designates the imaginary component of current and voltage and designates the rated system frequency
The algorithm calculates Rm measured resistance from the equation for the real value of the voltage and substitute it in the equation for the imaginary part. The equation for the Xm measured reactance can then be solved. The final result is equal to:
Im ( U ) DRe ( I ) Re ( U ) D Im ( I ) ----------------------------------R m = -----------------------------------------------DRe ( I ) Im ( I ) D Im ( I ) Re ( I )
(Equation 11)
Re ( U ) Im ( I ) Im ( U ) Re ( I )Xm = w 0 Dt -----------------------------------------------------------------------------DRe ( I ) Im ( I ) DIm ( I ) Re ( I )
(Equation 12)
The calculated Rm and Xm values are updated each sample and compared with the set zone reach. The adaptive tripping counter counts the number of permissive tripping results. This effectively removes any influence of errors introduced by the capacitive voltage transformers or by other factors. The directional evaluations are performed simultaneously in both forward and reverse directions, and in all six fault loops. Positive sequence voltage and a phase locked positive sequence memory voltage are used as a reference. This ensures unlimited directional sensitivity for faults close to the relay point. RED 670 Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B 155

5.1.2.5 Directional lines
The evaluation of the directionality takes place in the function block ZD. Equation 13 and equation 14 are used to classify that the fault is in forward direction for line-to-earth fault and phase-phase fault.
0.8 U1L1 + 0.2 U1L1M -ArgDir < arg ----------------------------------------------------------- < ArgNegRes IL1
(Equation 13)
For the L1-L2 element, the equation in forward direction is according to.
0.8 U1L1L2 + 0.2 U1L1L2M -ArgDir < arg ---------------------------------------------------------------------- < ArgNegRes I L1L2
(Equation 14)
where: ArgDir is the setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to 15 (= -15 degrees) and
ArgNegRes is the setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to 115 degrees, see figure 76. U1L1 U1L1M IL1 U1L1L2 U1L1L2M IL1L2 is positive sequence phase voltage in phase L1 is positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase L1 is phase current in phase L1 is voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1) is memorized voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1) is current difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)
The setting of ArgDir and ArgNegRes is by default set to 15 (= -15) and 115 degrees respectively.(see figure 76) and it should not be changed unless system studies have shown the necessity. The ZD gives a binary coded signal on the output STDIR depending on the evaluation where STFWL1N=1 adds 1, STRVL1N=1 adds 2, STFWL2N=1 adds 4 etc.
156
RED 670
ArgNegRes
ArgDir
en05000722.vsd
Figure 76:
Setting angles for discrimination of forward and reverse fault
The reverse directional characteristic is equal to the forward characteristic rotated by 180 degrees. The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive-sequence voltage exceeds 4% of the set base voltage UBase. So the directional element can use it for all unsymmetrical faults including close-in faults. For close-in three-phase faults, the U1L1M memory voltage, based on the same positive sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination. The memory voltage is used for 100 ms or until the positive sequence voltage is restored. After 100 ms, the following occurs: If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current (between 10 and 30% of the set terminal rated current IBase), the condition seals in. If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures. If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element in the reverse direction remains in operation.
If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, the memory resets until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.
5.1.2.6
RED 670
Simplified logic diagrams


Distance protection zones
The design of distance protection zone 1 is presented for all measuring loops: phaseto-earth as well as phase-to-phase. Phase-to-earth related signals are designated by LnE, where n represents the corresponding phase number (L1E, L2E, and L3E). The phase-to-phase signals are designated by LnLm, where n and m represent the corresponding phase numbers (L1L2, L2L3, and L3L1). Fulfillment of two different measuring conditions is necessary to obtain the one logical signal for each separate measuring loop: Zone measuring condition, which follows the operating equations described above. Group functional input signal (STCND), as presented in figure 77.
The STCND input signal represents a connection of six different integer values from the phase selection function within the IED, which are converted within the zone measuring function into corresponding boolean expressions for each condition separately. It is connected to the PHS function block output STCDZ. The internal input signal DIRCND is used to give condition for directionality for the distance measuring zones. The signal contains binary coded information for both forward and reverse direction. The zone measurement function filter out the relevant signals on the STDIR input depending on the setting of the parameter OperationDir. It shall be configured to the STDIR output on the ZD block.
158
RED 670
Figure 77:
Conditioning by a group functional input signal STCND
Composition of the phase starting signals for a case, when the zone operates in a nondirectional mode, is presented in figure 78.
Figure 78:
Composition of starting signals in non-directional operating mode
RED 670
159
Results of the directional measurement enter the logic circuits, when the zone operates in directional (forward or reverse) mode, see figure 79.
STNDL1N DIRL1N STNDL2N DIRL2N STNDL3N DIRL3N STNDL1L2 DIRL1L2 STNDL2L3 DIRL2L3 STNDL3L1 DIRL3L1 AND OR BLK STZMPP AND OR & 15 ms t STL3 AND
AND OR AND OR & 15 ms t STL1 & STZMPE.
AND
OR
&
15 ms t
STL2
&
OR
&
15 ms t
START
en05000778.vsd
Figure 79:
Composition of starting signals in directional operating mode
Tripping conditions for the distance protection zone one are symbolically presented in figure 80.
160
RED 670
Figure 80:
Tripping logic for the distance protection zone one
5.1.3
Function block
ZM01ZMQPDIS_21 I3P U3P BLOCK VTSZ BLKTR STCND DIRCND TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 START STL1 STL2 STL3 STND en06000256.vsd
Figure 81:
ZD01ZDRDIR I3P U3P
ZM function block
STDIR
en05000681.vsd
Figure 82:
ZD function block
5.1.4
RED 670
161
Table 82:
Signal I3P U3P BLOCK VTSZ BLKTR STCND DIRCND
Input signals for the ZMQPDIS_21 (ZM01-) function block

Description Group signal for current input Group signal for voltage input Block of function Blocks all output by fuse failure signal Blocks all trip outputs External start condition (loop enabler) External directional condition
Table 83:
Signal TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 START STL1 STL2 STL3 STND
Output signals for the ZMQPDIS_21 (ZM01-) function block

Description General Trip, issued from any phase or loop Trip signal from phase L1 Trip signal from phase L2 Trip signal from phase L3 General Start, issued from any phase or loop Start signal from phase L1 Start signal from phase L2 Start signal from phase L3 Non-directional start, issued from any phase or loop
Table 84:
Signal I3P U3P
Input signals for the ZDRDIR (ZD01-) function block

Description Group connection Group connection
Table 85:
Signal STDIR
Output signals for the ZDRDIR (ZD01-) function block

Description All start signals binary coded
5.1.5
Setting parameters
162
RED 670
Table 86:
Parameter Operation IBase UBase OperationDir
Basic parameter group settings for the ZMQPDIS_21 (ZM01-) function

Range Off On 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 Off Non-directional Forward Reverse 0.10 - 3000.00 0.10 - 1000.00 Step 1 0.05 Default On 3000 400.00 Forward Unit A kV Description Operation Off / On Base current, i.e. rated current Base voltage, i.e. rated voltage Operation mode of directionality NonDir / Forw / Rev Positive sequence reactance reach Positive seq. resistance for zone characteristic angle Zero sequence reactance reach Zero seq. resistance for zone characteristic angle Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-Ph Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-E Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Phase loops Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer, PhPh Time delay of trip, PhPh Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Earth loops Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer, PhE Time delay of trip, PhE Minimum operate delta current for Phase-Phase loops Minimum operate phase current for Phase-Earth loops Minimum operate residual current for Phase-Earth loops
X1 R1
0.01 0.01
30.00 5.00
ohm/p ohm/p
X0 R0
0.10 - 9000.00 0.50 - 3000.00
0.01 0.01
100.00 15.00
ohm/p ohm/p
RFPP
1.00 - 3000.00
0.01
30.00
ohm/l
RFPE
1.00 - 9000.00
0.01
100.00
ohm/l
OperationPP
Off On Off On 0.000 - 60.000 Off On Off On 0.000 - 60.000 10 - 30
On
Timer tPP
On
tPP OperationPE
0.001 -
0.000 On
s -
Timer tPE
On
tPE IMinOpPP
0.001 1
0.000 20
s %IB
IMinOpPE
10 - 30
20
%IB
IMinOpIN
5 - 30
%IB
RED 670
163
Table 87:
Basic parameter group settings for the ZMQAPDIS_21 (ZM02-) function

Range Off On 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 Off Non-directional Forward Reverse 0.50 - 3000.00 0.10 - 1000.00 Step 1 0.05 Default On 3000 400.00 Forward Unit A kV Description Operation Off / On Base current, i.e. rated current Base voltage, i.e. rated voltage Operation mode of directionality NonDir / Forw / Rev Positive sequence reactance reach Positive seq. resistance for zone characteristic angle Zero sequence reactance reach Zero seq. resistance for zone characteristic angle Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-Ph Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-E Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Phase loops Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer, PhPh Time delay of trip, PhPh Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Earth loops Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer, PhE Time delay of trip, PhE Minimum operate delta current for Phase-Phase loops Minimum operate phase current for Phase-Earth loops
X1 R1
0.01 0.01
40.00 5.00
ohm/p ohm/p
X0 R0
0.50 - 9000.00 0.50 - 3000.00
0.01 0.01
120.00 15.00
ohm/p ohm/p
RFPP
1.00 - 3000.00
0.01
30.00
ohm/l
RFPE
1.00 - 9000.00
0.01
100.00
ohm/l
OperationPP
Off On Off On 0.000 - 60.000 Off On Off On 0.000 - 60.000 10 - 30
On
Timer tPP
On
tPP OperationPE
0.001 -
0.000 On
s -
Timer tPE
On
tPE IMinOpPP
0.001 1
0.000 20
s %IB
IMinOpPE
10 - 30
20
%IB
164
RED 670
Table 88:
Parameter ArgNegRes
Parameter group settings for the ZDRDIR (ZD01-) function

Range 90 - 175 Step 1 Default 115 Unit Deg Description Angle to blinder in second quadrant for forward direction Angle to blinder in fourth quadrant for forward direction Minimum operate current in % of IBase Base Current Base Voltage
ArgDir
5 - 45
15
Deg
IMinOp IBase UBase
1 - 99999 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00
1 1 0.05
10 3000 400.00
%IB A kV
5.1.6
Technical data
Table 89:
Function Number of zones Minimum operate residual current, zone 1 Minimum operate current, Ph-Ph and Ph-E Positive sequence reactance, zone 1 Positive sequence resistance, zone 2-5 Positive sequence resistance Zero sequence reactance, zone 1 Zero sequence resistance, zone 2-5 Zero sequence resistance Fault resistance, Ph-E Fault resistance, Ph-Ph Dynamic overreach Impedance zone timers Operate time Reset ratio Reset time
Distance measuring zone, Quad (PDIS, 21)

Range or value 4 with selectable direction (5-30)% of Ibase (10-30)% of Ibase (0.10-3000.00) /phase (0.50-3000.00) /phase (0.10-1000.00) /phase (0.10-9000.00) /phase (0.50-9000.00) /phase (0.50-3000.00) /phase (1.00-9000.00) /loop (1.00-3000.00) /loop <5% at 85 degrees measured with CCVTs and 0.5<SIR<30 (0.000-60.000) s 24 ms typically 105% typically 30 ms typically 0.5% 10 ms Accuracy 2.0% static accuracy 2.0 degrees static angular accuracy Conditions: Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees
RED 670
165
5.2
Distance protection zones, quadrilateral characteristic for series compensated lines (PDIS)
Function block name: ZMC ANSI number: 21 IEC 61850 logical node name: ZMCPDIS IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
5.2.1
Introduction
The line distance protection is a four zone full scheme protection with three fault loops for phase to phase faults and three fault loops for phase to earth fault for each of the independent zones. Individual settings for each zone resistive and reactive reach gives flexibility for use onoverhead lines and cables of different types and lengths. Quad characteristic is available. The function has a functionality for load encroachment which increases the possibility to detect high resistive faults on heavily loaded linessee figure 70.
X Forward operation
R Reverse operation
en05000034.vsd
Figure 83:
Typical quadrilateral distance protection zone with load encroachment function activated
166
RED 670
The independent measurement of impedance for each fault loop together with a sensitive and reliable built in phase selection makes the function suitable in applications with single phase auto-reclosing. Built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm for the quadrilateral function prevents overreaching of zone1 at load exporting end at phase to earth faults on heavily loaded power lines. The distance protection zones can operate, independent of each other, in directional (forward or reverse) or non-directional mode. This makes them suitable, together with different communication schemes, for the protection of power lines and cables in complex network configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal lines etc.
5.2.2
5.2.2.1
The execution of the different fault loops within the IED670 are of full scheme type, which means that each fault loop for phase to earth faults and phase to phase faults for forward and reverse faults are executed in parallel. Figure 84 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for the basic five, impedance-measuring zones.
L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 1
L1-N
L2-N
L3-N
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
Zone 2
L1-N
L2-N
L3-N
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
Zone 3
L1-N
L2-N
L3-N
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
Zone 4
L1-N
L2-N
L3-N
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
Zone 5
en05000458.vsd
Figure 84:
The different measuring loops at line-earth fault and phase-phase fault.
The use of full scheme technique gives faster operation time compared to switched schemes which mostly uses a start element to select correct voltages and current depending on fault type. Each distance protection zone performs like one independent distance protection relay with six measuring elements.
5.2.2.2
The distance measuring zone include six impedance measuring loops; three intended for phase-to-earth faults, and three intended for phase-to-phase as well as three-phase faults.
RED 670
167
The distance measuring zone will essentially operate according to the non-directional impedance characteristics presented in figure 85 and figure 86. The phase-to-earth characteristic is illustrated with the full loop reach while the phase-to-phase characteristic presents the per-phase reach.
X RFRVE
(Ohm/loop)
R1+Rn RFFWPE
X 0PE - X 1RVPE XNRV = X 0PG - 1 1RVPG X XNRV = X 0PE - X3RVPE = XNRV 3 3 X 0PE - X 1FWPE XNFW ==XX PE - X 1X1FWPG = 0 0PG - FWPE XNFW XNFW 33 3
X1FWPE+XNFW
jN
jN
R (Ohm/loop)
RFRVE
RFFWPE
X1RVPE+XNRV
RFRVE
R1+Rn RFFWPE
en07000060.vsd
Figure 85:
Characteristic for the phase-to-earth measuring loops, ohm/loop domain.
168
RED 670
X (Ohm/phase) RFVPP
2
R1PP
RFFWPP
2
X1FWPP
X 0PE - X 1RVPE XNRV = X 0PG -1 1RVPG X XNRV = X 0PE - X3RVPE XNRV = 33 X 0PE - X 1FWPE XNFW ==XX PE - X 1X 1FWPG = 0 0PG - FWPE XNFW XNFW 33 3
j
R (Ohm/phase)
RFRVPP
2
RFFWPP
2
X1RVPP
RFVPP
2
R1PP
RFFWPP
2
en07000062.vsd
Figure 86:
Characteristic for the phase-to-phase measuring loops
The fault loop reach with respect to each fault type may also be presented as in figure 87. Note in particular the difference in definition regarding the (fault) resistive reach for phase-to-phase faults and three-phase faults.
RED 670
169
UL1
ILn
R1 + j X1
Phase-to-earth element
Phase-to-earth fault in phase L1
RFPE (Arc + tower resistance) 0 IN (R0-R1)/3 + j (X0-X1)/3 )
Phase-to-phase fault in phase L1-L2
UL1
IL1
R1 + j X1
Phase-to-phase element L1-L2 RFPP (Arc resistance)
IL2 UL2 R1 + j X1
UL1 Three-phase fault UL3
IL1
R1 + j X1
0.5RFPP
Phase-to-phase element L1-L3
IL3 R1 + j X1 0.5RFPP
en05000181.vsd
Figure 87:
where: n m
Fault loop model
designates anyone of the three phases (1, 2 or 3) and represents the phase that is leading phase n with 120 degrees (i.e. 3, 1 or 2).
The R1 and jX1 in figure 87 represents the positive sequence impedance from the measuring point to the fault location. The RFPE and RFPP is the eventual fault resistance in the fault place. Regarding the illustration of three-phase fault in figure 87, there is of course fault current flowing also in the third phase during a three-phase fault. The illustration merely reflects the loop measurement, which is made phase-to-phase. The zone may be set to operate in Non-directional, Forward or Reverse direction through the setting OperationDir. The result from respective set value is illustrated in figure 88. It may be convenient to once again mention that the impedance reach is symmetric, forward and reverse direction. Therefore, all reach settings apply to both directions. 170 Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B RED 670
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
en05000182.vsd
Figure 88:
Directional operating modes of the distance measuring zone
5.2.2.3
Minimum operating current

The operation of the distance measuring zone is blocked if the magnitude of input currents fall below certain threshold values. The phase-to-earth loop Ln is blocked if ILn < IMinOpPE. For zone 1 with load compensation feature the additional criterion applies, that all phase-to-earth loops will be blocked when IN < IMinOpIN, regardless of the phase currents. ILn is the RMS value of the current in phase Ln. IN is the RMS value of the vector sum of the three phase currents, i.e. residual current 3I0. The phase-to-phase loop LmLn is blocked if ILmLnAB (BC or CA)< IMinOpPP. ILmLn is the RMS value of the vector difference between phase currents Lm and Ln. All three current limits IminOpPE, IminOpIN and IMinOpPP are automatically reduced to 75% of regular set values if the zone is set to operate in reverse direction, i.e. OperationDir=Reverse.
5.2.2.4
Measuring principles
Fault loop equations use the complex values of voltage, current, and changes in the current. Apparent impedances are calculated and compared with the set limits. The calculation of the apparent impedances at ph-ph faults follows equation 15 (example for a phase L1 to phase L2 fault).
RED 670
171
UL1 UL2 ---------------------Zapp = -I L1 IL2
(Equation 15)
Here U and I represent the corresponding voltage and current phasors in the respective phase. The earth return compensation applies in a conventional manner to ph-E faults (example for a phase L1 to earth fault) according to equation 17.
U L1 Z app = ----------------------------I L1 + I N KN
(Equation 16)
Where: UL1, IL1 and IN are the phase voltage, phase current and residual current present to the IED KN is defined as:
KN =
X0 - X1 3X1
where X0 and X1 is zero and positive sequence reactance from the measuring point to the fault on the protected line.
Here IN is a phasor of the residual current at the relay point. This results in the same reach along the line for all types of faults. The apparent impedance is considered as an impedance loop with resistance R and reactance X. The formula given in equation 17 is only valid for no loaded radial feeder applications. When load is considered in the case of single line to earth fault, conventional distance protection might overreach at exporting end and underreach at importing end. REx670 has an adaptive load compensation which increases the security in such applications. Measuring elements receive current and voltage information from the A/D converter. The check sums are calculated and compared, and the information is distributed into memory locations. For each of the six supervised fault loops, sampled values of voltage (U), current (I), and changes in current between samples (DI) are brought from the input memory and fed to a recursive Fourier filter. The filter provides two orthogonal values for each input. These values are related to the loop impedance according to equation 18,
X Di -- --U = R i + ---- -w 0 Dt
(Equation 18)
in complex notation, or:
172
RED 670
X D Re ( I ) Re ( U ) = R Re ( I ) + ------ ----------------w0 Dt
(Equation 19)
X DIm ( I ) Im ( U ) = R Im ( I ) + ------ ---------------Dt w0
(Equation 20)
with
w0 = 2 p f 0
(Equation 21)
where: Re Im f0 designates the real component of current and voltage, designates the imaginary component of current and voltage and designates the rated system frequency
The algorithm calculates Rm measured resistance from the equation for the real value of the voltage and substitute it in the equation for the imaginary part. The equation for the Xm measured reactance can then be solved. The final result is equal to:
Im ( U ) DRe ( I ) Re ( U ) D Im ( I ) ----------------------------------R m = -----------------------------------------------DRe ( I ) Im ( I ) D Im ( I ) Re ( I )
(Equation 22)
Re ( U ) Im ( I ) Im ( U ) Re ( I )Xm = w 0 Dt -----------------------------------------------------------------------------DRe ( I ) Im ( I ) DIm ( I ) Re ( I )
(Equation 23)
The calculated Rm and Xm values are updated each sample and compared with the set zone reach. The adaptive tripping counter counts the number of permissive tripping results. This effectively removes any influence of errors introduced by the capacitive voltage transformers or by other factors. The directional evaluations are performed simultaneously in both forward and reverse directions, and in all six fault loops. Positive sequence voltage and a phase locked positive sequence memory voltage are used as a reference. This ensures unlimited directional sensitivity for faults close to the relay point.
5.2.2.5
Directionality for series compensation

In the basic distance protection function, the control of the memory for polarizing voltage is performed by an under voltage control. In case of series compensated line, a voltage reversal can occur with a relatively high voltage also when the memory must be locked. Thus, a simple undervoltage type of voltage memory control can not be used in case of voltage reversal. In the option for series compensated network the
RED 670
173
polarizing quantity and memory are controlled by an impedance measurement criterion. The polarizing voltage is a memorized positive sequence voltage. The memory is continuously synchronized via a positive sequence filter. The memory is starting to run freely instantaneously when a voltage change is detected in any phase. A nondirectional impedance measurement is used to detect a fault and identify the faulty phase or phases. At a three phase fault when no positive sequence voltage remains (all three phases are disconnected) the memory is used for direction polarization during 100 ms. The memory predicts the phase of the positive sequence voltage with the pre-fault frequency. This extrapolation is made with a high accuracy and it is not the accuracy of the memory that limits the time the memory can be used. The network is at a three phase fault under way to a new equilibrium and the post-fault condition can only be predicted accurately for a limited time from the pre-fault condition. In case of a three phase fault after 100 ms the phase of the memorized voltage can not be relied upon and the directional measurement has to be blocked. The achieved direction criteria are sealed-in when the directional measurement is blocked and kept until the impedance fault criteria is reset (the direction is stored until the fault is cleared). This memory control allows in the time domain unlimited correct directional measurement for all unsymmetrical faults also at voltage reversal. Only at three phase fault within the range of the set impedance reach of the criteria for control of the polarization voltage the memory has to be used and the measurement is limited to 100 ms and thereafter the direction is sealed-in. The special impedance measurement to control the polarization voltage is set separately and has only to cover (with some margin) the impedance to fault that can cause the voltage reversal. The evaluation of the directionality takes place in the function block ZDS. Equation 24 and equation 25 are used to classify that the fault is in forward direction for line-to-earth fault and phase-phase fault.
- ArgDir < arg U 1L1M < ArgNeg Re s I L1
(Equation 24)
For the L1-L2 element, the equation in forward direction is according to.
- ArgDir < arg U 1L1L 2 M < ArgNeg Re s I L1L 2
(Equation 25)
where: ArgDir is the setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to 15 (= -15 degrees) and
ArgNegRes is the setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to 115 degrees, see figure 89.
174
RED 670
U1L1M IL1 U1L1L2M IL1L2
is positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase L1 is phase current in phase L1 is memorized voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1) is current difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)
The setting of ArgDir and ArgNegRes is by default set to 15 (= -15) and 115 degrees respectively.(see figure 89) and it should not be changed unless system studies have shown the necessity. The ZDS gives a binary coded signal on the output STDIR depending on the evaluation where STFWL1N=1 adds 1, STRVL1N=1 adds 2, STFWL2N=1 adds 4 etc.
X
ArgNegRes
ArgDir
en05000722.vsd
Figure 89:
Setting angles for discrimination of forward and reverse fault
The reverse directional characteristic is equal to the forward characteristic rotated by 180 degrees.
5.2.2.6
Simplified logic diagrams Distance protection zones
The design of distance protection zone 1 is presented for all measuring loops: phaseto-earth as well as phase-to-phase.
RED 670
175
Phase-to-earth related signals are designated by LnE, where n represents the corresponding phase number (L1E, L2E, and L3E). The phase-to-phase signals are designated by LnLm, where n and m represent the corresponding phase numbers (L1L2, L2L3, and L3L1). Fulfillment of two different measuring conditions is necessary to obtain the one logical signal for each separate measuring loop: Zone measuring condition, which follows the operating equations described above. Group functional input signal (STCND), as presented in figure 90.
The STCND input signal represents a connection of six different integer values from the phase selection function within the IED, which are converted within the zone measuring function into corresponding boolean expressions for each condition separately. It is connected to the PHS function block output STCDZ. The internal input signal DIRCND is used to give condition for directionality for the distance measuring zones. The signal contains binary coded information for both forward and reverse direction. The zone measurement function filter out the relevant signals on the STDIR input depending on the setting of the parameter OperationDir. It shall be configured to the STDIR output on the ZDS block.
176
RED 670
Figure 90:
Conditioning by a group functional input signal STCND
Composition of the phase starting signals for a case, when the zone operates in a nondirectional mode, is presented in figure 91.
Figure 91:
Composition of starting signals in non-directional operating mode
RED 670
177
Results of the directional measurement enter the logic circuits, when the zone operates in directional (forward or reverse) mode, see figure 92.
STNDL1N DIRL1N STNDL2N DIRL2N STNDL3N DIRL3N STNDL1L2 DIRL1L2 STNDL2L3 DIRL2L3 STNDL3L1 DIRL3L1 AND OR BLK STZMPP AND OR & 15 ms t STL3 AND
AND OR AND OR & 15 ms t STL1 & STZMPE.
AND
OR
&
15 ms t
STL2
&
OR
&
15 ms t
START
en05000778.vsd
Figure 92:
Composition of starting signals in directional operating mode
Tripping conditions for the distance protection zone one are symbolically presented in figure 93.
178
RED 670
Figure 93:
Tripping logic for the distance protection zone one
5.2.3
Function block
ZMC1ZMCPDIS_21 I3P U3P BLOCK VTSZ BLKTR STCND DIRCND TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 START STL1 STL2 STL3 STND en07000036.vsd
Figure 94:
ZMC function block

ZDS1ZDSRDIR
I3P U3P
STFW STRV STDIRCND en07000035.vsd
Figure 95:
ZDS function block
5.2.4
RED 670
179
Table 90:
Signal I3P U3P BLOCK VTSZ BLKTR STCND DIRCND
Input signals for the ZMCPDIS_21 (ZMC1-) function block

Description Group signal for current input Group signal for voltage input Block of function Blocks all output by fuse failure signal Blocks all trip outputs External start condition (loop enabler) External directional condition
Table 91:
Signal TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 START STL1 STL2 STL3 STND
Output signals for the ZMCPDIS_21 (ZMC1-) function block

Description General Trip, issued from any phase or loop Trip signal from phase L1 Trip signal from phase L2 Trip signal from phase L3 General Start, issued from any phase or loop Start signal from phase L1 Start signal from phase L2 Start signal from phase L3 Non-directional start, issued from any phase or loop
Table 92:
Signal I3P U3P
Input signals for the ZDSRDIR (ZDS1-) function block

Description Group connection for current Group connection for voltage
Table 93:
Signal STFW STRV STDIRCND
Output signals for the ZDSRDIR (ZDS1-) function block

Description Start in forward direction Start in reverse direction Binary coded directional information per measuring loop
5.2.5
Setting parameters
180
RED 670
Table 94:
Basic parameter group settings for the ZMCPDIS_21 (ZMC1-) function

Range Off On 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 Off Non-directional Forward Reverse Off On 0.50 - 3000.00 Step 1 0.05 Default On 3000 400.00 Forward Unit A kV Description Operation Off / On Base current, i.e. rated current Base voltage, i.e. rated voltage Operation mode of directionality NonDir / Forw / Rev Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Phase loops Positive sequence reactance reach, PhPh, forward Positive seq. resistance for characteristic angle, Ph-Ph Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, forward Positive sequence reactance reach, PhPh, reverse Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, reverse Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer, PhPh Time delay of trip, PhPh Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Earth loops Positive sequence reactance reach, PhE, forward Positive seq. resistance for characteristic angle, Ph-E Zero sequence reactance reach, PhE Zero seq. resistance for zone characteristic angle, Ph-E Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, forward
OperationPP
On
X1FwPP
0.01
30.00
ohm/p
R1PP
0.10 - 1000.00
0.01
5.00
ohm/p
RFFwPP X1RvPP
1.00 - 3000.00 0.50 - 3000.00
0.01 0.01
30.00 30.00
ohm/l ohm/p
RFRvPP Timer tPP
1.00 - 3000.00 Off On 0.000 - 60.000 Off On 0.50 - 3000.00
0.01 -
30.00 On
ohm/l -
tPP OperationPE
0.001 -
0.000 On
s -
X1FwPE
0.01
30.00
ohm/p
R1PE
0.10 - 1000.00
0.01
5.00
ohm/p
X0PE
0.50 - 9000.00
0.01
100.00
ohm/p
R0PE
0.50 - 3000.00
0.01
47.00
ohm/p
RFFwPE
1.00 - 9000.00
0.01
100.00
ohm/l
RED 670
181

Parameter X1RvPE Range 0.50 - 3000.00 Step 0.01 Default 30.00 Unit ohm/p Description Positive sequence reactance reach, PhE, reverse Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, reverse Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer, PhE Time delay of trip, PhE Minimum operate delta current for Phase-Phase loops Minimum operate phase current for Phase-Earth loops Minimum operate residual current for Phase-Earth loops
RFRvPE Timer tPE
1.00 - 9000.00 Off On 0.000 - 60.000 10 - 30
0.01 -
100.00 On
ohm/l -
tPE IMinOpPP
0.001 1
0.000 20
s %IB
IMinOpPE
10 - 30
20
%IB
IMinOpIN
5 - 30
%IB
Table 95:
Basic parameter group settings for the ZMCAPDIS_21 (ZMC2-) function

Range Off On 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 Off Non-directional Forward Reverse Off On 0.50 - 3000.00 Step 1 0.05 Default On 3000 400.00 Forward Unit A kV Description Operation Off / On Base current, i.e. rated current Base voltage, i.e. rated voltage Operation mode of directionality NonDir / Forw / Rev Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Phase loops Positive sequence reactance reach, PhPh, forward Positive seq. resistance for characteristic angle, Ph-Ph Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, forward Positive sequence reactance reach, PhPh, reverse Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, reverse
OperationPP
On
X1FwPP
0.01
30.00
ohm/p
R1PP
0.10 - 1000.00
0.01
5.00
ohm/p
RFFwPP X1RvPP
1.00 - 3000.00 0.50 - 3000.00
0.01 0.01
30.00 30.00
ohm/l ohm/p
RFRvPP
1.00 - 3000.00
0.01
30.00
ohm/l
182
RED 670

Parameter Timer tPP Range Off On 0.000 - 60.000 Off On 0.50 - 3000.00 Step Default On Unit Description Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer, PhPh Time delay of trip, PhPh Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Earth loops Positive sequence reactance reach, PhE, forward Positive seq. resistance for characteristic angle, Ph-E Zero sequence reactance reach, PhE Zero seq. resistance for zone characteristic angle, Ph-E Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, forward Positive sequence reactance reach, PhE, reverse Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, reverse Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer, PhE Time delay of trip, PhE Minimum operate delta current for Phase-Phase loops Minimum operate phase current for Phase-Earth loops
tPP OperationPE
0.001 -
0.000 On
s -
X1FwPE
0.01
30.00
ohm/p
R1PE
0.10 - 1000.00
0.01
5.00
ohm/p
X0PE
0.50 - 9000.00
0.01
100.00
ohm/p
R0PE
0.50 - 3000.00
0.01
47.00
ohm/p
RFFwPE X1RvPE
1.00 - 9000.00 0.50 - 3000.00
0.01 0.01
100.00 30.00
ohm/l ohm/p
RFRvPE Timer tPE
1.00 - 9000.00 Off On 0.000 - 60.000 10 - 30
0.01 -
100.00 On
ohm/l -
tPE IMinOpPP
0.001 1
0.000 20
s %IB
IMinOpPE
10 - 30
20
%IB
Table 96:
Parameter OperationSC
Basic parameter group settings for the ZDSRDIR (ZDS1-) function

Range NoSeriesComp SeriesComp 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 Step Default SeriesComp Unit Description Special directional criteria for voltage reversal Base setting for current level Base setting for voltage level
IBase UBase
1 0.05
3000 400.00
A kV
RED 670
183

Parameter IMinOpPE Range 5 - 30 Step 1 Default 5 Unit %IB Description Minimum operate phase current for Phase-Earth loops Minimum operate delta current for Phase-Phase loops Angle of blinder in second quadrant for forward direction Angle of blinder in fourth quadrant for forward direction 3I0 limit for releasing phase-to-earth measuring loops 3I0 limit for blocking phase-to-phase measuring loops Operation of load discrimination characteristic Forward resistive reach within the load impedance area Reverse resistive reach within the load impedance area Load angle determining the load impedance area Positive sequence reactance reach, PhPh, forward Positive seq. resistance for characteristic angle, Ph-Ph Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, forward Positive sequence reactance reach, PhPh, reverse Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, reverse Positive sequence reactance reach, PhE, forward Positive seq. resistance for characteristic angle, Ph-E
IMinOpPP
5 - 30
10
%IB
ArgNegRes
90 - 175
130
Deg
ArgDir
5 - 45
15
Deg
INReleasePE
10 - 100
20
%IPh
INBlockPP
10 - 100
40
%IPh
OperationLdCh
Off On 1.00 - 3000.00
On
RLdFw
0.01
80.00
ohm/p
RLdRv
1.00 - 3000.00
0.01
80.00
ohm/p
ArgLd
5 - 70
30
Deg
X1FwPP
0.50 - 3000.00
0.01
40.00
ohm/p
R1PP
0.10 - 1000.00
0.01
7.00
ohm/p
RFFwPP X1RvPP
0.50 - 3000.00 0.50 - 3000.00
0.01 0.01
30.00 40.00
ohm/l ohm/p
RFRvPP X1FwPE
0.50 - 3000.00 0.50 - 3000.00
0.01 0.01
30.00 40.00
ohm/l ohm/p
R1PE
0.10 - 1000.00
0.01
7.00
ohm/p
184
RED 670

Parameter X0FwPE Range 0.50 - 9000.00 Step 0.01 Default 120.00 Unit ohm/p Description Zero sequence reactance reach, PhE, forward Zero seq. resistance for zone characteristic angle, Ph-E Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, forward Positive sequence reactance reach, PhE, reverse Zero sequence reactance reach, PhE, reverse Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, reverse
R0PE
0.50 - 3000.00
0.01
20.00
ohm/p
RFFwPE X1RvPE
1.00 - 9000.00 0.50 - 3000.00
0.01 0.01
100.00 40.00
ohm/l ohm/p
X0RvPE
0.50 - 9000.00
0.01
120.00
ohm/p
RFRvPE
1.00 - 9000.00
0.01
100.00
ohm/l
5.2.6
Technical data
Table 97:
Function Number of zones Minimum operate residual current, zone 1 Minimum operate current, Ph-Ph and Ph-E Positive sequence reactance, zone 1 Positive sequence resistance, zone 2-5 Positive sequence resistance Zero sequence reactance, zone 1 Zero sequence resistance, zone 2-5 Zero sequence resistance Fault resistance, Ph-E Fault resistance, Ph-Ph Dynamic overreach Impedance zone timers Operate time Reset ratio Reset time
Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for series compensated lines (PDIS, 21)
Range or value 4 with selectable direction (5-30)% of Ibase (10-30)% of Ibase (0.10-3000.00) /phase (0.50-3000.00) /phase (0.10-1000.00) /phase (0.10-9000.00) /phase (0.50-9000.00) /phase (0.50-3000.00) /phase (1.00-9000.00) /loop (1.00-3000.00) /loop <5% at 85 degrees measured with CCVTs and 0.5<SIR<30 (0.000-60.000) s 24 ms typically 105% typically 30 ms typically 0.5% 10 ms Accuracy 2.0% static accuracy 2.0 degrees static angular accuracy Conditions: Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees
RED 670
185
5.3
Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic, PDIS 21

Function block name: ZMHx-ANSI number: 21 IEC 61850 logical node name: ZMHPDIS IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
5.3.1
Introduction
The numerical mho line distance protection is a four zone full scheme protection for back-up detection of short circuit and earth faults. The full scheme technique provides back-up protection of power lines with high sensitivity and low requirement on remote end communication. The four zones have fully independent measuring and settings which gives high flexibility for all types of lines. The modern technical solution offers fast operating time down to cycles. The IED can be used up to the highest voltage levels. It is suitable for the protection of heavily loaded lines and multi-terminal lines where the requirement for tripping is one, two- and/or three pole. The independent measurement of impedance for each fault loop together with a sensitive and reliable built in phase selection makes the function suitable in applications with single phase auto-reclosing. Built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents overreaching at phase-toearth faults on heavily loaded power lines, see figure 96.
186
RED 670
jX
Operation area
Operation area
Operation area
No operation area
No operation area
en07000117.vsd
Figure 96:
Load encroachment influence on the offset mho characteristic
The distance protection zones can operate, independent of each other, in directional (forward or reverse) or non-directional mode. This makes them suitable, together with different communication schemes, for the protection of power lines and cables in complex network configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal lines etc. The possibility to use the phase-to-earth quadrilateral impedance characteristic together with the mho characteristic increases the possibility to overcome eventual lack of sensitivity of the mho element due to the shaping of the curve at remote end faults. The integrated control and monitoring functions offers effective solutions for operating and monitoring all types of transmission and sub transmission lines.
5.3.2
5.3.2.1
The execution of the different fault loops within the REx 6xx are of full scheme type, which means that each fault loop for phase to earth faults and phase to phase faults are executed in parallel. The use of full scheme technique gives faster operation time compare to switched schemes which mostly uses a start element to select correct voltages and current depending on fault type. So each distance protection zone performs like one independent distance protection relay with six measuring elements.
5.3.2.2
The distance function consists of five instances. Each instance can be selected to be either forward or reverse with cross polarized mho characteristic alternatively self polarized offset Mho characteristics with reverse offset. The operating characteristic is in accordance to figure 97 below where zone5 is selected offset Mho.
RED 670
187
jX Mho, zone4
Mho, zone3
Zs=0
Mho, zone2
R
Mho, zone1
Zs=Z1
R
Zs=2Z1
Offset mho, zone5 en06000400.vsd
Figure 97:
Mho, offset Mho characteristic and the source impedance influence on the Mho characteristic
The mho characteristic has a dynamic expansion due to the source impedance. Instead of crossing the origin as for the offset mho in the left figure 97, which is only valid where the source impedance is zero, the crossing point is moved to the coordinates of the negative source impedance given an expansion of the circle shown in the right figure 97. The polarisation quantities used for the mho circle is 100% memorized positive sequence voltages. This will give a somewhat less dynamic expansion of the mho circle during faults. However, if the source impedance is high, the dynamic expansion of the mho circle might lower the security of the function too much with high loading and mild power swing conditions. The mho distance element has a load encroachment function which cut off a section of the characteristic when enabled. The function is enabled by setting the setting parameter LoadEnchMode to On. Enabling of the load encroachment function increases the possibility to detect high resistive faults without interfering with the load impedance. The algorithm for the load encroachment is located in the PHSM function, where also the relevant settings can be found. Information about the load encroachment from the PHS to the zone measurement is given in binary format to the input signal LDCND.
5.3.2.3
Basic operation characteristics

Each impedance zone can be switched On and Off by the setting parameter Operation. Each zone can also be set to Non-directional, Forward or Reverse by setting the parameter DirMode . The operation for phase to earth and phase to phase fault can be individually switched On and Off by the setting parameter OpModePE and OpModePP.
188
RED 670
For critical applications such as for lines with high SIRs as well as CVTs, it is possible to improve the security by setting the parameter ReachMode to Underreach. In this mode the reach for faults close to the zone reach is reduced by 20% and the filtering is also introduced to increase the accuracy in the measuring. If the ReachMode is set to Overreach no reduction of the reach is introduced and no extra filtering introduced. The latter setting is recommended for overreaching pilot zone, zone 2 or zone 3 elements and reverse zone where overreaching on transients is not a major issue either because of less likelihood of overreach with higher settings or the fact that these elements do not initiate tripping unconditionally. The offset mho characteristic can be set in Non-directional, Forward or Reverse by the setting parameter OffsetMhoDir. When Forward or Reverse is selected a directional line is introduced. Information about the directional line is given from the directional element and given to the measuring element as binary coded signal to the input DIRCND. The zone reach for phase to earth fault and phase to phase fault is set individually in polar coordinates. The impedance is set by the parameters ZPE and ZPP and the corresponding arguments by the parameters ZAngPE and ZAngPP. Compensation for earth return path for faults involving earth is done by setting the parameter KNMag and KNAng where KNMag is the magnitude of the earth return path and KNAng is the difference of angles between KNMag and ZPE. KNMag and KNAng are defined according to equation 26 and equation 27.
KNMag = Z0-Z1 3 Z1
(Equation 26)
Z0-Z1 KNAng = ( ZAngPE ) - arg 3 Z1
(Equation 27)
Where: Z0 Z1 ZAngP E is the complex zero sequence impedance of the line in ohm/phase is the complex positive sequence impedance of the line in ohm/phase line angle of the positive line impedance
The phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase measuring loops can be time delayed individually by setting the parameter tPE and tPP respectively. To release the time delay, the operation mode for the timers, OpModetPE and OpModetPP, has to be set to On. This is also the case for instantaneous operation. The function can be blocked in the following ways: RED 670 activating of input BLOCK blocks the whole function activating of the input BLKZ (fuse failure) blocks all output signals activating of the input BLKZMTD blocks the delta based algorithm 189
activating of the input BLKHSIR blocks the instantaneous part of the algorithm for high SIR values activating of the input BLKTRIP blocks all output signals activating the input BLKPE blocks the phase-to-earth fault loop outputs activating the input BLKPP blocks the phase-to-phase fault loop outputs
The activation of signal BLKZ can either be by external fuse failure function or from the loss of voltage check in the Mho supervision logic (ZSMGAPC). In both cases the output BLKZ in the Mho supervision logic shall be connected to the input BLKZ in the Mho distance function block (ZMHODIS 21). The input signal BLKZMTD is activated during some ms after fault has been detected by the Mho supervision logic to avoid unwanted operations due to transients. It shall be connected to the BLKZMTD output signal at the Mho supervision function. At SIR values >10, the use of electronic CVT might cause overreach due to the built in resonance circuit in the CVT which reduce the secondary voltage for a while. The input BLKHSIR shall be connected to the output signal HSIR on the Mho supervision logic for increasing of the filtering and high SIR values. This is valid only when permissive underreach scheme is selected by setting ReachMode=Underreach.
5.3.2.4
Theory for operation

The Mho algorithm is based on phase comparison of a operating phasor and a polarizing phasor. When the operating phasor leads the reference phasor by more than 90 degrees, the function will operate and give a trip output.
Phase-to-phase fault
Mho The plain Mho circle has the characteristic as figure 98The condition for deriving the angle is according to equation 28.
b = arg(U L1 L 2 - I L1 L 2 ZPP ) - arg(U pol )

where: the voltage vector difference between phases L1 and L2
(Equation 28)
U L1 L 2
the current vector difference between phases L1 and L2
I L1 L 2
ZPP Upol the positive sequence impedance setting for phase to phase fault is the polarizing voltage
190
RED 670
The polarized voltage consists of 100% memorized positive sequence voltage (UL1L2 for phase L1 to L2 fault). The memorized voltage will prevent collapse of the Mho circle for close in faults. Operation occurs if 90270
IL1L2X
Ucomp = UL1L2 - IL1L2 ZPP IL1L2 ZPP
Upol UL1L2
IL1L2R
en07000109.vsd
Figure 98:
Simplified mho characteristic and vectordiagram for phase L1 to L2 fault.
Offset Mho The characteristic for offset mho is a circle where two points on the circle are the setting parameters ZPP and ZRevPP. The vector ZPP in the impedance plane has the settable angle AngZPP and the angle for ZRevPP is AngZPP+180. The condition for operation at phase to phase fault is that the angle between the two compensated voltages Ucomp1 and Ucomp2 is greater or equal to 90 figure 99. The angle will be 90 for fault location on the boundary of the circle. The angle for L1 to L2 fault can be defined according to equation 32.
b = arg
U-(-IL1L2 ZRevPP)
U -IL1L2 ZPP
(Equation 31)
where:
RED 670
191
U
ZRevPP
= is the UL1L2 voltage
= is the positive sequence impedance setting for phase to phase fault in reverse direction
IL1L2jX
Ucomp1 = UL1L2 - IL1L2 ZPP IL1L2 ZPP
U Ucomp2 = U = IFZF=UL1L2 IL1L2R
- IL1L2 Z RevPP
en07000110.vsd
Figure 99:
Simplified offset mho characteristic and voltage vectors for phase L1 to L2 fault.
For operation the angle should be 90<<270. Offset Mho, forward direction When forward direction has been selected for the offset mho, an extra criteria beside the one for offset mho equation 33 is introdced, that is the angle between the voltage and the current must lie between the blinders in second quadrant and fourth quadrant. See figure 100 below. So the condition for operation will be
90 < b < 270

and
(Equation 33)
ArgDir < j < ArgNegR e s
(Equation 34)
192
RED 670
where
ArgDir ArgNegRes
is the setting parameter for directional line in fourth quadrant is the setting parameter for directional line in second quadrant is calculated according to equation 32
The directional information is brought to the mho distance measurement from the mho directional element as binary coded information to the input DIRCND. See chapter Mho directional element for information about the mho directionalety element.
IL1L2jX
ZPP
UL1L2
ArgNegRes
IL1L2
ArgDir
en07000111.vsd
Figure 100:
Simplified offset mho characteristic in forward direction for phase L1 to L2 fault.
Offset Mho, reverse direction The operation area for offset Mho in reverse direction is according to figure 101. The operation area in second quadrant is ArgNegRes+180. The conditions for operation are
90 < b < 270

and
(Equation 35)
180 - ArgDir < j < ArgNeg Re s + 180
(Equation 36)
RED 670
193
The is derived according to equation 32 for the mho circle and is the angle between the voltage and current.
X ZPP
ArgNegRes
IL1L2
ArgDir
UL1L2
ZRevPP
en06000469.eps
Figure 101:
Operation characteristice for reverse phase L1phase L2 fault.
Phase-to-earth fault
Mho The measuring of earth faults uses earth return compensation applied in a conventional way. The compensation voltage is derived by considering the influence from the earth return path. For a earth fault in phase L1A, we can derive the compensation voltage Ucomp see figure 102 as
Ucomp = U pol - I L1 Z loop

where Upol Zloop is the polarizing voltage (memorized UL1 for Phase L1 to earth fault) is the loop impedance, which in general terms can be expressed as
(Equation 37)
Z1+ZN = Z 1 1 + KN
)
RED 670
194
where Z1 KN positive sequence impedance of the line (Ohm/phase) zero sequence compensator factor
The angle between the Ucomp and the polarize voltage Upol for a L1 to earth fault is
b = arg U L1 - I L1 + IN KN ZPE - arg(Upol)
(Equation 39)
where: UL1 VA IL1 IA IN = phase voltage in faulty phase L1 = phase voltage in faulty phase A = phase current in faulty phase L1 = phase current in faulty phase A = zero sequence current in faulty phase L1 =
KN
Z0-Z1 3 Z1
the setting parameter for the zero sequence compensation consisting of the magnitude KN and the angle KNAng.
Upol Vpol
= 100% of positive sequence memorized voltage UL1 = 100% of positive sequence memorized voltage VA
It is to be noted that the angle KNAng is the difference angle between the positive sequence impedance ZPE and the impedance ZN for the earth return path see figure 102
RED 670
195
IL1X
KNAng IL1ZN
Ucomp
IL1 Zloop
IL1ZPE Upol f IL1 (Ref)
IL1R
en06000472.vsd
Figure 102:
Simplified offset mho characteristic and vectordiagram for phase L1 to earth fault.
Operation occurs if
90 b 270
(Equation 42)
Offset Mho The characteristic for offset mho at earth fault is a circle containing the two vectors from the origin ZPE and ZRevPE where ZPE and ZrevPE are the settting reach for the positive sequence impedance in forward respective reverse direction. The vector ZPE in the impedance plane has the settable angle AngZPE and the angle for ZRevPP is AngZPE+180 The condition for operation at phase to earth fault is that the angle between the two compensated voltages Ucomp1 and Ucomp2 is greater or equal to 90 see figure 103. The angle will be 90 for fault location on the boundary of the circle. The angle for L1 to earth fault can be defined as
b = arg
b = arg
UL1-(- IL1 Z Re vPE )

UL1- IL1L ZPE
UL1- IL1L ZPE
UL1-(- IL1 Z Re vPE )
(Equation 43)
where is the phase L1 phase voltage
U L1
196 Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B RED 670
IL1L 2 jX
IL1 ZPE
U comp1 = UL1 - I L1 ZPE
UL1
U comp2 = UL1 - (-IL1 ZRevPE)

IL1L2 R
- I L1 Z Re vPe
en 06000465 .vsd
IABjX
IA ZPE
V comp1 = VA - IA ZPE
VA
V comp2 = VA - (-IA ZRevPE)

I AB R
- IA Z RevPe
en 06000465 _ansi. vsd
Figure 103:
Simplified offset mho characteristic and voltage vector for phase L1 to L2 fault.
Operation occurs if
90 b 270
(Equation 45)
RED 670
197

Offset Mho, forward direction In the same way as for phase-to-phase fault, selection of forward direction of offset mho will introduce an extra criteria for operation. Beside the basic criteria for offset mho according to equations 43 and 45, also the criteria that the angle between the voltage and the current must lie between the blinders in second and fourth quadrant. See figure 104. The condition for operation will hereby be 90<<270 and ArgDir<<ArgNegRes.
where
ArgDir ArgNegRes
is the setting parameter for directional line in fourth quadrant is the setting parameter for directional line in second quadrant. is calculated according to equation 43
IL1 jX
UL1
ArgNegRes
IL1
ArgDir
IL1R
en 06000466 .vsd
Figure 104:
Simplified characteristic for offset mho in forward direction for L1 to earth fault.
Offset mho, reverse direction In the same way as for offset in forward direction, the selection of offset mho in reverse direction will introduce an extra criteria for operation compare to the normal offset Mho. The extra is that the angle between the fault voltage and the fault current shall lie between the blinders in second and fourth quadrant. The operation area in second quadrant is limited by the blinder defined as 180 -ArgDir and in fourth quadrant ArgNegRes+180, see figure 105 The conditions for operation of offset Mho in reverse direction for L1 to earth fault will be 90<<270 and 180-Argdir<<ArgNegRes+180.
198
RED 670
The is derived according to equation 43 for the offset Mho circle and is the angle between the voltage and current.
RED 670
199
X ZPE
ArgNegRes IL1 ArgDir UL1 ZRevPE R
en06000470.eps
X ZPE
ArgNegRes IA ArgDir VA ZRevPE R
en06000470_ansi.eps
200
RED 670

Figure 105: Simplified characteristic for offset Mho in reverse direction for L1 to earth fault.
5.3.3
Function block
ZMH1ZMHPDIS_21 I3P U3P CURR_INP VOLT_INP POL_VOLT BLOCK BLKZ BLKZMTD BLKHSIR BLKTRIP BLKPE BLKPP DIRCND STCND LDCND TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TRPE TRPP START STL1 STL2 STL3 STPE STPP
en06000423.vsd
Figure 106:
ZMH function block
5.3.4

Table 98:
Signal I3P U3P CURR_INP VOLT_INP POL_VOLT BLOCK BLKZ BLKZMTD BLKHSIR BLKTRIP BLKPE BLKPP DIRCND STCND LDCND
Input signals for the ZMHPDIS_21 (ZMH1-) function block

Description Connection for current sample signals Connection for voltage sample signals Connection for current signals Connection for voltage signals Connection for polarizing voltage Block of function Block due to fuse failure Block signal for blocking of time domaine function Blocks time domain function at high SIR Blocks all operate output signals Blocks phase-to-earth operation Blocks phase-to-phase operation External directional condition External start condition (loop enabler) External load condition (loop enabler)
RED 670
201
Table 99:
Signal TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TRPE TRPP START STL1 STL2 STL3 STPE STPP
Output signals for the ZMHPDIS_21 (ZMH1-) function block

Description Trip General Trip phase L1 Trip phase L2 Trip phase L3 Trip phase-to-earth Trip phase-to-phase Start General Start phase L1 Start phase L2 Start phase L3 Start phase-to-earth Start phase-to-phase
5.3.5
Setting parameters
Table 100:
Parameter Operation IBase UBase DirMode
Basic parameter group settings for the ZMHPDIS_21 (ZMH1-) function

Range Off ON 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 Off Offset Forward Reverse Off ON OverReach Underreach Off ON 0.005 - 3000.000 Step 1 0.05 Default ON 3000 400.00 Forward Unit A kV Description Operation Off/On Base current Base voltage Direction mode
LoadEnchMode ReachMode OpModePE
Off OverReach ON
Load enchroachment mode Off/On Reach mode Over/ Underreach Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Earth loops Positive sequence impedance setting for Phase-Earth loop Angle for positive sequence line impedance for PhaseEarth loop Magnitud of earth return compensation factor KN
ZPE
0.001
30.000
ohm/p
ZAngPE
10 - 90
80
Deg
KN
0.00 - 3.00
0.01
0.80
202
RED 670

Parameter KNAng Range -180 - 180 Step 1 Default -15 Unit Deg Description Angle for earth return compensation factor KN Reverse reach of the phase to earth loop(magnitude) Delay time for operation of phase to earth elements Minimum operation phase to earth current Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Phase loops Impedance setting reach for phase to phase elements Angle for positive sequence line impedance for PhasePhase elements Reverse reach of the phase to phase loop(magnitude) Delay time for operation of phase to phase Minimum operation phase to phase current
ZRevPE
0.005 - 3000.000
0.001
30.000
ohm/p
tPE
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
IMinOpPE OpModePP
10 - 30 Off ON 0.005 - 3000.000
1 -
20 ON
%IB -
ZPP
0.001
30.000
ohm/p
ZAngPP
10 - 90
85
Deg
ZRevPP
0.005 - 3000.000
0.001
30.000
ohm/p
tPP
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
IMinOpPP
10 - 30
20
%UB
Table 101:
Parameter OffsetMhoDir
Advanced parameter group settings for the ZMHPDIS_21 (ZMH1-) function

Range Non-directional Forward Reverse Off ON Off ON Step Default Non-directional Unit Description Direction mode for offset mho Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer, PhE Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer, Phph
OpModetPE
ON
OpModetPP
ON
RED 670
203
Table 102:
Parameter IBase UBase PilotMode Zreach IMinOp
Basic parameter group settings for the ZSMGAPC (ZSM1-) function

Range 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 Off On 0.1 - 3000.0 10 - 30 Step 1 0.05 0.1 1 Default 3000 400.00 Off 38.0 20 Unit A kV ohm %IB Description Base value for current measurement Base value for voltage measurement Pilot mode Off/On Line impedance Minimum operating current for SIR measurement
Table 103:
Parameter DeltaI
Advanced parameter group settings for the ZSMGAPC (ZSM1-) function

Range 0 - 200 Step 1 Default 10 Unit %IB Description Current change level in %IB for fault inception detection Zero seq current change level in % of IB Voltage change level in %UB for fault inception detection Zero seq voltage change level in % of UB Settable level for source impedance ratio
Delta3I0
0 - 200
10
%IB
DeltaU
0 - 100
%UB
Delta3U0
0 - 100
%UB
SIRLevel
5 - 15
10
5.3.6
Technical data
204
RED 670
Table 104:
Function
Full-scheme distance protection, Mho characteristic (PDIS, 21)

Range or value 4 with selectable direction (1030)% of IBase (0.0053000.000) W/phase (1090) degrees (0.0053000.000) /phase (0.0053000.000) /phase (1090) degrees Accuracy 2.0% static accuracy Conditions: Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees
Number of zones with selectable directions Minimum operate current Positive sequence impedance, phaseearth loop Positive sequence impedance angle, phaseearth loop Reverse reach, phaseearth loop (Magnitude) Impedance reach for phase phase elements Angle for positive sequence impedance, phasephase elements Reverse reach of phasephase loop Magnitude of earth return compensation factor KN Angle for earth compensation factor KN Dynamic overreach Timers Operate time Reset ratio Reset time
(0.0053000.000) /phase (0.003.00) (-180180) degrees <5% at 85 degrees measured with CVTs and 0.5<SIR<30 (0.000-60.000) s 15 ms typically (with static outputs) 105% typically 30 ms typically 0.5% 10 ms -
5.4
5.4.1
Mho impedance supervision logic

Introduction
The Mho impedance supervision logic includes features for fault inception detection and high SIR detection. It also includes the functionality for loss of potential logic as well as for the pilot channel blocking scheme. The Mho Impedance Supervision logic can mainly be decomposed in two different parts:
RED 670
205
1. 2.
A fault inception detection logic High SIR detection logic
5.4.2
5.4.2.1
Fault inception detection
The aim for the fault inception detector is to very fast detect that a fault has occurred on the system. The fault inception detection detects instantaneous changes in any phase currents or zero sequence current in combination with a change in the corresponding phase voltage or zero sequence voltage. If the change of any phase current and corresponding phase voltage or 3U0 and 3I0 exceeds the setting parameters DeltaI and DeltaU respectively Delta3U0 and Delta3I0 and the input signal BLOCK is not activated, the ouput signal FLTDET is activated indicating that a system fault has occoured. If the setting pilotMode is set to On in Blocking scheme and the fault inception function has detected a system fault, a block signal BLKCHST will be issued and send to remote end in order to block the overreaching zones. Different criteria has to be fulfilled for sending the BLKCHST signal: 1. 2. 3. The setting parameter pilotMode has to be set to On The breaker has to be closed, i.e. the input signal CBOPEN has to be deactivated A reverse fault should have been detected while the carrier send signal is not blocked, i.e. input signal REVSTART is activated and input signal BLOCKCS is not activated
OR A fault inception is detected If it is later detected that it was an internal fault that made the function issue the BLKCHST signal, the function will issue a CHSTOP signal to unblock the remote end. The criteria that have to be fulfilled for this are: 1. 2. 3. The function has to be in pilot mode, i.e. the setting parameter pilotMode has to be set to On The carrier send signal should be blocked, i.e. input signal BLOCKCS is On and, A reverse fault should not have been detected while the carrier send signal was not blocked, i.e.input signals REVSTART and BLOCKCS is not activated.
The function has a built in loss of voltage detection based on the evaluation of the change in phase voltage or the change in zero sequence voltage (3U0). It operates if the change in phase voltages exceeds the setting dULevel or 3U0 exceeds the setting dU0Level.
206
RED 670
If loss of voltage is detected, but not a fault inception, the distance protection function will be blocked. This is also the case if a fuse failure is detected by the external fuse failure function and activate the input FUSEFAIL. Those blocks are generated by activating the output BLKZ, which shall be connected to the input BLKZ on the distance Mho function block. During fault inception a lot of transients will be developed which in turn might cause the distance function to overreach. The Mho supervision logic will increase the filtering during the most transient period of the fault. This is done by activating the output BLKZMD, which shall be connected to the input BLKZMTD on mho distance function block.
High SIR detection
High SIR values increases the likelihood that CVT will introduce a prolonged and distorted transient, increasing the risk for overreach of the distance function. The SIR function calculates the SIR value as the source impedance divided by the setting Zreach and activates the output signal HSIR if the calculated value for any of the six basic shunt faults exceed the setting parameter SIRLevel.The HSIR signal is intended to block the delta based mho impedance function.
5.4.3
Function block
ZSM1ZSMGAPC I3P BLKZMTD U3P BLKCHST BLOCK CHSTOP REVSTART HSIR BLOCKCS CBOPEN en06000426.vsd ZSM1ZSMGAPC I3P V3P BLOCK REVSTART BLOCKCS CBOPEN BLKZMTD BLKCHST CHSTOP HSIR
en06000426_ansi.vsd
Figure 107:
ZSM1 function block
5.4.4
RED 670
207
Table 105:
Signal I3P U3P BLOCK REVSTART BLOCKCS CBOPEN
Input signals for the ZSMGAPC (ZSM1-) function block

Description Three phase current samples and DFT magnitude Three phase phase-neutral voltage samples and DFT magnitude Block of the function Indication of reverse start Blocks the blocking carrier signal to remote end Indicates that the breaker is open
Table 106:
Signal BLKZMTD BLKCHST CHSTOP HSIR
Output signals for the ZSMGAPC (ZSM1-) function block

Description Block signal for blocking of time domained mho Blocking signal to remote end to block overreaching zone Stops the blocking signal to remote end Indication of source impedance ratio above set limit
5.4.5
Setting parameters
Table 107:
Parameter IBase UBase PilotMode Zreach IMinOp
Basic parameter group settings for the ZSMGAPC (ZSM1-) function

Range 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 Off On 0.1 - 3000.0 10 - 30 Step 1 0.05 0.1 1 Default 3000 400.00 Off 38.0 20 Unit A kV ohm %IB Description Base value for current measurement Base value for voltage measurement Pilot mode Off/On Line impedance Minimum operating current for SIR measurement
208
RED 670
Table 108:
Parameter DeltaI
Advanced parameter group settings for the ZSMGAPC (ZSM1-) function

Range 0 - 200 Step 1 Default 10 Unit %IB Description Current change level in %IB for fault inception detection Zero seq current change level in % of IB Voltage change level in %UB for fault inception detection Zero seq voltage change level in % of UB Settable level for source impedance ratio
Delta3I0
0 - 200
10
%IB
DeltaU
0 - 100
%UB
Delta3U0
0 - 100
%UB
SIRLevel
5 - 15
10
5.5
Phase selection with load encroachment (PDIS, 21)

Function block name: PHSANSI number: 21 IEC 61850 logical node name: FDPSPDIS IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
Z<phs
5.5.1
Introduction
The operation of transmission networks today is in many cases close to the stability limit. Due to environmental considerations the rate of expansion and reinforcement of the power system is reduced e.g. difficulties to get permission to build new power lines. The ability to accurately and reliable classify the different types of fault so that single pole tripping and auto-reclosing can be used plays an important roll in this matter. The phase selection function is designed to accurately select the proper fault loop in the distance function dependent on the fault type. The heavy load transfer that is common in many transmission networks may make fault resistance coverage difficult to achieve. Therefore the function has a built in algorithm for load encroachment, which gives the possibility to enlarge the resistive setting of both the phase selection and the measuring zones without interfering with the load.
RED 670
209
The extensive output signals from the phase selection gives also important information about faulty phase(s) which can be used for fault analysis.
5.5.2
The basic impedance algorithm for the operation of the phase-selection measuring elements is the same as for the distance-measuring function (see section "Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic (PDIS, 21)"). The "phase selection" includes six impedance measuring loops; three intended for phase-to-earth faults, and three intended for phase-to-phase as well as for three-phase faults. The difference, compared to the zone measuring elements, is in the combination of the measuring quantities (currents and voltages) for different types of faults. The characteristic is basically non-directional, but the PHS function uses information from the directional function block to discriminate whether the fault is in forward or reverse. The directional lines are drawn as "line-dot-dot-line" in the figures below. The start condition STCNDZ is essentially based on the following criteria: 1. 2. 3. Residual current criteria, i.e. separation of faults with and without earth connection Regular quadrilateral impedance characteristic Load encroachment characteristics is always active but can be switched off by selecting a high setting.
The current start condition STCNDI is based on the following criteria: 1. 2. 3. Residual current criteria No quadrilateral impedance characteristic. The impedance reach outside the load area is theoretically infinite. The practical reach, however, will be determined by the minimum operating current limits. Load encroachment characteristic is always active, but can be switched off by selecting a high setting.
The STCNDI-output described above is non-directional. The directionality is determined by the distance zones direction function block. There are still output from the function that indicate whether a start is in forward or reverse direction, or in between those (e.g. STFWL1 and STRVL1, and NDIR_A). These directional indications are based on the sector boundaries of the directional function and the impedance setting of the phase selection function. Their operate characteristics are illustrated in figure 108.
210
RED 670
60 R 60
60
R 60
Non-directional (ND)
Forward (FW)
Reverse (RV)
en05000668.vsd
Figure 108:
Characteristic for non-directional, forward and reverse operation of PHS
The setting of the load encroachment function may influence the total operating characteristic, (for more information, refer to section "Load encroachment"). The input DIRCND contains binary coded information about the directional coming from the directionality block. It shall be connected to the STDIR output on the ZD block. This information is also transferred to the input DIRCND on the distance measuring zones, i.e. the ZM block. The code built up for the directionality is as follows:
STDIR= STFWL1*1+STFWL2*2+STFWL3*4+STFWL1L2*8+ +STFWL2L3*16+STFWL3L1*32+STRVL1*64+STRVL2*128+ +STRVL3*256+STRVL1L2*512+STRVL2L3*1024+STRVL3L1*2048
If the binary information is 1 then it will be considered that we have start in forward direction in phase L1. If the binary code is 5 then we have start in forward direction in phase L1 and L2 etc. The STCND (Z or I) output contains, in a similar way as DIRCND, binary coded information, in this case information about the condition for opening correct fault loop in the distance measuring element. It shall be connected to the STCND input on the ZM blocks. The code built up for release of the measuring fault loops is as follows: STCND = L1N*1 + L2N*2 + L3N*4 + L1L2*8 + L2L3*16 + L3L1*32
5.5.2.1
Phase-to-earth fault
For a phase-to-earth fault, the measured impedance by PHS function will be according to equation 46.
RED 670
211
ZPHSn =
ULn ILn
(Equation 46)
where: n corresponds to the particular phase (n=1, 2 or 3)
The characteristic for the PHS function at phase to earth fault is according to figure 109. The characteristic has a fixed angle for the resistive boundary in the first quadrant of 60. The resistance RN and reactance XN is the impedance in the earth return path defined according to equation 47 and equation 48.
RN = R0 - R1 3
(Equation 47)
XN =
X 0 - X1 3
(Equation 48)
X (ohm/loop) Kr(X1+XN) RFRvPE RFFwPE
X1+XN RFFwPE RFRvPE X1 Kr = 60 deg R (Ohm/loop)
60 deg
1 tan(60 deg)
RFRvPE Kr(X1+XN)
RFFwPE
en06000396.vsd
Figure 109:
Characteristic of PHS for phase to earth fault (setting parameters in italic), ohm/loop domain
Besides this, the 3I0 residual current must fulfil the conditions according to equation 49 and equation 50. 212 Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B RED 670
3 I 0 0.5 IM in O p
(Equation 49)
3 I0 INReleasePE- Iphmax ----------------------------------100
(Equation 50)
where: IMinOp is the minimum operation current for forward zones, INReleasePE is the setting for the minimum residual current needed to enable operation in the ph-E fault loops (in %) and Iphmax is the maximum phase current in any of three phases.
5.5.2.2
Phase-to-phase fault
For a phase-to-phase fault, the measured by the PHS function will be according to equation 51.
ZPHS = ULm - ULn -2 ILn
(Equation 51)
ULm is the leading phase voltage, ULn the lagging phase voltage and ILn the phase current in the lagging phase n. The operation characteristic is shown in figure 110.
RED 670
213
X (ohm/phase) 0.5FRvPP KrX1 0.5RFFwPP
0.5RFFwPP 60 deg
X1
R (ohm/phase) 60 deg 0.5RFRvPP X1 Kr = 1 tan(60 deg)
KrX1 0.5RFRvPP 0.5RFFwPP

en05000670.vsd
Figure 110:
The operation characteristic for PHS at phase-to-phase fault (setting parameters in Italic), ohm/phase domain
In the same way as the condition for phase-to-earth fault, there are current conditions that have to be fulfilled in order to release the phase-to-phase loop. Those are according to equation 52 or equation 53.
3I 0 < IN Re leasePE
(Equation 52)
3I 0 < INBlockPP Iph max
(Equation 53)
where:
INRelease Iphmax
is 3I0 limit for releasing phase-to-earth measuring loops, is maximal magnitude of the phase currents.
INBlockPP is 3I0 limit for blocking phase-to-phase measuring loop and
5.5.2.3
Three phase faults

The operation condition for three phase faults are the same as for phase-to-phase fault i.e. equation 51, equation 52 and equation 53 are used to release the operation of the function.
214
RED 670
However, the reach is expanded by a factor 2/3 (approximately 1.1547) in all directions. At the same time the apparent impedance is rotated 30 degrees, counterclockwise. The characteristic is shown in figure 111.
X (ohm/phase) 4 X1 3 90 deg 0.5RFFwPPK3 X1K3 4 RFFwPP 6
R (ohm/phase) 0.5RFRvPPK3 K3 = 2 / sqrt(3) 30 deg
en05000671.vsd
Figure 111:
The characteristic of PHS for three phase fault (setting parameters in italic)
5.5.2.4
Load encroachment
Each of the six measuring loops has its own load (encroachment) characteristic based on the corresponding loop impedance. The load encroachment functionality is always active, but can be switched off by selecting a high setting. The outline of the characteristic is presented in figure 112. As illustrated, the resistive blinders are set individually in forward and reverse direction while the angle of the sector is the same in all four quadrants.
RED 670
215
RLdFw ARGLd ARGLd R
ARGLd
RLdRv
ARGLd
en05000196.vsd
Figure 112:
Characteristic of load encroachment function
The influence of load encroachment function depending on the operation characteristic is dependent on the chosen operation mode of the PHS function. When selection mode is STCNDZ, the characteristic for the PHS (and also zone measurement depending on settings) will be reduced by the load encroachment characteristic (see figure 113, left illustration). When STCNDI is selected the operation characteristic will be as the right illustration in figure 113. The reach will in this case be limit by the minimum operation current and the distance measuring zones.
216
RED 670
STCNDZ
STCNDI
en05000197.vsd
Figure 113:
Difference in operating characteristic depending on operation mode when load encroachment is activated
When the "phase selection" is set to operate together with a distance measuring zone the resultant operate characteristic could look something like in figure 114. The figure shows a distance measuring zone operating in forward direction. Thus, the operate area is highlighted in black.
X "Phase selection" "quadrilateral" zone Distance measuring zone
Load encroachment characteristic R Directional line
en05000673.vsd
Figure 114:
Operation characteristic in forward direction when load encroachment is enabled
RED 670
217
Figure 114 is valid for phase-to-earth as well as phase-to-phase faults. During a threephase fault, or load, when the "quadrilateral" phase-to-phase characteristic is subject to enlargement and rotation the operate area is transformed according to figure 115. Notice in particular what happens with the resistive blinders of the "phase selection" "quadrilateral" characteristic. Due to the 30-degree rotation, the angle of the blinder in quadrant one is now 90 degrees instead of the original 60 degrees. The blinder that is nominally located to quadrant four will at the same time tilt outwards and increase the resistive reach around the R-axis. Consequently, it will be more or less necessary to use the load encroachment characteristic in order to secure a margin to the load impedance.
X (ohm/phase) Phase selection Quadrilateral zone
Distance measuring zone
R (ohm/phase)
en05000674.vsd
Figure 115:
Operation characteristic for PHS in forward direction for three-phase fault, ohm/phase domain
5.5.2.5
Minimum operate currents

The operation of the PHS function is blocked if the magnitude of input currents falls below certain threshold values. The phase-to-earth loop Ln is blocked if ILn<IMinOpPE, where ILn is the RMS value of the current in phase Ln. The phase-to-phase loop LmLn is blocked if (2ILn<IMinOpPP).
218
RED 670

5.5.2.6 Simplified logic diagrams
Figure 116 presents schematically the creation of the phase-to-phase and phase-toearth operating conditions. Consider only the corresponding part of measuring and logic circuits, when only a phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase measurement is available within the terminal.
Figure 116:
Phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth operating conditions (residual current criteria)
A special attention is paid to correct phase selection at evolving faults. A STCNDI output signal is created as a combination of the load encroachment characteristic and current criteria, refer to figure 116. This signal can be configured to STCND functional input signals of the distance protection zone and this way influence the operation of the ph-ph and ph-E zone measuring elements and their phase related starting and tripping signals. Figure 117 presents schematically the composition of non-directional phase selective signals PHS--STNDLn. Signals ZMLnN and ZMLmLn (m and n change between one and three according to the phase number) represent the fulfilled operating criteria for each separate loop measuring element (i.e. within the "quadrilateral" characteristic.
RED 670
219
Figure 117:
Composition on non-directional phase selection signals
Composition of the directional (forward and reverse) phase selective signals is presented schematically in figure 119 and figure 118. The directional criteria appears as a condition for the correct phase selection in order to secure a high phase selectivity for simultaneous and evolving faults on lines within the complex network configurations. Signals DFWLn and DFWLnLm present the corresponding directional signals for measuring loops with phases Ln and Lm. Designation FW (figure 119) represents the forward direction as well as the designation RV (figure 118) represents the reverse direction. All directional signals are derived within the corresponding digital signal processor. Figure 118 presents additionally a composition of a STCNDZ output signal, which is created on the basis of impedance measuring conditions. This signal can be configured to STCND functional input signals of the distance protection zone and this way influence the operation of the ph-ph and ph-E zone measuring elements and their phase related starting and tripping signals.
220
RED 670
Figure 118:
Composition of phase selection signals for reverse direction
RED 670
221
Figure 119:
Composition of phase selection signals for forward direction
222
RED 670
Section 5 Impedance protection 5.5.3 Function block

PHS1FDPSPDIS_21 I3P U3P BLOCK DIRCND TRIP START STFWL1 STFWL2 STFWL3 STFWPE STRVL1 STRVL2 STRVL3 STRVPE STNDL1 STNDL2 STNDL3 STNDPE STFW1PH STFW2PH STFW3PH STPE STPP STCNDZ STCNDI en06000258.vsd
Figure 120:
PHS function block
5.5.4

Table 109:
Signal I3P U3P BLOCK DIRCND
Input signals for the FDPSPDIS_21 (PHS--) function block

Description Group signal for current input Group signal for voltage input Block of function External directional condition
Table 110:
Signal STFWL1 STFWL2 STFWL3 STFWPE STRVL1 STRVL2 STRVL3 STRVPE STNDL1 STNDL2
Output signals for the FDPSPDIS_21 (PHS--) function block

Description Fault detected in phase L1 - forward direction Fault detected in phase L2 - forward direction Fault detected in phase L3 - forward direction Earth fault detected in forward direction Fault detected in phase L1 - reverse direction Fault detected in phase L2 - reverse direction Fault detected in phase L3 - reverse direction Earth fault detected in reverse direction Non directional start in L1 Non directional start in L2
RED 670
223

Signal STNDL3 STNDPE STFW1PH STFW2PH STFW3PH STPE STPP STCNDZ STCNDI Description Non directional start in L3 Non directional start, phase-earth Start in forward direction for single-phase fault Start in forward direction for two- phase fault Start in forward direction for thre-phase fault Current conditions release of phase-earth measuring elements Current conditions release of phase-phase measuring elements Start condition (PHS,LE and I based) Start condition (LE and I based)
5.5.5
Setting parameters
Table 111:
Parameter IBase INBlockPP
Basic parameter group settings for the FDPSPDIS_21 (PHS--) function

Range 1 - 99999 10 - 100 Step 1 1 Default 3000 40 Unit A %IPh Description Base current for current settings 3I0 limit for blocking phase-to-phase measuring loops 3I0 limit for releasing phase-to-earth measuring loops Forward resistive reach within the load impedance area Reverse resistive reach within the load impedance area Load angle determining the load impedance area Positive sequence reactance reach Zero sequence reactance reach Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, forward Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, reverse Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, forward
INReleasePE
10 - 100
20
%IPh
RLdFw
1.00 - 3000.00
0.01
80.00
ohm/p
RLdRv
1.00 - 3000.00
0.01
80.00
ohm/p
ArgLd
5 - 70
30
Deg
X1 X0 RFFwPP RFRvPP RFFwPE
0.50 - 3000.00 0.50 - 9000.00 0.50 - 3000.00 0.50 - 3000.00 1.00 - 9000.00
0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01
40.00 120.00 30.00 30.00 100.00
ohm/p ohm/p ohm/l ohm/l ohm/l
224
RED 670

Parameter RFRvPE IMinOpPP Range 1.00 - 9000.00 5 - 30 Step 0.01 1 Default 100.00 10 Unit ohm/l %IB Description Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, reverse Minimum operate delta current for Phase-Phase loops Minimum operate phase current for Phase-Earth loops
IMinOpPE
5 - 30
%IB
5.5.6
Technical data
Table 112:
Function Minimum operate current Reactive reach, positive sequence, forward and reverse Resistive reach, positive sequence Reactive reach, zero sequence, forward and reverse Resistive reach, zero sequence Fault resistance, phase-earth faults, forward and reverse Fault resistance, phase-phase faults, forward and reverse Load encroachment criteria: Load resistance, forward and reverse Safety load impedance angle Reset ratio
Phase selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic (PDIS, 21)

Range or value (5-30)% of Ibase (0.503000.00) /phase (0.101000.00) /phase (0.509000.00) /phase (0.503000.00) /phase (1.009000.00) /loop (0.503000.00) /loop Accuracy 1.0% of Ir 2.0% static accuracy 2.0 degrees static angular accuracy Conditions: Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees
(1.003000.00) /phase (5-70) degrees 105% typically -
5.6
Faulty phase identification with load enchroachment (PDIS, 21)

Function block name: PHMx ANSI number: 21 IEC 61850 logical node name: FMPSPDIS IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
RED 670
225
Section 5 Impedance protection 5.6.1 Introduction

The operation of transmission networks today is in many cases close to the stability limit. Due to environmental considerations the rate of expansion and reinforcement of the power system is reduced e.g. difficulties to get permission to build new power lines. The ability to accurate and reliable classifying the different types of fault so that single pole tripping and auto-reclosing can be used plays an important roll in this matter. The phase selection function is design to accurate select the proper fault loop in the distance function dependent on the fault type. The heavy load transfer that is common in many transmission networks may in some cases interfere with the distance protection zone reach and cause unwanted operation. Therefore the function has a built in algorithm for load encroachment, which gives the possibility to enlarge the resistive setting of the measuring zones without interfering with the load. The output signals from the phase selection function produce important information about faulty phase(s) which can be used for fault analysis as well.
5.6.2
5.6.2.1
The phase selection function
The phase selection function can be decomposed into four different parts: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. A high speed delta based current phase selector A high speed delta based voltage phase selector A symmetrical components based phase selector Fault evaluation and selection logic A load enchroachment logic A blinder logic
The function can be de-activated and activated by setting the parameter Operation Off/On The total function can be blocked by activating the input BLOCK. Figure 1 (kommer senare)
Delta based current and voltages
The delta based fault detection function uses adaptive technique and is based on patent US4409636. It is a well proven technique that goes back to the beginning of 1980, used with very good experience in highly proven ABB distance relay RALZA. The aim of the delta based phase selector is to provide very fast and reliable phase selection for releasing of tripping from the high speed Mho element and as well as is essential to Directional Comparison Blocking scheme (DCB), which uses Power Line Carrier (PLC) communication system across the protected line. The current and voltage samples for each phase passes through a notch filter that filters out the fundamental components. Under steady state load conditions or when 226 Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B RED 670
no fault is present, the output of the filter is zero or close to zero. When a fault occurs, currents and voltages change resulting in sudden changes in the current and voltages resulting in non-fundamental waveforms being introduced on the line. At this point the notch filter produces significant non-zero output. The filter output is processed by the delta function. The algorithm uses an adaptive relationship between phases to determine if a fault has occurred, and determines the faulty phases. The current and voltage delta phase selector gives a real output signal if the following criteria is fulfilled (only phase L1 shown): Max(UL1,UL2,UL3)>DeltaUMinOp Max(IL1,IL2,IL3)>DeltaIMinOp
where: UL1, UL2 and UL3 are the voltage change between sample t and sample t-1 are the minimum harmonic level settings for the voltage and current filters to decide that a fault has occured indeed. A slow evolving fault may not produce sufficient harmonics to detect the fault; however, in such a case speed is no longer the issue and the sequence components phase selector will operate.
DeltaUMinOp and DeltaIMinOp
The delta voltages ULn and delta current ILn (n prefix for phase order) are the voltage and current between sample t and sample t-1. The delta phase selector employs adaptive techniques to determine the fault type. The logic determines the fault type by summing up all phase values and dividing by the largest value. Both voltages and currents are filtered out and evaluated. The condition for fault type classification for the voltage and currents can be expressed as
Fa ulType =
S( DUL1, DUL2, DUL3) Ma x( DIL1, DIL2, DUL3)

(Equation 54)
Fa ultType =
S( DIL1, DIL2, DIL3) Ma x( DIL1, DIL2, DIL3)

(Equation 55)
The value of FaultType for different shunt faults are as follows:

Under ideal conditions: (Patent pending) Single line ground fault; Phase to phase fault 3-phase fault; FaultType=1 FaultType=2 FaultType=3
RED 670
227
The output signal is 1 for single line to earth fault, 2 for phase to phase fault and 3 for three phase fault. At this point the filer does not know if ground was involved or not. Typically there are induced harmonics in the non-faulted lines that will affect the result. This method allows for a significant tolerance in the evaluation of FaultType over its entire range. When a single fault has been detected, the logic determines the largest quantity, and asserts that phase. If phase to phase fault is detected, the two largest phase quantities will be detected and asserted as outputs. The faults detected by the delta based phase selector are coordinated in a separate block. Different phases of faults may be detected at slightly different times due to differences in the angles of incidence of fault on the waveshape. The output is forcet to wait a certain time. If the timer expires, if no other fault detection on the other phases is not detected, the fault is deemed as phase-to-ground. This way a premature single phase to earth fault detection is not released for a phase-phase fault. If, however, ground current is detected before the timer expires, the phase to ground fault is released sooner. If another phase picks up during the delay, the wait time is reduced by a certain amount. Each detection of either ground or additional phases further reduce the initial wait time and allow the delta phase selector output to be asserted sooner. There is not wait time, if for example, all three phases are faulty. The delta function is released if the input DELTAREL is activated at the same time as input DELTABLK is not activated. Activating the DELTABLK input will block the delta function. The release signal has an internal pulse timer of 100 ms. When the DELTAREL signal has disappeared the delta logic is reset. In order not to get too abrupt change, the reset is decayed in pre-defined steps.
Symmetrical component based phase selector
The sequence component phase selector uses preprocessed calculated sequence voltages and currents as inputs. It also uses sampled values of the phase currents. All the sequence quantities mentioned further in this section are with reference to phase L1. The function is made up of four main parts:
A B C D Detection of the presence of earth fault A phase to phase logic block based on V2/V1 angle relationship A phase to earth component based on patent US5390067 where the angle relationships between V2/I0 and V2/V1 is evaluated to determine earth fault or phase to phase to earth fault Logic for detection of three phase fault
A. Presence of earthground detection The detection of earth fault is done in two ways, one by evaluation of the magnitude of zero sequence current and secondly by the evaluation of the zero and negative 228 Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B RED 670
sequence voltage. The evaluation of the zero sequence current is done both with a separate complementary function outside the main sequence based evaluation function. The complementary based zero sequence current function evaluates the presence of earth fault by calculating the 3I0 and comparing the result with the setting parameter INtoMaxI. The output signal is used to release the earth fault loop. It is a complement to the earth fault signal built-in in the sequence based phase selector. The condition for releasing the phase to earth loop are as follows: |3I0|>maxIph INto Im ax
where: |3I0| maxIph is the magnitude of the zero sequence current 3I0 is the maximum magnitude of the phase currents is a setting parameter for the relation between the magnitude of 3I0 and the maximum phase current
INtoImax
The earth fault loop is also released if the evaluation of the zero sequence current by the main sequence function meets the following conditions: |3I0|>IMinOp k1 |3I0|>maxIph IN RelPE
where:
IMinOp INRelPE
k1
is the settings of the minimum operate phase current is the setting of 3I0 limit for release of phase-to-earth measuring loop in % of IBase is a design parameter is the setting of the base current (A)
IBase
In systems where the source impedance for zero sequence is high the change of zero sequence current may not be secure. In those cases the sequence based phase selector will automatically change from evaluation of zero sequence current to evaluation of zero and negative sequence voltage. So the release of earth fault loop can also be done if the following conditions are fulfilled: |3U0|>U2*k2 |3U0|>U1*k3 |U1|>k and 3I0<IMinOp*k5 OR RED 670 Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B 229
3I0<ILmax INRelPE
where: 3U0 U2 k2, k3, k4 and k5 ILmax is the magnitude of the zero sequence voltage is the magnitude of the negative sequence voltage at the relay measuring point of phase L1 are design parameters is the maximal phase current is the setting of minimum operate phase current in % of IBase
IMinOp
B Phase to phase fault detection The detection of phase to phase fault is performed by evaluation of the angle difference between the sequence voltages U2 and U1.
VC C-A sector 180 VB
60
B-C sector A-B sector VA 300
en06000383_ansi.vsd
Figure 121:
Definition of fault sectors for phase to phase fault
The phase to phase loop for the faulty phases will be determined if the angle between the sequence voltages U2 and U1 lies within the sector defined according to figure 121 and the following conditions are fulfilled: |U2|>U2MinOp |U1|>U1MinOP
where:
U1MinOP and U2MinOp
are the setting parameters for positive sequence and negative sequence minimum operate voltage
The positive sequence voltage U1L1 in figure 121 above is reference. If there is a three phase fault, there will not be any release of the individual phase signals, even if the general conditions for U2 and U1 are fulfilled.
230
RED 670

C. Phase to earthground and phase to phase to earthground detection The detection of phase to earth and phase to phase to earth fault (US patent 5390067) is based on two conditions: 1. Angle relationship between V2 and I0 2. Angle relationship between V2 and V1 The first condition determines faulty phase at single line to earth fault by determine the argument between V2 and I0.
80
L2-N sector
L3-N sector
U2L1 (Ref)
200
L1-N sector
320
en06000384.vsd
Figure 122:
Definition of faulty phase sector as angle between V2 and I0
The angle is calculated in a directional function block and gives the angle in radians as input to the V2I0 function block. The input angle is released only if the fault is in forward direction. This is done by the directional element. The fault is classified as forward direction if the angle between U0 and I0 lies between 20 to 200 degrees see figure 123.
Forward
20
200
Reverse
en06000385.vsd
Figure 123:
Directional element used to release the measured angle between U2 and I0
RED 670
231
The input radians are summarized with an offset angle and the result evaluated. If the angle is within the boundaries for a specific sector, the phase indication for that sector will be active see figure 122. Only one sector signal is allowed to be activated at the same time. The sector function for condition1 has an internal release signal which is active if the main sequence function has classified the angle between U0 and I0 as valid. The following conditions must be fulfilled for activating the release signals: |U2|>U2MinOp |3I0|>IMinOp 0.5 |3I0|>ILmax INRelPE
where: U2 and IN are the magnitude of the negative sequence voltage and zero sequence current (3I0) is the setting parameter for minimum operate negative sequence voltage is the setting parameter for minimum operate phase current is the setting parameter for 3I0 limit for releasing phase to earth loop
U2MinOp
IMinOp
INRelPE
The angle difference is phase shifted by 180 degrees if the fault is in reverse direction. The condition2 looks at the angle relationship between the negative sequence voltage U2 and the positive sequence voltage U1. Since this is a phase to phase voltage relationship, there is no need for shifting phases if the fault is in reverse direction. A phase shift is introduced so that the fault sectors will have the same angle boarders as for condition1. If the calculated angle between U2 and U1 lies within one sector, the corresponding phase for that sector will be activated. The condition2 is released if both the following conditions are fulfilled: |U2|>U2MinOp |U1|>U1MinOP
where: |U1| and |U2| are the magnitude of the positive and negative sequence voltage are the setting parameter for positive sequence and negative sequence minimum operate voltage.
U1MinOP and
232
RED 670
140
L3-N sector
20 U1L1 (Ref)
L1-N sector
L2-N sector
260
en06000413.vsd
Figure 124:
Condition 2: U2 and U1 angle relationship
If both conditions are true and there is sector match, the fault is deemed as single phase to ground. If the sectors, however, do not match the fault is determined to be the complement of the second condition, i.e. a phase to phase to ground fault.
E.g. Condition 1 L3-G L2-G Condition 2 L3-G L1-G Fault type L3-G L2-L3-G
The sequence phase selector is blocked when earthis not involved or if a three phase fault is detected. D. Three phase fault detection The function classify the fault as three phase fault if the following conditions are fulfilled: |U1|>U1Level |I1|>I1Level or |I1|>IMaxLoad
where: U1 and I1 are the positive sequence voltage and current magnitude are the setting of limits for positive sequence voltage and current
U1Level and I1Level
RED 670
233
The output signal for detection of three phase fault is only released if not earth fault and phase to phase fault in the main sequence function is detected. The conditions for not detecting earth fault are the inverse of equation 5 to10. The condition for not detecting phase to phase faults is determined by three conditions. Each of them gives condition for not detecting phase to phase fault. Those are:
Condition1: earth fault is detected or |IN|>IMinOP*k2 and |IN|>ILmax*INRelPE Condition2: Condition2 for phase to earth and phase to phase faults are not fulfilled and ILmax<IMinOp and |I2|<ILmax*I2ILmax Condition3: |IN|>maxIL*INBlockPP or |I2|<maxIL*I2maxIL
where: ILmax is the maximum of the phase currents IL1, IL2 and IL3 is the setting parameter for 3I0 limit for release of phase to earthfault loops is the magnitude of the negative sequence current is the setting parameter for the relation between negative sequence current to the maximum phase current in percent of IBase is the setting parameter for 3I0 limit for blocking phase to phase measuring loops
INRelPE
|I2| I2ILmax
INBlockP P
Fault evaluation and selection logic
The phase selection logic has an evaluation procedure that can be simplified according to figure 125. Only phase L1 is shown in the figure. If the internal signal 3Phase fault is activated, all three outputs STL1, STL2 and STL3will be activated.
234
RED 670
DeltaIL1 DeltaUL1
Sequence based function
a b
a>b then c=a else c=a
FaultPriority Adaptive release dependent on result from Delta logic
a
OR
L1L2 fault L1N fault 3 Phase fault
a<b then c=b else c=a
OR
IL1Valid BLOCK
&
STL1
en06000386.vsd
Figure 125:
Simplified diagram for fault evaluation, phase L1
Load encroachment logic
Each of the six measuring loops has its own load (encroachment) characteristic based on the corresponding loop impedance. The load encroachment functionality is always activated in the PHSM function but the influence on the zone measurement can be switched on/off in the respective Zm function. The outline of the characteristic is presented in figure 126. As illustrated, the resistive reach are set individually in forward and reverse direction while the angle of the sector is the same in all four quadrants. The reach for the phase selector will be reduced by the load encroachment function, see right figure 126.
RED 670
235
jX
Operation area RLd ArgLd ArgLd R ArgLd RLd ArgLd
Operation area
Operation area
No operation area
No operation area
en06000414.vsd
Figure 126:
Influence on the characteristic by load encroachment logic.
Outputs
The output of the sequence components based phase selector and the delta logic phase selector activates the output signal(s) STL1, STL2 and STL3PU_A, PU_B and PU_C. If the phase to earth loop have been released, then the signal STE will be activated as well. The phase selector also gives binary coded signals that are connected to the zone measuring element for opening the correct measuring loop(s). This is done by the signal STCNDPHS. If only one phase is enable (L1, L2 or L3), the corresponding phase to ground element is enabled as well. Earth is expected to be made available for two and three phase faults for the correct output to be asserted. The fault loop is indicated by one of the decimal numbers below:
0= 1= 2= 3= 4= 5= 6= 7= 8= 9= 10= 11= no faulted phases L1N L2N L3N -L1L2N -L2L3N -L3L1N-CAG -L1L2L3N -L1L2 -L2L3 -L3L1 L1L2L3
236
RED 670
An additional logic is applied to handle the cases when phase to earthoutputs are to be asserted when the ground input G is not asserted. The output signal STCNDPLE is activated when the load encroachment is operating. STCNDPLE shall be connected to the input STCND for selected quadrilateral impedance measuring zones (ZM0x) to be blocked. The signal STCNDLE shall be connected to the input LDCND for selected Mho impedans measuring zones (ZMMx) The load encroachment at the measuring zone must be activated to release the blocking from the load encroachment function.
5.6.3
Function block
PHMFMPSPDIS I3P U3P BLOCK ZSTART TR3PH 1POLEAR STL1 STL2 STL3 STPE STCNDPHS STCNDPLE STCNDLE START en06000429.vsd
Figure 127:
PHM function block
5.6.4

Table 113:
Signal I3P U3P BLOCK ZSTART TR3PH 1POLEAR
Input signals for the FMPSPDIS (PHM-) function block

Description Group signal for current Group signal for voltage Block of function Start from underimpdeance function Three phase tripping initiated Single pole autoreclosing in progress
Table 114:
Signal STL1 STL2 STL3 STPE
Output signals for the FMPSPDIS (PHM-) function block

Description Fault detected in phase L1 Fault detected in phase L2 Fault detected in phase L3 Earth fault detected
RED 670
237

Signal STCNDPHS STCNDPLE STCNDLE START Description Binary coded starts from phase selection Binary coded starts from ph sel with load encroachment Binary coded starts from load encroachment only Indicates that something has started
5.6.5
Setting parameters
Table 115:
Parameter IBase UBase IMaxLoad
Basic parameter group settings for the FMPSPDIS (PHM-) function

Range 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 10 - 5000 Step 1 0.05 1 Default 3000 400.00 200 Unit A kV %IB Description Base current Base voltage Maximum load for identification of three phase fault in % of IBase Load encroachment resistive reach in ohm/phase Load encroachment inclination of load angular sector
RLd
1.00 - 3000.00
0.01
80.00
ohm/p
ArgLd
5 - 70
20
Deg
Table 116:
Parameter DeltaIMinOp DeltaUMinOp U1Level
Advanced parameter group settings for the FMPSPDIS (PHM-) function

Range 5 - 100 5 - 100 5 - 100 Step 1 1 1 Default 10 20 80 Unit %IB %UB %UB Description Delta current level in % of IBase Delta voltage level in % of UBase Pos seq voltage limit for identification of 3ph fault Pos seq current level for identification of 3ph fault in % of IBase Minimum operate positive sequence voltage for ph sel Minimum operate negative sequence voltage for ph sel 3I0 limit for release ph-e measuring loops in % of max phase current 3I0 limit for blocking phase-to-phase measuring loops in % of max phase current
I1LowLevel
5 - 200
10
%IB
U1MinOp
5 - 100
20
%UB
U2MinOp
1 - 100
%UB
INRelPE
10 - 100
20
%IB
INBlockPP
10 - 100
40
%IB
238
RED 670
Section 5 Impedance protection 5.6.6 Technical data

Table 117:
Function Minimum operate current Load encroachment criteria: Load resistance, forward and reverse
Faulty phase identification with load encroachment (PDIS, 21)

Range or value (5-30)% of Ibase (0.53000) W/phase (570) degrees Accuracy 1.0% of Ir 2.0% static accuracy Conditions: Voltage range: (0.11.1) x Vn Current range: (0.530) x In Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees
5.7
Directional impedance Mho (RDIR)

Function block name: ZDMANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: ZDMRDIR IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
Function block name: ZDAANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: ZDARDIR
5.7.1
Introduction
The phase-to-earth impedance elements can be optionally supervised by a phase unselective directional function (phase unselective, because it is based on symmetrical components).
RED 670
239
Section 5 Impedance protection 5.7.2

5.7.2.1
Directional impedance element for mho characteristic, ZDM
The evaluation of the directionality takes place in the function block ZDM. Equation 56 and equation 57 are used to classify that the fault is in the forward direction for phase-to-earth fault and phase-phase fault respectively.
- ArgDir < arg
0.85 U1L1 + 0.15 U1L1M I L1
< ArgNeg Re s
(Equation 56)
- ArgDir < arg
0.85 U1L1L 2 + 0.15 U1L1L 2M I L1L 2
< ArgNeg Re s
(Equation 57)
Where: ArgDir ArgNegRes U1L1 U1L1M IL1 U1L1L2 U1L1L2M IL1L2 Setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to 15 (= -15 degrees) Setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to 115 degrees, see figure 128 Positive sequence phase voltage in phase L1 Positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase L1 Phase current in phase L1 Voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1) Memorized voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1) Current difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)
The default settings for ArgDir and ArgNegRes are 15 (= -15) and 115 degrees respectively (see figure 128) and they should not be changed unless system studies show the necessity. The directional lines are computed by means of a comparator-type calculation, meaning that the directional lines are based on mho-circles (of infinite radius).
240
RED 670
X Zset reach point
ArgNegRes
-ArgDir
-Zs
en06000416.vsd
Figure 128:
Setting angles for discrimination of forward fault
The reverse directional characteristic is equal to the forward characteristic rotated by 180 degrees. The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive-sequence voltage exceeds 5% of the set base voltage UBase. So the directional element can use it for all unsymmetrical faults including close-in faults. For close-in three-phase faults, the U1L1M memory voltage, based on the same positive sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination. The memory voltage is used for 100ms or until the positive sequence voltage is restored. After 100ms, the following occurs: If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current the condition seals in. If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures. If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element in the reverse direction remains in operation.
If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, no directional indications will be given until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.
The directional function block ZDM has the following output signals: The STDIRCND output provides an integer signal that depends on the evaluation and is derived from a binary coded signal as follows:
RED 670
241
bit 11 (2048) STRVL3L1=1 bit 5 (32) STFWL3L1= 1
bit 8 (256) STRVL3N=1 bit 2 (4) STFWL3N=1
The STFW output is a logical signal with value 1 or 0. It is made up as an OR-function of all the forward starting conditions, i.e. STFWL1N, STFWL2N, STFWL3N, STFWL1L2, STFWL2L3 and STFWL3L1. The STRV output is similar to the STFW output, the only difference being that it is made up as an OR-function of all the reverse starting conditions, i.e. STRVL1N, STRVL2N, STRVL3N, STRVL1L2, STRVL2L3 and STRVL3L1. Values for the following parameters are calculated, and may be viewed as service values: resistance phase L1 reactance phase L1 resistance phase L2 reactance phase L2 resistance phase L3 reactance phase L3 direction phase L1 direction phase L2 direction phase L3
5.7.2.2
Additional distance protection directional function for earth faults, ZDA

A Mho element needs a polarizing voltage for its operation. The positive-sequence memory-polarized elements are generally preferred. The benefits include: The greatest amount of expansion for improved resistive coverage. These elements always expand back to the source. Memory action for all fault types. This is very important for close-in 3-phase faults. A common polarizing reference for all six distance-measuring loops. This is important for single-pole tripping, during a pole-open period.
There are however some situations that can cause security problems like reverse phase to phase faults and double phase to earth faults during high load periods. To solve these, additional directional element is used. For phase to earth faults, directional elements using sequence components are very reliable for directional discrimination. The directional element can be based on one of following types of polarization: 242 Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B RED 670
Zero-sequence voltage Negative-sequence voltage Zero-sequence current
These additional directional criteria are evaluated in the function block ZDA. Zero-sequence voltage polarization is utilizing the phase relation between the zerosequence voltage and the zero-sequence current at the location of the protection. The measurement principle is illustrated in figure 129.
- 3U 0
AngleOp AngleRCA
3I 0
en06000417.vsd
Figure 129:
Principle for zero-sequence voltage polarized additional directional element
Negative-sequence voltage polarization is utilizing the phase relation between the negative-sequence voltage and the negative-sequence current at the location of the protection. Zero-sequence current polarization is utilizing the phase relation between the zerosequence current at the location of the protection and some reference zero-sequence current, for example the current in the neutral of a power transformer. The principle of zero-sequence voltage polarization with zero-sequence current compensation is described in figure 130. The same also applies for the negativesequence function.
RED 670
243
Z0 SA
I0
Z0 Line
Z0 SB U0
I0
Charac te ris tic ang le
U0
K*I0 U0 + K*I0 IF
en06000418.vsd
Figure 130:
Principle for zero sequence compensation
Note that the sequence based additional directional element cannot give per phase information about direction to fault. This is why it is an AND-function with the normal directional element that works on a per phase base. The release signals are per phase and to have a release of a measuring element in a specific phase both the additional directional element, and the normal directional element, for that phase must indicate correct direction.
Normal directional element L1N, L2N, L3N Additional directional element
AND
Release of distance measuring element L1N, L2N, L3N
AND per phase

en06000419.vsd
Figure 131:
Earth distance element directional supervision
5.7.3
Function block
ZDM1ZDMRDIR I3P U3P DIR_CURR DIR_VOLT DIR_POL STFW STRV STDIRCND en06000422.vsd
Figure 132:
ZDM function block
244
RED 670
ZDA1ZDARDIR I3P U3P I3PPOL DIRCND STFWPE STRVPE DIREFCND
en06000425.vsd
Figure 133:
ZDA function block
5.7.4

Table 118:
Signal I3P U3P
Input signals for the ZDMRDIR (ZDM1-) function block

Description group connection for current abs 1 group connection for voltage abs 1
Table 119:
Signal DIR_CURR DIR_VOLT DIR_POL STFW STRV STDIRCND
Output signals for the ZDMRDIR (ZDM1-) function block

Description Group connection Group connection Group connection Start in forward direction Start in reverse direction Binary coded directional information per measuring loop
Table 120:
Signal I3P U3P I3PPOL DIRCND
Input signals for the ZDARDIR (ZDA1-) function block

Description Current signals Voltage signals Polarisation current signals Binary coded directional signal
Table 121:
Signal STFWPE STRVPE DIREFCND
Output signals for the ZDARDIR (ZDA1-) function block

Description Forward start signal from phase-to-ground directional element Reverse start signal from phase-to-ground directional element Start direction Binary coded
RED 670
245
Section 5 Impedance protection 5.7.5 Setting parameters

Table 122:
Parameter IBase UBase DirEvalType
Basic parameter group settings for the ZDMRDIR (ZDM1-) function

Range 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 Impedance Comparator Imp/Comp 90 - 175 Step 1 0.05 Default 3000 400.00 Comparator Unit Description Base setting for current level Base setting for voltage level Directional evaluation mode Impedance / Comparator Angle of blinder in second quadrant for forward direction Angle of blinder in fourth quadrant for forward direction Minimum operate phase current for Phase-Earth loops Minimum operate delta current for Phase-Phase loops
ArgNegRes
115
Deg
ArgDir
5 - 45
15
Deg
IMinOpPE
5 - 30
%IB
IMinOpPP
5 - 30
10
%IB
Table 123:
Parameter IBase UBase PolMode
Basic parameter group settings for the ZDARDIR (ZDA1-) function

Range 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 -3U0 -U2 IPol Dual -3U0Comp -U2comp -90 - 90 Step 1 0.05 Default 3000 400.00 -3U0 Unit A kV Description Base setting for current values Base setting for voltage level in kV Polarization quantity for opt dir function for P-E faults
AngleRCA
75
Deg
Characteristic relay angle (= MTA or base angle) Minimum operation current in % of IBase Minimum polarizing voltage in % of UBase Minimum polarizing current in % of IBase
I> UPol> IPol>
1 - 200 1 - 100 5 - 100
1 1 1
5 1 10
%IB %UB %IB
246
RED 670
Table 124:
Parameter AngleOp Kmag
Advanced parameter group settings for the ZDARDIR (ZDA1-) function

Range 90 - 180 0.50 - 3000.00 Step 1 0.01 Default 160 40.00 Unit Deg ohm Description Operation sector angle Boost-factor in U0comp and U2comp polarization
5.8
Phase preference logic

Function block name: PPL ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: PPLPHIZ IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
5.8.1
Introduction
Phase Preference Logic (PPL) is intended to be used in isolated or high impedance earthed networks where there is a requirement to trip only one of the faulty lines at cross-country fault. The phase preference logic inhibits tripping for single-phase-to-earth faults in isolated and high impedance-earthed networks, where such faults are not to be cleared by distance protection. For cross-country faults, the logic selects either the leading or the lagging phase-earth loop for measurement and initiates tripping of the preferred fault based on the selected phase preference. A number of different phase preference combinations are available for selection.
5.8.2
The phase preference logic can be activated or deactivated by setting the parameter Operation to On or Off. The function has 10 operation modes which can be set by the parameter Mode. The different modes and their explanation are shown in table 125 below.
Table 125:
Operation Mode 0
Operation modes for phase preference logic

Description No filter, phase-to-phase measuring loops are not blocked during single phase-toground faults. Tripping is allowed without any particular phase preference at crosscountry faults No preference, trip is blocked during single phase-to-ground faults, trip is allowed without any particular phase preference at cross-country fault Cyclic 1231c; L1 before L2 before L3 before L1
1 2
RED 670
247

Operation Mode 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Description Cyclic 1321c; L1 before L3 before L2 before L1 Acyclic 123a; L1 before L2before L3 Acyclic 132a; L1 before L3 before L2 Acyclic 213a; L2 before L1 before L3 Acyclic 231a; L2 before L3 before L1 Acyclic 312a; L3 before L2 before L1 Acyclic 321a; L3 before L2 before L1
The function can be divided into two parts; one labeled Voltage and Current Discrimination and the second one labeled Phase Preference Evaluation, see figure 134. The aim with the voltage and current discrimination part is to discriminate faulty phases and to determine if there is a cross country fault. If cross country fault is detected, an internal signal Detected cross country fault is created and sent to the phase preference part to be used in the evaluation process for determining the condition for trip. The voltage discrimination part gives phase segregated start signals STUL1, STUL2 or STUL3 if the respective measured phase voltage is below the setting parameter UPN< at the same time as the zero sequence voltage is above the setting parameter 3U0>, see figure 134. The internal signal for detection of cross country fault, DetectCrossContry, that come from the voltage and current discrimination part of the function can be achieved in three different ways: 1. 2. 3. The magnitude of 3I0 has been above the setting parameter IN for a time longer than the setting of pick-up timer tIN The magnitude of 3I0 has been above the setting parameter IN at the same time as the magnitude of 3U0 has been above the setting parameter 3U0> during a time longer than the setting of pick-up timer tUN The magnitude of 3I0 has been above the setting parameter IN at the same time as one of the following conditions are fulfilled: the measured phase-to phase voltage in at least one of the phase combinations has been below the setting parameter UPP< for more than 20 ms. At least one of the phase voltages are below the setting parameter UPN< for more than 20 ms
The second part, Phase preference evaluation, uses the internal signal DetectCrossCountry from the voltage and current evaluation together with the input signal STCND and the information from the setting parameter OperMode to determine the condition for trip. To release the phase preference logic at least two out of three phases must be faulty. The fault classification whether it is a single line to 248 Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B RED 670
earth or cross country fault and which phase to be tripped at cross country fault is converted into a binary coded signal and sent to the distance protection measuring zone to release the correct measuring zone according to the setting of OperMode. This is done by activating the output ZREL and it shall be connected to the input STCND on the distance zone measuring element. The input signal STCNDC consist of binary information of fault type and is connected to the Phase selector output STCND. The fault must be activated in at least two phases to be classified as a cross country fault in the phase preference part of the logic. The input signals RELLx are additional fault release signals that can be connected to external protection functions through binary input. The trip output can be blocked by setting the parameter Blk1PhTr to On. The output start and trip signals can be blocked by activating the input BLOCK
UL1 UL2 UL3 AND
STUL1
UL1UL2 UL2UL3
UL3UL1 IN UN UPN< UPP< IN> UN> Detect CrossCountry fault
AND
STUL2
Voltage and Current Discrimination
AND
STUL3
OR
AND
START
AND OperatingMode RELL1N RELL2N AND TRL1
Phase Preference Evaluation
AND AND
TRL2
TRL3
RELL3N
STCND
AND AND AND Blk1PhTr BLOCK OR AND
en06000323.vsd
Figure 134:
Simplified block diagram for phase preference logic
RED 670
249

PPL1PPLPHIZ I3P U3P BLOCK RELL1N RELL2N RELL3N STCND START ZREL
en07000029.vsd
Figure 135:
PPL function block
5.8.4

Table 126:
Signal I3P U3P BLOCK RELL1N RELL2N RELL3N STCND
Input signals for the PPLPHIZ (PPL1-) function block

Description Group signal for current input Group signal for voltage input Block of function Release condition for the L1 to earth loop Release condition for the L2 to earth loop Release condition for the L3 to earth loop Integer coded external release signals
Table 127:
Signal START ZREL
Output signals for the PPLPHIZ (PPL1-) function block

Description Indicates start for earth fault(s), regardless of direction Integer coded output release signal
5.8.5
Setting parameters
250
RED 670
Table 128:
Parameter IBase UBase OperMode
Basic parameter group settings for the PPLPHIZ (PPL1-) function

Range 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 No Filter NoPref 1231c 1321c 123a 132a 213a 231a 312a 321a 10.0 - 100.0 Step 1 0.01 Default 3000 400.00 No Filter Unit A kV Description Base current Base voltage Operating mode (c=cyclic,a=acyclic)
UPN<
1.0
70.0
%UB
Operate value of phase undervoltage (% of UBase) Operate value of line to line undervoltage (% of UBase) Operate value of residual voltage (% of UBase) Operate value of residual current (% of IBase) Pickup-delay for residual voltage Dropoff-delay for residual voltage Pickup-delay for residual current
UPP<
10.0 - 100.0
1.0
50.0
%UB
3U0>
5.0 - 70.0
1.0
20.0
%UB
IN>
10 - 200
20
%IB
tUN tOffUN tIN
0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000
0.001 0.001 0.001
0.100 0.100 0.150
s s s
5.8.6
Technical data
Table 129:
Function Operate value, phase to phase and phase to neutral undervoltage Reset ratio, undervoltage Operate value, residual voltage Reset ratio, residual voltage Operate value, residual current Reset ratio, residual current Timers Operating mode
Phase preference logic (PHIZ)

Range or value (10.0 - 100.0)% of Ubase < 105% (5.0 - 70.0)% of Ubase > 95% (10 - 200)% of Ibase > 95% (0.000 - 60.000) s No Filter, NoPref Cyclic: 1231c, 1321c Acyclic: 123a, 132a, 213a, 231a, 312a, 321a Accuracy 0,5% of Ur 0,5% of Ur 1,0% of Ir for I < Ir 1,0% of I for I > Ir 0,5% 10ms
RED 670
251
5.9
Power swing detection (RPSB, 78)

Function block name: PSD-ANSI number: 78 IEC 61850 logical node name: ZMRPSB IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
Zpsb
5.9.1
Introduction
Power swings may occur after disconnection of heavy loads or trip of big generation plants. Power swing detection function is used to detect power swings and initiate block of selected distance protection zones. Occurrence of earth fault currents during a power swing can block the power swing detection function to allow fault clearance.
5.9.2
The PSD function comprises an inner and an outer quadrilateral measurement characteristic with load encroachment, see figure 136 Its principle of operation is based on the measurement of the time it takes for a power swing transient impedance to pass through the impedance area between the outer and the inner characteristics. Power swings are identified by transition times longer than a transition time set on corresponding timers. The impedance measuring principle is the same as that used for the distance protection zones. The impedance and the characteristic passing times are measured in all three phases separately. One-out-ofthree or two-out-of-three operating modes can be selected according to the specific system operating conditions.
252
RED 670
X1OutFw X1InFw
jX
ZL
R1LIn
DFw j
DRv
ARGLd
R1FInRv
R1FInFw
j DRv DFw DFw
DFw
ARGLd
R
DRv
RLdInRv RLdInFw
DFw DFw
DRv j DRv
RLdOutRv RLdOutFw X1InRv X1OutRv

en05000175.vsd
Figure 136:
Operating characteristic for the PSD function
The impedance measurement within the PSD function is performed by solving equation 58 and equation 59 (n = 1, 2, 3 for each corresponding phase L1, L2 and L3).
U L1 Re IL1 Rset
(Equation 58)
U L1 Im IL1 Xset
(Equation 59)
The Rset and Xset are R and X boundaries which are more explained in the following sections.
5.9.2.1
Resistive reach in forward direction

To avoid load encroachment the resistive reach is limited in forward direction by setting the parameter RLdOutFw which is the outer resistive load boundary value while the inner resistive boundary is calculated according to equation 60.
RED 670
253
RLdInFw = kLdRFw RLdOutFw

where:
(Equation 60)
kLdRFw is a settable multiplication factor less than 1
The slope of the load encroachment inner and outer boundary is defined by setting the parameter ARGLd. The load encroachment in the fourth quadrant uses the same settings as in the first quadrant (same ARGLd and RLdOutFw and calculated RLdInFw). The quadrilateral characteristic in the first quadrant is tilted to get a better adaptation to the distance zones. The angle is the same as the line angle and derived from the setting of the reactive reach inner boundary X1InFw and the line resistance for the inner boundary R1LIn. The fault resistance coverage for the inner boundary is set by the parameter R1FInFw. From the setting parameter RLdOutFw and the calculated value RLdInFw a distance between the inner and outer boundary, DFw, is calculated. This value is valid for R direction in first and fourth quadrant and for X direction in first and second quadrant.
5.9.2.2
Resistive reach in reverse direction

To avoid load encroachment in reverse direction the resistive reach is limited by setting the parameter RLdOutRv for the outer boundary of the load encroachment cone. The distance to the inner resistive load boundary RLdInRv is determined by using the setting parameter kLdRRv in equation 61.
RLdInRv = kLdRRv RLdOutRv
(Equation 61)
From the setting parameter RLdOutRv and the calculated value RLdInRv a distance between the inner and outer boundary, DRv, is calculated. This value is valid for R direction in second and third quadrant and for X direction in third and fourth quadrant. The inner resistive characteristic in the second quadrant outside the load encroachment part corresponds to the setting parameter R1FInRv for the inner boundary. The outer boundary is internally calculated as the sum of DRv+R1FInRv. The inner resistive characteristic in the third quadrant outside the load encroachment zone consist of the sum of the settings R1FInRv and the line resistance R1LIn. The argument of the tilted lines outside the load encroachment is the same as the tilted lines in the first quadrant. The distance between the inner and outer boundary is the same as for the load encroachment in reverse direction i.e. DRv.
254
RED 670

5.9.2.3 Reactive reach in forward and reverse direction
The inner characteristic for the reactive reach in forward direction correspond to the setting parameter X1InFw and the outer boundary is defined as X1InFw + DFw,
where: DFw = RLdOutFw - KLdRFw RLdOutFw
The inner characteristic for the reactive reach in reverse direction correspond to the setting parameter X1InRv for the inner boundary and the outer boundary is defined as X1InRv + DRv.
where: DRv = RLdOutRv - KLdRRv RLdOutRv
5.9.2.4
Basic detection logic

The operation of the function is only released if the magnitude of the current is above the setting of the min operating current, IMinOpPE. The PSD function can operate in two operating modes: The "1-of-3" operating mode is based on detection of power swing in any of the three phases. Figure 137 presents a composition of a detection signal PSD-DETL1 in this particular phase. The "2-of-3" operating mode is based on detection of power swing in at least two out of three phases. Figure 138 presents a composition of the detection signals DET1of3 and DET2of3.
Signals ZOUTL1ZOUT_A (external boundary) and ZINL1 (internal boundary) in figure 137 are related to the operation of the impedance measuring elements in each phase separately (Ln represents the corresponding phase L1, L2, and L3). They are internal signals, calculated by the PSD-function. The tP1 timer in figure 137 serve as detection of initial power swings, which are usually not as fast as the later swings are. The tP2 timer become activated for the detection of the consecutive swings, if the measured impedance exit the operate area and returns within the time delay, set on the tW waiting timer. The upper part of figure 137 (input signal ZOUTL1, ZINL1, AND-gates and tP-timers etc.) are duplicated for phase L2 and L3. All tP1 and tP2 timers in the figure have the same settings.
RED 670
255
Figure 137:
Detection of power-swing in phase L1
Figure 138:
Detection of power-swing for 1-of-3 and 2-of-3 operating mode
256
RED 670
ZOUTL1 ZOUTL2 ZOUTL3 tEF t
OR ZINL1 AND ZINL2 ZINL3 AND OR
ZOUT
ZIN
TRSP I0CHECK
BLKI02
AND
10 ms t
OR tR1
AND -loop tR2 BLKI01 BLOCK -loop DET1of3 - int. REL1PH BLK1PH DET2of3 - int. REL2PH BLK2PH EXTERNAL AND t
OR
INHIBIT
AND tH OR AND t OR START
AND
en05000114.vsd
Figure 139:
PSD function-simplified block diagram
5.9.2.5
Operating and inhibit conditions

Figure 139 presents a simplified logic diagram for the PSD function. The internal signals DET1of3 and DET2of3 relate to the detailed logic diagrams in figure 137 and figure 138 respectively. Selection of the operating mode is possible by the proper configuration of the functional input signals REL1PH, BLK1PH, REL2PH, and BLK2PH. The load encroachment characteristic can be switched off by setting the parameter OperationLdCh = Off, but notice that the DFw and DRv will still be calculated. The characteristic will in this case be only quadrilateral. There are four different ways to form the internal INHIBIT signal:
RED 670
257
Logical 1 on functional input BLOCK inhibits the output START signal instantaneously. The INHIBIT internal signal is activated, if the power swing has been detected and the measured impedance remains within its operate characteristic for the time, which is longer than the time delay set on tR2 timer. It is possible to disable this condition by connecting the logical 1 signal to the BLKI01 functional input. The INHIBIT internal signal is activated after the time delay, set on tR1 timer, if an earth fault appears during the power swing (input IOCHECK is high) and the power swing has been detected before the earth fault (activation of the signal I0CHECK). It is possible to disable this condition by connecting the logical 1 signal to the BLKI02 functional input. The INHIBIT logical signals becomes logical 1, if the functional input I0CHECK appears within the time delay, set on tEF timer and the impedance has been seen within the outer characteristic of the PSD operate characteristic in all three phases. This function prevents the operation of the PSD function in cases, when the circuit breaker closes onto persistent single-phase fault after single-pole autoreclosing dead time, if the initial single-phase fault and single-pole opening of the circuit breaker causes the power swing in the remaining two phases.
5.9.3
Function block
PSD1ZMRPSB_78 I3P U3P BLOCK BLKI01 BLKI02 BLK1PH REL1PH BLK2PH REL2PH I0CHECK TRSP EXTERNAL START ZOUT ZIN
en06000264.vsd
Figure 140:
PSD function block
5.9.4

Table 130:
Signal I3P U3P BLOCK BLKI01 BLKI02 Table continued on next page
Input signals for the ZMRPSB_78 (PSD1-) function block

Description Group signal for current input Group signal for voltage input Block of function Block inhibit of start output for slow swing condition Block inhibit of start output for subsequent residual current detection
258
RED 670

Signal BLK1PH REL1PH BLK2PH REL2PH I0CHECK TRSP EXTERNAL Description Block one-out-of-three-phase operating mode Release one-out-of-three-phase operating mode Block two-out-of-three-phase operating mode Release two-out-of-three-phase operating mode Residual current (3I0) detection used to inhibit start output Single-pole tripping command issued by tripping function Input for external detection of power swing
Table 131:
Signal START ZOUT ZIN
Output signals for the ZMRPSB_78 (PSD1-) function block

Description Power swing detected Measured impedance within outer impedance boundary Measured impedance within inner impedance boundary
5.9.5
Setting parameters
Table 132:
Parameter Operation X1InFw R1LIn
Basic parameter group settings for the ZMRPSB_78 (PSD1-) function

Range Off On 0.10 - 3000.00 0.10 - 1000.00 Step 0.01 0.01 Default Off 30.00 30.00 Unit ohm ohm Description Operation Mode On / Off Inner reactive boundary, forward Line resistance for inner characteristic angle Fault resistance coverage to inner resistive line, forward Inner reactive boundary, reverse Fault resistance line to inner resistive boundary, reverse Operation of load discrimination characteristic Outer resistive load boundary, forward Load angle determining load impedance area Outer resistive load boundary, reverse
R1FInFw
0.10 - 1000.00
0.01
30.00
ohm
X1InRv R1FInRv
0.10 - 3000.00 0.10 - 1000.00
0.01 0.01
30.00 30.00
ohm ohm
OperationLdCh
Off On 0.10 - 3000.00 5 - 70
On
RLdOutFw ArgLd
0.01 1
30.00 25
ohm Deg
RLdOutRv
0.10 - 3000.00
0.01
30.00
ohm
RED 670
259

Parameter kLdRFw Range 0.50 - 0.90 Step 0.01 Default 0.75 Unit Mult Description Multiplication factor for inner resistive load boundary, forward Multiplication factor for inner resistive load boundary, reverse Timer for overcoming single-pole reclosing dead time Minimum operate current in % of IBase Base setting for current level settings
kLdRRv
0.50 - 0.90
0.01
0.75
Mult
tEF
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
3.000
IMinOpPE IBase
5 - 30 1 - 99999
1 1
10 3000
%IB A
Table 133:
Parameter tP1 tP2
Advanced parameter group settings for the ZMRPSB_78 (PSD1-) function

Range 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 0.001 Default 0.045 0.015 Unit s s Description Timer for detection of initial power swing Timer for detection of subsequent power swings Waiting timer for activation of tP2 timer Timer for holding power swing START output Timer giving delay to inhibit by the residual current Timer giving delay to inhibit at very slow swing
tW tH
0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000
0.001 0.001
0.250 0.500
s s
tR1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.300
tR2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
2.000
5.9.6
Technical data
Table 134:
Function Reactive reach
Power swing detection (RPSB, 78)

Range or value (0.10-3000.00) W/phase Accuracy 2.0% static accuracy Conditions: Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees 0.5% 10 ms
Resistive reach Timers
(0.101000.00)W /loop (0.000-60.000) s
260
RED 670
5.10
Power swing logic (RPSL, 78)

Function block name: PSL-ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: ZMRPSL IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
5.10.1
Introduction
Power Swing Logic (RPSL) is a complementary function to Power Swing Detection (PSD) function. It provides possibility for selective tripping of faults on power lines during system oscillations (power swings or pole slips), when the distance protection function should normally be blocked. The complete logic consists of two different parts: Communication and tripping part. It provides selective tripping on the basis of special distance protection zones and a scheme communication logic, which are not blocked during the system oscillations. Blocking part. It blocks unwanted operation of instantaneous distance protection zone 1 for oscillations, which are initiated by faults and their clearing on the adjacent power lines and other primary elements.
5.10.2
5.10.2.1
Communication and tripping logic
Communication and tripping logic as used by the power swing distance protection zones is schematically presented in figure 141.
RED 670
261
STDEF AR1P1 STPSD BLOCK CSUR
&
tCS
&
&
CS
tTrip t CACC CR
tBlkTr t
&
BLKZMPS
&
>1
TRIP
en06000236.vsd
Figure 141:
Simplified logic diagram power swing communication and tripping logic
The complete logic remains blocked as long as there is a logical one on the BLOCK functional input signal. Presence of the logical one on the STDEF functional input signal also blocks the logic as long as this block is not released by the logical one on the AR1P1 functional input signal. The functional output signal BLKZMPS remains logical one as long as the function is not blocked externally (BLOCK is logical zero) and the earth-fault is detected on protected line (STDEF is logical one), which is connected in three-phase mode (AR1P1 is logical zero). Timer tBlkTr prolongs the duration of this blocking condition, if the measured impedance remains within the operate area of the PSD function (STPSD input active). The BLKZMPS can be used to block the operation of the power-swing zones. Logical one on functional input CSUR, which is normally connected to the TRIP functional output of a power swing carrier sending zone, activates functional output CS, if the function is not blocked by one of the above conditions. It also activates the TRIP functional output. Initiation of the CS functional output is possible only, if the STPSD input has been active longer than the time delay set on the security timer tCS. Simultaneous presence of the functional input signals PLTR_CRD and CR (local trip condition) also activates the TRIP functional output, if the function is not blocked by one of the above conditions and the STPSD signal has been present longer then the time delay set on the trip timer tTrip.
5.10.2.2
Blocking logic
Figure 142 presents the logical circuits, which control the operation of the underreaching zone (zone 1) at power swings, caused by the faults and their clearance on the remote power lines.
262
RED 670
& &
STZML BLOCK STMZH STZMPSD STPSD BLKZMH STZMLL
& &
tZL t tDZ t
& >1
>1
&
-loop
en06000237.vsd
Figure 142:
Control of underreaching distance protection (Zone 1) at power swings caused by the faults and their clearance on adjacent lines and other system elements
The logic is disabled by a logical one on functional inputBLOCK. It can start only if the following conditions are simultaneously fulfilled: STPSD functional input signal must be a logical zero. This means, that the PSD function must not detect power swinging over the protected power line. STZMPSD functional input must be a logical one. This means that the impedance must be detected within the external boundary of the PSD function. STZMOR functional input must be a logical one. This means that the fault must be detected by the overreaching distance protection zone, for example zone 2.
The STZMURPS functional output, which can be used in complete terminal logic instead of a normal distance protection zone 1, becomes active under the following conditions: If the STZMUR signal appears at the same time as the STZMOR or if it appears with a time delay, which is shorter than the time delay set on timer tDZ. If the STZMUR signal appears after the STZMOR signal with a time delay longer than the delay set on the tDZ timer, and remains active longer than the time delay set on the tZL timer.
The BLKZMOR functional output signal can be used to block the operation of the higher distance protection zone, if the fault has moved into the zone 1 operate area after tDZ time delay.
RED 670
263

PSL1ZMRPSL BLOCK STZMUR STZMOR STPSD STDEF STZMPSD CACC AR1P1 CSUR CR TRIP STZMURPS BLKZMUR BLKZMOR CS
en07000026.vsd
Figure 143:
PSL function block
5.10.4

Table 135:
Signal BLOCK STZMUR STZMOR STPSD STDEF STZMPSD CACC AR1P1 CSUR CR
Input signals for the ZMRPSL (PSL1-) function block

Description Block of function Start of the underreaching zone Start of the overreaching zone Power swing detected Start from Earth Fault Protection in forward or reverse direction Operation of Power Swing Detection external characteristic Overreaching ZM zone to be accelerated Single pole auto-reclosing in progress Carrier send by the underreaching power-swing zone Carrier receive signal during power swing detection operation
Table 136:
Signal TRIP STZMURPS BLKZMUR BLKZMOR CS
Output signals for the ZMRPSL (PSL1-) function block

Description Trip through Power Swing Logic Start of Underreaching zone controlled by PSL to be used in configuration Block trip of underreaching impedance zone Block trip of overreaching distance protection zones Carrier send signal controlled by the power swing
264
RED 670
Section 5 Impedance protection 5.10.5 Setting parameters

Table 137:
Parameter Operation tDZ
Basic parameter group settings for the ZMRPSL (PSL1-) function

Range Off On 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 Default Off 0.050 Unit s Description Operation Off / On Permitted max oper time diff between higher and lower zone Delay for oper of underreach zone with detected diff in oper time Conditional timer for sending the CS at power swings Conditional timer for tripping at power swings Timer for blocking the overreaching zones trip
tDZMUR
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
tCS
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
tTrip
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
tBlkTr
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.300
5.10.6
Technical data
5.11
Pole slip protection (PPAM, 78)

Function block name: ANSI number: 78 IEC 61850 logical node name: IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
<
5.11.1
Introduction
Sudden events in an electrical power system such as large changes in load, fault occurrence or fault clearance, can cause power oscillations referred to as power swings. In a non-recoverable situation, the power swings become so severe that the synchronism is lost, a condition referred to as pole slipping. The main purpose of the pole slip protection is to detect, evaluate, and take the required action for pole slipping occurrences in the power system. The electrical system parts swinging to each other can be separated with the line/s closest to the centre of the power swing allowing the two systems to be stable as separated islands.
RED 670
265
Section 5 Impedance protection 5.11.2 Principle of operation

If the generator is faster than the power system, the rotor movement in the impedance and voltage diagram is from right to left and generating is signalled. If the generator is slower than the power system, the rotor movement is from left to right and motoring is signalled (the power system drives the generator as if it were a motor). The movements in the impedance plain can be seen in figure 144. The transient behaviour is described by the transient e.m.f's EA and EB, and by X'd, XT and the transient system impedance ZS.
Zone 1 EB Xd REG 670 jX XT Zone 2 XS EA
A XS
Pole slip impedance movement
XT
Apparent generator impedance
Xd B
en06000437.vsd
Figure 144:
where: X'd XT ZS
Movements in the impedance plain
= transient reactance of the generator = short-circuit reactance of the step-up transformer = impedance of the power system A
266
RED 670
The detection of rotor angle is enabled when: the minimum current exceeds 0.10 IN (IN is IBase parameter set under general setting). the maximum voltage falls below 0.92 UBase the voltage Ucos (the voltage in phase with the generator current) has an angular velocity of 0.2...8 Hz and the corresponding direction is not blocked.
en07000004.vsd
Figure 145:
Different generator quantities as function of the angle between the equivalent generators
An alarm is given when movement of the rotor is detected and the rotor angle exceeds the angle set for 'WarnAngle'. Slipping is detected when: a change of rotor angle of min. 50 ms is recognized the slip line is crossed between ZA and ZB.
When the impedance crosses the slip line between ZB and ZC it counts as being in zone 1 and between ZC and ZA in zone 2. The entire distance ZA-ZB becomes zone 1 when 'EnableZone1' is enabled (external device detects the direction of the centre of slipping). After the first slip, the signals 'Zone1' or 'Zone2' and depending on the direction of slip - either 'Generator' or 'Motor' are issued. RED 670 Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B 267
Every time pole slipping is detected, the impedance of the point where the slip line is crossed and the instantaneous slip frequency are displayed as measurements. Further slips are only detected, if they are in the same direction and if the rate of rotor movement has reduced in relation to the preceding slip or the slip line is crossed in the opposite direction outside ZA-ZB. A further slip in the opposite direction within ZA-ZB resets all the signals and is then signalled itself as a first slip. The 'Trip1' tripping command and signal are generated after n1 slips in zone 1, providing the rotor angle is less than 'TripAngle'. The 'Trip2' signal is generated after n2 slips in zone 2, providing the rotor angle is less than 'TripAngle'. All signals are reset if: the direction of movement reverses the rotor angle detector resets without a slip being counted or no rotor relative movement was detected during the time 't-Reset'.
Imin > 0.10 IBase
Ucosj < 0.92 UBase
AND AND START
0.2 Slip.Freq. 8 Hz
d startAngle ZONE1
Z cross line ZA - ZC
AND
Z cross line ZC - ZB
AND
ZONE2
Counter N1Limit
a b
ab
AND
TRIP1
d tripAngle Counter N2Limit
OR a b ab
TRIP
AND
TRIP2
en07000005.vsd
Figure 146:
Simplified logic diagram for pole slip protection
268
RED 670

PSP1PSPPPAM_78 I3P U3P BLOCK BLKGEN BLKMOTOR EXTZONE1 TRIP TRIP1 TRIP2 START ZONE1 ZONE2 GEN MOTOR SFREQ SLIPZOHM SLIPZPER UCOSKV UCOSPER en07000030.vsd
Figure 147:
PSP function block
5.11.4

Table 138:
Signal I3P U3P BLOCK BLKGEN BLKMOTOR EXTZONE1
Input signals for the PSPPPAM_78 (PSP1-) function block

Description Current group connection Voltage group connection Block of function Block operation in generating direction Block operation in motor direction Extension of zone1 with zone2 region
Table 139:
Signal TRIP TRIP1 TRIP2 START ZONE1 ZONE2 GEN MOTOR SFREQ SLIPZOHM
Output signals for the PSPPPAM_78 (PSP1-) function block

Description Common trip signal Trip1 after the N1Limit slip in zone1 Trip2 after the N2Limit slip in zone2 Common start signal First slip in zone1 region First slip in zone2 region Generator is faster then the system Generator is slower then the system Slip frequency Slip impedance in ohms
RED 670
269

Signal SLIPZPER UCOSKV UCOSPER Description Slip impedance in percent of ZBase UCosPhi voltage in kV UCosPhi voltage in percent of UBase
5.11.5
Setting parameters
Table 140:
Parameter IBase
Basic general settings for the PSPPPAM_78 (PSP1-) function

Range 0.1 - 99999.9 Step 0.1 Default 3000.0 Unit A Description Base Current (primary phase current in Amperes) Base Voltage (primary phase-tophase voltage in kV) Measuring mode (PosSeq, L1L2, L2L3, L3L1) Invert current direction
UBase
0.1 - 9999.9
0.1
20.0
kV
MeasureMode
PosSeq L1L2 L2L3 L3L1 No Yes
PosSeq
InvertCTcurr
No
Table 141:
Parameter Operation OperationZ1 OperationZ2 ImpedanceZA ImpedanceZB ImpedanceZC AnglePhi StartAngle TripAngle N1Limit N2Limit
Basic parameter group settings for the PSPPPAM_78 (PSP1-) function

Range Off On Off On Off On 0.00 - 1000.00 0.00 - 1000.00 0.00 - 1000.00 72.00 - 90.00 0.0 - 180.0 0.0 - 180.0 1 - 20 1 - 20 Step 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.1 0.1 1 1 Default Off On On 10.00 10.00 10.00 85.00 110.0 90.0 1 3 Unit % % % Deg Deg Deg Description Operation On / Off Operation Zone1 On / Off Operation Zone2 On / Off Forward impedance in % of Zbase Reverse impedance in % of Zbase Impedance of zone1 limit in % of Zbase Angle of the slip impedance line Rotor angle for the start signal Rotor angle for the trip1 and trip2 signals Count limit for the trip1 signal Count limit for the trip2 signal
270
RED 670
Table 142:
Parameter ResetTime
Advanced parameter group settings for the PSPPPAM_78 (PSP1-) function

Range 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 Default 5.000 Unit s Description Time without slip to reset all signals
5.11.6
Technical data
Table 143:
Function Impedance reach Characteristic angle Start and trip angles Zone 1 and Zone 2 trip counters
Pole slip protection (PPAM, 78)

Range or value (0.001000.00)% of Zbase (72.0090.00) degrees (0.0180.0) degrees (1-20) Accuracy 2.0% of Ur/Ir 5.0 degrees 5.0 degrees -
5.12
Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage and current based (SFCV)
Function block name: SFV-ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: ZCVPSOF IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
5.12.1
Introduction
Automatic switch onto fault logic is a function that gives an instantaneous trip at closing of breaker onto a fault. A dead line detection check is provided to activate the function when the line is dead. Mho distance protections can not operate for switch on to fault condition when the phase voltages are close to zero. An additional logic based on UI Level is used for this purpose.
5.12.2
The switch-onto-fault function (SFV) can be activated externally by Breaker Closed Input or internally (automatically) by using UI Level Based Logic see figure 148. The activation from the DLD function is released if the internal signal DeadLine from the UILevel function is activated at the same time as the input ZACC is not activated during at least for a duration tDLD and the setting parameter AutoInit is set to On.
RED 670
271
When the setting AutoInit is Off the function is activated by an external binary input BC. To get a trip also one of the following operation modes must be selected by the parameter Mode: Mode = Impedance; trip is released if the input ZACC is activated (normal connected to non directional distance protection zone) Mode = UILevel; trip is released if UILevel detector is activated Mode = Both; trip is initiated based on impedance measured criteria or UILevel detection The internal signal DeadLine from the UILevel detector is activated if all three phase currents and voltages are below the setting IPh< and UPh<. UI Level based measurement detects the switch onto fault condition even though the voltage is very low. The logic is based on current change for activation, current level and voltage level. The internal signal SOTFLevel is activated if the phase voltage and corresponding phase current is below the setting IPh< and UPh< in any phase. First of all AutoInit= On is not needed (or in some cases not even wanted) for external activation and secondly the information is already present in the first sentence of "Principle of operation" The function is released during a settable time tSOTF. The function can be blocked by activating the input BLOCK.
272
RED 670
BLOCK
AND
15
TRIP
BC
AutiInit=On
200 1000 OR
ZACC
AND
IL1 IL2 IL3 UL1 UL2 UL3 Iph< Uph<

UILevel detector
deadLine
SOTFU ILevel
Mode = Impedance
AND
Mode = UILevel
OR
AND
OR
Mode = UILvl&Imp
AND
en07000084.vsd
Figure 148:
Simplified logic diagram for current and voltage based switch onto fault logic.
RED 670
273

SFV1ZCVPSOF I3P U3P BLOCK BC ZACC TRIP
en06000459.vsd
Figure 149:
SFV1 function block
5.12.4

Table 144:
Signal I3P U3P BLOCK BC ZACC
Input signals for the ZCVPSOF (SFV1-) function block

Description Current DFT Voltage DFT Block of function External enabling of SOTF Distance zone to be accelerated by SOTF
Table 145:
Signal TRIP
Output signals for the ZCVPSOF (SFV1-) function block

Description Trip output
5.12.5
Setting parameters
Table 146:
Parameter Operation IBase UBase Mode
Basic parameter group settings for the ZCVPSOF (SFV1-) function

Range Off On 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 Impedance UILevel UILvl&Imp Off On 1 - 100 Step 1 0.05 Default On 3000 400.00 UILevel Unit A kV Description Operation Off / On Base current (A) Base voltage L-L (kV) Mode of operation of SOTF Function Automatic switchonto fault initialization Current level for detection of dead line in % of IBase
AutoInit IPh<
Off 20
%IB
274
RED 670

Parameter UPh< Range 1 - 100 Step 1 Default 70 Unit %UB Description Voltage level for detection of dead line in % of UBase Time delay for UI detection (s) Drop off delay time of switch onto fault function Delay time for activation of dead line detection
tDuration tSOTF
0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000
0.001 0.001
0.020 1.000
s s
tDLD
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
5.12.6
Technical data
Table 147:
Parameter Operate voltage, detection of dead line Operate current, detection of dead line Delay following dead line detection input before SOTF function is automatically enabled Time period after circuit breaker closure in which SOTF function is active
Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage and current based (PSOF)
Range or value (1100)% of Ubase (1100)% of Ibase (0.00060.000) s (0.00060.000) s Accuracy 1.0% of Ur 1.0% of Ir 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms
RED 670
275
276
Section 6 Current protection
Section 6
Current protection
About this chapter
This chapter describes current protection functions. These include functions like Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection, Four step phase overcurrent protection, Pole discordance protection and Residual overcurrent protection.
6.1
Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection (PIOC, 50)

Function block name: IOCxANSI number: 50 IEC 61850 logical node name: PHPIOC IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
3I>>
6.1.1
Introduction
The instantaneous three phase overcurrent function has a low transient overreach and short tripping time to allow use as a high set short-circuit protection function, with the reach limited to less than typical eighty percent of the fault current line at minimum source impedance.
6.1.2
The sampled analogue phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of each phase current the RMS value of each phase current is derived. These phase current values are fed to the IOC function. In a comparator the RMS values are compared to the set operation current value of the function (IP>>). If a phase current is larger than the set operation current a signal from the comparator for this phase is set to true. This signal will, without delay, activate the output signal TRLn (n=1,2,3) for this phase and the TRIP signal that is common for all three phases.
RED 670
277
There is an operation mode (OpMode) setting: 1 out of 3 or 2 out of 3. If the parameter is set to 1 out of 3 any phase trip signal will be activated. If the parameter is set to 2 out of 3 at least two phase signals must be activated for trip. There is also a possibility to activate a preset change of the set operation current (StValMult) via a binary input (ENMULT). In some applications the operation value needs to be changed, for example due to transformer inrush currents. The function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK.
6.1.3
Function block
IOC1PHPIOC_50 I3P BLOCK ENMULT TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 en04000391.vsd
Figure 150:
IOC function block
6.1.4

Table 148:
Signal I3P BLOCK ENMULT
Input signals for the PHPIOC_50 (IOC1-) function block

Description Three phase current Block of function Enable current start value multiplier
Table 149:
Signal TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3
Output signals for the PHPIOC_50 (IOC1-) function block

Description Trip signal from any phase Trip signal from phase L1 Trip signal from phase L2 Trip signal from phase L3
6.1.5
Setting parameters
278
RED 670
Table 150:
Parameter Operation IBase OpMode
Basic parameter group settings for the PHPIOC_50 (IOC1-) function

Range Off On 1 - 99999 2 out of 3 1 out of 3 1 - 2500 Step 1 Default Off 3000 1 out of 3 Unit A Description Operation Off / On Base current Select operation mode 2-out of 3 / 1out of 3 Operate phase current level in % of IBase
IP>>
200
%IB
Table 151:
Parameter StValMult
Advanced parameter group settings for the PHPIOC_50 (IOC1-) function

Range 0.5 - 5.0 Step 0.1 Default 1.0 Unit Description Multiplier for operate current level
6.1.6
Technical data
Table 152:
Function Operate current Reset ratio Operate time Reset time Critical impulse time Operate time Reset time Critical impulse time Dynamic overreach
Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection (PIOC, 50)

Range or value (1-2500)% of lbase > 95% 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 10 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset 35 ms typically at 10 to 0 x Iset 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset < 5% at t = 100 ms Accuracy 1.0% of Ir at I Ir 1.0% of I at I > Ir -
6.2
Four step phase overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51_67)
RED 670
279
Function block name: TOCxANSI number: 51/67 IEC 61850 logical node name: OC4PTOC
3I> 4 4 alt
6.2.1
Introduction
The four step phase overcurrent function has an inverse or definite time delay independent for each step separately. All IEC and ANSI time delayed characteristics are available together with an optional user defined time characteristic. The function can be set to be directional or non-directional independently for each of the steps.
6.2.2
The function is divided into four different sub-functions, one for each step. For each step x an operation mode is set (DirModex): Off/Non-directional/Forward/Reverse. The protection design can be decomposed in four parts: The direction element, indicates the over current fault direction The harmonic Restraint Blocking function The 4 step over current function The Mode Selection If VT inputs are not available or not connected, func parameter DirModex shall be left to default value, Non-directional.
280
RED 670
faultState I3P U3P
Direction Element
dirPh1Flt dirPh2Flt dirPh3Flt
4 step over current element One element for each step
faultState
START
TRIP
I3P
Harmonic Restraint Element
harmRestrBlock
enableDir Mode Selection enableStep1-4 DirectionalMode1-4
en05000740.vsd
Figure 151:
Functional overview of TOC.
A common setting for all steps, StPhaseSel, is used to specify the number of phase currents to be high to enable operation. The settings can be chosen: 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3. The sampled analogue phase currents are pre-processed in a pre-processing function blocks. By a parameter setting within the general settings for the TOC function it is then possible to select type of measurement which shall be used by TOC function for all overcurrent stages. It is possible to select either discrete Fourier filter (DFT) or true RMS filer (RMS). If DFT option is selected then only the RMS value of the fundamental frequency components of each phase current is derived. Influence of DC current component and higher harmonic current components are almost completely suppressed. If RMS option is selected then the true RMS values is used. The true RMS value in addition to the fundamental frequency component includes the contribution from the current DC component as well as from higher current harmonic. The selected current values are fed to the TOC function. In a comparator, for each phase current, the DFT or RMS values are compared to the set operation current value of the function (I1>, I2>, I3> or I4>). If a phase current is larger than the set operation current a signal from the comparator for this phase and step is set to true. This signal will, without delay, activate the output signal Start for this phase/step, the Start signal RED 670 Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B 281
common for all three phases for this step and a common Start signal. It shall be noted that the selection of measured value (i.e. DFT or RMS) do not influence the operation of directional part of TOC function. Service value for individually measured phase currents are available from the TOC function. This feature simplifies testing, commissioning and in service operational checking of the function. A harmonic restrain of the function can be chosen. A set 2nd harmonic current in relation to the fundamental current is used. The 2nd harmonic current is taken from the pre-processing of the phase currents and the relation is compared to a set restrain current level. The function can use a directional option. The direction of the fault current is given as current angle in relation to the voltage angle. The fault current and fault voltage for the directional function is dependent of the fault type. To enable directional measurement at close in faults, causing low measured voltage, the polarization voltage is a combination of the apparent voltage (85%) and a memory voltage (15%). The following combinations are used.
Phase-phase short circuit:
U refL1L 2 = U L1 - U L 2
U refL 2 L 3 = U L 2 - U L 3
U refL 3 L1 = U L 3 - U L1
Phase-earth short circuit:
I dirL1L 2 = I L1 - I L 2
I dirL 2 L 3 = I L 2 - I L 3
I dirL 3 L1 = I L 3 - I L1
U refL1 = U L1
I dirL1 = I L1
U refL 2 = U L 2
U refL 3 = U L 3
I dirL 2 = I L 2
I dirL 3 = I L 3
The directional setting is given as a characteristic angle AngleRCA for the function and an angle window AngleROA.
282
RED 670
Reverse
Uref RCA
ROA
ROA
Forward
Idir
en05000745.vsd
Figure 152:
Directional characteristic of the phase overcurrent protection
The default value of AngleRCA is 65. The parameters AngleROA gives the angle sector from AngleRCA for directional borders. A minimum current for directional phase start current signal can be set: IminOpPhSel. If no blockings are given the start signals will start the timers of the step. The time characteristic for each step can be chosen as definite time delay or some type of inverse time characteristic. A wide range of standardized inverse time characteristics is available. It is also possible to create a tailor made time characteristic. The possibilities for inverse time characteristics are described in chapter "Time inverse characteristics". Different types of reset time can be selected as described in chapter "Time inverse characteristics". There is also a possibility to activate a preset change (IxMult, x= 1, 2, 3 or 4) of the set operation current via a binary input (enable multiplier). In some applications the operation value needs to be changed, for example due to changed network switching state. The function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The start signals from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKST. The trip signals from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTR.
RED 670
283
Section 6 Current protection 6.2.3 Function block

TOC1OC4PTOC_51_67 I3P U3P BLOCK BLKTR BLKST1 BLKST2 BLKST3 BLKST4 ENMULT1 ENMULT2 ENMULT3 ENMULT4 TRIP TR1 TR2 TR3 TR4 TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TR1L1 TR1L2 TR1L3 TR2L1 TR2L2 TR2L3 TR3L1 TR3L2 TR3L3 TR4L1 TR4L2 TR4L3 START ST1 ST2 ST3 ST4 STL1 STL2 STL3 ST1L1 ST1L2 ST1L3 ST2L1 ST2L2 ST2L3 ST3L1 ST3L2 ST3L3 ST4L1 ST4L2 ST4L3 2NDHARM DIRL1 DIRL2 DIRL3 en06000187.vsd
Figure 153:
TOC function block
6.2.4

Table 153:
Signal I3P U3P BLOCK BLKTR BLKST1 Table continued on next page
Input signals for the OC4PTOC_51_67 (TOC1-) function block

Description Group signal for current input Group signal for voltage input Block of function Block of trip Block of Step1
284
RED 670

Signal BLKST2 BLKST3 BLKST4 ENMULT1 ENMULT2 ENMULT3 ENMULT4 Description Block of Step2 Block of Step3 Block of Step4 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step1 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step2 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step3 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step4
Table 154:
Signal TRIP TR1 TR2 TR3 TR4 TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TR1L1 TR1L2 TR1L3 TR2L1 TR2L2 TR2L3 TR3L1 TR3L2 TR3L3 TR4L1 TR4L2 TR4L3 START ST1 ST2 ST3 ST4 STL1 STL2 STL3
Output signals for the OC4PTOC_51_67 (TOC1-) function block

Description Trip Common trip signal from step1 Common trip signal from step2 Common trip signal from step3 Common trip signal from step4 Trip signal from phase L1 Trip signal from phase L2 Trip signal from phase L3 Trip signal from step1 phase L1 Trip signal from step1 phase L2 Trip signal from step1 phase L3 Trip signal from step2 phase L1 Trip signal from step2 phase L2 Trip signal from step2 phase L3 Trip signal from step3 phase L1 Trip signal from step3 phase L2 Trip signal from step3 phase L3 Trip signal from step4 phase L1 Trip signal from step4 phase L2 Trip signal from step4 phase L3 General start signal Common start signal from step1 Common start signal from step2 Common start signal from step3 Common start signal from step4 Start signal from phase L1 Start signal from phase L2 Start signal from phase L3
RED 670
285

Signal ST1L1 ST1L2 ST1L3 ST2L1 ST2L2 ST2L3 ST3L1 ST3L2 ST3L3 ST4L1 ST4L2 ST4L3 2NDHARM DIRL1 DIRL2 DIRL3 Description Start signal from step1 phase L1 Start signal from step1 phase L2 Start signal from step1 phase L3 Start signal from step2 phase L1 Start signal from step2 phase L2 Start signal from step2 phase L3 Start signal from step3 phase L1 Start signal from step3 phase L2 Start signal from step3 phase L3 Start signal from step4 phase L1 Start signal from step4 phase L2 Start signal from step4 phase L3 Block from second harmonic detection Direction for phase1 Direction for phase2 Direction for phase3
6.2.5
Setting parameters
Table 155:
Parameter MeasType
Basic general settings for the OC4PTOC_51_67 (TOC1-) function

Range DFT RMS Step Default DFT Unit Description Selection between DFT and RMS measurement
Table 156:
Parameter Operation IBase UBase AngleRCA AngleROA StartPhSel
Basic parameter group settings for the OC4PTOC_51_67 (TOC1-) function

Range Off On 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 40 - 65 40 - 89 Not Used 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 Step 1 0.05 1 1 Default Off 3000 400.00 55 80 1 out of 3 Unit A kV Deg Deg Description Operation Off / On Base current Base voltage Relay characteristic angle (RCA) Relay operation angle (ROA) Number of phases required for op (1 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3)
286
RED 670

Parameter DirMode1 Range Off Non-directional Forward Reverse ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500 Step Default Non-directional Unit Description Directional mode of step 1 (off, nodir, forward, reverse) Selection of time delay curve type for step 1
Characterist1
ANSI Def. Time
I1>
1000
%IB
Phase current operate level for step1 in % of IBase Definitive time delay of step 1 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 1 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 1 Multiplier for current operate level for step 1 Directional mode of step 2 (off, nodir, forward, reverse)
t1 k1
0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 999.00
0.001 0.01
0.000 0.05
s -
t1Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
I1Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
DirMode2
Off Non-directional Forward Reverse
Non-directional
RED 670
287

Parameter Characterist2 Range ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500 Step Default ANSI Def. Time Unit Description Selection of time delay curve type for step 2
I2>
500
%IB
Phase current operate level for step2 in % of IBase Definitive time delay of step 2 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 2 Multiplier for current operate level for step 2 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 2 Directional mode of step 3 (off, nodir, forward, reverse) Selection of time delay curve type for step 3
t2 k2
0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 999.00
0.001 0.01
0.400 0.05
s -
I2Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
t2Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
DirMode3
Off Non-directional Forward Reverse ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500
Non-directional
Characterist3
ANSI Def. Time
I3>
250
%IB
Phase current operate level for step3 in % of IBase
288
RED 670

Parameter t3 k3 Range 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 999.00 Step 0.001 0.01 Default 0.800 0.05 Unit s Description Definitive time delay of step 3 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 3 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 3 Multiplier for current operate level for step 3 Directional mode of step 4 (off, nodir, forward, reverse) Selection of time delay curve type for step 4
t3Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
I3Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
DirMode4
Off Non-directional Forward Reverse ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500
Non-directional
Characterist4
ANSI Def. Time
I4>
175
%IB
Phase current operate level for step4 in % of IBase Definitive time delay of step 4 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 4 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 4 Multiplier for current operate level for step 4
t4 k4
0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 999.00
0.001 0.01
2.000 0.05
s -
t4Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
I4Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
RED 670
289
Table 157:
Parameter IMinOpPhSel
Advanced parameter group settings for the OC4PTOC_51_67 (TOC1-) function

Range 1 - 100 Step 1 Default 7 Unit %IB Description Minimum current for phase selection in % of IBase Operate level of 2nd harm restrain op in % of Fundamental Selection of reset curve type for step 1 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 1 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 1 Enable block of step 1 from harmonic restrain Selection of reset curve type for step 2 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 2 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 2
2ndHarmStab
5 - 100
20
%IB
ResetTypeCrv1
Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.000 - 60.000
Instantaneous
tReset1
0.001
0.020
tPCrv1
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
tACrv1
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
tBCrv1
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
tCCrv1
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
tPRCrv1
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
tTRCrv1
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
tCRCrv1
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
HarmRestrain1
Off On Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.000 - 60.000
Off
ResetTypeCrv2
Instantaneous
tReset2
0.001
0.020
tPCrv2
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
290
RED 670

Parameter tACrv2 Range 0.005 - 200.000 Step 0.001 Default 13.500 Unit Description Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 2 Enable block of step 2 from harmonic restrain Selection of reset curve type for step 3 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 3 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 3
tBCrv2
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
tCCrv2
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
tPRCrv2
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
tTRCrv2
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
tCRCrv2
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
HarmRestrain2
Off
ResetTypeCrv3
Instantaneous
tReset3
0.001
0.020
tPCrv3
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
tACrv3
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
tBCrv3
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
tCCrv3
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
tPRCrv3
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
RED 670
291

Parameter tTRCrv3 Range 0.005 - 100.000 Step 0.001 Default 13.500 Unit Description Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 3 Enable block of step3 from harmonic restrain Selection of reset curve type for step 4 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 4 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 4 Enable block of step 4 from harmonic restrain
tCRCrv3
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
HarmRestrain3
Off
ResetTypeCrv4
Instantaneous
tReset4
0.001
0.020
tPCrv4
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
tACrv4
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
tBCrv4
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
tCCrv4
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
tPRCrv4
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
tTRCrv4
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
tCRCrv4
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
HarmRestrain4
Off On
Off
6.2.6
Technical data
292
RED 670
Table 158:
Function Operate current Reset ratio
Four step phase overcurrent protection (POCM, 51/67)

Setting range (1-2500)% of lbase > 95% (1-100)% of lbase (-70.0 -50.0) degrees (40.070.0) degrees (75.090.0) degrees (5100)% of fundamental (0.000-60.000) s (0.000-60.000) s 19 curve types 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 15 ms typically Accuracy 1.0% of Ir at I Ir 1.0% of I at I > Ir 1.0% of Ir 2.0 degrees 2.0 degrees 2.0 degrees 2.0% of Ir 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms See table 614 and table 615 -
Min. operating current Relay characteristic angle (RCA) Maximum forward angle Minimum forward angle Second harmonic blocking Independent time delay Minimum operate time Inverse characteristics, see table 614 and table 615 Operate time, start function Reset time, start function Critical impulse time Impulse margin time
6.3
Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection (PIOC, 50N)

Function block name: IEFxANSI number: 50N IEC 61850 logical node name: EFPIOC IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
IN>>
6.3.1
Introduction
The single input overcurrent function has a low transient overreach and short tripping times to allow use for instantaneous earth fault protection, with the reach limited to less than typical eighty percent of the line at minimum source impedance. The function can be configured to measure the residual current from the three phase current inputs or the current from a separate current input.
RED 670
293
Section 6 Current protection 6.3.2 Principle of operation

The sampled analogue residual currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of the residual current the RMS value is derived. This current value is fed to the IEF function. In a comparator the RMS value is compared to the set operation current value of the function (IN>>). If the residual current is larger than the set operation current a signal from the comparator is set to true. This signal will, without delay, activate the output signal TRIP. There is also a possibility to activate a preset change of the set operation current via a binary input (enable multiplier MULTEN). In some applications the operation value needs to be changed, for example due to transformer inrush currents. The function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The trip signals from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKAR, that can be activated during single pole trip and autoreclosing sequences.
6.3.3
Function block
IEF1EFPIOC_50N I3P BLOCK BLKAR MULTEN TRIP
en06000269.vsd
Figure 154:
IEF function block
6.3.4

Table 159:
Signal I3P BLOCK BLKAR MULTEN
Input signals for the EFPIOC_50N (IEF1-) function block

Description Three phase currents Block of function Block input for auto reclose Enable current multiplier
Table 160:
Signal TRIP
Output signals for the EFPIOC_50N (IEF1-) function block

Description Trip signal
294
RED 670
Section 6 Current protection 6.3.5 Setting parameters

Table 161:
Parameter Operation IBase IN>>
Basic parameter group settings for the EFPIOC_50N (IEF1-) function

Range Off On 1 - 99999 1 - 2500 Step 1 1 Default Off 3000 200 Unit A %IB Description Operation Off / On Base current Operate residual current level in % of IBase
Table 162:
Parameter StValMult
Advanced parameter group settings for the EFPIOC_50N (IEF1-) function

Range 0.5 - 5.0 Step 0.1 Default 1.0 Unit Description Multiplier for operate current level
6.3.6
Technical data
Table 163:
Function Operate current Reset ratio Operate time Reset time Critical impulse time Operate time Reset time Critical impulse time Dynamic overreach
Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection (PIOC, 50N)

Range or value (1-2500)% of lbase > 95% 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 10 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset 35 ms typically at 10 to 0 x Iset 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset < 5% at t = 100 ms Accuracy 1.0% of Ir at I Ir 1.0% of I at I > Ir -
6.4
Four step residual overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51N/67N)
RED 670
295
Function block name: TEFxANSI number:51N/ 67N IEC 61850 logical node name: EF4PTOC
IN 4 4 alt
6.4.1
Introduction
The four step residual single input overcurrent function has an inverse or definite time delay independent for each step separately. All IEC and ANSI time delayed characteristics are available together with an optional user defined characteristic. A second harmonic blocking can be set individually for each step. The function can be used as main protection for phase to earth faults. The function can be used to provide a system back-up e.g. in the case of the primary protection being out of service due to communication or voltage transformer circuit failure. Directional operation can be combined together with corresponding communication blocks into permissive or blocking teleprotection scheme. Current reversal and weakend infeed functionality are available as well. The function can be configured to measure the residual current from the three phase current inputs or the current from a separate current input.
6.4.2
This function has the following three Analog Inputs on its function block in the configuration tool: 1. 2. 3. I3P, input for the function Operating Quantity. U3P, input for the function Voltage Polarizing Quantity. IP3P, input for the function Current Polarizing Quantity.
These inputs are connected from the corresponding pre-processing function blocks in the Configuration Tool within PCM.
6.4.2.1
Operating quantity within the function

The function always uses Residual Current (i.e. 3Io) for its operating quantity. The residual current can be:
296
RED 670
1.
directly measured (when a dedicated CT input of IED 670 is connected in SMT tool to the fourth analog input of the pre-processing block connected to TEF function input I3P). This dedicated IED 670 CT input can be for example connected to: parallel connection of current instrument transformers in all three phases (well known Holm-Green connection). one single core balance, current instrument transformer (i.e. cable CT). one single current instrument transformer located between power system star point and ground (i.e. current transformer located in the star point of a star connected transformer winding). one single current instrument transformer located between two parts of a protected object (i.e. current transformer located between two star points of double star shunt capacitor bank).
2.
calculated from three phase current input within IED 670 (when the fourth analog input into the pre-processing block connected to TEF function Analog Input I3P is not connected to a dedicated CT input of IED 670 in SMT tool). In such case the pre-processing block will calculate 3Io from the first three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following formula:
I op = 3 Io = IL1 + IL2 + IL3

where: IL1, IL2 and IL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.
The residual current is pre-processed by a discrete Fourier filter. Thus the phasor of the fundamental frequency component of the residual current is derived. The phasor magnitude is used within the TEF function to compare it with the set operation current value of the four stages (Pickup1, Pickup2, Pickup3 or Pickup4). If the residual current is larger than the set operation current and the step is used in non-directional mode a signal from the comparator for this step is set to true. This signal will, without delay, activate the output signal START for this step and a common START signal.
6.4.2.2
Internal polarizing facility of the function

A polarizing quantity is used within the function in order to determine the direction of the earth fault (i.e. Forward/Reverse). The function can be set to use voltage polarizing, current polarizing or dual polarizing. When Voltage Polarizing is selected the function will use the Residual Voltage (i.e. 3Uo) as polarizing quantity U3P. This voltage can be: 1. directly measured (when a dedicated VT input of IED 670 is connected in SMT tool to the fourth analog input of the pre-processing block connected to TEF
RED 670
297
2.
function input U3P). This dedicated IED 670 VT input shall be then connected to open delta winding of a three phase main VT. calculated from three phase voltage input within IED 670 (when the fourth analog input into the pre-processing block connected to TEF function Analogue Input U3P is NOT connected to a dedicated VT input of IED 670 in SMT tool). In such case the pre-processing block will calculate 3Uo from the first three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following formula:
U VPol = 3 Uo = UL1 + UL 2 + UL3

where: UL1, UL2 and UL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase voltages. Note! In order to use this all three phase-to-ground voltages must be connected to three IED 670 VT inputs.
The residual voltage is pre-processed by a discrete Fourier filter. Thus the phasor of the fundamental frequency component of the residual voltage is derived. This phasor is used, together with the phasor of the operating current, in order to determine the direction of the earth fault (i.e. Forward/Reverse). In order to enable voltage polarizing the magnitude of polarizing voltage shall be bigger than a minimum level defined by setting parameter UpolMin. It shall be noted that 3Uo is used to determine the location of the earth fault.Thus the setting parameter ROT3U0, located under General Settings for Earth Fault function, has default value of ROT3U0=180 deg. This insures the required inversion of the polarizing voltage within the earth fault function. When Current Polarizing is selected the function will use the Residual Current (i.e. 3Io) as polarizing quantity IPol. This current can be: 1. directly measured (when a dedicated CT input of IED 670 is connected in SMT tool to the fourth analog input of the pre-processing block connected to TEF function input IP3P). This dedicated IED 670 CT input is then typically connected to one single current instrument transformer located between power system star point and ground (i.e. current transformer located in the star point of a star connected transformer winding). For some special line protection applications this dedicated IED 670 CT input can be connected to parallel connection of current instrument transformers in all three phases (well known Holm-Green connection)
2.
calculated from three phase current input within IED 670 (when the fourth analog input into the pre-processing block connected to TEF function Analog Input IP3P is NOT connected to a dedicated CT input of IED 670 in SMT tool). In such case
298
RED 670
the pre-processing block will calculate 3Io from the first three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following formula:
I Pol = 3 Io = IL1 + IL 2 + IL 3
where: IL1, IL2 and IL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents. However this option can be as well only used for some special line protection applications as explained in the Application Manual. (Equation 70)
The residual polarizing current is pre-processed by a discrete Fourier filter. Thus the phasor of the fundamental frequency component of the residual current is derived. This phasor is then multiplied with pre-set equivalent Zero Sequence Source Impedance in order to calculate equivalent Polarizing Voltage UIPol in accordance with the following formula:
U IPol = ZoS I Pol = (RNPol+j XNPol) I Pol
(Equation 71)
which will be then used, together with the phasor of the operating current, in order to determine the direction of the earth fault (i.e. Forward/Reverse). In order to enable current polarizing the magnitude of polarizing current shall be bigger than a minimum level defined by setting parameter IPollMin. When Dual Polarizing is selected the function will use the vectorial sum of the voltage based and current based polarizing in accordance with the following formula:
U TotPol = U UPol + U IPol = 3Uo + ZoS I Pol = 3Uo + (RNPol+j XNPol) I Pol
(Equation 72)
Then the phasor of the total polarizing voltage UTotPol will be used, together with the phasor of the operating current, to determine the direction of the earth fault (i.e. Forward/Reverse).
6.4.2.3
External polarizing facility for EFGround Fault function

The individual stages within the function can be set as non-directional. When this setting is selected it is then possible via function binary input BLKSTx (where x indicates the relevant step within the function) to provide external directional control (i.e. torque control) by for example using one of the following functions available in IED 670:
RED 670
299
1. 2.
Distance protection directional unit. Negative sequence polarized General current and voltage multi purpose protection function.
6.4.2.4
Base quantities within the function

The base quantities shall be entered as setting parameters for every EF function. Base current shall be entered as rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes. Base voltage shall be entered as rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object in primary kV.
6.4.2.5
Internal EFGround Fault function structure

The function is internally divided into the following parts: 1. 2. 3. 4. Four residual overcurrent stages. Directional supervision element for residual overcurrent stages with integrated Directional Comparison stage for communication based earth fault protection schemes (i.e. permissive or blocking). Second harmonic blocking element with additional feature for sealed-in blocking during switching of parallel transformers. Switch on to fault feature with integrated Under-Time logic for detection of breaker problems during breaker opening or closing sequence.
Each part is described separately in the following paragraphs.
6.4.2.6
Four residual overcurrent stages

Each overcurrent stage uses Operating Quantity IOp (i.e. Residual Current) as measuring quantity. Every of the four residual overcurrent stage has the following built-in facilities: Operating mode (i.e. Off / Non-directional / Forward / Reverse). By this parameter setting the operating mode of the stage is selected. It shall be noted that the directional decision (i.e. Forward/Reverse) is not made within residual overcurrent stage itself. The direction of the fault is determined in common Directional Supervision Element described in the next paragraph. Residual current pickup value. Type of operating characteristic (Inverse or Definite Time). By this parameter setting it is possible to select Inverse or definite time delay for earth fault function. Most of the standard IEC and ANSI inverse characteristics are available. For the complete list of available inverse curves please refer to Chapter "Time inverse characteristics" Type of reset characteristic (Instantaneous / IEC Reset /ANSI Rest). By this parameter setting it is possible to select the reset characteristic of the stage. For the complete list of available reset curves please refer to Chapter "Time inverse characteristics" RED 670
300
Time delay related settings. By these parameter settings the properties like definite time delay, minimum operating time for inverse curves, reset time delay and parameters to define user programmable inverse curve are defined. Supervision by second harmonic blocking feature (i.e. On/Off). By this parameter setting it is possible to prevent operation of the stage if the second harmonic content in the residual current exceeds the pre-set level. Multiplier for scaling of the set residual current pickup value by external binary signal. By this parameter setting it is possible to increase residual current pickup value when function binary input ENMULTx has logical value 1.
Simplified logic diagram for one residual overcurrent stage is shown in the following figure:
BLKTR Characteristx=DefTime
a b a>b
|IOP| ENMULTx INxMult INx> BLKSTx BLOCK 2ndH_BLOCK_Int HarmRestrain1=Disabled DirModex=Off DirModex=Non-directional DirModex=Forward DirModex=Reverse
tx
OR
AND
TRINx
T F
AND
STINx
Inverse
Characteristx=Inverse
OR
OR
STAGEx_DIR_Int
FORWARD_Int
AND
OR
REVERSE_Int
AND
en07000064.vsd
Figure 155:
Simplified logic diagram for residual overcurrent stage x , where x=1, 2 ,3 or 4
The function can be completely blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The start signals from the function for each stage can be blocked from the binary input BLKSTx. The trip signals from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTR.
6.4.2.7
Directional supervision element with integrated directional comparision stage

It shall be noted that at least one of the four residual overcurrent stages shall be set as directional in order to enable execution of the
RED 670
301
directional supervision element and the integrated directional comparison stage. The function has integrated directional feature. As the operating quantity current IOp is always used. The polarizing method is determined by the parameter setting polMethod. The polarizing quantity will be selected by the function in one of the following three ways: 1. 2. 3. When polMethod=Voltage, UVPol will be used as polarizing quantity. When polMethod=Current, UIPol will be used as polarizing quantity. When polMethod=Dual, UTotPol will be used as polarizing quantity.
The operating and polarizing quantity are then used inside the directional element, as shown in the following figure, in order to determine the direction of the earth fault.
Reverse Area
0.4*IN>Dir
AngleRCA 0.4*IN>Dir
Upol=-3Uo
Forward Area Iop=3Io
en07000066.vsd
Figure 156:
Operating characteristic for earth fault directional element
Two relevant setting parameters for directional supervision element are:
302
RED 670
Operating Current Pickup IN>Dir. However it shall be noted that the directional element will be internally enabled to operate as soon as IOp cos( - AngleRCA) is bigger then 40% of IN>Dir. Relay characteristic angle AngleRCA which defines the position of Forward & Reverse areas in the operating characteristic.
Directional Comparison stage, built-in within directional supervision element, will set EF function output binary signal: 1. 2. STFW=1 when Operating Quantity magnitude is bigger than setting parameter IN>Dir and directional supervision element detects fault in forward direction. STRV=1 when Operating Quantity magnitude is bigger than 60% of setting parameter IN>Dir and directional supervision element detects fault in reverse direction.
These signals shall be used for communication based earth fault teleprotection schemes (i.e. permissive or blocking). Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison stage is shown in the following figure:
RED 670
303
|IOP|
a b
a>b
REVERSE_Int
AND
STRV
0.6
X
a a>b b
IN>Dir
FORWARD_Int
AND
STFW
0.4
FWD
PolMethod=Voltage PolMethod=Current PolMethod=Dual
OR
UPolMin UPol 0.0 IPolMin
OR
T F
IOP UTotPol
IPol RNPol XNPol
Directional Characteristic
AngleRCA
AND
FORWARD_Int
AND RVS COMPLEX NUMBER
REVERSE_Int
UIPol 0.0
T F
STAGE1_DIR_Int STAGE2_DIR_Int STAGE3_DIR_Int STAGE4_DIR_Int
OR
BLOCK
AND
en07000067.vsd
Figure 157:
Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison stage
6.4.2.8
Second harmonic blocking element

A harmonic restrain of the function can be chosen. If the ratio of the 2nd harmonic component in relation to the fundamental frequency component in the residual current exceeds the pre-set level (defined by parameter setting 2ndHarmStab) any of the four residual overcurrent stages can be selectively blocked by a parameter setting HarmRestrainx. When 2nd harmonic restraint feature is active the EF function output signal 2NDHARMD will be set to logical value one. In addition to the basic functionality explained above the 2nd harmonic blocking can be set in such way to seal-in until residual current disappears. This feature might be required to stabilize the EF function during switching of parallel transformers in the station. In case of parallel transformers there is a risk of sympathetic inrush current. If one of the transformers is in operation, and the parallel transformer is switched in, the asymmetric inrush current of the switched in transformer will cause partial
304
RED 670
saturation of the transformer already in service. This is called transferred saturation. The 2nd harmonic of the inrush currents of the two transformers will be in phase opposition. The summation of the two currents will thus give a small 2nd harmonic current. The residual fundamental current will however be significant. The inrush current of the transformer in service before the parallel transformer energizing, will be a little delayed compared to the first transformer. Therefore we will have high 2nd harmonic current component initially. After a short period this current will however be small and the normal 2nd harmonic blocking will reset. If the BlkParTransf function is activated the 2nd harmonic restrain signal will be latched as long as the residual current measured by the relay is larger than a selected step current level. This feature has been called Block for Parallel Transformers. This 2nd harmonic sealin feature will be activated when all of the following three conditions are simultaneously fulfilled: 1. 2. 3. Feature is enabled by entering setting parameter BlkParTransf=On. Basic 2nd harmonic restraint feature has been active for at least 70 ms. Residual current magnitude is higher than the set start value for one of the four residual overcurrent stages. By a parameter setting UseStartValue it is possible to select which one of the four start values that will be used (i.e. IN1> or IN2> or IN3> or IN4>).
Once Block for Parallel Transformers is activated the basic 2nd harmonic blocking signal will be sealed-in until the residual current magnitude falls below a value defined by parameter setting UseStartValue (see condition 3 above). Simplified logic diagram for 2nd harmonic blocking feature is shown in the following figure:
RED 670
305
BLOCK 2ndHarmStab IOP
X
a b a>b OR
Extract second harmonic current component Extract fundamental current component t=70ms t BlkParTransf=On
|IOP|
a b a>b OR
2NDHARMD
q-1
AN D
OR
2ndH_BLOCK_Int
UseStartValue IN1> IN2> IN3> IN4>
en07000068.vsd
Figure 158:
Simplified logic diagram for 2nd harmonic blocking feature and Block for Parallel Transformers feature
6.4.2.9
Switch on to fault feature

Integrated in the four step residual overcurrent protection are Switch on to fault logic (SOTF) and Under-Time logic. The setting parameter SOTF is set to activate either SOTF or Under-Time logic or both. When the circuit breaker is closing there is a risk to close it onto a permanent fault, for example during an autoreclosing sequence. The SOTF logic will enable fast fault clearance during such situations. The time during which SOTF and Under-Time logics will be active after activation is defined by the setting parameter t4U. The SOTF logic uses the start signal from step 2 or step 3 for its operation, selected by setting parameter StepForSOTF. The SOTF logic can be activated either from change in circuit breaker position or from circuit breaker close command pulse. The setting parameter ActivationSOTF can be set for activation of CB position open change, CB position closed change or CB close command. In case of a residual current start from step 2 or 3 (dependent on setting) the function will give a trip after a set delay tSOTF. This delay is normally set to a short time (default 100 ms). The Under-Time logic always uses the start signal from the step 4. The Under-Time logic will normally be set to operate for a lower current level than the SOTF function. The Under-Time logic can also be blocked by the 2nd harmonic restraint feature. This enables high sensitivity even if power transformer inrush currents can occur at breaker closing. This logic is typically used to detect asymmetry of CB poles immediately
306
RED 670
after switching of the circuit breaker. The Under-Time logic is activated either from change in circuit breaker position or from circuit breaker close and open command pulses. This selection is done by setting parameter ActUnderTime. In case of a start from step 4 this logic will give a trip after a set delay tUnderTime. This delay is normally set to a relatively short time (default 300 ms). Practically the Under-Time logic acts as circuit breaker pole-discordance protection, but it is only active immediately after breaker switching. The Under-Time logic can only be used in solidly or low impedance grounded systems.
RED 670
307
308
Setting tpulse posClsPls AND PwrMode tpulse SOTFActive operationMode AND AND closeCBPls OR TON IN Q PT ET AND AND Exec Exec NOT Setting Setting onOrOffPos PwrMode tpulse UTimeActive activationUnderTime switchOntoFaultDelayTime PwrMode block step2Or3in AND Setting False PwrMode start Exec NOT tpulse posOpnPls cbClosed activationSOTF
Figure 159:
SOTF
Exec
cbPosition
EF Logic Diagram Simplified logic diagram for the complete EF function is shown in the following Figure 1:
Under Time
OR OR opnOrClsCBPls AND Setting Exec Exec step4in AND harmonic2ndRestraint NOT cbSwitchingFaultDelayTime AND OR TON IN Q PT ET AND
Exec
closeCB
operate
Exec
Exec
en06000643.vsd
Simplified logic diagram for SOTF and Under-Time features
RED 670
Directional Check Element
signal to communication scheme
INPol 3U0 3I0 DirMode enableDir
Direction Element
operatingCurrent earthFaultDirection angleValid
4 step over current element One element for each step
TRIP
3I0
Harmonic Restraint Element
harmRestrBlock
start step 2, 3 and 4 Blocking at parallel transformers SwitchOnToFault CB pos or cmd TRIP
Mode Selection
DirMode enableDir enableStep1-4 DirectionalMode1-4
en06000376.vsd
Figure 160:
Functional overview of TEF
6.4.3
Function block
TEF1EF4PTOC_51N67N I3P U3P I3PPOL BLOCK BLKTR BLKST1 BLKST2 BLKST3 BLKST4 ENMULT1 ENMULT2 ENMULT3 ENMULT4 CBPOS CLOSECB OPENCB TRIP TRIN1 TRIN2 TRIN3 TRIN4 TRSOTF START STIN1 STIN2 STIN3 STIN4 STSOTF STFW STRV 2NDHARMD
en06000424.vsd
Figure 161:
TEF1 function block
6.4.4
RED 670

Table 164:
Signal I3P U3P I3PPOL BLOCK BLKTR BLKST1 BLKST2 BLKST3 BLKST4 ENMULT1 ENMULT2 ENMULT3 ENMULT4 CBPOS CLOSECB OPENCB
Input signals for the EF4PTOC_51N67N (TEF1-) function block

Description Current connection Polarizing voltage connection Polarizing current connection Block of function Block of trip Block of step 1 (Start and trip) Block of step 2 (Start and trip) Block of step 3 (Start and trip) Block of step 4 (Start and trip) When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step1 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step2 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step3 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step4 Breaker position Breaker close command Breaker open command
Table 165:
Signal TRIP TRIN1 TRIN2 TRIN3 TRIN4 TRSOTF START STIN1 STIN2 STIN3 STIN4 STSOTF STFW STRV 2NDHARMD
Output signals for the EF4PTOC_51N67N (TEF1-) function block

Description Trip Trip signal from step 1 Trip signal from step 2 Trip signal from step 3 Trip signal from step 4 Trip signal from earth fault switch onto fault function General start signal Start signal step 1 Start signal step 2 Start signal step 3 Start signal step 4 Start signal from earth fault switch onto fault function Forward directional start signal Reverse directional start signal 2nd harmonic block signal
6.4.5
310
Setting parameters
Table 166:
Parameter Operation IBase UBase AngleRCA polMethod
Basic parameter group settings for the EF4PTOC_51N67N (TEF1-) function

Range Off On 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 -180 - 180 Voltage Current Dual 1 - 100 Step 1 0.05 1 Default Off 3000 400.00 65 Voltage Unit A kV Deg Description Operation Off / On Base value for current settings Base value for voltage settings Relay characteristic angle (RCA) Type of polarization
UPolMin
%UB
Minimum voltage level for polarization in % of UBase Minimum current level for polarization in % of IBase Real part of source Z to be used for current polarisation Imaginary part of source Z to be used for current polarisation Residual current level for Direction release in % of IBase Second harmonic restrain operation in % of IN amplitude Enable blocking at parallel transformers Current level blk at parallel transf (step1, 2, 3 or 4) SOTF operation mode (Off/SOTF/ Undertime/SOTF +undertime) Select signal that shall activate SOTF Selection of step used for SOTF Enable harmonic restrain function in SOTF Time delay for SOTF
IPolMin
2 - 100
%IB
RNPol
0.50 - 1000.00
0.01
5.00
ohm
XNPol
0.50 - 3000.00
0.01
40.00
ohm
IN>Dir
1 - 100
10
%IB
2ndHarmStab
5 - 100
20
BlkParTransf UseStartValue
Off On IN1> IN2> IN3> IN4> Off SOTF UnderTime SOTF +UnderTime Open Closed CloseCommand Step 2 Step 3 Off On 0.000 - 60.000
Off IN4>
SOTF
Off
ActivationSOTF
Open
StepForSOTF HarmResSOTF
Step 2 Off
tSOTF
0.001
0.200
RED 670
311

Parameter t4U DirMode1 Range 0.000 - 60.000 Off Non-directional Forward Reverse ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500 Step 0.001 Default 1.000 Non-directional Unit s Description Switch-onto-fault active time Directional mode of step 1 (off, nodir, forward, reverse) Time delay curve type for step 1
Characterist1
ANSI Def. Time
IN1>
100
%IB
Operate residual current level for step 1 in % of IBase Independent (defenite) time delay of step 1 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for step 1 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for step 1 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 1 Enable block of step 1 from harmonic restrain Directional mode of step 2 (off, nodir, forward, reverse)
t1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
k1
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05
IN1Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
t1Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
HarmRestrain1
Off On Off Non-directional Forward Reverse
On
DirMode2
Non-directional
312
RED 670

Parameter Characterist2 Range ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500 Step Default ANSI Def. Time Unit Description Time delay curve type for step 2
IN2>
50
%IB
Operate residual current level for step 2 in % of IBase Independent (definitive) time delay of step 2 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for step 2 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for step 2 Minimum operate time for inverse curves step 2 Enable block of step 2 from harmonic restrain Directional mode of step 3 (off, nodir, forward, reverse) Time delay curve type for step 3
t2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.400
k2
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05
IN2Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
t2Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
HarmRestrain2
Off On Off Non-directional Forward Reverse ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type
On
DirMode3
Non-directional
Characterist3
ANSI Def. Time
RED 670
313

Parameter IN3> Range 1 - 2500 Step 1 Default 33 Unit %IB Description Operate residual current level for step 3 in % of IBase Independent time delay of step 3 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for step 3 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for step 3 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 3 Enable block of step 3 from harmonic restrain Directional mode of step 4 (off, nodir, forward, reverse) Time delay curve type for step 4
t3 k3
0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 999.00
0.001 0.01
0.800 0.05
s -
IN3Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
t3Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
HarmRestrain3
Off On Off Non-directional Forward Reverse ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500
On
DirMode4
Non-directional
Characterist4
ANSI Def. Time
IN4>
17
%IB
Operate residual current level for step 4 in % of IBase Independent (definitive) time delay of step 4 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for step 4 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for step 4 Minimum operate time in inverse curves step 4 Enable block of step 4 from harmonic restrain
t4
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.200
k4
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05
IN4Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
t4Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
HarmRestrain4
Off On
On
314
RED 670
Table 167:
Parameter ActUnderTime
Advanced parameter group settings for the EF4PTOC_51N67N (TEF1-) function

Range CB position CB command Step Default CB position Unit Description Select signal to activate under time (CB Pos/ CBCommand) Time delay for under time Reset curve type for step 1 Reset curve type for step 1 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 1 Reset curve type for step 2 Reset curve type for step 2 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 2
tUnderTime ResetTypeCrv1
0.000 - 60.000 Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.000 - 60.000 0.005 - 3.000
0.001 -
0.300 Instantaneous
s -
tReset1 tPCrv1
0.001 0.001
0.020 1.000
s -
tACrv1
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
tBCrv1
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
tCCrv1
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
tPRCrv1
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
tTRCrv1
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
tCRCrv1
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
ResetTypeCrv2
Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.000 - 60.000 0.005 - 3.000
Instantaneous
tReset2 tPCrv2
0.001 0.001
0.020 1.000
s -
tACrv2
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
RED 670
315

Parameter tBCrv2 Range 0.00 - 20.00 Step 0.01 Default 0.00 Unit Description Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 2 Reset curve type for step 3 Reset curve type for step 3 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter C for customer programmable curve step 3 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve step 3 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve step 3 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 3
tCCrv2
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
tPRCrv2
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
tTRCrv2
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
tCRCrv2
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
ResetTypeCrv3
Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.000 - 60.000 0.005 - 3.000
Instantaneous
tReset3 tPCrv3
0.001 0.001
0.020 1.000
s -
tACrv3
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
tBCrv3
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
tCCrv3
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
tPRCrv3
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
tTRCrv3
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
tCRCrv3
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
316
RED 670

Parameter ResetTypeCrv4 Range Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.000 - 60.000 0.005 - 3.000 Step Default Instantaneous Unit Description Reset curve type for step 4 Reset curve type for step 4 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter A for customer programmable curve step 4 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter C for customer programmable curve step 4 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve step 4 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve step 4 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve step 4
tReset4 tPCrv4
0.001 0.001
0.020 1.000
s -
tACrv4
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
tBCrv4
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
tCCrv4
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
tPRCrv4
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
tTRCrv4
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
tCRCrv4
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
6.4.6
Technical data
Table 168:
Function Operate current Reset ratio Operate current for directional comparison Timers Inverse characteristics, see table 614 and table 615 Second harmonic restrain operation Relay characteristic angle Table continued on next page
Four step residual overcurrent protection (PEFM, 51N/67N)

Range or value (1-2500)% of lbase > 95% (1100)% of lbase (0.000-60.000) s 19 curve types (5100)% of fundamental (-180 to 180) degrees Accuracy 1.0% of Ir at I Ir 1.0% of I at I > Ir 1.0% of Ir 0.5% 10 ms See table 614 and table 615 2.0% of Ir 2.0 degrees
RED 670
317

Function Minimum polarizing voltage Minimum polarizing current RNS, XNS Operate time, start function Reset time, start function Critical impulse time Impulse margin time Range or value (1100)% of Ubase (130)% of Ibase (0.503000.00) W/phase 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 15 ms typically Accuracy 0.5% of Ur 0.25% of Ir -
6.5
Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection (PSDE, 67N)

Function block name: SDExANSI number: 67N IEC 61850 logical node name: SDEPSDE IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
6.5.1
Introduction
In networks with high impedance earthing, the phase to earth fault current is significantly smaller than the short circuit currents. Another difficulty for earth fault protection is that the magnitude of the phase to earth fault current is almost independent of the fault location in the network. Directional residual current can be used to detect and give selective trip of phase to earth faults in high impedance earthed networks. The protection uses the residual current component 3I0 cos , where is the angle between the residual current and the residual voltage, compensated with a characteristic angle. Alternatively the function can be set to strict 3I0 level with an check of angle 3I0 and cos . Directional residual power can be used to detect and give selective trip of phase to earth faults in high impedance earthed networks. The protection uses the residual power component 3I03U0 cos , where is the angle between the residual current and the reference residual voltage, compensated with a characteristic angle. A normal undirectional residual current function can also be used and be with definite or inverse time delay. A back-up neutral point voltage function is also available for undirectional sensitive back-up protection.
318
RED 670
In an isolated network, i.e. the network is only coupled to earth via the capacitances between the phase conductors and earth, the residual current always has -90 phase shift compared to the reference residual voltage. The characteristic angle is chosen to -90 in such a network. In resistance earthed networks or in Petersen coil, with a parallel resistor, the active residual current component (in phase with the residual voltage) should be used for the earth fault detection. In such networks the characteristic angle is chosen to 0. As the amplitude of the residual current is independent of the fault location the selectivity of the earth fault protection is achieved by time selectivity. When should the sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection be used and when should the sensitive directional residual power protection be used? We have the following facts to consider: Sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection gives possibility for better sensitivity Sensitive directional residual power protection gives possibility to use inverse time characteristics. This is applicable in large high impedance earthed networks, with large capacitive earth fault current In some power systems a medium size neutral point resistor is used. Such a resistor will give a resistive earth fault current component of about 200 - 400 A at a zero resistive phase to earth fault. In such a system the directional residual power protection gives better possibilities for selectivity enabled by inverse time power characteristics.
6.5.2
6.5.2.1
Introduction
The function is using phasors of the residual current and voltage. Group signals I3P and U3P containing phasors of residual current and voltage is taken from preprocessor blocks. The sensitive directional earth fault protection has the following sub-functions included:
Directional residual current protection measuring 3I0 cos
is defined as the angle between the residual current 3I0 and the reference voltage compensated with the set characteristic angle RCADir (=ang(3I0)-ang(Uref) ). Uref = -3U0 ejRCADir. RCAdir is normally set equal to 0 in a high impedance earthed network with a neutral point resistor as the active current component is appearing out on the faulted feeder only. RCAdir is set equal to -90 in an isolated
RED 670
319
network as all currents are mainly capacitive. The function operates when 3I0 cos gets larger than the set value.
Uref RCA = 0, ROA = 90
3I0
= ang(3I0) - ang(3Uref) 3I0 cos -3U0=Uref
en06000648.vsd
Figure 162:
RCADir set to 0
Uref RCA = -90, ROA = 90
3I0 3I0 cos = ang(3I0) ang(Uref) -3U0
en06000649.vsd
Figure 163:
RCADir set to -90
For trip, both the residual current 3I0 cos and the release voltage 3U0, shall be larger than the set levels: INCosPhi> and UNRel>. Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR.
320
RED 670
When the function is activated binary output signals START and STDIRIN are activated. If the activation is active after the set delay tDef the binary output signals TRIP and TRDIRIN are activated. The trip from this sub-function has definite time delay. There is a possibility to increase the operate level for currents where the angle is larger than a set value as shown in the figure below. This is equivalent to blocking of the function if > ROADir. This option is used to handle angle error for the instrument transformers.
3I0
Operate area
3I0 cos ROA
-3U0=Uref
RCA = 0
en06000650.vsd
Figure 164:
Characteristic with ROADir restriction
The function will indicate forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is defined as 3I0 cos ( + 180) the set value. It shall also be possible to tilt the characteristic to compensate for current transformer angle error with a setting RCAComp as shown in the figure below:
RED 670
321
Operate area
-3U0=Uref
RCA = 0
Instrument transformer angle error
RCAcomp Characteristic after angle compensation
3I0 (prim)
3I0 (to prot)
en06000651.vsd
Figure 165:
Explanation of RCAcomp.
is defined as the angle between the residual current 3I0 and the reference voltage compensated with the set characteristic angle RCADir (=ang(3I0)ang(Uref) ). Uref = -3U0 ejRCA. The function operates when 3I0 3U0 cos gets larger than the set value. For trip, both the residual power 3I03U0 cos , the residual current 3I0 and the release voltage 3U0, shall be larger than the set levels (SN>, INRel> and UNRel>). Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR. When the function is activated binary output signals START and STDIRIN are activated. If the activation is active after the set delay tDef or after the inverse time delay (setting kSN) the binary output signals TRIP and TRDIRIN are activated. The function shall indicate forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is defined as 3I0 3U0 cos ( + 180) the set value. This variant has the possibility of choice between definite time delay and inverse time delay. The inverse time delay is defined as: 322 Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B RED 670
Directional residual power protection measuring 3I0 3U0 cos
t inv =
kSN (3I 0 3U 0 cos f (reference)) 3I 0 3U 0 cos f (measured)

(Equation 73)
Directional residual current protection measuring 3I0 and
The function will operate if the residual current is larger that the set value and the angle = ang(3I0)-ang(Uref) is within the sector RCADir ROADir
RCA = 0 ROA = 80
Operate area 3I0 80 -3U0
en06000652.vsd
Figure 166:
Example of characteristic
For trip, both the residual current 3I0 and the release voltage 3U0, shall be larger than the set levels (INDir> and UNREL>) and the angle shall be in the set sector (ROADir and RCADir). Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR. When the function is activated binary output signals START and STDIRIN are activated. If the activation is active after the set delay tDef the binary output signals TRIP and TRDIRIN are activated. The function indicate forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is defined as is within the angle sector: RCADir + 180 ROADir This variant shall have definite time delay.
Directional functions
For all the directional functions there are directional start signals STFW: fault in the forward direction, and STRV: start in the reverse direction. Even if the directional RED 670 Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B 323
function is set to operate for faults in the forward direction a fault in the reverse direction will give the start signal STRV. Also if the directional function is set to operate for faults in the reverse direction a fault in the forward direction will give the start signal STFW.
Non-directional earthground fault current protection
This function will measure the residual current without checking the phase angle. The function will be used to detect cross-country faults. This function can serve as alternative or back-up to distance protection with phase preference logic. To assure selectivity the distance protection can block the non-directional earth fault current function via the input BLKNDN. If available the non-directional function is using the calculated residual current, derived as sum of the phase currents. This will give a better ability to detect crosscountry faults with high residual current, also when dedicated core balance CT for the sensitive earth fault protection will saturate. This variant shall have the possibility of choice between definite time delay and inverse time delay. The inverse time delay shall be according to IEC 60255-3. For trip, the residual current 3I0 shall be larger than the set levels (INNonDir>). Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKNDN. When the function is activated binary output signal STNDIN is activated. If the activation is active after the set delay tINNonDir or after the inverse time delay the binary output signals TRIP and TRNDIN are activated.
Residual overvoltage release and protection
The directional function shall be released when the residual voltage gets higher than a set level. There shall also be a separate trip, with its own definite time delay, from this set voltage level. For trip, the residual voltage 3U0 shall be larger than the set levels (UN>). Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKUN. When the function is activated binary output signal STUN is activated. If the activation is active after the set delay tUNNonDir TRIP and TRUN are activated. A simplified logical diagram of the total function is shown in figure 167.
324
RED 670
INNonDir> t UN> t
OpMODE=INcosPhi
STNDIN TRNDIN STUN TRUN
IN> INcosPhi>
OpMODE=INUNcosPhi
&
& INUNcosPhi> Phi in RCA +- ROA

OpMODE=IN and Phi
&
t
STARTDIRIN
SN TimeChar = InvTime
&
TRDIRIN
&
TimeChar = DefTime
&
DirMode = Forw Forw DirMode = Rev Rev
&
1 STFW
& STRV
en06000653.vsd
Figure 167:
Simplified logical diagram of the sensitive earth fault current protection
6.5.3
Function block
SDE1SDEPSDE_67N I3P U3P BLOCK BLKTR BLKTRDIR BLKNDN BLKUN TRIP TRDIRIN TRNDIN TRUN START STDIRIN STNDIN STUN STFW STRV STDIR UNREL en07000032.vsd
Figure 168:
SDE function block
RED 670
325
Section 6 Current protection 6.5.4 Input and output signals

Table 169:
Signal I3P U3P BLOCK BLKTR BLKTRDIR BLKNDN BLKUN
Input signals for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function block

Description Group signal for current Group signal for voltage Blocks all the outputs of the function Blocks the operate outputs of the function Blocks the directional operate outputs of the function Blocks the Non directional current residual outputs Blocks the Non directional voltage residual outputs
Table 170:
Parameter IBase UBase SBase
Basic general settings for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function

Range 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 200000000.00 Step 1 0.05 0.05 Default 100 63.50 6350.00 Unit A kV kVA Description Base Current, in A Base Voltage, in kV Phase to Neutral Base Power, in kVA. IBase*UBase
Table 171:
Parameter Operation OpMode
Basic parameter group settings for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function

Range Off On 3I0Cosfi 3I03U0Cosfi 3I0 and fi Forward Reverse -179 - 180 -10.0 - 10.0 0 - 90 Step Default Off 3I0Cosfi Unit Description Operation Off/On Selection of operation mode for protection Direction of operation forward or reverse Relay characteristic angle RCA, in deg Relay characteristic angle compensation Relay open angle ROA used as release in phase mode, in deg Set level for 3I0cosFi, directional res over current, in %Ib Set level for 3I03U0cosFi, starting inv time count, in %Sb
DirMode RCADir RCAComp ROADir
1 0.1 1
Forward -90 0.0 90
Deg Deg Deg
INCosPhi>
0.25 - 200.00
0.01
1.00
%IB
SN>
0.25 - 200.00
0.01
10.00
%SB
326
RED 670

Parameter INDir> Range 0.25 - 200.00 Step 0.01 Default 5.00 Unit %IB Description Set level for directional residual over current prot, in %Ib Definite time delay directional residual overcurrent, in sec Reference value of res power for inverse time count, in %Sb Time multiplier setting for directional residual power mode Operation of nondirectional residual overcurrent protection Set level for non directional residual over current, in %Ib Time delay for nondirectional residual over current, in sec Operation curve selection for IDMT operation
tDef
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
SRef
0.03 - 200.00
0.01
10.00
%SB
kSN
0.00 - 2.00
0.01
0.10
OpINNonDir>
Off On
Off
INNonDir>
1.00 - 400.00
0.01
10.00
%IB
tINNonDir
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
TimeChar
ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 0.000 - 60.000
IEC Norm. inv.
tMin
0.001
0.040
Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves, in sec IDMT time mult for non-dir res over current protection Operation of nondirectional residual overvoltage protection Set level for nondirectional residual over voltage, in %Ub
kIN
0.00 - 2.00
0.01
1.00
OpUN>
Off On
Off
UN>
1.00 - 200.00
0.01
20.00
%UB
RED 670
327

Parameter tUNNonDir Range 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.100 Unit s Description Time delay for nondirectional residual over voltage, in sec Residual release current for all directional modes, in %Ib Residual release voltage for all direction modes, in %Ub
INRel>
0.25 - 200.00
0.01
1.00
%IB
UNRel>
0.01 - 200.00
0.01
3.00
%UB
Table 172:
Parameter RotResU
Advanced general settings for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function

Range 0 deg 180 deg Step Default 180 deg Unit Description Setting for rotating polarizing quantity if necessary
Table 173:
Parameter tReset
Advanced parameter group settings for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function

Range 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.040 Unit s Description Time delay used for reset of definite timers, in sec Setting P for customer programmable curve Setting A for customer programmable curve Setting B for customer programmable curve Setting C for customer programmable curve Reset mode when current drops off. Setting PR for customer programmable curve Setting TR for customer programmable curve Setting CR for customer programmable curve
tPCrv tACrv tBCrv tCCrv
0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 200.000 0.00 - 20.00 0.1 - 10.0
0.001 0.001 0.01 0.1
1.000 13.500 0.00 1.0
ResetTypeCrv
Immediate IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.005 - 3.000
IEC Reset
tPRCrv
0.001
0.500
tTRCrv
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
tCRCrv
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
6.5.5
Setting parameters
328
RED 670
Table 174:
Parameter IBase UBase SBase
Basic general settings for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function

Range 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 200000000.00 Step 1 0.05 0.05 Default 100 63.50 6350.00 Unit A kV kVA Description Base Current, in A Base Voltage, in kV Phase to Neutral Base Power, in kVA. IBase*Ubase
Table 175:
Parameter Operation OpMode
Basic parameter group settings for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function

Range Off On 3I0Cosfi 3I03U0Cosfi 3I0 and fi Forward Reverse -179 - 180 -10.0 - 10.0 0 - 90 Step Default Off 3I0Cosfi Unit Description Operation Off / On Selection of operation mode for protection Direction of operation forward or reverse Relay characteristic angle RCA, in deg Relay characteristic angle compensation Relay open angle ROA used as release in phase mode, in deg Set level for 3I0cosFi, directional res over current, in %Ib Set level for 3I03U0cosFi, starting inv time count, in %Sb Set level for directional residual over current prot, in %Ib Definite time delay directional residual overcurrent, in sec Reference value of res power for inverse time count, in %Sb Time multiplier setting for directional residual power mode Operation of nondirectional residual overcurrent protection Set level for non directional residual over current, in %Ib
DirMode RCADir RCAComp ROADir
1 0.1 1
Forward -90 0.0 90
Deg Deg Deg
INCosPhi>
0.25 - 200.00
0.01
1.00
%IB
SN>
0.25 - 200.00
0.01
10.00
%SB
INDir>
0.25 - 200.00
0.01
5.00
%IB
tDef
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
SRef
0.03 - 200.00
0.01
10.00
%SB
kSN
0.00 - 2.00
0.01
0.10
OpINNonDir>
Off On
Off
INNonDir>
1.00 - 400.00
0.01
10.00
%IB
RED 670
329

Parameter tINNonDir Range 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 Default 1.000 Unit s Description Time delay for nondirectional residual over current, in sec Operation curve selection for IDMT operation
TimeChar
ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 0.000 - 60.000
IEC Norm. inv.
tMin
0.001
0.040
Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves, in sec IDMT time mult for non-dir res over current protection Operation of nondirectional residual overvoltage protection Set level for nondirectional residual over voltage, in %Ub Time delay for nondirectional residual over voltage, in sec Residual release current for all directional modes, in %Ib Residual release voltage for all direction modes, in %Ub
kIN
0.00 - 2.00
0.01
1.00
OpUN>
Off On
Off
UN>
1.00 - 200.00
0.01
20.00
%UB
tUNNonDir
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
INRel>
0.25 - 200.00
0.01
1.00
%IB
UNRel>
0.01 - 200.00
0.01
3.00
%UB
Table 176:
Parameter RotResU
Advanced general settings for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function

Range 0 deg 180 deg Step Default 180 deg Unit Description Setting for rotating polarizing quantity if necessary
330
RED 670
Table 177:
Parameter tReset
Advanced parameter group settings for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function

Range 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.040 Unit s Description Time delay used for reset of definite timers, in sec Setting P for customer programmable curve Setting A for customer programmable curve Setting B for customer programmable curve Setting C for customer programmable curve Reset mode when current drops off. Setting PR for customer programmable curve Setting TR for customer programmable curve Setting CR for customer programmable curve
tPCrv tACrv tBCrv tCCrv
0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 200.000 0.00 - 20.00 0.1 - 10.0
0.001 0.001 0.01 0.1
1.000 13.500 0.00 1.0
ResetTypeCrv
Immediate IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.005 - 3.000
IEC Reset
tPRCrv
0.001
0.500
tTRCrv
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
tCRCrv
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
6.5.6
Technical data
Table 178:
Function Operate level for 3I0 cosj directional residual overcurrent
Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection (PSDE, 67N)

Range or value (0.25-200.00)% of lbase At low setting: (2.5-10) mA (10-50) mA Accuracy 1.0% of Ir at I Ir 1.0% of I at I > Ir 1.0 mA 0.5 mA 1.0% of Sr at S Sr 1.0% of S at S > Sr 10% of set value 1.0% of Ir at Ir 1.0% of I at I > Ir 1.0 mA 0.5 mA 1.0% of Ir at I Ir 1.0% of I at I > Ir 1.0 mA
Operate level for 3I03U0 cosj directional residual power
(0.25-200.00)% of Sbase At low setting: (0.25-5.00)% of Sbase
Operate level for 3I0 and j residual overcurrent
(0.25-200.00)% of Ibase At low setting: (2.5-10) mA (10-50) mA
Operate level for non directional overcurrent
(1.00-400.00)% of Ibase At low setting: (10-50) mA
RED 670
331

Function Operate level for non directional residual overvoltage Residual release current for all directional modes Range or value (1.00-200.00)% of Ubase (0.25-200.00)% of Ibase At low setting: (2.5-10) mA (10-50) mA Residual release voltage for all directional modes Reset ratio Timers Inverse characteristics, see table 614 and table 615 Relay characteristic angle RCA Relay open angle ROA Operate time, non directional residual over current Reset time, non directinal residual over current Operate time, start function Reset time, start function (0.01-200.00)% of Ubase > 95% (0.000-60.000) s 19 curve types (-179 to 180) degrees (0-90) degrees 60 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 60 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset 150 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 50 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset Accuracy 0.5% of Ur at UUr 0.5% of U at U > Ur 1.0% of Ir at I Ir 1.0% of I at I > Ir 1.0 mA 0.5 mA 0.5% of Ur at UUr 0.5% of U at > Ur 0.5% 10 ms See table 614 and table 615 2.0 degrees 2.0 degrees -
6.6
Thermal overload protection, one time constant (PTTR, 26)

Function block name: THLxANSI number: 49 IEC 61850 logical node name: LPTTR IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
6.6.1
Introduction
The increasing utilizing of the power system closer to the thermal limits have generated a need of a thermal overload function also for power lines. A thermal overload will often not be detected by other protection functions and the introduction of the thermal overload function can allow the protected circuit to operate closer to the thermal limits.
332
RED 670
The three phase current measuring function has an I2t characteristic with settable time constant and a thermal memory. An alarm level gives early warning to allow operators to take action well before the line will be tripped.
6.6.2
The sampled analogue phase currents are pre-processed and for each phase current the RMS value of each phase current is derived. These phase current values are fed to the THL function. From the largest of the three phase currents a final temperature is calculated according to the expression:
Q final
I = I ref
Tref
(Equation 74)
where: I Iref Tref is the largest phase current, is a given reference current and is steady state temperature corresponding to Iref
The ambient temperature is added to the calculated final temperature. If this temperature is larger than the set operate temperature level a start output signal START is activated. The actual temperature at the actual execution cycle is calculated as:
Dt Qn = Qn -1 + ( Q final - Q n-1 ) 1 - e t
(Equation 75)
where: Qn Qn-1 Qfinal Dt t is the calculated present temperature, is the calculated temperature at the previous time step, is the calculated final temperature with the actual current, is the time step between calculation of the actual temperature and is the set thermal time constant for the protected device (line or cable)
RED 670
333
The actual temperature of the protected component (line or cable) is calculated by adding the ambient temperature to the calculated temperature, as shown above. The ambient temperature can be taken from a separate sensor or can be given a constant value.The calculated component temperature can be monitored as it is exported from the function as a real figure. When the component temperature reaches the set alarm level AlarmTemp the output signal ALARM is set. When the component temperature reaches the set trip level TripTemp the output signal TRIP is set. There is also a calculation of the present time to operation with the present current. This calculation is only performed if the final temperature is calculated to be above the operation temperature:
Q - Qoperate toperate = -t ln final Q final - Q n
(Equation 76)
The calculated time to trip can be monitored as it is exported from the function as a real figure TTRIP. After a trip, caused by the thermal overload protection function, there can be a lockout to reconnect the tripped circuit. The output lockout signal LOCKOUT is activated when the device temperature is above the set lockout release temperature setting ReclTemp. The time to lockout release is calculated, i.e. a calculation of the cooling time to a set value. The thermal content of the function can be reset with input RESET.
Q - Qlockout _ release tlockout _ release = -t ln final Q final - Q n
(Equation 77)
Here the final temperature is equal to the set or measured ambient temperature. The calculated component temperature can be monitored as it is exported from the function as a real figure. In some applications the measured current can involve a number of parallel lines. This is often used for cable lines where one bay connects several parallel cables. By setting the parameter IMult to the number of parallel lines (cables) the actual current on one line is used in the protection algorithm. To activate this option the input ENMULT must be activated. The function has a reset input: RESET. By activating this input the calculated temperature is reset to its default initial value. This is useful during testing when secondary injected current has given a calculated false temperature level.
334
RED 670
Final Temp > TripTemp
start signal
Calculation of actual temperature
actual temperature
IL1, IL2, IL3
Calculation of final temperature Actual Temp > AlarmTemp alarm signal
trip signal Actual Temp > TripTemp initiate lockout
Actual Temp Reset of lockout after trip < Recl Temp
Calculation of time to trip
time to trip
Calculation of time to reset of lockout
time to reset of lockout
en05000736.vsd
Figure 169:
Functional overview of THL
RED 670
335

THL1LPTTR_26 I3P BLOCK BLKTR ENMULT AMBTEMP SENSFLT RESET TRIP START ALARM LOCKOUT
en04000396.vsd
Figure 170:
THL function block
6.6.4

Table 179:
Signal I3P BLOCK BLKTR ENMULT AMBTEMP SENSFLT RESET
Input signals for the LPTTR_26 (THL1-) function block

Description Group connection Block of function Block of trip Current multiplyer used when THOL is for two or more lines Ambient temperature from external temperature sensor Validity status of ambient temperature sensor Reset of internal thermal load counter
Table 180:
Signal TRIP START ALARM LOCKOUT
Output signals for the LPTTR_26 (THL1-) function block

Description Trip Start Signal Alarm signal Lockout signal
6.6.5
Setting parameters
336
RED 670
Table 181:
Parameter Operation IBase TRef
Basic parameter group settings for the LPTTR_26 (THL1-) function

Range Off On 0 - 99999 0 - 600 Step 1 1 Default Off 3000 90 Unit A Deg Description Operation Off / On Base current in A End temperature rise above ambient of the line when loaded with IRef The load current (in %of IBase) leading to TRef temperature Current multiplier when function is used for two or more lines Time constant of the line in minutes. Temperature level for start (alarm) Temperature level for trip Temperature for reset of lockout after trip Operate pulse length. Minimum one execution cycle External temperature sensor availiable Ambient temperature used when AmbiSens is set to Off. Temperature raise above ambient temperature at startup
IRef
0 - 400
100
%IB
IMult
1-5
Tau AlarmTemp TripTemp ReclTemp tPulse
0 - 1000 0 - 200 0 - 600 0 - 600 0.05 - 0.30
1 1 1 1 0.01
45 80 90 75 0.1
Min Deg Deg Deg s
AmbiSens DefaultAmbTemp
Off On -50 - 250
Off 20
Deg
DefaultTemp
-50 - 600
50
Deg
6.6.6
Technical data
Table 182:
Function Reference current Start temperature reference Operate time:
Thermal overload protection, one time constant (PTTR, 26)

Range or value (0-400)% of Ibase (0-400)C Ip = load current before overload occurs Time constant t = (01000) minutes Accuracy 1.0% of Ir 1.0C IEC 60255-8, class 5 + 200 ms
I 2 - I p2 t = t ln 2 I - Ib 2
I = Imeasured
RED 670
337

Function Alarm temperature Trip temperature Reset level temperature Range or value (0-200)C (0-400)C (0-400)C Accuracy 2.0% of heat content trip 2.0% of heat content trip 2.0% of heat content trip
6.7
Breaker failure protection (RBRF, 50BF)

Function block name: BFPxANSI number: 50BF IEC 61850 logical node name: CCRBRF IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
3I>BF
6.7.1
Introduction
The circuit breaker failure function ensures fast back-up tripping of surrounding breakers. The breaker failure protection operation can be current based, contact based or adaptive combination between these two principles. A current check with extremely short reset time is used as a check criteria to achieve a high security against unnecessary operation. The breaker failure protection can be single- or three-phase initiated to allow use with single phase tripping applications. For the three-phase version of the breaker failure protection the current criteria can be set to operate only if two out of four e.g. two phases or one phase plus the residual current starts. This gives a higher security to the back-up trip command. The function can be programmed to give a single- or three phase re-trip of the own breaker to avoid unnecessary tripping of surrounding breakers at an incorrect initiation due to mistakes during testing.
6.7.2
The breaker failure protection function is initiated from protection trip command, either from protection functions within the protection terminal or from external protection devices. The start signal can be phase selective or general (for all three phases). Phase selective start signals enable single pole re-trip function. This means that a second attempt to open the breaker is done. The re-trip attempt can be made after a set time delay. For transmission lines single pole trip and autoreclosing is often used. The re-trip function
338
RED 670
can be phase selective if it is initiated from phase selective line protection. The retrip function can be done with or without current check. With the current check the re-trip is only performed if the current through the circuit breaker is larger than the operate current level. The start signal can be an internal or external protection trip signal. If this start signal gets high at the same time as current is detected through the circuit breaker, the backup trip timer is started. If the opening of the breaker is successful this is detected by the function, both by detection of low RMS current and by a special adapted algorithm. The special algorithm enables a very fast detection of successful breaker opening, i.e. fast resetting of the current measurement. If the current detection has not detected breaker opening before the back-up timer has run its time a back-up trip is initiated. There is also a possibility to have a second back-up trip output activated after an added settable time after the first back-up trip. Further the following possibilities are available: The minimum length of the re-trip pulse, the back-up trip pulse and the back-up trip pulse 2 are settable. The re-trip pulse, the back-up trip pulse and the backup trip pulse 2 will however sustain as long as there is an indication of closed breaker. In the current detection it is possible to use three different options: 1 out of 3 where it is sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole, 1 out of 4 where it is sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole or high residual current and 2 out of 4 where at least two current (phase current and/or residual current) shall be high for breaker failure detection. The current detection for the residual current can be set different from the setting of phase current detection. It is possible to have different re-trip time delays for single phase faults and for multi-phase faults. The back-up trip can be made without current check. It is possible to have this option activated for small load currents only. It is possible to have instantaneous back-up trip function if a signal is high if the circuit breaker is insufficient to clear faults, for example at low gas pressure.
RED 670
339
Current AND BLOCK Current & Contact t1 AND t tp TRRETL1
STIL1 AND START STL1 OR
OR TRRET
OR CBCLDL1 AND AND Contact L2 L3
en05000832.vsd
Figure 171:
Simplified logic scheme of the retrip function
340
RED 670
Figure 172:
Simplified logic scheme of the back-up trip function
Internal logical signals STIL1, STIL2, STIL3 have logical value 1 when current in respective phase has magnitude larger than setting parameter IP>. Internal logical signal STN has logical value 1 when neutral current has magnitude larger than setting parameter IN>.
RED 670
341
More than 1 current high 1 of 3 AND
t2MPh t tp OR TRBU
1 of 4
OR
t2 t t3 t tp TRBU2
2 of 3 AND CBFLT CBALARM t CBALARM
en06000223.vsd
Figure 173:
Simplified logic scheme of the back-up trip function
6.7.3
Function block
BFP1CCRBRF_50BF I3P BLOCK START STL1 STL2 STL3 CBCLDL1 CBCLDL2 CBCLDL3 CBFLT TRBU TRBU2 TRRET TRRETL1 TRRETL2 TRRETL3 CBALARM
en06000188.vsd
Figure 174:
BFP function block
6.7.4

Table 183:
Signal I3P BLOCK START STL1 Table continued on next page
Input signals for the CCRBRF_50BF (BFP1-) function block

Description Current connection Block of function Three phase start of breaker failure protection function Start signal of phase L1
342
RED 670

Signal STL2 STL3 CBCLDL1 CBCLDL2 CBCLDL3 CBFLT Description Start signal of phase L2 Start signal of phase L3 Circuit breaker closed in phase L1 Circuit breaker closed in phase L2 Circuit breaker closed in phase L3 CB faulty, unable to trip. Back-up trip instantanously.
Table 184:
Signal TRBU TRBU2 TRRET TRRETL1 TRRETL2 TRRETL3 CBALARM
Output signals for the CCRBRF_50BF (BFP1-) function block

Description Back-up trip by breaker failure protection function Second back-up trip by breaker failure protection function Retrip by breaker failure protection function Retrip by breaker failure protection function phase L1 Retrip by breaker failure protection function phase L2 Retrip by breaker failure protection function phase L3 Alarm for faulty circuit breaker
6.7.5
Setting parameters
Table 185:
Parameter Operation IBase FunctionMode
Basic parameter group settings for the CCRBRF_50BF (BFP1-) function

Range Off On 1 - 99999 Current Contact Current&Contact 2 out of 4 1 out of 3 1 out of 4 Retrip Off CB Pos Check No CBPos Check 5 - 200 Step 1 Default Off 3000 Current Unit A Description Operation Off / On Base current Detection principle for back-up trip Back-up trip mode
BuTripMode
1 out of 3
RetripMode
Retrip Off
Operation mode of retrip logic Operate phase current level in % of IBase Operate residual current level in % of IBase Time delay of re-trip
IP>
10
%IB
IN>
2 - 200
10
%IB
t1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
RED 670
343

Parameter t2 t2MPh Range 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 0.001 Default 0.150 0.150 Unit s s Description Time delay of back-up trip Time delay of back-up trip at multi-phase start Trip pulse duration
tPulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Table 186:
Parameter I>BlkCont
Advanced parameter group settings for the CCRBRF_50BF (BFP1-) function

Range 5 - 200 Step 1 Default 20 Unit %IB Description Current for blocking of CB contact operation in % of IBase Additional time delay to t2 for a second back-up trip Time delay for CB faulty signal
t3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.030
tCBAlarm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
6.7.6
Technical data
Table 187:
Function Operate phase current Reset ratio, phase current Operate residual current Reset ratio, residual current Phase current level for blocking of contact function Reset ratio Timers Operate time for current detection Reset time for current detection
Breaker failure protection (RBRF, 50BF)

Range or value (5-200)% of lbase > 95% (2-200)% of lbase > 95% (5-200)% of lbase > 95% (0.000-60.000) s 10 ms typically 15 ms maximum Accuracy 1.0% of Ir at I Ir 1.0% of I at I > Ir 1.0% of Ir at I Ir 1.0% of I at I > Ir 1.0% of Ir at I Ir 1.0% of I at I > Ir 0.5% 10 ms -
6.8
Stub protection (PTOC, 50STB)
344
RED 670
Function block name: STB-ANSI number: 50STB IEC 61850 logical node name: STBPTOC
3I>STUB
6.8.1
Introduction
When a power line is taken out of service for maintenance and the line disconnector is opened in multi-breaker arrangements the voltage transformers will mostly be outside on the disconnected part. The primary line distance protection will thus not be able to operate and must be blocked. The stub protection covers the zone between the current transformers and the open disconnector. The three phase instantaneous overcurrent function is released from a NO (b) auxiliary contact on the line disconnector.
6.8.2
The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of each phase current the RMS value of each phase current is derived. These phase current values are fed to the STB function. In a comparator the RMS values are compared to the set operation current value of the function I>. If a phase current is larger than the set operation current the signal from the comparator for this phase is set to true. This signal will, in combination with the release signal from line disconnection (RELEASE input), activate the timer of this function. The function can be blocked by activation of the BLOCK input. If the fault current remains during the set timer delayt the function gives a trip signal.
RED 670
345
STUB PROTECTION FUNCTION
BLOCK TRIP
STIL1 STIL2 STIL3 RELEASE OR
AND
en05000731.vsd
Figure 175:
Simplified logic diagram for the stub protection
6.8.3
Function block
STB1STBPTOC_50STB I3P BLOCK BLKTR RELEASE TRIP START
en05000678.vsd
Figure 176:
STB function block
6.8.4

Table 188:
Signal I3P BLOCK BLKTR RELEASE
Input signals for the STBPTOC_50STB (STB1-) function block

Description Group signal for current input Block of function Block of trip Release of stub protection
Table 189:
Signal TRIP START
Output signals for the STBPTOC_50STB (STB1-) function block

Description Trip General start
346
RED 670
Section 6 Current protection 6.8.5 Setting parameters

Table 190:
Parameter Operation IBase ReleaseMode I>
Basic parameter group settings for the STBPTOC_50STB (STB1-) function

Range Off On 1 - 99999 Release Continuous 1 - 2500 Step 1 1 Default Off 3000 Release 200 Unit A %IB Description Operation Off / On Base current Release of stub protection Operate current level in % of IBase
Table 191:
Parameter t
Advanced parameter group settings for the STBPTOC_50STB (STB1-) function

Range 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.000 Unit s Description Time delay
6.8.6
Technical data
Table 192:
Function Operate current Reset ratio Definite time Operate time, start function Reset time, start function Critical impulse time Impulse margin time
Stub protection (PTOC, 50STB)

Range or value (1-2500)% of Ibase > 95% (0.000-60.000) s 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 15 ms typically Accuracy 1.0% of Ir at I Ir 1.0% of I at I > Ir 0.5% 10 ms -
6.9
Pole discordance protection (RPLD, 52PD)

Function block name: PDx-ANSI number: 50PD IEC 61850 logical node name: CCRPLD IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
PD
RED 670
347
Section 6 Current protection 6.9.1 Introduction

Single pole operated circuit breakers can due to electrical or mechanical failures end up with the different poles in different positions (close-open). This can cause negative and zero sequence currents which gives thermal stress on rotating machines and can cause unwanted operation of zero sequence or negative sequence current functions. Normally the own breaker is tripped to correct the positions. If the situation consists the remote end can be intertripped to clear the unsymmetrical load situation. The pole discordance function operates based on information from auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker for the three phases with additional criteria from unsymmetrical phase current when required.
6.9.2
The detection of pole discordance can be made in two different ways. If the contact based function is used an external logic can be made by connecting the auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker so that a pole discordance is indicated. This is shown in figure 177
C.B.
poleDiscordance Signal from C.B.

en05000287.vsd
Figure 177:
Pole discordance external detection logic
This single binary signal is connected to a binary input of the IED. The appearance of this signal will start a timer that will give a trip signal after the set delay. There is also a possibility to connect all phase selective auxiliary contacts (phase contact open and phase contact closed) to binary inputs of the IED. This is shown in figure 178
348
RED 670
C.B.
poleOneClosed from C.B. poleTwoClosed from C.B. poleThreeClosed from C.B. + poleOneOpened from C.B. poleTwoOpened from C.B. poleThreeOpened from C.B.
en05000288.vsd
Figure 178:
Pole discordance signals for internal logic
In this case the logic is realized within the function. If the inputs are indicating pole discordance the trip timer is started. This timer will give a trip signal after the set delay. Pole discordance can also be detected by means of phase selective current measurement. The sampled analogue phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of each phase current the RMS value of each phase current is derived. These phase current values are fed to the PD (RPLD) function. The difference between the smallest and the largest phase current is derived. If this difference is larger than a set ratio the trip timer is started. This timer will give a trip signal after the set delay. The current based pole discordance function can be set to be active either continuously or only directly in connection to breaker open or close command. The function also has a binary input that can be configured from the autoreclosing function, so that the pole discordance function can be blocked during sequences with a single pole open if single pole autoreclosing is used. The simplified block diagram of the current and contact based pole discordance function is shown in figure 179.
RED 670
349
BLOCK BLKDBYAR OR
PolPosAuxCont POLE1OPN POLE1CL POLE2OPN POLE2CL POLE3OPN POLE3CL AND Discordance detection AND OR PD Signal from CB EXTPDIND CLOSECMD OPENCMD OR AND Unsymmetry current detection en05000747.vsd t+200 ms AND t t 150 ms TRIP
Figure 179:
Simplified block diagram of pole discordance function - contact and current based
The pole discordance function is blocked if: The terminal is in TEST mode (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has been blocked from the HMI (BlockPD=Yes) The input signal BLOCK is high The input signal BLKDBYAR is high
The BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the pole discordance function. It can be connected to a binary input of the terminal in order to receive a block command from external devices or can be software connected to other internal functions of the terminal itself in order to receive a block command from internal functions. Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and internal function outputs. The BLKDBYAR signal blocks the pole discordance operation when a single phase autoreclosing cycle is in progress. It can be connected to the output signal AR01-1PT1 if the autoreclosing function is integrated in the terminal; if the autoreclosing function is an external device, then BLKDBYAR has to be connected to a binary input of the terminal and this binary input is connected to a signalization 1phase autoreclosing in progress from the external autoreclosing device. If the pole discordance function is enabled, then two different criteria will generate a trip signal TRIP:
350
RED 670
Pole discordance signalling from the circuit breaker. Unsymmetrical current detection.
6.9.2.1
Pole discordance signalling from circuit breaker

If one or two poles of the circuit breaker have failed to open or to close (pole discordance status), then the function input EXTPDIND is activated from the pole discordance signal derived from the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts (one NO contact for each phase connected in parallel, and in series with one NC contact for each phase connected in parallel) and, after a settable time interval t (0-60 s), a 150 ms trip pulse command TRIP is generated by the pole discordance function.
6.9.2.2
Unsymmetrical current detection

Unsymmetrical current detection is based on checking that: any phase current is lower than CurrUnsymLevel of the highest current in the remaining two phases the highest phase current is greater than CurrRelLevelof the rated current
If these conditions are true, an unsymmetrical condition is detected and the internal signal INPS is turned high. This detection is enabled to generate a trip after a set time delay t (0-60 s) if the detection occurs in the next 200 ms after the circuit breaker has received a command to open trip or close and if the unbalance persists. The 200 ms limitation is for avoiding unwanted operation during unsymmetrical load conditions. The pole discordance function is informed that a trip or close command has been given to the circuit breaker through the inputs CLOSECMD (for closing command information) and OPENCMD (for opening command information). These inputs can be connected to terminal binary inputs if the information are generated from the field (i.e. from auxiliary contacts of the close and open push buttons) or may be software connected to the outputs of other integrated functions (i.e. close command from a control function or a general trip from integrated protections).
RED 670
351

PD01CCRPLD_52PD I3P BLOCK BLKDBYAR CLOSECMD OPENCMD EXTPDIND POLE1OPN POLE1CL POLE2OPN POLE2CL POLE3OPN POLE3CL TRIP START
en06000275.vsd
Figure 180:
PD function block
6.9.4

Table 193:
Signal I3P BLOCK BLKDBYAR CLOSECMD OPENCMD EXTPDIND POLE1OPN POLE1CL POLE2OPN POLE2CL POLE3OPN POLE3CL
Input signals for the CCRPLD_52PD (PD01-) function block

Description Group signal for current input Block of function Block of function at CB single phase auto re-closing cycle Close order to CB Open order to CB Pole discordance signal from CB logic Pole one opened indication from CB Pole one closed indication from CB Pole two opened indication from CB Pole two closed indication from CB Pole three opened indication from CB Pole three closed indication from CB
Table 194:
Signal TRIP START
Output signals for the CCRPLD_52PD (PD01-) function block

Description Trip signal to CB Trip condition TRUE, waiting for time delay
6.9.5
Setting parameters
352
RED 670
Table 195:
Parameter Operation IBase tTrip
Basic parameter group settings for the CCRPLD_52PD (PD01-) function

Range Off On 1 - 99999 0.000 - 60.000 Step 1 0.001 Default Off 3000 0.300 Unit s Description Operation Off / On Base current Time delay between trip condition and trip signal Contact function selection Current function selection
ContSel
Off PD signal from CB Pole pos aux cont. Off CB oper monitor Continuous monitor 0 - 100 -
Off
CurrSel
Off
CurrUnsymLevel
80
Unsym magn of lowest phase current compared to the highest. Current magnitude for release of the function in % of IBase
CurrRelLevel
0 - 100
10
%IB
6.9.6
Technical data
Table 196:
Function Operate current Time delay
Pole discordance protection (RPLD, 52PD)

Range or value (0100)% of Ibase (0.000-60.000) s Accuracy 1.0% of Ir 0.5% 10 ms
6.10
Directional underpower protection (PDUP, 32)

Function block name: ANSI number: 32 IEC 61850 logical node name: IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
P><
6.10.1
Introduction
The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available as a torque on a rotating shaft to electric energy.
RED 670
353
Sometimes, the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that it does not cover bearing losses and ventilation losses. Then, the synchronous generator becomes a synchronous motor and starts to take electric power from the rest of the power system. This operating state, where individual synchronous machines operate as motors, implies no risk for the machine itself. If the generator under consideration is very large and if it consumes lots of electric power, it may be desirable to disconnect it to ease the task for the rest of the power system. Often, the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous state. The task of the reverse power protection is to protect the turbine and not to protect the generator itself. Figure 181 illustrates the reverse power protection with underpower relay and with overpower relay. The underpower relay gives a higher margin and should provide better dependability. On the other hand, the risk for unwanted operation immediately after synchronization may be higher. One should set the underpower relay to trip if the active power from the generator is less than about 2%. One should set the overpower relay to trip if the power flow from the network to the generator is higher than 1% depending on the type of turbine.
Underpower Relay Q Overpower Relay Q
Operate Line Margin
Operate Line Margin
Operating point without turbine torque
en06000315.vsd
Figure 181:
Protection with underpower relay and overpower relay
6.10.2
A simplified scheme showing the principle of the power protection function is shown in figure 182. The function has two stages with individual settings.
354
RED 670
Chosen current phasors Complex power calculation
P Derivation of S(composant) in Char angle S(angle) S(angle) < Power1 t Trip1 Start1
Chosen voltage phasors
S(angle) < Power2
Trip2 Start2
P = POWRE Q = POWIM
en06000438.vsd
Figure 182:
Simplified logic diagram of the power protection function
The function will use voltage and current phasors calculated in the pre-processing blocks. The apparent complex power is calculated according to chosen formula as shown in table 197.
Table 197:
L1, L2, L3
Complex power calculation

Formula used for complex power calculation
Set value: measureMode
S = U L1 I L1* + U L 2 I L 2* + U L 3 I L 3*
S = U L1L 2 I L1* - U L 2 L 3 I L 3*
S = 3 U PosSeq I PosSeq *
Arone
PosSeq
L1L2
S = U L1L 2 ( I L1* - I L 2* )
S = U L 2 L 3 ( I L 2* - I L 3* )
S = U L 3 L1 ( I L 3* - I L1* )
L2L3
L3L1
L1
S = 3 U L1 I L1*
RED 670
355

Set value: measureMode L2 Formula used for complex power calculation
S = 3 U L 2 I L 2*
S = 3 U L 3 I L 3*
S = 3 U NegSeq I NegSeq *
L3
NegSeq
The active and reactive power is available from the function and can be used for monitoring and fault recording. The component of the complex power S = P + jQ in the direction Angle1(2) is calculated. If this angle is 0 the active power component P is calculated. If this angle is 90 the reactive power component Q is calculated. The calculated power component is compared to the power pick up setting Power1(2). A start signal START1(2) is activated if the calculated power component is smaller than the pick up value. After a set time delay TripDelay1(2) a trip TRIP1(2) signal is activated if the start signal is still active. At activation of any of the two stages a common signal START will be activated. At trip from any of the two stages also a common signal TRIP will be activated. To avoid instability there is a settable hysteresis in the power function. The absolute hysteresis of the stage1(2) is Hysteresis1(2) = abs (Power1(2) + drop-power1(2)). For generator low forward power protection the power setting is very low, normally down to 0.02 pu of rated generator power. The hysteresis should therefore be set to a smaller value. The drop-power value of stage1 can be calculated with the Power1(2), Hysteresis1(2): drop-power1(2) = Power1(2) + Hysteresis1(2) For small power1 values the hysteresis1 may not be too big, because the droppower1(2) would be too small. In such cases, the hysteresis1 greater than (0.5 * Power1(2)) is corrected to the minimal value. If the measured power drops under the drop-power1(2) value the function will reset after a set time DropDelay1(2). The reset means that the start signal will drop out ant that the timer of the stage will reset.
6.10.2.1
Low pass filtering

In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is possible to introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for S (P, Q). This will make slower measurement response to the step changes in the measured quantity. Filtering is performed in accordance with the following recursive formula:
356
RED 670
S = k SOld + (1 - k ) SCalculated
Where S Sold is a new measured value to be used for the protection function is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle
(Equation 89)
SCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle k is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties
Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is immediately given out without any filtering (i.e. without any additional delay). When k is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. A typical value for k = 0.14.
6.10.2.2
Calibration of analog inputs

Measured currents and voltages used in the Power function can be calibrated to get class 0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, see example in figure 183.
% of Ir -10 IAmpComp5 IAmpComp30 IAmpComp100 -10 5 30 0-5%: Constant 5-30-100%: Linear >100%: Constant 100 Measured current % of Ir Amplitude compensation
Degrees -10 IAngComp30 IAngComp5 IAngComp100 -10
Angle compensation
Measured current 5 30 100 % of Ir
en05000652.vsd
Figure 183:
Calibration curves
RED 670
357
The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference and the amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals. Analog outputs from the function can be used for service values or in the disturbance report. The active power is provided as a MW value: P, or in percent of base power: PPERCENT. The reactive power is provided as a Mvar value: Q, or in percent of base power: QPERCENT.
6.10.3
Function block
GUP1GUPPDUP_37 I3P U3P BLOCK BLOCK1 BLOCK2 TRIP TRIP1 TRIP2 START START1 START2 P PPERCENT Q QPERCENT en07000027.vsd
Figure 184:
GUP function block
6.10.4

Table 198:
Signal I3P U3P BLOCK BLOCK1 BLOCK2
Input signals for the GUPPDUP_37 (GUP1-) function block

Description Current group connection Voltage group connection Block of function Block of stage 1 Block of stage 2
Table 199:
Signal TRIP TRIP1 TRIP2 START START1 START2 P
Output signals for the GUPPDUP_37 (GUP1-) function block

Description Common trip signal Trip of stage 1 Trip of stage 2 Common start Start of stage 1 Start of stage 2 Active Power in MW
358
RED 670

Signal PPERCENT Q QPERCENT Description Active power in % of SBASE Reactive power in Mvar Reactive power in % of SBASE
6.10.5
Setting parameters
Table 200:
Parameter IBase UBase Mode
Basic general settings for the GUPPDUP_37 (GUP1-) function

Range 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 L1, L2, L3 Arone Pos Seq L1L2 L2L3 L3L1 L1 L2 L3 Step 1 0.05 Default 3000 400.00 Pos Seq Unit A kV Description Current-Reference (primary current A) Voltage-Reference (primary voltage kV) Selection of measured current and voltage
Table 201:
Parameter Operation OpMode1 Power1 Angle1 TripDelay1 DropDelay1 OpMode2 Power2 Angle2 TripDelay2 DropDelay2
Basic parameter group settings for the GUPPDUP_37 (GUP1-) function

Range Off On Off UnderPower 0.0 - 500.0 -180.0 - 180.0 0.010 - 6000.000 0.010 - 6000.000 Off UnderPower 0.0 - 500.0 -180.0 - 180.0 0.010 - 6000.000 0.010 - 6000.000 Step 0.1 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.1 0.1 0.001 0.001 Default Off UnderPower 1.0 0.0 1.000 0.060 UnderPower 1.0 0.0 1.000 0.060 Unit %SB Deg s s %SB Deg s s Description Operation Off / On Operation mode 1 Power setting for stage 1 in % of Sbase Angle for stage 1 Trip delay for stage 1 Drop delay for stage 1 Operation mode 2 Power setting for stage 2 in % of Sbase Angle for stage 2 Trip delay for stage 2 Drop delay for stage 2
RED 670
359
Table 202:
Parameter k
Advanced parameter group settings for the GUPPDUP_37 (GUP1-) function

Range 0.00 - 0.99 Step 0.01 Default 0.00 Unit Description Low pass filter coefficient for power measurement, P and Q Absolute hysteresis of stage 1 Absolute hysteresis of stage 2 Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 5% of Ir Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 30% of Ir Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 100% of Ir Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 5% of Ur Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 30% of Ur Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 100% of Ur Angle calibration for current at 5% of Ir Angle calibration for current at 30% of Ir Angle calibration for current at 100% of Ir
Hysteresis1 Hysteresis2 IAmpComp5
0.2 - 5.0 0.2 - 5.0 -10.000 - 10.000
0.1 0.1 0.001
0.5 0.5 0.000
pu pu %
IAmpComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
IAmpComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
UAmpComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
UAmpComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
UAmpComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
IAngComp5 IAngComp30 IAngComp100
-10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000
0.001 0.001 0.001
0.000 0.000 0.000
Deg Deg Deg
6.10.6
Technical data
Table 203:
Function Power level
Directional underpower protection (PDUP)

Range or value (0.0500.0)% of Sbase At low setting: (0.5-2.0)% of Sbase (2.0-10)% of Sbase Accuracy 1.0% of Sr at S < Sr 1.0% of S at S > Sr < 50% of set value < 20% of set value 2 degrees 0.5% 10 ms
Characteristic angle Timers
(-180.0180.0) degrees (0.00-6000.00) s
360
RED 670
6.11
Directional overpower protection (PDOP, 32)

Function block name: GOPx ANSI number: 32 IEC 61850 logical node name: GOPPDOP IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
P><
6.11.1
Introduction
The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available as a torque on a rotating shaft to electric energy. Sometimes, the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that it does not cover bearing losses and ventilation losses. Then, the synchronous generator becomes a synchronous motor and starts to take electric power from the rest of the power system. This operating state, where individual synchronous machines operate as motors, implies no risk for the machine itself. If the generator under consideration is very large and if it consumes lots of electric power, it may be desirable to disconnect it to ease the task for the rest of the power system. Often, the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous state. The task of the reverse power protection is to protect the turbine and not to protect the generator itself. Figure 185 illustrates the reverse power protection with underpower relay and with overpower relay. The underpower relay gives a higher margin and should provide better dependability. On the other hand, the risk for unwanted operation immediately after synchronization may be higher. One should set the underpower relay to trip if the active power from the generator is less than about 2%. One should set the overpower relay to trip if the power flow from the network to the generator is higher than 1%.
RED 670
361
Underpower Relay Q
Overpower Relay Q
Operate Line Margin
Operate Line Margin
en06000315.vsd
Figure 185:
Reverse power protection with underpower relay and overpower relay
6.11.2
A simplified scheme showing the principle of the power protection function is shown in figure 186. The function has two stages with individual settings.
Chosen current phasors Complex power calculation
P Derivation of S(composant) in Char angle S(angle) S(angle) > Power1 t Trip1 Start1
Chosen voltage phasors
S(angle) > Power2
Trip2 Start2
P = POWRE Q = POWIM
en06000567.vsd
Figure 186:
Simplified logic diagram of the power protection function
The function will use voltage and current phasors calculated in the pre-processing blocks. The apparent complex power is calculated according to chosen formula as shown in table 204.
362
RED 670
Table 204:
L1, L2, L3
Complex power calculation

Formula used for complex power calculation
Set value: measureMode
S = U L1 I L1* + U L 2 I L 2* + U L 3 I L 3*
S = U L1L 2 I L1* - U L 2 L 3 I L 3*
S = 3 U PosSeq I PosSeq *
Arone
PosSeq
L1L2
S = U L1L 2 ( I L1* - I L 2* )
L2L3
S = U L 2 L 3 ( I L 2* - I L 3* )
S = U L 3 L1 ( I L 3* - I L1* )
L3L1
L1
S = 3 U L1 I L1*
S = 3 U L 2 I L 2*
L2
L3
S = 3 U L 3 I L 3*
The active and reactive power is available from the function and can be used for monitoring and fault recording. The component of the complex power S = P + jQ in the direction Angle1(2) is calculated. If this angle is 0 the active power component P is calculated. If this angle is 90 the reactive power component Q is calculated. The calculated power component is compared to the power pick up setting Power1(2). A start signal START1(2) is activated if the calculated power component is larger than the pick up value. After a set time delay TripDelay1(2) a trip TRIP1(2) signal is activated if the start signal is still active. At activation of any of the two stages a common signal START will be activated. At trip from any of the two stages also a common signal TRIP will be activated. To avoid instability there is a settable hysteresis in the power function. The absolute hysteresis of the stage1(2) is Hysteresis1(2) = abs (Power1(2) drop-power1(2)). For generator reverse power protection the power setting is very low, normally down to 0.02 pu of rated generator power. The hysteresis should therefore be set to a smaller value. The drop-power value of stage1 can be calculated with the Power1(2), Hysteresis1(2): drop-power1(2) = Power1(2) Hysteresis1(2)
RED 670
363
For small power1 values the hysteresis1 may not be too big, because the droppower1(2) would be too small. In such cases, the hysteresis1 greater than (0.5 * Power1(2)) is corrected to the minimal value. If the measured power drops under the drop-power1(2) value the function will reset after a set time DropDelay1(2). The reset means that the start signal will drop out ant that the timer of the stage will reset.
6.11.2.1
Low pass filtering

In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is possible to introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for S (P, Q). This will make slower measurement response to the step changes in the measured quantity. Filtering is performed in accordance with the following recursive formula:
S = k SOld + (1 - k ) SCalculated
Where S Sold is a new measured value to be used for the protection function is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle (Equation 99)
SCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle k is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties
Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is immediately given out without any filtering (i.e. without any additional delay). When k is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. A typical value for k = 0.14.
6.11.2.2

Measured currents and voltages used in the Power function can be calibrated to get class 0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, see example in figure 187.
364
RED 670
% of Ir -10 IAmpComp5 IAmpComp30 IAmpComp100 -10
Amplitude compensation
Measured current 5 30 0-5%: Constant 5-30-100%: Linear >100%: Constant 100 % of Ir
Angle compensation
en05000652.vsd
Figure 187:
Calibration curves
The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference and the amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals. Analog outputs from the function can be used for service values or in the disturbance report. The active power is provided as a MW value: P, or in percent of base power: PPERCENT. The reactive power is provided as a Mvar value: Q, or in percent of base power: QPERCENT.
6.11.3
Function block
GOP1GOPPDOP_32 I3P U3P BLOCK BLOCK1 BLOCK2 TRIP TRIP1 TRIP2 START START1 START2 P PPERCENT Q QPERCENT en07000028.vsd
Figure 188:
GOP function block
RED 670
365
Section 6 Current protection 6.11.4 Input and output signals

Table 205:
Signal I3P U3P BLOCK BLOCK1 BLOCK2
Input signals for the GOPPDOP_32 (GOP1-) function block

Description Current group connection Voltage group connection Block of function Block of stage 1 Block of stage 2
Table 206:
Signal TRIP TRIP1 TRIP2 START START1 START2 P PPERCENT Q QPERCENT
Output signals for the GOPPDOP_32 (GOP1-) function block

Description Common trip signal Trip of stage 1 Trip of stage 2 Common start Start of stage 1 Start of stage 2 Active Power in MW Active power in % of SBASE Reactive power in Mvar Reactive power in % of SBASE
6.11.5
Setting parameters
Table 207:
Parameter IBase UBase Mode
Basic general settings for the GOPPDOP_32 (GOP1-) function

Range 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 L1, L2, L3 Arone Pos Seq L1L2 L2L3 L3L1 L1 L2 L3 Step 1 0.05 Default 3000 400.00 Pos Seq Unit A kV Description Current-Reference (primary current A) Voltage-Reference (primary voltage kV) Selection of measured current and voltage
366
RED 670
Table 208:
Parameter Operation OpMode1 Power1 Angle1 TripDelay1 DropDelay1 OpMode2 Power2 Angle2 TripDelay2 DropDelay2
Basic parameter group settings for the GOPPDOP_32 (GOP1-) function

Range Off On Off OverPower 0.0 - 500.0 -180.0 - 180.0 0.010 - 6000.000 0.010 - 6000.000 Off OverPower 0.0 - 500.0 -180.0 - 180.0 0.010 - 6000.000 0.010 - 6000.000 Step 0.1 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.1 0.1 0.001 0.001 Default Off OverPower 120.0 0.0 1.000 0.060 OverPower 120.0 0.0 1.000 0.060 Unit %SB Deg s s %SB Deg s s Description Operation Off / On Operation mode 1 Power setting for stage 1 in % of Sbase Angle for stage 1 Trip delay for stage 1 Drop delay for stage 1 Operation mode 2 Power setting for stage 2 in % of Sbase Angle for stage 2 Trip delay for stage 2 Drop delay for stage 2
Table 209:
Parameter k
Advanced parameter group settings for the GOPPDOP_32 (GOP1-) function

Range 0.00 - 0.99 Step 0.01 Default 0.00 Unit Description Low pass filter coefficient for power measurement, P and Q Absolute hysteresis of stage 1 in % of Sbase Absolute hysteresis of stage 2 in % of Sbase Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 5% of Ir Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 30% of Ir Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 100% of Ir Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 5% of Ur Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 30% of Ur Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 100% of Ur
Hysteresis1 Hysteresis2 IAmpComp5
0.2 - 5.0 0.2 - 5.0 -10.000 - 10.000
0.1 0.1 0.001
0.5 0.5 0.000
pu pu %
IAmpComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
IAmpComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
UAmpComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
UAmpComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
UAmpComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
RED 670
367

Parameter IAngComp5 IAngComp30 IAngComp100 Range -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 Step 0.001 0.001 0.001 Default 0.000 0.000 0.000 Unit Deg Deg Deg Description Angle calibration for current at 5% of Ir Angle calibration for current at 30% of Ir Angle calibration for current at 100% of Ir
6.11.6
Technical data
Table 210:
Function Power level
Directional overpower protection (PDOP)

Range or value (0.0500.0)% of Sbase At low setting: (0.5-2.0)% of Sbase (2.0-10)% of Sbase Accuracy 1.0% of Sr at S < Sr 1.0% of S at S > Sr < 50% of set value < 20% of set value 2 degrees 0.5% 10 ms
Characteristic angle Timers
(-180.0180.0) degrees (0.00-6000.00) s
6.12
Broken conductor check (PTOC, 46)

Function block name: BRC ANSI number: 46 IEC 61850 logical node name: BRCPTOC IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
6.12.1
Introduction
Conventional protection functions can not detect the broken conductor condition. The broken conductor monitoring function (BRC), consisting of continuous current unsymmetry check on the line where the terminal is connected will give alarm or trip at detecting broken conductors.
6.12.2
The BRCPTOC function detects a broken conductor condition by detecting the unsymmetry between currents in the three phases. The current-measuring elements continuously measure the three-phase currents. The current unsymmetry signal output START is set on if :
368
RED 670
The difference in currents between the phase with the lowest current and the phase with the highest current is greater than set percentage Iub> of the highest phase current The highest phase current is greater than the minimum setting value IP>. The lowest phase current is below 50% of the minimum setting value IP>
The third condition is included to avoid problems in systems involving parallel lines. If a conductor breaks in one phase on one line the parallel line will experience an increase in current in the same phase. This might result in the first two conditions being satisfied. If the unsymmetrical detection lasts for a period longer than the set time tOper the TRIP output is activated. The simplified logic diagram of the broken conductor check function is shown in figure 189 The function is disabled (blocked) if: The IED is in TEST status and the function has been blocked from the HMI test menu (BlockBRC=Yes). The input signal BLOCK is high.
The BLOCK input can be connected to a binary input of the terminal in order to receive a block command from external devices or can be software connected to other internal functions of the terminal itself in order to receive a block command from internal functions. The output trip signal TRIP is a three phase trip. It can be used to command a trip to the circuit breaker or for alarm purpose only.
RED 670
369
TEST TEST-ACTIVE & BlockBRC = Yes BRC--START BRC--BLOCK Unsymmetrical Current Detection STI IL1<50%IP> IL2<50%IP> IL3<50%IP>
en07000122.vsd
>1
Function Enable & t t
BRC--TRIP
Figure 189:
Simplified logic diagram for broken conductor check function.
6.12.3
Function block
BRC1BRCPTOC_46 I3P BLOCK BLKTR TRIP START
en07000034.vsd
Figure 190:
BRC function block
6.12.4

Table 211:
Signal I3P BLOCK BLKTR
Input signals for the BRCPTOC_46 (BRC1-) function block

Description Group signal for current input Block of function Blocks the operate output
370
RED 670
Table 212:
Signal TRIP START
Output signals for the BRCPTOC_46 (BRC1-) function block

Description Operate signal of the protection logic Start signal of the protection logic
6.12.5
Setting parameters
Table 213:
Parameter Operation IBase Iub>
Basic parameter group settings for the BRCPTOC_46 (BRC1-) function

Range Off On 0 - 99999 50 - 90 Step 1 1 Default Off 3000 50 Unit A %IM Description Operation Off / On IBase Unbalance current operation value in percent of max current Minimum phase current for operation of Iub> in % of Ibase Operate time delay
IP>
5 - 100
20
%IB
tOper
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
Table 214:
Parameter tReset
Advanced parameter group settings for the BRCPTOC_46 (BRC1-) function

Range 0.010 - 60.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.100 Unit s Description Time delay in reset
6.12.6
Technical data
Table 215:
Function Minimum phase current for operation Unbalance current operation Timers
Broken conductor check (PTOC, 46)

Range or value (5100)% of Ibase (0100)% of maximum current (0.00-6000.00) s Accuracy 0.1% of Ir 0.1% of Ir 0.5% 10 ms
RED 670
371
372
Section 7 Voltage protection
Section 7
Voltage protection
About this chapter
This chapter describes voltage related protection functions. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data are included for each function.
7.1
Two step undervoltage protection (PTUV, 27)

Function block name: TUVxANSI number: 27 IEC 61850 logical node name: UV2PTUV IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
3U<
7.1.1
Introduction
Undervoltages can occur in the power system during faults or abnormal conditions. The function can be used to open circuit breakers to prepare for system restoration at power outages or as long-time delayed back-up to primary protection. The function has two voltage steps, each with inverse or definite time delay.
7.1.2
The two-step undervoltage protection function (TUV) is used to detect low power system voltage. The function has two voltage measuring steps with separate time delays. If one, two or three phase voltages decrease below the set value, a corresponding start signal is issued. TUV can be set to start/trip based on "one out of three", "two out of three", or "three out of three" of the measured voltages, being below the set point. If the voltage remains below the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted trip due to disconnection of the related high voltage equipment, a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available, i.e. if the voltage is lower than the set blocking level the function is blocked and no start or trip signal is issued. The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for each step and can be either definite time delay or inverse time delay.
RED 670
373
The undervoltage protection function can be set to measure phase to earth fundamental value, phase to phase fundamental value, phase to earth RMS value or phase to phase RMS value. The choise of the measuring is done by the parameter ConnType in PST or LHMI under Generall Settings/Voltage protection. The voltage related settings are made in percent of base voltage which is set i kV phase-phase voltage This means operation for phase to earth voltage under:
U < (%) UBase( kV ) 3

and operation for phase to phase voltage under:
U < (%) UBase(kV)
(Equation 101) (Equation 100)
7.1.2.1
Measurement principle
All the three phase to earth voltages are measured continuously, and compared with the set values, U1< and U2<. The parameters OpMode1 and OpMode2 influence the requirements to activate the start outputs. Either "1 out of 3", "2 out of 3" or "3 out of 3" phases have to be lower than the corresponding set point to issue the corresponding start signal. To avoid oscillations of the output start signal, a hysteresis has been included.
7.1.2.2
Time delay
The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time delay (IDMT). For the inverse time delay three different modes are available; inverse curve A, inverse curve B, and a programmable inverse curve. The type A curve is described as:
t=
k U < -U U<
(Equation 102)
The type B curve is described as:
t=
k 480 U < -U - 0.5 32 U<

2.0
+ 0.055
(Equation 103)
The programmable curve can be created as:
374
RED 670
kA +D t= p U < -U -C B U<
(Equation 104)
When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity. There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval U< down to U< *(1.0 CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: U< *(1.0 CrvSatn/100). If the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:
CrvSatn -C > 0 100
(Equation 105)
The lowest voltage is always used for the inverse time delay integration. The details of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in section "Inverse characteristics". Trip signal issuing requires that the undervoltage condition continues for at least the user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time mode (DT) and by some special voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse time mode (IDMT). If the start condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time (tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2pickup for the inverse time) the corresponding start output is reset. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the start condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area. Note that for the undervoltage function the IDMT reset time is constant and does not depend on the voltage fluctuations during the drop-off period. However, there are three ways to reset the timer, either the timer is reset instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during the reset time, or the timer value is linearly decreased during the reset time. See figure 191 and figure 192.
RED 670
375
Voltage
START Hysteresis
tReset 1 TRIP
tReset 1 Measured Voltage
U1<
Time START TRIP

t1
Time Integrator t1
Froozen Timer
Instantaneous Reset
Time
Linear Decrease en05000010.vsd
Figure 191:
Voltage profile not causing a reset of the start signal for step 1, and definite time delay
376
RED 670
Voltage START
tReset1 tReset1 START Hysteresis TRIP Measured Voltage
U1<
Time START t1
TRIP
Time Integrator t1
Froozen Timer
Time Instantaneous Reset Linear Decrease en05000011.vsd
Figure 192:
Voltage profile causing a reset of the start signal for step 1, and definite time delay
7.1.2.3
Blocking
The undervoltage function can be partially or totally blocked, by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:
RED 670
377
BLOCK: BLKTR1: BLKST1: BLKTR2: BLKST2:
blocks all outputs blocks all trip outputs of step 1 blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 1 blocks all trip outputs of step 2 blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 2
If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlkStVal1, either the trip output of step 1, or both the trip and the start outputs of step 1, are blocked. The characteristic of the blocking is set by the IntBlkSel1 parameter. This internal blocking can also be set to "off" resulting in no voltage based blocking. Corresponding settings and functionality are valid also for step 2. In case of disconnection of the high voltage component the measured voltage will get very low. The event will start both the under voltage function and the blocking function, as seen in figure 193. The delay of the blocking function must be set less than the time delay of under voltage function.
Disconnection
Normal voltage U1< U2<
tBlkUV1 < t1,t1Min IntBlkStVal1 IntBlkStVal2 Time Block step 1 Block step 2
en05000466.vsd
tBlkUV2 < t2,t2Min
Figure 193:
Blocking function.
378
RED 670

7.1.2.4 Design
The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-neutral voltages or the three phase to phase voltages. Recursive Fourier filters or RMS filters based on one fundamental cycle filter the input voltage signals. The voltages are individually compared to the set value, and the lowest voltage is used for the inverse time characteristic integration. A special logic is included to achieve the "1 out of 3", "2 out of 3" and "3 out of 3" criteria to fulfill the start condition. The design of the TimeUnderVoltage function is schematically described in figure 194.
UL1 Comparator UL1 < U1< Comparator UL2 < U1< Comparator UL3 < U1< ST1L1 Voltage Phase Selector OpMode1 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3
Phase 1
UL2
ST1L2
Phase 2 Phase 3
UL3
START Time integrator t1 tReset1 ResetTypeCrv1
Start & Trip Output Logic Step 1
ST1L3 ST1 TR1L1 TR1L2 TR1L3 TR1
OR
MinVoltSelect or
TRIP
OR
Comparator UL1 < U2< Comparator UL2 < U2< Comparator UL3 < U2<
Voltage Phase Selector OpMode2 1 out of 3 2 outof 3 3 out of 3
Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3
ST2L1 ST2L2 ST2L3 ST2 TR2L1 TR2L2
OR
MinVoltSelect or
TRIP
TR2L3
TR2 OR START
OR
OR
TRIP
en05000012.vsd
Figure 194:
Schematic design of the TUV function
RED 670
379
Section 7 Voltage protection 7.1.3 Function block

TUV1UV2PTUV_27 U3P BLOCK BLKTR1 BLKST1 BLKTR2 BLKST2 TRIP TR1 TR1L1 TR1L2 TR1L3 TR2 TR2L1 TR2L2 TR2L3 START ST1 ST1L1 ST1L2 ST1L3 ST2 ST2L1 ST2L2 ST2L3 en06000276.vsd
Figure 195:
TUV function block
7.1.4

Table 216:
Signal U3P BLOCK BLKTR1 BLKST1 BLKTR2 BLKST2
Input signals for the UV2PTUV_27 (TUV1-) function block

Description Three phase voltages Block of function Block of operate signal, step 1 Block of step 1 Block of operate signal, step 2 Block of step 2
Table 217:
Signal TRIP TR1 TR1L1 TR1L2 TR1L3 TR2 TR2L1 TR2L2 TR2L3 START
Output signals for the UV2PTUV_27 (TUV1-) function block

Description Trip Common trip signal from step1 Trip signal from step1 phase L1 Trip signal from step1 phase L2 Trip signal from step1 phase L3 Common trip signal from step2 Trip signal from step2 phase L1 Trip signal from step2 phase L2 Trip signal from step2 phase L3 General start signal
380
RED 670

Signal ST1 ST1L1 ST1L2 ST1L3 ST2 ST2L1 ST2L2 ST2L3 Description Common start signal from step1 Start signal from step1 phase L1 Start signal from step1 phase L2 Start signal from step1 phase L3 Common start signal from step2 Start signal from step2 phase L1 Start signal from step2 phase L2 Start signal from step2 phase L3
7.1.5
Setting parameters
Table 218:
Parameter ConnType
Basic general settings for the UV2PTUV_27 (TUV1-) function

Range PhN DFT PhPh RMS PhN RMS PhPh DFT Step Default PhN DFT Unit Description Group selector for connection type
Table 219:
Parameter Operation UBase OperationStep1 Characterist1
Basic parameter group settings for the UV2PTUV_27 (TUV1-) function

Range Off On 0.05 - 2000.00 Off On Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Prog. inv. curve 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 1 - 100 Step 0.05 Default Off 400.00 On Definite time Unit kV Description Operation Off / On Base voltage Enable execution of step 1 Selection of time delay curve type for step 1 Number of phases required for op (1 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 1 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in % of UBase, step 1 Definitive time delay of step 1 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 1 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 1
OpMode1
1 out of 3
U1<
70
%UB
t1 t1Min
0.00 - 6000.00 0.000 - 60.000
0.01 0.001
5.00 5.000
s s
k1
0.05
0.01
0.05 - 1.10
RED 670
381

Parameter IntBlkSel1 Range Off Block of trip Block all 1 - 100 Step Default Off Unit Description Internal (low level) blocking mode, step 1 Voltage setting for internal blocking in % of UBase, step 1 Time delay of internal (low level) blocking for step 1 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 1 Enable execution of step 2 Selection of time delay curve type for step 2 Number of phases required for op (1 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 2 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in % of UBase, step 2 Definitive time delay of step 2 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 2 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 2 Internal (low level) blocking mode, step 2 Voltage setting for internal blocking in % of UBase, step 2 Time delay of internal (low level) blocking for step 2 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 2
IntBlkStVal1
20
%UB
tBlkUV1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
HystAbs1 OperationStep2 Characterist2
0.0 - 100.0 Off On Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Prog. inv. curve 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 1 - 100
0.1 -
0.5 On Definite time
%UB -
OpMode2
1 out of 3
U2<
50
%UB
t2 t2Min
0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000
0.001 0.001
5.000 5.000
s s
k2
0.05
0.01
0.05 - 1.10
IntBlkSel2
Off Block of trip Block all 1 - 100
Off
IntBlkStVal2
20
%UB
tBlkUV2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
HystAbs2
0.0 - 100.0
0.1
0.5
%UB
382
RED 670
Table 220:
Parameter tReset1
Advanced parameter group settings for the UV2PTUV_27 (TUV1-) function

Range 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.025 Unit s Description Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 1 Selection of reset curve type for step 1
ResetTypeCrv1
Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.000 - 60.000 1.000
Instantaneous
tIReset1 ACrv1
0.001 0.001
0.025 0.005 - 200.000
s -
Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 1 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 1 Tuning param for prog. under voltage IDMT curve, step 1 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 2 Selection of reset curve type for step 2
BCrv1
1.00
0.01
0.50 - 100.00
CCrv1
0.0
0.1
0.0 - 1.0
DCrv1
0.000
0.001
0.000 - 60.000
PCrv1
1.000
0.001
0.000 - 3.000
CrvSat1
0 - 100
tReset2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.025
ResetTypeCrv2
Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.000 - 60.000 1.000
Instantaneous
tIReset2 ACrv2
0.001 0.001
0.025 0.005 - 200.000
s -
Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 2 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 2
BCrv2
1.00
0.01
0.50 - 100.00
CCrv2
0.0
0.1
0.0 - 1.0
RED 670
383

Parameter DCrv2 Range 0.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.000 - 60.000 Unit Description Parameter D for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 2 Tuning param for prog. under voltage IDMT curve, step 2
PCrv2
1.000
0.001
0.000 - 3.000
CrvSat2
0 - 100
7.1.6
Technical data
Table 221:
Function Operate voltage, low and high step Absolute hysteresis Internal blocking level, low and high step Inverse time characteristics for low and high step, see table 616 Definite time delays Minimum operate time, inverse characteristics Operate time, start function Reset time, start function Critical impulse time Impulse margin time
Two step undervoltage protection (PUVM, 27)

Range or value (1100)% of Ubase (0100)% of Ubase (1100)% of Ubase (0.000-60.000) s (0.00060.000) s 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Uset 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset 10 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Uset 15 ms typically Accuracy 1.0% of Ur 1.0% of Ur 1.0% of Ur See table 616 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms -
7.2
Two step overvoltage protection (PTOV, 59)

Function block name: TOVxANSI number: 59 IEC 61850 logical node name: OV2PTOV IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
3U>
384
RED 670
Section 7 Voltage protection 7.2.1 Introduction

Overvoltages will occur in the power system during abnormal conditions such as sudden power loss, tap changer regulating failures, open line ends on long lines. The function can be used as open line end detector, normally then combined with directional reactive over-power function or as system voltage supervision, normally then giving alarm only or switching in reactors or switch out capacitor banks to control the voltage. The function has two voltage steps, each of them with inverse or definite time delayed. The overvoltage function has an extremely high reset ratio to allow setting close to system service voltage.
7.2.2
The two-step overvoltage protection function (TOV) is used to detect high power system voltage. The function has two steps with separate time delays. If one, two or three phase voltages increase above the set value, a corresponding start signal is issued. TOV can be set to start/trip based on "one out of three", "two out of three", or "three out of three" of the measured voltages, being above the set point. If the voltage remains above the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for the two steps and can be either definite time delay or inverse time delay. The voltage related settings are made in percent of the base voltage, which is set in kV, phase-phase. The overvoltage protection function can be set to measure phase to earth fundamental value, phase to phase fundamental value, phase to earth RMS value or phase to phase RMS value. The choise of measuring is done by the parameter ConnType in PST or LHMI under Generall Settings/Voltage protection. The setting of the analog inputs are given as primary phase to phase voltage and secondary phase to phase voltage. The function will operate if the voltage gets higher than the set percentage of the set base voltage UBase. This means operation for phase to earth voltage over:
U > (%) UBase( kV ) 3

and operation for phase for phase voltage over:
U > (%) UBase(kV)
(Equation 106)
Vpickup > (%) VBase(kV)
(Equation 107)
RED 670
385

7.2.2.1 Measurement principle
All the three phase voltages are measured continuously, and compared with the set values, U1> and U2>. The parameters OpMode1 and OpMode2 influence the requirements to activate the start outputs. Either "1 out of 3", "2 out of 3" or "3 out of 3" phases have to be higher than the corresponding set point to issue the corresponding start signal. To avoid oscillations of the output start signal, a hysteresis has been included.
7.2.2.2
Time delay
The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time delay (IDMT). For the inverse time delay four different modes are available; inverse curve A, inverse curve B, inverse curve C, and a programmable inverse curve. The type A curve is described as:
t= TD
V - Vpickup Vpickup
(Equation 108)
t=
k 480 U -U > - 0.5 32 U>

2.0
- 0.035
(Equation 109)
The type C curve is described as:
t=
k 480 U -U > - 0.5 32 U>

TD 480 V - Vpickup 32 Vpickup - 0.5 - 0.035
3.0
3.0
- 0.035
t=
(Equation 110)
t=
kA U -U > -C B U>
p
+D
(Equation 111)
386
RED 670
When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity. There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval U< down to U< *(1.0 CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: U< *(1.0 CrvSatn/100). If the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:
CrvSatn -C > 0 100
(Equation 112)
The highest phase (or phase to phase) voltage is always used for the inverse time delay integration, see figure 196. The details of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in section "Inverse characteristics"
Voltage IDMT Voltage
UL1 UL2 UL3
Time
en05000016.vsd
Figure 196:
Voltage used for the inverse time characteristic integration
Trip signal issuing requires that the overvoltage condition continues for at least the user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time mode (DT) and by selected voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse time mode (IDMT). If the start condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time (tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2 for the inverse time) the corresponding start output is reset, after that the defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the start condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area. The hysteresis value for each step is settable (HystAbs2) to allow an high and accurate reset of the function. It is also remarkable that for the overvoltage function the IDMT reset time is constant and does not depend on the RED 670 Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B 387
voltage fluctuations during the drop-off period. However, there are three ways to reset the timer, either the timer is reset instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during the reset time, or the timer value is linearly decreased during the reset time..
7.2.2.3
Blocking
The overvoltage function can be partially or totally blocked, by binary input signals where:
BLOCK: BLKTR1: BLKST1: BLKTR2: BLKST2: blocks all outputs blocks all trip outputs of step 1 blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 1 blocks all trip outputs of step 2 blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 2
7.2.2.4
Design
The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-earth voltages or the three phase to phasel voltages. Recursive Fourier filters filter the input voltage signals. The phase voltages are individually compared to the set value, and the highest voltage is used for the inverse time characteristic integration. A special logic is included to achieve the "1 out of 3", "2 out of 3" and "3 out of 3" criteria to fulfill the start condition. The design of the TimeOverVoltage function is schematically described in figure 197.
388
RED 670
UL1
Comparator UL1 > U1> Comparator UL2 > U1> Comparator UL3 > U1>
ST1L1 Voltage Phase Selector OpMode1 1 out of 3 2 outof 3 3 out of 3

Phase 1
UL2
ST1L2
Phase 2 Phase 3
UL3
ST1L3 ST1 TR1L1 TR1L2 TR1L3 TR1
OR
MaxVoltSelect or
TRIP
OR
Comparator UL1 > U2> Comparator UL2 > U2> Comparator UL3 > U2>
Voltage Phase Selector OpMode2 1 out of 3 2 outof 3 3 out of 3
Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3
ST2L1 ST2L2 ST2L3 ST2 TR2L1 TR2L2
OR
MaxVoltSelect or
TRIP TR2L3 TR2

START
OR OR
OR
TRIP
en05000013.vsd
Figure 197:
Schematic design of the TimeOverVoltage function
RED 670
389

TOV1OV2PTOV_59 U3P BLOCK BLKTR1 BLKST1 BLKTR2 BLKST2 TRIP TR1 TR1L1 TR1L2 TR1L3 TR2 TR2L1 TR2L2 TR2L3 START ST1 ST1L1 ST1L2 ST1L3 ST2 ST2L1 ST2L2 ST2L3 en06000277.vsd
Figure 198:
TOV function block
7.2.4

Table 222:
Input signals for the OV2PTOV_59 (TOV1-) function block

Description Group signal for three phase voltage input Block of function Block of operate signal, step 1 Block of step 1 Block of operate signal, step 2 Block of step 2
Table 223:
Signal TRIP TR1 TR1L1 TR1L2 TR1L3 TR2 TR2L1 TR2L2 TR2L3 START
Output signals for the OV2PTOV_59 (TOV1-) function block

Description Trip Common trip signal from step1 Trip signal from step1 phase L1 Trip signal from step1 phase L2 Trip signal from step1 phase L3 Common trip signal from step2 Trip signal from step2 phase L1 Trip signal from step2 phase L2 Trip signal from step2 phase L3 General start signal
390
RED 670

Signal ST1 ST1L1 ST1L2 ST1L3 ST2 ST2L1 ST2L2 ST2L3 Description Common start signal from step1 Start signal from step1 phase L1 Start signal from step1 phase L2 Start signal from step1 phase L3 Common start signal from step2 Start signal from step2 phase L1 Start signal from step2 phase L2 Start signal from step2 phase L3
7.2.5
Setting parameters
Table 224:
Parameter ConnType
Basic general settings for the OV2PTOV_59 (TOV1-) function

Range PhG PhPh PhG RMS PhPh RMS Step Default PhG Unit Description TBD
Table 225:
Basic parameter group settings for the OV2PTOV_59 (TOV1-) function

Range Off On 0.05 - 2000.00 Off On Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog. inv. curve 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 1 - 200 Step 0.05 Default Off 400.00 On Definite time Unit kV Description Operation Off / On Base voltage Enable execution of step 1 Selection of time delay curve type for step 1
OpMode1
1 out of 3
Number of phases required for op (1 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 1 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in % of UBase, step 1 Definitive time delay of step 1 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 1 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 1
U1>
120
%UB
t1 t1Min
0.00 - 6000.00 0.000 - 60.000
0.01 0.001
5.00 5.000
s s
k1
0.05 - 1.10
0.01
0.05
RED 670
391

Parameter HystAbs1 OperationStep2 Characterist2 Range 0.0 - 100.0 Off On Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog. inv. curve 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 1 - 200 Step 0.1 Default 0.5 On Definite time Unit %UB Description Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 1 Enable execution of step 2 Selection of time delay curve type for step 2
OpMode2
1 out of 3
Number of phases required for op (1 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 2 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in % of UBase, step 2 Definitive time delay of step 2 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 2 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 2 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 2
U2>
150
%UB
t2 t2Min
0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000
0.001 0.001
5.000 5.000
s s
k2
0.05 - 1.10
0.01
0.05
HystAbs2
0.0 - 100.0
0.1
0.5
%UB
Table 226:
Parameter tReset1
Advanced parameter group settings for the OV2PTOV_59 (TOV1-) function

ResetTypeCrv1
Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.000 - 60.000 0.005 - 200.000
Instantaneous
tIReset1 ACrv1
0.001 0.001
0.025 1.000
s -
BCrv1
0.50 - 100.00
0.01
1.00
CCrv1
0.0 - 1.0
0.1
0.0
392
RED 670

Parameter DCrv1 Range 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.000 Unit Description Parameter D for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 1 Tuning param for prog. over voltage IDMT curve, step 1 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 2 Selection of reset curve type for step 2
PCrv1
0.000 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
CrvSat1
0 - 100
tReset2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.025
ResetTypeCrv2
Instantaneous
tIReset2 ACrv2
0.001 0.001
0.025 1.000
s -
Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 2 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 2 Tuning param for prog. over voltage IDMT curve, step 2
BCrv2
0.50 - 100.00
0.01
1.00
CCrv2
0.0 - 1.0
0.1
0.0
DCrv2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
PCrv2
0.000 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
CrvSat2
0 - 100
7.2.6
Technical data
RED 670
393
Table 227:
Function
Two step overvoltage protection (POVM, 59)

Range or value (1-200)% of Ubase (0100)% of Ubase (0.000-60.000) s (0.000-60.000) s 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Uset 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset 15 ms typically Accuracy 1.0% of Ur at U < Ur 1.0% of U at U > Ur 1.0% of Ur at U < Ur 1.0% of U at U > Ur See table 617 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms -
Operate voltage, low and high step Absolute hysteresis Inverse time characteristics for low and high step, see table 617 Definite time delays Minimum operate time, Inverse characteristics Operate time, start function Reset time, start function Critical impulse time Impulse margin time
7.3
Two step residual overvoltage protection (PTOV, 59N)

Function block name: TRVxANSI number: 59N IEC 61850 logical node name: ROV2PTOV IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
3U0
7.3.1
Introduction
Residual voltages will occur in the power system during earth faults. The function can be configured to calculate the residual voltage from the three phase voltage input transformers or from a single phase voltage input transformer fed from an open delta or neutral point voltage transformer. The function has two voltage steps, each with inverse or definite time delayed.
7.3.2
The two-step residual overvoltage protection function (TRV) is used to detect high single-phase voltage, such as high residual voltage, also called 3U0. The residual voltage can be measured directly from a voltage transformer in the neutral of a power transformer or from a three-phase voltage transformer, where the secondary windings are connected in an open delta. Another possibility is to measure the three phase
394
RED 670
voltages and internally in the protection terminal calculate the corresponding residual voltage and connect this calculated residual voltage to the TRV function block. The function has two steps with separate time delays. If the single-phase (residual) voltage remains above the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for the two steps and can be either definite time delay or inverse time delay The voltage related settings are made in percent of the base voltage, which is set in kV, phase-phase.
7.3.2.1
The residual voltage is measured continuously, and compared with the set values, U1> and U2>. To avoid oscillations of the output start signal, a hysteresis has been included.
7.3.2.2
Time delay
The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time delay (IDMT). For the inverse time delay four different modes are available; inverse curve A, inverse curve B, inverse curve C, and a programmable inverse curve. The type A curve is described as:
t= TD
V - Vpickup Vpickup
(Equation 113)
t=
k 480 U -U > - 0.5 32 U>

2.0
- 0.035
(Equation 114)
The type C curve is described as:
t=
k 480 U -U > - 0.5 32 U>

3.0
- 0.035
(Equation 115)
RED 670
395
t=
kA U -U > -C B U>
TD A
p
+D
t=
V - Vpickup -C B Vpickup
+D
(Equation 116)
When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity. There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval U> up to U> *(1.0 + CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: U> *(1.0 + CrvSatn/100). If the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:
CrvSatn -C > 0 100
(Equation 117)
The details of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in chapter "Inverse characteristics". Trip signal issuing requires that the residual overvoltage condition continues for at least the user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time mode (DT) and by some special voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse time mode (IDMT). If the start condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time (tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2 for the inverse time) the corresponding start output is reset, after that the defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the start condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area. It is also remarkable that for the overvoltage function the IDMT reset time is constant and does not depend on the voltage fluctuations during the drop-off period. However, there are three ways to reset the timer, either the timer is reset instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during the reset time, or the timer value is linearly decreased during the reset time. See figure 199 and figure 200.
396
RED 670
tReset 1 Voltage START tReset1 TRIP
U1>
Hysteresis
Measured Voltage
Time START t1
TRIP
Time Integrator Froozen Timer t1
Linear Decrease
Instantaneous Reset
Time en05000019.vsd
Figure 199:
Voltage profile not causing a reset of the start signal for step 1, and definite time delay
RED 670
397
Voltage START
tReset1 START Hysteresis TRIP
tReset1
U1> Measured Voltage
Time START t1
TRIP
Time Integrator
Froozen Timer
t1
Time Instantaneous Reset Linear Decrease en05000020.vsd
Figure 200:
Voltage profile causing a reset of the start signal for step 1, and definite time delay
7.3.2.3
Blocking
The residual overvoltage function can be partially or totally blocked, by binary input signals where:
398
RED 670
BLOCK: BLKTR1: BLKST1: BLKTR2: BLKST2:
blocks all outputs blocks all trip outputs of step 1 blocks all startrip outputs related to step 1 blocks all trip outputs of step 2 blocks all start and trip inputs related to step 2
7.3.2.4
Design
The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the residual voltage. Recursive Fourier filters filter the input voltage signal. The single input voltage is compared to the set value, and is also used for the inverse time characteristic integration. The design of the TRV function is schematically described in figure 201.
UN
Comparator UN > U1> START
Phase 1 Start & Trip Output Logic Step 1
ST1 TR1
Time integrator t1 tReset1 ResetTypeCrv1
TRIP
Comparator UN > U2> START Time integrator t2 tReset2 ResetTypeCrv2
Phase 1 Start & Trip Output Logic Step 2 OR
ST2 TR2
OR
START
TRIP
TRIP
en05000748.vsd
Figure 201:
Schematic design of the TRV function
RED 670
399

TRV1ROV2PTOV_59N U3P BLOCK BLKTR1 BLKST1 BLKTR2 BLKST2 TRIP TR1 TR2 START ST1 ST2 en06000278.vsd
Figure 202:
TRV function block
7.3.4

Table 228:
Input signals for the ROV2PTOV_59N (TRV1-) function block

Description Three phase voltages Block of function Block of operate signal, step 1 Block of step 1 Block of operate signal, step 2 Block of step 2
Table 229:
Signal TRIP TR1 TR2 START ST1 ST2
Output signals for the ROV2PTOV_59N (TRV1-) function block

Description Trip Common trip signal from step1 Common trip signal from step2 General start signal Common start signal from step1 Common start signal from step2
7.3.5
Setting parameters
400
RED 670
Table 230:
Basic parameter group settings for the ROV2PTOV_59N (TRV1-) function

Range Off On 0.05 - 2000.00 Off On Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog. inv. curve 1 - 200 Step 0.05 Default Off 400.00 On Definite time Unit kV Description Operation Off / On Base voltage Enable execution of step 1 Selection of time delay curve type for step 1
U1>
30
%UB
Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT), step 1 in % of UBase Definitive time delay of step 1 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 1 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 1 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 1 Enable execution of step 2 Selection of time delay curve type for step 2
t1 t1Min
0.00 - 6000.00 0.000 - 60.000
0.01 0.001
5.00 5.000
s s
k1
0.05 - 1.10
0.01
0.05
HystAbs1 OperationStep2 Characterist2
0.0 - 100.0 Off On Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog. inv. curve 1 - 100
0.1 -
0.5 On Definite time
%UB -
U2>
45
%UB
Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT), step 2 in % of UBase Definitive time delay of step 2 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 2 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 2 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 2
t2 t2Min
0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000
0.001 0.001
5.000 5.000
s s
k2
0.05 - 1.10
0.01
0.05
HystAbs2
0.0 - 100.0
0.1
0.5
%UB
RED 670
401
Table 231:
Parameter tReset1
Advanced parameter group settings for the ROV2PTOV_59N (TRV1-) function

ResetTypeCrv1
Instantaneous
tIReset1 ACrv1
0.001 0.001
0.025 1.000
s -
Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 1 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 1 Tuning param for prog. over voltage IDMT curve, step 1 Time delay in DT reset (s), step 2 Selection of reset curve type for step 2
BCrv1
0.50 - 100.00
0.01
1.00
CCrv1
0.0 - 1.0
0.1
0.0
DCrv1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
PCrv1
0.000 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
CrvSat1
0 - 100
tReset2 ResetTypeCrv2
0.000 - 60.000 Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.000 - 60.000 0.005 - 200.000
0.001 -
0.025 Instantaneous
s -
tIReset2 ACrv2
0.001 0.001
0.025 1.000
s -
BCrv2
0.50 - 100.00
0.01
1.00
CCrv2
0.0 - 1.0
0.1
0.0
402
RED 670

Parameter DCrv2 Range 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.000 Unit Description Parameter D for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 2 Tuning param for prog. over voltage IDMT curve, step 2
PCrv2
0.000 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
CrvSat2
0 - 100
7.3.6
Technical data
Table 232:
Function Operate voltage, low and high step Absolute hysteresis Inverse time characteristics for low and high step, see table 618 Definite time setting Minimum operate time Operate time, start function Reset time, start function Critical impulse time Impulse margin time
Two step residual overvoltage protection (PTOV, 59N)

Range or value (1-200)% of Ubase (0100)% of Ubase (0.00060.000) s (0.000-60.000) s 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Uset 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset 15 ms typically Accuracy 1.0% of Ur at U < Ur 1.0% of U at U > Ur 1.0% of Ur at U < Ur 1.0% of U at U > Ur See table 618 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms -
7.4
Overexcitation protection (PVPH, 24)

Function block name: OEXxANSI number: 24 IEC 61850 logical node name: OEXPVPH IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
U/f >
RED 670
403
Section 7 Voltage protection 7.4.1 Introduction

When the laminated core of a power transformer or generator is subjected to a magnetic flux density beyond its design limits, stray flux will flow into non-laminated components not designed to carry flux and cause eddy currents to flow. The eddy currents can cause excessive heating and severe damage to insulation and adjacent parts in a relatively short time. Function has settable inverse operating curve and independent alarm stage.
7.4.2
The importance of overexcitation protection is growing as the power transformers as well as other power system elements today operate most of the time near their designated limits. Modern design transformers are more sensitive to overexcitation than earlier types. This is a result of the more efficient designs and designs which rely on the improvement in the uniformity of the excitation level of modern systems. Thus, if emergency that includes overexcitation does occur, transformers may be damaged unless corrective action is promptly taken. Transformer manufacturers recommend an overexcitation protection as a part of the transformer protection system. Overexcitation results from excessive applied voltage, possibly in combination with below-normal frequency. Such condition may occur when a unit is on load, but are more likely to arise when it is on open circuit, or at a loss of load occurrence. Transformers directly connected to generators are in particular danger to experience overexcitation condition. It follows from the fundamental transformer equation, see equation 118, that peak flux density Bmax is directly proportional to induced voltage E, and inversely proportional to frequency f, and turns n.
E = 4.44 f n B max A
(Equation 118)
The relative excitation M (relative V/Hz) is therefore according to equation 119.

VEf M = relative ------ = ---------------------- Hz ( Ur ) ( fr )
(Equation 119)
Disproportional variations in quantities E and f may give rise to core overfluxing. If the core flux density Bmax increases to a point above saturation level (typically 1.9 Tesla), the flux will no longer be contained within the core only but will extend into other (non-laminated) parts of the power transformer and give rise to Eddy current circulations. Overexcitation will result in: 404 overheating of the non-laminated metal parts, a large increase in magnetizing currents, an increase in core and winding temperature, an increase in transformer vibration and noise. RED 670
Protection against overexcitation is based on calculation of the relative Volts per Hertz (V / Hz) ratio. The action of the protection is usually to initiate a reduction of excitation and, if this should fail, or is not possible, to trip the transformer after a delay which can be from seconds to minutes, typically 5 - 10 seconds. Overexcitation protection may be of particular concern on directly connected generator unit transformers. Directly connected generator-transformers are subjected to a wide range of frequencies during the acceleration and deceleration of the turbine. In such cases, the overexcitation protection may trip the field breaker during a startup of a machine, by means of the overexcitation ALARM signal from the transformer terminal. If this is not possible, the power transformer can be disconnected from the source, after a delay, by the TRIP signal. The IEC 60076 - 1 standard requires that transformers shall be capable of operating continuously at 10% above rated voltage at no load, and rated frequency. At no load, the ratio of the actual generator terminal voltage to the actual frequency should not exceed 1.1 times the ratio of transformer rated voltage to the rated frequency on a sustained basis, see equation 120.
E --- 1.1 Ur ----f fr
(Equation 120)
or equivalently, with 1.1 Ur = V/Hz> according to equation 121.

E V/Hz> --- --------------------f fr
(Equation 121)
where:
V/Hz>
is the maximum continuously allowed voltage at no load, and rated frequency.
V/Hz> is an OEX setting parameter. The setting range is 100% to 150%. If the user does not know exactly what to set, then the standard IEC 60076 - 1, section 4.4, the default value V/Hz> = 1.10 pu shall be used. In OEX protection function the relative excitation M (relative V/Hz) is expressed according to equation 122.
Ef VM = relative ------ = ------------ Hz Ur fr
(Equation 122)
It is clear from the above formula that, for an unloaded power transformer, M = 1 for any E and f, where the ratio E / f is equal to Ur / fr. A power transformer is not overexcited as long as the relative excitation is M V/Hz>, V/Hz> expressed in %. The relative overexcitation is thus defined as shown in equation 123.
overexcitation = M V/Hz>
(Equation 123)
RED 670
405
The overexcitation protection algorithm is fed with an input voltage U which is in general not the induced voltage E from the fundamental transformer equation. For no load condition, these two voltages are the same, but for a loaded power transformer the internally induced voltage E may be lower or higher than the voltage U which is measured and fed to OEX, depending on the direction of the power flow through the power transformer, the power transformer side where OEX is applied, and the power transformer leakage reactance of the winding. It is important to specify on the OEX function block in CAP 531 configuration tool worksheet on which side of the power transformer OEX is placed As an example, at a transformer with a 15% short circuit impedance Xsc, the full load, 0.8 power factor, 105% voltage on the load side, the actual flux level in the transformer core, will not be significantly different from that at the 110% voltage, no load, rated frequency, provided that the short circuit impedance X can be equally divided between the primary and the secondary winding: Xleak = Xleak1 = Xleak2 = Xsc / 2 = 0.075 pu.. OEX calculates the internal induced voltage E if Xleak (meaning the leakage reactance of the winding where OEX is connected) is known to the user. The assumption taken for 2-winding power transformers that Xleak = Xsc / 2 is unfortunately most often not true. For a 2-winding power transformer the leakage reactances of the two windings depend on how the windings are located on the core with respect to each other. In the case of three-winding power transformers the situation is still more complex. If a user has the knowledge on the leakage reactance, then it should applied. If a user has no idea about it, Xleak can be set to Xc/2. The OEX protection will then take the given measured terminal voltage U, as the induced voltage E. It is assumed that overexcitation is a symmetrical phenomenon, caused by events such as loss of load, etc. It will be observed that a high phase-to-earth voltage does not mean overexcitation. For example, in an unearthed power system, a single-phase-toearth fault means high voltages of the healthy two phases to earth, but no overexcitation on any winding. The phase-to-phase voltages will remain essentially unchanged. The important voltage is the voltage between the two ends of each winding.
7.4.2.1
Measured voltage
If one phase-to-phase voltage is available from the side where OEX protection is applied, then OEX protection function block shall be set to measure this voltage, MeasuredU. The particular voltage which is used determines the two currents that must be used.This must be chosen with the setting MeasuredI. It is extremely important that MeasuredU and MeasuredI is set to same value! If, for example, voltage Uab is fed to OEX, then currents Ia, and Ib must be applied, etc. From these two input currents, current Iab = Ia - Ib is calculated internally by the
406
RED 670
OEX protection algorithm. The phase-to-phase voltage must be higher than 70% of the rated value, otherwise the OEX protection algorithm is exited without calculating the excitation. ERROR output is set to 1, and the displayed value of relative excitation V / Hz shows 0.000. If three phase-to-earth voltages are available from the side where OEX is connected, then OEX protection function block shall be set to measure positive sequence voltage. In this case the positive sequence voltage and the positive sequence current are used by OEX protection. A check is made within OEX protection if the positive sequence voltage is higher than 70% rated phase-to-earth voltage; below this value, OEX is exited immediately, and no excitation is calculated. ERROR output is set to 1, and the displayed value of relative excitation V / Hz shows 0.000. The frequency value is received from the pre-processing block. The function is in operation for frequencies within the range of 33-60 Hz and of 42-75 Hz for 50 and 60 Hz respectively. OEX protection function can be connected to any power transformer side, independent from the power flow. The side with a possible On-Load-Tap-Changer (OLTC) must not be used.
7.4.2.2
Operate time of the overexcitation protection.

The operate time of the overexcitation protection is a function of the relative overexcitation. Basically there are two different delay laws available to choose between: the so called IEEE law, and a tailor-made law.
The so called IEEE law approximates a square law and has been chosen based on analysis of the various transformers overexcitation capability characteristics. They can match well a transformer core capability. The square law is according to equation 124.
0.18 k 0.18 k ---------------------t o p = -------------------------------------------- = ----------------2 2 overexcitation ( M V/Hz> )
(Equation 124)
where: M is excitation, mean value in the interval from t = 0 to t = top is maximum continuously allowed voltage at no load, and rated frequency, in pu and is time multiplier setting for inverse time functions, see figure 204. Parameter k (time multiplier setting) selects one delay curve from the family of curves.
V/Hz>
k
RED 670
407
An analog overexcitation relay would have to evaluate the following integral expression, which means to look for the instant of time t = top according to equation 125.
t op
( M(t) V/Hz> )
0
dt 0.18 k
(Equation 125)
A digital, numerical relay will instead look for the lowest j (i.e. j = n) where it becomes true that:
n
Dt
( M(j)
j=k
V/Hz> ) 0.18 k
(Equation 126)
where: Dt is the time interval between two successive executions of overexcitation function and M(j) - V/Hz> is the relative excitation at (time j) in excess of the normal (rated) excitation which is given as Ur/fr.
As long as M > V/Hz> (i.e. overexcitation condition), the above sum can only be larger with time, and if the overexcitation persists, the protected transformer will be tripped at j = n. Inverse delays as per figure 204, can be modified (limited) by two special definite delay settings, namely tMax and tMin, see figure 203.
delay in s tMax
under excitation
inverse delay law
overexcitation tMin 0 M=V/Hz> V/Hz> Mmax - V/Hz> Overexcitation M-V/Hz> Mmax Emax Excitation M E (only if f = fr = const) 99001067.vsd
Figure 203:
Restrictions imposed on inverse delays by tMax, and tMin
A definite maximum time, tMax, can be used to limit the operate time at low degrees of overexcitation. Inverse delays longer than tMax will not be allowed. In case the inverse delay is longer than tMax, OEX trips after tMaxt_MaxTripDelay seconds. 408 Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B RED 670
A definite minimum time, tMin, can be used to limit the operate time at high degrees of overexcitation. In case the inverse delay is shorter than tMin, OEX function trips after tMint_MinTripDelay seconds. Also, the inverse delay law is no more valid beyond excitation Mmax. Beyond Mmax (beyond overexcitation Mmax - V/Hz>), the delay will always be tMin, no matter what overexcitation.
Time (s) IEEE OVEREXCITATION CURVES
1000
100 k = 60
k = 20
10
k = 10 k=9 k=8 k=7 k=6 k=5 k=4 k=3 k=2
k=1 1 2 3 4 5 10 20 30 40
OVEREXCITATION IN %
(M-Emaxcont)*100)
en01000373.vsd
Figure 204:
Delays inversely proportional to the square of the overexcitation.
The critical value of excitation Mmax is determined indirectly via OEX protection function setting V/Hz>>. V/Hz>> can be thought of as a no-load-rated-frequency voltage, where the inverse law should be replaced by a short definite delay, tMin. If, for example, V/Hz>> = 140 %, then Mmax is according to equation 127.
(V/Hz>>) f Mmax = ------------------------- = 1.40 Ur fr
(Equation 127)
The Tailor-Made law allows a user to design an arbitrary delay characteristic. In this case the interval between M = V/Hz>, and M = Mmax is automatically divided into
RED 670
409
five equal subintervals, with six delays. (settings t1, t2, t3, t4, t5, and t6) as shown in the figure 205. These times should be set so that t1 => t2 => t3 => t4 => t5 => t6.
delay in s
tMax
underexcitation 0 Emaxcont
tMin Overexcitation M-Emaxcont Mmax - Emaxcont Excitation M Mmax 99001068.vsd
Figure 205:
An example of a Tailor-Made delay characteristic
Delays between two consecutive points, for example t3 and t4, are obtained by linear interpolation. Should it happen that tMax be lower than, for example, delays t1, and t2, the actual delay would be tMax. Above Mmax, the delay can only be tMin.
7.4.2.3
Cooling
The overexcitation protection OEX is basically a thermal protection; therefore a cooling process has been introduced. Exponential cooling process is applied. Parameter Tcool is an OEX setting, with a default time constant tCooling of 20 minutes. This means that if the voltage and frequency return to their previous normal values (no more overexcitation), the normal temperature is assumed to be reached not before approximately 5 times tCooling minutes. If an overexcitation condition would return before that, the time to trip will be shorter than it would be otherwise.
7.4.2.4
OEX protection function measurands

A service value data item called Time to trip, and designated on the display by tTRIP is available in seconds on the local HMI, or monitoring tool. This value is an estimation of the remaining time to trip if the overexcitation remained on the level it had when the estimation was done. This information can be useful with small or moderate overexcitations. If the overexcitation is so low that the valid delay is tMax, then the estimation of the remaining time to trip is done against tMax. The displayed relative excitation M, designated on the display by V/Hz is calculated from the expression:
V Ef M = relative ------ = ------------ Hz Uf fr
(Equation 128)
410
RED 670
If less than V / Hz = V/Hz> (in pu) is shown on the HMI display (or read via SM/ RET521), the power transformer is underexcited. If the value of V/Hz is shown which is equal to V/Hz> (in pu), it means that the excitation is exactly equal to the power transformer continuous capability. If a value higher than the value of V/Hz> is shown, the protected power transformer is overexcited. For example, if V/Hz = 1.100 is shown, while V/Hz> = 110 %, then the power transformer is exactly on its maximum continuous excitation limit. The third item of the OEX protection service report is the thermal status of the protected power transformer iron core, designated on the display by ThermalStatus. This gives the thermal status in % of the trip value which corresponds to 100%. Thermal Status should reach 100% at the same time, when tTRIP reaches 0 seconds. If the protected power transformer is then for some reason not switched off, the ThermalStaus shall go over 100%. If the delay as per IEEE law, or Tailor-made Law, is limited by tMax, and/or TMin, then the Thermal Status will generally not reach 100% at the same time, when tTRIP reaches 0 seconds. For example, if, at low degrees of overexcitation, the very long delay is limited by tMax, then the OEX TRIP output signal will be set to 1 before the Thermal status reaches 100%.
7.4.2.5
Overexcitation alarm
A separate step, AlarmLevel, is provided for alarming purpose. The voltages are normally set 2% lower and has a definite time delay, tAlarm. This will give the operator an early abnormal voltages warning.
OVEX: FS = 1 = 2*SI + SU BLOCK SIDE Prepool I SI1
V/Hz> M>V/Hz>
AlarmLevel
t
tAlarm
t>tAlarm
&
ALARM
t
Calculation of internal induced voltage Ei tMin k M
t>tMin
&
TRIP
SI2 Prepool O SU1 2
Ei
M= (Ei / f) (Ur / fr)
IEEE law
M Tailor-made law M>V/Hz>> Xleak
t
tMax
ERROR V/Hz>>
M = relative V/Hz as service value
en05000162.vsd
Figure 206:
A logic diagram over Overexcitation protection function.
RED 670
411

7.4.2.6 Logic diagram
Figure 207:
A simplified diagram of the OEX protection function
Simplification of the diagram is in the way the IEEE and Tailor-made delays are calculated. The cooling process is not shown. It is not shown that voltage and frequency are separately checked against their respective limit values.
7.4.3
Function block
OEX1OEXPVPH_24 I3P U3P BLOCK RESET TRIP START ALARM
en05000329.vs d
Figure 208:
OEX function block
7.4.4

Table 233:
Signal I3P U3P BLOCK RESET
Input signals for the OEXPVPH_24 (OEX1-) function block

Description Current connection Voltage connection Block of function Reset operation
412
RED 670
Table 234:
Signal TRIP START ALARM
Output signals for the OEXPVPH_24 (OEX1-) function block

Description Trip from overexcitation function Overexcitation above set operate level (instantaneous) Overexcitation above set alarm level (delayed)
7.4.5
Setting parameters
Table 235:
Parameter MeasuredU
Basic general settings for the OEXPVPH_24 (OEX1-) function

Range PosSeq L1L2 L2L3 L3L1 L1L2 L2L3 L3L1 PosSeq Step Default L1L2 Unit Description Selection of measured voltage
MeasuredI
L1L2
Selection of measured current
Table 236:
Parameter Operation IBase UBase V/Hz>
Basic parameter group settings for the OEXPVPH_24 (OEX1-) function

Range Off On 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 100.0 - 180.0 Step 1 0.05 0.1 Default Off 3000 400.00 110.0 Unit A kV %UB/f Description Operation Off / On Base current (rated phase current) in A Base voltage (main voltage) in kV Operate level of V/Hz at no load and rated freq in % of (Ubase/ frated) High level of V/Hz above which tMin is used, in % of (Ubase/ frated) Winding leakage reactance in primary ohms Length of the pulse for trip signal (in sec) Minimum trip delay for V/Hz inverse curve, in sec Maximum trip delay for V/Hz inverse curve, in sec
V/Hz>>
100.0 - 200.0
0.1
140.0
%UB/f
XLeak
0.000 - 200.000
0.001
0.000
ohm
TrPulse tMin
0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000
0.001 0.001
0.100 7.000
s s
tMax
0.00 - 9000.00
0.01
1800.00
RED 670
413

Parameter tCooling Range 0.10 - 9000.00 Step 0.01 Default 1200.00 Unit s Description Transformer magnetic core cooling time constant, in sec Inverse time curve selection, IEEE/Tailor made Time multiplier for IEEE inverse type curve Alarm operate level as % of operate level Alarm time delay, in sec
CurveType
IEEE Tailor made 1 - 60
IEEE
kForIEEE
AlarmLevel tAlarm
50.0 - 120.0 0.00 - 9000.00
0.1 0.01
100.0 5.00
% s
Table 237:
Parameter t1Tailor
Advanced parameter group settings for the OEXPVPH_24 (OEX1-) function

Range 0.00 - 9000.00 Step 0.01 Default 7200.00 Unit s Description Time delay t1 (longest) for tailor made curve, in sec Time delay t2 for tailor made curve, in sec Time delay t3 for tailor made curve, in sec Time delay t4 for tailor made curve, in sec Time delay t5 for tailor made curve, in sec Time delay t6 (shortest) for tailor made curve, in sec
t2Tailor t3Tailor t4Tailor t5Tailor t6Tailor
0.00 - 9000.00 0.00 - 9000.00 0.00 - 9000.00 0.00 - 9000.00 0.00 - 9000.00
0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01
3600.00 1800.00 900.00 450.00 225.00
s s s s s
7.4.6
Technical data
Table 238:
Function Operate value, start Operate value, alarm Operate value, high level Table continued on next page
Overexcitation protection (PVPH, 24)

Range or value (100180)% of (Ubase/frated) (50120)% of start level (100200)% of (Ubase/frated) Accuracy 1.0% of U 1.0% of Ur at U Ur 1.0% of U at U > Ur 1.0% of U
414
RED 670

Function Curve type Range or value IEEE or customer defined Accuracy Class 5 + 40 ms
IEEE : t =
(0.18 k ) ( M - 1) 2
where M = relative (V/Hz) = (E/f)/ (Ur/fr) Minimum time delay for inverse function Maximum time delay for inverse function Alarm time delay (0.00060.000) s (0.009000.00) s (0.00060.000) s 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms
7.5
Voltage differential protection (PTOV, 60)

Function block name: VDC ANSI number: 60 IEC 61850 logical node name: VDCPTOV IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
7.5.1
Introduction
A voltage differential monitoring function is available. It compares the voltages from two three phase sets of voltage transformers and has one sensitive alarm step and one trip step. It can be used to supervise the voltage from two fuse groups or two different voltage transformers fuses as a fuse/MCB supervision function.
7.5.2
The function is based on comparison of the amplitudes of the two voltages connected in each phase. Possible differences between the ratios of the two Voltage/Capacitive voltage transformers can be compensated for with a ratio correction factors RFLx The voltage difference is evaluated and if it exceeds the alarm level UDAlarm or trip level UDTrip signals for alarm (ALARM output) or trip (TRIP output) is given after definite time delay tAlarm respectively tTrip. The two three phase voltage supplies are also supervised with undervoltage settings U1Low and U2Low. The outputs for loss of voltage U1LOW resp U2LOW will be activated. The U1 voltage is supervised for loss of individual phases whereas the U2 voltage is supervised for loss of all three phases. Loss of one U1or all U2 voltages will block the differential measurement. This blocking can be switched off with setting BlkDiffAtULow=No.
RED 670
415
The function can be blocked from an external condition with the binary BLOCK input. It can e.g. be activated from a fuse failure supervision function block. To allow easy commissioning the measured differential voltage is available as service value. This allows simple setting of the ratio correction factor to achieve full balance in normal service. The principle logic diagram is shown in figure 209.
UDTripL1>
AND O R tReset tTrip t t
UDTripL1>
AND
AND
TRIP
UDTripL1>
AND AND
START
UDAlarmL1>
AND O R tAlarm
UDAlarmL1>
AND
AND
ALARM
UDAlarmL1>
AND
U1<L1 U1<L2 U1<L3 BlkDiffAtULow U2<L1 U2<L2 U2<L3 BLOCK AND t1 t AND U2LOW OR OR tAlarm t AND U1LOW
AND
en06000382.vsd
Figure 209:
Principle logic for voltage differential function
7.5.3
Function block
VDC1VDCPTOV_60 U3P1 U3P2 BLOCK TRIP START ALARM U1LOW U2LOW UL1DIFF UL2DIFF UL3DIFF en06000528.vsd
Figure 210:
VDC function block
416
RED 670
Section 7 Voltage protection 7.5.4 Input and output signals

Table 239:
Signal U3P1 U3P2 BLOCK
Input signals for the VDCPTOV_60 (VDC1-) function block

Description Bus voltage Capacitor voltage Block of function
Table 240:
Signal TRIP START ALARM U1LOW U2LOW UL1DIFF UL2DIFF UL3DIFF
Output signals for the VDCPTOV_60 (VDC1-) function block

Description Voltage differential protection operated Start of voltage differential protection Voltage differential protection alarm Loss of U1 voltage Loss of U2 voltage Differential Voltage phase L1 Differential Voltage phase L2 Differential Voltage phase L3
7.5.5
Setting parameters
Table 241:
Parameter Operation UBase BlkDiffAtULow UDTrip tTrip
Basic parameter group settings for the VDCPTOV_60 (VDC1-) function

Range Off On 0.50 - 2000.00 No Yes 0.0 - 100.0 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.01 0.1 0.001 Default Off 400.00 Yes 5.0 1.000 Unit kV %UB s Description Operation Off/On Base Voltage Block operation at low voltage Operate level, in % of UBase Time delay for voltage differential operate, in milliseconds Time delay for voltage differential reset, in seconds Input 1 undervoltage level, in % of UBase Input 2 undervoltage level, in % of UBase
tReset
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
U1Low U2Low
0.0 - 100.0 0.0 - 100.0
0.1 0.1
70.0 70.0
%UB %UB
RED 670
417

Parameter tBlock UDAlarm tAlarm Range 0.000 - 60.000 0.0 - 100.0 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 0.1 0.001 Default 0.000 2.0 2.000 Unit s %UB s Description Reset time for undervoltage block Alarm level, in % of UBase Time delay for voltage differential alarm, in seconds
Table 242:
Parameter RFL1
Advanced parameter group settings for the VDCPTOV_60 (VDC1-) function

Range 0.000 - 3.000 Step 0.001 Default 1.000 Unit Description Ratio compensation factor phase L1 UCap*RFL1=UL1Bus Ratio compensation factor phase L2 UCap*RFL2=UL2Bus Ratio compensation factor phase L3 UCap*RFL3=UL3Bus
RFL2
0.000 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
RFL3
0.000 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
7.5.6
Technical data
Table 243:
Function Voltage difference for alarm and trip Under voltage level Timers
Voltage differential protection (PTOV)

Range or value (0.0100.0) % of Ubase (0.0100.0) % of Ubase (0.00060.000)s Accuracy 0.5 % of Ur 0.5% of Ur 0.5% 10 ms
7.6
Loss of voltage check (PTUV, 27)

Function block name: LOV ANSI number: 27 IEC 61850 logical node name: LOVPTUV IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
7.6.1
Introduction
The loss of voltage detection, (PTUV, 27), is suitable for use in networks with an automatic System restoration function. The function issues a three-pole trip command
418
RED 670
to the circuit breaker, if all three phase voltages fall below the set value for a time longer the set time and the circuit breaker remains closed.
7.6.2
The operation of LOVPTUV function is based on line voltage measurement. The function is provided with a logic, which automatically recognises if the line was restored for at least tRestore before starting the tTrip timer. All three phases are required to be low before the output TRIP is activated. Start is available on output START. Additionally, the function is automatically blocked if only one or two phase voltages have been detected low for more than tBlock. The LOVPTUV function operates again only if the line has been restored to full voltage for at least tRestore. Operation of the function is also inhibited by fuse failure and open circuit breaker information signals, by their connection to dedicated inputs of the function block. Due to undervoltage conditions being continuous the trip pulse is limited to a length set by setting tPulse. The operation of the function is supervised by the fuse-failure function (VTSU input) and the information about the open position (CBOPEN) of the associated circuit breaker. The BLOCK input can be connected to a binary input of the terminal in order to receive a block command from external devices or can be software connected to other internal functions of the terminal itself in order to receive a block command from internal functions. The function is also blocked when the IED is in TEST status and the function has been blocked from the HMI test menu. (BlockLOV=Yes).
RED 670
419
LOV - LOSS OF VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION

TEST TEST-ACTIVE
&
BlockLOV = Yes
LOV--BLOCK
>1
Function Enable tTrip tPulse
LOV-START
STUL1N STUL2N STUL3N Latched Enable
& &
LOVTRIP
only 1 or 2 phases are low for at least 10 s (not three)
&
tBlock
>1
LOV--CBOPEN LOV--VTSU
>1
Reset Enable
&
>1
tRestore t
Set Enable Line restored for at least 3 s
>1
en07000089.vsd
Figure 211:
Simplified diagram of loss of voltage check protection function
7.6.3
Function block
LOV1LOVPTUV_27 U3P BLOCK CBOPEN VTSU TRIP START
en07000039.vsd
Figure 212:
LOV function block
7.6.4
420

Table 244:
Signal U3P BLOCK CBOPEN VTSU
Input signals for the LOVPTUV_27 (LOV1-) function block

Description Voltage connection Block the all outputs Circuit breaker open Block from voltage circuit supervision
Table 245:
Signal TRIP START
Output signals for the LOVPTUV_27 (LOV1-) function block

Description Trip signal Start signal
7.6.5
Setting parameters
Table 246:
Parameter Operation UBase UPE
Basic parameter group settings for the LOVPTUV_27 (LOV1-) function

Range Off On 0.1 - 9999.9 1 - 100 Step 0.1 1 Default Off 400.0 70 Unit kV %UB Description Operation Off/On Base voltage Operate voltagein% of base voltage Ubase Operate time delay
tTrip
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
7.000
Table 247:
Parameter tPulse tBlock
Advanced parameter group settings for the LOVPTUV_27 (LOV1-) function

Range 0.050 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 0.001 Default 0.150 5.000 Unit s s Description Duration of TRIP pulse Time delay to block when all 3ph voltages are not low Time delay for enable the function after restoration
tRestore
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
3.000
7.6.6
Technical data
RED 670
421
Table 248:
Function Operate voltage Pulse timer Timer
Loss of voltage check (PTUV, 27)

Range or value (0100)% of Ubase (0.05060.000) s (0.00060.000) s Accuracy 0.5% of Ur 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms
422
RED 670
Section 8 Frequency protection
Section 8
Frequency protection
About this chapter
This chapter describes the frequency protection functions. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data are included for each function.
8.1
Underfrequency protection (PTUF, 81)

Function block name: TUFxANSI number: 81 IEC 61850 logical node name: SAPTUF IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
f<
8.1.1
Introduction
Underfrequency occurs as a result of lack of generation in the network. The function can be used for load shedding systems, remedial action schemes, gas turbine start-up etc. The function is provided with an undervoltage blocking. The operation may be based on single phase, phase-to-phase or positive sequence voltage measurement. Up to two independent under frequency steps are available.
8.1.2
The underfrequency (TUF) function is used to detect low power system frequency. The function can either have a definite time delay or a voltage magnitude dependent time delay. If the voltage magnitude dependent time delay is applied the time delay will be longer if the voltage is higher and shorter if the voltage is lower. If the frequency remains below the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted trip due to uncertain frequency measurement at low voltage magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available, i.e. if the voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage the function is blocked and no start or trip signal is issued.
RED 670
423
8.1.2.1
The fundamental frequency of the measured input voltage is measured continuously, and compared with the set value, StartFrequency. The frequency function is also dependent on the voltage magnitude. If the voltage magnitude decreases the setting IntBlkStVal, the underfrequency function is blocked, and the output BLKDMAGN is issued. All voltage settings are made in percent of the setting UBase, which should be set as a phase-phase voltage in kV. To avoid oscillations of the output start signal, a hysteresis has been included.
8.1.2.2
Time delay
The time delay for the underfrequency function can be either a settable definite time delay or a voltage magnitude dependent time delay, where the time delay depends on the voltage level; a high voltage level gives a longer time delay and a low voltage level causes a short time delay. For the definite time delay, the setting tTrip sets the time delay For the voltage dependent time delay the measured voltage level and the settings UNom, UMin, Exponent, tMax and tMin set the time delay according to figure 213 and equation 130. The setting TimerOperation is used to decide what type of time delay to apply. The output STARTDUR, gives the time elapsed from the issue of the start output, in percent of the total operation time available in PST. Trip signal issuing requires that the underfrequency condition continues for at least the user set time delay. If the start condition, with respect to the measured frequency ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time, tReset, the start output is reset, after that the defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the start condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area. On the output of the underfrequency function a 100 ms pulse is issued, after a time delay corresponding to the setting of TimeDlyRestore, when the measured frequency returns to the level corresponding to the setting RestoreFreq.
8.1.2.3
Voltage dependent time delay

Since the fundamental frequency in a power system is the same all over the system, except some deviations during power oscillations, another criterion is needed to decide, where to take actions, based on low frequency. In many applications the voltage level is very suitable, and in most cases is load shedding preferable in areas with low voltage. Therefore, a voltage dependent time delay has been introduced, to make sure that load shedding, or other actions, take place at the right location. At constant voltage, U, the voltage dependent time delay is calculated according to equation 130. At non-constant voltage, the actual time delay is integrated in a similar
424
RED 670
way as for the inverse time characteristic for the undervoltage and overvoltage functions.
U - UMin t= UNom - UMin
Exponent
( tMax - tMin ) + tMin
(Equation 130)
where: t U Exponent tMax, tMin is the voltage dependent time delay (at constant voltage), is the measured voltage is a setting, are time settings.
UMin, UNom are voltage settings corresponding to
The inverse time characteristics are shown in figure 213, for:

UMin UNom tMax tMin Exponent = 90% = 100% = 1.0 s = 0.0 s = 0, 1, 2, 3 and 4
TimeDlyOperate [s]
Exponenent 3
0.5
1 2
90
95
100
U [% of UBase]
en05000075.vsd
Figure 213:
Voltage dependent inverse time characteristics for the underfrequency function. The time delay to operate is plotted as a function of the measured voltage, for the Exponent = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 respectively.
8.1.2.4
Blocking
The underfrequency function can be partially or totally blocked, by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:
RED 670
425
BLOCK: BLKTRIP: BLKREST:
blocks all outputs blocks the TRIP output blocks the RESTORE output
If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlkStVal, both the start and the trip outputs, are blocked.
8.1.2.5
Design
The frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the positive sequence voltage and compares it to the setting StartFrequency. The frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to switchings and faults. The time integrator can operate either due to a definite delay time or to the special voltage dependent delay time. When the frequency has returned back to the setting of RestoreFreq, the RESTORE output is issued after the time delay TimeDlyRestore. The design of the underfrequency function is schematically described in figure 214.
Block OR Comparator U < IntBlockLevel BLOCK BLKDMAGN
Voltage
Time integrator TimerOperation Mode Selector TimeDlyOperate TimeDlyReset START TRIP Start & Trip Output Logic START
Frequency
Comparator f < StartFrequency
TRIP
100 ms Comparator f > RestoreFreq TimeDlyRestore RESTORE
en05000726.vsd
Figure 214:
Schematic design of the underfrequency function
426
RED 670
Section 8 Frequency protection 8.1.3 Function block

TUF1SAPTUF_81 U3P BLOCK BLKTRIP BLKREST TRIP START RESTORE BLKDMAGN Frequency en06000279.vsd
Figure 215:
TUF function block
8.1.4

Table 249:
Signal U3P BLOCK BLKTRIP BLKREST
Input signals for the SAPTUF_81 (TUF1-) function block

Description Voltage connection Block of function Blocking operate output. Blocking restore output.
Table 250:
Signal TRIP START RESTORE BLKDMAGN Frequency
Output signals for the SAPTUF_81 (TUF1-) function block

Description Operate/trip signal for frequency. Start/pick-up signal for frequency. Restore signal for load restoring purposes. Blocking indication due to low amplitude. Measured frequency
8.1.5
Setting parameters
Table 251:
Parameter Operation UBase StartFrequency IntBlockLevel
Basic parameter group settings for the SAPTUF_81 (TUF1-) function

Range Off On 0.05 - 2000.00 35.00 - 75.00 0 - 100 Step 0.05 0.01 1 Default Off 400.00 48.80 50 Unit kV Hz %UB Description Operation Off / On Base voltage Frequency setting/ start value. Internal blocking level in % of UBase.
RED 670
427

Parameter TimeDlyOperate Range 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.200 Unit s Description Operate time delay in over/under-frequency mode. Time delay for reset. Restore time delay. Restore frequency if frequency is above frequency value. Setting for choosing timer mode. Nominal voltage in % of UBase for voltage based timer. Lower operation limit in % of UBase for voltage based timer. For calculation of the curve form for voltage based timer. Maximum time operation limit for voltage based timer. Minimum time operation limit for voltage based timer.
TimeDlyReset TimeDlyRestore RestoreFreq
0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 45.00 - 65.00
0.001 0.001 0.01
0.000 0.000 50.10
s s Hz
TimerOperation UNom
Definite timer Volt based timer 50 - 150
Definite timer 100
%UB
UMin
50 - 150
90
%UB
Exponent
1.0
0.1
0.0 - 5.0
tMax
0.010 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
tMin
0.010 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
8.1.6
Technical data
Table 252:
Function Operate value, start function Operate time, start function Reset time, start function Operate time, definite time function Reset time, definite time function Voltage dependent time delay
U - UMin t= UNom - UMin
Exponent
Underfrequency protection (PTUF, 81)

Range or value (35.00-75.00) Hz 100 ms typically 100 ms typically (0.000-60.000)s (0.000-60.000)s Settings: UNom=(50-150)% of Ubase UMin=(50-150)% of Ubase Exponent=0.0-5.0 tMax=(0.000-60.000)s tMin=(0.000-60.000)s Accuracy 2.0 mHz 0.5% + 10 ms 0.5% + 10 ms Class 5 + 200 ms
( tMax - tMin ) + tMin
U=Umeasured
8.2
428
Overfrequency protection (PTOF, 81)

Function block name: TOFxANSI number: 81 IEC 61850 logical node name: SAPTOF
f>
8.2.1
Introduction
Overfrequency will occur at sudden load drops or shunt faults in the power network. In some cases close to generating part governor problems can also cause overfrequency. The function can be used for generation shedding, remedial action schemes etc. It can also be used as a sub-nominal frequency stage initiating load restoring. The function is provided with an undervoltage blocking. The operation may be based on single phase, phase-to-phase or positive sequence voltage measurement.
8.2.2
The Overfrequency (TOF) function is used to detect high power system frequency. The function has a settable definite time delay. If the frequency remains above the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted trip due to uncertain frequency measurement at low voltage magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available, i.e. if the voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage the function is blocked and no start or trip signal is issued.
8.2.2.1
The fundamental frequency of the positive sequence voltage is measured continuously, and compared with the set value, StartFrequency. The frequency function is also dependent on the voltage magnitude. If the voltage magnitude decreases below the setting IntBlkStVal, the overfrequency function is blocked, and the output BLKDMAGN is issued. All voltage settings are made in percent of the UBase, which should be set as a phase-phase voltage in kV. To avoid oscillations of the output start signal, a hysteresis has been included.
8.2.2.2
Time delay
The time delay for the overfrequency function is a settable definite time delay, specified by the setting tTrip. The output STARTDUR, gives the time elapsed from the issue of the start output, in percent of the total operation time available in PST.
RED 670
429
Trip signal issuing requires that the overfrequency condition continues for at least the user set time delay. If the start condition, with respect to the measured frequency ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time, tReset, the start output is reset, after that the defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the start condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area.
8.2.2.3
Blocking
The overfrequency function can be partially or totally blocked, by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:
TOF-BLOCK: TOF-BLKTRIP: blocks all outputs blocks the TOF-TRIP output
If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlkStVal, both the start and the trip outputs, are blocked.
8.2.2.4
Design
The frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the positive sequence voltage and compares it to the setting StartFrequency. The frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to switchings and faults in the power system. The time integrator operates due to a definite delay time. The design of the overfrequency function is schematically described in figure 216.
430
RED 670
BLOCK BLKTRIP Comparator U < IntBlockLevel OR BLOCK BLKDMAGN
Voltage
Time integrator Definite Time Delay START Comparator f > StartFrequency
Start & Trip Output Logic
START
Frequency
TimeDlyOperate TRIP TimeDlyReset TRIP
en05000735.vsd
Figure 216:
Schematic design of the overfrequency function
8.2.3
Function block
TOF1SAPTOF_81 U3P BLOCK BLKTRIP TRIP START BLKDMAGN Frequency en06000280.vsd
Figure 217:
TOF function block
8.2.4

Table 253:
Signal U3P BLOCK BLKTRIP
Input signals for the SAPTOF_81 (TOF1-) function block

Description Voltage connection Block of function Blocking operate output.
RED 670
431
Table 254:
Signal TRIP START BLKDMAGN Frequency
Output signals for the SAPTOF_81 (TOF1-) function block

Description Operate/trip signal for frequency. Start/pick-up signal for frequency. Blocking indication due to low amplitude. Measured frequency
8.2.5
Setting parameters
Table 255:
Parameter Operation UBase StartFrequency IntBlockLevel TimeDlyOperate
Basic parameter group settings for the SAPTOF_81 (TOF1-) function

Range Off On 0.05 - 2000.00 35.00 - 75.00 0 - 100 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.05 0.01 1 0.001 Default Off 400.00 51.20 50 0.000 Unit kV Hz %UB s Description Operation Off / On Base voltage Frequency setting/ start value. Internal blocking level in % of UBase. Operate time delay in over/under-frequency mode. Time delay for reset.
TimeDlyReset
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
8.2.6
Technical data
Table 256:
Function Operate value, start function Operate time, start function Reset time, start function Operate time, definite time function Reset time, definite time function
Overfrequency protection (PTOF, 81)

Range or value (35.00-75.00) Hz 100 ms typically 100 ms typically (0.000-60.000)s (0.000-60.000)s Accuracy 2.0 mHz 0.5% + 10 ms 0.5% + 10 ms
8.3
Rate-of-change frequency protection (PFRC, 81)
432
RED 670
Function block name: RCFxANSI number: 81 IEC 61850 logical node name: SAPFRC
df/dt > <
8.3.1
Introduction
Rate of change of frequency function gives an early indication of a main disturbance in the system. The function can be used for generation shedding, load shedding, remedial action schemes etc. The function is provided with an undervoltage blocking. The operation may be based on single phase, phase-to-phase or positive sequence voltage measurement. Each step can discriminate between positive or negative change of frequency.
8.3.2
The rate-of-change of frequency (RCF) function is used to detect fast power system frequency changes, increase as well as decrease, at an early stage. The function has a settable definite time delay. If the rate-of-change of frequency remains below the set value, for negative rate-of-change, for a time period equal to the chosen time delay, the trip signal is issued. If the rate-of-change of frequency remains above the set value, for positive rate-of-change, for a time period equal to the chosen time delay, the trip signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted trip due to uncertain frequency measurement at low voltage magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available, i.e. if the voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage, the function is blocked and no start or trip signal is issued. If the frequency recovers, after a frequency decrease, a restore signal is issued.
8.3.2.1
The rate-of-change of the fundamental frequency of the selected voltage is measured continuously, and compared with the set value, StartFreqGrad. The rate-of-change of frequency function is also dependent on the voltage magnitude. If the voltage magnitude decreases below the setting IntBlockLevel, the rate-of-change of frequency function is blocked, and the output BLKDMAGN is issued. The sign of the setting StartFreqGrad, controls if the rate-of-change of frequency function reacts on a positive or on a negative change in frequency. If the rate-of-change of frequency function is used for decreasing frequency, i.e. the setting StartFreqGrad has been given a negative value, and a trip signal has been issued, then a 100 ms pulse is issued on the RESTORE output, when the frequency recovers to a value higher than the
RED 670
433
setting RestoreFreq. A positive setting of StartFreqGrad, sets the rate-of-change of frequency function to start and trip for frequency increases. To avoid oscillations of the output start signal, a hysteresis has been included.
8.3.2.2
Time delay
The rate-of-change of frequency function has a settable definite time delay, tTrip. The output STARTDUR, gives the time elapsed from the issue of the start output, in percent of the total operation time. Trip signal issuing requires that the rate-of-change of frequency condition continues for at least the user set time delay, tTrip. If the start condition, with respect to the measured frequency ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time, tReset, the start output is reset, after that the defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the start condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back into the hysteresis area. The RESTORE output of the rate-of-change of frequency function is set, after a time delay equal to the setting of tRestore, when the measured frequency has returned to the level corresponding to RestoreFreq, after an issue of the TRIP output signal. If tRestore is set to 0.000 s the restore functionality is disabled, and no output will be given. The restore functionality is only active for lowering frequency conditions and the restore sequence is disabled if a new negative frequency gradient is detected during the restore period, defined by the settings RestoreFreq and tRestore.
8.3.2.3
Blocking
The rate-of-change of frequency function can be partially or totally blocked, by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:
BLOCK: BLKTRIP: BLKREST: blocks all outputs blocks the TRIP output blocks the RESTORE output
If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlockLevel, both the start and the trip outputs, are blocked.
8.3.2.4
Design
The rate-of-change of frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the selected voltage and compares it to the setting StartFreqGrad. The frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to power system switchings and faults. The time integrator operates with a definite delay time. When the frequency has returned back to the setting of RestoreFreq, the RESTORE output is issued after the time delay tRestore, if the TRIP signal has earlier been issued. The sign of the
434
RED 670
setting StartFreqGrad is essential, and controls if the function is used for raising or lowering frequency conditions. The design of the rate-of-change of frequency function is schematically described in figure 218.
BLOCK BLKTRIP BLKRESET OR Comparator U < IntBlockLevel Start & Trip Output Logic BLOCK BLKDMAGN
Voltage
Rate-of-Change of Frequency
Comparator If [StartFreqGrad<0 START AND df/dt < StartFreqGrad] OR [StartFreqGrad>0 AND df/dt > StartFreqGrad] Then START
Time integrator Definite Time Delay TimeDlyOperate TimeDlyReset
START
TRIP
100 ms Frequency Comparator f > RestoreFreq TimeDlyRestore RESTORE
en05000835.vsd
Figure 218:
Schematic design of the rate-of-change of frequency function
8.3.3
Function block
RCF1SAPFRC_81 U3P BLOCK BLKTRIP BLKREST TRIP START RESTORE BLKDMAGN en06000281.vsd
Figure 219:
RCF function block
8.3.4
RED 670
435
Table 257:
Signal U3P BLOCK BLKTRIP BLKREST
Input signals for the SAPFRC_81 (RCF1-) function block

Description Group signal for voltage input Block of function Blocking operate output. Blocking restore output.
Table 258:
Signal TRIP START RESTORE BLKDMAGN
Output signals for the SAPFRC_81 (RCF1-) function block

Description Operate/trip signal for frequencyGradient Start/pick-up signal for frequencyGradient Restore signal for load restoring purposes. Blocking indication due to low amplitude.
8.3.5
Setting parameters
Table 259:
Parameter Operation UBase
Basic parameter group settings for the SAPFRC_81 (RCF1-) function

Range Off On 0.05 - 2000.00 Step 0.05 Default Off 400.00 Unit kV Description Operation Off / On Base setting for the phase-phase voltage in kV Frequency gradient start value. Sign defines direction. Internal blocking level in % of UBase. Operate time delay in pos./neg. frequency gradient mode. Restore frequency if frequency is above frequency value (Hz) Restore time delay. Time delay for reset.
StartFreqGrad
-10.00 - 10.00
0.01
0.50
Hz/s
IntBlockLevel tTrip
0 - 100 0.000 - 60.000
1 0.001
50 0.200
%UB s
RestoreFreq
45.00 - 65.00
0.01
49.90
Hz
tRestore tReset
0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000
0.001 0.001
0.000 0.000
s s
8.3.6
Technical data
436
RED 670
Table 260:
Function
Rate-of-change frequency protection (PFRC, 81)

Range or value (-10.00-10.00) Hz/s (0-100)% of Ubase 100 ms typically Accuracy 10.0 mHz/s 1.0% of Ur -
Operate value, start function Operate value, internal blocking level Operate time, start function
RED 670
437
438
Section 9 Multipurpose protection
Section 9
Multipurpose protection
About this chapter
This chapter describes Multipurpose protection and includes the General current and voltage function. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data are included for each function.
9.1
General current and voltage protection (GAPC)

Function block name: GFxxANSI number: 46, 51, 67, 51N, 67N, 27, 59, 21, 40 IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
I<
I>
IEC 61850 logical node name: CVGAPC
U<
U>
9.1.1
Introduction
The function can be utilized as a negative sequence current protection detecting unsymmetrical conditions such as open phase or unsymmetrical faults. The function can also be used to improve phase selection for high resistive earth faults, outside the distance protection reach, for the transmission line. Three functions are used which measures the neutral current and each of the three phase voltages. This will give an independence from load currents and this phase selection will be used in conjunction with the detection of the earth fault from the directional earth fault protection function.
9.1.1.1
Inadvertent generator energization

When the generator is taken out of service, and non-rotating, there is a risk that the generator circuit breaker flashes over or is closed by mistake.
RED 670
439
To prevent damages on the generator or turbine, it is essential that high speed tripping is provided in case of inadvertent energization of the generator. This tripping should be almost instantaneous (< 100 ms). There is a risk that the current into the generator at inadvertent energization will be limited so that the normal overcurrent or underimpedance protection will not detect the dangerous situation. The delay of these protection functions might be too long. For big and important machines, fast protection against inadvertent energizing should, therefore, be included in the protective scheme.
9.1.2
9.1.2.1
Measured quantities within the function
The function is always connected to three-phase current and three-phase voltage input in the configuration tool, but it will always measure only one current and one voltage quantity selected by the end user in the setting tool. The user can select to measure one of the current quantities shown in table 261.
Table 261: Current selection for the GF function
Set value for the parameter CurrentInput Comment 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Phase1 Phase2 Phase3 PosSeq NegSeq 3ZeroSeq MaxPh MinPh UnbalancePh GF function will measure the phase L1 current phasor GF function will measure the phase L2 current phasor GF function will measure the phase L3 current phasor GF function will measure internally calculated positive sequence current phasor GF function will measure internally calculated negative sequence current phasor GF function will measure internally calculated zero sequence current phasor multiplied by factor 3 GF function will measure current phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude GF function will measure current phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude GF function will measure magnitude of unbalance current, which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the current phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude and current phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0 all the time GF function will measure the current phasor internally calculated as the vector difference between the phase L1 current phasor and phase L2 current phasor (i.e. IL1-IL2) GF function will measure the current phasor internally calculated as the vector difference between the phase L2 current phasor and phase L3 current phasor (i.e. IL2-IL3)
10
Phase1-Phase2
11
Phase2-Phase3
440
RED 670

Set value for the parameter CurrentInput Comment 12 Phase3-Phase1 GF function will measure the current phasor internally calculated as the vector difference between the phase L3 current phasor and phase L1 current phasor (i.e. IL3-IL1) GF function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the maximum magnitude GF function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the minimum magnitude GF function will measure magnitude of unbalance current, which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the ph-ph current phasor with maximum magnitude and ph-ph current phasor with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0 all the time
13 14 15
MaxPh-Ph MinPh-Ph UnbalancePh-Ph
The user can select to measure one of the voltage quantities shown in table 262:
Table 262: Voltage selection for the GF function
Comment GF function will measure the phase L1 voltage phasor GF function will measure the phase L2 voltage phasor GF function will measure the phase L3 voltage phasor GF function will measure internally calculated positive sequence voltage phasor GF function will measure internally calculated negative sequence voltage phasor. This voltage phasor will be intentionally rotated for 180 in order to enable easier settings for the directional feature when used. GF function will measure internally calculated zero sequence voltage phasor multiplied by factor 3. This voltage phasor will be intentionally rotated for 180 in order to enable easier settings for the directional feature when used. GF function will measure voltage phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude GF function will measure voltage phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude GF function will measure magnitude of unbalance voltage, which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the voltage phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude and voltage phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0 all the time GF function will measure the voltage phasor internally calculated as the vector difference between the phase L1 voltage phasor and phase L2 voltage phasor (i.e. UL1-UL2) GF function will measure the voltage phasor internally calculated as the vector difference between the phase L2 voltage phasor and phase L3 voltage phasor (i.e. UL2-UL3) GF function will measure the voltage phasor internally calculated as the vector difference between the phase L3 voltage phasor and phase L1 voltage phasor (i.e. UL3-UL1)
VoltageInput
1 2 3 4 5 Phase1 Phase2 Phase3 PosSeq -NegSeq
Set value for the parameter
-3ZeroSeq
7 8 9
MaxPh MinPh UnbalancePh
10
Phase1-Phase2
11
Phase2-Phase3
12
Phase3-Phase1
RED 670
441

Set value for the parameter MaxPh-Ph MinPh-Ph UnbalancePh-Ph
VoltageInput
13 14 15
Comment GF function will measure ph-ph voltage phasor with the maximum magnitude GF function will measure ph-ph voltage phasor with the minimum magnitude GF function will measure magnitude of unbalance voltage, which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the ph-ph voltage phasor with maximum magnitude and ph-ph voltage phasor with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0 all the time
It is important to notice that the voltage selection from table 262 is always applicable regardless the actual external VT connections. The three-phase VT inputs can be connected to IED as either three phase-to-ground voltages UL1, UL2 & UL3 or three phase-to-phase voltages UL1L2, UL2L3 & UL3L1). This information about actual VT connection is entered as a setting parameter for the pre-processing block, which will then take automatic care about it. The user can select one of the current quantities shown in table 263 for built-in current restraint feature:
Table 263: Restraint current selection for the GF function
Comment GF function will measure internally calculated positive sequence current phasor GF function will measure internally calculated negative sequence current phasor GF function will measure internally calculated zero sequence current phasor multiplied by factor 3 GF function will measure current phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude
Set value for the parameter RestrCurr 1 2 3 4 PosSeq NegSeq 3ZeroSeq MaxPh
9.1.2.2
Base quantities for GF function

The parameter settings for the base quantities, which represent the base (i.e. 100%) for pickup levels of all measuring stages shall be entered as setting parameters for every GF function. Base current shall be entered as: 1. 2. rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes, when the measured Current Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 261. rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes multiplied by 3 (i.e. 1,732 x Iphase), when the measured Current Quantity is selected from 10 to 15, as shown in table 261.
Base voltage shall be entered as: 442 Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B RED 670
1. 2.
rated phase-to-ground voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the measured Voltage Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 262. rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the measured Voltage Quantity is selected from 10 to 15, as shown in table 262.
9.1.2.3
Built-in overcurrent protection steps

Two overcurrent protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and therefore only one will be explained here. Overcurrent step simply compares the magnitude of the measured current quantity (see table 261) with the set pickup level. Non-directional overcurrent step will pickup if the magnitude of the measured current quantity is bigger than this set level. Reset ratio is settable, with default value of 0.96. However depending on other enabled built-in features this overcurrent pickup might not cause the overcurrent step start signal. Start signal will only come if all of the enabled built-in features in the overcurrent step are fulfilled at the same time.
Second harmonic feature
The overcurrent protection step can be restrained by a second harmonic component in the measured current quantity (see table 261). However it shall be noted that this feature is not applicable when one of the following measured currents is selected: PosSeq (i.e. positive sequence current) NegSeq (i.e. negative sequence current) UnbalancePh (i.e. unbalance phase current) UnbalancePh-Ph (i.e. unbalance ph-ph current)
This feature will simple prevent overcurrent step start if the second-to-first harmonic ratio in the measured current exceeds the set level. The overcurrent protection step operation can be can be made dependent on the relevant phase angle between measured current phasor (see table 261) and measured voltage phasor (see table 262). In protection terminology it means that the PGPF function can be made directional by enabling this built-in feature. In that case overcurrent protection step will only operate if the current flow is in accordance with the set direction (i.e. Forward, which means towards the protected object, or Reverse, which means from the protected object). For this feature it is of the outmost importance to understand that the measured voltage phasor (see table 262) and measured current phasor (see table 261) will be used for directional decision. Therefore it is the sole responsibility of the end user to select the appropriate current and voltage signals in order to get a proper directional decision. The PGPF function will NOT do this automatically. It will just simply use the current and voltage phasors selected by the end user to check for the directional criteria. Table 264 gives an overview of the typical choices (but not the only possible ones) for these two quantities for traditional directional relays. RED 670 Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B 443
Directional feature
Table 264:
Typical current and voltage choices for directional feature

Comment Directional positive sequence overcurrent function is obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from -45 to -90 depending on the power Directional negative sequence overcurrent function is obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from -45 to -90 depending on the power system voltage level (i.e. X/R ratio) Directional zero sequence overcurrent function is obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from 0 to -90 depending on the power system earthing (i.e. solidly earthed, earthed via resistor, etc.) Directional overcurrent function for the first phase is obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30 or +45 Directional overcurrent function for the second phase is obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30 or +45 Directional overcurrent function for the third phase is obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30 or +45
Set value for the Set value for the parameter CurrentInput parameter
VoltageInput
PosSeq
PosSeq
NegSeq
-NegSeq
3ZeroSeq
-3ZeroSeq
Phase1 Phase2 Phase3
Phase2-Phase3 Phase3-Phase1 Phase1-Phase2
Unbalance current or voltage measurement shall not be used when the directional feature is enabled. Two types of directional measurement principles are available, I & U and IcosPhi&U. The first principle, referred to as "I & U" in the parameter setting tool, checks that: the magnitude of the measured current is bigger than the set pick-up level the phasor of the measured current is within the operating region (defined by the relay operate angle, ROADir parameter setting; see figure 220).
RCADir Ipickup ROADir I=3Io
U=-3U0
Operate region mta line

en05000252.vsd
Figure 220:
where:
I & U directional operating principle for the GF function
RCADir is -75
444
RED 670
ROADir is 50
The second principle, referred to as "IcosPhi&U" in the parameter setting tool, checks that: that the product Icos() is bigger than the set pick-up level, where is angle between the current phasor and the mta line that the phasor of the measured current is within the operating region (defined by the Icos() straight line and the relay operate angle, ROADir parameter setting; see figure 220).
RCADir Ipickup ROADir F I=3Io
U=-3U0
Operate region mta line
en05000253.vsd
Figure 221:
where: RCADir is -75 ROADir is 50
GF, IcosPhi&U directional operating principle
Note that it is possible to decide by a parameter setting how the directional feature shall behave when the magnitude of the measured voltage phasor falls below the preset value. User can select one of the following three options: Non-directional (i.e. operation allowed for low magnitude of the reference voltage) Block (i.e. operation prevented for low magnitude of the reference voltage) Memory (i.e. memory voltage shall be used to determine direction of the current)
It shall also be noted that the memory duration is limited in the algorithm to 100 ms. After that time the current direction will be locked to the one determined during memory time and it will re-set only if the current fails below set pickup level or voltage goes above set voltage memory limit.
RED 670
445

Voltage restraint/control feature
The overcurrent protection step operation can be can be made dependent of a measured voltage quantity (see table 262). Practically then the pickup level of the overcurrent step is not constant but instead decreases with the decrease in the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity. Two different types of dependencies are available: Voltage restraint overcurrent (when setting parameter VDepMode_OC1=Slope)
OC1 Stage Pickup Level
StartCurr_OC1
VDepFact_OC1 * StartCurr_OC1
ULowLimit_OC1
UHighLimit_OC1 Selected Voltage Magnitude

en05000324.vsd
Figure 222:
Example for OC1 step current pickup level variation as function of measured voltage magnitude in Slope mode of operation
446
RED 670
Voltage controlled overcurrent (when setting parameter VDepMode_OC1=Step has value = step)
OC1 Stage Pickup Level
StartCurr_OC1
VDepFact_OC1 * StartCurr_OC1
UHighLimit_OC1
Selected Voltage Magnitude

en05000323.vsd
Figure 223:
Example for OC1 step current pickup level variation as function of measured voltage magnitude in Step mode of operation
This feature will simple change the set overcurrent pickup level in accordance with magnitude variations of the measured voltage. It shall be noted that this feature will as well affect the pickup current value for calculation of operate times for IDMT curves (i.e. overcurrent with IDMT curve will operate faster during low voltage conditions).
Current restraint feature
The overcurrent protection step operation can be can be made dependent of a restraining current quantity (see table 263). Practically then the pickup level of the overcurrent step is not constant but instead increases with the increase in the magnitude of the restraining current.
RED 670
447
IMeasured
pe O
IsetHigh
te ra
ea ar
ff oe trC es I>R
tr es *Ir
ain
IsetLow
atan(RestrCoeff) Restraint
en05000255.vsd
Figure 224:
Current pickup variation with restraint current magnitude
This feature will simple prevent overcurrent step to start if the magnitude of the measured current quantity is smaller than the set percentage of the restrain current magnitude. However this feature will not affect the pickup current value for calculation of operate times for IDMT curves. This means that the IDMT curve operate time will not be influenced by the restrain current magnitude. When set, the start signal will start definite time delay or inverse (i.e. IDMT) time delay in accordance with the end user setting. If the start signal has value one for longer time than the set time delay, the overcurrent step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of the start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the end user setting.
9.1.2.4
Built-in undercurrent protection steps

Two undercurrent protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and therefore only one will be explained here. Undercurrent step simply compares the magnitude of the measured current quantity (see table 261) with the set pickup level. The undercurrent step will pickup and set its start signal to one if the magnitude of the measured current quantity is smaller than this set level. The start signal will start definite time delay with set time delay. If the start signal has value one for longer time than the set time delay the undercurrent step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of the start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the setting.
9.1.2.5
Built-in overvoltage protection steps

Two overvoltage protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and therefore only one will be explained here.
448
RED 670
Overvoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity (see table 262) with the set pickup level. The overvoltage step will pickup if the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity is bigger than this set level. Reset ratio is settable, with default value of 0.99. The start signal will start definite time delay or inverse (i.e. IDMT) time delay in accordance with the end user setting. If the start signal has value one for longer time than the set time delay, the overvoltage step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of the start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the end user setting.
9.1.2.6
Built-in undervoltage protection steps

Two undervoltage protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and therefore only one will be explained here. Undervoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity (see table 262 with the set pickup level. The undervoltage step will pickup if the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity is smaller than this set level. Reset ratio is settable, with default value of 1.01. The start signal will start definite time delay or inverse (i.e. IDMT) time delay in accordance with the end user setting. If the start signal has value one for longer time than the set time delay, the undervoltage step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of the start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the end user setting.
9.1.2.7
Inadvertent generator energization

The inadvertent energization function is realized by means of the general current and voltage protection function (CAGVPC). The function is configured as shown in figure 225.
RED 670
449
CVGAPC 3IP 3UP TROC1
TROV1 1 TRUV1 BLKOC1
en06000497.vsd
Figure 225:
Configuration of the inadvertent energization function
The setting of the general current and voltage function (typical values) is done as shown in table 265.
Table 265: The setting of the general current and voltage function
Measured Quantity Undervoltage U< Overvoltage U> Overcurrent I> Maximum generator Phase to Phase voltage Maximum generator Phase to Phase voltage Maximum generator Phase current Pickup in % of generator Time delay in seconds rating < 70% > 85% > 50% 10.0 s 1.0 s 0.05 s
In normal operation the overvoltage trip signal is activated and the undervotage trip signal is deactivated. This means that the overcurrent function is blocked. When the generator is taken out of service the generator voltage gets low. The overvoltage trip signal will be deactivated and the undervoltage trip signal will be activated after the set delay. At this moment the block signal to the overcurrent function will be deactivated.
450
RED 670
It the generator is energized at stand still conditions, i.e. when the voltage is zero, the overcurrent function will operate after the short set delay if the generator current is larger than the set value. When the generator is started the overvoltage trip signal will be activared the set time delay after the moment when the voltage has reached the set value. At this moment the blocking of the overcurrent function is activated. The delay of the undervoltage function will prevent false operation at short circuits in the external power grid.
9.1.2.8
Logic diagram
The simplified internal logics, for the PGPF function are shown in the following figures.
REx670
ADM PGPF function
Current and voltage selection settings
Phasor calculation of individual currents
A/D conversion scaling with CT ratio
Phasors & samples
Selection of which current and voltage shall be given to the built-in protection elements
Selected current Selected voltage
Restraint current selection
A/D conversion scaling with CT ratio
Phasor calculation of individual voltages
Selection of restraint current
Selected restraint current
Phasors & samples
en05000169.vsd
Figure 226:
Treatment of measured currents within IED for PGPF function
Figure 226 shows how internal treatment of measured currents is done for multipurpose protection function The following currents and voltages are inputs to the multipurpose protection function. They must all be expressed in true power system (primary) Amperes and kilovolts.
RED 670
451
1. 2. 3.
Instantaneous values (samples) of currents & voltages from one three-phase current and one three-phase voltage input. Fundamental frequency phasors from one three-phase current and one threephase voltage input calculated by the pre-processing modules. Sequence currents & voltages from one three-phase current and one three-phase voltage input calculated by the pre-processing modules.
The multipurpose protection function: 1. 2. 3. Selects one current from the three phase input system (see table "") for internally measured current. Selects one voltage from the three phase input system (see table "") for internally measured voltage. Selects one current from the three phase input system (see table "") for internally measured restraint current.
452
RED 670
CURRENT
UC1 2
Selected current
nd
Harmonic restraint
TRUC1
UC2 2nd Harmonic restraint OC1 2nd Harmonic restraint Current restraint Directionality Voltage control / restraint 1
STUC2 TRUC2
STOC1 TROC1 BLK2ND DIROC1
Selected restraint current
OC2 2nd Harmonic restraint Current restraint Directionality Voltage control / restraint 1
STOC2 TROC2
UDIRLOW DIROC2
STOV1
OV1
TROV1 STOV2
OV2
Selected voltage
TROV2 STUV1
UV1
TRUV1 STUV2
UV2
TRUV2
VOLTAGE
en05000170.vsd
Figure 227:
PGPF function main logic diagram for built in protection elements
RED 670
453
Logic in figure 227 can be summarized as follows: 1. 2. 3. The selected currents and voltage are given to built-in protection elements. Each protection element and step makes independent decision about status of its START and TRIP output signals. More detailed internal logic for every protection element is given in the following four figures Common START and TRIP signals from all built-in protection elements & steps (internal OR logic) are available from multipurpose function as well.
Enable second harmonic
Second harmonic check
DEF time selected
DEF
OR
BLKTROC 1
AND
TROC1
Selected current
a b
a>b
OC1=On BLKOC1
StartCurr_OC1
AND
STOC1
Inverse Voltage control or restraint feature Directionality check DIR_OK Inverse time selected
Selected voltage
Selected restrain current
Current Restraint Feature Imeasured > k Irestraint
en05000831.vsd
Figure 228:
Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first overcurrent step i.e. OC1 (step OC2 has the same internal logic)
454
RED 670
Bin input: BLKUC1TR
Selected current
a b
b>a
DEF
AND
TRUC1
StartCurr_UC1
AND
Operation_UC1=On Bin input: BLKUC1
STUC1
en05000750.vsd
Figure 229:
Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first undercurrent step i.e. UC1 (step UC2 has the same internal logic)
DEF time selected Selected voltage

a b
DEF
BLKTROV1
AND
TROV1
OR
a>b
StartVolt_OV1
AND
Inverse
STOV1
Operation_OV1=On BLKOV1 Inverse time selected
en05000751.vsd
Figure 230:
Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first overvoltage step i.e.OV1 (step OV2 has the same internal logic)
RED 670
455
DEF time selected Selected voltage

a b
DEF OR
BLKTRUV 1
AND
TRUV1
b>a
StartVolt_UV1
AND Inverse
STUV1
Operation_UV1=On BLKUV1 Inverse time selected
en05000752.vsd
Figure 231:
Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first undervoltage step i.e.UV1 (step UV2 has the same internal logic)
9.1.3
Function block
GF01CVGAPC I3P U3P BLOCK BLKOC1 BLKOC1TR ENMLTOC1 BLKOC2 BLKOC2TR ENMLTOC2 BLKUC1 BLKUC1TR BLKUC2 BLKUC2TR BLKOV1 BLKOV1TR BLKOV2 BLKOV2TR BLKUV1 BLKUV1TR BLKUV2 BLKUV2TR TRIP TROC1 TROC2 TRUC1 TRUC2 TROV1 TROV2 TRUV1 TRUV2 START STOC1 STOC2 STUC1 STUC2 STOV1 STOV2 STUV1 STUV2 BLK2ND DIROC1 DIROC2 UDIRLOW CURRENT ICOSFI VOLTAGE UIANGLE en05000372.vsd
Figure 232:
GF function block
9.1.4
456
RED 670
Table 266:
Signal I3P U3P BLOCK BLKOC1 BLKOC1TR ENMLTOC1 BLKOC2 BLKOC2TR ENMLTOC2 BLKUC1 BLKUC1TR BLKUC2 BLKUC2TR BLKOV1 BLKOV1TR BLKOV2 BLKOV2TR BLKUV1 BLKUV1TR BLKUV2 BLKUV2TR
Input signals for the CVGAPC (GF01-) function block

Description Group signal for current input Group signal for voltage input Block of function Block of over current function OC1 Block of trip for over current function OC1 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for OC1 Block of over current function OC2 Block of trip for over current function OC2 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for OC2 Block of under current function UC1 Block of trip for under current function UC1 Block of under current function UC2 Block of trip for under current function UC2 Block of over voltage function OV1 Block of trip for over voltage function OV1 Block of over voltage function OV2 Block of trip for over voltage function OV2 Block of under voltage function UV1 Block of trip for under voltage function UV1 Block of under voltage function UV2 Block of trip for under voltage function UV2
Table 267:
Signal TRIP TROC1 TROC2 TRUC1 TRUC2 TROV1 TROV2 TRUV1 TRUV2 START STOC1 STOC2 STUC1
Output signals for the CVGAPC (GF01-) function block

Description General trip signal Trip signal from overcurrent function OC1 Trip signal from overcurrent function OC2 Trip signal from undercurrent function UC1 Trip signal from undercurrent function UC2 Trip signal from overvoltage function OV1 Trip signal from overvoltage function OV2 Trip signal from undervoltage function UV1 Trip signal from undervoltage function UV2 General start signal Start signal from overcurrent function OC1 Start signal from overcurrent function OC2 Start signal from undercurrent function UC1
RED 670
457

Signal STUC2 STOV1 STOV2 STUV1 STUV2 BLK2ND DIROC1 DIROC2 UDIRLOW CURRENT ICOSFI VOLTAGE UIANGLE Description Start signal from undercurrent function UC2 Start signal from overvoltage function OV1 Start signal from overvoltage function OV2 Start signal from undervoltage function UV1 Start signal from undervoltage function UV2 Block from second harmonic detection Directional mode of OC1 (nondir, forward,reverse) Directional mode of OC2 (nondir, forward,reverse) Low voltage for directional polarization Measured current value Measured current multiplied with cos (Phi) Measured voltage value Angle between voltage and current
9.1.5
Setting parameters
Table 268:
Parameter Operation CurrentInput
Basic parameter group settings for the CVGAPC (GF01-) function

Range Off On phase1 phase2 phase3 PosSeq NegSeq 3*ZeroSeq MaxPh MinPh UnbalancePh phase1-phase2 phase2-phase3 phase3-phase1 MaxPh-Ph MinPh-Ph UnbalancePh-Ph 1 - 99999 Step Default Off MaxPh Unit Description Operation Off / On Select current signal which will be measured inside function
IBase
3000
Base Current
458
RED 670

Parameter VoltageInput Range phase1 phase2 phase3 PosSeq -NegSeq -3*ZeroSeq MaxPh MinPh UnbalancePh phase1-phase2 phase2-phase3 phase3-phase1 MaxPh-Ph MinPh-Ph UnbalancePh-Ph 0.05 - 2000.00 Off On 10.0 - 50.0 Step Default MaxPh Unit Description Select voltage signal which will be measured inside function
UBase OperHarmRestr
0.05 -
400.00 Off
kV -
Base Voltage Operation of 2nd harmonic restrain Off / On Ratio of second to fundamental current harmonic in % Harm analyse disabled above this current level in % of Ibase Enable current restrain function On / Off Select current signal which will be used for curr restrain Restraining current coefficient Relay Characteristic Angle Relay Operate Angle Below this level in % of Ubase setting ActLowVolt takes over Operation OC1 Off / On Operate current level for OC1 in % of Ibase
l_2nd/l_fund
1.0
20.0
BlkLevel2nd
10 - 5000
5000
%IB
EnRestrainCurr
Off On PosSeq NegSeq 3*ZeroSeq Max 0.00 -180 - 180 1 - 90 0.0 - 5.0
Off
RestrCurrInput
PosSeq
RestrCurrCoeff RCADir ROADir LowVolt_VM
0.01 1 1 0.1
0.00 - 5.00 -75 75 0.5
Deg Deg %UB
Operation_OC1 StartCurr_OC1
Off On 2.0 - 5000.0
1.0
Off 120.0
%IB
RED 670
459

Parameter CurveType_OC1 Range ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Programmable RI type RD type 0.00 - 6000.00 Step Default ANSI Def. Time Unit Description Selection of time delay curve type for OC1
tDef_OC1
0.01
0.50
Independent (definitive) time delay of OC1 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for OC1 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves for OC1 Control mode for voltage controlled OC1 function Voltage dependent mode OC1 (step, slope) Multiplying factor for I pickup when OC1 is U dependent Voltage low limit setting OC1 in % of Ubase Voltage high limit setting OC1 in % of Ubase Enable block of OC1 by 2nd harmonic restrain Directional mode of OC1 (nondir, forward,reverse) Measuring on IandU or IcosPhiandU for OC1 Low voltage level action for Dir_OC1 (Nodir, Blk, Mem)
k_OC1
0.30
0.01
0.05 - 999.00
tMin_OC1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.05
VCntrlMode_OC1
Voltage control Input control Volt/Input control Off Step Slope 1.00
Off
VDepMode_OC1
Step
VDepFact_OC1
0.01
0.02 - 5.00
ULowLimit_OC1
1.0 - 200.0
0.1
50.0
%UB
UHighLimit_OC1
1.0 - 200.0
0.1
100.0
%UB
HarmRestr_OC1
Off On Non-directional Forward Reverse I&U IcosPhi&U Non-directional Block Memory
Off
DirMode_OC1
Non-directional
DirPrinc_OC1
I&U
ActLowVolt1_VM
Non-directional
460
RED 670

Parameter Operation_OC2 StartCurr_OC2 CurveType_OC2 Range Off On 2.0 - 5000.0 ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Programmable RI type RD type 0.00 - 6000.00 Step 1.0 Default Off 120.0 ANSI Def. Time Unit %IB Description Operation OC2 Off / On Operate current level for OC2 in % of Ibase Selection of time delay curve type for OC2
tDef_OC2
0.01
0.50
Independent (definitive) time delay of OC2 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for OC2 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves for OC2 Control mode for voltage controlled OC2 function Voltage dependent mode OC2 (step, slope) Multiplying factor for I pickup when OC2 is U dependent Voltage low limit setting OC2 in % of Ubase Voltage high limit setting OC2 in % of Ubase Enable block of OC2 by 2nd harmonic restrain Directional mode of OC2 (nondir, forward,reverse) Measuring on IandU or IcosPhiandU for OC2
k_OC2
0.30
0.01
0.05 - 999.00
tMin_OC2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.05
VCntrlMode_OC2
Voltage control Input control Volt/Input control Off Step Slope 1.00
Off
VDepMode_OC2
Step
VDepFact_OC2
0.01
0.02 - 5.00
ULowLimit_OC2
1.0 - 200.0
0.1
50.0
%UB
UHighLimit_OC2
1.0 - 200.0
0.1
100.0
%UB
HarmRestr_OC2
Off On Non-directional Forward Reverse I&U IcosPhi&U
Off
DirMode_OC2
Non-directional
DirPrinc_OC2
I&U
RED 670
461

Parameter ActLowVolt2_VM Range Non-directional Block Memory Off On Off On 0 - 150 Step Default Non-directional Unit Description Low voltage level action for Dir_OC2 (Nodir, Blk, Mem) Operation UC1 Off / On Enable internal low current level blocking for UC1 Internal low current blocking level for UC1 in % of Ibase Operate undercurrent level for UC1 in % of Ibase Independent (definitive) time delay of UC1 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve UC1 Enable block of UC1 by 2nd harmonic restrain Operation UC2 Off / On Enable internal low current level blocking for UC2 Internal low current blocking level for UC2 in % of Ibase Operate undercurrent level for UC2 in % of Ibase Independent (definitive) time delay of UC2 Enable block of UC2 by 2nd harmonic restrain Operation OV1 Off / On Operate voltage level for OV1 in % of Ubase Selection of time delay curve type for OV1
Operation_UC1 EnBlkLowI_UC1
Off Off
BlkLowCurr_UC1
20
%IB
StartCurr_UC1
2.0 - 150.0
1.0
70.0
%IB
tDef_UC1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.50
tResetDef_UC1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00
HarmRestr_UC1
Off On Off On Off On 0 - 150
Off
Operation_UC2 EnBlkLowI_UC2
Off Off
BlkLowCurr_UC2
20
%IB
StartCurr_UC2
2.0 - 150.0
1.0
70.0
%IB
tDef_UC2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.50
HarmRestr_UC2
Off On Off On 2.0 - 200.0 Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog. inv. curve 0.00 - 6000.00
Off
Operation_OV1 StartVolt_OV1 CurveType_OV1
0.1 -
Off 150.0 Definite time
%UB -
tDef_OV1
0.01
1.00
Operate time delay in sec for definite time use of OV1
462
RED 670

Parameter tMin_OV1 Range 0.00 - 6000.00 Step 0.01 Default 0.05 Unit s Description Minimum operate time for IDMT curves for OV1 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for OV1 Operation OV2 Off / On Operate voltage level for OV2 in % of Ubase Selection of time delay curve type for OV2
k_OV1
0.30
0.01
0.05 - 999.00
Operation_OV2 StartVolt_OV2 CurveType_OV2
Off On 2.0 - 200.0 Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog. inv. curve 0.00 - 6000.00
0.1 -
Off 150.0 Definite time
%UB -
tDef_OV2
0.01
1.00
Operate time delay in sec for definite time use of OV2 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves for OV2 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for OV2 Operation UV1 Off / On Operate undervoltage level for UV1 in % of Ubase Selection of time delay curve type for UV1 Operate time delay in sec for definite time use of UV1 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves for UV1 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for UV1 Enable internal low voltage level blocking for UV1 Internal low voltage blocking level for UV1 in % of Ubase Operation UV2 Off / On Operate undervoltage level for UV2 in % of Ubase
tMin_OV2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.05
k_OV2
0.30
0.01
0.05 - 999.00
Operation_UV1 StartVolt_UV1
Off On 2.0 - 150.0
0.1
Off 50.0
%UB
CurveType_UV1
Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Prog. inv. curve 0.00 - 6000.00
Definite time
tDef_UV1
0.01
1.00
tMin_UV1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.05
k_UV1
0.30
0.01
0.05 - 999.00
EnBlkLowV_UV1
Off On 0.0 - 5.0
On
BlkLowVolt_UV1
0.1
0.5
%UB
Operation_UV2 StartVolt_UV2
Off On 2.0 - 150.0
0.1
Off 50.0
%UB
RED 670
463

Parameter CurveType_UV2 Range Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Prog. inv. curve 0.00 - 6000.00 Step Default Definite time Unit Description Selection of time delay curve type for UV2 Operate time delay in sec for definite time use of UV2 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves for UV2 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for UV2 Enable internal low voltage level blocking for UV2 Internal low voltage blocking level for UV2 in % of Ubase
tDef_UV2
0.01
1.00
tMin_UV2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.05
k_UV2
0.30
0.01
0.05 - 999.00
EnBlkLowV_UV2
Off On 0.0 - 5.0
On
BlkLowVolt_UV2
0.1
0.5
%UB
Table 269:
Parameter CurrMult_OC1
Advanced parameter group settings for the CVGAPC (GF01-) function

Range 2.0 Step 0.1 Default 1.0 - 10.0 Unit Description Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for OC1 Selection of reset curve type for OC1 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve OC1 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for OC1 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for OC1 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for OC1 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for OC1 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for OC1
ResCrvType_OC1
Instantaneous
tResetDef_OC1
0.01
0.00
P_OC1
0.020
0.001
0.001 - 10.000
A_OC1
0.140
0.001
0.000 - 999.000
B_OC1
0.000
0.001
0.000 - 99.000
C_OC1
1.000
0.001
0.000 - 1.000
PR_OC1
0.500
0.001
0.005 - 3.000
464
RED 670

Parameter TR_OC1 Range 13.500 Step 0.001 Default 0.005 - 600.000 Unit Description Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for OC1 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for OC1 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for OC2 Selection of reset curve type for OC2 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve OC2 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for OC2 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for OC2 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for OC2 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for OC2 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for OC2 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for OC2 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for OC2 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve UC2 Selection of reset curve type for OV1
CR_OC1
1.0
0.1
0.1 - 10.0
CurrMult_OC2
2.0
0.1
1.0 - 10.0
ResCrvType_OC2
Instantaneous
tResetDef_OC2
0.01
0.00
P_OC2
0.020
0.001
0.001 - 10.000
A_OC2
0.140
0.001
0.000 - 999.000
B_OC2
0.000
0.001
0.000 - 99.000
C_OC2
1.000
0.001
0.000 - 1.000
PR_OC2
0.500
0.001
0.005 - 3.000
TR_OC2
13.500
0.001
0.005 - 600.000
CR_OC2
1.0
0.1
0.1 - 10.0
tResetDef_UC2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00
ResCrvType_OV1
Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.00 - 6000.00
Instantaneous
tResetDef_OV1
0.01
0.00
Reset time delay in sec for definite time use of OV1
RED 670
465

Parameter tResetIDMT_OV1 Range 0.00 - 6000.00 Step 0.01 Default 0.00 Unit s Description Reset time delay in sec for IDMT curves for OV1 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for OV1 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for OV1 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for OV1 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for OV1 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for OV1 Selection of reset curve type for OV2
A_OV1
0.140
0.001
0.005 - 999.000
B_OV1
1.000
0.001
0.500 - 99.000
C_OV1
1.000
0.001
0.000 - 1.000
D_OV1
0.000
0.001
0.000 - 10.000
P_OV1
0.020
0.001
0.001 - 10.000
ResCrvType_OV2
Instantaneous
tResetDef_OV2
0.01
0.00
Reset time delay in sec for definite time use of OV2 Reset time delay in sec for IDMT curves for OV2 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for OV2 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for OV2 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for OV2 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for OV2 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for OV2
tResetIDMT_OV2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00
A_OV2
0.140
0.001
0.005 - 999.000
B_OV2
1.000
0.001
0.500 - 99.000
C_OV2
1.000
0.001
0.000 - 1.000
D_OV2
0.000
0.001
0.000 - 10.000
P_OV2
0.020
0.001
0.001 - 10.000
466
RED 670

Parameter ResCrvType_UV1 Range Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.00 - 6000.00 Step Default Instantaneous Unit Description Selection of reset curve type for UV1
tResetDef_UV1
0.01
0.00
Reset time delay in sec for definite time use of UV1 Reset time delay in sec for IDMT curves for UV1 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for UV1 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for UV1 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for UV1 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for UV1 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for UV1 Selection of reset curve type for UV2
tResetIDMT_UV1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00
A_UV1
0.140
0.001
0.005 - 999.000
B_UV1
1.000
0.001
0.500 - 99.000
C_UV1
1.000
0.001
0.000 - 1.000
D_UV1
0.000
0.001
0.000 - 10.000
P_UV1
0.020
0.001
0.001 - 10.000
ResCrvType_UV2
Instantaneous
tResetDef_UV2
0.01
0.00
Reset time delay in sec for definite time use of UV2 Reset time delay in sec for IDMT curves for UV2 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for UV2 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for UV2
tResetIDMT_UV2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00
A_UV2
0.140
0.001
0.005 - 999.000
B_UV2
1.000
0.001
0.500 - 99.000
RED 670
467

Parameter C_UV2 Range 1.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.000 - 1.000 Unit Description Parameter C for customer programmable curve for UV2 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for UV2 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for UV2
D_UV2
0.000
0.001
0.000 - 10.000
P_UV2
0.020
0.001
0.001 - 10.000
9.1.6
Technical data
Table 270:
Function Measuring current input
General current and voltage protection (GAPC)

Range or value phase1, phase2, phase3, PosSeq, NegSeq, 3*ZeroSeq, MaxPh, MinPh, UnbalancePh, phase1-phase2, phase2phase3, phase3-phase1, MaxPh-Ph, MinPh-Ph, UnbalancePh-Ph (1 - 99999) A phase1, phase2, phase3, PosSeq, -NegSeq, -3*ZeroSeq, MaxPh, MinPh, UnbalancePh, phase1-phase2, phase2phase3, phase3-phase1, MaxPh-Ph, MinPh-Ph, UnbalancePh-Ph (0.05 - 2000.00) kV (2 - 5000)% of Ibase (2 - 150)% of Ibase (0.00 - 6000.00) s 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset Accuracy -
Base current Measuring voltage input
Base voltage Start overcurrent, step 1 and 2 Start undercurrent, step 1 and 2 Definite time delay Operate time start overcurrent Reset time start overcurrent Operate time start undercurrent Reset time start undercurrent Table continued on next page
1.0% of Ir for I<Ir 1.0% of I for I>Ir 1.0% of Ir for I<Ir 1.0% of I for I>Ir 0.5% 10 ms -
468
RED 670

Function See table 614 and table 615 Range or value Parameter ranges for customer defined characteristic no 17: k: 0.05 - 999.00 A: 0.0000 - 999.0000 B: 0.0000 - 99.0000 C: 0.0000 - 1.0000 P: 0.0001 - 10.0000 PR: 0.005 - 3.000 TR: 0.005 - 600.000 CR: 0.1 - 10.0 (0.0 - 5.0)% of Ubase (2.0 - 200.0)% of Ubase (2.0 - 150.0)% of Ubase 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Uset 25 ms typically 2 to 0 x Uset 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset (1.0 - 200.0)% of Ubase Settable: NonDir, forward and reverse (-180 to +180) degrees (1 to 90) degrees > 95% < 105% > 95% < 105% Accuracy See table 614 and table 615
Voltage level where voltage memory takes over Start overvoltage, step 1 and 2 Start undervoltage, step 1 and 2 Operate time, start overvoltage Reset time, start overvoltage Operate time start undervoltage Reset time start undervoltage High and low voltage limit, voltage dependent operation Directional function Relay characteristic angle Relay operate angle Reset ratio, overcurrent Reset ratio, undercurrent Reset ratio, overvoltage Reset ratio, undervoltage Overcurrent: Critical impulse time Impulse margin time Undercurrent: Critical impulse time Impulse margin time Overvoltage: Critical impulse time Impulse margin time Undervoltage: Critical impulse time Impulse margin time
1.0% of Ur 1.0% of Ur for U<Ur 1.0% of U for U>Ur 1.0% of Ur for U<Ur 1.0% of U for U>Ur 1.0% of Ur for U<Ur 1.0% of U for U>Ur 2.0 degrees 2.0 degrees -
10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 15 ms typically
10 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset 15 ms typically
10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset 15 ms typically
10 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Uset 15 ms typically
RED 670
469
470
Section 10 Secondary system supervision

About this chapter
This chapter describes functions like Current circuit supervision and Fuse failure supervision. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data are included for each function.
10.1
Current circuit supervision (RDIF)

Function block name: CCSxANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: CCSRDIF IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
10.1.1
Introduction
Open or short circuited current transformer cores can cause unwanted operation of many protection functions such as differential, earth fault current and negative sequence current functions. It must be remembered that a blocking of protection functions at an occurring open CT circuit will mean that the situation will remain and extremely high voltages will stress the secondary circuit. The current circuit supervision function compares the residual current from a three phase set of current transformer cores with the neutral point current on a separate input taken from another set of cores on the current transformer. A detection of a difference indicates a fault in the circuit and is used as alarm or to block protection functions expected to give unwanted tripping.
10.1.2
The supervision function compares the absolute value of the vectorial sum of the three phase currents |Iphase| and the numerical value of the residual current |Iref| from another current transformer set, see figure 233. The FAIL output will be set to a logical one when the following criteria are fulfilled:
RED 670
471
The numerical value of the difference |Iphase| |Iref| is higher than 80% of the numerical value of the sum |Iphase| + |Iref|. The numerical value of the current |Iphase| |Iref| is equal to or higher than the set operate value IMinOp. No phase current has exceeded Ip>Block during the last 10 ms. The current circuit supervision is enabled by setting Operation = On.
The FAIL output remains activated 100 ms after the AND-gate resets when being activated for more than 20 ms. If the FAIL lasts for more than 150 ms a ALARM will be issued. In this case the FAIL and ALARM will remain activated 1 s after the ANDgate resets. This prevents unwanted resetting of the blocking function when phase current supervision element(s) operate, e.g. during a fault.
Figure 233:
Simplified logic diagram for the current circuit supervision
The operate characteristic is percentage restrained, see figure 234.
| I phase | - | I ref |
Slope = 1
Slope = 0.8 I MinOp
Operation area
| I phase | + | I ref |
99000068.vsd
Figure 234:
Operate characteristics
472
RED 670
Due to the formulas for the axis compared, |SIphase | - |I ref | and |S I phase | + | I ref | respectively, the slope can not be above 2.
10.1.3
Function block
CCS1CCSRDIF I3P IREF BLOCK FAIL ALARM
en05000389.vsd
Figure 235:
CCS function block
10.1.4

Table 271:
Signal I3P IREF BLOCK
Input signals for the CCSRDIF (CCS1-) function block

Description Group signal for three phase current input TBD Block of function
Table 272:
Signal FAIL ALARM
Output signals for the CCSRDIF (CCS1-) function block

Description Detection of current circuit failure Alarm for current circuit failure
10.1.5
Setting parameters
Table 273:
Parameter Operation IBase
Parameter group settings for the CCSRDIF (CCS1-) function

Range Off On 1 - 99999 Step 1 Default Off 3000 Unit A Description Operation Off / On IBase value for current level detectors Block of the function at high phase current, in % of IBase Minimum operate current differential level in % of IBase
Ip>Block
5 - 500
150
%IB
IMinOp
5 - 200
20
%IB
RED 670
473
Section 10 Secondary system supervision 10.1.6 Technical data

Table 274:
Function Operate current Block current
Current circuit supervision (RDIF)

Range or value (5-200)% of Ir (5-500)% of Ir Accuracy 10.0% of Ir at I Ir 10.0% of I at I > Ir 5.0% of Ir at I Ir 5.0% of I at I > Ir
10.2
Fuse failure supervision (RFUF)

Function block name: FSDxANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: SDDRFUF IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
10.2.1
Introduction
The aim of the fuse failure supervision function (FSD) is to block voltage measuring functions at failures in the secondary circuits between the voltage transformer and the IED in order to avoid unwanted operations that otherwise might occur. The fuse failure supervision function basically has two different algorithms, negative sequence and zero sequence based algorithm and an additional delta voltage and delta current algorithm. The negative sequence detection algorithm is recommended for IEDs used in isolated or high-impedance earthed networks. It is based on the negative-sequence measuring quantities, a high value of voltage 3U2 without the presence of the negative-sequence current 3I2. The zero sequence detection algorithm is recommended for IEDs used in directly or low impedance earthed networks. It is based on the zero sequence measuring quantities, a high value of voltage 3U0 without the presence of the residual current 3I0. A criterion based on delta current and delta voltage measurements can be added to the fuse failure supervision function in order to detect a three phase fuse failure, which in practice is more associated with voltage transformer switching during station operations. For better adaptation to system requirements, an operation mode setting has been introduced which makes it possible to select the operating conditions for negative sequence and zero sequence based function. The selection of different operation
474
RED 670
modes makes it possible to choose different interaction possibilities between the negative sequence and zero sequence based algorithm.
10.2.2
10.2.2.1
Zero sequence
The function can be set in five different modes by setting the parameter OpMode. The zero sequence function continuously measure the internal currents and voltages in all three phases and calculate: the zero-sequence voltage 3U0 the zero-sequence current 3I0.
The measured signals are compared with their respective set values 3U0< and 3I0>. The function enable the internal signal fuseFailDetected if the measured zero sequence voltage is higher than the set value 3U0>, the measured zero sequence current is below the set value 3I0< and the operation mode selector (OpMode is set to 2 (zero sequence mode). This will activate the output signal BLKU, intended to block voltage related protection functions in the IED. The output signal BLKZ will be activated as well if not the internal dead line detection is activaded at the same time. If the fuseFailDetected signal is present for more than 5 seconds at the same time as all phase voltages are below the set value UPh> and the setting parameter ISealIn is set to On, the function will activate the output signals 3PH, BLKU and BLKZ. The same signals will aslo be activated if all phase voltages are below the value UPh>, SealIn=On and any of the phase voltages below the setting value for more than 5 seconds. It is recommended to always set SealIn to On since this will secure that no unwanted operation of fuse failure will occur at closing command of breaker when the line is already energized from the other end. The system voltages shall be normal before fuse failure is allowed to be activated and initiate block of different protection functions. The output signal BLKU can also be activated if no phase voltages is below the setting UPh> for more than 60 seconds at the same time as the zero sequence voltage is above the set value 3U0> for more than 5 seconds, all phase currents are below the setting IDLD< (operate level for dead line detection) and the circuit breaker is closed (input CBCLOSED is activated). This condition covers for fuse failure at open breaker position. Fuse failure condition is unlatched when the normal voltage conditions are restored.
RED 670
475
Fuse failure condition is stored in the non volatile memory in the IED. In the new start-up procedure the IED checks the stored value in its non volatile memory and establishes the corresponding starting conditions.
TEST
TEST ACTIVE BlocFuse = Yes AND
BLOCK BLKTRIP fufailStarted AND
OR
OR All UL less than Uph> AND 3PH
SealIn = On AND 5s t
AND
Any UL less than Uph> Fuse fail detected (3U0 high and 3I0 low for t>3 ms)
OR
fuseFaildetected AND OR AND BLKU
OpMode = 2 setLatch U I deadLineCondition 200 ms t AND OR AND BLKZ
MCBOP
150 ms t 60 sec t AND UN > 3U0> for t>5 s All IL < IDLD< AND
All UL> UPh>
CBCLOSED DISCPOS
en06000394.vsd
Figure 236:
Simplified logic diagram for fuse failure supervision function, zero sequence based
476
RED 670


The output signals 3PH, BLKU and BLKZ can be blocked in the following conditions: The input BLOCK is activated The input BLKTRIP is activated at the same time as the internal signal fufailStarted is not present The operation mode selector OpMode is set to Off. The IED is in TEST status (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has been blocked from the HMI (BlockFUSE=Yes)
The input BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the fuse failure supervision function. It can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to receive a block command from external devices or can be software connected to other internal functions of the IED itself in order to receive a block command from internal functions. Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and internal function outputs. The input BLKSP is intended to be connected to the trip output at any of the protection functions included in the IED. When activated for more than 20 ms, the operation of the fuse failure is blocked during a fixed time of 100 ms. The aim is to increase the security against unwanted operations during the opening of the breaker, which might cause unbalance conditions for which the fuse failure might operate. The output signal BLKZ will also be blocked if the internal dead line detection is activated. The block signal has a 200 ms drop-off time delay. The input signal MCBOP is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the miniature circuit breaker protecting the VT secondary circuit. The MCBOP signal sets the output signals BLKU and BLKZ in order to block all the voltage related functions when the MCB is open independent of the setting of OpMode selector. The additional drop-off timer of 150 ms prolongs the presence of MCBOP signal to prevent the unwanted operation of voltage dependent function due to non simultaneous closing of the main contacts of the miniature circuit breaker. The input signal DISCPOS is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the line disconnector. The DISCPOS signal sets the output signal BLKU in order to block the voltage related functions when the line disconnector is open. The impedance protection function is not affected by the position of the line disconnector since there will be no line currents that can cause maloperation of the distance protection. If DISCPOS=0 it signifies that the line is connected to the system and when the DISCPOS=1 it signifies that the line is disconnected from the system and the block signal BLKU is generated. The output BLKU can be used for blocking the voltage related measuring functions (undervoltage protection, synchro-check etc.) except for the impedance protection. The function output BLKZ can be used for blocking the impedance protection function.
RED 670
477
The BLKZ will only be activated if not the internal dead line detection is activated at the same time. The fuse failure condition is unlatched when the normal voltage conditions are restored. When the output 3PH is activated, all three voltage are low.
10.2.2.2
Negative sequence
The negative sequence operates in the same way as the zero sequence, but it calculates the negative sequence component of current and voltage. the negative sequence current 3I2 the negative sequence voltage 3U2
The function enable the internal signal fuseFailDetected if the measured negative sequence voltage is higher than the set value 3U2>, the measured negative sequence current is below the value 3I2< and the operation mode selector (OpMode) is set to 1 (negative sequence mode).
10.2.2.3
du/dt and di/dt

The delta function can be activated by setting the parameter OperationDUDI to On. When it is selected On it operates in parallel with the sequence based algorithm. The current and voltage is continuously measured in all three phases and the following quantities are calculated: The change of voltage DU/Dt The change of current DI/Dt
The calculated delta quantities are compared with their respective set values DI< and DU>. The delta current and delta voltage algorithm, detects a fuse failure if a sufficient negative change in voltage amplitude without a sufficient change in current amplitude is detected in each phase separately. This check is performed if the circuit breaker is closed. Information about the circuit breaker position is brought to the function input CBCLOSED through a binary input of the IED. There are two conditions for activating the internal STDU signal and set the latch:
478
RED 670
The magnitude of U is higher than the corresponding setting DU> and I is below the setting DI> in any phase at the same time as the circuit breaker is closed (CBCLOSED = 1) The magnitude U is higher than the setting DU> and the magnitude of I is below the setting DI> in any phase at the same time as the magnitude of the phase current in the same phase is higher than the setting IPh>.
The first criterion requires that the delta condition shall be fulfilled in any phase at the same time as circuit breaker is closed. Opening circuit breaker at one end and energizing the line from other end onto a fault could lead to wrong start of the fuse failure function at the end with the open breaker. If this is considering to bee an important disadvantage, connect the CBCLOSED input to FALSE. In this way only the second criterion can activate the delta function. The second criterion means that detection of failure in one phase together with high current for the same phase will set the latch. The measured phase current is used to reduce the risk of false fuse failure detection. If the current on the protected line is low, a voltage drop in the system (not caused by fuse failure) is not by certain followed by current change and a false fuse failure might occur. To prevent that the phase current criterion is introduced. If the signal setLatchUI is set (see figure 236) and if all measured voltages are low (lower than the setting UPh>) the output 3PH will be activated indicating fuse failure in all three phases. The output BLKU and BLKZ will be activated as well. If the signal setLatchUI is activated but not all three phases are below the setting UPh> only BLKU will be activated. The BLKZ will be activated as well if not the internal dead line detection is activated.
10.2.2.4
Operation modes
The fuse failure supervision function can be switched on or off by the setting parameter Operation to On or Off.
Negative and zero sequence algorithm
For increased flexibility and adaptation to system requirements, an operation mode selector, OperationMode has been introduced to make it possible to select different operating modes for the negative and zero sequence based algorithm. The different operation modes are: OpMode = 0, the negative and zero sequence function is switched off OpMode = 1; Negative sequence is selected OpMode = 2; Zero sequence is selected
RED 670
479
OMode = 3; Both negative and zero sequence is activated and working in parallel in an OR-condition OpMode = 4; Both negative and zero sequence is activated and working in series (AND-condition for operation) OpMode = 5; Optimum of negative and zero sequence (the function that has the highest magnitude of measured negative and zero sequence current will be activated).
du/dt and di/dt algorithm
The DU and DI function can be switched on or off by the setting parameter OpDUDI to On or Off.
10.2.2.5
Dead line detection

The function input signal deadLineCondition (see figure 236) is related to the internal dead line detection function. This signal is activated from the dead line condition function when the voltage and the current in at least one phase is below their respective setting values UDLD< and IDLD<. It prevents the blocking of the impedance protection by a fuse failure detection during dead line condition (that occurs also during single pole auto-reclosing). The 200 ms drop-off timer prolongs the dead line condition after the line-energization in order to prevent the blocking of the impedance protection for unequal pole closing.
10.2.3
Function block
FSD1SDDRFUF I3P U3P BLOCK CBCLOSED MCBOP DISCPOS BLKTRIP BLKZ BLKU 3PH DLD1PH DLD3PH
en05000700.vsd
Figure 237:
FSD function block
10.2.4

Table 275:
Signal I3P U3P BLOCK CBCLOSED Table continued on next page
Input signals for the SDDRFUF (FSD1-) function block

Description Current connection Voltage connection Block of function Active when circuit breaker is closed
480
RED 670

Signal MCBOP DISCPOS BLKTRIP Description Active when external MCB opens protected voltage circuit Active when line disconnector is open Blocks operation of function when active
Table 276:
Signal BLKZ BLKU 3PH DLD1PH DLD3PH
Output signals for the SDDRFUF (FSD1-) function block

Description Start of current and voltage controlled function General start of function Three-phase start of function Dead line condition in at least one phase Dead line condition in all three phases
10.2.5
Setting parameters
Table 277:
Parameter Operation IBase UBase OpMode
Basic parameter group settings for the SDDRFUF (FSD1-) function

Range Off On 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 Off UNsINs UZsIZs UZsIZs OR UNsINs UZsIZs AND UNsINs OptimZsNs 1 - 100 Step 1 0.05 Default On 3000 400.00 UZsIZs Unit A kV Description Operation Off / On Base current Base voltage Operating mode selection
3U0>
30
%UB
Operate level of residual overvoltage element in % of UBase Operate level of residual undercurrent element in % of IBase Operate level of neg seq overvoltage element in % of UBase Operate level of neg seq undercurrent element in % of IBase Operation of change based function Off/On
3I0<
1 - 100
10
%IB
3U2>
1 - 100
30
%UB
3I2<
1 - 100
10
%IB
OpDUDI
Off On
Off
RED 670
481

Parameter DU> Range 1 - 100 Step 1 Default 60 Unit %UB Description Operate level of change in phase voltage in % of UBase Operate level of change in phase current in % of IBase Operate level of phase voltage in % of UBase Operate level of phase current in % of IBase Seal in functionality Off/On Operate level of sealin phase voltage in % of UBase Operate level for open phase current detection in % of IBase Operate level for open phase voltage detection in % of UBase
DI<
1 - 100
15
%IB
UPh>
1 - 100
70
%UB
IPh>
1 - 100
10
%IB
SealIn USealln<
Off On 1 - 100
On 70
%UB
IDLD<
1 - 100
%IB
UDLD<
1 - 100
60
%UB
10.2.6
Technical data
Table 278:
Function Operate voltage, zero sequence Operate current, zero sequence Operate voltage, negative sequence Operate current, negative sequence Operate voltage change level Operate current change level
Fuse failure supervision (RFUF)

Range or value (1-100)% of Ubase (1100)% of Ibase (1100)% of Ubase (1100)% of Ibase (1100)% of Ubase (1100)% of Ibase Accuracy 1.0% of Ur 1.0% of Ir 1.0% of Ur 1.0% of Ir 5.0% of Ur 5.0% of Ir
482
RED 670
Section 11 Control
Section 11 Control
About this chapter
This chapter describes the control functions. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data are included for each function.
11.1
Synchronizing, synchrocheck and energizing check (RSYN, 25)

Function block name: SYNxANSI number: 25 IEC 61850 logical node name: SESRSYN IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
sc/vc
11.1.1
Introduction
The Synchronizing function allows closing of asynchronous networks at the correct moment including the breaker closing time. The systems can thus be reconnected after an auto-reclose or manual closing which improves the network stability. The synchrocheck function checks that the voltages on both sides of the circuit breaker are in synchronism, or with at least one side dead to ensure that closing can be done safely. The function includes a built-in voltage selection scheme for double bus and one- and a half or ring busbar arrangements. Manual closing as well as automatic reclosing can be checked by the function and can have different settings. For systems which are running asynchronous a synchronizing function is provided. The main purpose of the synchronizing function is to provide controlled closing of circuit breakers when two asynchronous systems are going to be connected. It is used for slip frequencies that are larger than those for synchrocheck and lower than a set maximum level for the synchronizing function.
RED 670
483
Section 11 Control 11.1.2

11.1.2.1
Basic functionality
The synchronism check function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker and compares them to set limits. The output is only given when all measured quantities are simultaneously within their set limits. The energizing check function measures the bus and line voltages and compares them to both high and low threshold detectors. The output is only given when the actual measured quantities match the set conditions. The synchronizing measures the conditions across the circuit breaker, and it also determines the angle change occurring during the closing delay of the circuit breaker, from the measured slip frequency. The output is only given when all measured conditions are simultaneously within their set limits. The issue of the output is timed to give closure at the optimal time including the time for the circuit breaker and the closing circuit. For single circuit breaker and 1 1/2 circuit breaker arrangements, the SYN function blocks have the capability to make the necessary voltage selection. For single circuit breaker arrangements, selection of the correct voltage is made using auxiliary contacts of the bus disconnectors. For 1 1/2 circuit breaker arrangements, correct voltage selection is made using auxiliary contacts of the bus disconnectors as well as the circuit breakers The internal logic for each function block as well as the Input and Outputs and the setting parameters with default setting and setting ranges is described in this document. For application related information, please refer to the Application manual.
11.1.2.2
Logic diagrams
The logic diagrams that follow illustrate the main principles of the Synchrocheck function components such as Synchronism check, Energizing check and Voltage selection, and are intended to simplify the understanding of the function.
Synchronism check
The voltage difference, frequency difference and phase angle difference values are measured in the IED centrally and are available for the Synchrocheck function for evaluation. If the bus voltage is connected as phase-phase and the line voltage as phase-neutral (or the opposite), this need to be compensated. This is done with a setting, which scales up the line voltage to a level equal to the bus voltage. When the function is set to OperationSC = On, the measuring will start. The function will compare the bus and line voltage values with the set values for UHighBusSC and UHighLineSC.
484
RED 670
Section 11 Control
If both sides are higher than the set values the measured values are compared with the set values for acceptable frequency, phase angle and voltage difference FreqDiff, PhaseDiff and UDiff. If a compensation factor is set due to the use of different voltages on the Bus and Line, the factor is deducted from the line voltage before the comparison of the phase angle values. The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The frequencies must not deviate from the rated frequency more than +/-5Hz. The frequency difference between the bus frequency and the line frequency is measured and may not exceed the set value. Two sets of settings for frequency difference and phase angle difference are available and used for the Manual closing and Auto-Reclose functions respectively as required. The inputs BLOCK and BLKSC are available for total block of the complete Synchrocheck function and block of the Synchronism check function respectively. TSTSC will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are connected to a separate test output Two outputs MANSYOK resp. AUTOSYOK are activated when the actual measured conditions match the set conditions for the respective output. The output signal can be delayed independently for MANSYOK conditions and for AUTOSYOK. A number of outputs are available as information about fulfilled checking conditions. UOKSC shows that the voltages are high, UDIFFSC, FRDIFFM/A, PHDIFFM/A shows when the voltage difference, frequency difference and phase angle difference conditions are met.
Synchronizing
When the function is set to OperationSynch=On the measuring will be performed. The function will compare the values for the bus and line voltage with the set values for UHighBusSynch and UHighLineSynch which is a supervision that the voltages are both live. If both sides are higher than the set values the measured values are compared with the set values for acceptable frequency, rate of change of frequency, phase angle and voltage difference FreqDiffMax, FreqDiffMin and UDiffSynch. Measured frequencies between the settings for the maximum and minimum frequency will initiate the measuring and the evaluation of the angle change to allow operation to be sent in the right moment including the set tBreaker time. There is a phase angle release internally to block any incorrect closing pulses. At operation the SYNOK output will be activated with a pulse tClosePulse and the function reset. The function will also reset if the syncronizing conditions are not fulfilled within the set tMaxSynch time. This will then prevent that the functions is by mistake maintained in operation a long time waiting for conditions to be fulfilled. The inputs BLOCK and BLKSYNCH are available for total block of the complete function resp. of the Synchronizing part.
RED 670
485
Section 11 Control
SYN1 OPERATION SYNCH OFF ON TEST MODE OFF ON

STARTSYN
AND
BLKSYNCH OR
S R
AND
SYNPROGR
UDiffSynch
50 ms
UHighBusSynch UHighLineSynch FreqDiffMax FreqDiffMin
AND
AND
SYNOK
OR AND OR
TSTSYNOK
FreqRateChange fBus&fLine 5 Hz PhaseDiff < 15 deg PhaseDiff=closing angle

AND
AND
tClose Pulse
tMax Synch
SYNFAIL
en06000636.vsd
Figure 238:
Simplified logic diagram for the synchronizing function
Energizing check
Voltage values are measured in the IED centrally and are available for evaluation by the Synchrocheck function. If the bus voltage is connected as phase-phase and the line voltage as phase-neutral, (or the opposite) this needs to be compensated. This is done with a setting, which scales the line voltage to a level equal to the bus voltage. The function measures voltages on the busbar and the line to verify whether they are live or dead. This is done by comparing with the set values UHighBusEnerg and ULowBusEnerg for bus energizing and UHighBusEnergand ULowBusEnerg for line energizing. The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The frequencies must not deviate from the rated frequency more than +/-5Hz. The frequency difference between the bus frequency and the line frequency is measured and shall not exceed a set value. The Energizing direction can be selected individually for the Manual and the Automatic functions respectively. When the conditions are met the outputs AUTOENOK and MANENOK respectively will be activated if the fuse supervision conditions are fulfilled. The output signal can be delayed independently for MANENOK conditions and for AUTOENOK. The Energizing direction can also be 486 Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B RED 670
Section 11 Control
selected by an integer input AENMODE resp MENMODE, which e.g. can be connected to a Binary to Integer function block BI 16 (BAxx or BBxx). Integers supplied shall be 1=off, 2=DLLB, 3=DBLL and 4= Both. Not connected input with connection of INTZERO output from Fixed Signals function block will mean that the setting is done from PST tool. The active position can be read on outputs MODEAEN resp MODEMEN. The modes are 0=OFF, 1=DLLB, 2=DBLL and 3=Both. The inputs BLOCK and BLKENERG are available for total block of the complete Synchrocheck function resp. block of the Energizing check function. TSTENOK will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are connected to a separate test output.
Note! Similar logic for Manual Synchrocheck.
OperationSC = On
AND AND
TSTAUTOSY
TSTSC BLKSC BLOCK

OR AND AND 0-60 s t tSCA AND
AUTOSYOK
UDiffSC
AND
50 ms t
UHighBusSC UHighLineSC
AND 1
UOKSC UDIFFSC FRDIFFA PHDIFFA UDIFFME FRDIFFME
FreqDiffA PhaseDiffA voltageDifferenceValue frequencyDifferenceValue phaseAngleDifferenceValue
1 1
PHDIFFME
en07000114.vsd
Figure 239:
Simplified logic diagram for the Synchrocheck function
Voltage selection
The voltage selection module including supervision of included voltage transformer fuses for the different arrangements is a basic part of the Synchrocheck function and determines the parameters fed to the Synchronism check and Energizing check functions. This includes the selection of the appropriate Line and Bus voltages and fuse supervision.
RED 670
487
Section 11 Control
The voltage selection type to be used is set with the parameter CBConfig. The different alternatives are described below. If NoVoltageSel is set the default voltages used will be ULine1 and UBus1. This is also the case when external voltage selection is provided. Fuse failure supervision for the used inputs must also be connected. The voltage selection function selected voltages and fuse conditions are the Synchronism check and Energizing check inputs. For the disconnector positions it is advisable to use (NO) a and (NC) b type contacts to supply Disconnector Open and Closed positions but it is of course also possible to use an inverter for one of the positions.
Fuse failure supervision
External fuse-failure signals or signals from a tripped fuse switch/MCB are connected to binary inputs that are configured to the inputs of the Synchrocheck functions in the terminal. Alternatively the internal signals from fuse failure supervision can be used when available. There are two alternative connection possibilities. Inputs labelled OK must be connected if the available contact indicates that the voltage circuit is healthy. Inputs labelled FF must be connected if the available contact indicates that the voltage circuit is faulty. The SYN1(2)-UB1/2OK and SYN1(2)-UB1/2FF inputs are related to the busbar voltage and the SYN1(2)-ULN1/2OK and SYN1(2)-ULN1/2FF inputs are related to the line voltage. Configure them to the binary inputs or function outputs that indicate the status of the external fuse failure of the busbar and line voltages. In the event of a fuse failure, the energizing check functions are blocked. The synchronism check requires full voltage on both sides and will be blocked automatically in the event of fuse failures.
Voltage selection for a single circuit breaker with double busbars
This function uses the binary input from the disconnectors auxiliary contacts B1QOPEN-B1QCLD for Bus 1, and B2QOPEN-B2QCLD for Bus 2 to select between bus 1 and bus 2 voltages. If the disconnector connected to bus 2 is closed and the disconnector connected to bus 1 is opened the bus 2 voltage is used. All other combinations use the bus 1 voltage. The Outputs B1SEL and B2SEL respectively indicate the selected Bus voltage. The function also checks the fuse-failure signals for bus 1, bus 2 and line voltage transformers. Inputs UB1OK-UB1FF supervise the fuse for Bus 1. UB2OK-UB2FF supervises the fuse for Bus 2 and ULNOK-ULNFF supervises the fuse for the Line voltage transformer. The inputs fail (FF) or healthy (OK) can alternatively be used dependent on the available signal. If a fuse-failure is detected in the selected voltage source an output signal USELFAIL is set. This output signal is true if the selected bus or line voltages have a fuse failure. This output as well as the function can be blocked with the input signal BLOCK. The function logic diagram is shown in figure 240.
488
RED 670
Section 11 Control
B1QOPEN B1QCLD B2QOPEN B2QCLD

AND AND
B1SEL B2SEL
1
AND
invalidSelection busVoltage
bus1Voltage bus2Voltage
UB1OK UB1FF UB2OK UB2FF ULN1OK ULN1FF
OR
AND OR AND AND AND
selectedFuseOK USELFAIL
OR
OR
BLOCK
en05000779.vsd
Figure 240:
Logic diagram for the voltage selection function of a single circuit breaker with double busbars
Voltage selection for a 1 1/2 circuit breaker arrangement
Note that with 1 breaker schemes two Synchrocheck functions must be used in the IED (three for two IEDs in a complete bay). Below, the scheme for one Bus breaker and the Tie breakers is described. This voltage selection function uses the binary inputs from the disconnectors and circuit breakers auxiliary contacts to select the right voltage for the Synchrocheck (Synchronism and Energizing check) function. For the bus circuit breaker one side of the circuit breaker is connected to the busbar and the other side is connected either to line 1, line 2 or the other busbar depending on the arrangement. Inputs LN1QOPEN-LN1QCLD, B1QOPEN-B1QCLD, B2QOPEN-B2QCLD, LN2QOPEN-LN2QCLD are inputs for the position of the Line disconnectors respectively the Bus and Tie breakers. The Outputs LN1SEL, LN2SEL and B2SEL will give indication of the selected Line voltage as a reference to the fixed Bus 1 voltage. The fuse supervision is connected to ULNOK-ULNFF etc. and with alternative Healthy or Failing fuse signals depending on what is available for each of fuse (MCB). The tie circuit breaker is connected either to bus 1 or line 1 on one side and the other side is connected either to bus 2 or line 2. Four different output combinations are possible, bus to bus, bus to line, line to bus and line to line.
RED 670
489
Section 11 Control
The line 1 voltage is selected if the line 1 disconnector is closed. The bus 1 voltage is selected if the line 1 disconnector is open and the bus 1 circuit breaker is closed. The line 2 voltage is selected if the line 2 disconnector is closed. The bus 2 voltage is selected if the line 2 disconnector is open and the bus 2 Circuit breaker is closed.
The function also checks the fuse-failure signals for bus 1, bus 2, line 1 and line 2. If a fuse-failure is detected in the selected voltage an output signal USELFAIL is set. This output signal is true if the selected bus or line voltages have a fuse failure. This output as well as the function can be blocked with the input signal BLOCK.The function block diagram for the voltage selection of a bus circuit breaker is shown in 241 and for the tie circuit breaker in 242
490
RED 670
Section 11 Control
LN1QOPEN LN1QCLD B1QOPEN B1QCLD LN2QOPEN LN2QCLD B2QOPEN B2QCLD

AND AND AND AND AND OR AND AND
LN1SEL
LN2SEL B2SEL invalidSelection
line1Voltage line2Voltage bus2Voltage UB1OK UB1FF UB2OK UB2FF ULN1OK ULN1FF

OR OR OR AND AND
lineVoltage
OR
AND
AND
ULN2OK ULN2FF BLOCK
OR
AND
en05000780.vsd
Figure 241:
Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for a bus circuit breaker in a 1 1/2 breaker arrangement.
RED 670
491
Section 11 Control
LN1QOPEN LN1QCLD
AND
LN1SEL 1 B1SEL
AND
B1QOPEN B1QCLD
AND
AND
line1Voltage bus1Voltage LN2QOPEN LN2QCLD

AND
busVoltage
LN2SEL 1 B2SEL
AND OR
B2QOPEN B2QCLD
AND
invalidSelection
AND
line2Voltage bus2Voltage UB1OK UB1FF UB2OK UB2FF ULN1OK ULN1FF ULN2OK ULN2FF BLOCK
lineVoltage
OR
AND OR AND
OR
AND
OR
AND
AND
OR
AND
en05000781.vsd
Figure 242:
Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for the tie circuit breaker in 1 1/2 breaker arrangement.
11.1.3
Function block
The Synchrocheck function block is shown in 243. Tables describing the inputs, outputs and setting parameters of this function are presented in the following sections of this document. Refer to the Application manual for the use of inputs and outputs in your particular application.
492
RED 670
Section 11 Control
SYN1SESRSYN_25 U3PBB1 U3PBB2 U3PLN1 U3PLN2 BLOCK BLKSYNCH BLKSC BLKENERG B1QOPEN B1QCLD B2QOPEN B2QCLD LN1QOPEN LN1QCLD LN2QOPEN LN2QCLD UB1OK UB1FF UB2OK UB2FF ULN1OK ULN1FF ULN2OK ULN2FF STARTSYN TSTSYNCH TSTSC TSTENERG AENMODE MENMODE SYNOK AUTOSYOK AUTOENOK MANSYOK MANENOK TSTSYNOK TSTAUTSY TSTMANSY TSTENOK USELFAIL B1SEL B2SEL LN1SEL LN2SEL SYNPROGR SYNFAIL UOKSYN UDIFFSYN FRDIFSYN FRDIFFOK FRDERIVA UOKSC UDIFFSC FRDIFFA PHDIFFA FRDIFFM PHDIFFM UDIFFME FRDIFFME PHDIFFME MODEAEN MODEMEN en06000534.vsd
Figure 243:
SYN function block
11.1.4

Table 279:
Signal U3PBB1 U3PBB2 U3PLN1 U3PLN2 BLOCK BLKSYNCH BLKSC BLKENERG B1QOPEN B1QCLD B2QOPEN B2QCLD LN1QOPEN Table continued on next page
Input signals for the SESRSYN_25 (SYN1-) function block

Description Group signal for voltage input busbar 1 Group signal for voltage input busbar 2 Group signal for voltage input line 1 Group signal for voltage input line 2 General block Block synchronizing Block synchro check Block energizing check Open status for CB or disconnector connected to bus1 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to bus1 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to bus2 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to bus2 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to line1
RED 670
493
Section 11 Control
Signal LN1QCLD LN2QOPEN LN2QCLD UB1OK UB1FF UB2OK UB2FF ULN1OK ULN1FF ULN2OK ULN2FF STARTSYN TSTSYNCH TSTSC TSTENERG AENMODE MENMODE Description Close status for CB or disconnector connected to line1 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to line2 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to line2 Bus1 voltage transformer OK Bus1 voltage transformer fuse failure Bus2 voltage transformer OK Bus2 voltage transformer fuse failure Line1 voltage transformer OK Line1 voltage transformer fuse failure Line2 voltage transformer OK Line2 voltage transformer fuse failure Start synchronizing Set synchronizing in test mode Set synchro check in test mode Set energizing check in test mode Input for setting of automatic energizing mode Input for setting of manual energizing mode
Table 280:
Signal SYNOK AUTOSYOK AUTOENOK MANSYOK MANENOK TSTSYNOK TSTAUTSY TSTMANSY TSTENOK USELFAIL B1SEL B2SEL LN1SEL LN2SEL SYNPROGR SYNFAIL UOKSYN UDIFFSYN
Output signals for the SESRSYN_25 (SYN1-) function block

Description Synchronizing OK output Auto synchro check OK Automatic energizing check OK Manual synchro check OK Manual energizing check OK Synchronizing OK test output Auto synchro check OK test output Manual synchro check OK test output Energizing check OK test output Selected voltage transformer fuse failed Bus1 selected Bus2 selected Line1 selected Line2 selected Synchronizing in progress Synchronizing failed Voltage amplitudes for synchronizing above set limits Voltage difference out of limit for synchronizing
494
RED 670
Section 11 Control
Signal FRDIFSYN FRDIFFOK FRDERIVA UOKSC UDIFFSC FRDIFFA PHDIFFA FRDIFFM PHDIFFM UDIFFME FRDIFFME PHDIFFME MODEAEN MODEMEN Description Frequency difference out of limit for synchronizing Frequency difference in band for synchronizing Frequency derivative out of limit for synchronizing Voltage amplitudes above set limits Voltage difference out of limit Frequency difference out of limit for Auto operation Phase angle difference out of limit for Auto operation Frequency difference out of limit for Manual operation Phase angle difference out of limit for Manual Operation Calculated difference in voltage Calculated difference in frequency Calculated difference of phase angle Selected mode for automatic energizing Selected mode for manual energizing
11.1.5
Setting parameters
Table 281:
Parameter Operation SelPhaseBus1
Basic parameter group settings for the SESRSYN_25 (SYN1-) function

Range Off On phase1 phase2 phase3 phase1-phase2 phase2-phase3 phase3-phase1 phase1 phase2 phase3 phase1-phase2 phase2-phase3 phase3-phase1 phase1 phase2 phase3 phase1-phase2 phase2-phase3 phase3-phase1 phase1 phase2 phase3 phase1-phase2 phase2-phase3 phase3-phase1 Step Default Off phase2 Unit Description Operation Off / On Select phase for bus1
SelPhaseBus2
phase2
Select phase for bus2
SelPhaseLine1
phase2
Select phase for line1
SelPhaseLine2
phase2
Select phase for line2
RED 670
495
Section 11 Control
Parameter CBConfig Range No voltage sel. Double bus 1 1/2 bus CB 1 1/2 bus alt. CB Tie CB 0.001 - 9999.999 -180 - 180 1.000 Off On 50.0 - 120.0 Step Default No voltage sel. Unit Description Select CB configuration
UBase PhaseShift URatio OperationSynch
0.001 5 0.001 -
400.000 0 0.040 - 25.000 Off
kV Deg -
Base voltage in kV Phase shift Voltage ratio Operation for synchronizing function Off/On Voltage high limit bus for synchronizing in % of UBase Voltage high limit line for synchronizing in % of UBase Voltage difference limit for synchronizing in % of UBase Minimum frequency difference limit for synchronizing Maximum frequency difference limit for synchronizing Maximum allowed frequency rate of change Closing time of the breaker Breaker closing pulse duration Resets synch if no close has been made before set time Minimum time to accept synchronizing conditions Operation for synchronism check function Off/On Voltage high limit bus for synchrocheck in % of UBase Voltage high limit line for synchrocheck in % of UBase Voltage difference limit in % of UBase
UHighBusSynch
1.0
80.0
%UB
UHighLineSynch
50.0 - 120.0
1.0
80.0
%UB
UDiffSynch
2.0 - 50.0
1.0
10.0
%UB
FreqDiffMin
0.003 - 0.250
0.001
0.010
Hz
FreqDiffMax
0.050 - 0.250
0.001
0.200
Hz
FreqRateChange
0.000 - 0.500
0.001
0.300
Hz/s
tBreaker tClosePulse tMaxSynch
0.000 - 60.000 0.050 - 60.000 0.00 - 6000.00
0.001 0.001 0.01
0.080 0.200 600.00
s s s
tMinSynch
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
2.000
OperationSC
Off On 50.0 - 120.0
On
UHighBusSC
1.0
80.0
%UB
UHighLineSC
50.0 - 120.0
1.0
80.0
%UB
UDiffSC
2.0 - 50.0
1.0
15.0
%UB
496
RED 670
Section 11 Control
Parameter FreqDiffA Range 0.003 - 1.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.010 Unit Hz Description Frequency difference limit between bus and line Auto Frequency difference limit between bus and line Manual Phase angle difference limit between bus and line Auto Phase angle difference limit between bus and line Manual Time delay output for synchrocheck Auto Time delay output for synchrocheck Manual Automatic energizing check mode
FreqDiffM
0.003 - 1.000
0.001
0.010
Hz
PhaseDiffA
5.0 - 90.0
1.0
25.0
Deg
PhaseDiffM
5.0 - 90.0
1.0
25.0
Deg
tSCA tSCM AutoEnerg
0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Off DLLB DBLL Both Off DLLB DBLL Both Off On 50.0 - 120.0
0.001 0.001 -
0.100 0.100 DBLL
s s -
ManEnerg
Both
Manual energizing check mode
ManEnergDBDL UHighBusEnerg
1.0
Off 80.0
%UB
Manual dead bus, dead line energizing Voltage high limit bus for energizing check in % of UBase Voltage high limit line for energizing check in % of UBase Voltage low limit bus for energizing check in % of UBase Voltage low limit line for energizing check in % of UBase Maximum voltage for energizing in % of UBase Time delay for automatic energizing check Time delay for manual energizing check
UHighLineEnerg
50.0 - 120.0
1.0
80.0
%UB
ULowBusEnerg
10.0 - 80.0
1.0
40.0
%UB
ULowLineEnerg
10.0 - 80.0
1.0
40.0
%UB
UMaxEnerg
50.0 - 180.0
1.0
115.0
%UB
tAutoEnerg
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
tManEnerg
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
11.1.6
Technical data
RED 670
497
Section 11 Control
Table 282:
Function
Synchronizing, synchrocheck check and energizing check (RSYN, 25)

Range or value (-180 to 180) degrees (0.20-5.00)% of Ubase (50.0-120.0)% of Ubase > 95% (0.003-1.000) Hz (5.0-90.0) degrees (2.0-50.0)% of Ubase (0.000-60.000) s (50.0-120.0)% of Ubase > 95% (10.0-80.0)% of Ubase < 105% (80.0-140.0)% of Ubase (0.000-60.000) s 160 ms typically 80 ms typically Accuracy 1.0% of Ur at U Ur 1.0% of U at U >Ur 2.0 mHz 2.0 degrees 1.0% of Ur 0.5% 10 ms 1.0% of Ur at U Ur 1.0% of U at U >Ur 1.0% of Ur 1.0% of Ur at U Ur 1.0% of U at U >Ur 0.5% 10 ms -
Phase shift, jline - jbus Voltage ratio, Ubus/Uline Voltage high limit for synchrocheck Reset ratio, synchrocheck Frequency difference limit between bus and line Phase angle difference limit between bus and line Voltage difference limit between bus and line Time delay output for synchrocheck Voltage high limit for energizing check Reset ratio, voltage high limit Voltage low limit for energizing check Reset ratio, voltage low limit Maximum voltage for energizing Time delay for energizing check Operate time for synchrocheck function Operate time for energizing function
11.2
Autorecloser (RREC, 79)

Function block name: ARx-ANSI number: 79 IEC 61850 logical node name: SMBRREC IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
O->I
11.2.1
Introduction
The autoreclosing function provides high-speed and/or delayed auto-reclosing for single or multi-breaker applications.
498
RED 670
Section 11 Control
Up to five reclosing attempts can be programmed. The first attempt can be single-, two and/or three phase for single phase or multi-phase faults respectively. Multiple autoreclosing functions are provided for multi-breaker arrangements. A priority circuit allows one circuit breaker to close first and the second will only close if the fault proved to be transient. Each autoreclosing function can be configured to co-operate with a synchrocheck function.
11.2.2
11.2.2.1
Logic Diagrams
The logic diagrams below illustrate the principles applicable in the understanding of the functionality.
11.2.2.2
Auto-reclosing operation Off and On

Operation of the automatic reclosing can be set to Off or On via the setting parameters and through external control. With the setting Operation=ON, the function is activated while with the setting Operation=OFF the function is deactivated. With the setting Operation=External ctrl, the activation/deactivation is made by input signal pulses, for example from a control system. When the function is set On and is operative the output SETON is activated (high). Other input conditions such as CBPOS and CBREADY must also be fulfilled. At this point the automatic recloser is prepared to start the reclosing cycle and the output signal READY on the AR function block is activated (high).
11.2.2.3
Auto-reclosing mode selection

The Auto-reclosing mode is selected with setting ARMode=3phase(0),1/2/3ph(1), 1/2ph(2),1ph+1*2ph(3),1/2ph+1*3ph(4)1ph+1*2+3ph(5) The selected mode can be read as integer as per above list on output MODE. As an alternative to setting the mode can be selected by connecting an integer, e.g. from function block B16I (BAxx respBBxx) to input MODEINT Following integers shall be used. 1=3phase,2=1/2/3ph,3=1/2ph,4=1ph+1*2ph, 5=1/2ph+1*3ph or 5=1ph+1*2/3ph. When INTZERO from Fixed signal function block is connected to the input MODEINT the parameter setting selected will be valid.
RED 670
499
Section 11 Control
11.2.2.4 Start auto-reclosing and conditions for start of a reclosing cycle
The usual way in which to start a reclosing cycle, or sequence, is to start it when a line protection tripping has occurred, by applying a signal to the START input. Should it be necessary to adjust three-phase auto-reclosing open time, (dead time) for different power system configurations or during tripping at different protection stages, the input STARTHS (start high-speed reclosing) can also be used. For a new auto-reclosing cycle to be started, a number of conditions need to be met. They are linked to dedicated inputs. The inputs are: a) CBREADY, CB ready for a reclosing cycle, e.g. charged operating gear, b) CBPOS to ensure that the CB was closed when the line fault occurred and start was applied, c) No blocking or inhibit signal shall be present. After the start has been accepted, it is latched in and an internal signal Started is set. It can be interrupted by certain events, like an inhibit signal. To start auto-reclosing by CB position Open instead of from protection trip signals, one has to configure the CB Open position signal to inputs CBPOS and START and set a parameter StartByCBOpen = ON and CBAuxContType = NormClosed (normally closed, 52b). One also has to configure and connect signals from manual trip commands to input INHIBIT. The logic for switching the auto-recloser ON/OFF and the starting of the reclosing is shown in figure 244. The following should be considered. Setting Operation can be set to Off, External ctrl or ON. External ctrl offers the possibility of switching by external switches to inputs ON and OFF, communication commands to the same inputs etc. Autoreclose AR is normally started by tripping. It is either a Zone 1 and Communication aided trip or a general trip. If the general trip is used the function must be blocked from all back-up tripping connected to INHIBIT. In both alternatives the breaker failure function must be connected to inhibit the function. START makes a first attempt with synchrocheck, STARTHS makes its first attempt without synchrocheck. TRSOTF starts shots 2-5. Circuit breaker checks that the breaker was closed for a certain length of time before the starting occurred and that the CB has sufficient stored energy to perform an auto-reclosing sequence and is connected to inputs CBPOS and CBREADY.
500
RED 670
Section 11 Control
Operation:On Operation:Off Operation:External Ctrl ON OFF START STARTHS autoInitiate TRSOTF CBREADY CBPOS Additional conditions AND start AND tCBClosedMin t AND Blocking conditions Inhibit condistions count 0
en05000782.vsd
AND AND
OR AND S OR R
SETON
OR OR initiate
120 ms t CB Closed
AND S R
AND
OR
AND
READY
Figure 244:
Auto-reclosing Off/On and start
11.2.2.5
Control of the auto-reclosing open time for shot 1

It is possible to use up to four different time settings for the first shot, and one extension time. There are separate settings for single-, two- and three-phase autoreclosing open times, t1 1Ph, t1 2Ph, t1 3Ph. If no particular input signal is applied, and an auto-reclosing program with single-phase reclosing is selected, the autoreclosing open time t1 1Ph will be used. If one of the inputs TR2P or TR3P is activated in connection with the start, the auto-reclosing open time for two-phase or three-phase reclosing is used. There is also a separate time setting facility for three-phase highspeed auto-reclosing, t1 3PhHS available for use when required. It is activated by input STARTHS. An auto-reclosing open time extension delay, tExtended t1, can be added to the normal shot 1 delay. It is intended to come into use if the communication channel for permissive line protection is lost. In a case like this there can be a significant time difference in fault clearance at the two line ends. A longer auto-reclosing open time can then be useful. This extension time is controlled by setting parameter Extended t1 = On and the input PLCLOST.
RED 670
501
Section 11 Control
11.2.2.6 Long trip signal
In normal circumstances the trip command resets quickly due to fault clearing. The user can set a maximum trip pulse duration tTrip. When trip signals are longer, the auto-reclosing open time is extended by tExtended t1. If Extended t1 = Off. A long trip signal interrupts the reclosing sequence in the same way as a signal to input INHIBIT.
Extended t1
PLCLOST initiate
AND tTrip t
OR
AND
AND
Extend t1
start
AND
AND
long duration (block AR)

en05000783.vsd
Figure 245:
Control of extended auto-reclosing open time and long trip pulse detection
Reclosing checks and the reclaimreset timer
When dead time has elapsed during the auto-reclosing procedure certain conditions must be fulfilled before the CB closing command is issued. To achieve this, signals are exchanged between program modules to check that these conditions are met. In three-phase reclosing a synchronizing and/or energizing check can be used. It is possible to use a synchronism check function in the same physical device or an external one. The release signal is configured by connecting to the auto-reclosing function input SYNC. If reclosing without checking is preferred the SYNC input can be set to TRUE (set high). Another possibility is to set the output of the synchrocheck function to a permanently activated state. At confirmation from the synchrocheck, or if the reclosing is of single-phase or two-phase type, the signal passes on. At single-phase, two-phase reclosing and at three-phase high-speed reclosing started by STARTHS, synchronization is not checked, and the state of the SYNC input is disregarded. By choosing CBReadyType = CO (CB ready for a Close-Open sequence) the readiness of the circuit breaker is also checked before issuing the CB closing command. If the CB has a readiness contact of type CBReadyType = OCO (CB ready for an Open-Close-Open sequence) this condition may not be complied with after the 502 Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B RED 670
Section 11 Control
tripping and at the moment of reclosure. The Open-Close-Open condition was however checked at the start of the reclosing cycle and it is then likely that the CB is prepared for a Close-Open sequence. The synchronism check or energizing check must be fulfilled within a set time interval, tSync. If it is not, or if other conditions are not met, the reclosing is interrupted and blocked. The reclaim timer defines a time from the issue of the reclosing command, after which the reclosing function resets. Should a new trip occur during this time, it is treated as a continuation of the first fault. The reclaim timer is started when the CB closing command is given. A number of outputs for Autoreclosing state control keeps track of the actual state in the reclosing sequence.
RED 670
503
Section 11 Control
t1 1Ph t
"AR Open time" timers

OR
1P2PTO 3PHSTO 3PT1TO 3PT2TO 3PT3TO 3PT4TO 3PT5TO SYNC initiate CBREADY
From logic for reclosing programs
t1 2Ph t t1 3Ph HS t t1 3Ph t
1P2PTO
3PHSTO 3PT1TO Pulse AR
OR
AND OR AND
AND
AND
OR
Blocking AR State Control COUNTER 0 CL 1 2 3 4 R 5
AND
tSync t
Pulse AR (above) TR2P TR3P start initiate Shot 0 Shot 1 Shot 2 Shot 3 Shot 4 Shot 5 LOGIC reclosing programs
OR
AND
tReclaim t Reclaim Timer On
Shot 0 Shot 1 Shot 2 Shot 3 Shot 4 Shot 5
1PT1 2PT1 3PHS 3PT1 3PT2 3PT3 3PT4 3PT5 1 PERMIT1P PREP3P Inhibit Y
OR
INPROGR
Y INHIBIT
Blocking
OR
tInhibit t
en05000784.vsd
Figure 246:
Reclosing Reclaim and Inhibit timers
Pulsing of the CB closing command
The CB closing command, CLOSECB is a pulse with a duration set by parameter tPulse. For circuit-breakers without anti-pumping function, the close pulse cutting described below can be used. This is done by selecting the parameter
504
RED 670
Section 11 Control
CutPulse=On. In case of a new trip pulse, the closing command pulse is cut (interrupted). The minimum duration of the pulse is always 50 ms. See figure 247 When a reclosing command is issued, the appropriate reclosing operation counter is incremented. There is a counter for each type of reclosing and one for the total number of reclosing commands issued.
tPulse **) AND OR
pulse initiate
CLOSECB
50 ms
1PT1 2PT1 3PT1 3PT2 3PT3 3PT4 3PT5 RSTCOUNT **) Only if "CutPulse" = On
AND
counter
COUNT1P COUNT2P COUNT3P1 COUNT3P2 COUNT3P3 COUNT3P4 COUNT3P5 COUNTAR
AND
counter
AND
counter
AND
counter
AND
counter
AND
counter
AND
counter counter
en05000785.vsd
Figure 247:
Pulsing of closing command and driving the operation counters
After the reclosing command the reclaim timer tReclaim starts running for the set time. If no tripping occurs within this time, the auto-reclosing will reset. If a new trip occurs after the CB closing command, and a new input signal START or TRSOTF appears, the output UNSUCCL (unsuccessful closing) is set high. The timers for the first shot can no longer be started. Depending on the setting for the number of reclosing shots, further shots may be made or the reclosing sequence will RED 670 Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B 505
Transient fault
Permanent fault and reclosing unsuccessful signal
Section 11 Control
be ended. After the reclaim time has elapsed, the auto-reclosing function resets but the CB remains open. The CB closed data at the CBPOS input will be missing. Because of this, the reclosing function will not be ready for a new reclosing cycle. Normally the signal UNSUCCL appears when a new trip and start is received after the last reclosing shot has been made and the auto-reclosing function is blocked. The signal resets once the reclaim time has elapsed. The unsuccessful signal can also be made to depend on CB position input. The parameter UnsucClByCBChk should then be set to CBCheck, and a timer tUnsucCl should also be set. If the CB does not respond to the closing command and does not close, but remains open, the output UNSUCCL is set high after time tUnsucCl.
initiate block start
AND
OR
AND
UNSUCCL
shot 0 UnsucClByCBchk = CBcheck
Pulse AR (Closing) CBPOS
OR AND
tUnsucCl t
AND
CBclosed
eno5000786.vsd
Figure 248:
Issue of signal UNSUCCL, unsuccessful reclosing
Automatic continuation of the reclosing sequence
The auto-reclosing function can be programmed to proceed to the following reclosing shots (if selected) even if the start signals are not received from the protection functions, but the breaker is still not closed. This is done by setting parameter AutoCont = On and tAutoContWait to the required delay for the function to proceed without a new start.
506
RED 670
Section 11 Control
tAutoContWait t
AND
CLOSECB
AND
S Q R
AND
CBPOS
CBClosed
OR
START
OR
initiate
en05000787.vsd
Figure 249:
Automatic proceeding of shot 2 to 5
StartInitiation of reclosing from CB open information
If a user wants to apply starting auto-reclosing from CB open position instead of from protection trip signals, the function offers such a possibility. This starting mode is selected by a setting parameter StartByCBOpen = On. One needs then to block reclosing at all manual trip operations. Typically one also set CBAuxContType = NormClosed and connect a CB auxiliary contact of type NC (normally closed, 52b) to inputs CBPOS and START. When the signal changes from CB closed to CB open an auto-reclosing start pulse of limited length is generated and latched in the function, subject to the usual checks. Then the reclosing sequence continues as usual. One needs to connect signals from manual tripping and other functions, which shall prevent reclosing, to the input INHIBIT.
RED 670
507
Section 11 Control
StartByCBOpen = On 1 START STARTHS

AND
AND 100 ms AND 100 ms AND
start
en05000788.vsd
Figure 250:
Pulsing of the start inputs at "StartByCBOpen=On"
11.2.2.7
Time sequence diagrams

Some examples of the timing of internal and external signals at typical transient and permanent faults are shown below in figures 251 to 254.
Fault
CB POS
Closed Open Closed
CB READY START SYNC READY INPROG 1PT1 ACTIVE CLOSE CB PREP3P SUCCL
Time t1 1Ph tPulse (Trip) tReclaim
en04000196.vsd
Figure 251:
Transient single-phase fault. Single -phase reclosing
508
RED 670
Section 11 Control
Fault
CB POS
Closed Open
CB READY START TR3P SYNC READY INPROGR 3PT1 3PT2 ACTIVE CLOSE CB PREP3P UNSUCCL
t1 3Ph (Trip)
Open
t2 3Ph tReclaim tPulse tPulse
Time
en04000197.vsd
Figure 252:
Permanent fault. Three-phase trip. Two-shot reclosing
RED 670
509
Section 11 Control
Fault
AR01-CBCLOSED AR01-CBREADY(CO) AR01-START AR01-TR3P AR01-SYNC AR01-READY AR01-INPROGR AR01-1PT1 AR01-T1 AR01-T2 AR01-CLOSECB AR01-P3P AR01-UNSUC
tReclaim t1s
en04000198.vsd
Figure 253:
Permanent single-phase fault. Program 1/2/3ph, single-phase single-shot reclosing
Fault
AR01-CBCLOSED AR01-CBREADY(CO) AR01-START AR01-TR3P AR01-SYNC AR01-READY AR01-INPROGR AR01-1PT1 AR01-T1 AR01-T2 AR01-CLOSECB AR01-P3P AR01-UNSUC
tReclaim t1s t2
en04000199.vsd
Figure 254:
Permanent single-phase fault. Program 1ph + 3ph or 1/2ph + 3ph, two-shot reclosing
510
RED 670
Section 11 Control 11.2.3 Function block

AR01SMBRREC_79 ON BLOCKED OFF SETON BLKON READY BLKOFF ACTIVE RESET SUCCL INHIBIT UNSUCCL START INPROGR STARTHS 1PT1 TRSOTF 2PT1 SKIPHS 3PT1 ZONESTEP 3PT2 TR2P 3PT3 TR3P 3PT4 THOLHOLD 3PT5 CBREADY PERMIT1P CBPOS PREP3P PLCLOST CLOSECB SYNC WFMASTER WAIT COUNT1P RSTCOUNT COUNT2P MODEINT COUNT3P1 COUNT3P2 COUNT3P3 COUNT3P4 COUNT3P5 COUNTAR MODE en06000189.vsd
Figure 255:
AR function block
11.2.4

Table 283:
Signal ON OFF BLKON BLKOFF RESET INHIBIT START STARTHS TRSOTF SKIPHS ZONESTEP TR2P TR3P THOLHOLD CBREADY Table continued on next page
Input signals for the SMBRREC_79 (AR01-) function block

Description Switches the AR On (at Operation = ExternalCtrl) Switches the AR Off (at Operation = ExternalCtrl) Sets the AR in blocked state Releases the AR from the blocked state Resets the AR to initial conditions Interrupts and inhibits reclosing sequence Reclosing sequence starts by a protection trip signal Start HS reclosing without SC: t13PhHS Makes AR to continue to shots 2-5 at a trip from SOTF Will skip the high speed shot and continue on delayed shots Coordination between local AR and down stream devices Signal to the AR that a two-phase tripping occurred Signal to the AR that a three-phase tripping occurred Hold the AR in wait state CB must be ready for CO/OCO operation to allow start / close
RED 670
511
Section 11 Control
Signal CBPOS PLCLOST SYNC WAIT RSTCOUNT MODEINT Description Status of the circuit breaker Closed/Open Power line carrier or other form of permissive signal lost Synchronizing check fulfilled (for 3Ph attempts) Wait for master (in Multi-breaker arrangements) Resets all counters Integer input used to set the reclosingMode, alternative to setting
Table 284:
Signal BLOCKED SETON READY ACTIVE SUCCL UNSUCCL INPROGR 1PT1 2PT1 3PT1 3PT2 3PT3 3PT4 3PT5 PERMIT1P PREP3P CLOSECB WFMASTER COUNT1P COUNT2P COUNT3P1 COUNT3P2 COUNT3P3 COUNT3P4 COUNT3P5 COUNTAR MODE
Output signals for the SMBRREC_79 (AR01-) function block

Description The AR is in blocked state The AR operation is switched on, operative Indicates that the AR function is ready for a new sequence Reclosing sequence in progress Activated if CB closes during the time tUnsucCl Reclosing unsuccessful, signal resets after the reclaim time Reclosing shot in progress, activated during open time Single-phase reclosing is in progress, shot 1 Two-phase reclosing is in progress, shot 1 Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 1 Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 2 Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 3 Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 4 Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 5 Permit single-phase trip, inverse signal to PREP3P Prepare three-phase trip, control of the next trip operation Closing command for CB Signal to Slave issued by Master for sequential reclosing Counting the number of single-phase reclosing shots Counting the number of two-phase reclosing shots Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 1 Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 2 Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 3 Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 4 Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 5 Counting total number of reclosing shots Integer output for reclosing mode
512
RED 670
Section 11 Control 11.2.5 Setting parameters

Table 285:
Parameter Operation
Basic parameter group settings for the SMBRREC_79 (AR01-) function

Range Off External ctrl On 3 phase 1/2/3ph 1/2ph 1ph+1*2ph 1/2ph+1*3ph 1ph+1*2/3ph 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Step Default External ctrl Unit Description Off, ExternalCtrl, On
ARMode
1/2/3ph
The AR mode selection e.g. 3ph, 1/3ph
t1 1Ph t1 3Ph t1 3PhHS
0.001 0.001 0.001
1.000 6.000 0.400
s s s
Open time for shot 1, single-phase Open time for shot 1, delayed reclosing 3ph Open time for shot 1, high speed reclosing 3ph Duration of the reclaim time Maximum wait time for synchrocheck OK Maximum trip pulse duration Duration of the circuit breaker closing pulse Min time that CB must be closed before new sequence allows Wait time for CB before indicating Unsuccessful/ Successful Priority selection between adjacent terminals None/Low/ High Maximum wait time for release from Master
tReclaim tSync tTrip tPulse tCBClosedMin
0.00 - 6000.00 0.00 - 6000.00 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.00 - 6000.00
0.01 0.01 0.001 0.001 0.01
60.00 30.00 0.200 0.200 5.00
s s s s s
tUnsucCl
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
30.00
Priority
None Low High 0.00 - 6000.00
None
tWaitForMaster
0.01
60.00
RED 670
513
Section 11 Control
Table 286:
Parameter NoOfShots
Advanced parameter group settings for the SMBRREC_79 (AR01-) function

Range 1 2 3 4 5 Off On NormClosed NormOpen CO OCO 0.000 - 60.000 0.00 - 6000.00 0.00 - 6000.00 0.00 - 6000.00 0.00 - 6000.00 Off On 0.000 - 60.000 Step Default 1 Unit Description Max number of reclosing shots 1-5
StartByCBOpen
Off
To be set ON if AR is to be started by CB open position Select the CB aux contact type NC/NO for CBPOS input Select type of circuit breaker ready signal CO/OCO Open time for shot 1, two-phase Open time for shot 2, three-phase Open time for shot 3, three-phase Open time for shot 4, three-phase Open time for shot 5, three-phase Extended open time at loss of permissive channel Off/On 3Ph Dead time is extended with this value at loss of perm ch Inhibit reclosing reset time Shorten closing pulse at a new trip Off/On Advance to next shot if CB has been closed during dead time Continue with next reclosing-shot if breaker did not close Wait time after close command before proceeding to next shot
CBAuxContType
NormOpen
CBReadyType
CO
t1 2Ph t2 3Ph t3 3Ph t4 3Ph t5 3Ph Extended t1
0.001 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 -
1.000 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 Off
s s s s s -
tExtended t1
0.001
0.500
tInhibit CutPulse Follow CB
0.000 - 60.000 Off On Off On Off On 0.000 - 60.000
0.001 -
5.000 Off Off
s -
AutoCont
Off
tAutoContWait
0.001
2.000
514
RED 670
Section 11 Control
Parameter UnsucClByCBChk Range NoCBCheck CB check Off On Off On Step Default NoCBCheck Unit Description Unsuccessful closing signal obtained by checking CB position Block AR at unsuccessful reclosing Coordination of down stream devices to local prot unit's AR
BlockByUnsucCl
Off
ZoneSeqCoord
Off
11.2.6
Technical data
Table 287:
Function Number of autoreclosing shots Number of autoreclosing programs Autoreclosing open time: shot 1 - t1 1Ph shot 1 - t1 2Ph shot 1 - t1 3PhHS shot 1 - t1 3PhDld shot 2 - t2 shot 3 - t3 shot 4 - t4 shot 5 - t5 Extended autorecloser open time Autorecloser maximum wait time for sync Maximum trip pulse duration Inhibit reset time Reclaim time Minimum time CB must be closed before AR becomes ready for autoreclosing cycle Circuit breaker closing pulse length CB check time before unsuccessful Wait for master release Wait time after close command before proceeding to next shot
Autorecloser (RREC, 79)

Range or value 1-5 8 (0.000-60.000) s Accuracy 0.5% 10 ms
(0.00-6000.00) s
(0.000-60.000) s (0.00-6000.00) s (0.000-60.000) s (0.000-60.000) s (0.00-6000.00) s (0.00-6000.00) s
(0.000-60.000) s (0.00-6000.00) s (0.00-6000.00) s (0.000-60.000) s
RED 670
515
Section 11 Control
11.3
11.3.1
Apparatus control (APC)

Introduction
The apparatus control is a function for control and supervision of circuit breakers, disconnectors and earthing switches within a bay. Permission to operate is given after evaluation of conditions from other functions such as interlocking, synchrocheck, operator place selection and external or internal blockings.
11.3.2
A bay can handle, for example a power line, a transformer, a reactor, or a capacitor bank. The different primary apparatuses within the bay can be controlled via the apparatus control function directly by the operator or indirectly by automatic sequences. Because a primary apparatus can be allocated to many functions within a Substation Automation system, the object-oriented approach with a function module that handles the interaction and status of each process object ensures consistency in the process information used by higher-level control functions. Primary apparatuses such as breakers and disconnectors are controlled and supervised by one software module (SCSWI) each. Because the number and type of signals connected to a breaker and a disconnector are almost the same, the same software is used to handle these two types of apparatuses. The software module is connected to the physical process in the switchyard via an interface module by means of a number of digital inputs and outputs. One type of interface module is intended for a circuit breaker (SXCBR) and another type is intended for a disconnector or earthing switch (SXSWI). Four types of function blocks are available to cover most of the control and supervision within the bay. These function blocks are interconnected to form a control function reflecting the switchyard configuration. The total number used depends on the switchyard configuration. These four types are: Bay control QCBAY Switch controller SCSWI Circuit breaker SXCBR Circuit switch SXSWI
The three latter functions are logical nodes according to IEC 61850. The function blocks LocalRemote and LocRemControl, to handle the local/remote switch, and the function blocks QCRSV and RESIN, for the reservation function, also belong to the apparatus control function. The principles of operation, function block, input and output signals and setting parameters for all these functions are described below.
516
RED 670

11.3.3.1
Bay control (QCBAY)

Introduction
This function is used to handle the selection of the operator place per bay. The bay control function also provides blocking functions that can be distributed to different apparatuses within the bay.
11.3.3.2
The functionality of the bay control function is not defined in the IEC 6185081 standard, which means that the function is a vendor specific logical node. The function sends information about the Permitted Source To Operate (PSTO) and blocking conditions to other functions within the bay e.g. switch control functions, voltage control functions and measurement functions.
Local panel switch
The local panel switch is a switch that defines the operator place selection. The switch connected to this function can have three positions remote/local/off. The positions are here defined so that remote means that operation is allowed from station/remote level and local from the IED level. The local/remote switch is normally situated on the control/protection IED itself, which means that the position of the switch and its validity information are connected internally, and not via I/O boards. When the switch is mounted separately on the IED the signals are connected to the function via I/O boards. When the local panel switch is in Off position all commands from remote and local level will be ignored. If the position for the local/remote switch is not valid the PSTO output will always be set to faulty state (3), which means no possibility to operate. To adapt the signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch, the function blocks LocalRemote and LocRemControl are needed and connected to QCBAY. For more information, see section "Local/Remote switch (LocalRemote, LocRemControl)".
Permitted Source To Operate (PSTO)
The actual state of the operator place is presented by the value of the Permitted Source To Operate, PSTO signal. The PSTO value is evaluated from the local/remote switch position according to table 288. In addition, there is one configuration parameter that affects the value of the PSTO signal. If the parameter AllPSTOValid is set and LRswitch position is in Local or Remote state, the PSTO value is set to 5 (all), i.e. it is permitted to operate from both local and remote level without any priority. When the external panel switch is in Off position the PSTO value shows the actual state of switch, i.e. 0. In this case it is not possible to control anything.
RED 670
517
Section 11 Control
Table 288:
Local panel switch positions 0 = Off 1 = Local 1 = Local 2 = Remote 2 = Remote 3 = Faulty
PSTO values for different Local panel switch positions

PSTO value AllPSTOValid (configuration parameter) -FALSE TRUE FALSE TRUE -Possible locations that shall be able to operate Not possible to operate Local Panel Local or Remote level without any priority Remote level Local or Remote level without any priority Not possible to operate
0 1 5 2 5 3
Blockings
The blocking states for position indications and commands are intended to provide the possibility for the user to make common blockings for the functions configured within a complete bay. The blocking facilities provided by the bay control function are the following: Blocking of position indications, BL_UPD. This input will block all inputs related to apparatus positions for all configured functions within the bay. Blocking of commands, BL_CMD. This input will block all commands for all configured functions within the bay. Blocking of function, BLOCK, signal from DO (Data Object) Behavior (IEC 6185081). If DO Behavior is set to "blocked" it means that the function is active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected and functional and configuration data is visible.
The switching of the Local/Remote switch requires at least system operator level. The password will be requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have been defined in the IED. Otherwise the default authority level, SuperUser, can handle the control without LogOn. The users and passwords are defined with the UMT.
11.3.3.3
Function block
CB01QCBAY LR_OFF LR_LOC LR_REM LR_VALID BL_UPD BL_CMD PSTO UPD_BLKD CMD_BLKD
en05000796.vsd
Figure 256:
CB function block
518
RED 670
Section 11 Control
11.3.3.4 Input and output signals
Table 289:
Signal LR_OFF LR_LOC LR_REM LR_VALID BL_UPD BL_CMD
Input signals for the QCBAY (CB01-) function block

Description External Local/Remote switch is in Off position External Local/Remote switch is in Local position External Local/Remote switch is in Remote position Data representing the L/R switch position is valid Steady signal to block the position updates Steady signal to block the command
Table 290:
Signal PSTO UPD_BLKD CMD_BLKD
Output signals for the QCBAY (CB01-) function block

Description The value for the operator place allocation The update of position is blocked The function is blocked for commands
11.3.3.5
Setting parameters
Table 291:
Parameter AllPSTOValid
General settings for the QCBAY (CB01-) function

Range Priority No priority Step Default Priority Unit Description The priority of originators
11.3.4
11.3.4.1
Local/Remote switch (LocalRemote, LocRemControl)

Introduction
The signals from the local LCD HMI or from an external local/remote switch are applied via function blocks LocalRemote and LocRemControl to the Bay control QCBAY function block. A parameter in function block LocalRemote is set to choose if the switch signals are coming from the local LCD HMI or from an external hardware switch connected via binary inputs.
11.3.4.2
The function block LocalRemote handles the signals coming from the local/remote switch. The connections are seen in figure 257, where the inputs on function block LocalRemote are connected to binary inputs if an external switch is used. When a local LCD HMI is used, the inputs are not used and are set to FALSE in the
RED 670
519
Section 11 Control
configuration. The outputs from the LocalRemote function block control the output PSTO (Permitted Source To Operate) on QCBAY.
LR01LocalRemote CTRLOFF OFF LOCCTRL LOCAL REMCTRL REMOTE LHMICTRL VALID CB01QCBAY LR_OFF PSTO LR_LOC UPD_BLKD LR_REM CMD_BLKD LR_VALID BL_UPD BL_CMD CB02QCBAY LR_OFF PSTO LR_LOC UPD_BLKD LR_REM CMD_BLKD LR_VALID BL_UPD BL_CMD
LR02LocalRemote CTRLOFF OFF LOCCTRL LOCAL REMCTRL REMOTE LHMICTRL VALID
LRC1LocRemControl PSTO1 HMICTR1 PSTO2 HMICTR2 PSTO3 HMICTR3 PSTO4 HMICTR4 PSTO5 HMICTR5 PSTO6 HMICTR6 PSTO7 HMICTR7 PSTO8 HMICTR8 PSTO9 HMICTR9 PSTO10 HMICTR10 PSTO11 HMICTR11 PSTO12 HMICTR12 en05000250.vsd
Figure 257:
Configuration for the local/remote handling for a local LCD HMI with two bays and two screen pages
If the IED contains control functions for several bays, the local/remote position can be different for the included bays. When the local LCD HMI is used the position of the local/remote switch can be different depending on which single line diagram screen page that is presented on the local HMI. The function block LocRemControl controls the presentation of the LEDs for the local/remote position to applicable bay and screen page. The switching of the Local/Remote switch requires at least system operator level. The password will be requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have been defined in the IED. Otherwise the default authority level, SuperUser, can handle the control without LogOn. The users and passwords are defined with the UMT.
11.3.4.3
Function block
520
RED 670
Section 11 Control
LR01LocalRemote CT RLOFF OFF LOCCT RL LOCAL REMCT RL REMOT E LHMICT RL VALID en05000360.vsd
Figure 258:
LR function block
LRC1LocRemControl PST O1 HMICT R1 PST O2 HMICT R2 PST O3 HMICT R3 PST O4 HMICT R4 PST O5 HMICT R5 PST O6 HMICT R6 PST O7 HMICT R7 PST O8 HMICT R8 PST O9 HMICT R9 PST O10 HMICT R10 PST O11 HMICT R11 PST O12 HMICT R12 en05000361.vsd
Figure 259:
LRC function block
11.3.4.4

Table 292:
Signal CTRLOFF LOCCTRL REMCTRL LHMICTRL
Input signals for the LocalRemote (LR01-) function block

Description Disable control Local in control Remote in control LHMI control
Table 293:
Signal OFF LOCAL REMOTE VALID
Output signals for the LocalRemote (LR01-) function block

Description Control is disabled Local control is activated Remote control is activated Outputs are valid
RED 670
521
Section 11 Control
Table 294:
Signal PSTO1 PSTO2 PSTO3 PSTO4 PSTO5 PSTO6 PSTO7 PSTO8 PSTO9 PSTO10 PSTO11 PSTO12
Input signals for the LocRemControl (LRC1-) function block

Description PSTO input channel 1 PSTO input channel 2 PSTO input channel 3 PSTO input channel 4 PSTO input channel 5 PSTO input channel 6 PSTO input channel 7 PSTO input channel 8 PSTO input channel 9 PSTO input channel 10 PSTO input channel 11 PSTO input channel 12
Table 295:
Signal HMICTR1 HMICTR2 HMICTR3 HMICTR4 HMICTR5 HMICTR6 HMICTR7 HMICTR8 HMICTR9 HMICTR10 HMICTR11 HMICTR12
Output signals for the LocRemControl (LRC1-) function block

Description Bitmask output 1 to local remote LHMI input Bitmask output 2 to local remote LHMI input Bitmask output 3 to local remote LHMI input Bitmask output 4 to local remote LHMI input Bitmask output 5 to local remote LHMI input Bitmask output 6 to local remote LHMI input Bitmask output 7 to local remote LHMI input Bitmask output 8 to local remote LHMI input Bitmask output 9 to local remote LHMI input Bitmask output 10 to local remote LHMI input Bitmask output 11 to local remote LHMI input Bitmask output 12 to local remote LHMI input
11.3.4.5
Setting parameters
Table 296:
Parameter ControlMode
Basic general settings for the LocalRemote (LR01-) function

Range Internal LR-switch External LRswitch Step Default Internal LR-switch Unit Description Control mode for internal/external LRswitch
522
RED 670

11.3.5.1
Switch controller (SCSWI)

Introduction
The Switch controller (SCSWI) initializes and supervises all functions to properly select and operate switching primary apparatuses. The Switch controller may handle and operate on one three-phase device or three one-phase switching devices.
11.3.5.2
The function is provided with verification checks for the select - execute sequence, i.e. checks the conditions prior each step of the operation. The involved functions for these condition verifications are interlocking, reservation, blockings and synchrocheck.
Command handling
Two types of command models can be used. The two command models are "direct with enhanced security" and "SBO (Select-Before-Operate) with enhanced security". Which one of these two command models that are used is defined by the parameter CtlModel. The meaning with "direct with enhanced security" model is that no select is required. The meaning with "SBO with enhanced security" model is that a select is required before execute. In this function only commands with enhanced security is supported regarding changing of the position. With enhanced security means that the command sequence is supervised in three steps, the selection, command evaluation and the supervision of position. Each step ends up with a pulsed signal to indicate that the respective step in the command sequence is finished. If an error occurs in one of the steps in the command sequence, the sequence is terminated and the error is mapped into the enumerated variable "cause" attribute belonging to the pulsed response signal for the IEC61850 communication. The last cause L_CAUSE can be read from the function block and used for example at commissioning. The meaning of the cause signals can be found in table 2. There is not any relation between the command direction and the actual position. For example, if the switch is in close position it is possible to execute a close command. Before an executing command, an evaluation of the position is done. If the parameter PosDependent is true and the position is in intermediate state or in bad state no executing command is send. If the parameter is false the execution command is send independent of the position value.
Evaluation of position
In the case when there are three one-phase switches connected to the switch control function, the switch control will "merge" the position of the three switches to the
RED 670
523
Section 11 Control
resulting three-phase position. In the case when the position differ between the onephase switches, following principles will be applied:
All switches in open position: All switches in close position: One switch =open, two switches= close (or inversely): Any switch in intermediate position: Any switch in bad state: switch control position = open switch control position = close switch control position = intermediate switch control position = intermediate switch control position = bad state
The time stamp of the output three-phase position from switch control will have the time stamp of the last changed phase when it goes to end position. When it goes to intermediate position or bad state, it will get the time stamp of the first changed phase. In addition, there is also the possibility that one of the one-phase switches will change position at any time due to a trip. Such situation is here called pole discordance and is supervised by this function. In case of a pole discordance situation, i.e. the position of the one-phase switches are not equal for a time longer than the setting tPoleDiscord, an error signal POLEDISC will be set. In the supervision phase, the switch controller function evaluates the "cause" values from the switch modules XCBR/XSWI. At error the "cause" value with highest priority is shown.
Blocking principles
The blocking signals are normally coming from the bay control function (QCBAY) and via the IEC61850 communication from the operator place. The different blocking possibilities are: Block/deblock of command. It is used to block command for operation of position. Blocking of function, BLOCK, signal from DO (Data Object) Behavior (IEC61850). If DO Behavior is set to "blocked" it means that the function is active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected and functional and configuration data is visible. The different block conditions will only affect the operation of this function, i.e. no blocking signals will be "forwarded" to other functions. The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory.
The switch controller works in conjunction with the synchrocheck and the synchronizing function SECRSYN. It is assumed that the synchrocheck function is 524 Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B RED 670
Interaction with synchrochecksynchronism-check and synchronizing functions
Section 11 Control
continuously in operation and gives the result to the SCSWI. The result from the synchrocheck function is evaluated during the close execution. If the operator performs an override of the synchrocheck, the evaluation of the synchrocheck state is omitted. When there is a positive confirmation from the synchrocheck function, the switch controller SCSWI will send the close signal EXE_CL to the switch function SXCBR. When there is no positive confirmation from the synchrocheck function, the SCSWI will send a start signal START_SY to the synchronizing function, which will send the closing command to the SXCBR when the synchronizing conditions are fulfilled, see figure 260. If no synchronizing function is included, the timer for supervision of the "synchronizing in progress signal" is set to 0, which means no start of the synchronizing function. The SCSWI will then set the attribute "blocked-bysynchrocheck" in the "cause" signal. See also the time diagram in figure 264.
SCSWI EXE_CL OR SXCBR CLOSE
SYNC_OK START_SY SY_INPRO SECRSYN . CLOSE CB Synchro Check Synchronizing function
en05000091.vsd
Figure 260:
Example of interaction between SCSWI, SECRSYN (synchrocheck and synchronizing function) and SXCBR function
Time diagrams
The SCSWI function has timers for evaluating different time supervision conditions. These timers are explained here. The timer tSelect is used for supervising the time between the select and the execute command signal, i.e. the time the operator has to perform the command execution after the selection of the object to operate.
RED 670
525
Section 11 Control
select execute command tSelect timer t1 t1>tSelect, then longoperation-time in 'cause' is set
en05000092.vsd
Figure 261:
tSelect
The parameter tResResponse is used to set the maximum allowed time to make the reservation, i.e. the time between reservation request and the feedback reservation granted from all bays involved in the reservation function.
select reservation request RES_RQ reservation granted RES_GRT command termination tResResponse timer t1 t1>tResResponse, then 1-of-n-control in 'cause' is set
en05000093.vsd
Figure 262:
tResResponse
The timer tExecutionFB supervises the time between the execute command and the command termination, see figure 263.
526
RED 670
Section 11 Control
execute command position L1 open close position L2 open close position L3 open close cmd termination L1 cmd termination L2 cmd termination L3 cmd termination position open close tExecutionFB timer t1>tExecutionFB, then long-operation-time in 'cause' is set *
t1
* The cmd termination will be delayed one execution sample.

en05000094.vsd
Figure 263:
tExecutionFB
The parameter tSynchrocheck is used to define the maximum allowed time between the execute command and the input SYNC_OK to become true. If SYNC_OK=true at the time the execute command signal is received, the timer "tSynchrocheck" will not start. The start signal for the synchronizing is obtained if the synchrocheck conditions are not fulfilled.
execute command SYNC_OK tSynchrocheck START_SY SY_INPRO tSynchronizing t2 t2>tSynchronizing, then blocked-by-synchrocheck in 'cause' is set
en05000095.vsd
t1
Figure 264:
tSynchroCheck and tSynchronizing
RED 670
527
Section 11 Control
Error handling
Depending on what error that occurs during the command sequence the error signal will be set with a value. Table 297 describes vendor specific cause values in addition to these specified in IEC 61850-8-1 standard. The list of values of the cause are in order of priority. The values are available over the IEC 61850. An output L_CAUSE on the function block indicates the latest value of the error during the command.
Table 297:
Apparatus control function 22 23 24 25 30 31 32 33 34 35
Values for "cause" signal in priority order

Description wrongCTLModel blockedForCommand blocked-for-open-command blocked-for-close-command longOperationTime switch-not-start-moving persistent-intermediate-state switch-returned-to-initial-position switch-in-bad-state not-expected-final-position
11.3.5.3
Function block
CS01SCSWI BLOCK PSTO L_SEL L_OPEN L_CLOSE AU_OPEN AU_CLOSE BL_CMD RES_GRT RES_EXT SY_INPRO SYNC_OK EN_OPEN EN_CLOSE XPOS1 XPOS2 XPOS3 EXE_OP EXE_CL SELECTED RES_RQ START_SY POSITION OPENPOS CLOSEPOS POLEDISC CMD_BLK L_CAUSE XOUT
en05000337.vsd
Figure 265:
CS function block
11.3.5.4
528
RED 670
Section 11 Control
Table 298:
Signal BLOCK PSTO L_SEL L_OPEN L_CLOSE AU_OPEN AU_CLOSE BL_CMD RES_GRT RES_EXT SY_INPRO SYNC_OK EN_OPEN EN_CLOSE XPOS1 XPOS2 XPOS3
Input signals for the SCSWI (CS01-) function block

Description Block of function Operator place selection Select signal from local panel Open signal from local panel Close signal from local panel Used for local automation function Used for local automation function Steady signal for block of the command Positive acknowledge that all reservations are made Reservation is made externally Synchronizing function in progress Closing is permitted at set to true by the synchrocheck Enables open operation Enables close operation Group signal for XCBR input Group signal for XCBR input Group signal for XCBR input
Table 299:
Signal EXE_OP EXE_CL SELECTED RES_RQ START_SY POSITION OPENPOS CLOSEPOS POLEDISC CMD_BLK L_CAUSE XOUT
Output signals for the SCSWI (CS01-) function block

Description Execute command for open direction Execute command for close direction The select conditions are fulfilled Request signal to the reservation function Starts the synchronizing function Position indication Open position indication Closed position indication The positions for poles L1-L3 are not equal after a set time Commands are blocked Latest value of the error indication during command Execution information to XCBR/XSWI
11.3.5.5
Setting parameters
RED 670
529
Section 11 Control
Table 300:
Parameter CtlModel
Basic general settings for the SCSWI (CS01-) function

Range Dir Norm SBO Enh (ABB) Dir Norm (ABB) SBO Enh Always permitted Not perm at 00/11 0.000 - 60.000 Step Default SBO Enh Unit Description Specifies the type for control model according to IEC 61850 Permission to operate depending on the position Max time between select and execute signals Allowed time from reservation request to reservation granted Allowed time for synchrocheck to fulfil close conditions Supervision time to get the signal synchronizing in progress Max time from command execution to termination Allowed time to have discrepancy between the poles
PosDependent
Always permitted
tSelect
0.001
30.000
tResResponse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
tSynchrocheck
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
10.00
tSynchronizing
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
tExecutionFB
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
30.000
tPoleDiscord
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
2.000
11.3.6
11.3.6.1
Circuit breaker (SXCBR)

Introduction
The purpose of this function is to provide the actual status of positions and to perform the control operations, i.e. pass all the commands to primary apparatuses in the form of circuit breakers via output boards and to supervise the switching operation and position.
11.3.6.2
The intended user of this function is other functions such as e.g. Switch controller, protection functions, autorecloser function or an IEC 61850 client residing in another IED or the operator place. This switch function executes commands, evaluate block conditions and evaluate different time supervision conditions. Only if all conditions indicate a switch operation to be allowed, the function performs the execution command. In case of erroneous conditions, the function indicates an appropriate "cause" value.
530
RED 670
Section 11 Control
The function has an operation counter for closing and opening commands. The counter value can be read remotely from the operator place. The value is reset from a binary input or remotely from the operator place.
Local/Remote switch
One binary input signal LR_SWI is included in this function to indicate the local/ remote switch position from switchyard provided via the I/O board. If this signal is set to TRUE it means that change of position is allowed only from switchyard level. If the signal is set to FALSE it means that command from IED or higher level is permitted. When the signal is set to TRUE all commands (for change of position) from internal IED clients are rejected, even trip commands from protection functions are rejected. The functionality of the local/remote switch is described in figure 266.
Local= Operation at switch yard level
TR
UE
From I/O
switchLR
FAL SE
Remote= Operation at IED or higher level

en05000096.vsd
Figure 266:
Local/Remote switch
Blocking principles
The function includes several blocking principles. The basic principle for all blocking signals is that they will affect commands from all other clients e.g. operators place, protection functions, autoreclosure etc. The blocking possibilities are: Block/deblock for open command. It is used to block operation for open command. Note that this block signal also affects the input OPEN for immediate command. Block/deblock for close command. It is used to block operation for close command. Note that this block signal also affects the input CLOSE for immediate command. Update block/deblock of positions. It is used to block the updating of position values. Other signals related to the position will be reset. Blocking of function, BLOCK, signal from DO (Data Object) Behavior (IEC61850). If DO Behavior is set to "blocked" it means that the function is active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected and functional and configuration data is visible.
The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory.
RED 670
531
Section 11 Control
Substitution
The substitution part in this function is used for manual set of the position for the switch. The typical use of substitution is that an operator enters a manual value because that the real process value is erroneous of some reason. The function will then use the manually entered value instead of the value for positions determined by the process. It is always possible to make a substitution, independently of the position indication and the status information of the I/O board. When substitution is enabled, the position values are blocked for updating and other signals related to the position are reset. The substituted values are stored in a non-volatile memory.
There are two timers for supervising of the execute phase, tStartMove and tIntermediate. tStartMove supervises that the primary device starts moving after the execute output pulse is sent. tIntermediate defines the maximum allowed time for intermediate position. Figure 267 explains these two timers during the execute phase.
EXE_CL Close pulse duration AdaptivePulse = TRUE
Time diagrams
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
tStartMove timer t1 tStartMove
if t1 > tStartMove then "switch-not-start-moving" attribute in 'cause' is set
tIntermediate timer t2 tIntermediate
if t2 > tIntermediate then "persisting-intermediate-state" attribute in 'cause' is set
en05000097.vsd
Figure 267:
The timers tStartMove and tIntermediate
The timers tOpenPulse and tClosePulse are the length of the execute output pulses to be sent to the primary equipment. Note that the output pulses for open and close command can have different pulse lengths. The pulses can also be set to be adaptive with the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse. Figure 268 shows the principle of the execute output pulse. The adaptively parameter will have affect on both execute output pulses.
532
RED 670
Section 11 Control
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
EXE_CL tClosePulse
AdaptivePulse=FALSE
EXE_CL tClosePulse
AdaptivePulse=TRUE
en05000098.vsd
Figure 268:
Execute output pulse
If the pulse is set to be adaptive, it is not possible for the pulse to exceed tOpenPulse or tClosePulse. The execute output pulses are reset when: the new expected final position is reached and the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set to true the timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed an error occurs due to the switch does not start moving, i.e. tStartMove has elapsed. If the start position indicates bad state (OPENPOS=1 and CLOSEPOS =1) when a command is executed the execute output pulse resets only when timer "tOpenPulse" or "tClosePulse" has elapsed. There is one exception from the first item above. If the primary device is in open position and an open command is executed or if the primary device is in close position and a close command is executed. In these cases, with the additional condition that the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is true, the execute output pulse is always activated and resets when tStartMove has elapsed. If the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set to false the execution output remains active until the pulse duration timer has elapsed. An example of when a primary device is open and an open command is executed is shown in figure 269 .
RED 670
533
Section 11 Control
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
EXE_OP tOpenPulse EXE_OP tOpenPulse tStartMove timer
AdaptivePulse=FALSE
AdaptivePulse=TRUE
en05000099.vsd
Figure 269:
Open command with open position indication
Error handling
Table 301:
Vendor specific cause values for Apparatus control in priority order

534
RED 670
Section 11 Control
XC01SXCBR GRPConABS1 EXE_OP GRPConABS2 EXE_CL SUBSTED OP_BLKD CL_BLKD UPD_BLKD POSITION OPENPOS CLOSEPOS TR_POS CNT_VAL L_CAUSE
BLOCK LR_SWI OPEN CLOSE BL_OPEN BL_CLOSE BL_UPD POSOPEN POSCLOSE TR_OPEN TR_CLOSE RS_CNT XIN TERVALUE OSEVALUE PENVALUE
en05000338.vsd
Figure 270:
XC function block
11.3.6.4

Table 302:
Signal BLOCK LR_SWI OPEN CLOSE BL_OPEN BL_CLOSE BL_UPD POSOPEN POSCLOSE TR_OPEN TR_CLOSE RS_CNT XIN
Input signals for the SXCBR (XC01-) function block

Description Block of function Local/Remote switch indication from switchyard Pulsed signal used to immediately open the switch Pulsed signal used to immediately close the switch Signal to block the open command Signal to block the close command Steady signal for block of the position updating Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O Signal for open position of truck from I/O Signal for close position of truck from I/O Resets the operation counter Execution information from CSWI
Table 303:
Signal XPOS EXE_OP EXE_CL
Output signals for the SXCBR (XC01-) function block

Description Group signal for XCBR output Executes the command for open direction Executes the command for close direction
RED 670
535
Section 11 Control
Signal SUBSTED OP_BLKD CL_BLKD UPD_BLKD POSITION OPENPOS CLOSEPOS TR_POS CNT_VAL L_CAUSE Description Indication that the position is substituted Indication that the function is blocked for open commands Indication that the function is blocked for close commands The update of position indication is blocked Apparatus position indication Apparatus open position Apparatus closed position Truck position indication The value of the operation counter Latest value of the error indication during command
11.3.6.5
Setting parameters
Table 304:
Parameter tStartMove
Basic general settings for the SXCBR (XC01-) function

Range 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.100 Unit s Description Supervision time for the apparatus to move after a command Allowed time for intermediate position The output resets when a new correct end position is reached Output pulse length for open command Output pulse length for close command
tIntermediate AdaptivePulse
0.000 - 60.000 Not adaptive Adaptive
0.001 -
0.150 Not adaptive
s -
tOpenPulse tClosePulse
0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000
0.001 0.001
0.200 0.200
s s
11.3.7
11.3.7.1
Circuit switch (SXSWI)

Introduction
The purpose of this function is to provide the actual status of positions and to perform the control operations, i.e. pass all the commands to primary apparatuses in the form of disconnectors or earthing switches via output boards and to supervise the switching operation and position.
11.3.7.2
The intended user of this function is other functions such as e.g. Switch controller, protection functions, autorecloser function or a 61850 client residing in another IED
536
RED 670
Section 11 Control
or the operator place. This switch function executes commands, evaluate block conditions and evaluate different time supervision conditions. Only if all conditions indicate a switch operation to be allowed, the function performs the execution command. In case of erroneous conditions, the function indicates an appropriate "cause" value. The function has an operation counter for closing and opening commands. The counter value can be read remotely from the operator place. The value is reset from a binary input or remotely from the operator place.
Local/Remote switch
One binary input signal LR_SWI is included in this function to indicate the local/ remote switch position from switchyard provided via the I/O board. If this signal is set to TRUE it means that change of position is allowed only from switchyard level. If the signal is set to FALSE it means that command from IED or higher level is permitted. When the signal is set to TRUE all commands (for change of position) from internal IED clients are rejected, even trip commands from protection functions are rejected. The functionality of the local/remote switch is described in figure 271.
Local= Operation at switch yard level
TR
UE
From I/O
switchLR
FAL SE
Remote= Operation at IED or higher level

en05000096.vsd
Figure 271:
Local/Remote switch
Blocking principles
The function includes several blocking principles. The basic principle for all blocking signals is that they will affect commands from all other clients e.g. operators place, protection functions, autoreclosure etc. The blocking possibilities are: Block/deblock for open command. It is used to block operation for open command. Note that this block signal also affects the input OPEN for immediate command. Block/deblock for close command. It is used to block operation for close command. Note that this block signal also affects the input CLOSE for immediate command. Update block/deblock of positions. It is used to block the updating of position values. Other signals related to the position will be reset. Blocking of function, BLOCK, signal from DO (Data Object) Behavior (IEC61850). If DO Behavior is set to "blocked" it means that the function is active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected and functional and configuration data is visible. 537
RED 670
Section 11 Control
The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory. The substitution part in this function is used for manual set of the position for the switch. The typical use of substitution is that an operator enters a manual value because that the real process value is erroneous of some reason. The function will then use the manually entered value instead of the value for positions determined by the process. It is always possible to make a substitution, independently of the position indication and the status information of the I/O board. When substitution is enabled, the position values are blocked for updating and other signals related to the position are reset. The substituted values are stored in a non-volatile memory.
Substitution
There are two timers for supervising of the execute phase, tStartMove and tIntermediate. tStartMove supervises that the primary device starts moving after the execute output pulse is sent. tIntermediate defines the maximum allowed time for intermediate position. Figure 272 explains these two timers during the execute phase.
EXE_CL Close pulse duration AdaptivePulse = TRUE
Time diagrams
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
tStartMove timer t1 tStartMove
if t1 > tStartMove then "switch-not-start-moving" attribute in 'cause' is set
tIntermediate timer t2 tIntermediate
if t2 > tIntermediate then "persisting-intermediate-state" attribute in 'cause' is set
en05000097.vsd
Figure 272:
The timers tStartMove and tIntermediate
The timers tOpenPulse and tClosePulse are the length of the execute output pulses to be sent to the primary equipment. Note that the output pulses for open and close command can have different pulse lengths. The pulses can also be set to be adaptive with the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse. Figure 273 shows the principle of
538
RED 670
Section 11 Control
the execute output pulse. The adaptively parameter will have affect on both execute output pulses.
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
EXE_CL tClosePulse
AdaptivePulse=FALSE
EXE_CL tClosePulse
AdaptivePulse=TRUE
en05000098.vsd
Figure 273:
Execute output pulse
If the pulse is set to be adaptive, it is not possible for the pulse to exceed tOpenPulse or tClosePulse. The execute output pulses are reset when: the new expected final position is reached and the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set to true the timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed an error occurs due to the switch does not start moving, i.e. tStartMove has elapsed. If the start position indicates bad state (OPENPOS=1 and CLOSEPOS =1) when a command is executed the execute output pulse resets only when timer "tOpenPulse" or "tClosePulse" has elapsed. There is one exception from the first item above. If the primary device is in open position and an open command is executed or if the primary device is in close position and a close command is executed. In these cases, with the additional condition that the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is true, the execute output pulse is always activated and resets when tStartMove has elapsed. If the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set to false the execution output remains active until the pulse duration timer has elapsed. An example when a primary device is open and an open command is executed is shown in figure 274.
RED 670
539
Section 11 Control
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
EXE_OP tOpenPulse EXE_OP tOpenPulse tStartMove timer
AdaptivePulse=FALSE
AdaptivePulse=TRUE
en05000099.vsd
Figure 274:
Open command with open position indication
Error handling
Table 305:
Values for "cause" signal in priority order

540
RED 670
Section 11 Control
XS01SXSWI BLOCK LR_SWI OPEN CLOSE BL_OPEN BL_CLOSE BL_UPD POSOPEN POSCLOSE RS_CNT XIN XPOS EXE_OP EXE_CL SUBSTED OP_BLKD CL_BLKD UPD_BLKD POSITION OPENPOS CLOSEPOS CNT_VAL L_CAUSE en05000339.vsd
Figure 275:
XS function block
11.3.7.4

Table 306:
Signal BLOCK LR_SWI OPEN CLOSE BL_OPEN BL_CLOSE BL_UPD POSOPEN POSCLOSE RS_CNT XIN
Input signals for the SXSWI (XS01-) function block

Description Block of function Local/Remote switch indication from switchyard Pulsed signal used to immediately open the switch Pulsed signal used to immediately close the switch Signal to block the open command Signal to block the close command Steady signal for block of the position updating Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O Resets the operation counter Execution information from CSWI
Table 307:
Signal XPOS EXE_OP EXE_CL SUBSTED OP_BLKD CL_BLKD UPD_BLKD
Output signals for the SXSWI (XS01-) function block

Description Group signal for XSWI output Executes the command for open direction Executes the command for close direction Indication that the position is substituted Indication that the function is blocked for open commands Indication that the function is blocked for close commands The update of position indication is blocked
RED 670
541
Section 11 Control
Signal POSITION OPENPOS CLOSEPOS CNT_VAL L_CAUSE Description Apparatus position indication Apparatus open position Apparatus closed position The value of the operation counter Latest value of the error indication during command
11.3.7.5
Setting parameters
Table 308:
Parameter tStartMove
Basic general settings for the SXSWI (XS01-) function

Range 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 Default 3.000 Unit s Description Supervision time for the apparatus to move after a command Allowed time for intermediate position The output resets when a new correct end position is reached Output pulse length for open command Output pulse length for close command Switch Type
tIntermediate AdaptivePulse
0.000 - 60.000 Not adaptive Adaptive
0.001 -
15.000 Not adaptive
s -
tOpenPulse tClosePulse SwitchType
0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Load Break Disconnector Earthing Switch HS Earthing Switch
0.001 0.001 -
0.200 0.200 Disconnector
s s -
11.3.8
11.3.8.1
Bay reserve (QCRSV)

Introduction
The purpose of the reservation function is primarily to transfer interlocking information between IEDs in a safe way and to prevent double operation in a bay, switchyard part, or complete substation.
11.3.8.2
The function block QCRSV handles the reservation. The function starts to operate in two ways. It starts when there is a request for reservation of the own bay or if there is a request for reservation from another bay. It is only possible to reserve the function if it is not currently reserved. The signal that can reserve the own bay is the input signal RES_RQx (x=1-8) coming from switch controller SCWI. The signals for
542
RED 670
Section 11 Control
request from another bay are the outputs RE_RQ_B and V_RE_RQ from function block RESIN. These signals are included in signal EXCH_OUT from RESIN and are connected to RES_DATA in QCRSV. The parameters ParamRequestx (x=1-8) are chosen at reservation of the own bay only (TRUE) or other bays (FALSE). To reserve the own bay only means that no reservation request RES_BAYS is created.
Reservation request of own bay
If the reservation request comes from the own bay, the function QCRSV has to know which apparatus the request comes from. This information is available with the input signal RES_RQx and parameter ParamRequestx (where x=1-8 is the number of the requesting apparatus). In order to decide if a reservation request of the current bay can be permitted QCRSV has to know whether the own bay already is reserved by itself or another bay. This information is available in the output signal RESERVED. If the RESERVED output is not set, the selection is made with the output RES_GRTx (where x=1-8 is the number of the requesting apparatus), which is connected to switch controller SCSWI. If the bay already is reserved the command sequence will be reset and the SCSWI will set the attribute "1-of-n-control" in the "cause" signal.
Reservation of other bays
When the function QCRSV receives a request from an apparatus in the own bay that requires other bays to be reserved as well, it checks if it already is reserved. If not, it will send a request to the other bays that are predefined (to be reserved) and wait for their response (acknowledge). The request of reserving other bays is done by activating the output RES_BAYS. When it receives acknowledge from the bays via the input RES_DATA, it sets the output RES_GRTx (where x=1-8 is the number of the requesting apparatus). If not acknowledgement from all bays is received within a certain time defined in SCSWI (tResResponse), the SCSWI will reset the reservation and set the attribute "1-of-ncontrol" in the "cause" signal.
Reservation request from another bay
When another bay requests for reservation, the input BAY_RES in corresponding function block RESIN is activated. The signal for reservation request is grouped into the output signal EXCH_OUT in RESIN, which is connected to input RES_DATA in QCRSV. If the bay is not reserved, the bay will be reserved and the acknowledgment from output ACK_T_B is sent back to the requested bay. If the bay already is reserved the reservation is kept and no acknowledgment is sent.
Blocking and overriding of reservation
If the function QCRSV is blocked (input BLK_RES is set to true) the reservation is blocked. That is, no reservation can be made from the own bay or any other bay. This can be set, for example, via a binary input from an external device to prevent operations from another operator place at the same time. The reservation function can also be overridden in the own bay with the OVERRIDE input signal, i.e. reserving the own bay without waiting for the external acknowledge. RED 670 Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B 543
Section 11 Control
Bay with more than eight apparatuses
If only one instance of QCRSV is used for a bay i.e. use of up to eight apparatuses, the input EXCH_IN must be set to FALSE. If there are more than eight apparatuses in the bay there has to be one additional QCRSV. The both functions QCRSV have to communicate and this is done through the input EXCH_IN and EXCH_OUT according to figure 10. If more then one QCRSV are used, the execution order is very important. The execution order must be in the way that the first QCRSV has a lower number than the next one.
CR01QCRSV EXCH_IN RES_GRT1 RES_RQ1 RES_GRT2 RES_RQ2 RES_GRT3 RES_RQ3 RES_GRT4 RES_RQ4 RES_GRT5 RES_RQ5 RES_GRT6 RES_RQ6 RES_GRT7 RES_RQ7 RES_GRT8 RES_RQ8 RES_BAYS BLK_RES ACK_TO_B OVERRIDE RESERVED RES_DATA EXCH_OUT
CR02QCRSV EXCH_IN RES_GRT1 RES_RQ1 RES_GRT2 RES_RQ2 RES_GRT3 RES_RQ3 RES_GRT4 RES_RQ4 RES_GRT5 RES_RQ5 RES_GRT6 RES_RQ6 RES_GRT7 RES_RQ7 RES_GRT8 RES_RQ8 RES_BAYS BLK_RES ACK_TO_B OVERRIDE RESERVED RES_DATA EXCH_OUT
1 1 1
RES_BAYS
ACK_TO_B
RESERVED
en05000088.vsd
Figure 276:
Connection of two QCRSV function blocks
544
RED 670
Section 11 Control
CR01QCRSV EXCH_IN RES_RQ1 RES_RQ2 RES_RQ3 RES_RQ4 RES_RQ5 RES_RQ6 RES_RQ7 RES_RQ8 BLK_RES OVERRIDE RES_DAT A RES_GRT 1 RES_GRT 2 RES_GRT 3 RES_GRT 4 RES_GRT 5 RES_GRT 6 RES_GRT 7 RES_GRT 8 RES_BAYS ACK_T O_B RESERVED EXCH_OUT en05000340.vsd
Figure 277:
CR function block
11.3.8.4

Table 309:
Signal EXCH_IN RES_RQ1 RES_RQ2 RES_RQ3 RES_RQ4 RES_RQ5 RES_RQ6 RES_RQ7 RES_RQ8 BLK_RES OVERRIDE RES_DATA
Input signals for the QCRSV (CR01-) function block

Description Used for exchange signals between different BayRes blocks Signal for app. 1 that requests to do a reservation Signal for app. 2 that requests to do a reservation Signal for app. 3 that requests to do a reservation Signal for app. 4 that requests to do a reservation Signal for app. 5 that requests to do a reservation Signal for app. 6 that requests to do a reservation Signal for app. 7 that requests to do a reservation Signal for app. 8 that requests to do a reservation Reservation is not possible and the output signals are reset Signal to override the reservation Reservation data coming from function block ResIn
Table 310:
Signal RES_GRT1 RES_GRT2 RES_GRT3 RES_GRT4 RES_GRT5 RES_GRT6 RES_GRT7
Output signals for the QCRSV (CR01-) function block

Description Reservation is made and the app. 1 is allowed to operate Reservation is made and the app. 2 is allowed to operate Reservation is made and the app. 3 is allowed to operate Reservation is made and the app. 4 is allowed to operate Reservation is made and the app. 5 is allowed to operate Reservation is made and the app. 6 is allowed to operate Reservation is made and the app. 7 is allowed to operate
RED 670
545
Section 11 Control
Signal RES_GRT8 RES_BAYS ACK_TO_B RESERVED EXCH_OUT Description Reservation is made and the app. 8 is allowed to operate Request for reservation of other bays Acknowledge to other bays that this bay is reserved Indicates that the bay is reserved Used for exchange signals between different BayRes blocks
11.3.8.5
Setting parameters
Table 311:
Parameter tCancelRes
General settings for the QCRSV (CR01-) function

Range 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 Default 10.000 Unit s Description Supervision time for canceling the reservation Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 1 Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 2 Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 3 Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 4 Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 5 Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 6 Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 7 Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 8
ParamRequest1
Other bays res. Only own bay res.
Only own bay res.
ParamRequest2
Only own bay res.
ParamRequest3
Only own bay res.
ParamRequest4
Only own bay res.
ParamRequest5
Only own bay res.
ParamRequest6
Only own bay res.
ParamRequest7
Only own bay res.
ParamRequest8
Only own bay res.
546
RED 670

11.3.9.1
Reservation input (RESIN)

Introduction
The function block RESIN receives the reservation information from other bays. The number of instances is the same as the number of involved bays (up to 60 instances are available).
11.3.9.2
The reservation input function is based purely on Boolean logic conditions. The logic diagram in figure 278 shows how the output signals are created. The inputs of the function block are connected to a receive function block representing signals transferred over the station bus from another bay.
EXCH_IN INT BIN
& FutureUse 1
ACK_F_B
BAY_ACK
ANY_ACK
& BAY_VAL 1
VALID_TX
RE_RQ_B
BAY_RES
& 1 V _RE_RQ
BIN INT
EXCH_OUT
en05000089.vsd
Figure 278:
Logic diagram for RESIN
Figure 279 describes the principle of the data exchange between all RESIN modules in the current bay. There is one RESIN function block per "other bay" used in the reservation mechanism. The output signal EXCH_OUT in the last RESIN functions block are connected to the module QCRSV that handles the reservation function in the own bay. The value to the input EXCH_IN on the first RESIN module in the chain RED 670 Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B 547
Section 11 Control
has the integer value 5. This is provided by the use of instance number one of the function block RESIN (RE01-), where the input EXCH_IN is set to #5, but is hidden for the user.
RE01RESIN BAY_ACK ACK_F_B BAY_VAL ANY_ACK BAY_RES VALID_TX RE_RQ_B V_RE_RQ EXCH_OUT
Bay 1
Bay 2
RE02RESIN EXCH_IN ACK_F_B BAY_ACK ANY_ACK BAY_VAL VALID_TX BAY_RES RE_RQ_B V_RE_RQ EXCH_OUT REnnRESIN EXCH_IN ACK_F_B BAY_ACK ANY_ACK BAY_VAL VALID_TX BAY_RES RE_RQ_B V_RE_RQ EXCH_OUT
Bay n
CR01QCRSV RES_DATA
en05000090.vsd
Figure 279:
Diagram of the chaining principle for RESIN
11.3.9.3
Function block
RE01RESIN BAY_ACK BAY_VAL BAY_RES ACK_F_B ANY_ACK VALID_TX RE_RQ_B V_RE_RQ EXCH_OUT en05000341.vsd
Figure 280:
RE function block
11.3.9.4

Table 312:
Signal BAY_ACK BAY_VAL BAY_RES
Input signals for the RESIN (RE01-) function block

Description Another bay has acknow. the reservation req. from this bay The reserv. and acknow. signals from another bay are valid Request from other bay to reserve this bay
548
RED 670
Section 11 Control
Table 313:
Signal ACK_F_B ANY_ACK VALID_TX RE_RQ_B V_RE_RQ EXCH_OUT
Output signals for the RESIN (RE01-) function block

Description All other bays have acknow. the reserv. req. from this bay Any other bay has acknow. the reserv. req. from this bay The reserv. and acknow. signals from other bays are valid Request from other bay to reserve this bay Check if the request of reserving this bay is valid Used for exchange signals between different ResIn blocks
11.3.9.5
Setting parameters
Table 314:
Parameter FutureUse
Basic general settings for the RESIN (RE01-) function

Range Bay in use Bay future use Step Default Bay in use Unit Description The bay for this ResIn block is for future use
11.4
11.4.1
Interlocking
Introduction
The interlocking function blocks the possibility to operate high-voltage switching devices, for instance when a disconnector is under load, in order to prevent material damage and/or accidental human injury. Each control IED has interlocking functions for different switchyard arrangements, each handling the interlocking of one bay. The function is distributed to each control IED and not dependent on any central function. For the station-wide interlocking, the IEDs communicate via the station bus or by using hard wired binary inputs/outputs. The interlocking conditions depend on the circuit configuration and status of the installation at any given time.
11.4.2
The interlocking function consists of software modules located in each control IED. The function is distributed and not dependent on any central function. Communication between modules in different bays is performed via the station bus. The reservation function (see section "Apparatus control (APC)") is used to ensure that HV apparatuses that might affect the interlock are blocked during the time gap, which arises between position updates. This can be done by means of the communication system, reserving all HV apparatuses that might influence the
RED 670
549
Section 11 Control
interlocking condition of the intended operation. The reservation is maintained until the operation is performed. After the selection and reservation of an apparatus, the function has complete data on the status of all apparatuses in the switchyard that are affected by the selection. Other operators cannot interfere with the reserved apparatus or the status of switching devices that may affect it. The open or closed positions of the HV apparatuses are inputs to software modules distributed in the control IEDs. Each module contains the interlocking logic for a bay. The interlocking logic in a module is different, depending on the bay function and the switchyard arrangements, that is, double-breaker or 1 1/2 breaker bays have different modules. Specific interlocking conditions and connections between standard interlocking modules are performed with an engineering tool. Bay-level interlocking signals can include the following kind of information: Positions of HV apparatuses (sometimes per phase) Valid positions (if evaluated in the control module) External release (to add special conditions for release) Line voltage (to block operation of line earthing switch) Output signals to release the HV apparatus
The interlocking module is connected to the surrounding functions within a bay as shown in figure 281.
Interlocking modules in other bays Apparatus control modules
SCILO SCSWI SXSWI
Interlocking module
Apparatus control modules

SCILO SCSWI SXCBR
Apparatus control modules

en04000526.vsd SCILO SCSWI SXSWI
Figure 281:
Interlocking module on bay level.
Bays communicate via the station bus and can convey information regarding the following: Unearthed busbars Busbars connected together Other bays connected to a busbar Received data from other bays is valid
550
RED 670
Section 11 Control
Figure 282 illustrates the data exchange principle.

Station bus
Bay 1 Disc QB1 and QB2 closed Bay n Disc QB1 and QB2 closed Bus coupler WA1 unearthed WA1 unearthed WA1 and WA2 interconn WA1 and WA2 interconn in other bay
WA1 not earthed WA2 not earthed WA1 and WA2 interconn
... ..
WA1 not earthed WA2 not earthed WA1 and WA2 interconn
WA1 WA2 QB1 QB2 QA1 QB9 QB1 QB2 QA1 QB9
en05000494.vsd
QB1
QB2
QC1
QC2
QA1
Figure 282:
Data exchange between interlocking modules.
When invalid data such as intermediate position, loss of a control terminal, or input board error are used as conditions for the interlocking condition in a bay, a release for execution of the function will not be given. On the station HMI an override function exists, which can be used to bypass the interlocking function in cases where not all the data required for the condition is valid. For all interlocking modules these general rules apply: The interlocking conditions for opening or closing of disconnectors and earthing switches are always identical. Earthing switches on the line feeder end, e.g. rapid earthing switches, are normally interlocked only with reference to the conditions in the bay where they are located, not with reference to switches on the other side of the line. So a line voltage indication may be included into line interlocking modules. If there is no line voltage supervision within the bay, then the appropriate inputs must be set to no voltage, and the operator must consider this when operating. Earthing switches can only be operated on isolated sections e.g. without load/ voltage. Circuit breaker contacts cannot be used to isolate a section, i.e. the status of the circuit breaker is irrelevant as far as the earthing switch operation is concerned. Disconnectors cannot break power current or connect different voltage systems. Disconnectors in series with a circuit breaker can only be operated if the circuit breaker is open, or if the disconnectors operate in parallel with other closed connections. Other disconnectors can be operated if one side is completely isolated, or if the disconnectors operate in parallel to other closed connections, or if they are earthed on both sides. Circuit breaker closing is only interlocked against running disconnectors in its bay or additionally in a transformer bay against the disconnectors and earthing
RED 670
551
Section 11 Control
switch on the other side of the transformer, if there is no disconnector between CB and transformer. Circuit breaker opening is only interlocked in a bus-coupler bay, if a bus bar transfer is in progress.
To make the implementation of the interlocking function easier, a number of standardized and tested software interlocking modules containing logic for the interlocking conditions are available: Line for double and transfer busbars, ABC_LINE Bus for double and transfer busbars, ABC_BC Transformer bay for double busbars, AB_TRAFO Bus-section breaker for double busbars, A1A2_BS Bus-section disconnector for double busbars, A1A2_DC Busbar earthing switch, BB_ES Double CB Bay, DB_BUS_A, DB_LINE, DB_BUS_B 1 1/2-CB diameter, BH_LINE_A, BH_CONN, BH_LINE_B
The interlocking conditions can be altered, to meet the customers specific requirements, by adding configurable logic by means of the graphical configuration tool PCM 600. The inputs Qx_EXy on the interlocking modules are used to add these specific conditions. The input signals EXDU_xx shall be set to true if there is no transmission error at the transfer of information from other bays. Required signals with designations ending in TR are intended for transfer to other bays.
11.4.3
11.4.3.1
Logical node for interlocking (SCILO)

Introduction
The function SCILO is used to enable a switching operation if the interlocking conditions permit. The function itself does not provide any interlocking functionality. The interlocking conditions are generated in separate function blocks containing the interlocking logic.
11.4.3.2
The function contains logic to enable the open and close commands respectively if the interlocking conditions are fulfilled. That means also, if the switch has a defined end position e.g. open, then the appropriate enable signal (in this case EN_OPEN) is false. The enable signals EN_OPEN and EN_CLOSE can be true at the same time only in the intermediate and bad position state and if they are enabled by the interlocking function. The position inputs come from the logical nodes Circuit breaker/switch SXCBR/SXSWI and the enable signals come from the interlocking logic. The outputs are connected to the logical node Switch controller SCSWI. One instance per switching device is needed.
552
RED 670
Section 11 Control
POSOPEN POSCLOSE
SCILO =1
1 &
EN_OPEN >1
&
OPEN_EN CLOSE_EN
& &
>1
EN_CLOSE
en04000525.vsd
Figure 283:
SCILO function logic diagram
11.4.3.3
Function block
CI01SCILO POSOPEN POSCLOSE OPEN_EN CLOSE_EN EN_OPEN EN_CLOSE
en05000359.vsd
Figure 284:
CI function block
11.4.3.4

Table 315:
Signal POSOPEN POSCLOSE OPEN_EN CLOSE_EN
Input signals for the SCILO (CI01-) function block

Description Open position of switch device Closed position of switch device Open operation from interlocking logic is enabled Close operation from interlocking logic is enabled
Table 316:
Signal EN_OPEN EN_CLOSE
Output signals for the SCILO (CI01-) function block

Description Open operation at closed or interm. or bad pos. is enabled Close operation at open or interm. or bad pos. is enabled
RED 670
553

11.4.4.1
Interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE)

Introduction
The interlocking module ABC_LINE is used for a line connected to a double busbar arrangement with a transfer busbar according to figure 285. The module can also be used for a double busbar arrangement without transfer busbar or a single busbar arrangement with/without transfer busbar.
WA1 (A) WA2 (B) WA7 (C) QB1 QB2 QC1 QA1 QC2 QB9 QC9 QB7
en04000478.vsd
Figure 285:
Switchyard layout ABC_LINE
554
RED 670
Section 11 Control
IF01ABC_LINE QA1_OP QA1CLREL QA1_CL QA1CLIT L QB9_OP QB9REL QB9_CL QB9IT L QB1_OP QB1REL QB1_CL QB1IT L QB2_OP QB2REL QB2_CL QB2IT L QB7_OP QB7REL QB7_CL QB7IT L QC1_OP QC1REL QC1_CL QC1IT L QC2_OP QC2REL QC2_CL QC2IT L QC9_OP QC9REL QC9_CL QC9IT L QC11_OP QB1OPT R QC11_CL QB1CLT R QC21_OP QB2OPT R QC21_CL QB2CLT R QC71_OP QB7OPT R QC71_CL QB7CLT R BB7_D_OP QB12OPT R BC_12_CL QB12CLT R BC_17_OP VPQB1T R BC_17_CL VPQB2T R BC_27_OP VPQB7T R BC_27_CL VPQB12T R VOLT _OFF VOLT _ON VP_BB7_D VP_BC_12 VP_BC_17 VP_BC_27 EXDU_ES EXDU_BPB EXDU_BC QB9_EX1 QB9_EX2 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 QB1_EX3 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 QB2_EX3 QB7_EX1 QB7_EX2 QB7_EX3 QB7_EX4 en05000357.vsd
Figure 286:
IF function block
RED 670
555
Section 11 Control
QA1_OP QA1_CL QB9_OP QB9_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QB7_OP QB7_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QC9_OP QC9_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL QC71_OP QC71_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC9 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC9_OP QB9_EX1 VPQC2 VPQC9 QC2_CL QC9_CL QB9_EX2 ABC_LINE =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 & >1
1
VPQA1 VPQB9 VPQB1 VPQB2 VPQB7 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC9 VPQC11 VPQC21 VPQC71 VPVOLT QB9REL QB9ITL &
1
QA1CLREL QA1CLITL
&
en04000527.vsd
556
RED 670
Section 11 Control
VPQA1 VPQB2 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC11 QA1_OP QB2_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC11_OP EXDU_ES QB1_EX1
&
1
1
QB1REL QB1ITL
VPQB2 VP_BC_12 QB2_CL BC_12_CL EXDU_BC QB1_EX2
&
VPQC1 VPQC11 QC1_CL QC11_CL EXDU_ES QB1EX3
&
en04000528.vsd
RED 670
557
Section 11 Control
VPQA1 VPQB1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC21 QA1_OP QB1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC21_OP EXDU_ES
&
1
1
QB2REL QB2ITL
QB2_EX1
VPQB1 VP_BC_12 QB1_CL BC_12_CL EXDU_BC QB2_EX2
&
VPQC1 VPQC21 QC1_CL QC21_CL EXDU_ES QB2_EX3
&
en04000529.vsd
558
RED 670
Section 11 Control
VPQC9 VPQC71 VP_BB7_D VP_BC_17 VP_BC_27 QC9_OP QC71_OP EXDU_ES BB7_D_OP EXDU_BPB BC_17_OP BC_27_OP EXDU_BC QB7_EX1 VPQA1 VPQB1 VPQC9 VPQB9 VPQC71 VP_BB7_D VP_BC_17 QA1_CL QB1_CL QC9_OP QB9_CL QC71_OP EXDU_ES BB7_D_OP EXDU_BPB BC_17_CL EXDU_BC QB7_EX2
&
>1
1
QB7REL QB7ITL
&
RED 670
559
Section 11 Control
VPQA1 VPQB2 VPQC9 VPQB9 VPQC71 VP_BB7_D VP_BC_27 QA1_CL QB2_CL QC9_OP QB9_CL QC71_OP EXDU_ES BB7_D_OP EXDU_BPB BC_27_CL EXDU_BC QB7_EX3 VPQC9 VPQC71 QC9_CL QC71_CL EXDU_ES QB7_EX4 VPQB1 VPQB2 VPQB9 QB1_OP QB2_OP QB9_OP VPQB7 VPQB9 VPVOLT QB7_OP QB9_OP VOLT_OFF
&
>1
&
&
1 1
QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL
&
1
QC9REL QC9ITL
en04000531.vsd
560
RED 670
Section 11 Control
QB1_OP QB1_CL VPQB1 QB2_OP QB2_CL VPQB2 QB7_OP QB7_CL VPQB7 QB1_OP QB2_OP VPQB1 VPQB2 >1 &
QB1OPTR QB1CLTR VPQB1TR QB2OPTR QB2CLTR VPQB2TR QB7OPTR QB7CLTR VPQB7TR QB12OPTR QB12CLTR VPQB12TR
en04000532.vsd
11.4.4.4

Table 317:
Signal QA1_OP QA1_CL QB9_OP QB9_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QB7_OP QB7_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QC9_OP QC9_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL QC71_OP Table continued on next page
Input signals for the ABC_LINE (IF01-) function block

Description QA1 is in open position QA1 is in closed position QB9 is in open position QB9 is in closed position QB1 is in open position QB1 is in closed position QB2 is in open position QB2 is in closed position QB7 is in open position QB7 is in closed position QC1 is in open position QC1 is in closed position QC2 is in open position QC2 is in closed position QC9 is in open position QC9 is in closed position Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open position Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed position Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open position Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed position Earthing switch QC71 on busbar WA7 is in open position
RED 670
561
Section 11 Control
Signal QC71_CL BB7_D_OP BC_12_CL BC_17_OP BC_17_CL BC_27_OP BC_27_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON VP_BB7_D VP_BC_12 VP_BC_17 VP_BC_27 EXDU_ES EXDU_BPB EXDU_BC QB9_EX1 QB9_EX2 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 QB1_EX3 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 QB2_EX3 QB7_EX1 QB7_EX2 QB7_EX3 QB7_EX4 Description Earthing switch QC71 on busbar WA7 is in closed position Disconnectors on busbar WA7 except in the own bay are open A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA2 No bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA7 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA7 No bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA2 and WA7 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA2 and WA7 There is no voltage on the line and not VT (fuse) failure There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse) failure Switch status of the disconnectors on busbar WA7 are valid Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA2 are valid Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA7 are valid Status of the bus coupler app. between WA2 and WA7 are valid No transm error from any bay containing earthing switches No transm error from any bay with disconnectors on WA7 No transmission error from any bus coupler bay External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB7 External condition for apparatus QB7 External condition for apparatus QB7 External condition for apparatus QB7
562
RED 670
Section 11 Control
Table 318:
Signal QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB9REL QB9ITL QB1REL QB1ITL QB2REL QB2ITL QB7REL QB7ITL QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL QC9REL QC9ITL QB1OPTR QB1CLTR QB2OPTR QB2CLTR QB7OPTR QB7CLTR QB12OPTR QB12CLTR VPQB1TR VPQB2TR VPQB7TR VPQB12TR
Output signals for the ABC_LINE (IF01-) function block

Description Closing of QA1 is allowed Closing of QA1 is forbidden Switching of QB9 is allowed Switching of QB9 is forbidden Switching of QB1 is allowed Switching of QB1 is forbidden Switching of QB2 is allowed Switching of QB2 is forbidden Switching of QB7 is allowed Switching of QB7 is forbidden Switching of QC1 is allowed Switching of QC1 is forbidden Switching of QC2 is allowed Switching of QC2 is forbidden Switching of QC9 is allowed Switching of QC9 is forbidden QB1 is in open position QB1 is in closed position QB2 is in open position QB2 is in closed position QB7 is in open position QB7 is in closed position QB1 or QB2 or both are in open position QB1 and QB2 are not in open position Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed) Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed) Switch status of QB7 is valid (open or closed) Switch status of QB1 and QB2 are valid (open or closed)
11.4.5
11.4.5.1
Interlocking for bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC)

Introduction
The interlocking module ABC_BC is used for a bus-coupler bay connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 287. The module can also be used for a single busbar arrangement with transfer busbar or double busbar arrangement without transfer busbar.
RED 670
563
Section 11 Control
WA1 (A) WA2 (B) WA7 (C) QB1 QB2 QC1 QA1 QB20 QB7
QC2
en04000514.vsd
Figure 287:
Switchyard layout ABC_BC
11.4.5.2
Function block
IG01ABC_BC QA1_OP QA1_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QB7_OP QB7_CL QB20_OP QB20_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL QC71_OP QC71_CL BBT R_OP BC_12_CL VP_BBT R VP_BC_12 EXDU_ES EXDU_12 EXDU_BC QA1O_EX1 QA1O_EX2 QA1O_EX3 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 QB1_EX3 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 QB2_EX3 QB20_EX1 QB20_EX2 QB7_EX1 QB7_EX2 QA1OPREL QA1OPIT L QA1CLREL QA1CLIT L QB1REL QB1IT L QB2REL QB2IT L QB7REL QB7IT L QB20REL QB20IT L QC1REL QC1IT L QC2REL QC2IT L QB1OPT R QB1CLT R QB220OT R QB220CT R QB7OPT R QB7CLT R QB12OPT R QB12CLT R BC12OPT R BC12CLT R BC17OPT R BC17CLT R BC27OPT R BC27CLT R VPQB1T R VQB220T R VPQB7T R VPQB12T R VPBC12T R VPBC17T R VPBC27T R
en05000350.vsd
Figure 288:
IG function block
564
RED 670
Section 11 Control
QA1_OP QA1_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QB20_OP QB20_CL QB7_OP QB7_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL QC71_OP QC71_CL VPQB1 QB1_OP QA1O_EX1 VPQB20 QB20_OP QA1O_EX2 VP_BBTR BBTR_OP EXDU_12 QA1O_EX3 VPQB1 VPQB2 VPQB7 VPQB20 QA1CLREL QA1CLITL ABC_BC =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 & & & >1
1
VPQA1 VPQB1 VPQB20 VPQB7 VPQB2 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC11 VPQC21 VPQC71 QA1OPREL QA1OPITL
&
en04000533.vsd
RED 670
565
Section 11 Control
VPQA1 VPQB2 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC11 QA1_OP QB2_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC11_OP EXDU_ES QB1_EX1 VPQB2 VP_BC_12 QB2_CL BC_12_CL EXDU_BC QB1_EX2 VPQC1 VPQC11 QC1_CL QC11_CL EXDU_ES QB1_EX3
&
>1
1
QB1REL QB1ITL
&
&
en04000534.vsd
566
RED 670
Section 11 Control
VPQA1 VPQB1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC21 QA1_OP QB1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC21_OP EXDU_ES QB2_EX1 VPQB1 VP_BC_12 QB1_CL BC_12_CL EXDU_BC QB2_EX2 VPQC1 VPQC21 QC1_CL QC21_CL EXDU_ES QB2_EX3
&
>1
1
QB2REL QB2ITL
&
&
en04000535.vsd
RED 670
567
Section 11 Control
VPQA1 VPQB20 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC71 QA1_OP QB20_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC71_OP EXDU_ES QB7_EX1 VPQC2 VPQC71 QC2_CL QC71_CL EXDU_ES QB7_EX2 VPQA1 VPQB7 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC21 QA1_OP QB7_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC21_OP EXDU_ES QB20_EX1 VPQC2 VPQC21 QC2_CL QC21_CL EXDU_ES QB20_EX2
&
>1
1
QB7REL QB7ITL
&
&
>1
1
QB20REL QB20ITL
&
en04000536.vsd
568
RED 670
Section 11 Control
VPQB1 VPQB20 VPQB7 VPQB2 QB1_OP QB20_OP QB7_OP QB2_OP QB1_OP QB1_CL VPQB1 QB20_OP QB2_OP VPQB20 VPQB2 QB7_OP QB7_CL VPQB7 QB1_OP QB2_OP VPQB1 VPQB2 QA1_OP QB1_OP QB20_OP VPQA1 VPQB1 VPQB20 QA1_OP QB1_OP QB7_OP VPQA1 VPQB1 VPQB7 QA1_OP QB2_OP QB7_OP VPQA1 VPQB2 VPQB7
&
1 1
& &
QB1OPTR QB1CLTR VPQB1TR QB220OTR QB220CTR VQB220TR QB7OPTR QB7CLTR VPQB7TR QB12OPTR QB12CLTR VPQB12TR BC12OPTR BC12CLTR VPBC12TR BC17OPTR BC17CLTR VPBC17TR BC27OPTR BC27CLTR VPBC27TR
en04000537.vsd
>1 & >1 & >1 & >1 &
11.4.5.4

Table 319:
Signal QA1_OP QA1_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL Table continued on next page
Input signals for the ABC_BC (IG01-) function block

Description QA1 is in open position QA1 is in closed position QB1 is in open position QB1 is in closed position
RED 670
569
Section 11 Control
Signal QB2_OP QB2_CL QB7_OP QB7_CL QB20_OP QB20_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL QC71_OP QC71_CL BBTR_OP BC_12_CL VP_BBTR VP_BC_12 EXDU_ES EXDU_12 EXDU_BC QA1O_EX1 QA1O_EX2 QA1O_EX3 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 QB1_EX3 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 QB2_EX3 QB20_EX1 QB20_EX2 QB7_EX1 QB7_EX2 Description QB2 is in open position QB2 is in closed position QB7 is in open position QB7 is in closed position QB20 is in open position QB20 is in closed position QC1 is in open position QC1 is in closed position QC2 is in open position QC2 is in closed position Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open position Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed position Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open position Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed position Earthing switch QC71 on busbar WA7 is in open position Earthing switch QC71 on busbar WA7 is in closed position No busbar transfer is in progress A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA2 Status are valid for app. involved in the busbar transfer Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA2 are valid No transm error from any bay containing earthing switches No transm error from any bay connected to WA1/WA2 busbars No transmission error from any other bus coupler bay External open condition for apparatus QA1 External open condition for apparatus QA1 External open condition for apparatus QA1 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB20 External condition for apparatus QB20 External condition for apparatus QB7 External condition for apparatus QB7
570
RED 670
Section 11 Control
Table 320:
Signal QA1OPREL QA1OPITL QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB1REL QB1ITL QB2REL QB2ITL QB7REL QB7ITL QB20REL QB20ITL QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL QB1OPTR QB1CLTR QB220OTR QB220CTR QB7OPTR QB7CLTR QB12OPTR QB12CLTR BC12OPTR BC12CLTR BC17OPTR BC17CLTR BC27OPTR BC27CLTR VPQB1TR VQB220TR VPQB7TR VPQB12TR
Output signals for the ABC_BC (IG01-) function block

Description Opening of QA1 is allowed Opening of QA1 is forbidden Closing of QA1 is allowed Closing of QA1 is forbidden Switching of QB1 is allowed Switching of QB1 is forbidden Switching of QB2 is allowed Switching of QB2 is forbidden Switching of QB7 is allowed Switching of QB7 is forbidden Switching of QB20 is allowed Switching of QB20 is forbidden Switching of QC1 is allowed Switching of QC1 is forbidden Switching of QC2 is allowed Switching of QC2 is forbidden QB1 is in open position QB1 is in closed position QB2 and QB20 are in open position QB2 or QB20 or both are not in open position QB7 is in open position QB7 is in closed position QB1 or QB2 or both are in open position QB1 and QB2 are not in open position No connection via the own bus coupler between WA1 and WA2 Conn. exists via the own bus coupler between WA1 and WA2 No connection via the own bus coupler between WA1 and WA7 Conn. exists via the own bus coupler between WA1 and WA7 No connection via the own bus coupler between WA2 and WA7 Conn. exists via the own bus coupler between WA2 and WA7 Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed) Switch status of QB2 and QB20 are valid (open or closed) Switch status of QB7 is valid (open or closed) Switch status of QB1 and QB2 are valid (open or closed)
RED 670
571
Section 11 Control
Signal VPBC12TR VPBC17TR VPBC27TR Description Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA2 are valid Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA7 are valid Status of the bus coupler app. between WA2 and WA7 are valid
11.4.6
11.4.6.1
Interlocking for transformer bay (AB_TRAFO)

Introduction
The interlocking module AB_TRAFO is used for a transformer bay connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 289. The module is used when there is no disconnector between circuit breaker and transformer. Otherwise, the module ABC_LINE can be used. This module can also be used in single busbar arrangements.
WA1 (A) WA2 (B) QB1 QB2 QC1 QA1 AB_TRAFO QC2
T QC3 QA2 QC4 QB3 QB4

QA2 and QC4 are not used in this interlocking
en04000515.vsd
Figure 289:
Switchyard layout AB_TRAFO
572
RED 670
Section 11 Control
QA1_OP QA1_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QB3_OP QB3_CL QB4_OP QB4_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL BC_12_CL VP_BC_12 EXDU_ES EXDU_BC QA1_EX1 QA1_EX2 QA1_EX3 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 QB1_EX3 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 QB2_EX3 IE01AB_TRAFO QA1CLREL QA1CLIT L QB1REL QB1IT L QB2REL QB2IT L QC1REL QC1IT L QC2REL QC2IT L QB1OPT R QB1CLT R QB2OPT R QB2CLT R QB12OPT R QB12CLT R VPQB1T R VPQB2T R VPQB12T R
en05000358.vsd
Figure 290:
IE function block
RED 670
573
Section 11 Control
QA1_OP QA1_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QB3_OP QB3_CL QB4_OP QB4_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL VPQB1 VPQB2 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQB3 VPQB4 VPQC3 QA1_EX2 QC3_OP QA1_EX3 QC1_CL QC2_CL QC3_CL QA1_EX1 AB_TRAFO =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 &
1
VPQA1 VPQB1 VPQB2 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQB3 VPQB4 VPQC3 VPQC11 VPQC21 QA1CLREL QA1CLITL
>1 &
en04000538.vsd
574
RED 670
Section 11 Control
VPQA1 VPQB2 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPQC11 QA1_OP QB2_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC3_OP QC11_OP EXDU_ES QB1_EX1 VPQB2 VPQC3 VP_BC_12 QB2_CL QC3_OP BC_12_CL EXDU_BC QB1_EX2 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPQC11 QC1_CL QC2_CL QC3_CL QC11_CL EXDU_ES QB1_EX3
&
>1
1
QB1REL QB1ITL
&
&
en04000539.vsd
RED 670
575
Section 11 Control
VPQA1 VPQB1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPQC21 QA1_OP QB1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC3_OP QC21_OP EXDU_ES QB2_EX1 VPQB1 VPQC3 VP_BC_12 QB1_CL QC3_OP BC_12_CL EXDU_BC QB2_EX2 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPQC21 QC1_CL QC2_CL QC3_CL QC21_CL EXDU_ES QB2_EX3
&
>1
1
QB2REL QB2ITL
&
&
en04000540.vsd
576
RED 670
Section 11 Control
VPQB1 VPQB2 VPQB3 VPQB4 QB1_OP QB2_OP QB3_OP QB4_OP QB1_OP QB1_CL VPQB1 QB2_OP QB2_CL VPQB2 QB1_OP QB2_OP VPQB1 VPQB2
&
1 1
QB1OPTR QB1CLTR VPQB1TR QB2OPTR QB2CLTR VPQB2TR QB12OPTR QB12CLTR VPQB12TR

en04000541.vsd
>1 &
11.4.6.4

Table 321:
Signal QA1_OP QA1_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QB3_OP QB3_CL QB4_OP QB4_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL Table continued on next page
Input signals for the AB_TRAFO (IE01-) function block

Description QA1 is in open position QA1 is in closed position QB1 is in open position QB1 is in closed position QB2 is in open position QB2 is in closed position QC1 is in open position QC1 is in closed position QC2 is in open position QC2 is in closed position QB3 is in open position QB3 is in closed position QB4 is in open position QB4 is in closed position QC3 is in open position QC3 is in closed position QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open position QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed position QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open position QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed position
RED 670
577
Section 11 Control
Signal BC_12_CL VP_BC_12 EXDU_ES EXDU_BC QA1_EX1 QA1_EX2 QA1_EX3 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 QB1_EX3 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 QB2_EX3 Description A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA2 Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA2 are valid No transm error from any bay containing earthing switches No transmission error from any bus coupler bay External condition for apparatus QA1 External condition for apparatus QA1 External condition for apparatus QA1 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB2
Table 322:
Signal QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB1REL QB1ITL QB2REL QB2ITL QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL QB1OPTR QB1CLTR QB2OPTR QB2CLTR QB12OPTR QB12CLTR VPQB1TR VPQB2TR VPQB12TR
Output signals for the AB_TRAFO (IE01-) function block

Description Closing of QA1 is allowed Closing of QA1 is forbidden Switching of QB1 is allowed Switching of QB1 is forbidden Switching of QB2 is allowed Switching of QB2 is forbidden Switching of QC1 is allowed Switching of QC1 is forbidden Switching of QC2 is allowed Switching of QC2 is forbidden QB1 is in open position QB1 is in closed position QB2 is in open position QB2 is in closed position QB1 or QB2 or both are in open position QB1 and QB2 are not in open position Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed) Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed) Switch status of QB1 and QB2 are valid (open or closed)
578
RED 670

11.4.7.1
Interlocking for bus-section breaker (A1A2_BS)

Introduction
The interlocking module A1A2_BS is used for one bus-section circuit breaker between section 1 and 2 according to figure 291. The module can be used for different busbars, which includes a bus-section circuit breaker.
WA1 (A1) WA2 (A2)
QC1
QB1 QA1
QB2
QC2
QC3
QC4
A1A2_BS
en04000516.vsd
Figure 291:
Switchyard layout A1A2_BS
11.4.7.2
Function block
IH01A1A2_BS QA1_OP QA1OPREL QA1_CL QA1OPIT L QB1_OP QA1CLREL QB1_CL QA1CLIT L QB2_OP QB1REL QB2_CL QB1IT L QC3_OP QB2REL QC3_CL QB2IT L QC4_OP QC3REL QC4_CL QC3IT L S1QC1_OP QC4REL S1QC1_CL QC4IT L S2QC2_OP S1S2OPT R S2QC2_CL S1S2CLT R BBT R_OP QB1OPT R VP_BBT R QB1CLT R EXDU_12 QB2OPT R EXDU_ES QB2CLT R QA1O_EX1 VPS1S2T R QA1O_EX2 VPQB1T R QA1O_EX3 VPQB2T R QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 en05000348.vsd
Figure 292:
IH function block
RED 670
579
Section 11 Control
QA1_OP QA1_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QC4_OP QC4_CL S1QC1_OP S1QC1_CL S2QC2_OP S2QC2_CL VPQB1 QB1_OP QA1O_EX1 VPQB2 QB2_OP QA1O_EX2 VP_BBTR BBTR_OP EXDU_12 QA1O_EX3 VPQB1 VPQB2 VPQA1 VPQC3 VPQC4 VPS1QC1 QA1_OP QC3_OP QC4_OP S1QC1_OP EXDU_ES QB1_EX1 VPQC3 VPS1QC1 QC3_CL S1QC1_CL EXDU_ES QB1_EX2 A1A2_BS =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 & & & >1
1
VPQA1 VPQB1 VPQB2 VPQC3 VPQC4 VPS1QC1 VPS2QC2 QA1OPREL QA1OPITL
& & >1
QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB1REL QB1ITL
&
en04000542.vsd
580
RED 670
Section 11 Control
VPQA1 VPQC3 VPQC4 VPS2QC2 QA1_OP QC3_OP QC4_OP S2QC2_OP EXDU_ES QB2_EX1 VPQC4 VPS2QC2 QC4_CL S2QC2_CL EXDU_ES QB2_EX2 VPQB1 VPQB2 QB1_OP QB2_OP QB1_OP QB1_CL VPQB1 QB2_OP QB2_CL VPQB2 QB1_OP QB2_OP QA1_OP VPQB1 VPQB2 VPQA1
&
>1
1
QB2REL QB2ITL
&
&
1 1
QC3REL QC3ITL QC4REL QC4ITL QB1OPTR QB1CLTR VPQB1TR QB2OPTR QB2CLTR VPQB2TR
>1 &
S1S2OPTR S1S2CLTR VPS1S2TR

en04000543.vsd
11.4.7.4

Table 323:
Signal QA1_OP QA1_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL Table continued on next page
Input signals for the A1A2_BS (IH01-) function block

Description QA1 is in open position QA1 is in closed position QB1 is in open position QB1 is in closed position QB2 is in open position QB2 is in closed position
RED 670
581
Section 11 Control
Signal QC3_OP QC3_CL QC4_OP QC4_CL S1QC1_OP S1QC1_CL S2QC2_OP S2QC2_CL BBTR_OP VP_BBTR EXDU_12 EXDU_ES QA1O_EX1 QA1O_EX2 QA1O_EX3 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 Description QC3 is in open position QC3 is in closed position QC4 is in open position QC4 is in closed position QC1 on bus section 1 is in open position QC1 on bus section 1 is in closed position QC2 on bus section 2 is in open position QC2 on bus section 2 is in closed position No busbar transfer is in progress Status are valid for app. involved in the busbar transfer No transm error from any bay connected to busbar 1 and 2 No transm error from bays containing earth. sw. QC1 or QC2 External open condition for apparatus QA1 External open condition for apparatus QA1 External open condition for apparatus QA1 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB2
Table 324:
Signal QA1OPREL QA1OPITL QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB1REL QB1ITL QB2REL QB2ITL QC3REL QC3ITL QC4REL QC4ITL S1S2OPTR S1S2CLTR QB1OPTR QB1CLTR
Output signals for the A1A2_BS (IH01-) function block

Description Opening of QA1 is allowed Opening of QA1 is forbidden Closing of QA1 is allowed Closing of QA1 is forbidden Switching of QB1 is allowed Switching of QB1 is forbidden Switching of QB2 is allowed Switching of QB2 is forbidden Switching of QC3 is allowed Switching of QC3 is forbidden Switching of QC4 is allowed Switching of QC4 is forbidden No bus section connection between bus section 1 and 2 Bus coupler connection between bus section 1 and 2 exists QB1 is in open position QB1 is in closed position
582
RED 670
Section 11 Control
Signal QB2OPTR QB2CLTR VPS1S2TR VPQB1TR VPQB2TR Description QB2 is in open position QB2 is in closed position Status of the app. between bus section 1 and 2 are valid Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed) Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)
11.4.8
11.4.8.1
Interlocking for bus-section disconnector (A1A2_DC)

Introduction
The interlocking module A1A2_DC is used for one bus-section disconnector between section 1 and 2 according to figure 293. The module can be used for different busbars, which includes a bus-section disconnector.
QB WA1 (A1) WA2 (A2)
QC1
QC2
A1A2_DC
en04000492.vsd
Figure 293:
Switchyard layout A1A2_DC
11.4.8.2
Function block
II01A1A2_DC QB_OP QB_CL S1QC1_OP S1QC1_CL S2QC2_OP S2QC2_CL S1DC_OP S2DC_OP VPS1_DC VPS2_DC EXDU_ES EXDU_BB QBCL_EX1 QBCL_EX2 QBOP_EX1 QBOP_EX2 QBOP_EX3 QBOPREL QBOPIT L QBCLREL QBCLIT L DCOPT R DCCLT R VPDCT R
en05000349.vsd
Figure 294:
II function block
RED 670
583
Section 11 Control
584
RED 670
Section 11 Control
A1A2_DC QB_OP QB_CL S1QC1_OP S1QC1_CL S2QC2_OP S2QC2_CL VPS1QC1 VPS2QC2 VPS1_DC S1QC1_OP S2QC2_OP S1DC_OP EXDU_ES EXDU_BB QBOP_EX1 VPS1QC1 VPS2QC2 VPS2_DC S1QC1_OP S2QC2_OP S2DC_OP EXDU_ES EXDU_BB QBOP_EX2 VPS1QC1 VPS2QC2 S1QC1_CL S2QC2_CL EXDU_ES QBOP_EX3 =1 VPQB VPDCTR DCOPTR DCCLTR =1 =1 VPS1QC1 VPS2QC2
&
>1
1
QBOPREL QBOPITL
&
&
en04000544.vsd
RED 670
585
Section 11 Control
11.4.8.4

Table 325:
Signal QB_OP QB_CL S1QC1_OP S1QC1_CL S2QC2_OP S2QC2_CL S1DC_OP S2DC_OP VPS1_DC VPS2_DC EXDU_ES EXDU_BB QBCL_EX1 QBCL_EX2 QBOP_EX1 QBOP_EX2 QBOP_EX3
Input signals for the A1A2_DC (II01-) function block

Description QB is in open position QB is in closed position QC1 on bus section 1 is in open position QC1 on bus section 1 is in closed position QC2 on bus section 2 is in open position QC2 on bus section 2 is in closed position All disconnectors on bus section 1 are in open position All disconnectors on bus section 2 are in open position Switch status of disconnectors on bus section 1 are valid Switch status of disconnectors on bus section 2 are valid No transm error from bays containing earth. sw. QC1 or QC2 No transm error from bays with disc conn to section 1 and 2 External close condition for section disconnector QB External close condition for section disconnector QB External open condition for section disconnector QB External open condition for section disconnector QB External open condition for section disconnector QB
586
RED 670
Section 11 Control
Table 326:
Signal QBOPREL QBOPITL QBCLREL QBCLITL DCOPTR DCCLTR VPDCTR
Output signals for the A1A2_DC (II01-) function block

Description Opening of QB is allowed Opening of QB is forbidden Closing of QB is allowed Closing of QB is forbidden The bus section disconnector is in open position The bus section disconnector is in closed position Switch status of QB is valid (open or closed)
11.4.9
11.4.9.1
Interlocking for busbar earthinggrounding switch (BB_ES)

Introduction
The interlocking module BB_ES is used for one busbar earthing switch on any busbar parts according to figure 295.
QC
en04000504.vsd
Figure 295:
Switchyard layout BB_ES
11.4.9.2
Function block
IJ01BB_ES QC_OP QC_CL BB_DC_OP VP_BB_DC EXDU_BB QCREL QCITL BBESOPTR BBESCLTR
en05000347.vsd
Figure 296:
IJ function block
RED 670
587
Section 11 Control
BB_ES VP_BB_DC BB_DC_OP EXDU_BB QC_OP QC_CL QCREL QCITL BBESOPTR BBESCLTR
en04000546.vsd
&
11.4.9.4

Table 327:
Signal QC_OP QC_CL BB_DC_OP VP_BB_DC EXDU_BB
Input signals for the BB_ES (IJ01-) function block

Description Busbar earthing switch QC is in open position Busbar earthing switch QC is in closed position All disconnectors on this busbar part are open Status for all disconnectors on this busbar part are valid No transm error from bays with disc on this busbar part
Table 328:
Signal QCREL QCITL BBESOPTR BBESCLTR
Output signals for the BB_ES (IJ01-) function block

Description Switching of QC is allowed Switching of QC is forbidden QC on this busbar part is in open position QC on this busbar part is in closed position
11.4.10
11.4.10.1
Interlocking for double CB bay (DB)

Introduction
The interlocking modules DB_BUS_A, DB_LINE and DB_BUS_B are used for a line connected to a double circuit breaker arrangement according to figure 297.
588
RED 670
Section 11 Control
WA1 (A) WA2 (B) QB1 QC1 QA1 DB_BUS_A QC2 QB61 QB62 QC3 QB9 QC9 QC5 QA2 DB_BUS_B QB2 QC4
DB_LINE
en04000518.vsd
Figure 297:
Switchyard layout double circuit breaker.
Three types of interlocking modules per double circuit breaker bay are defined. DB_LINE is the connection from the line to the circuit breaker parts that are connected to the busbars. DB_BUS_A and DB_BUS_B are the connections from the line to the busbars.
11.4.10.2
Function block
IB01DB_BUS_A QA1_OP QA1CLREL QA1_CL QA1CLITL QB1_OP QB61REL QB1_CL QB61ITL QB61_OP QB1REL QB61_CL QB1ITL QC1_OP QC1REL QC1_CL QC1ITL QC2_OP QC2REL QC2_CL QC2ITL QC3_OP QB1OPTR QC3_CL QB1CLTR QC11_OP VPQB1TR QC11_CL EXDU_ES QB61_EX1 QB61_EX2 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 en05000354.vsd
Figure 298:
IB function block
RED 670
589
Section 11 Control
IA01DB_LINE QA1_OP QA1_CL QA2_OP QA2_CL QB61_OP QB61_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QB62_OP QB62_CL QC4_OP QC4_CL QC5_OP QC5_CL QB9_OP QB9_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QC9_OP QC9_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON QB9_EX1 QB9_EX2 QB9_EX3 QB9_EX4 QB9_EX5 QB9REL QB9ITL QC3REL QC3ITL QC9REL QC9ITL
en05000356.vsd
Figure 299:
IA function block
IC01DB_BUS_B QA2_OP QA2CLREL QA2_CL QA2CLITL QB2_OP QB62REL QB2_CL QB62ITL QB62_OP QB2REL QB62_CL QB2ITL QC4_OP QC4REL QC4_CL QC4ITL QC5_OP QC5REL QC5_CL QC5ITL QC3_OP QB2OPTR QC3_CL QB2CLTR QC21_OP VPQB2TR QC21_CL EXDU_ES QB62_EX1 QB62_EX2 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 en05000355.vsd
Figure 300:
IC function block
11.4.10.3
Logic diagrams
590
RED 670
Section 11 Control
QA1_OP QA1_CL QB61_OP QB61_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL VPQB61 VPQB1 VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC3_OP QB61_EX1 VPQC2 VPQC3 QC2_CL QC3_CL QB61_EX2 VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC11 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC11_OP EXDU_ES QB1_EX1 VPQC1 VPQC11 QC1_CL QC11_CL EXDU_ES QB1_EX2
DB_BUS_A =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 & & >1

1 1
VPQA1 VPQB61 VPQB1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPQC11 QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB61REL QB61ITL
&
&
>1
1
QB1REL QB1ITL
&
en04000547.vsd
RED 670
591
Section 11 Control
VPQB61 VPQB1 QB61_OP QB1_OP QB1_OP QB1_CL VPQB1
&
1 1
QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL QB1OPTR QB1CLTR VPQB1TR

en04000548.vsd
592
RED 670
Section 11 Control
QA1_OP QA1_CL QA2_OP QA2_CL QB61_OP QB61_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QB62_OP QB62_CL QC4_OP QC4_CL QC5_OP QC5_CL QB9_OP QB9_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QC9_OP QC9_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON VPQA1 VPQA2 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPQC4 VPQC5 VPQC9 QA1_OP QA2_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC3_OP QC4_OP QC5_OP QC9_OP QB9_EX1
DB_LINE =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 & >1

1
VPQA1 VPQA2 VPQB61 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQB62 VPQC4 VPQC5 VPQB9 VPQC3 VPQC9 VPVOLT QB9REL QB9ITL
&
en04000549.vsd
RED 670
593
Section 11 Control
VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPQC9 VPQB62 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC3_OP QC9_OP QB62_OP QB9_EX2 VPQA2 VPQB61 VPQC3 VPQC4 VPQC5 VPQC9 QA2_OP QB61_OP QC3_OP QC4_OP QC5_OP QC9_OP QB9_EX3 VPQC3 VPQC9 VPQB61 VPQB62 QC3_OP QC9_OP QB61_OP QB62_OP QB9_EX4 VPQC3 VPQC9 QC3_CL QC9_CL QB9_EX5
&
>1
&
&
&
en04000550.vsd
594
RED 670
Section 11 Control
VPQB61 VPQB62 VPQB9 QB61_OP QB62_OP QB9_OP VPQB9 VPVOLT QB9_OP VOLT_OFF
&
1
QC3REL QC3ITL
&
1
QC9REL QC9ITL
en04000551.vsd
RED 670
595
Section 11 Control
QA2_OP QA2_CL QB62_OP QB62_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QC4_OP QC4_CL QC5_OP QC5_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL VPQB62 VPQB2 VPQA2 VPQC4 VPQC5 VPQC3 QA2_OP QC4_OP QC5_OP QC3_OP QB62_EX1 VPQC5 VPQC3 QC5_CL QC3_CL QB62_EX2 VPQA2 VPQC4 VPQC5 VPQC21 QA2_OP QC4_OP QC5_OP QC21_OP EXDU_ES QB2_EX1 VPQC4 VPQC21 QC4_CL QC21_CL EXDU_ES QB2_EX2
DB_BUS_B =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 & & >1

1 1
VPQA2 VPQB62 VPQB2 VPQC4 VPQC5 VPQC3 VPQC21 QA2CLREL QA2CLITL QB62REL QB62ITL
&
&
>1
1
QB2REL QB2ITL
&
en04000552.vsd
596
RED 670
Section 11 Control
VPQB62 VPQB2 QB62_OP QB2_OP QB2_OP QB2_CL VPQB2
&
1 1
QC4REL QC4ITL QC5REL QC5ITL QB2OPTR QB2CLTR VPQB2TR

en04000553.vsd
11.4.10.4

Table 329:
Signal QA1_OP QA1_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QB61_OP QB61_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL EXDU_ES QB61_EX1 QB61_EX2 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2
Input signals for the DB_BUS_A (IB01-) function block

Description QA1 is in open position QA1 is in closed position QB1 is in open position QB1 is in closed position QB61 is in open position QB61 is in closed position QC1 is in open position QC1 is in closed position QC2 is in open position QC2 is in closed position QC3 is in open position QC3 is in closed position Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open position Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed position No transm error from bay containing earthing switch QC11 External condition for apparatus QB61 External condition for apparatus QB61 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB1
Table 330:
Signal QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB61REL
Output signals for the DB_BUS_A (IB01-) function block

Description Closing of QA1 is allowed Closing of QA1 is forbidden Switching of QB61 is allowed
RED 670
597
Section 11 Control
Signal QB61ITL QB1REL QB1ITL QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL QB1OPTR QB1CLTR VPQB1TR Description Switching of QB61 is forbidden Switching of QB1 is allowed Switching of QB1 is forbidden Switching of QC1 is allowed Switching of QC1 is forbidden Switching of QC2 is allowed Switching of QC2 is forbidden QB1 is in open position QB1 is in closed position Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)
Table 331:
Signal QA1_OP QA1_CL QA2_OP QA2_CL QB61_OP QB61_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QB62_OP QB62_CL QC4_OP QC4_CL QC5_OP QC5_CL QB9_OP QB9_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QC9_OP QC9_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON QB9_EX1
Input signals for the DB_LINE (IA01-) function block

Description QA1 is in open position QA1 is in closed position QA2 is in open position QA2 is in closed position QB61 is in open position QB61 is in closed position QC1 is in open position QC1 is in closed position QC2 is in open position QC2 is in closed position QB62 is in open position QB62 is in closed position QC4 is in open position QC4 is in closed position QC5 is in open position QC5 is in closed position QB9 is in open position QB9 is in closed position QC3 is in open position QC3 is in closed position QC9 is in open position QC9 is in closed position There is no voltage on the line and not VT (fuse) failure There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse) failure External condition for apparatus QB9
598
RED 670
Section 11 Control
Signal QB9_EX2 QB9_EX3 QB9_EX4 QB9_EX5 Description External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9
Table 332:
Signal QB9REL QB9ITL QC3REL QC3ITL QC9REL QC9ITL
Output signals for the DB_LINE (IA01-) function block

Description Switching of QB9 is allowed Switching of QB9 is forbidden Switching of QC3 is allowed Switching of QC3 is forbidden Switching of QC9 is allowed Switching of QC9 is forbidden
Table 333:
Signal QA2_OP QA2_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QB62_OP QB62_CL QC4_OP QC4_CL QC5_OP QC5_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL EXDU_ES QB62_EX1 QB62_EX2 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2
Input signals for the DB_BUS_B (IC01-) function block

Description QA2 is in open position QA2 is in closed position QB2 is in open position QB2 is in closed position QB62 is in open position QB62 is in closed position QC4 is in open position QC4 is in closed position QC5 is in open position QC5 is in closed position QC3 is in open position QC3 is in closed position Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open position Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed position No transm error from bay containing earthing switch QC21 External condition for apparatus QB62 External condition for apparatus QB62 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB2
RED 670
599
Section 11 Control
Table 334:
Signal QA2CLREL QA2CLITL QB62REL QB62ITL QB2REL QB2ITL QC4REL QC4ITL QC5REL QC5ITL QB2OPTR QB2CLTR VPQB2TR
Output signals for the DB_BUS_B (IC01-) function block

Description Closing of QA2 is allowed Closing of QA2 is forbidden Switching of QB62 is allowed Switching of QB62 is forbidden Switching of QB2 is allowed Switching of QB2 is forbidden Switching of QC4 is allowed Switching of QC4 is forbidden Switching of QC5 is allowed Switching of QC5 is forbidden QB2 is in open position QB2 is in closed position Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)
11.4.11
11.4.11.1
Interlocking for 1 1/2 CB (BH)

Introduction
The interlocking modules BH_LINE_A, BH_CONN and BH_LINE_B are used for lines connected to a breaker-and-a-half diameter according to figure 301.
600
RED 670
Section 11 Control
WA1 (A) WA2 (B) QB1 QC1 QA1 QC2 QB6 BH_LINE_A QC3 QB6 QC3 BH_LINE_B QA1 QC2 QB2 QC1
QB61
QA1
QB62
QB9 QC1 QC9 QC2
QB9 QC9
BH_CONN en04000513.vsd
Figure 301:
Switchyard layout breaker-and-a-half
Three types of interlocking modules per diameter are defined. BH_LINE_A and BH_LINE_B are the connections from a line to a busbar. BH_CONN is the connection between the two lines of the diameter in the breaker and a half switchyard layout.
11.4.11.2
Function blocks
RED 670
601
Section 11 Control
IL01BH_LINE_A QA1_OP QA1CLREL QA1_CL QA1CLITL QB6_OP QB6REL QB6_CL QB6ITL QB1_OP QB1REL QB1_CL QB1ITL QC1_OP QC1REL QC1_CL QC1ITL QC2_OP QC2REL QC2_CL QC2ITL QC3_OP QC3REL QC3_CL QC3ITL QB9_OP QB9REL QB9_CL QB9ITL QC9_OP QC9REL QC9_CL QC9ITL CQA1_OP QB1OPTR CQA1_CL QB1CLTR CQB61_OP VPQB1TR CQB61_CL CQC1_OP CQC1_CL CQC2_OP CQC2_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON EXDU_ES QB6_EX1 QB6_EX2 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 QB9_EX1 QB9_EX2 QB9_EX3 QB9_EX4 QB9_EX5 QB9_EX6 QB9_EX7 en05000352.vsd
Figure 302:
IL function block
602
RED 670
Section 11 Control
IM01BH_LINE_B QA1_OP QA1CLREL QA1_CL QA1CLIT L QB6_OP QB6REL QB6_CL QB6IT L QB2_OP QB2REL QB2_CL QB2IT L QC1_OP QC1REL QC1_CL QC1IT L QC2_OP QC2REL QC2_CL QC2IT L QC3_OP QC3REL QC3_CL QC3IT L QB9_OP QB9REL QB9_CL QB9IT L QC9_OP QC9REL QC9_CL QC9IT L CQA1_OP QB2OPT R CQA1_CL QB2CLT R CQB62_OP VPQB2T R CQB62_CL CQC1_OP CQC1_CL CQC2_OP CQC2_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL VOLT _OFF VOLT _ON EXDU_ES QB6_EX1 QB6_EX2 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 QB9_EX1 QB9_EX2 QB9_EX3 QB9_EX4 QB9_EX5 QB9_EX6 QB9_EX7 en05000353.vsd
Figure 303:
IM function block
QA1_OP QA1_CL QB61_OP QB61_CL QB62_OP QB62_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL 1QC3_OP 1QC3_CL 2QC3_OP 2QC3_CL QB61_EX1 QB61_EX2 QB62_EX1 QB62_EX2
IK01BH_CONN QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB61REL QB61ITL QB62REL QB62ITL QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL
en05000351.vsd
Figure 304:
IK function block
11.4.11.3
RED 670
Logic diagrams
Section 11 Control
QA1_OP QA1_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QB6_OP QB6_CL QC9_OP QC9_CL QB9_OP QB9_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL CQA1_OP CQA1_CL CQC1_OP CQC1_CL CQC2_OP CQC2_CL CQB61_OP CQB61_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON VPQB1 VPQB6 VPQB9 VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC3_OP QB6_EX1 VPQC2 VPQC3 QC2_CL QC3_CL QB6_EX2
BH_LINE_A =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 & & >1

1 1
VPQA1 VPQB1 VPQB6 VPQC9 VPQB9 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPCQA1 VPCQC1 VPCQC2 VPCQB61 VPQC11 VPVOLT QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB6REL QB6ITL
&
en04000554.vsd
604
RED 670
Section 11 Control
VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC11 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC11_OP EXDU_ES QB1_EX1 VPQC1 VPQC11 QC1_CL QC11_CL EXDU_ES QB1_EX2 VPQB1 VPQB6 QB1_OP QB6_OP VPQB6 VPQB9 VPCQB61 QB6_OP QB9_OP CQB61_OP VPQA1 VPQB6 VPQC9 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPCQA1 VPCQB61 VPCQC1 VPCQC2 QB9_EX1 QB6_OP QB9_EX2 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QB9_EX3
&
>1
1
QB1REL QB1ITL
&
&
1 1
QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL QC3REL QC3ITL
&
1
&
>1
QB9REL QB9ITL
>1 &
en04000555.vsd
RED 670
605
Section 11 Control
CQB61_OP QB9_EX4 CQA1_OP CQC1_OP CQC2_OP QB9_EX5 QC9_OP QC3_OP QB9_EX6 VPQC9 VPQC3 QC9_CL QC3_CL QB9_EX7 VPQB9 VPVOLT QB9_OP VOLT_OFF QB1_OP QB1_CL VPQB1
>1 &
&
>1
&
&
QC9REL QC9ITL QB1OPTR QB1CLTR VPQB1TR

en04000556.vsd
606
RED 670
Section 11 Control
QA1_OP QA1_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QB6_OP QB6_CL QC9_OP QC9_CL QB9_OP QB9_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL CQA1_OP CQA1_CL CQC1_OP CQC1_CL CQC2_OP CQC2_CL CQB62_OP CQB62_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON VPQB2 VPQB6 VPQB9 VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC3_OP QB6_EX1 VPQC2 VPQC3 QC2_CL QC3_CL QB6_EX2
BH_LINE_B =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 & & >1

1 1
VPQA1 VPQB2 VPQB6 VPQC9 VPQB9 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPCQA1 VPCQC1 VPCQC2 VPCQB62 VPQC21 VPVOLT QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB6REL QB6ITL
&
en04000557.vsd
RED 670
607
Section 11 Control
VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC21 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC21_OP EXDU_ES QB2_EX1 VPQC1 VPQC21 QC1_CL QC21_CL EXDU_ES QB2_EX2 VPQB2 VPQB6 QB2_OP QB6_OP VPQB6 VPQB9 VPCQB62 QB6_OP QB9_OP CQB62_OP VPQA1 VPQB6 VPQC9 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPCQA1 VPCQB62 VPCQC1 VPCQC2 QB9_EX1 QB6_OP QB9_EX2 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QB9_EX3
&
>1
1
QB2REL QB2ITL
&
&
1 1
QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL QC3REL QC3ITL
&
1
&
>1
QB9REL QB9ITL
>1 &
en04000558.vsd
608
RED 670
Section 11 Control
CQB62_OP QB9_EX4 CQA1_OP CQC1_OP CQC2_OP QB9_EX5 QC9_OP QC3_OP QB9_EX6 VPQC9 VPQC3 QC9_CL QC3_CL QB9_EX7 VPQB9 VPVOLT QB9_OP VOLT_OFF QB2_OP QB2_CL VPQB2
>1 &
&
>1
&
&
QC9REL QC9ITL QB2OPTR QB2CLTR VPQB2TR

en04000559.vsd
RED 670
609
Section 11 Control
QA1_OP QA1_CL QB61_OP QB61_CL QB62_OP QB62_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL 1QC3_OP 1QC3_CL 2QC3_OP 2QC3_CL VPQB61 VPQB62 VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VP1QC3 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP 1QC3_OP QB61_EX1 VPQC1 VP1QC3 QC1_CL 1QC3_CL QB61_EX2 VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VP2QC3 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP 2QC3_OP QB62_EX1 VPQC2 VP2QC3 QC2_CL 2QC3_CL QB62_EX2 VPQB61 VPQB62 QB61_OP QB62_OP
BH_CONN =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 & & >1

1 1
VPQA1 VPQB61 VPQB62 VPQC1 VPQC2 VP1QC3 VP2QC3 QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB61REL QB61ITL
&
&
>1
1
QB62REL QB62ITL
&
&
1 1

en04000560.vsd
11.4.11.4
610
RED 670
Section 11 Control
Table 335:
Signal QA1_OP QA1_CL QB6_OP QB6_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QB9_OP QB9_CL QC9_OP QC9_CL CQA1_OP CQA1_CL CQB61_OP CQB61_CL CQC1_OP CQC1_CL CQC2_OP CQC2_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON EXDU_ES QB6_EX1 QB6_EX2 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 QB9_EX1 QB9_EX2 QB9_EX3 QB9_EX4
Input signals for the BH_LINE_A (IL01-) function block

Description QA1 is in open position QA1 is in closed position QB6 is in open position QB6 is in close position QB1 is in open position QB1 is in closed position QC1 is in open position QC1 is in closed position QC2 is in open position QC2 is in closed position QC3 is in open position QC3 is in closed position QB9 is in open position QB9 is in closed position QC9 is in open position QC9 is in closed position QA1 in module BH_CONN is in open position QA1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position QB61 in module BH_CONN is in open position QB61 in module BH_CONN is in closed position QC1 in module BH_CONN is in open position QC1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position QC2 in module BH_CONN is in open position QC2 in module BH_CONN is in closed position Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open position Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed position There is no voltage on line and not VT (fuse) failure There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse) failure No transm error from bay containing earthing switch QC11 External condition for apparatus QB6 External condition for apparatus QB6 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9
RED 670
611
Section 11 Control
Signal QB9_EX5 QB9_EX6 QB9_EX7 Description External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9
Table 336:
Signal QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB6REL QB6ITL QB1REL QB1ITL QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL QC3REL QC3ITL QB9REL QB9ITL QC9REL QC9ITL QB1OPTR QB1CLTR VPQB1TR
Output signals for the BH_LINE_A (IL01-) function block

Description Closing of QA1 is allowed Closing of QA1 is forbidden Switching of QB6 is allowed Switching of QB6 is forbidden Switching of QB1 is allowed Switching of QB1 is forbidden Switching of QC1 is allowed Switching of QC1 is forbidden Switching of QC2 is allowed Switching of QC2 is forbidden Switching of QC3 is allowed Switching of QC3 is forbidden Switching of QB9 is allowed Switching of QB9 is forbidden Switching of QC9 is allowed Switching of QC9 is forbidden QB1 is in open position QB1 is in closed position Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)
Table 337:
Signal QA1_OP QA1_CL QB6_OP QB6_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP
Input signals for the BH_LINE_B (IM01-) function block

Description QA1 is in open position QA1 is in closed position QB6 is in open position QB6 is in close position QB2 is in open position QB2 is in closed position QC1 is in open position QC1 is in closed position QC2 is in open position
612
RED 670
Section 11 Control
Signal QC2_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QB9_OP QB9_CL QC9_OP QC9_CL CQA1_OP CQA1_CL CQB62_OP CQB62_CL CQC1_OP CQC1_CL CQC2_OP CQC2_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON EXDU_ES QB6_EX1 QB6_EX2 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 QB9_EX1 QB9_EX2 QB9_EX3 QB9_EX4 QB9_EX5 QB9_EX6 QB9_EX7 Description QC2 is in closed position QC3 is in open position QC3 is in closed position QB9 is in open position QB9 is in closed position QC9 is in open position QC9 is in closed position QA1 in module BH_CONN is in open position QA1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position QB62 in module BH_CONN is in open position QB62 in module BH_CONN is in closed position QC1 in module BH_CONN is in open position QC1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position QC2 in module BH_CONN is in open position QC2 in module BH_CONN is in closed position Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open position Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed position There is no voltage on line and not VT (fuse) failure There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse) failure No transm error from bay containing earthing switch QC21 External condition for apparatus QB6 External condition for apparatus QB6 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9
Table 338:
Signal QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB6REL QB6ITL
Output signals for the BH_LINE_B (IM01-) function block

Description Closing of QA1 is allowed Closing of QA1 is forbidden Switching of QB6 is allowed Switching of QB6 is forbidden
RED 670
613
Section 11 Control
Signal QB2REL QB2ITL QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL QC3REL QC3ITL QB9REL QB9ITL QC9REL QC9ITL QB2OPTR QB2CLTR VPQB2TR Description Switching of QB2 is allowed Switching of QB2 is forbidden Switching of QC1 is allowed Switching of QC1 is forbidden Switching of QC2 is allowed Switching of QC2 is forbidden Switching of QC3 is allowed Switching of QC3 is forbidden Switching of QB9 is allowed Switching of QB9 is forbidden Switching of QC9 is allowed Switching of QC9 is forbidden QB2 is in open position QB2 is in closed position Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)
Table 339:
Signal QA1_OP QA1_CL QB61_OP QB61_CL QB62_OP QB62_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL 1QC3_OP 1QC3_CL 2QC3_OP 2QC3_CL QB61_EX1 QB61_EX2 QB62_EX1 QB62_EX2
Input signals for the BH_CONN (IK01-) function block

Description QA1 is in open position QA1 is in closed position QB61 is in open position QB61 is in closed position QB62 is in open position QB62 is in closed position QC1 is in open position QC1 is in closed position QC2 is in open position QC2 is in closed position QC3 on line 1 is in open position QC3 on line 1 is in closed position QC3 on line 2 is in open position QC3 on line 2 is in closed position External condition for apparatus QB61 External condition for apparatus QB61 External condition for apparatus QB62 External condition for apparatus QB62
614
RED 670
Section 11 Control
Table 340:
Signal QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB61REL QB61ITL QB62REL QB62ITL QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL
Output signals for the BH_CONN (IK01-) function block

Description Closing of QA1 is allowed Closing of QA1 is forbidden Switching of QB61 is allowed Switching of QB61 is forbidden Switching of QB62 is allowed Switching of QB62 is forbidden Switching of QC1 is allowed Switching of QC1 is forbidden Switching of QC2 is allowed Switching of QC2 is forbidden
RED 670
615

11.4.12.1
Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking

Function block
GR01IntlReceive BLOCK INSTNAME RESRENAM RESGRNAM APP1NAME APP2NAME APP3NAME APP4NAME APP5NAME APP6NAME APP7NAME APP8NAME APP9NAME APP10NAM APP11NAM APP12NAM APP13NAM APP14NAM APP15NAM RESREQ RESGRANT APP1_OP APP1_CL APP1VAL APP2_OP APP2_CL APP2VAL APP3_OP APP3_CL APP3VAL APP4_OP APP4_CL APP4VAL APP5_OP APP5_CL APP5VAL APP6_OP APP6_CL APP6VAL APP7_OP APP7_CL APP7VAL APP8_OP APP8_CL APP8VAL APP9_OP APP9_CL APP9VAL APP10_OP APP10_CL APP10VAL APP11_OP APP11_CL APP11VAL APP12_OP APP12_CL APP12VAL APP13_OP APP13_CL APP13VAL APP14_OP APP14_CL APP14VAL APP15_OP APP15_CL APP15VAL COM_VAL en07000048.vsd
Figure 305:
GR function block
11.4.12.2
616
RED 670
Section 11 Control
Table 341:
Signal BLOCK
Input signals for the IntlReceive (GR01-) function block

Description Block of output signals
Table 342:
Signal RESREQ RESGRANT APP1_OP APP1_CL APP1VAL APP2_OP APP2_CL APP2VAL APP3_OP APP3_CL APP3VAL APP4_OP APP4_CL APP4VAL APP5_OP APP5_CL APP5VAL APP6_OP APP6_CL APP6VAL APP7_OP APP7_CL APP7VAL APP8_OP APP8_CL APP8VAL APP9_OP APP9_CL APP9VAL APP10_OP APP10_CL APP10VAL APP11_OP
Output signals for the IntlReceive (GR01-) function block

Description Reservation request Reservation granted Apparatus 1 position is open Apparatus 1 position is closed Apparatus 1 position is valid Apparatus 2 position is open Apparatus 2 position is closed Apparatus 2 position is valid Apparatus 3 position is open Apparatus 3 position is closed Apparatus 3 position is valid Apparatus 4 position is open Apparatus 4 position is closed Apparatus 4 position is valid Apparatus 5 position is open Apparatus 5 position is closed Apparatus 5 position is valid Apparatus 6 position is open Apparatus 6 position is closed Apparatus 6 position is valid Apparatus 7 position is open Apparatus 7 position is closed Apparatus 7 position is valid Apparatus 8 position is open Apparatus 8 position is closed Apparatus 8 position is valid Apparatus 9 position is open Apparatus 9 position is closed Apparatus 9 position is valid Apparatus 10 position is open Apparatus 10 position is closed Apparatus 10 position is valid Apparatus 11 position is open
RED 670
617
Section 11 Control
Signal APP11_CL APP11VAL APP12_OP APP12_CL APP12VAL APP13_OP APP13_CL APP13VAL APP14_OP APP14_CL APP14VAL APP15_OP APP15_CL APP15VAL COM_VAL Description Apparatus 11 position is closed Apparatus 11 position is valid Apparatus 12 position is open Apparatus 12 position is closed Apparatus 12 position is valid Apparatus 13 position is open Apparatus 13 position is closed Apparatus 13 position is valid Apparatus 14 position is open Apparatus 14 position is closed Apparatus 14 position is valid Apparatus 15 position is open Apparatus 15 position is closed Apparatus 15 position is valid Receive communication status is valid
11.4.12.3
Setting parameters
Table 343:
Parameter Operation
Basic general settings for the IntlReceive (GR01-) function

11.5
Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (SLGGIO)
Function block name: SLxx ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: SLGGIO IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
11.5.1
Introduction
The SLGGIO function block (or the selector switch function block) is used within the CAP tool in order to get a selector switch functionality similar with the one provided by a hardware selector switch. Hardware selector switches are used extensively by utilities, in order to have different functions operating on pre-set
618
RED 670
Section 11 Control
values. Hardware switches are however sources for maintenance issues, lower system reliability and extended purchase portfolio. The virtual selector switches eliminate all these problems.
11.5.2
The SLGGIO has two operating inputs UP and DOWN. When a signal is received on the UP input, the block will activate the output next to the present activated output, in ascending order (if the present activated output is 3 for example and one operates the UP input, then the output 4 will be activated). When a signal is received on the DOWN input, the block will activate the output next to the present activated output, in descending order (if the present activated output is 3 for example and one operates the DOWN input, then the output 2 will be activated). Depending on the output settings the output signals can be steady or pulsed. In case of steady signals, in case of UP or DOWN operation, the previously active output will be deactivated. Also, depending on the settings one can have a time delay between the UP or DOWN activation signal positive front and the output activation. Besides the inputs visible in CAP configuration tool, there are other executable inputs that will allow an user to set the desired position directly (without activating the intermediate positions), either locally or remotely, using a select before execute dialog. One can block the function operation, by activating the BLOCK input. In this case, the present position will be kept and further operation will be blocked. The operator place (local or remote) is specified through the PSTO input. If any operation is allowed the signal INTONE from the Fixed signal function block can be connected. The SLGGIO function block has also an integer value output, that generates the actual position number. The positions and the block names are fully settable by the user. These names will appear in the menu, so the user can see the position names instead of a number.
RED 670
619
Section 11 Control
11.5.2.1 Functionality and behaviour
From the menu:
REC 670 1.1 Control Measurements Events Disturbance records Settings Diagnostics Test Reset Authorization Language REC 670/Control Single Line Diagram Commands
REC 670/Ctrl/Com Single Command Selector Switch (GGIO)
1
../Ctrl/Com/Sel Sw SL01 SL02 .. .. SL15
2
../Com/Sel Sw/SL03 Damage ctrl
3 4
../Com/Sel Sw/SL03 Damage ctrl
P:Disc All OK
N: Disc Fe Cancel
4 5
../Com/Sel Sw/ DmgCtrl Damage ctrl:
E
Modify the position with arrows. The pos will not be modified (outputs will not be activated) until you press the E-button for O.K.
The dialog window that appears shows the present position (P:) and the new position (N:), both in clear names, given by the user (max. 13 characters).
en06000420.vsd
Figure 306:
Example 1 on handling the switch from the local HMI.
1 The SLGGIO instances in CAP configuration tool 2 Switch name given by the user (max 13 characters) 3 Position number, up to 32 positions 4 Change position 5 New position
11.5.2.2
Graphical display
There are two possibilities for the SLGGIO:
620
RED 670
Section 11 Control
if it is used just for the monitoring, the switches will be listed with their actual position names, as defined by the user (max. 13 characters); if it is used for control, the switches will be listed with their actual positions, but only the first three letters of the name will be used;
In both cases, the switch full name will be shown, but the user has to redefine it when building the Graphical Display Editor, under the "Caption". If used for the control, the following sequence of commands will ensue:
From the graphical display:

REC 670 1.1 Control Measurements Events Disturbance records Settings Diagnostics Test Reset Authorization Language REC 670 1.1/Control Single Line Diagram Commands
Change to the "Switches" page of the SLD by left-right arrows. Select switch by up-down arrows
../Control/SLD/Switch AR control WFM Pilot setup OFF Damage control DAL
O E
../Control/SLD/Switch AR control WFM Pilot setup OFF P: Disc OK N: Disc Fe Cancel
Select switch. Press the I or O key. A dialog box appears.
The pos will not be modified (outputs will not be activated) until you press the E-button for O.K.
../Control/SLD/Switch AR control WFM Pilot setup OFF Damage control DFW

en06000421.vsd
Figure 307:
Example 2 on handling the switch from the local HMI.
RED 670
621
Section 11 Control 11.5.3 Function block

SL01SLGGIO BLOCK PSTO UP DOWN SWPOS01 SWPOS02 SWPOS03 SWPOS04 SWPOS05 SWPOS06 SWPOS07 SWPOS08 SWPOS09 SWPOS10 SWPOS11 SWPOS12 SWPOS13 SWPOS14 SWPOS15 SWPOS16 SWPOS17 SWPOS18 SWPOS19 SWPOS20 SWPOS21 SWPOS22 SWPOS23 SWPOS24 SWPOS25 SWPOS26 SWPOS27 SWPOS28 SWPOS29 SWPOS30 SWPOS31 SWPOS32 SWPOSN INSTNAME NAME1 NAME2 NAME3 NAME4 NAME5 NAME6 NAME7 NAME8 NAME9 NAME10 NAME11 NAME12 NAME13 NAME14 NAME15 NAME16 NAME17 NAME18 NAME19 NAME20 NAME21 NAME22 NAME23 NAME24 NAME25 NAME26 NAME27 NAME28 NAME29 NAME30 NAME31 NAME32 en05000658.vsd
Figure 308:
SL function block, example for SL01SL15
622
RED 670
Section 11 Control 11.5.4 Input and output signals

Table 344:
Signal BLOCK PSTO UP DOWN
Input signals for the SLGGIO (SL01-) function block

Description Block of function Operator place selection Binary "UP" command Binary "DOWN" command
Table 345:
Signal SWPOS01 SWPOS02 SWPOS03 SWPOS04 SWPOS05 SWPOS06 SWPOS07 SWPOS08 SWPOS09 SWPOS10 SWPOS11 SWPOS12 SWPOS13 SWPOS14 SWPOS15 SWPOS16 SWPOS17 SWPOS18 SWPOS19 SWPOS20 SWPOS21 SWPOS22 SWPOS23 SWPOS24 SWPOS25 SWPOS26 SWPOS27 SWPOS28
Output signals for the SLGGIO (SL01-) function block

Description Selector switch position 1 Selector switch position 2 Selector switch position 3 Selector switch position 4 Selector switch position 5 Selector switch position 6 Selector switch position 7 Selector switch position 8 Selector switch position 9 Selector switch position 10 Selector switch position 11 Selector switch position 12 Selector switch position 13 Selector switch position 14 Selector switch position 15 Selector switch position 16 Selector switch position 17 Selector switch position 18 Selector switch position 19 Selector switch position 20 Selector switch position 21 Selector switch position 22 Selector switch position 23 Selector switch position 24 Selector switch position 25 Selector switch position 26 Selector switch position 27 Selector switch position 28
RED 670
623
Section 11 Control
Signal SWPOS29 SWPOS30 SWPOS31 SWPOS32 SWPOSN Description Selector switch position 29 Selector switch position 30 Selector switch position 31 Selector switch position 32 Switch position (integer)
11.5.5
Setting parameters
Table 346:
Parameter Operation NrPos OutType tPulse tDelay StopAtExtremes
Basic general settings for the SLGGIO (SL01-) function

Range Off On 32 Pulsed Steady 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60000.000 Disabled Enabled Step 1 0.001 0.010 Default Off 2 - 32 Steady 0.200 0.000 Disabled Unit s s Description Operation Off/On Number of positions in the switch Output type, steady or pulse Operate pulse duration, in [s] Time delay on the output, in [s] Stop when min or max position is reached
11.6
Selector mini switch (VSGGIO)

Function block name: VS ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: VSGGIO IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
11.6.1
Introduction
The VSGGIO function block (or the versatile switch function block) is a multipurpose function used within the CAP tool for a variety of applications, as a general purpose switch. The switch can be controlled from the menu or from a symbol on the SLD of the LHMI.
624
RED 670
Section 11 Control 11.6.2 Principle of operation

This function can be used for double purpose, in the same way as the switch controller (SCSWI) functions are used: for indication, receiving position through the IPOS1 and IPOS2 inputs and distributing it in the configuration through the POS1 and POS2 outputs or to IEC61850 through reporting or GOOSE for command, receiving commands via the HMI. HMI symbols Select button or Indication button from menu (Control / Commands / Versatile Switch) or IEC61850 and sending them in the configuration and especially to the outputs (through a SMBO function block)
The PSTO input is connected to the Local remote switch to have a selection of operators place , operation from local HMI (Local pos) or through IEC 61850 (Remote pos). An INTONE connection from Fixed signal function block will allow operation from Local HMI. As it can be seen, both indications and commands are done in double-bit representation, where a combination of signals on both inputs/outputs generate the desired result:
POS2 0 0 1 1 POS1 0 1 0 1 RESULT intermediate POS1 POS2 bad state POS (integer output) 0 1 2 3
11.6.3
Function block
VS01VSGGIO BLOCK PSTO IPOS1 IPOS2 NAME_UND NAM_POS1 NAM_POS2 NAME_BAD BLOCKED POSITION POS1 POS2 CMDPOS12 CMDPOS21
en06000508.vsd
Figure 309:
VS function block
11.6.4
RED 670
625
Section 11 Control
Table 347:
Signal BLOCK PSTO IPOS1 IPOS2
Input signals for the VSGGIO (VS01-) function block

Description Block of function Operator place selection Position 1 indicating input Position 2 indicating input
Table 348:
Signal BLOCKED POSITION POS1 POS2 CMDPOS12 CMDPOS21
Output signals for the VSGGIO (VS01-) function block

Description The function is active but the functionality is blocked Position indication, integer Position 1 indication, logical signal Position 2 indication, logical signal Execute command from position 1 to position 2 Execute command from position 2 to position 1
11.6.5
Setting parameters
Table 349:
Parameter Operation CtlModel
Basic general settings for the VSGGIO (VS01-) function

Range Off On Dir Norm SBO Enh Step Default Off Dir Norm Unit Description Operation Off / On Specifies the type for control model according to IEC 61850 Operation mode Max time between select and execute signals Command pulse lenght
Mode tSelect
Steady Pulsed 0.000 - 60.000
0.001
Pulsed 30.000
tPulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
11.7
Generic double point function block (DPGGIO)

Function block name: DPx-ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: DPGGIO IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
626
RED 670
Section 11 Control 11.7.1 Introduction

The DPGGIO function block is used to send three logical signals to other systems or equipment in the substation. It is especially conceived to be used in the interlocking and reservation station-wide logics.
11.7.2
Upon receiving the input signals, the DPGGIO function block will send the signals over IEC 61850-8-1 to the equipment or system that requests these signals. To be able to get the signals, one must use other tools, described in the Application Manual, Chapter 2: Engineering of the IED and define which function block in which equipment or system should receive this information.
11.7.3
Function block
DP01DPGGIO OPEN CLOSE VALID POSITION
en07000200.vsd
Figure 310:
DP function block
11.7.4

Table 350:
Signal OPEN CLOSE VALID
Input signals for the DPGGIO (DP01-) function block

Description Open indication Close indication Valid indication
Table 351:
Signal POSITION
Output signals for the DPGGIO (DP01-) function block

Description Double point indication
11.7.5
Setting parameters
RED 670
627
Section 11 Control
11.8
Single point generic control 8 signals (SPC8GGIO)

Function block name: SCx-ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: SPC8GGIO IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
11.8.1
Introduction
The SC function block is a collection of 8 single point commands, designed to bring in commands from REMOTE (SCADA) or LOCAL (HMI) to those parts of the logic configuration that do not need complicated function blocks that have the capability to receive commands (for example SCSWI). In this way, simple commands can be sent directly to the IED outputs, without confirmation. Confirmation (status) of the result of the commands is supposed to be achieved by other means, such as binary inputs and SPGGIO function blocks.
11.8.2
The PSTO input will determine which the allowed position for the operator (LOCAL, REMOTE, ALL) is. Upon sending a command from an allowed operator position, one of the 8 outputs will be activated. The settings Latchedx and tPulsex (where x is the respective output) will determine if the signal will be pulsed (and how long the pulse is) or latched (steady). BLOCK will block the operation of the function in case a command is sent, no output will be activated.
11.8.3
Function block
SC01SPC8GGIO BLOCK PSTO OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 OUT8 en07000143.vsd
Figure 311:
SPC function block
11.8.4
628

Section 11 Control
Table 352:
Signal BLOCK PSTO
Input signals for the SPC8GGIO (SC01-) function block

Description Blocks the function operation Operator place selection
Table 353:
Signal OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 OUT8
Output signals for the SPC8GGIO (SC01-) function block

Description Output 1 Output2 Output3 Output4 Output5 Output6 Output7 Output8
11.8.5
Setting parameters
Table 354:
Parameter Operation Latched1
Basic general settings for the SPC8GGIO (SC01-) function

Range Off On Pulsed Latched 0.01 - 6000.00 Pulsed Latched 0.01 - 6000.00 Pulsed Latched 0.01 - 6000.00 Pulsed Latched 0.01 - 6000.00 Pulsed Latched 0.01 - 6000.00 Step Default Off Pulsed Unit Description Operation Off/On Setting for pulsed/ latched mode for output 1 Output1 Pulse Time Setting for pulsed/ latched mode for output 2 Output2 Pulse Time Setting for pulsed/ latched mode for output 3 Output3 Pulse Time Setting for pulsed/ latched mode for output 4 Output4 Pulse Time Setting for pulsed/ latched mode for output 5 Output5 Pulse Time
tPulse1 Latched2
0.01 -
0.10 Pulsed
s -
tPulse2 Latched3
0.01 -
0.10 Pulsed
s -
tPulse3 Latched4
0.01 -
0.10 Pulsed
s -
tPulse4 Latched5
0.01 -
0.10 Pulsed
s -
tPulse5
0.01
0.10
RED 670
629
Section 11 Control
Parameter Latched6 Range Pulsed Latched 0.01 - 6000.00 Pulsed Latched 0.01 - 6000.00 Pulsed Latched 0.01 - 6000.00 Step Default Pulsed Unit Description Setting for pulsed/ latched mode for output 6 Output6 Pulse Time Setting for pulsed/ latched mode for output 7 Output7 Pulse Time Setting for pulsed/ latched mode for output 8 Output8 pulse time
tPulse6 Latched7
0.01 -
0.10 Pulsed
s -
tPulse7 Latched8
0.01 -
0.10 Pulsed
s -
tPulse8
0.01
0.10
630
RED 670
Section 12 Scheme communication

About this chapter
This chapter describes the scheme communication logic that is used in distance and earth fault protection function to obtain almost instantaneous fault clearance for faults on the protected line. The chapter considers scheme communication logic (ZCOM), current reversal and weak-end in-feed logic (ZCAL) for the distance protection function and scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection (EFC) and current reversal and weak-end in-feed logic (EFC) for the residual overcurrent function. Also Local acceleration logic (ZCLC) is discussed which is a function that can generate instantaneous tripping as a result of remote end faults without any telecommunication. The chapter contains a short description of the design, simplified logical block diagrams, figure of the function block, input and output signals and setting parameters.
12.1
Scheme communication logic for distance protection (PSCH, 85)

Function block name: ZCOMANSI number: 85 IEC 61850 logical node name: ZCPSCH IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
12.1.1
Introduction
To achieve instantaneous fault clearance for all line faults, a scheme communication logic is provided. All types of communication schemes e.g. permissive underreach, permissive overreach, blocking, intertrip etc. are available. The built-in communication module (LDCM) can be used for scheme communication signalling when included. Phase segregated communication is also available for correct operation at simultaneous faults when three distance protection communication channels are available between the line ends
RED 670
631
Section 12 Scheme communication 12.1.2 Principle of operation

Depending on whether a reverse or forward directed impedance zone is used to issue the send signal, the communication schemes are divided into Blocking and Permissive schemes, respectively. A permissive scheme is inherently faster and has better security against false tripping than a blocking scheme. On the other hand, a permissive scheme depends on a received signal for a fast trip, so its dependability is lower than that of a blocking scheme.
12.1.2.1
Blocking scheme
The principal of operation for a blocking scheme is that an overreaching zone is allowed to trip instantaneously after the settable co-ordination time tCoord has elapsed, when no signal is received from the remote terminal. The received signal, which shall be connected to CR, is used to not release the zone to be accelerated to clear the fault instantaneously (after time tCoord). The overreaching zone to be accelerated is connected to the input CACC, see figure 312. In case of external faults, the blocking signal (CR) must be received before the settable timer tCoord elapses, to prevent a false trip, see figure 312. The function can be totally blocked by activating the input BLOCK, block of trip by activating the input BLKTR, Block of carrier send by activating the input BLKCS.
CACC CR tCoord
AND
TRIP
en05000512.vsd
Figure 312:
Basic logic for trip carrier in blocking scheme
Channels for communication in each direction must be available.
12.1.2.2
Permissive underreach scheme

In a permissive underreach scheme, a forward directed underreach measuring element (normally zone1) sends a permissive signal CS to the remote end if a fault is detected in forward direction. The received signal CR is used to allow an overreaching zone to trip after the tCoord timer has elapsed. The tCoord in permissive underreach schemes is normally set to zero. The logic for trip carrier in permissive scheme is shown in figure 313.
632
RED 670
CACC CR
tCoord
AND
TRIP
en05000513.vsd
Figure 313:
Logic for trip carrier in permissive scheme
The permissive underreach scheme has the same blocking possibilities as mentioned for blocking scheme above.
12.1.2.3
Permissive overreach scheme

In a permissive overreach scheme, a forward directed overreach measuring element (normally zone2) sends a permissive signal CS to the remote end if a fault is detected in forward direction. The received signal CR is used to allow an overreaching zone to trip after the settable tCoord timer has elapsed. The tCoord in permissive overreach schemes is normally set to zero. The logic for trip carrier is the same as for permissive underreach, i.e. figure 313. The permissive overreach scheme has the same blocking possibilities as mentioned for blocking scheme above.
12.1.2.4
Unblocking scheme
In unblocking scheme, the lower dependability in permissive scheme is overcome by using the loss of guard signal from the communication equipment to locally create a carrier receive signal. It is common or suitable to use the function when older, less reliable, power-line carrier (PLC) communication is used. The unblocking function uses a carrier guard signal CRG, which must always be present, even when no CR signal is received. The absence of the CRG signal for a time longer than the setting tSecurity time is used as a CR signal, see figure 314. This also enables a permissive scheme to operate when the line fault blocks the signal transmission. The carrier received signal created by the unblocking function is reset 150 ms after the security timer has elapsed. When that occurs an output signal LCG is activated for signalling purpose. The unblocking function is reset 200 ms after that the guard signal is present again.
RED 670
633
CR 1 CRG 200 ms t AND OR tSecurity t 150 ms t AND LCG >1 CRL
en05000746.vsd
Figure 314:
Carrier guard logic with unblocking scheme
The unblocking function can be set in three operation modes (setting Unblock):
Off: No restart: The unblocking function is out of operation Communication failure shorter than tSecurity will be ignored If CRG disappears a CRL signal will be transferred to the trip logic There will not be any information in case of communication failure (LCG) Restart Communication failure shorter than tSecurity will be ignored It sends a defined (150 ms) CRL after the disappearance of the CRG signal The function will activate LCG output in case of communication failure If the communication failure comes and goes (<200 ms) there will not be recurrent signalling
12.1.2.5
Intertrip scheme
In the direct inter-trip scheme, the carrier send signal CS is sent from an underreaching zone that is tripping the line. The received signal CR is directly transferred to a TRIP for tripping without local criteria. The signal is further processed in the tripping logic. In case of single-pole tripping in multi-phase systems, a phase selection is performed.
12.1.2.6
Simplified logic diagram

The simplified logic diagram for the complete logic is shown in figure 315.
634
RED 670
Unblock = Off CR Unblock = NoRestart Unblock = Restart CRG tSecurit y
AND
OR
CRL CRL
1
200 ms t
t
150 ms
AND AND
LCG
OR
AND
SchemeType = Intertrip CSUR tSendMi n
OR
AND
BLOCK CSBLK CRL Schemetype = Permissive UR
OR
AND
AND
OR
CS
AND
CACC Schemetype = Permissive OR CSOR
tCoord
OR
25 ms t
TRIP
OR
AND
AND
tSendMin
OR AND
SchemeType = Blocking BLKCS
AND
en05000515.vsd
Figure 315:
Scheme communication logic for distance protection, simplified logic diagram
RED 670
635
Section 12 Scheme communication 12.1.3 Function block

ZCOMZCPSCH_85 BLOCK BLKTR BLKCS CSBLK CACC CSOR CSUR CR CRG TRIP CS CRL LCG
en06000286.vsd
Figure 316:
ZCOM function block
12.1.4

Table 355:
Signal BLOCK BLKTR BLKCS CSBLK CACC CSOR CSUR CR CRG
Input signals for the ZCPSCH_85 (ZCOM-) function block

Description Block of function Signal for block of trip output from communication logic Block of carrier send in permissive OR and blocking schemes Reverse directed distance protection zone signal Permissive distance protection zone signal Overreaching distance protection zone signal Underreaching distance protection zone signal Carrier Signal Received Carrier guard signal received
Table 356:
Signal TRIP CS CRL LCG
Output signals for the ZCPSCH_85 (ZCOM-) function block

Description Trip output Carrier Send signal Carrier signal received or missing carrier guard signal Loss of carrier guard signal
12.1.5
Setting parameters
636
RED 670
Table 357:
Parameter Operation SchemeType
Basic parameter group settings for the ZCPSCH_85 (ZCOM-) function

Range Off On Off Intertrip Permissive UR Permissive OR Blocking 0.000 - 60.000 Step Default Off Permissive UR Unit Description Operation Off / On Scheme type
tCoord
0.001
0.035
Co-ordination time for blocking communication scheme Minimum duration of a carrier send signal
tSendMin
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
Table 358:
Parameter Unblock
Advanced parameter group settings for the ZCPSCH_85 (ZCOM-) function

Range Off NoRestart Restart 0.000 - 60.000 Step Default Off Unit Description Operation mode of unblocking logic Security timer for loss of carrier guard detection
tSecurity
0.001
0.035
12.1.6
Technical data
Table 359:
Function Scheme type
Scheme communication logic for distance protection (PSCH, 85)

Range or value Intertrip Permissive UR Permissive OR Blocking (0.000-60.000) s (0.000-60.000) s (0.000-60.000) s Off NoRestart Restart Accuracy -
Co-ordination time for blocking communication scheme Minimum duration of a carrier send signal Security timer for loss of carrier guard detection Operation mode of unblocking logic
0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms -
12.2
Phase segregated scheme communication logic for distance protection (PSCH, 85)
RED 670
Function block name: ZCIPANSI number: 85 IEC 61850 logical node name: ZC1PPSCH
12.2.1
Introduction
Communication between line ends is used to achieve fault clearance for all faults on a power line. All possible types of communication schemes e.g. permissive underreach, permissive overreach and blocking schemes are available. To manage problems with simultaneous faults on parallel power lines phase segregated communication is needed. This will then replace the standard scheme communication module (ZCOM) on important lines where three communication channels (in each subsystem) are available for the distance protection communication. The main purpose of the ZC1P scheme communication logic is to supplement the distance protection function such that: fast clearance of faults is also achieved at the line end for which the faults are on the part of the line not covered by its underreaching zone. correct phase selection can be maintained to support single-pole tripping for faults occurring anywhere on the entire length of a double circuit line.
To accomplish this, three separate communication channels, i.e. one per phase, each capable of transmitting a signal in each direction are required. The Phase segregated communication logic can be completed with the current reversal and WEI logic for phase segregated communication, when found necessary in Blocking and Permissive overreaching schemes.
12.2.2
Depending on whether a reverse or forward directed impedance zone is used to issue the send signal, the communication schemes are divided into Blocking and Permissive schemes, respectively. A permissive scheme is inherently faster and has better security against false tripping than a blocking scheme. On the other hand, a permissive scheme depends on a received signal for a fast trip, so its dependability is lower than that of a blocking scheme. The ZC1P function is a logical function built-up from logical elements. It is a supplementary function to the distance protection, requiring for its operation inputs from the distance protection and the communication equipment. The type of communication-aided scheme to be used can be selected by way of the settings.
638
RED 670
The ability to select which distance protection zone is assigned to which input of the scheme communication logic makes this logic able to support practically any scheme communication requirements regardless of their basic operating principle. The outputs to initiate tripping and sending of the teleprotection signal are given in accordance with the type of communication-aided scheme selected and the zone(s) and phase(s) of the distance protection which have operated. When power line carrier communication channels are used for permissive schemes communication, unblocking logic which uses the loss of guard signal as a receive criteria is provided. This logic compensates for the lack of dependability due to the transmission of the command signal over the faulted line.
12.2.2.1
Blocking scheme
The principle of operation for a blocking scheme is that an overreaching zone is allowed to trip instantaneously after the settable co-ordination time tCoord has elapsed, when no signal is received from the remote terminal. The received signal (sent by a reverse looking element in the remote IED), which shall be connected to CRLx, is used to not release the zone to be accelerated to clear the fault instantaneously (after time tCoord). The overreaching zone to be accelerated is connected to the input CACCLx, see figure 317. In case of external faults, the blocking signal (CRLx) must be received before the settable timer tCoord elapses, to prevent an unneccesary trip, see figure 317. The function can be totally blocked by activating the input BLOCK, block of trip is achieved by activating the input BLKTRLx, Block of carrier send is done by activating the input BLKCSLx.
CACCLx CRLx
tCoord 25 ms
AND
TRLx
en06000310.vsd
Figure 317:
Basic logic for trip carrier in one phase of a blocking scheme
12.2.2.2
Permissive underreach scheme

In a permissive underreach scheme, a forward directed underreach measuring element (normally zone1) sends a permissive signal CSLx to the remote end if a fault is detected in forward direction. The received signal CRLx is used to allow an overreaching zone (connected to CACCLx) to trip after the tCoord timer has elapsed. The tCoord is in permissive underreach schemes normally set to zero. The logic for trip carrier in permissive scheme is shown in figure 318. Three channels for communication in each direction must be available.
RED 670
639
CACCLx CRLx
tCoord
25 ms
AND
TRLx
en07000088.vsd
Figure 318:
Basic logic for trip carrier in one phase of a permissive underreach scheme
12.2.2.3
Permissive overreach scheme

In a permissive overreach scheme, a forward directed overreach measuring element (normally zone2) sends a permissive signal CSLx to the remote end if a fault is detected in forward direction. The received signal CRLx is used to allow an overreaching zone to trip after the settable tCoord timer has elapsed. The tCoord is in permissive overreach schemes normally set to zero. The logic for trip carrier is the same as for permissive underreach, see figure 317. The permissive overreach scheme has the same blocking possibilities as mentioned for blocking scheme above. The blocking inputs are activated from the current reversal logic when this function is included. Three channels for communication in each direction must be available.
12.2.2.4
Unblocking scheme
In an unblocking scheme, the lower dependability in permissive scheme is overcome by using the loss of guard signal from the communication equipment to locally create a carrier receive signal. It is common or suitable to use the function when older, less reliable, power-line carrier (PLC) communication is used. As phase segregated communication schemes uses phases individually and the PLC is typically connected single phase or phase to phase it is not possible to evaluate which of the phases to release and the unblocking scheme has thus not been supported.
12.2.2.5
Intertrip scheme
In the direct intertrip scheme, the carrier send signal CS is sent from an underreaching zone that is tripping the line. The received signal per phase is directly transferred to the trip function block for tripping without local criteria. The signal is not further processed in the phase segregated communication logic. In case of single-pole tripping the phase selection and logic for tripping the three phases is performed in the trip function block.
12.2.2.6
Simplified logic diagram

The simplified logic diagram for one phase (Lx) is shown in figure 319.
640
RED 670
SchemeType = Intertrip CSURLx tSendMin OR AND
BLOCK CSBLKLx CRLx Schemetype = Permissive UR
OR
AND
AND
OR
CSLx
AND CACCLx Schemetype = Permissive OR CSORLx OR AND
OR
tCoord t
25 ms t
TRLx
AND tSendMin OR SchemeType = Blocking BLKCSx AND AND
CSL1 CSL2 AND
CSL2 CSL3 CSL3 CSL1 AND AND OR
CSMPH
CSL1 CSL2 CSL3 OR GENERAL
en06000311.vsd
Figure 319:
Simplified logic diagram for one phase (Lx)
RED 670
641

ZC1PZC1PPSCH_85 BLOCK BLKTR BLKTRL1 BLKTRL2 BLKTRL3 CACCL1 CACCL2 CACCL3 CSURL1 CSURL2 CSURL3 CSORL1 CSORL2 CSORL3 CSBLKL1 CSBLKL2 CSBLKL3 BLKCSL1 BLKCSL2 BLKCSL3 CRL1 CRL2 CRL3 CRMPH TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 CSL1 CSL2 CSL3 CSMPH CRLL1 CRLL2 CRLL3
en06000427.vsd
Figure 320:
ZC1P function block
12.2.4

Table 360:
Signal BLOCK BLKTR BLKTRL1 BLKTRL2 BLKTRL3 CACCL1 CACCL2 CACCL3 CSURL1 CSURL2 CSURL3 CSORL1 CSORL2 CSORL3 Table continued on next page
Input signals for the ZC1PPSCH_85 (ZC1P-) function block

Description Block of function Common signal for block of trip output from communication logic in all phases Signal for block of trip output from communication logic in Phase L1 Signal for block of trip output from communication logic in Phase L2 Signal for block of trip output from communication logic in Phase L3 Accelerated Distance protection zone start in Phase L1 Accelerated Distance protection zone signal in Phase L2 Accelerated Distance protection zone signal in Phase L3 Underreaching distance protection zone signal in Phase L1 Underreaching distance protection zone signal in Phase L2 Underreaching distance protection zone signal in Phase L3 Overreaching distance protection zone signal in Phase L1 Overreaching distance protection zone signal in Phase L2 Overreaching distance protection zone signal in Phase L3
642
RED 670

Signal CSBLKL1 CSBLKL2 CSBLKL3 BLKCSL1 BLKCSL2 BLKCSL3 CRL1 CRL2 CRL3 CRMPH Description Reverse directed distance protection zone signal in Phase L1 Reverse directed distance protection zone signal in Phase L2 Reverse directed distance protection zone signal in Phase L3 Block of carrier send in POR and Blocking schemes in Phase L1 Block of carrier send in POR and Blocking schemes in Phase L2 Block of carrier send in POR and Blocking schemes in Phase L3 Carrier signal received in Phase L1 Carrier signal received in Phase L2 Carrier signal received in Phase L3 Carrier Signal received for multiphase fault
Table 361:
Signal TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 CSL1 CSL2 CSL3 CSMPH CRLL1 CRLL2 CRLL3
Output signals for the ZC1PPSCH_85 (ZC1P-) function block

Description Common trip output in any of the phase Trip output in Phase L1 Trip output in Phase L2 Trip output in Phase L3 Carrier Send in phase L1 Carrier Send in phase L2 Carrier Send in phase L3 carrier Send for mulitphase fault Carrier signal received in Phase L1 Carrier signal received in Phase L2 Carrier signal received in Phase L3
12.2.5
Setting parameters
Table 362:
Parameter Operation Scheme Type
Parameter group settings for the ZC1PPSCH_85 (ZC1P-) function

Range Off On Off Intertrip Permissive UR Permissive OR Blocking 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Step Default Off Permissive UR Unit Description Operation On / Off Scheme type
tCoord tSendMin
0.001 0.001
0.000 0.100
s s
Trip coordinate time Minimum duration of Carrier Send signal
RED 670
643
Section 12 Scheme communication 12.2.6 Technical data

Table 363:
Function Scheme type
Phase segregated scheme communication logic for distance protection (PSCH, 85)
Range or value Intertrip Permissive UR Permissive OR Blocking (0.000-60.000) s (0.000-60.000) s (0.000-60.000) s Off NoRestart Restart Accuracy -
Co-ordination time for blocking communication scheme Minimum duration of a carrier send signal Security timer for loss of carrier guard detection Operation mode of unblocking logic
0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms -
12.3
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for distance protection (PSCH, 85)
Function block name: ZCALANSI number: 85 IEC 61850 logical node name: ZCRWPSCH IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
12.3.1
Introduction
The current reversal function is used to prevent unwanted operations due to current reversal when using permissive overreach protection schemes in application with parallel lines when the overreach from the two ends overlaps on the parallel line. The weak-end infeed logic is used in cases where the apparent power behind the protection can be too low to activate the distance protection function. When activated, received carrier signal together with local under voltage criteria and no reverse zone operation gives an instantaneous trip. The received signal is also echoed back to accelerate the sending end. Three phase or phase segregated scheme logic is available.
644
RED 670
Section 12 Scheme communication 12.3.2

12.3.2.1
Current reversal logic
The current reversal logic uses a reverse zone connected to the input IRLVLx to recognize the fault on the parallel line in phase Lx. When the reverse zone has been activated for a certain settable time tPickUpRev it prevents sending of a communication signal and activation of trip signal for a predefined time tDelayRev. This makes it possible for the carrier receive signal to reset before the carrier aided trip signal is activated due to the current reversal by the forward directed zone, see figure 321.
Figure 321:
The preventing of sending carrier send signal CSLx and activating of the TRIPLx in the scheme communication block ZCOM is carried out by connecting the IRVL signal to input BLOCK in the ZCOM function. The function has an internal 10 ms drop-off timer which secure that the current reversal logic will be activated for short input signals even if the pick-up timer is set to zero.
12.3.2.2
Weak end infeed logic

The WEI function sends back (echoes) the received carrier signal under the condition that no fault has been detected on the weak end by different fault detection elements (distance protection in forward and reverse direction). The WEI function returns the received carrier signal, see figure 322, when: No active signal present on the input BLOCK. The functional input CRLx is active. This input is usually connected to the CRL output on the scheme communication logic ZCOM. The WEI function is not blocked by the active signal connected to the WEIBLKL1 functional input or to the VTSZ functional input. The later is usually configured to the BLOCK functional output of the fuse-failure function. No active signal has been present for at least 200 ms on the WEIBLK2 functional input. An OR combination of all fault detection functions (not undervoltage) as present within the terminal is usually used for this purpose.
RED 670
645
Figure 322:
Echo of a received carrier signal by the WEI function
When an echo function is used in both terminals (should generally be avoided), a spurious signal can be looped round by the echo logics. To avoid a continuous lockup of the system, the duration of the echoed signal is limited to 200 ms. An undervoltage criteria is used as an additional tripping criteria, when the tripping of the local breaker is selected, setting WEI = Echo&Trip, together with the WEI function and ECHO signal has been issued by the echo logic, see figure 323.
Figure 323:
Tripping part of the WEI logic, simplified diagram
646
RED 670

ZCALZCRWPSCH_85 U3P BLOCK IRVBLK IRV WEIBLK1 WEIBLK2 VTSZ CBOPEN CRL IRVL TRWEI TRWEIL1 TRWEIL2 TRWEIL3 ECHO
en06000287.vsd
Figure 324:
ZCAL function block
12.3.4

Table 364:
Signal U3P BLOCK IRVBLK IRV WEIBLK1 WEIBLK2 VTSZ CBOPEN CRL
Input signals for the ZCRWPSCH_85 (ZCAL-) function block

Description Group signal for voltage input Block of function Block of current reversal function Activation of current reversal logic Block of WEI logic Block of WEI logic due to operation of other protections Block of trip from WEI logic through fuse-failure function Block of trip from WEI logic by an open breaker POR Carrier receive for WEI logic
Table 365:
Signal IRVL TRWEI TRWEIL1 TRWEIL2 TRWEIL3 ECHO
Output signals for the ZCRWPSCH_85 (ZCAL-) function block

Description Operation of current reversal logic Trip of WEI logic Trip of WEI logic in phase L1 Trip of WEI logic in phase L2 Trip of WEI logic in phase L3 Carrier send by WEI logic
12.3.5
Setting parameters
RED 670
647
Table 366:
Parameter CurrRev
Basic parameter group settings for the ZCRWPSCH_85 (ZCAL-) function

Range Off On 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Step Default Off Unit Description Operating mode of Current Reversal Logic Pickup time for current reversal logic Time Delay to prevent Carrier send and local trip Operating mode of WEI logic Coordination time for the WEI logic Base setting for voltage level Phase to Phase voltage for detection of fault condition Phase to Neutral voltage for detection of fault condition
tPickUpRev tDelayRev
0.001 0.001
0.020 0.060
s s
WEI
Off Echo Echo & Trip 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 2000.00 10 - 90
Off
tPickUpWEI UBase UPP<
0.001 0.05 1
0.010 400.00 70
s kV %UB
UPN<
10 - 90
70
%UB
12.3.6
Technical data
Table 367:
Function Detection level phase to neutral voltage Detection level phase to phase voltage Reset ratio Operate time for current reversal Delay time for current reversal Coordination time for weak-end infeed logic
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for distance protection (PSCH, 85)
Range or value (10-90)% of Ubase (10-90)% of Ubase <105% (0.000-60.000) s (0.000-60.000) s (0.000-60.000) s Accuracy 1.0% of Ur 1.0% of Ur 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms
12.4
Local acceleration logic (PLAL)

Function block name: ZCLCANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: ZPLAL IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
648
RED 670
Section 12 Scheme communication 12.4.1 Introduction

To achieve fast clearing of faults on the whole line, when no communication channel is available, local acceleration logic (ZCLC) can be used. This logic enables fast fault clearing during certain conditions, but naturally, it can not fully replace a communication channel. The logic can be controlled either by the auto re-closer (zone extension) or by the loss of load current (loss-of-load acceleration).
12.4.2
12.4.2.1
Zone extension
The overreaching zone is connected to the input -EXACC. For this reason, configure the ARREADY functional input to a READY functional output of a used autoreclosing function or via the selected binary input to an external autoreclosing device, see figure 325. This will allow the overreaching zone to trip instantaneously.
Figure 325:
Simplified logic diagram for local acceleration logic
After the auto-recloser initiates the close command and remains in the reclaim state, there will be no ARREADY signal, and the protection will trip normally with step distance time functions. In case of a fault on the adjacent line within the overreaching zone range, an unwanted auto-reclosing cycle will occur. The step distance function at the reclosing attempt will prevent an unwanted retrip when the breaker is reclosed. On the other hand, at a persistent line fault on line section not covered by instantaneous zone (normally zone 1) only the first trip will be "instantaneous". The function will be blocked if the input BLOCK is activated (common with loss of load acceleration).
RED 670
649

12.4.2.2 Loss-of-load acceleration
When the "acceleration" is controlled by a loss of load, the overreaching zone used for "acceleration" connected to LLACC is not allowed to trip "instantaneously" during normal non-fault system conditions. When all three-phase currents have been above the set value MinCurr for more than setting tLowCurr, an overreaching zone will be allowed to trip "instantaneously" during a fault condition when one or two of the phase currents will become low due to a three phase trip at the opposite terminal, see figure 326. The current measurement is performed internally and the STILL signal becomes logical one under the described conditions. The load current in a healthy phase is in this way used to indicate the tripping at the opposite terminal. Note that this function will not operate in case of three-phase faults, because none of the phase currents will be low when the opposite terminal is tripped.
Figure 326:
Loss of load acceleration - simplified logic diagram
Breaker closing signals can if decided be connected to block the function during normal closing.
12.4.3
Function block
ZCLCZCLCPLAL I3P BLOCK ARREADY NDST EXACC BC LLACC TRZE TRLL
en05000333.vsd
Figure 327:
ZCLC function block
12.4.4
650
RED 670
Table 368:
Signal I3P BLOCK ARREADY NDST EXACC BC LLACC
Input signals for the ZCLCPLAL (ZCLC-) function block

Description Group signal for current input Block of function Autoreclosure ready, releases function used for fast trip Non directional criteria used to prevent instantaneous trip Connected to function used for tripping at zone xtension Breaker Close Connected to function used for tripping at loss of load
Table 369:
Signal TRZE TRLL
Output signals for the ZCLCPLAL (ZCLC-) function block

Description Trip by zone extension Trip by loss of load
12.4.5
Setting parameters
Table 370:
Parameter Operation IBase LoadCurr
Basic parameter group settings for the ZCLCPLAL (ZCLC-) function

Range Off On 1 - 99999 1 - 100 Step 1 1 Default Off 3000 10 Unit A %IB Description Operation Off / On Base setting for current values Load current before disturbance in % of IBase Enable/Disable operation of Loss of load. Enable/Disable operation of Zone extension Lev taken as curr loss due to remote CB trip in % of IBase Time delay on pick-up for MINCURR value Time delay on pick-up for load current release Time delay on drop off for load current release
LossOfLoad
Off On Off On 1 - 100
Off
ZoneExtension
Off
MinCurr
%IB
tLowCurr tLoadOn
0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000
0.001 0.001
0.200 0.000
s s
tLoadOff
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.300
RED 670
651
12.5
Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection (PSCH, 85)

Function block name: EFC-ANSI number: 85 IEC 61850 logical node name: ECPSCH IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
12.5.1
Introduction
To achieve fast fault clearance of earth faults on the part of the line not covered by the instantaneous step of the residual overcurrent protection, the directional residual overcurrent protection can be supported with a logic that uses communication channels. In the directional scheme, information of the fault current direction must be transmitted to the other line end. With directional comparison, an operate time of the protection of 50 60 ms including a channel transmission time of 20 ms, can be achieved. This short operate time enables rapid autoreclosing function after the fault clearance. The communication logic module for directional residual current protection for the REx670 IEDs enables blocking as well as permissive under/overreach schemes. The logic can also be supported by additional logic for weak-end-infeed and current reversal, included in the EFCA function.
12.5.2
The directional residual overcurrent protection (TEF) is configured to give input information, i.e. directional fault detection signals, to the EFC logic: CACC: Signal to be used for tripping of the communication scheme, normally the start signal of a forward overreach step of STFW. CSBLK: Signal to be used for sending block signal in the blocking communication scheme, normally the startpickup signal of a reverse overreach step of STRV. CSUR: Signal to be used for sending permissive signal in the underreach permissive communication scheme, normally the start signal of a forward underreach step of STINn, where n corresponds to the underacting step. CSOR: Signal to be used for sending permissive signal in the overreach permissive communication scheme, normally the start signal of a forward overreach step of STINn, where n corresponds to the overreach step.
652
RED 670
In addition to this a signal from the autoreclosing function should be configured to the BLKCS input for blocking of the function at a single phase reclosing cycle.
12.5.2.1
Blocking scheme
In the blocking scheme a signal is sent to the other line end if the directional element detects an earth fault in the reverse direction. When the forward directional element operates, it trips after a short time delay if no blocking signal is received from the other line end. The time delay, normally 30 40 ms, depends on the communication transmission time and a chosen safety margin. One advantage of the blocking scheme is that only one channel (carrier frequency) is needed if the ratio of source impedances at both end is approximately equal for zero and positive sequence source impedances, the channel can be shared with the impedance-measuring system, if that system also works in the blocking mode. The power line carrier communication signal is transmitted on a healthy line and no signal attenuation will occur due to the fault. Blocking schemes are particular favorable for three-terminal applications if there is no zero-sequence outfeed from the tapping. The blocking scheme is immune to current reversals because the received carrier signal is maintained long enough to avoid unwanted operation due to current reversal. There is never any need for weakend-infeed logic, because the strong end trips for an internal fault when no blocking signal is received from the weak end. The fault clearing time is however generally longer for a blocking scheme than for a permissive scheme. If the fault is on the line, the forward direction measuring element operates. If no blocking signal comes from the other line end via the CR binary input (carrier receive) the TRIP output is activated after the tCoord set time delay.
Figure 328:
Simplified logic diagram for blocking scheme.
RED 670
653

12.5.2.2 Permissive under/overreach scheme
In the permissive scheme the forward directed earth fault measuring element sends a permissive signal to the other end, if an earth fault is detected in the forward direction. The directional element at the other line end must wait for a permissive signal before activating an operation signal. Independent channels must be available for the communication in each direction. An impedance measuring relay which works in the same type of permissive mode, with one channel in each direction, can share the channels with the communication scheme for residual overcurrent protection. If the impedance measuring relay works in the permissive overreach mode, common channels can be used in single-line applications. In case of double lines connected to a common bus at both ends, use common channels only if the ratio Z1S/Z0S (positive through zero-sequence source impedance) is about equal at both ends. If the ratio is different, the impedance measuring and the directional earth-fault current system of the healthy line may detect a fault in different directions, which could result in unwanted tripping. Common channels cannot be used when the weak-end-infeed function is used in the distance or earth fault protection. In case of an internal earth fault, the forward directed measuring element operates and sends a permissive signal to the remote end via the CS output (carrier send). Local tripping is permitted when the forward direction measuring element operates and a permissive signal is received via the CR binary input (carrier receive). The permissive scheme can of either underreach or overreach type. In the underreach alternative an underreach directional residual overcurrent measurement element will be used as sending criterion of the permissive send signal CSUR. In the overreach alternative an overreach directional residual overcurrent measurement element will be used as sending criterion of the permissive send signal CSOR. Also the underreach signal CSUR can initiate sending.
654
RED 670
12.5.2.3
Unblocking scheme
In unblocking scheme, the lower dependability in permissive scheme is overcome by using the loss of guard signal from the communication equipment to locally create a carrier receive signal. It is common or suitable to use the function when older, less reliable, power-line carrier (PLC) communication is used. The unblocking function uses a carrier guard signal CRG, which must always be present, even when no CR signal is received. The absence of the CRG signal for a time longer than the setting tSecurity time is used as a CR signal, see figure 329. This also enables a permissive scheme to operate when the line fault blocks the signal transmission. The carrier received signal created by the unblocking function is reset 150 ms after the security timer has elapsed. When that occurs an output signal LCG is activated for signalling purpose. The unblocking function is reset 200 ms after that the guard signal is present again.
CR 1 CRG 200 ms t AND OR tSecurity t 150 ms t AND LCG >1 CRL
en05000746.vsd
Figure 329:
Carrier guard logic with unblocking scheme
RED 670
655
The unblocking function can be set in three operation modes (setting Unblock):
Off: No restart: The unblocking function is out of operation Communication failure shorter than tSecurity will be ignored If CRG disappeares a CRL signal will be transferred to the trip logic There will not be any information in case of communication failure (LCG) Restart Communication failure shorter than tSecure will be ignored It sends a defined (150 ms) CRL after the disappearance of the CRG signal The function will activate LCG output in case of communication failure If the communication failure comes and goes (<200 ms) there will not be recurrent signalling
12.5.3
Function block
EFC1ECPSCH_85 BLOCK BLKTR BLKCS CSBLK CACC CSOR CSUR CR CRG TRIP CS CRL LCG
en06000288.vsd
Figure 330:
EFC function block
12.5.4

Table 371:
Signal BLOCK BLKTR BLKCS CSBLK CACC CSOR CSUR CR CRG
Input signals for the ECPSCH_85 (EFC1-) function block

Description Block of function Signal for blocking trip due to communication logic Signal for blocking CS in Overreach and Blocking schemes Reverse residual overcurrent signal for Carrier Send Signal to be used for tripping by Communication Scheme Overreaching residual overcurrent signal for Carrier Send Underreaching residual overcurrent signal for Carrier Send Carrier Receive for Communication Scheme Logic Carrier guard signal received
656
RED 670
Table 372:
Signal TRIP CS CRL LCG
Output signals for the ECPSCH_85 (EFC1-) function block

Description Trip by Communication Scheme Logic Carrier Send by Communication Scheme Logic Carrier Receive from Communication Scheme Logic loss of carrier guard signal
12.5.5
Setting parameters
Table 373:
Parameter Operation SchemeType
Basic parameter group settings for the ECPSCH_85 (EFC1-) function

Range Off On Off Intertrip Permissive UR Permissive OR Blocking 0.000 - 60.000 Step Default Off Permissive UR Unit Description Operation Off / On Scheme type, Mode of Operation
tCoord
0.001
0.035
Communication scheme coordination time Minimum duration of a carrier send signal
tSendMin
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
Table 374:
Parameter Unblock
Advanced parameter group settings for the ECPSCH_85 (EFC1-) function

Range Off NoRestart Restart 0.000 - 60.000 Step Default Off Unit Description Operation mode of unblocking logic Security timer for loss of carrier guard detection
tSecurity
0.001
0.035
12.5.6
Technical data
Table 375:
Function Communication scheme coordination time Scheme type
Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection (PSCH, 85)

Range or value (0.000-60.000) s Permissive UR Permissive OR Blocking Accuracy 0.5% 10 ms -
RED 670
657
12.6
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection (PSCH, 85)
Function block name: EFCAANSI number: 85 IEC 61850 logical node name: ECRWPSCH IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
12.6.1
Introduction
The EFCA additional communication logic is a supplement to the EFC scheme communication logic for the residual overcurrent protection. To achieve fast fault clearing for all earth faults on the line, the directional earth-fault protection function can be supported with logic, that uses communication channels. REx670 terminals have for this reason available additions to scheme communication logic. If parallel lines are connected to common busbars at both terminals, overreaching permissive communication schemes can trip unselectively due to fault current reversal. This unwanted tripping affects the healthy line when a fault is cleared on the other line. This lack of security can result in a total loss of interconnection between the two buses. To avoid this type of disturbance, a fault current-reversal logic (transient blocking logic) can be used. Permissive communication schemes for residual overcurrent protection, can basically operate only when the protection in the remote terminal can detect the fault. The detection requires a sufficient minimum residual fault current, out from this terminal. The fault current can be too low due to an opened breaker or high positive and/or zero sequence source impedance behind this terminal. To overcome these conditions, weak end infeed (WEI) echo logic is used.
12.6.2
12.6.2.1
Directional comparison logic function
The directional comparison function contains logic for blocking overreach and permissive overreach schemes. The circuits for the permissive overreach scheme contain logic for current reversal and weak end infeed functions. These functions are not required for the blocking overreach scheme.
658
RED 670
Use the independent or inverse time functions in the directional earth-fault protection module to get back-up tripping in case the communication equipment malfunctions and prevents operation of the directional comparison logic. Figure 331 and figure 332 show the logic circuits. Connect the necessary signal from the auto-recloser for blocking of the directional comparison scheme, during a single-phase auto-reclosing cycle, to the BLOCK input of the directional comparison module.
12.6.2.2
Fault current reversal logic

The fault current reversal logic uses a reverse directed element, connected to IRV, which recognizes that the fault is in reverse direction. When the reverse direction element is activated during the tPickUp time, the IRVL signal is activated, see figure 331. The logic is now ready to handle a current reversal without tripping. IRVL will be connected to the block input on the permissive overreach scheme. When the fault current is reversed on the non faulty line, IRV is deactivated and IRVBLK is activated. The reset of IRVL is delayed by the tDelay time, see figure 331. This ensures the reset of the carrier receive CR signal.
Figure 331:
Simplified logic diagram, current reversal
12.6.2.3
Weak and infeed logic

The weak end infeed function can be set to send only an echo signal (WEI=Echo) or an echo signal and a trip signal (WEI=Trip). See figure 332 and figure 333. The weak end infeed logic uses normally a reverse and a forward direction element, connected to WEIBLK via an OR-gate. See figure 332. If neither the forward nor the reverse directional measuring element is activated during the last 200 ms. The weakend-infeed logic echoes back the received permissive signal. See figure 332. If the forward or the reverse directional measuring element is activated during the last 200 ms, the fault current is sufficient for the IED to detect the fault with the earth-fault function that is in operation.
RED 670
659
Figure 332:
Simplified logic diagram, weak end infeed - echo.
With the Trip setting, the logic sends an echo according to above. Further, it activates the TRWEI signal to trip the breaker if the echo conditions are fulfilled and the neutral point voltage is above the set operate value for 3U0> The voltage signal that is used to calculate the zero sequence voltage is set in the earth-fault function that is in operation.
Figure 333:
Simplified logic diagram, weak end infeed - Trip.
The weak end infeed echo sent to the strong line end has a maximum duration of 200 ms. When this time period has elapsed, the conditions that enable the echo signal to be sent are set to zero for a time period of 50 ms. This avoids ringing action if the weak end echo is selected for both line ends.
660
RED 670

EFCAECRWPSCH_85 U3P BLOCK IRVBLK IRV WEIBLK1 WEIBLK2 VTSZ CBOPEN CRL IRVL TRWEI ECHO CR
en06000289.vsd
Figure 334:
EFCA function block
12.6.4

Table 376:
Signal U3P BLOCK IRVBLK IRV WEIBLK1 WEIBLK2 VTSZ CBOPEN CRL
Input signals for the ECRWPSCH_85 (EFCA-) function block

Description Group signal for voltage input Block of function Block of current reversal function Activation of current reversal logic Block of WEI Logic Block of WEI logic due to operation of other protections Block of trip from WEI logic through fuse-failure function Block of trip from WEI logic by an open breaker POR Carrier receive for WEI logic
Table 377:
Signal IRVL TRWEI ECHO CR
Output signals for the ECRWPSCH_85 (EFCA-) function block

Description Operation of current reversal logic Trip of WEI logic Carrier send by WEI logic POR Carrier signal received from remote end
12.6.5
Setting parameters
RED 670
661
Table 378:
Parameter CurrRev
Basic parameter group settings for the ECRWPSCH_85 (EFCA-) function

Range Off On 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Step Default Off Unit Description Operating mode of Current Reversal Logic Pickup time for current reversal logic Time Delay to prevent Carrier send and local trip Operating mode of WEI logic Coordination time for the WEI logic Base setting for voltage level Neutral voltage setting for fault conditions measurement
0.001 0.001
0.020 0.060
s s
WEI
Off Echo Echo & Trip 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 2000.00 5 - 70
Off
tPickUpWEI UBase 3U0>
0.001 0.05 1
0.000 400.00 25
s kV %UB
12.6.6
Technical data
Table 379:
Function Operate voltage 3Uo for WEI trip Reset ratio Operate time for current reversal Delay time for current reversal Coordination time for weak-end infeed logic
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection (PSCH, 85)
Range or value (5-70)% of Ubase >95% (0.000-60.000) s (0.000-60.000) s (0.00060.000) s Accuracy 1.0% of Ur 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms
12.7
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase segregated communication (PSCH)
Function block name: ZC1WANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: ZC1WPSCH IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
662
RED 670
Section 12 Scheme communication 12.7.1 Introduction

The current reversal function is used to prevent unwanted operations due to current reversal when using permissive overreach protection schemes in application with parallel lines when the overreach from the two ends overlaps on the parallel line. The weak-end infeed logic is used in cases where the apparent power behind the protection can be too low to activate the distance protection function. When activated, received carrier signal together with local under voltage criteria and no reverse zone operation gives an instantaneous trip. The received signal is also echoed back to accelerate the sending end.
12.7.2
12.7.2.1
The current reversal logic uses a reverse zone connected to the input IRVLx to recognize the fault on the parallel line in phase Lx. When the reverse zone has been activated for a certain settable time tPickUpRev it prevents sending of a communication signal and activation of trip signal for a predefined time tDelayRev. This makes it possible for the carrier receive signal to reset before the carrier aided trip signal is activated due to the current reversal by the forward directed zone, see figure 335.
IRVLn IRVBLKLn
tPickUpRev 10 ms t t
tPickUpRev t & tDelayRev t IRVOPLn
en06000474.vsd
Figure 335:
The preventing of sending carrier send signal CSLn and activating of the TRIPLn in the scheme communication block ZCOM is carried out by connecting the IRVOPLn signal to input BLOCKLn in the ZCOM function. The function has an internal 10 ms drop-off timer which secure that the current reversal logic will be activated for short input signals even if the pick-up timer is set to zero. Weak end infeed logic The WEI function sends back (echoes) the received carrier signal under the condition that no fault has been detected at the weak end by different fault detection elements (distance protection in forward and reverse direction).
RED 670
663
VTSZ BLOCK CRLLn >1 tWEI t 200 ms t 200 ms t

en07000085.vsd
&
50 ms t
200 ms t &
ECHOLn - cont. ECHOLn
WEIBLK1
WEIBLK2
Figure 336:
Weak end infeed logic
The WEI function returns the received carrier signal, see figure 336, when: The functional input CRLx is active. This input is usually connected to the CRLx output on the scheme communication logic ZCOM. The WEI function is not blocked by the active signal connected to the WEIBLKLx functional input or to the VTSZ functional input. The later is usually configured to the STGEN functional output of the fuse-failure function. No active signal has been present for at least 200 ms on the WEIBLK2 functional input. An OR combination of all fault detection functions (not undervoltage) as present within the terminal is usually used for this purpose.
When an echo function is used in both terminals (should generally be avoided), a spurious signal can be looped round by the echo logics. To avoid a continuous lockup of the system, the duration of the echoed signal is limited to 200 ms. An undervoltage criteria is used as an additional tripping criteria, when the tripping of the local breaker is selected, setting WEI = Echo &Trip, together with the WEI function and ECHO signal has been issued by the echo logic, see figure 337.
664
RED 670
WEI = Echo&Trip CBOPEN STUL1N STUL2N STUL3N
ECHOLn - cont.
AND
100 ms t
OR 15 ms t
OR AND
TRWEI TRWEIL1
AND
15 ms t
TRWEIL2
AND
15 ms t
TRWEIL3
en00000551.vsd
Figure 337:
Tripping part of the WEI logic, simplified diagram
12.7.3
Function block
ZC1WZC1WPSCH_85 U3P BLOCK BLKZ CBOPEN CRL1 CRL2 CRL3 IRVL1 IRVL2 IRVL3 IRVBLKL1 IRVBLKL2 IRVBLKL3 WEIBLK WEIBLKL1 WEIBLKL2 WEIBLKL3 WEIBLKOP WEIBLKO1 WEIBLKO2 WEIBLKO3 TRPWEI TRPWEIL1 TRPWEIL2 TRPWEIL3 IRVOP IRVOPL1 IRVOPL2 IRVOPL3 ECHO ECHOL1 ECHOL2 ECHOL3
en06000477.vsd
Figure 338:
ZC1W function block
12.7.4
RED 670
665
Table 380:
Signal U3P BLOCK BLKZ CBOPEN CRL1 CRL2 CRL3 IRVL1 IRVL2 IRVL3 IRVBLKL1 IRVBLKL2 IRVBLKL3 WEIBLK WEIBLKL1 WEIBLKL2 WEIBLKL3 WEIBLKOP WEIBLKO1 WEIBLKO2 WEIBLKO3
Input signals for the ZC1WPSCH_85 (ZC1W-) function block

Description Voltage Block of function Block of trip from WEI logic by the fuse-failure function Block of trip from WEI logic by an open breaker Carrier receive for WEI logic in Phase L1 Carrier receive for WEI logic in Phase L2 Carrier receive for WEI logic in Phase L3 Activation of current reversal logic in Phase L1 Activation of current reversal logic in Phase L2 Activation of current reversal logic in phase L3 Block of current reversal function in Phase L1 Block of current reversal function in Phase L2 Block of current reversal function in Phase L3 Block of WEI logic Block of WEI logic in Phase L1 Block of WEI logic in Phase L2 Block of WEI logic in Phase L3 Block of WEI logic due to operation of other protection Block of WEI logic in Phase L1 due to operation of other protection Block of WEI logic in Phase L2 due to operation of other protections Block of WEI logic in Phase L3 due to operation of other protections
Table 381:
Signal TRPWEI TRPWEIL1 TRPWEIL2 TRPWEIL3 IRVOP IRVOPL1 IRVOPL2 IRVOPL3 ECHO ECHOL1 ECHOL2 ECHOL3
Output signals for the ZC1WPSCH_85 (ZC1W-) function block

Description Trip of WEI logic Trip of WEI logic in Phase L1 Trip of WEI logic in Phase L2 Trip of WEI logic in Phase L3 Operation of current reversal logic Operation of current reversal logic in Phase L1 Operation of current reversal logic in Phase L2 Operation of current reversal logic in Phase L3 Carrier Send by WEI logic Carrier Send by WEI logic in Phase L1 Carrier Send by WEI logic in Phase L2 Carrier Send by WEI logic in Phase L3
666
RED 670
Section 12 Scheme communication 12.7.5 Setting parameters

Table 382:
Parameter UBase OperCurrRev
Basic parameter group settings for the ZC1WPSCH_85 (ZC1W-) function

Range 0.05 - 2000.00 Off On 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.05 Default 400.00 Off Unit kV Description Base setting for Voltage level Operating mode of Current Reversal Logic Pickup time for current reversal logic Time Delay to prevent Carrier send and local trip Operating mode of WEI logic Phase to Earth voltage for detection of fault condition Phase to Phase voltage for detection of fault condition Coordination time for the WEI logic
0.001 0.001
0.020 0.060
s s
OperationWEI
Off Echo Echo & Trip 10 - 90
Off
UPE<
70
%UB
UPP<
10 - 90
70
%UB
tPickUpWEI
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.010
12.7.6
Technical data
Table 383:
Function Detection level phase to neutral voltage Detection level phase to phase voltage Reset ratio Operate time for current reversal Delay time for current reversal Coordination time for weak-end infeed logic
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase segregated communication (PSCH, 85)
Range or value (10-90)% of Ubase (10-90)% of Ubase <105% (0.000-60.000) s (0.000-60.000) s (0.000-60.000) s Accuracy 1.0% of Ur 1.0% of Ur 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms
RED 670
667
668
Section 13 Logic
Section 13 Logic
About this chapter
This chapter describes primarily tripping and trip logic functions. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data are included for each function.
13.1
Tripping logic (PTRC, 94)

Function block name: TRPxANSI number: 94 IEC 61850 logical node name: SMPPTRC IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
I->O
13.1.1
Introduction
A function block for protection tripping is provided for each circuit breaker involved in the tripping of the fault. It provides the pulse prolongation to ensure a trip pulse of sufficient length, as well as all functionality necessary for correct co-operation with autoreclosing functions. The trip function block includes functionality for evolving faults and breaker lockout.
13.1.2
The duration of a trip output signal from the TRPx function is settable (tTripMin). The pulse length should be long enough to secure the breaker opening. For three-pole tripping, TRPx function has a single input (TRIN) through which all trip output signals from the protection functions within the IED, or from external protection functions via one or more of the IEDs binary inputs, are routed. It has a single trip output (TRIP) for connection to one or more of the IEDs binary outputs, as well as to other functions within the IED requiring this signal.
RED 670
669
Section 13 Logic
BLOCK TRIN
Operation Mode = On Program = 3Ph
tTripMin AND t
OR
TRIP
en05000789.vsd
Figure 339:
Simplified logic diagram for three phasetrip
The TRPx function for single- and two-pole tripping has additional phase segregated inputs for this, as well as inputs for faulted phase selection. The latter inputs enable single- and two-pole tripping for those functions which do not have their own phase selection capability, and therefore which have just a single trip output and not phase segregated trip outputs for routing through the phase segregated trip inputs of the expanded TRPx function. Examples of such protection functions are the residual overcurrent protections. The expanded TRPx function has two inputs for these functions, one for impedance tripping (e.g. carrier-aided tripping commands from the scheme communication logic), and one for earth fault tripping (e.g. tripping output from a residual overcurrent protection). Additional logic secures a three-pole final trip command for these protection functions in the absence of the required phase selection signals. The expanded TRPx function has three trip outputs TRL1, TRL2, TRL3 (besides the trip output TRIP), one per phase, for connection to one or more of the IEDs binary outputs, as well as to other functions within the IED requiring these signals. There are also separate output signals indicating single pole, two pole or three pole trip. These signals are important for cooperation with the auto-reclosing function. The expanded TRPx function is equipped with logic which secures correct operation for evolving faults as well as for reclosing on to persistent faults. A special input is also provided which disables single- and two-pole tripping, forcing all tripping to be three-pole. In multi-breaker arrangements, one TRPx function block is used for each breaker. This can be the case if single pole tripping and auto-reclosing is used. The breaker close lockout function can be activated from an external trip signal from another protection function via input (SETLKOUT) or internally at a three pole trip, if desired. It is possible to lockout seal in the tripping output signals or use blocking of closing only the choice is by setting TripLockout.
670
RED 670
Section 13 Logic
TRINL1 TRINL2 TRINL3 1PTRZ 1PTREF TRIN Program = 3ph
OR OR OR AND
RSTTRIP - cont.
en05000517.vsd
Figure 340:
TRIN TRINL1 PSL1
Three-phase front logic simplified logic diagram
AND
OR
L1TRIP
TRINL2 PSL2
AND
OR
L2TRIP
TRINL3 PSL3
AND OR
OR
L3TRIP
OR
-loop
OR
-loop
OR AND
1PTREF 1PTRZ
AND AND OR
50 ms t
AND
en05000518.vsd
Figure 341:
Phase segregated front logic
RED 670
671
Section 13 Logic
L1TRIP
150 ms
t
2000 ms t
OR OR
RTRIP
OR
AND
L2TRIP
150 ms
t
2000 ms t
OR OR
STRIP
OR
AND
L3TRIP
150 ms
t
2000 ms t
OR OR
TTRIP
OR
AND
OR AND
P3PTR
OR OR
-loop
en05000519.vsd
Figure 342:
Additional logic for the 1ph/3ph operating mode
672
RED 670
Section 13 Logic
L1TRIP - cont.
150 ms
t
2000 ms t
OR
OR
RTRIP
AND
L2TRIP
150 ms
t
2000 ms t
OR
OR
STRIP
AND AND
L3TRIP
150 ms
t
2000 ms t
OR
OR
TTRIP
AND
OR AND
TRIP
OR OR
-loop
en05000520.vsd
Figure 343:
Additional logic for the 1ph/2ph/3ph operating mode
RED 670
673
Section 13 Logic
BLOCK RTRIP
OR
STRIP
AND
TRL1
OR
TTRIP
AND
TRL2
OR
RSTTRIP
AND OR
TRL3
TRIP
AND
OR
AND
-loop
TR3P
AND AND AND AND OR
10 ms
AND
t 5 ms t
TR1P
TR2P
-loop
en05000521.vsd
Figure 344:
Final tripping circuits
13.1.3
Function block
TRP1SMPPTRC_94 BLOCK BLKLKOUT TRIN TRINL1 TRINL2 TRINL3 PSL1 PSL2 PSL3 1PTRZ 1PTREF P3PTR SETLKOUT RSTLKOUT TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TR1P TR2P TR3P CLLKOUT
en05000707.vsd
Figure 345:
TRP function block
13.1.4
674
RED 670
Section 13 Logic
Table 384:
Signal BLOCK BLKLKOUT TRIN TRINL1 TRINL2 TRINL3 PSL1 PSL2 PSL3 1PTRZ 1PTREF P3PTR SETLKOUT RSTLKOUT
Input signals for the SMPPTRC_94 (TRP1-) function block

Description Block of function Blocks circuit breaker lockout output (CLLKOUT) Trip all phases Trip phase 1 Trip phase 2 Trip phase 3 Functional input for phase selection in phase L1 Functional input for phase selection in phase L2 Functional input for phase selection in phase L3 Zone Trip with a separate phase selection Single phase DEF Trip for separate phase selection Prepare all tripping to be three-phase Input for setting the circuit breaker lockout function Input for resetting the circuit breaker lockout function
Table 385:
Signal TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TR1P TR2P TR3P CLLKOUT
Output signals for the SMPPTRC_94 (TRP1-) function block

Description General trip output signal Trip signal from phase L1 Trip signal from phase L2 Trip signal from phase L3 Tripping single-pole Tripping two-pole Tripping three-pole Circuit breaker lockout output (set until reset)
13.1.5
Setting parameters
Table 386:
Parameter Operation Program
Basic parameter group settings for the SMPPTRC_94 (TRP1-) function

Range Off On 3 phase 1ph/3ph 1Ph/2Ph/3Ph 0.000 - 60.000 Step Default On 1ph/3ph Unit Description Operation Off / On Three ph; single or three ph; single, two or three ph trip Minimum duration of trip output signal
tTripMin
0.001
0.150
RED 670
675
Section 13 Logic
Table 387:
Parameter TripLockout
Advanced parameter group settings for the SMPPTRC_94 (TRP1-) function

Range Off On Off On Step Default Off Unit Description On: activate output (CLLKOUT) and trip latch, Off: only outp On: lockout from input (SETLKOUT) and trip, Off: only inp
AutoLock
Off
13.1.6
Technical data
Table 388:
Function Trip action Minimum trip pulse length Timers
Tripping logic (PTRC, 94)

Range or value 3-ph, 1/3-ph, 1/2/3-ph (0.000-60.000) s (0.000-60.000) s Accuracy 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms
13.2
Trip matrix logic (GGIO)

Function block name: TRxxANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: TRMGGIO IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
13.2.1
Application
Twelve trip matrix logic blocks are included in the IED. The function blocks are used in the configuration of the IED to route trip signals and/or other logical output signals to the different output relays. The matrix and the physical outputs will be seen in the PCM 600 engineering tool and this allows the user to adapt the signals to the physical tripping outputs according to the specific application needs.
13.2.2
Tripping matrix logic block is provided with 32 input signals and 3 output signals. The function block incorporates internal logic OR gates in order to provide the necessary grouping of connected input signals (e.g. for tripping and alarming purposes) to the three output signals from the function block.
676
RED 670
Section 13 Logic
Internal built-in OR logic is made in accordance with the following three rules: 1. when any one of first 16 inputs signals (i.e. INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1 (i.e. TRUE) the first output signal (i.e. OUTPUT1) will get logical value 1 (i.e. TRUE). Additional time delays can be introduced for OUTPUT1 via setting parameters "PulseTime1", "OnDelayTime1" & "OffDelayTime1". when any one of second 16 inputs signals (i.e. INPUT17 to INPUT32) has logical value 1 (i.e. TRUE) the second output signal (i.e. OUTPUT2) will get logical value 1 (i.e. TRUE). Additional time delays can be introduced for OUTPUT2 via setting parameters "PulseTime2", "OnDelayTime2" & "OffDelayTime2" when any one of all 32 input signals (i.e. INPUT1 to INPUT32) has logical value 1 (i.e. TRUE) the third output signal (i.e. OUTPUT3) will get logical value 1 (i.e. TRUE). Additional time delays can be introduced for OUTPUT3 via setting parameters "PulseTime3", "OnDelayTime3" & "OffDelayTime3".
2.
3.
Detailed logical diagram is shown in see figure 346

Pulse Time 1
&
Pulse Input 1 Input 2 Input 16

On Delay Time 1
t pulse
1
t on t off Off Delay Time 1 Pulse Time 2
&
Output 1
Pulse Input 17 Input 18 Input 32

On Delay Time 2
t pulse
&
1
t on t off Off Delay Time 2 Pulse Time 3
&
Output 2
&
Pulse
On Delay Time 3
t pulse
1
t on t off Off Delay Time 3
&
Output 3
en06000514.vsd
Figure 346:
Tripping Matrix Internal Logic.
Output signals from this function block are typically connected to other logic blocks or directly to output contacts from the IED. When used for direct tripping of the circuit breaker(s) the pulse time delay on that output signal shall be set to approximately 0,150s in order to obtain satisfactory minimum duration of the trip pulse to the circuit breaker trip coils. Twelve such function blocks are available in the IED. RED 670 Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B 677
Section 13 Logic 13.2.3 Function block

T R01TRMGGIO INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4 INPUT 5 INPUT 6 INPUT 7 INPUT 8 INPUT 9 INPUT 10 INPUT 11 INPUT 12 INPUT 13 INPUT 14 INPUT 15 INPUT 16 INPUT 17 INPUT 18 INPUT 19 INPUT 20 INPUT 21 INPUT 22 INPUT 23 INPUT 24 INPUT 25 INPUT 26 INPUT 27 INPUT 28 INPUT 29 INPUT 30 INPUT 31 INPUT 32 OUT PUT 1 OUT PUT 2 OUT PUT 3
en05000370.vsd
Figure 347:
TR function block
13.2.4

Table 389:
Signal INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 Table continued on next page
Input signals for the TMAGGIO (TR01-) function block

Description Binary input 1 Binary input 2 Binary input 3 Binary input 4 Binary input 5 Binary input 6 Binary input 7 Binary input 8 Binary input 9 Binary input 10 Binary input 11 Binary input 12 Binary input 13
678
RED 670
Section 13 Logic
Signal INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 INPUT17 INPUT18 INPUT19 INPUT20 INPUT21 INPUT22 INPUT23 INPUT24 INPUT25 INPUT26 INPUT27 INPUT28 INPUT29 INPUT30 INPUT31 INPUT32 Description Binary input 14 Binary input 15 Binary input 16 Binary input 17 Binary input 18 Binary input 19 Binary input 20 Binary input 21 Binary input 22 Binary input 23 Binary input 24 Binary input 25 Binary input 26 Binary input 27 Binary input 28 Binary input 29 Binary input 30 Binary input 31 Binary input 32
Table 390:
Signal OUTPUT1 OUTPUT2 OUTPUT3
Output signals for the TMAGGIO (TR01-) function block

Description OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16 OR function between inputs 17 to 32 OR function between inputs 1 to 32
13.2.5
Setting parameters
Table 391:
Parameter Operation PulseTime OnDelay OffDelay
Basic parameter group settings for the TMAGGIO (TR01-) function

Range Off ON 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 0.001 0.001 Default ON 0.000 0.000 0.000 Unit s s s Description Operation Off / On Output pulse time Output on delay time Output off delay time
RED 670
679
Section 13 Logic
Parameter ModeOutput1 ModeOutput2 ModeOutput3 Range Steady Pulsed Steady Pulsed Steady Pulsed Step Default Steady Steady Steady Unit Description Mode for output ,1 steady or pulsed Mode for output 2, steady or pulsed Mode for output 3, steady or pulsed
13.3
13.3.1
Configurable logic blocks (LLD)

Introduction
A number of logic blocks and timers are available for user to adapt the configuration to the specific application needs.
13.3.2
Inverter function block (INV)

I001INV INPUT OUT en04000404.vsd
Figure 348:
Table 392:
Signal INPUT
INV function block

Input signals for the INV (I001-) function block
Description Input
Table 393:
Signal OUT
Output signals for the INV (I001-) function block

Description Output
13.3.3
OR function block (OR)

The OR function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean variables. The OR function block has six inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is inverted.
680
RED 670
Section 13 Logic
O001OR INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 OUT NOUT
en04000405.vsd
Figure 349:
Table 394:
Signal INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6
OR function block
Input signals for the OR (O001-) function block
Description Input 1 to OR gate Input 2 to OR gate Input 3 to OR gate Input 4 to OR gate Input 5 to OR gate Input 6 to OR gate
Table 395:
Signal OUT NOUT
Output signals for the OR (O001-) function block

Description Output from OR gate Inverted output from OR gate
13.3.4
AND function block (AND)

The AND function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean variables.The AND function block has four inputs and two outputs. One of the inputs and one of the outputs are inverted.
A001AND INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4N OUT NOUT
en04000406.vsd
Figure 350:
AND function block
RED 670
681
Section 13 Logic
Table 396:
Signal INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4N
Input signals for the AND (A001-) function block

Description Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 inverted
Table 397:
Signal OUT NOUT
Output signals for the AND (A001-) function block

Description Output Output inverted
13.3.5
Timer function block (Timer)

The function block TIMER has drop-out and pick-up delayed outputs related to the input signal. The timer has a settable time delay (parameter T).
T M01Timer INPUT T ON OFF en04000378.vsd
Figure 351:
Table 398:
Signal INPUT
TM function block
Input signals for the Timer (TM01-) function block
Description Input to timer
Table 399:
Signal ON OFF
Output signals for the Timer (TM01-) function block

Description Output from timer , pick-up delayed Output from timer, drop-out delayed
Table 400:
Parameter T
General settings for the Timer (TM01-) function

Range 0.000 - 90000.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.000 Unit s Description Time delay of function
682
RED 670
Section 13 Logic 13.3.6 Pulse timer function block (PULSE)

The pulse function can be used, for example, for pulse extensions or limiting of operation of outputs. The pulse timer TP has a settable length.
TP01Pulse INPUT OUT en04000407.vsd
Figure 352:
Table 401:
Signal INPUT
PULSE function block

Input signals for the Pulse (TP01-) function block
Description Input to pulse timer
Table 402:
Signal OUT
Output signals for the Pulse (TP01-) function block

Description Output from pulse timer
Table 403:
Parameter T
General settings for the Pulse (TP01-) function

Range 0.000 - 90000.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.010 Unit s Description Time delay of function
13.3.7
Exclusive OR function block (XOR)

The exclusive OR function XOR is used to generate combinatory expressions with boolean variables. The function block XOR has two inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is inverted. The output signal is 1 if the input signals are different and 0 if they are equal.
XO01XOR INPUT 1 INPUT 2 OUT NOUT en04000409.vsd
Figure 353:
Table 404:
Signal INPUT1 INPUT2
XOR function block

Input signals for the XOR (XO01-) function block
Description Input 1 to XOR gate Input 2 to XOR gate
RED 670
683
Section 13 Logic
Table 405:
Signal OUT NOUT
Output signals for the XOR (XO01-) function block

Description Output from XOR gate Inverted output from XOR gate
13.3.8
Set-reset with memory function block (SRM)

The Set-Reset function SRM is a flip-flop with memory that can set or reset an output from two inputs respectively. Each SRM function block has two outputs, where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if the flip-flop after a power interruption will return the state it had before or if it will be reset.
Table 406:
SET 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0
Truth table for the Set-Reset (SRM) function block

RESET OUT 1 0 0 0 NOUT 0 1 1 1
SM01SRM SET RESET OUT NOUT en04000408.vsd
Figure 354:
Table 407:
Signal SET RESET
SM function block
Input signals for the SRM (SM01-) function block
Description Set input Reset input
Table 408:
Signal OUT NOUT
Output signals for the SRM (SM01-) function block

Description Output Output inverted
684
RED 670
Section 13 Logic
Table 409:
Parameter Memory
Parameter group settings for the SRM (SM01-) function

Range Off On Step Default Off Unit Description Operating mode of the memory function
13.3.9
Controllable gate function block (GT)

The GT function block is used for controlling if a signal should be able to pass from the input to the output or not depending on a setting.
GT 01GT INPUT OUT en04000410.vsd
Figure 355:
Table 410:
Signal INPUT
GT function block
Input signals for the GT (GT01-) function block
Description Input to gate
Table 411:
Signal OUT
Output signals for the GT (GT01-) function block

Description Output from gate
Table 412:
Parameter Operation
Parameter group settings for the GT (GT01-) function

13.3.10
Settable timer function block (TS)

The function block TS timer has outputs for delayed input signal at drop-out and at pick-up. The timer has a settable time delay. It also has an Operation setting On, Off that controls the operation of the timer.
RED 670
685
Section 13 Logic
TS01TimerSet INPUT ON OFF en04000411.vsd
Figure 356:
Table 413:
Signal INPUT
TS function block
Input signals for the TimerSet (TS01-) function block
Description Input to timer
Table 414:
Signal ON OFF
Output signals for the TimerSet (TS01-) function block

Description Output from timer, pick-up delayed Output from timer, drop-out delayed
Table 415:
Parameter Operation t
Parameter group settings for the TimerSet (TS01-) function

Range Off On 0.000 - 90000.000 Step 0.001 Default Off 0.000 Unit s Description Operation Off/On Delay for settable timer n
13.3.11
Technical data
Table 416:
Logic block LogicAND LogicOR LogicXOR LogicInverter LogicSRMemory LogicGate LogicTimer LogicPulseTimer LogicTimerSet LogicLoopDelay
Configurable logic blocks

Quantity with update rate fast medium 60 60 10 30 10 10 10 10 10 10 60 60 10 30 10 10 10 10 10 10 normal 160 160 20 80 20 20 20 20 20 20 Range or value (0.000 90000.000) s (0.000 90000.000) s (0.000 90000.000) s (0.000 90000.000) s Accuracy 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms
686
RED 670
Section 13 Logic
13.4
Fixed signal function block (FIXD)

Function block name: FIXDANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: FixedSignals IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
13.4.1
Introduction
The fixed signals function block generates a number of pre-set (fixed) signals that can be used in the configuration of an IED, either for forcing the unused inputs in the other function blocks to a certain level/value, or for creating a certain logic.
13.4.2
There are eight outputs from the FIXD function block: OFF is a boolean signal, fixed to OFF (boolean 0) value; ON is a boolean signal, fixed to ON (boolean 1) value; INTZERO is an integer number, fixed to integer value 0; INTONE is an integer number, fixed to integer value 1; REALZERO is a floating point real number, fixed to 0.0 value; STRNULL is a string, fixed to an empty string (null) value; ZEROSMPL is a 32-bit integer, fixed to 0 value; GRP_OFF is a 32-bit integer, fixed to 0 value; The function does not allow any settings and therefore its not present in PCM 600. For examples on how to use each type of output in the configuration, please read the Application Manual.
13.4.3
Function block
FIXDFixedSignals OFF ON INTZERO INTONE REALZERO STRNULL ZEROSMPL GRP_OFF en05000445.vsd
Figure 357:
FIXD function block
13.4.4
RED 670
687
Section 13 Logic
Table 417:
Signal OFF ON INTZERO INTONE REALZERO STRNULL ZEROSMPL GRP_OFF
Output signals for the FixedSignals (FIXD-) function block

Description Boolean signal fixed off Boolean signal fixed on Integer signal fixed zero Integer signal fixed one Real signal fixed zero String signal with no characters Channel id for zero sample Group signal fixed off
13.4.5
Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM600)
13.5
Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I

Function block name: BB-ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
13.5.1
Introduction
The B16I function block (or the Boolean 16 to Integer conversion function block) is used within the CAP tool to transform a set of 16 binary (logical) signals into an integer.
13.5.1.1
The B16I function block is used within the CAP tool to transform an integer into a set of 16 binary (logical) signals. The B1I6 function block is designed for receiving the integer input locally. The BLOCK input will freeze the logical outputs at the last value.
688
RED 670
Section 13 Logic
BB01B16I BLOCK IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8 IN9 IN10 IN11 IN12 IN13 IN14 IN15 IN16 OUT
en07000128.vsd
Figure 358:
The B16I function block.
13.5.1.3

Table 418:
Signal BLOCK IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8 IN9 IN10 IN11 IN12 IN13 IN14 IN15 IN16
Input signals for the B16I (BB01-) function block

Description Block of function Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Input 9 Input 10 Input 11 Input 12 Input 13 Input 14 Input 15 Input 16
RED 670
689
Section 13 Logic
Table 419:
Signal OUT
Output signals for the B16I (BB01-) function block

Description Output value
13.5.1.4
Setting parameters
13.6
Boolean 16 to Integer conversion with logic node representation (B16IGGIO)

Function block name: BA-ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: B16IGGIO IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
13.6.1
Introduction
The B16IGGIO function block (or the Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation function block) is used within CAP tool to transform an integer to 16 binary (logic) signals. TheIB16IGGIO can receive it's value from remote like IEC61850 depending on the PSTO input.
13.6.2
The B16IGGIO function block is used within the CAP tool to transform an integer into a set of 16 binary (logical) signals. The B16IGGIO can receive an integer from a station computer for example, over IEC61850. The BLOCK input will freeze the logical outputs at the last value. The PSTO input determines the operator place. The integer number can be written to the block while in Remote. If PSTO is in Off or Local then no change is applied to the outputs.
690
RED 670

BA01B16IGGIO BLOCK IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8 IN9 IN10 IN11 IN12 IN13 IN14 IN15 IN16 OUT
en07000129.vsd
Figure 359:
The B16IGGIO function block.
13.6.4

Table 420:
Signal BLOCK IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8 IN9 IN10 IN11 IN12 IN13 IN14 IN15 IN16
Input signals for the B16IGGIO (BA01-) function block

RED 670
691
Section 13 Logic
Table 421:
Signal OUT
Output signals for the B16IGGIO (BA01-) function block

Description Output value
13.6.5
Setting parameters
13.7
Integer to Boolean 16 conversion (IB16)

Function block name: IY- ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
13.7.1
Introduction
The IB16 function block (or the integer to Boolean 16 conversion function block) is used within the CAP tool to transform a set of 16 binary (logical) signals into an integer.
13.7.2
The IB16 function block is used within the CAP tool to transform an integer into a set of 16 binary (logical) signals. The IB16 function block is designed for receiving the integer input locally. The BLOCK input will freeze the logical outputs at the last value.
692
RED 670

IY01IB16 BLOCK IN OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 OUT8 OUT9 OUT10 OUT11 OUT12 OUT13 OUT14 OUT15 OUT16 en06000501.vsd
Figure 360:
The BI16 function block.
13.7.4

Table 422:
Signal BLOCK IN
Input signals for the IB16 (IY01-) function block

Description Block of function input
Table 423:
Signal OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 OUT8 OUT9 OUT10 OUT11 OUT12 OUT13 OUT14 OUT15 OUT16
Output signals for the IB16 (IY01-) function block

Description Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Output 9 Output 10 Output 11 Output 12 Output 13 Output 14 Output 15 Output 16
RED 670
693
Section 13 Logic 13.7.5 Setting parameters

13.8
Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation (IB16GGIO)

Function block name: IX-ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: IB16GGIO IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
13.8.1
Introduction
The IB16GGIO function block (or the integer to Boolean conversion with logic node representation function block) is used within CAP tool to transform an integer to 16 binary (logic) signals. The IB16GGIO can receive it's value from remote like IEC61850 depending on the PSTO input.
13.8.2
The IB16GGIO function block is used within the CAP tool to transform an integer into a set of 16 binary (logical) signals. The IB16GGIO can receive an integer from a station computer for example, over IEC61850. The BLOCK input will freeze the logical outputs at the last value. The PSTO input determines the operator place. The integer number can be written to the block while in Remote. If PSTO is in Off or Local then no change is applied to the outputs.
694
RED 670

IX01IB16GGIO BLOCK PSTO OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 OUT8 OUT9 OUT10 OUT11 OUT12 OUT13 OUT14 OUT15 OUT16 en06000502.vsd
Figure 361:
The BI16GGIO function block.
13.8.4

Table 424:
Signal BLOCK PSTO
Input signals for the IB16GGIO (IX01-) function block

Description Block of function Operator place selection
Table 425:
Output signals for the IB16GGIO (IX01-) function block

Description Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Output 9 Output 10 Output 11 Output 12 Output 13 Output 14 Output 15 Output 16
RED 670
695
Section 13 Logic 13.8.5 Setting parameters

696
RED 670
Section 14 Monitoring
About this chapter
This chapter describes the functions that handle measurements, events and disturbances. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals, and technical data are included for each function.
14.1
Measurements (MMXU)
Function block name: SVRxANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: CVMMXU
P, Q, S, I, U, f
Function block name: CPxx ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: CMMXU
Function block name: VNx ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: VNMMXU
RED 670
697
Function block name: VPxANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: VMMXU
Function block name: CSQx ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: CMSQI
I1, I2, I0
Function block name: VSQx ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: VMSQI
U1, U2, U0
14.1.1
Introduction
Measurement functions is used for power system measurement, supervision and reporting to the local HMI, monitoring tool within PCM 600 or to station level e.g.via IEC61850). The possibility to continuously monitor measured values of active power, reactive power, currents, voltages, frequency, power factor etc. is vital for efficient production, transmission and distribution of electrical energy. It provides to the system operator fast and easy overview of the present status of the power system. Additionally it can be used during testing and commissioning of protection and control IEDs in order to verify proper operation and connection of instrument transformers (i.e. CTs & VTs). During normal service by periodic comparison of the measured value from the IED with other independent meters the proper operation of the IED analog measurement chain can be verified. Finally it can be used to verify proper direction orientation for distance or directional overcurrent protection function. The available measured values of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM 600.
698
RED 670
All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits, i.e. low-low limit, low limit, high limit and high-high limit. A zero clamping reduction is also supported, i.e the measured value below a settable limit is forced to zero which reduces the impact of noise in the inputs. Dead-band supervision can be used to report measured signal value to station level when change in measured value is above set threshold limit or time integral of all changes since the last time value updating exceeds the threshold limit. Measure value can also be based on periodic reporting. The measuring function, SVR (CVMMXU), provides the following power system quantities: P, Q and S: three phase active, reactive and apparent power PF: power factor U: phase-to-phase voltage magnitude I: phase current magnitude F: power system frequency
The measuring functions CP (CMMXU), VN (VNMMWU) and VP (VMMXU) provides physical quantities: I: phase currents (magnitude and angle) (CMMXU) U: voltages (phase and phase-phase voltage, magnitude and angle) (VMMXU, VNMMXU)
It is possible to calibrate the measuring function above to get better then class 0.5 presentation. This is accomplished by angle and amplitude compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and at 100% of rated voltage. The power system quantities provided, depends on the actual hardware, (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM 600. The measuring functions CSQ (CMSQI) and VSQ (VMSQI) provides sequential quantities: I: sequence currents (positive, zero, negative sequence, magnitude and angle) U: sequence voltages (positive, zero and negative sequence, magnitude and angle).
The SVR function calculates three-phase power quantities by using fundamental frequency phasors (i.e. DFT values) of the measured current respectively voltage signals. The measured power quantities are available either as instantaneously calculated quantities or averaged values over a period of time (i.e. low pass filtered) depending on the selected settings.
RED 670
699
Section 14 Monitoring 14.1.2

14.1.2.1
Measurement supervision
The protection, control, and monitoring IEDs have functionality to measure and further process information for currents and voltages obtained from the preprocessing blocks. The number of processed alternate measuring quantities depends on the type of IED and built-in options. The information on measured quantities is available for the user at different locations: Locally by means of the local HMI Remotely using the monitoring tool within PCM 600 or over the station bus Internally by connecting the analog output signals to the Disturbance Report function
Phase angle reference
All phase angles are presented in relation to a defined reference channel. The General setting parameter PhaseAngleRef defines the reference, see section "Analog inputs". Measured value below zero point clamping limit is forced to zero. This allows the noise in the input signal to be ignored. The zero point clamping limit is a general setting (XZeroDb where X equals S, P, Q, PF, U, I, F, IL1-3, UL1-3, UL12-31, I1, I2, 3I0, U1, U2 or 3U0). Observe that this measurement supervision zero point clamping might be overridden by the zero point clamping used for the service values within SVR. Users can continuously monitor the measured quantity available in each function block by means of four built-in operating thresholds, see figure 362. The monitoring has two different modes of operating: Overfunction, when the measured current exceeds the High limit (XHiLim) or High-high limit (XHiHiLim) pre-set values Underfunction, when the measured current decreases under the Low limit (XLowLim) or Low-low limit (XLowLowLim) pre-set values.
Zero point clamping
Continuous monitoring of the measured quantity
X_RANGE is illustrated in figure 362.
700
RED 670
Y
High-high limit X_RANGE = 3
X_RANGE= 1 High limit X_RANGE=0
Hysteresis
X_RANGE=0 Low limit X_RANGE=2 Low-low limit X_RANGE=4
en05000657.vsd
Figure 362:
Presentation of operating limits
Each analog output has one corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4 (0: Normal, 1: High limit exceeded, 3: High-high limit exceeded, 2: below Low limit and 4: below Low-low limit). The output may be connected to a measurement expander block (XP (RANGE_XP)) to get measurement supervision as binary signals. The logical value of the functional output signals changes according to figure 362. The user can set the hysteresis (XLimHyst), which determines the difference between the operating and reset value at each operating point, in wide range for each measuring channel separately. The hysteresis is common for all operating values within one channel.
Actual value of the measured quantity
The actual value of the measured quantity is available locally and remotely. The measurement is continuous for each measured separately, but the reporting of the value to the higher levels depends on the selected reporting mode. The following basic reporting modes are available: Cyclic reporting (Cyclic) Amplitude dead-band supervision (Dead band) Integral dead-band supervision (Int deadband)
Cyclic reporting
The cyclic reporting of measured value is performed according to chosen setting (XRepTyp). The measuring channel reports the value independent of amplitude or integral dead-band reporting.
RED 670
701
Y Value Reported (1st) Value Reported Value Reported Value Reported
Y3 Y2 Y4
Value Reported
Y1
Y5
t (*)
t (*)
t (*)
t (*)
Value 1
Value 2
Value 3
Value 4
Value 5
(*)Set value for t: XDbRepInt
en05000500.vsd
Figure 363:
Periodic reporting
AmplitudeMagnitude dead-band supervision
If a measuring value is changed, compared to the last reported value, and the change is larger than the Y predefined limits that are set by user (XZeroDb), then the measuring channel reports the new value to a higher level, if this is detected by a new measured value. This limits the information flow to a minimum necessary. Figure 364 shows an example with the amplitude dead-band supervision. The picture is simplified: the process is not continuous but the values are evaluated with a time interval of one execution cycle from each other.
702
RED 670
Y Value Reported (1st) Value Reported Y3 Y2 DY DY DY DY
Value Reported Value Reported DY DY
Y1
t
99000529.vsd
Figure 364:
Amplitude dead-band supervision reporting
After the new value is reported, the Y limits for dead-band are automatically set around it. The new value is reported only if the measured quantity changes more than defined by the Y set limits.
Integral dead-band reporting
The measured value is reported if the time integral of all changes exceeds the pre-set limit (XZeroDb), figure 365, where an example of reporting with integral dead-band supervision is shown. The picture is simplified: the process is not continuous but the values are evaluated with a time interval of one execution cycle from each other. The last value reported, Y1 in figure 365 serves as a basic value for further measurement. A difference is calculated between the last reported and the newly measured value and is multiplied by the time increment (discrete integral). The absolute values of these integral values are added until the pre-set value is exceeded. This occurs with the value Y2 that is reported and set as a new base for the following measurements (as well as for the values Y3, Y4 and Y5). The integral dead-band supervision is particularly suitable for monitoring signals with small variations that can last for relatively long periods.
RED 670
703
Y A >= pre-set value
A1 >= pre-set value Y3 Y2 A1 Value Reported
A2 >= pre-set value A2 Y4 Value Reported A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 >= pre-set value

A4 A3 A5
A6
Value Reported (1st)
Value Reported
A7
Y5 Value Reported t
99000530.vsd
Y1
Figure 365:
Reporting with integral dead-band supervision
14.1.2.2
Service values (MMXU, SVR) Mode of operation
The measurement function must be connected to three-phase current and three-phase voltage input in the configuration tool (group signals), but it is capable to measure and calculate above mentioned quantities in nine different ways depending on the available VT inputs connected to the IED. The end user can freely select by a parameter setting, which one of the nine available measuring modes shall be used within the function. Available options are summarized in the following table:
Set value for Formula used for complex, threeparameter phase power calculation Mode 1 L1, L2, L3
S = U L1 I L1 + U L 2 I L 2 + U L 3 I L 3
* * *
Formula used for voltage and current magnitude calculation
Comment
U = ( U L1 + U L 2 + U L 3 ) / 3 I = ( I L1 + I L 2 + I L 3 ) / 3
Used when three phaseto-earth voltages are available Used when three two phase-tophase voltages are available Used when only symmetrical three phase power shall be measured
Arone
S = U L1 L 2 I L1 - U L 2 L 3 I L 3
* *
U = ( U L1 L 2 + U L 2 L 3 ) / 2 I = ( I L1 + I L 3 ) / 2
PosSeq
S = 3 U PosSeq I PosSeq
*
U =
3 U PosSeq
I = I PosSeq
704
RED 670
Set value for Formula used for complex, threeparameter phase power calculation Mode 4 L1L2 Formula used for voltage and current magnitude calculation Comment
S = U L1 L 2 ( I L1 - I L 2 )
* *
U = U L1 L 2 I = ( I L1 + I L 2 ) / 2
Used when only UL1L2 phase-tophase voltage is available Used when only UL2L3 phase-tophase voltage is available Used when only UL3L1 phase-tophase voltage is available Used when only UL1 phase-toearth voltage is available Used when only UL2 phase-toearth voltage is available Used when only UL3 phase-toearth voltage is available
L2L3
S = U L 2 L3 ( I L 2 - I L3 )
* *
U = U L2 L3 I = ( I L2 + I L3 ) / 2
L3L1
S = U L 3 L1 ( I L 3 - I L1 )
* *
U = U L 3 L1 I = ( I L 3 + I L1 ) / 2
L1
S = 3 U L1 I L1
*
U =
3 U L1
I = I L1
8 L2
S = 3 U L2 I L2
*
U =
3 U L2
I = IL2
9 L3
S = 3 U L3 I L3
*
U =
3 U L3
I = I L3
* means complex conjugated value
It shall be noted that only in the first two operating modes (i.e. 1 & 3) the measurement function calculates exact three-phase power. In other operating modes (i.e. from 3 to 9) it calculates the three-phase power under assumption that the power system is fully symmetrical. Once the complex apparent power is calculated then the P, Q, S, & PF are calculated in accordance with the following formulas:
P = Re( S )
(Equation 148)
Q = Im( S )
(Equation 149)
S = S =
P +Q
2
(Equation 150)
RED 670
705
PF = cosj = P S
(Equation 151)
Additionally to the power factor value the two binary output signals from the function are provided which indicates the angular relationship between current and voltage phasors. Binary output signal ILAG is set to one when current phasor is lagging behind voltage phasor. Binary output signal ILEAD is set to one when current phasor is leading the voltage phasor. Each analog output has a corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision". Measured currents and voltages used in the SVR function can be calibrated to get class 0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, see example in figure 366.
% of Ir -10 IAmpComp5 IAmpComp30 IAmpComp100 -10 5 30 0-5%: Constant 5-30-100%: Linear >100%: Constant 100 Measured current % of Ir Amplitude compensation
Angle compensation
en05000652.vsd
Figure 366:
Calibration curves
The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference and the amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.
706
RED 670
Low pass filtering
In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is possible to introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for P, Q, S, U, I & power factor. This will make slower measurement response to the step changes in the measured quantity. Filtering is performed in accordance with the following recursive formula:
X = k X Old + (1 - k ) X Calculated
where: X XOld is a new measured value (i.e. P, Q, S, U, I or PF) to be given out from the function is the measured value given from the measurement function in previous execution cycle (Equation 152)
XCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle k is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties
Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is immediately given out without any filtering (i.e. without any additional delay). When k is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. Appropriate value of k shall be determined separately for every application. Some typical value for k =0.14.
Zero point clamping
In order to avoid erroneous measurements when either current or voltage signal is not present, it is possible for the end user to set the magnitude IGenZeroDb level for current and voltage measurement UGenZeroDb is forced to zero. When either current or voltage measurement is forced to zero automatically the measured values for power (i.e. P, Q & S) and power factor are forced to zero as well. Since the measurement supervision functionality, included in the SVR function, is using these values the zero clamping will influence the subsequent supervision (observe the possibility to do zero point clamping within measurement supervision, see section "Measurement supervision"). In order to compensate for small magnitude and angular errors in the complete measurement chain (i.e. CT error, VT error, IED input transformer errors etc.) it is possible to perform on site calibration of the power measurement. This is achieved by setting the complex constant which is then internally used within the function to multiply the calculated complex apparent power S. This constant is set as magnitude (i.e. setting parameter PowAmpFact, default value 1.000) and angle (i.e. setting parameter PowAngComp, default value 0.0 degrees). Default values for these two parameters are done in such way that they do not influence internally calculated value (i.e. complex constant has default value 1). In this way calibration, for specific operating range (e.g. around rated power) can be done at site. However to perform this calibration it is necessary to have external power meter of the high accuracy class available.
Compensation facility
RED 670
707
Directionality
In CT earthing parameter is set as described in section "Analog inputs", active and reactive power will be measured always towards the protected object. This is shown in the following figure 367.
Busbar
Protected Object
en05000373.vsd
Figure 367:
Internal IED directionality convention for P & Q measurements
That practically means that active and reactive power will have positive values when they flow from the busbar towards the protected object and they will have negative values when they flow from the protected object towards the busbar. In some application, like for example when power is measured on the secondary side of the power transformer it might be desirable, from the end client point of view, to have actually opposite directional convention for active and reactive power measurements. This can be easily achieved by setting parameter PowAngComp to value of 180.0 degrees. With such setting the active and reactive power will have positive values when they flow from the protected object towards the busbar.
Frequency
Frequency is actually not calculated within measurement block. It is simply obtained from the pre-processing block and then just given out from the measurement block as an output.
14.1.2.3
Current Phasors (MMXU, CP)

The CP function must be connected to three-phase current input in the configuration tool to be operable. Currents handled in the function can be calibrated to get better then class 0.5 measuring accuracy for internal use, on the outputs and IEC 61850. This is achieved by amplitude and angle compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current. The compensation below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, see figure 366 above.
708
RED 670
Phase currents (amplitude and angle) are available on the outputs and each amplitude output has a corresponding supervision level output (ILx_RANG). The supervision output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".
14.1.2.4
Voltage phasors (MMXU, VN and VP)

The voltage function must be connected to three-phase voltage input in the configuration tool to be operable. Voltages are handled in the same way as currents when it comes to class 0.5 calibrations, see above. The voltages (phase or phase-phase voltage, amplitude and angle) are available on the outputs and each amplitude output has a corresponding supervision level output (ULxy_RANG). The supervision output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".
14.1.2.5
Sequence quantities (MSQI, CSQ and VSQ)

The measurement functions must be connected to three-phase current (CSQ) or voltage (VSQ) input in the configuration tool to be operable. No outputs, but XRANG, are calculated within the measuring block and it is not possible to calibrate the signals. Input signals are obtained from the pre-processing block and transferred to corresponding output. Positive, negative and three times zero sequence quantities are available on the outputs (voltage and current, amplitude and angle). Each amplitude output has a corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".
14.1.3
Function block
The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM 600.
RED 670
709
SVR1CVMMXU I3P U3P S S_RANGE P_INST P P_RANGE Q_INST Q Q_RANGE PF PF_RANGE ILAG ILEAD U U_RANGE I I_RANGE F F_RANGE en05000772.vsd
Figure 368:
SVR function block
CP01CMMXU I3P IL1 IL1RANG IL1ANGL IL2 IL2RANG IL2ANGL IL3 IL3RANG IL3ANGL en05000699.vsd
Figure 369:
VP01VMMXU U3P
CP function block
UL12 UL12RANG UL23 UL23RANG UL31 UL31RANG en05000701.vsd
Figure 370:
CSQ1CMSQI I3P
VP function block
3I0 3I0RANG I1 I1RANG I2 I2RANG en05000703.vsd
Figure 371:
CS function block
710
RED 670
VSQ1VMSQI U3P 3U0 3U0RANG U1 U1RANG U2 U2RANG en05000704.vsd
VSQ1VMSQI V3P 3V0 3V0RANG V1 V1RANG V2 V2RANG en05000704_ansi.vsd
Figure 372:
VS function block
14.1.4

Table 426:
Signal I3P U3P
Input signals for the CVMMXU (SVR1-) function block

Description Group signal for current input Group signal for voltage input
Table 427:
Signal S S_RANGE P_INST P P_RANGE Q_INST Q Q_RANGE PF PF_RANGE ILAG ILEAD U U_RANGE I
Output signals for the CVMMXU (SVR1-) function block

Description Apparent Power magnitude of deadband value Apparent Power range Active Power Active Power magnitude of deadband value Active Power range Reactive Power Active Power magnitude of deadband value Reactive Power range Power Factor magnitude of deadband value Power Factor range Current is lagging voltage Current is leading voltage Calculate voltage magnitude of deadband value Calcuate voltage range Calculated current magnitude of deadband value
RED 670
711
Signal I_RANGE F F_RANGE Description Calculated current range System frequency magnitude of deadband value System frequency range
Table 428:
Signal I3P
Input signals for the CMMXU (CP01-) function block

Description Group connection abstract block 1
Table 429:
Signal IL1 IL1RANG IL1ANGL IL2 IL2RANG IL2ANGL IL3 IL3RANG IL3ANGL
Output signals for the CMMXU (CP01-) function block

Description IL1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value IL1 Amplitude range IL1 Angle, magnitude of reported value IL2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value IL2 Amplitude range IL2 Angle, magnitude of reported value IL3 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value IL3 Amplitude range IL3 Angle, magnitude of reported value
Table 430:
Signal U3P
Input signals for the VNMMXU (VN01-) function block

Table 431:
Signal UL1 UL1RANG UL1ANGL UL2 UL2RANG UL2ANGL UL3 UL3RANG UL3ANGL
Output signals for the VNMMXU (VN01-) function block

Description UL1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value UL1 Amplitude range UL1 Angle, magnitude of reported value UL2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value UL2 Amplitude range UL2 Angle, magnitude of reported value UL3 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value UL3 Amplitude range UL3 Angle, magnitude of reported value
712
RED 670
Table 432:
Signal U3P
Input signals for the VMMXU (VP01-) function block

Table 433:
Signal UL12 UL12RANG UL23 UL23RANG UL31 UL31RANG
Output signals for the VMMXU (VP01-) function block

Description UL12 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value UL12 Amplitude range UL23 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value UL23 Amplitude range UL31 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value UL31 Amplitude range
Table 434:
Signal I3P
Input signals for the CMSQI (CSQ1-) function block

Table 435:
Signal 3I0 3I0RANG I1 I1RANG I2 I2RANG
Output signals for the CMSQI (CSQ1-) function block

Description 3I0 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value 3I0 Amplitude range I1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value I1 Amplitude range I2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value I2 Amplitude range
Table 436:
Signal U3P
Input signals for the VMSQI (VSQ1-) function block

RED 670
713
Table 437:
Signal 3U0 3U0RANG U1 U1RANG U2 U2RANG
Output signals for the VMSQI (VSQ1-) function block

Description 3U0 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value 3U0 Amplitude range U1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value U1 Amplitude range U2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value U2 Amplitude range
14.1.5
Setting parameters
The available setting parameters of the measurement function (MMXU, MSQI) are depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM 600.
Table 438:
Parameter SLowLim SLowLowLim SMin SMax SRepTyp
Basic general settings for the CVMMXU (SVR1-) function

Range 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Off On 1 - 99999 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Step 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 Default 0.000 0.000 0.000 1000000000.000 Cyclic Unit VA VA VA VA Description Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value Maximum value Reporting type
PMin
0.001
-1000000000.000
Minimum value
PMax
0.001
1000000000.000
Maximum value
PRepTyp
Cyclic
Reporting type
QMin
0.001
-1000000000.000
VAr
Minimum value
Operation IBase QMax
1 0.001
Off 3000 1000000000.000
A VAr
Operation Off / On Base setting for current level in A Maximum value
714
RED 670
Parameter QRepTyp Range Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.05 - 2000.00 L1, L2, L3 Arone Pos Seq L1L2 L2L3 L3L1 L1 L2 L3 0.000 - 6.000 Step Default Cyclic Unit Description Reporting type
UBase Mode
0.05 -
400.00 L1, L2, L3
kV -
Base setting for voltage level in kV Selection of measured current and voltage
PowAmpFact
0.001
1.000
Amplitude factor to scale power calculations Angle compensation for phase shift between measured I &U Low pass filter coefficient for power measurement, U and I Minimum value Maximum value Reporting type
PowAngComp
-180.0 - 180.0
0.1
0.0
Deg
0.00 - 1.00
0.01
0.00
PFMin PFMax PFRepTyp
-1.000 - 0.000 0.000 - 1.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband
0.001 0.001 -
-1.000 1.000 Cyclic
UMin
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
UMax
0.001
400000.000
Maximum value
URepTyp
Cyclic
Reporting type
IMin
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
IMax
0.001
1000.000
Maximum value
IRepTyp
Cyclic
Reporting type
RED 670
715
Parameter FrMin Range -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband Step 0.001 Default 0.000 Unit Hz Description Minimum value
FrMax
0.001
70.000
Hz
Maximum value
FrRepTyp
Cyclic
Reporting type
Table 439:
Parameter SDbRepInt
Advanced general settings for the CVMMXU (SVR1-) function

Range 1 - 300 Step 1 Default 10 Unit Type Description Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits) Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits) Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
SZeroDb SHiHiLim SHiLim SLimHyst
0 - 100000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 - 100.000
1 0.001 0.001 0.001
0 900000000.000 800000000.000 5.000
m% VA VA %
PDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type
PZeroDb PHiHiLim
0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 0.000 - 100.000
1 0.001
0 900000000.000
m% W
PHiLim
0.001
800000000.000
PLowLim
0.001
-800000000.000
PLowLowLim
0.001
-900000000.000
PLimHyst
0.001
5.000
QDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type
QZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
716
RED 670
Parameter QHiHiLim Range -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 0.000 - 100.000 Step 0.001 Default 900000000.000 Unit VAr Description High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits) Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range Zero point clamping in % of Ubase High High limit (physical value) Zero point clamping in % of Ibase High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits) Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value)
QHiLim
0.001
800000000.000
VAr
QLowLim
0.001
-800000000.000
VAr
QLowLowLim
0.001
-900000000.000
VAr
QLimHyst
0.001
5.000
PFDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type
PFZeroDb UGenZeroDb PFHiHiLim IGenZeroDb PFHiLim PFLowLim PFLowLowLim PFLimHyst
0 - 100000 1 - 100 -3.000 - 3.000 1 - 100 -3.000 - 3.000 -3.000 - 3.000 -3.000 - 3.000 0.000 - 100.000
1 1 0.001 1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001
0 5 3.000 5 2.000 -2.000 -3.000 5.000
m% % % %
UDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type
UZeroDb UHiHiLim
0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000
1 0.001
0 460000.000
m% V
UHiLim
0.001
450000.000
ULowLim
0.001
380000.000
ULowLowLim
0.001
350000.000
RED 670
717
Parameter ULimHyst Range 0.000 - 100.000 Step 0.001 Default 5.000 Unit % Description Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits) Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits) Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits) Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 5% of Ur Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 30% of Ur Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 100% of Ur
IDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type
IZeroDb IHiHiLim
0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 0.000 - 100.000
1 0.001
0 900.000
m% A
IHiLim
0.001
800.000
ILowLim
0.001
-800.000
ILowLowLim
0.001
-900.000
ILimHyst
0.001
5.000
FrDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type
FrZeroDb FrHiHiLim
0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 0.000 - 100.000
1 0.001
0 65.000
m% Hz
FrHiLim
0.001
63.000
Hz
FrLowLim
0.001
47.000
Hz
FrLowLowLim
0.001
45.000
Hz
FrLimHyst
0.001
5.000
UAmpComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
UAmpComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
UAmpComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
718
RED 670
Parameter IAmpComp5 Range -10.000 - 10.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.000 Unit % Description Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 5% of Ir Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 30% of Ir Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 100% of Ir Angle calibration for current at 5% of Ir Angle calibration for current at 30% of Ir Angle calibration for current at 100% of Ir
IAmpComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
IAmpComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
IAngComp5 IAngComp30 IAngComp100
-10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000
0.001 0.001 0.001
0.000 0.000 0.000
Deg Deg Deg
Table 440:
Parameter IL1DbRepInt
Basic general settings for the CMMXU (CP01-) function

Range 1 - 300 Step 1 Default 10 Unit Type Description Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Operation Mode On / Off Base setting for current level in A Maximum value Reporting type
Operation IBase IL1Max IL1RepTyp
Off On 1 - 99999 0.000 10000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 1 - 300
1 0.001 -
Off 3000 1000.000 Cyclic
A A -
IL1AngDbRepInt
10
Type
Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Maximum value Reporting type
IL2DbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type
IL2Max IL2RepTyp
0.000 10000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 1 - 300
0.001 -
1000.000 Cyclic
A -
IL2AngDbRepInt
10
Type
Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s
IL3DbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type
RED 670
719
Parameter IL3Max IL3RepTyp Range 0.000 10000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 1 - 300 Step 0.001 Default 1000.000 Cyclic Unit A Description Maximum value Reporting type
IL3AngDbRepInt
10
Type
Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s
Table 441:
Parameter IL1ZeroDb IL1HiHiLim IL1HiLim IAmpComp5
Advanced general settings for the CMMXU (CP01-) function

Range 0 - 100000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 -10.000 - 10.000 Step 1 0.001 0.001 0.001 Default 0 900.000 800.000 0.000 Unit m% A A % Description Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 5% of Ir Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 30% of Ir Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 100% of Ir Angle calibration for current at 5% of Ir Minimum value Angle calibration for current at 30% of Ir Angle calibration for current at 100% of Ir Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value)
IAmpComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
IL1LowLim IL1LowLowLim IAmpComp100
0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 -10.000 - 10.000
0.001 0.001 0.001
0.000 0.000 0.000
A A %
IAngComp5 IL1Min IAngComp30 IAngComp100 IL1LimHys
-10.000 - 10.000 0.000 10000000000.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 0.000 - 100.000
0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 5.000
Deg A Deg Deg %
IL2ZeroDb IL2HiHiLim IL2HiLim IL2LowLim
0 - 100000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000
1 0.001 0.001 0.001
0 900.000 800.000 0.000
m% A A A
720
RED 670
Parameter IL2LowLowLim IL2Min IL2LimHys Range 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 - 100.000 Step 0.001 0.001 0.001 Default 0.000 0.000 5.000 Unit A A % Description Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits
IL3ZeroDb IL3HiHiLim IL3HiLim IL3LowLim IL3LowLowLim IL3Min IL3LimHys
0 - 100000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 - 100.000
1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001
0 900.000 800.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 5.000
m% A A A A A %
Table 442:
Parameter UL1DbRepInt
Basic general settings for the VNMMXU (VN01-) function

Range 1 - 300 Step 1 Default 10 Unit Type Description Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Operation Mode On / Off Base setting for voltage level in kV Maximum value Reporting type
Operation UBase UL1Max UL1RepTyp
Off On 0.05 - 2000.00 0.000 10000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000
0.05 0.001 -
Off 400.00 300000.000 Cyclic
kV V -
UL1LimHys
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Maximum value
UL1AnDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type
UL2DbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type
UL2Max
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
300000.000
RED 670
721
Parameter UL2RepTyp Range Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000 Step Default Cyclic Unit Description Reporting type
UL2LimHys
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Maximum value Reporting type
UL2AnDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type
UL3DbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type
UL3Max UL3RepTyp
0.000 10000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000
0.001 -
300000.000 Cyclic
V -
UL3LimHys
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s
UL3AnDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type
Table 443:
Parameter UL1ZeroDb UL1HiHiLim UL1HiLim UL1LowLim UL1LowLowLim UAmpComp100
Advanced general settings for the VNMMXU (VN01-) function

Range 0 - 100000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 -10.000 - 10.000 Step 1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 Default 0 260000.000 240000.000 220000.000 200000.000 0.000 Unit m% V V V V % Description Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 100% of Ur Minimum value Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value)
UL1Min UL2ZeroDb UL2HiHiLim UL2HiLim UL2LowLim
0.000 10000000000.000 0 - 100000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000
0.001 1 0.001 0.001 0.001
0.000 0 260000.000 240000.000 220000.000
V m% V V V
722
RED 670
Parameter UL2LowLowLim UL2Min UL3ZeroDb UL3HiHiLim UL3HiLim UL3LowLim UL3LowLowLim UL3Min Range 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0 - 100000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 Step 0.001 0.001 1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 Default 200000.000 0.000 0 260000.000 240000.000 220000.000 200000.000 0.000 Unit V V m% V V V V V Description Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value
Table 444:
Parameter UL12DbRepInt
Basic general settings for the VMMXU (VP01-) function

Range 1 - 300 Step 1 Default 10 Unit s,%, %s 1/100 0% kV V Description Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Operation Mode On / Off Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range Base setting for voltage level in kV High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 5% of Ur Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 30% of Ur Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 100% of Ur
Operation UL12ZeroDb UBase UL12HiHiLim
Off On 0 - 100000 0.05 - 2000.00 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10.000 - 10.000
1 0.05 0.001
On 0 400.00 460000.000
UL12HiLim
0.001
450000.000
UAmpComp5
0.001
0.000
UAmpComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
UL12LowLim
-10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10.000 - 10.000
0.001
380000.000
UL12LowLowLim
0.001
350000.000
UAmpComp100
0.001
0.000
RED 670
723
Parameter UL12Min Range -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.000 Unit V Description Minimum value
UL12Max
0.001
450000.000
Maximum value
UL12RepTyp
Cyclic
Reporting type
UL12LimHys
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Reporting type
UL12AnDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%, %s -
UL12AngRepTyp
Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 1 - 300
Cyclic
UL23DbRepInt
10
s,%, %s 1/100 0% V
Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value
UL23ZeroDb UL23HiHiLim
0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000
1 0.001
0 460000.000
UL23HiLim
0.001
450000.000
UL23LowLim
0.001
380000.000
UL23LowLowLim
0.001
350000.000
UL23Min
0.001
0.000
UL23Max
0.001
450000.000
Maximum value
UL23RepTyp
Cyclic
Reporting type
UL23LimHys
0.001
5.000
UL23AnDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%, %s -
UL23AngRepTyp
Cyclic Dead band Int deadband
Cyclic
724
RED 670
Parameter UL31DbRepInt Range 1 - 300 Step 1 Default 10 Unit s,%, %s 1/100 0% V Description Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value
UL31ZeroDb UL31HiHiLim
1 0.001
0 460000.000
UL31HiLim
0.001
450000.000
UL31LowLim
0.001
380000.000
UL31LowLowLim
0.001
350000.000
UL31Min
0.001
0.000
UL31Max
0.001
450000.000
Maximum value
UL31RepTyp
Cyclic
Reporting type
UL31LimHys
0.001
5.000
UL31AnDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%, %s -
UL31AngRepTyp
Cyclic
Table 445:
Parameter 3I0DbRepInt
Basic general settings for the CMSQI (CSQ1-) function

Range 1 - 300 Step 1 Default 10 Unit s,%, %s 1/100 0% A Description Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value)
3I0ZeroDb 3I0HiHiLim
0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000
1 0.001
0 900.000
3I0HiLim
0.001
800.000
RED 670
725
Parameter 3I0LowLim Range -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000 Step 0.001 Default -800.000 Unit A Description Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value
3I0LowLowLim
0.001
-900.000
3I0Min
0.001
0.000
3I0Max
0.001
1000.000
Maximum value
3I0RepTyp
Cyclic
Reporting type
3I0LimHys
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Operation Mode On / Off Reporting type
3I0AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%, %s -
Operation 3I0AngRepTyp
Off On Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 1 - 300
Off Cyclic
I1DbRepInt
10
s,%, %s 1/100 0% A
I1ZeroDb I1HiHiLim
0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband
1 0.001
0 900.000
I1HiLim
0.001
800.000
I1LowLim
0.001
-800.000
I1LowLowLim
0.001
-900.000
I1Min
0.001
0.000
I1Max
0.001
1000.000
Maximum value
I1RepTyp
Cyclic
Reporting type
726
RED 670
Parameter I1LimHys Range 0.000 - 100.000 Step 0.001 Default 5.000 Unit % Description Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Reporting type
I1AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%, %s -
I1AngRepTyp
Cyclic
I2DbRepInt
10
s,%, %s 1/100 0% A
I2ZeroDb I2HiHiLim
1 0.001
0 900.000
I2HiLim
0.001
800.000
I2LowLim
0.001
-800.000
I2LowLowLim
0.001
-900.000
I2Min
0.001
0.000
I2Max
0.001
1000.000
Maximum value
I2RepTyp
Cyclic
Reporting type
I2LimHys
0.001
5.000
I2AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%, %s -
I2AngRepTyp
Cyclic
RED 670
727
Table 446:
Parameter 3U0DbRepInt
Basic general settings for the VMSQI (VSQ1-) function

Range 1 - 300 Step 1 Default 10 Unit s,%, %s 1/100 0% V Description Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value
3U0ZeroDb 3U0HiHiLim
1 0.001
0 460000.000
3U0HiLim
0.001
450000.000
3U0LowLim
0.001
380000.000
3U0LowLowLim
0.001
350000.000
3U0Min
0.001
0.000
3U0Max
0.001
450000.000
Maximum value
3U0RepTyp
Cyclic
Reporting type
3U0LimHys
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Operation Mode On / Off Reporting type
3U0AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%, %s -
Operation 3U0AngRepTyp
Off On Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 1 - 300
Off Cyclic
U1DbRepInt
10
s,%, %s 1/100 0% V
Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value)
U1ZeroDb U1HiHiLim
0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000
1 0.001
0 460000.000
U1HiLim
0.001
450000.000
U1LowLim
0.001
380000.000
728
RED 670
Parameter U1LowLowLim Range -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000 Step 0.001 Default 350000.000 Unit V Description Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value
U1Min
0.001
0.000
U1Max
0.001
450000.000
Maximum value
U1RepTyp
Cyclic
Reporting type
U1LimHys
0.001
5.000
U1AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%, %s -
U1AngRepTyp
Cyclic
U2DbRepInt
10
s,%, %s 1/100 0% V
U2ZeroDb U2HiHiLim
0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband
1 0.001
0 460000.000
U2HiLim
0.001
450000.000
U2LowLim
0.001
380000.000
U2LowLowLim
0.001
350000.000
U2Min
0.001
0.000
U2Max
0.001
450000.000
Maximum value
U2RepTyp
Cyclic
Reporting type
RED 670
729
Parameter U2LimHys Range 0.000 - 100.000 Step 0.001 Default 5.000 Unit % Description Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Reporting type
U2AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%, %s -
U2AngRepTyp
Cyclic
14.1.6
Technical data
Table 447:
Function Frequency Voltage Connected current Active power, P Reactive power, Q Apparent power, S Power factor, cos ()
Measurements (MMXU)
Range or value (0.95-1.05) fr (0.1-1.5) Ur (0.2-4.0) Ir 0.1 x Ur< U < 1.5 x Ur 0.2 x Ir < I < 4.0 x Ir 0.1 x Ur< U < 1.5 x Ur 0.2 x Ir < I < 4.0 x Ir 0.1 x Ur < U < 1.5 x Ur 0.2 x Ir< I < 4.0 x Ir 0.1 x Ur < U < 1.5 x Ur 0.2 x Ir< I < 4.0 x Ir Accuracy 2.0 mHz 0.5% of Ur at UUr 0.5% of U at U > Ur 0.5% of Ir at I Ir 0.5% of I at I > Ir 1.0% of Sr at S Sr 1.0% of S at S > Sr 1.0% of Sr at S Sr 1.0% of S at S > Sr 1.0% of Sr at S Sr 1.0% of S at S > Sr 0.02
14.2
Event counter (GGIO)

Function block name: CNTxANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: CNTGGIO IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
14.2.1
Introduction
The function consists of six counters which are used for storing the number of times each counter input has been activated.
730
RED 670
Section 14 Monitoring 14.2.2 Principle of operation

The function block has six inputs for increasing the counter values for each of the six counters respectively. The content of the counters are stepped one step for each positive edge of the input respectively. The maximum count up speed is 10 pulses per second. The maximum counter value is 10 000. For counts above 10 000 the counter will stop at 10 000 and no restart will take place. To not risk that the flash memory is worn out due to too many writings, a mechanism for limiting the number of writings per time period is included in the product. This however gives as a result that it can take long time, up to several minutes, before a new value is stored in the flash memory. And if a new CNTGGIO value is not stored before auxiliary power interruption, it will be lost. The CNTGGIO stored values in flash memory will however not be lost at an auxiliary power interruption. The function block also has an input BLOCK. At activation of this input all six counters are blocked. The input can for example be used for blocking the counters at testing. All inputs are configured via PCM 600, CAP531 Application configuration tool.
14.2.2.1
Reporting
The content of the counters can be read in the local HMI. Refer to Operators manual for procedure. Reset of counters can be performed in the local HMI and a binary input. Refer to Operators manual for procedure. Reading of content can also be performed remotely, for example from MicroSCADA. The value can also be presented as a measuring value on the local HMI graphical display.
14.2.2.2
Design
The function block has six inputs for increasing the counter values for each of the six counters respectively. The content of the counters are stepped one step for each positive edge of the input respectively. The function block also has an input BLOCK. At activation of this input all six counters are blocked and are not updated. Valid number is held. The function block has an input RESET. At activation of this input all six counters are set to 0.
RED 670
731
Section 14 Monitoring 14.2.3 Function block

CNT1CNTGGIO BLOCK COUNTER1 COUNTER2 COUNTER3 COUNTER4 COUNTER5 COUNTER6 RESET en05000345.vsd
Figure 373:
CNT function block
14.2.4
Input signals
Table 448:
Signal BLOCK COUNTER1 COUNTER2 COUNTER3 COUNTER4 COUNTER5 COUNTER6 RESET
Input signals for the CNTGGIO (CNT1-) function block

Description Block of function Input for counter1 Input for counter2 Input for counter3 Input for counter4 Input for counter5 Input for counter6 Reset of function
14.2.5
Setting parameters
14.2.6
Technical data
Table 449:
Function Counter value Max. count up speed
Event counter (GGIO)

Range or value 0-10000 10 pulses/s Accuracy -
14.3
Event function (EV)
732
RED 670
Function block name: EVxxANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: Event
14.3.1
Introduction
When using a Substation Automation system with LON or SPA communication, time-tagged events can be sent at change or cyclically from the IED to the station level. These events are created from any available signal in the IED that is connected to the Event function block. The event function block is used for LON and SPA communication. Analog and double indication values are also transferred through the event block.
14.3.2
The main purpose of the event function block is to generate events when the state or value of any of the connected input signals is in a state, or is undergoing a state transition, for which event generation is enabled. Each event function block has 16 inputs INPUT1 - INPUT16. Each input can be given a name from the CAP configuration tool. The inputs are normally used to create single events, but are also intended for double indication events. The function also has an input BLOCK to block the generation of events. The events that are sent from the IED can originate from both internal logical signals and binary input channels. The internal signals are time-tagged in the main processing module, while the binary input channels are time-tagged directly on the input module. The time-tagging of the events that are originated from internal logical signals have a resolution corresponding to the execution cyclicity of the event function block. The time-tagging of the events that are originated from binary input signals have a resolution of 1 ms. The outputs from the event function block are formed by the reading of status, events and alarms by the station level on every single input. The user-defined name for each input is intended to be used by the station level. All events according to the event mask are stored in a buffer, which contains up to 1000 events. If new events appear before the oldest event in the buffer is read, the oldest event is overwritten and an overflow alarm appears. The events are produced according to the set-event masks. The event masks are treated commonly for both the LON and SPA communication. The event mask can be set individually for each input channel. These settings are available:
RED 670
733
NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect
It is possible to define which part of the event function block that shall generate events. This can be performed individually for the LON and SPA communication respectively. For each communication type these settings are available: Off Channel 1-8 Channel 9-16 Channel 1-16
For LON communication the events normally are sent to station level at change. It is possibly also to set a time for cyclic sending of the events individually for each input channel. To protect the SA system from signals with a high change rate that can easily saturate the event system or the communication subsystems behind it, a quota limiter is implemented. If an input creates events at a rate that completely consume the granted quota then further events from the channel will be blocked. This block will be removed when the input calms down and the accumulated quota reach 66% of the maximum burst quota. The maximum burst quota per input channel equals 3 times the configurable setting MaxEvPerSec.
734
RED 670

EV01Event BLOCK INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 NAME1 NAME2 NAME3 NAME4 NAME5 NAME6 NAME7 NAME8 NAME9 NAME10 NAME11 NAME12 NAME13 NAME14 NAME15 NAME16 en05000697.vsd
14.3.4

Table 450:
Signal BLOCK INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 Table continued on next page
Input signals for the Event (EV01-) function block

Description Block of function Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Input 9 Input 10 Input 11 Input 12 Input 13
RED 670
735
Signal INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 Description Input 14 Input 15 Input 16
14.3.5
Setting parameters
Table 451:
Parameter SPAChannelMask
Basic general settings for the Event (EV01-) function

Range Off Channel 1-8 Channel 9-16 Channel 1-16 Off Channel 1-8 Channel 9-16 Channel 1-16 NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect Step Default Off Unit Description SPA channel mask
LONChannelMask
Off
LON channel mask
EventMask1
AutoDetect
Reporting criteria for input 1
EventMask2
AutoDetect
EventMask3
AutoDetect
EventMask4
AutoDetect
EventMask5
AutoDetect
EventMask6
AutoDetect
EventMask7
AutoDetect
736
RED 670
Parameter EventMask8 Range NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 Step Default AutoDetect Unit Description Reporting criteria for input 8
EventMask9
AutoDetect
EventMask10
AutoDetect
EventMask11
AutoDetect
EventMask12
AutoDetect
EventMask13
AutoDetect
EventMask14
AutoDetect
EventMask15
AutoDetect
EventMask16
AutoDetect
MinRepIntVal1 MinRepIntVal2 MinRepIntVal3 MinRepIntVal4 MinRepIntVal5
1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2
s s s s s
Minimum reporting interval input 1 Minimum reporting interval input 2 Minimum reporting interval input 3 Minimum reporting interval input 4 Minimum reporting interval input 5
RED 670
737
Parameter MinRepIntVal6 MinRepIntVal7 MinRepIntVal8 MinRepIntVal9 MinRepIntVal10 MinRepIntVal11 MinRepIntVal12 MinRepIntVal13 MinRepIntVal14 MinRepIntVal15 MinRepIntVal16 Range 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Default 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Unit s s s s s s s s s s s Description Minimum reporting interval input 6 Minimum reporting interval input 7 Minimum reporting interval input 8 Minimum reporting interval input 9 Minimum reporting interval input 10 Minimum reporting interval input 11 Minimum reporting interval input 12 Minimum reporting interval input 13 Minimum reporting interval input 14 Minimum reporting interval input 15 Minimum reporting interval input 16
14.4
Fault locator (RFLO)

Function block name: FLO-ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: LMBRFLO IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
14.4.1
Introduction
The accurate fault locator is an essential component to minimize the outages after a persistent fault and/or to pin-point a weak spot on the line. The built-in fault locator is an impedance measuring function giving the distance to the fault in percent, km or miles. The main advantage is the high accuracy achieved by compensating for load current and for the mutual zero sequence effect on double circuit lines. The compensation includes setting of the remote and local sources and calculation of the distribution of fault currents from each side. This distribution of fault current, together with recorded load (pre-fault) currents, is used to exactly calculate the fault
738
RED 670
position. The fault can be recalculated with new source data at the actual fault to further increase the accuracy. Specially on heavily loaded long lines (where the fault locator is most important) where the source voltage angles can be up to 35-40 degrees apart the accuracy can be still maintained with the advanced compensation included in fault locator.
14.4.2
The Fault Locator (FL) in the IED is an essential complement to other monitoring functions, since it measures and indicates the distance to the fault with great accuracy. When calculating distance to fault, pre-fault and fault phasors of currents and voltages are selected from the Trip Value Recorder data, thus the analog signals used by the fault locator must be among those connected to the disturbance report function. The analog configuration (channel selection) is performed using the parameter setting tool within PCM 600. The calculation algorithm considers the effect of load currents, double-end infeed and additional fault resistance.
R0L+jX0L R1L+jX1L R1A+jX1A Z0m=Z0m+jX0m R0L+jX0L R1L+jX1L R1B+jX1B
DRP FL
en05000045.vsd
Figure 374:
Simplified network configuration with network data, required for settings of the fault location-measuring function.
If source impedance in the near and far end of the protected line have changed in a significant manner relative to the set values at fault location calculation time (due to exceptional switching state in the immediate network, power generation out of order etc.), new values can be entered via the local HMI and a recalculation of the distance to the fault can be ordered using the algorithm described below. Its also possible to change fault loop. In this way, a more accurate location of the fault can be achieved. The function indicates the distance to the fault as a percentage of the line length, in kilometers or miles as selected on the local HMI. The fault location is stored as a part of the disturbance report information (ER, DR, IND, TVR and FL) and managed via the LHMI or PCM 600.
RED 670
739
14.4.2.1 Measuring Principle
For transmission lines with voltage sources at both line ends, the effect of double-end infeed and additional fault resistance must be considered when calculating the distance to the fault from the currents and voltages at one line end. If this is not done, the accuracy of the calculated figure will vary with the load flow and the amount of additional fault resistance. The calculation algorithm used in the fault locator in compensates for the effect of double-end infeed, additional fault resistance and load current.
14.4.2.2
Accurate algorithm for measurement of distance to fault

Figure 375 shows a single-line diagram of a single transmission line, that is fed from both ends with source impedances ZA and ZB. Assume, that the fault occurs at a distance F from terminal A on a line with the length L and impedance ZL. The fault resistance is defined as RF. A single-line model is used for better clarification of the algorithm.
L F
ZA
A IA
pZL IF
IB
(1-p).ZL
ZB
UA
RF
xx01000171.vsd
Figure 375:
Fault on transmission line fed from both ends.
From figure 375 it is evident that:

U A = I A p Z L + IF R F
(Equation 153)
Where: IA IF
p
is the line current after the fault, that is, pre-fault current plus current change due to the fault, is the fault current and is a relative distance to the fault
740
RED 670
The fault current is expressed in measurable quantities by:

IF A IF = ------DA
(Equation 154)
Where: IFA DA is the change in current at the point of measurement, terminal A and is a fault current-distribution factor, that is, the ratio between the fault current at line end A and the total fault current.
For a single line, the value is equal to:

( 1 p ) Z L + ZB DA = ----------------------------------------Z A + Z L + ZB
(Equation 155)
Thus, the general fault location equation for a single line is:
I FA U A = I A p Z L + ------- R F DA
(Equation 156)
Table 452:
Fault type: L1-N
Expressions for UA, IA and IFA for different types of faults

UA UL1A IA IL1A + KN x INA IFA
3 -- D ( I L1A I 0A ) 2
3 -- D ( I L2A I 0A ) 2
L2-N
UL2A
IL2A + KN x INA
L3-N
UL3A
IL3A + KN x INA
3 -- D ( I L3A I0A ) 2
DIL 1 L 2 A
L1-L2-L3, L1-L2,L1-L2N L2-L3, L2-L3-N
UL1A-UL2A UL2A-UL3A
IL1A - IL2A IL2A - IL3A
DIL2L3A
L3-L1, L3-L1-N
UL3A-UL1A
IL3A - IL1A
DIL3L1A
The KN complex quantity for zero-sequence compensation for the single line is equal to:
RED 670
741
Z0L Z 1L K N = ----------------------3 Z1L
(Equation 163)
DI is the change in current, that is the current after the fault minus the current before the fault. In the following, the positive sequence impedance for ZA, ZB and ZL is inserted into the equations, because this is the value used in the algorithm. For double lines, the fault equation is:
I FA U A = I A p Z 1L + ------- RF + I 0P Z 0M DA
(Equation 164)
Where: I0P Z0M DA is a zero sequence current of the parallel line, is a mutual zero sequence impedance and is the distribution factor of the parallel line, which is:
( 1 p ) ( ZA + ZA L + ZB ) + Z B DA = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------2 ZA + Z L + 2 Z B
The KN compensation factor for the double line becomes:

Z0L Z 1L Z 0M I 0P K N = ----------------------- + ---------------- ------3 Z1L 3 Z1L I 0A
(Equation 166)
From these equations it can be seen, that, if Z0m = 0, then the general fault location equation for a single line is obtained. Only the distribution factor differs in these two cases. Because the DA distribution factor according to equation 156 or 165 is a function of p, the general equation 165 can be written in the form:
p p K1 + K2 K3 RF = 0
2
(Equation 167)
Where:
UA ZB K 1 = --------------- + -------------------------- + 1 I A ZL Z L + ZA DD
(Equation 168)
UA ZB K2 = -------------- -------------------------- + 1 IA Z L Z L + Z A DD
(Equation 169)
742
RED 670
IF A ZA + ZB K 3 = --------------- -------------------------- + 1 I A Z L Z 1 + ZA DD
(Equation 170)
and: ZADD = ZA + ZB for parallel lines. IA, IFA and UA are given in the above table. KN is calculated automatically according to equation 166. ZA, ZB, ZL, Z0L and Z0M are setting parameters.
For a single line, Z0M = 0 and ZADD = 0. Thus, equation 167 applies to both single and parallel lines. Equation 167 can be divided into real and imaginary parts:
p p Re ( K 1 ) + Re ( K 2 ) R F Re ( K 3 ) = 0
2
(Equation 171)
p Im ( K1 ) + Im ( K 2 ) R F Im ( K3 ) = 0
(Equation 172)
If the imaginary part of K3 is not zero, RF can be solved according to equation 172, and then inserted to equation 171. According to equation 171, the relative distance to the fault is solved as the root of a quadratic equation. Equation 171 gives two different values for the relative distance to the fault as a solution. A simplified load compensated algorithm, that gives an unequivocal figure for the relative distance to the fault, is used to establish the value that should be selected. If the load compensated algorithms according to the above do not give a reliable solution, a less accurate, non-compensated impedance model is used to calculate the relative distance to the fault.
14.4.2.3
The non-compensated impedance model

In the non-compensated impedance model, IA line current is used instead of IFA fault current:
U A = p Z 1 L IA + R F IA
(Equation 173)
Where: IA is according to table 452.
RED 670
743
The accuracy of the distance-to-fault calculation, using the non-compensated impedance model, is influenced by the pre-fault load current. So, this method is only used if the load compensated models do not function.
14.4.2.4
IEC 60870-5-103
The communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 may be used to poll fault location information from the IED to a master (i.e. station HSI). There are two outputs that must be connected to appropriate inputs on the function block I103StatFltDis, FLTDISTX gives distance to fault (reactance, according the standard) and CALCMADE gives a pulse (100 ms) when a result is obtainable on FLTDISTX output.
14.4.3
Function block
FLO1LMBRFLO PHSELL1 PHSELL2 PHSELL3 CALCDIST FLTDISTX CALCMADE BCD_80 BCD_40 BCD_20 BCD_10 BCD_8 BCD_4 BCD_2 BCD_1 en05000679.vsd
Figure 376:
FLO function block
14.4.4

Table 453:
Signal PHSELL1 PHSELL2 PHSELL3 CALCDIST
Input signals for the LMBRFLO (FLO1-) function block

Description Phase selecton L1 Phase selecton L2 Phase selecton L3 Do calculate fault distance (release)
Table 454:
Signal FLTDISTX CALCMADE BCD_80 BCD_40
Output signals for the LMBRFLO (FLO1-) function block

Description Reactive distance to fault Fault calculation made Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 80% Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 40%
744
RED 670
Signal BCD_20 BCD_10 BCD_8 BCD_4 BCD_2 BCD_1 Description Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 20% Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 10% Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 8% Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 4% Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 2% Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 1%
14.4.5
Setting parameters
Table 455:
Parameter DrepChNoIL1
Basic general settings for the LMBRFLO (FLO1-) function

Range 1 - 30 Step 1 Default 1 Unit Ch Description Recorder input number recording phase current, IL1 Recorder input number recording phase current, IL2 Recorder input number recording phase current, IL3 Recorder input number recording residual current, IN Recorder input number recording 3I0 on parallel line Recorder input number recording phase voltage, UL1 Recorder input number recording phase voltage, UL2 Recorder input number recording phase voltage, UL3
DrepChNoIL2
1 - 30
Ch
DrepChNoIL3
1 - 30
Ch
DrepChNoIN
0 - 30
Ch
DrepChNoIP
0 - 30
Ch
DrepChNoUL1
1 - 30
Ch
DrepChNoUL2
1 - 30
Ch
DrepChNoUL3
1 - 30
Ch
Table 456:
Parameter R1A X1A R1B X1B
Basic parameter group settings for the LMBRFLO (FLO1-) function

Range 0.001 - 1500.000 0.001 - 1500.000 0.001 - 1500.000 0.001 - 1500.000 Step 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 Default 2.000 12.000 2.000 12.000 Unit ohm/p ohm/p ohm/p ohm/p Description Source resistance A (near end) Source reactance A (near end) Source resistance B (far end) Source reactance B (far end)
RED 670
745
Parameter R1L X1L R0L X0L R0M X0M LineLength Range 0.001 - 1500.000 0.001 - 1500.000 0.001 - 1500.000 0.001 - 1500.000 0.000 - 1500.000 0.000 - 1500.000 0.0 - 10000.0 Step 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.1 Default 2.000 12.500 8.750 50.000 0.000 0.000 40.0 Unit ohm/p ohm/p ohm/p ohm/p ohm/p ohm/p Description Positive sequence line resistance Positive sequence line reactance Zero sequence line resistance Zero sequence line reactance Zero sequence mutual resistance Zero sequence mutual reactance Length of line
14.4.6
Technical data
Table 457:
Function Reactive and resistive reach
Fault locator (RFLO)

Value or range (0.001-1500.000) /phase Accuracy 2.0% static accuracy 2.0% degrees static angular accuracy Conditions: Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir -
Phase selection Maximum number of fault locations
According to input signals 100
14.5
Measured value expander block

Function block name: XP ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: RANGE_XP IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
14.5.1
Introduction
The functions MMXU (SVR, CP and VP), MSQI (CSQ and VSQ) and MVGGIO (MV) are provided with measurement supervision functionality. All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits, i.e. low-low limit, low limit, high limit and high-high limit. The measure value expander block (XP) has been introduced to be able to translate the integer output signal from the measuring functions to 5 binary
746
RED 670
signals i.e. below low-low limit, below low limit, normal, above high-high limit or above high limit. The output signals can be used as conditions in the configurable logic.
14.5.2
The input signal must be connected to the RANGE-output of a measuring function block (MMXU, MSQI or MVGGIO). The function block converts the input integer value to five binary output signals according to table 458.
Table 458: Input integer value converted to binary output signals
below low-low between low limit low and low limit High High High High High between low and high limit between high- above highhigh and high high limit limit
Measured supervised value is: Output: LOWLOW LOW NORMAL HIGH HIGHHIGH
14.5.3
Function block
RANGE XP01RANGE_XP HIGHHIGH HIGH NORMAL LO W LOWLOW en05000346.vsd
Figure 377:
XP function block
14.5.4

Table 459:
Signal RANGE
Input signals for the RANGE_XP (XP01-) function block

Description Measured value range
RED 670
747
Table 460:
Signal HIGHHIGH HIGH NORMAL LOW LOWLOW
Output signals for the RANGE_XP (XP01-) function block

Description Measured value is above high-high limit Measured value is between high and high-high limit Measured value is between high and low limit Measured value is between low and low-low limit Measured value is below low-low limit
14.6
Disturbance report (RDRE)

Function block name: DRP--, DRA1- DRA4-, DRB1- DRB6ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: ABRDRE IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
14.6.1
Introduction
Complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in the secondary system together with continuous event-logging is accomplished by the disturbance report functionality. The disturbance report, always included in the IED, acquires sampled data of all selected analog input and binary signals connected to the function block i.e. maximum 40 analog and 96 binary signals. The disturbance report functionality is a common name for several functions: Event List (EL) Indications (IND) Event recorder (ER) Trip Value recorder (TVR) Disturbance recorder (DR) Fault Locator (FL)
The function is characterized by great flexibility regarding configuration, starting conditions, recording times and large storage capacity. A disturbance is defined as an activation of an input in the DRAx or DRBy function blocks which is set to trigger the disturbance recorder. All signals from start of prefault time to the end of post-fault time, will be included in the recording. Every disturbance report recording is saved in the IED in the standard Comtrade format. The same applies to all events, which are continuously saved in a ring-buffer. 748 Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B RED 670
The Local Human Machine Interface (LHMI) is used to get information about the recordings, but the disturbance report files may be uploaded to the PCM 600 (Protection and Control IED Manager) and further analysis using the disturbance handling tool.
14.6.2
The disturbance report (DRP) is a common name for several facilities to supply the operator, analysis engineer, etc. with sufficient information about events in the system. The facilities included in the disturbance report are: General disturbance information Indications (IND) Event recorder (ER) Event list (EL) Trip values (phase values) (TVR) Disturbance recorder (DR) Fault locator (FL)
Figure 378Figure "" shows the relations among Disturbance Report, included functions and function blocks. EL, ER and IND uses information from the binary input function blocks (DRB1- 6). TVR uses analog information from the analog input function blocks (DRA1-3) which is used by FL after estimation by TVR. The DR function acquires information from both DRAx and DRBx.
RED 670
749
DRA1-- 4-
Disturbance Report DRP- FL01 FL Fault Locator
A4RADR Analog signals
RDRE Trip Value Rec
DRB1-- 6-
Disturbance Recorder
Binary signals
B6RBDR Event List Event Recorder Indications
en05000124.vsd
Figure 378:
Disturbance report functions and related function blocks
The whole disturbance report can contain information for a number of recordings, each with the data coming from all the parts mentioned above. The event list function is working continuously, independent of disturbance triggering, recording time etc. All information in the disturbance report is stored in non-volatile flash memories. This implies that no information is lost in case of loss of auxiliary power. Each report will get an identification number in the interval from 0-999.
Disturbance report
Record no. N
Record no. N+1
Record no. N+100
General dist. information
Indications
Trip values
Event recordings
Disturbance recording
Fault locator
Event list
en05000125.vsd
Figure 379:
Disturbance report structure
Up to 100 disturbance reports can be stored. If a new disturbance is to be recorded when the memory is full, the oldest disturbance report is over-written by the new one. The total recording capacity for the disturbance recorder is depending of sampling frequency, number of analog and binary channels and recording time. The figure 380 shows number of recordings vs total recording time tested for a typical configuration, i.e. in a 50 Hz system its possible to record 100 where the average recording time is 3.4 seconds. The memory limit does not affect the rest of the disturbance report (IND, ER, EL and TVR). 750 Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B RED 670
Number of recordings 100 80 60

6,3 s 3,4 s 40 analog 96 binary 3,4 s 20 analog 96 binary
6,3 s 50 Hz
40
6,3 s 60 Hz
Total recording time 250 300 350 400 s

en05000488.vsd
Figure 380:
Number of recordings.
Disturbance information
Date and time of the disturbance, the indications, events, fault location and the trip values are available on the local human-machine interface (LHMI). To acquire a complete disturbance report the use of a PC and PCM600 is required. The PC may be connected to the IED-front, rear or remotely via the station bus (Ethernet ports).
Indications (IND)
Indications is a list of signals that were activated during the total recording time of the disturbance (not time-tagged). (See section "Indications (RDRE)" for more detailed information.) The event recorder may contain a list of up to 150 time-tagged events, which have occurred during the disturbance. The information is available via the LHMI or PCM 600. (See section "Event recorder (RDRE)" for more detailed information.)
Event recorder (ER)
Event list (EL)
The event list may contain a list of totally 1000 time-tagged events. The list information is continuously updated when selected binary signals change state. The oldest data is overwritten. The logged signals may be presented via LHMI or PCM 600. (See section "Event list (RDRE)" for more detailed information.)
RED 670
751
Trip value recorder (TVR)
The recorded trip values include phasors of selected analog signals before the fault and during the fault. (See section "Trip value recorder (RDRE)" for more detailed information.)
Disturbance recorder (DR)
The disturbance recorder records analog and binary signal data before, during and after the fault. (See section "Disturbance recorder (RDRE)" for more detailed information.)
Fault locator (FL)
The fault location function calculates the distance to fault. (See section "Fault locator (RFLO)" for more detailed information) The IED has a built-in real-time calendar and clock. This function is used for all time tagging within the disturbance report
Time tagging
Recording times
The disturbance report (DRP) records information about a disturbance during a settable time frame. The recording times are valid for the whole disturbance report. The disturbance recorder (DR), the event recorder (ER) and indication function register disturbance data and events during tRecording, the total recording time. The total recording time, tRecording, of a recorded disturbance is:
tRecording =
PreFaultrecT + tFault + PostFaultrecT or PreFaultrecT + TimeLimit, depending on which criterion stops the current disturbance recording
Trig point TimeLimit PreFaultRecT PostFaultRecT
3
en05000487.vsd
Figure 381:
PreFaultRecT, 1 tFault, 2
The recording times definition

Pre-fault or pre-trigger recording time. The time before the fault including the operate time of the trigger. Use the setting PreFaultRecT to set this time. Fault time of the recording. The fault time cannot be set. It continues as long as any valid trigger condition, binary or analog, persists (unless limited by TimeLimit the limit time).
PostFaultRecT, 3 Post fault recording time. The time the disturbance recording continues after all activated triggers are reset. Use the setting PostFaultRecT to set this time.
752
RED 670
TimeLimit
Limit time. The maximum allowed recording time after the disturbance recording was triggered. The limit time is used to eliminate the consequences of a trigger that does not reset within a reasonable time interval. It limits the maximum recording time of a recording and prevents subsequent overwriting of already stored disturbances.Use the setting TimeLimit to set this time.
Analog signals
Up to 40 analog signals can be selected for recording by the Disturbance recorder and triggering of the Disturbance report function. Out of these 40, 30 are reserved for external analog signals, i.e. signals from the analog input modules (TRM) and line differential communication module (LDCM) via preprocessing function blocks (SMAI) and summation block (Sum3Ph). The last 10 channels may be connected to internally calculated analog signals available as function block output signals (mA input signals, phase differential currents, bias currents etc.).
PRxxSMAI External analog signals TRM, LDCM SUxx GRPNAME AI1NAME AI2NAME AI3NAME AI4NAME AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AIN DRA1A1RADR INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 ... A4RADR INPUT31 INPUT32 INPUT33 INPUT34 INPUT35 INPUT36 ... INPUT40
en05000653.vsd
DRA2A2RADR DRA3A3RADR
Internal analog signals T2Dx, T3Dx, REFx, HZDx, L3D, L6D, LT3D, LT6D SVRx, CPxx, VP0x, CSQx, VSQx, MVxx
Figure 382:
Analog input function blocks
The external input signals will be acquired, filtered and skewed and (after configuration) available as an input signal on the DRAx- function block via the PRxx function block. The information is saved at the Disturbance report base sampling rate (1000 or 1200 Hz). Internally calculated signals are updated according to the cycle time of the specific function. If a function is running at lower speed than the base sampling rate, the Disturbance recorder will use the latest updated sample until a new updated sample is available. RED 670 Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B 753
If the IED is preconfigured the only tool needed for analog configuration of the Disturbance report is the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT, external signal configuration). In case of modification of a preconfigured IED or general internal configuration the Application Configuration tool within PCM600 is used. The preprocessor function block (PRxx) calculates the residual quantities in cases where only the three phases are connected (AI4-input not used). PRxx makes the information available as a group signal output, phase outputs and calculated residual output (AIN-output). In situations where AI4-input is used as a input signal the corresponding information is available on the non-calculated output (AI4) on the PRxx-block. Connect the signals to the DRAx accordingly. For each of the analog signals, Operation = On means that it is recorded by the disturbance recorder. The trigger is independent of the setting of Operation, and triggers even if operation is set to Off. Both undervoltage and overvoltage can be used as trigger conditions. The same applies for the current signals. The analog signals are presented only in the disturbance recording, but they affect the entire disturbance report when being used as triggers.
Binary signals
Up to 96 binary signals can be selected to be handled by the disturbance report.The signals can be selected from internal logical and binary input signals. A binary signal is selected to be recorded when: the corresponding function block is included in the configuration the signal is connected to the input of the function block
Each of the 96 signals can be selected as a trigger of the disturbance report (operationON/OFF). A binary signal can be selected to activate the red LED on the local HMI (setLED=On/Off). The selected signals are presented in the event recorder, event list and the disturbance recording. But they affect the whole disturbance report when they are used as triggers. The indications are also selected from these 96 signals with the LHMI IndicationMask=Show/Hide.
Trigger signals
The trigger conditions affect the entire disturbance report, except the event list, which runs continuously. As soon as at least one trigger condition is fulfilled, a complete disturbance report is recorded. On the other hand, if no trigger condition is fulfilled, there is no disturbance report, no indications, and so on. This implies the importance of choosing the right signals as trigger conditions. A trigger can be of type: Manual trigger Binary-signal trigger Analog-signal trigger (over/under function)
754
RED 670
Manual trigger
A disturbance report can be manually triggered from the local HMI, from PCM600 or via station bus (IEC61850). When the trigger is activated, the manual trigger signal is generated. This feature is especially useful for testing. Refer to Operators manual for procedure.
Binary-signal trigger
Any binary signal state (logic one or a logic zero) can be selected to generate a trigger (Triglevel = Trig on 0/Trig on 1). When a binary signal is selected to generate a trigger from a logic zero, the selected signal will not be listed in the indications list of the disturbance report.
Analog-signal trigger
All analog signals are available for trigger purposes, no matter if they are recorded in the disturbance recorder or not. The settings are OverTrigOp, UnderTrigOp, OverTrigLe and UnderTrigLe. The check of the trigger condition is based on peak-to-peak values. When this is found, the absolute average value of these two peak values is calculated. If the average value is above the threshold level for an overvoltage or overcurrent trigger, this trigger is indicated with a greater than (>) sign with the user-defined name. If the average value is below the set threshold level for an undervoltage or undercurrent trigger, this trigger is indicated with a less than (<) sign with its name. The procedure is separately performed for each channel. This method of checking the analog start conditions gives a function which is insensitive to DC offset in the signal. The operate time for this start is typically in the range of one cycle, 20 ms for a 50 Hz network. All under/over trig signal information is available on the LHMI and PCM600, see table 461. The disturbance report function does not respond to any new trig condition, during a recording. Under certain circumstances the fault condition may reoccur during the post-fault recording, for instance by automatic reclosing to a still faulty power line. In order to capture the new disturbance it is possible to allow retriggering (PostRetrig = On)during the post-fault time. In this case a new, complete recording will start and, during a period, run in parallel with the initial recording. When the retrig parameter is disabled (PostRetrig = Off), a new recording will not start until the post-fault (PostFaultrecT or TimeLimit) period is terminated. If a new trig occurs during the post-fault period and lasts longer than the proceeding recording a new complete recording will be fetched. The disturbance report function can handle maximum 3 simultaneous disturbance recordings.
Post Retrigger
RED 670
755

DRP-RDRE DRPOFF RECSTART RECMADE CLEARED MEMUSED en05000406.vsd
Figure 383:
DRP function block
DRA1A1RADR INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 NAME1 NAME2 NAME3 NAME4 NAME5 NAME6 NAME7 NAME8 NAME9 NAME10 en05000430.vsd
Figure 384:
DRA1 function block, analog inputs, example for DRA1DRA3
DRA4A4RADR INPUT31 INPUT32 INPUT33 INPUT34 INPUT35 INPUT36 INPUT37 INPUT38 INPUT39 INPUT40 NAME31 NAME32 NAME33 NAME34 NAME35 NAME36 NAME37 NAME38 NAME39 NAME40 en05000431.vsd
Figure 385:
DRA4 function block, derived analog inputs
756
RED 670
DRB1B1RBDR INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4 INPUT 5 INPUT 6 INPUT 7 INPUT 8 INPUT 9 INPUT 10 INPUT 11 INPUT 12 INPUT 13 INPUT 14 INPUT 15 INPUT 16 NAME1 NAME2 NAME3 NAME4 NAME5 NAME6 NAME7 NAME8 NAME9 NAME10 NAME11 NAME12 NAME13 NAME14 NAME15 NAME16 en05000432.vsd
Figure 386:
DRB1 function block, binary inputs, example for DRB1DRB6
14.6.4

Table 461:
Signal DRPOFF RECSTART RECMADE CLEARED MEMUSED
Output signals for the RDRE (DRP--) function block

Description Disturbance report function turned off Disturbance recording started Disturbance recording made All disturbances in the disturbance report cleared More than 80% of memory used
Table 462:
Signal INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5
Input signals for the A1RADR (DRA1-) function block

Description Group signal for input 1 Group signal for input 2 Group signal for input 3 Group signal for input 4 Group signal for input 5
RED 670
757
Signal INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 Description Group signal for input 6 Group signal for input 7 Group signal for input 8 Group signal for input 9 Group signal for input 10
Table 463:
Signal INPUT31 INPUT32 INPUT33 INPUT34 INPUT35 INPUT36 INPUT37 INPUT38 INPUT39 INPUT40
Input signals for the A4RADR (DRA4-) function block

Description Analogue channel 31 Analogue channel 32 Analogue channel 33 Analogue channel 34 Analogue channel 35 Analogue channel 36 Analogue channel 37 Analogue channel 38 Analogue channel 39 Analogue channel 40
Table 464:
Signal INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16
Input signals for the B1RBDR (DRB1-) function block

Description Binary channel 1 Binary channel 2 Binary channel 3 Binary channel 4 Binary channel 5 Binary channel 6 Binary channel 7 Binary channel 8 Binary channel 9 Binary channel 10 Binary channel 11 Binary channel 12 Binary channel 13 Binary channel 14 Binary channel 15 Binary channel 16
758
RED 670
Section 14 Monitoring 14.6.5 Setting parameters

Table 465:
Parameter Operation PreFaultRecT PostFaultRecT TimeLimit PostRetrig
Basic general settings for the RDRE (DRP--) function

Range Off On 0.05 - 1.00 0.1 - 10.0 0.5 - 10.0 Off On 1 - 30 Step 0.01 0.1 0.1 Default Off 0.10 0.5 1.0 Off Unit s s s Description Operation Off/On Pre-fault recording time Post-fault recording time Fault recording time limit Post-fault retrig enabled (On) or not (Off) Trip value recorder, phasor reference channel Operation mode during test mode
ZeroAngleRef
Ch
OpModeTest
Off On
Off
Table 466:
Parameter Operation01 NomValue01 UnderTrigOp01
Basic general settings for the A1RADR (DRA1-) function

Range Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200 Step 0.1 Default Off 0.0 Off Unit Description Operation On/Off Nominal value for analogue channel 1 Use under level trig for analogue cha 1 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 1 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 1 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 1 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analogue channel 2 Use under level trig for analogue cha 2 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe01
50
OverTrigOp01
Off On 0 - 5000
Off
OverTrigLe01
200
Operation02 NomValue02 UnderTrigOp02
Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On
0.1 -
Off 0.0 Off
RED 670
759
Parameter UnderTrigLe02 Range 0 - 200 Step 1 Default 50 Unit % Description Under trigger level for analogue cha 2 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 2 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 2 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analogue channel 3 Use under level trig for analogue cha 3 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 3 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 3 (on) or not (off) Overtrigger level for analogue cha 3 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analogue channel 4 Use under level trig for analogue cha 4 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 4 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 4 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 4 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analogue channel 5 Use under level trig for analogue cha 5 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 5 in % of signal
OverTrigOp02
Off On 0 - 5000
Off
OverTrigLe02
200
Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200
0.1 -
Off 0.0 Off
UnderTrigLe03
50
OverTrigOp03
Off On 0 - 5000
Off
OverTrigLe03
200
Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200
0.1 -
Off 0.0 Off
UnderTrigLe04
50
OverTrigOp04
Off On 0 - 5000
Off
OverTrigLe04
200
Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200
0.1 -
Off 0.0 Off
UnderTrigLe05
50
760
RED 670
Parameter OverTrigOp05 Range Off On 0 - 5000 Step Default Off Unit Description Use over level trig for analogue cha 5 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 5 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analogue channel 6 Use under level trig for analogue cha 6 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 6 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 6 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 6 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analogue channel 7 Use under level trig for analogue cha 7 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 7 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 7 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 7 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analogue channel 8 Use under level trig for analogue cha 8 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 8 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 8 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe05
200
Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200
0.1 -
Off 0.0 Off
UnderTrigLe06
50
OverTrigOp06
Off On 0 - 5000
Off
OverTrigLe06
200
Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200
0.1 -
Off 0.0 Off
UnderTrigLe07
50
OverTrigOp07
Off On 0 - 5000
Off
OverTrigLe07
200
Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200
0.1 -
Off 0.0 Off
UnderTrigLe08
50
OverTrigOp08
Off On
Off
RED 670
761
Parameter OverTrigLe08 Range 0 - 5000 Step 1 Default 200 Unit % Description Over trigger level for analogue cha 8 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analogue channel 9 Use under level trig for analogue cha 9 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 9 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 9 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 9 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analogue channel 10 Use under level trig for analogue cha 10 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 10 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 10 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 10 in % of signal
Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200
0.1 -
Off 0.0 Off
UnderTrigLe09
50
OverTrigOp09
Off On 0 - 5000
Off
OverTrigLe09
200
Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200
0.1 -
Off 0.0 Off
UnderTrigLe10
50
OverTrigOp10
Off On 0 - 5000
Off
OverTrigLe10
200
Table 467:
Parameter Operation31 NomValue31 UnderTrigOp31
Basic general settings for the A4RADR (DRA4-) function

Range Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200 Step 0.1 Default Off 0.0 Off Unit Description Operation On/off Nominal value for analogue channel 31 Use under level trig for analogue cha 31 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 31 in % of signal
UnderTrigLe31
50
762
RED 670
Parameter OverTrigOp31 Range Off On 0 - 5000 Step Default Off Unit Description Use over level trig for analogue cha 31 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 31 in % of signal Operation On/off Nominal value for analogue channel 32 Use under level trig for analogue cha 32 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 32 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 32 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 32 in % of signal Operation On/off Nominal value for analogue channel 33 Use under level trig for analogue cha 33 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 33 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 33 (on) or not (off) Overtrigger level for analogue cha 33 in % of signal Operation On/off Nominal value for analogue channel 34 Use under level trig for analogue cha 34 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 34 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 34 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe31
200
Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200
0.1 -
Off 0.0 Off
UnderTrigLe32
50
OverTrigOp32
Off On 0 - 5000
Off
OverTrigLe32
200
Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200
0.1 -
Off 0.0 Off
UnderTrigLe33
50
OverTrigOp33
Off On 0 - 5000
Off
OverTrigLe33
200
Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200
0.1 -
Off 0.0 Off
UnderTrigLe34
50
OverTrigOp34
Off On
Off
RED 670
763
Parameter OverTrigLe34 Range 0 - 5000 Step 1 Default 200 Unit % Description Over trigger level for analogue cha 34 in % of signal Operation On/off Nominal value for analogue channel 35 Use under level trig for analogue cha 35 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 35 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 35 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 35 in % of signal Operation On/off Nominal value for analogue channel 36 Use under level trig for analogue cha 36 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 36 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 36 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 36 in % of signal Operation On/off Nominal value for analogue channel 37 Use under level trig for analogue cha 37 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 37 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 37 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 37 in % of signal
Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200
0.1 -
Off 0.0 Off
UnderTrigLe35
50
OverTrigOp35
Off On 0 - 5000
Off
OverTrigLe35
200
Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200
0.1 -
Off 0.0 Off
UnderTrigLe36
50
OverTrigOp36
Off On 0 - 5000
Off
OverTrigLe36
200
Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200
0.1 -
Off 0.0 Off
UnderTrigLe37
50
OverTrigOp37
Off On 0 - 5000
Off
OverTrigLe37
200
764
RED 670
Parameter Operation38 NomValue38 UnderTrigOp38 Range Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200 Step 0.1 Default Off 0.0 Off Unit Description Operation On/off Nominal value for analogue channel 38 Use under level trig for analogue cha 38 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 38 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 38 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 38 in % of signal Operation On/off Nominal value for analogue channel 39 Use under level trig for analogue cha 39 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 39 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 39 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 39 in % of signal Operation On/off Nominal value for analogue channel 40 Use under level trig for analogue cha 40 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 40 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 40 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 40 in % of signal
UnderTrigLe38
50
OverTrigOp38
Off On 0 - 5000
Off
OverTrigLe38
200
Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200
0.1 -
Off 0.0 Off
UnderTrigLe39
50
OverTrigOp39
Off On 0 - 5000
Off
OverTrigLe39
200
Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200
0.1 -
Off 0.0 Off
UnderTrigLe40
50
OverTrigOp40
Off On 0 - 5000
Off
OverTrigLe40
200
RED 670
765
Table 468:
Parameter Operation01 TrigLevel01
Basic general settings for the B1RBDR (DRB1-) function

Range Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On Off On Step Default Off Trig on 1 Unit Description Trigger operation On/ Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 1 Indication mask for binary channel 1 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 1 Trigger operation On/ Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 2 Indication mask for binary channel 2 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 2 Trigger operation On/ Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 3 Indication mask for binary channel 3 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 3 Trigger operation On/ Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 4 Indication mask for binary channel 4 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 4 Trigger operation On/ Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 5 Indication mask for binary channel 5 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 5 Trigger operation On/ Off
IndicationMa01 SetLED01 Operation02 TrigLevel02
Hide Off Off Trig on 1
IndicationMa05 SetLED05 Operation06
Hide Off Off
766
RED 670
Parameter TrigLevel06 Range Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Step Default Trig on 1 Unit Description Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 6 Indication mask for binary channel 6 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 6 Trigger operation On/ Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 7 Indication mask for binary channel 7 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 7 Trigger operation On/ Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 8 Indication mask for binary channel 8 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 8 Trigger operation On/ Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 9 Indication mask for binary channel 9 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 9 Trigger operation On/ Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 10 Indication mask for binary channel 10 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 10 Trigger operation On/ Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 11 Indication mask for binary channel 11
IndicationMa11
Hide
RED 670
767
Parameter SetLED11 Operation12 TrigLevel12 Range Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On 0 - 255 Step Default Off Off Trig on 1 Unit Description Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 11 Trigger operation On/ Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 12 Indication mask for binary channel 12 Set red-LED on HMI for binary input 12 Trigger operation On/ Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 13 Indication mask for binary channel 13 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 13 Trigger operation On/ Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 14 Indication mask for binary channel 14 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 14 Trigger operation On/ Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 15 Indication mask for binary channel 15 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 15 Trigger operation On/ Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 16 Indication mask for binary channel 16 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 16 Function type for binary channel 1 (IEC -60870-5-103)
IndicationMa16 SetLED16 FUNT1
Hide Off 0
FunT
768
RED 670
Parameter FUNT2 Range 0 - 255 Step 1 Default 0 Unit FunT Description Function type for binary channel 2 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 3 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 4 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 5 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 6 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 7 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 8 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 9 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 10 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 11 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 12 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 13 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 14 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 15 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 16 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 1 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 2 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FUNT3
0 - 255
FunT
FUNT4
0 - 255
FunT
FUNT5
0 - 255
FunT
FUNT6
0 - 255
FunT
FUNT7
0 - 255
FunT
FUNT8
0 - 255
FunT
FUNT9
0 - 255
FunT
FUNT10
0 - 255
FunT
FUNT11
0 - 255
FunT
FUNT12
0 - 255
FunT
FUNT13
0 - 255
FunT
FUNT14
0 - 255
FunT
FUNT15
0 - 255
FunT
FUNT16
0 - 255
FunT
INFNO1
0 - 255
INFN O INFN O
INFNO2
0 - 255
RED 670
769
Parameter INFNO3 Range 0 - 255 Step 1 Default 0 Unit INFN O INFN O INFN O INFN O INFN O INFN O INFN O INFN O INFN O INFN O INFN O INFN O INFN O INFN O Description Information number for binary channel 3 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 4 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 5 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 6 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 7 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 8 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 9 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 10 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 11 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 12 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 13 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 14 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 15 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 16 (IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO4
0 - 255
INFNO5
0 - 255
INFNO6
0 - 255
INFNO7
0 - 255
INFNO8
0 - 255
INFNO9
0 - 255
INFNO10
0 - 255
INFNO11
0 - 255
INFNO12
0 - 255
INFNO13
0 - 255
INFNO14
0 - 255
INFNO15
0 - 255
INFNO16
0 - 255
14.6.6
Technical data
770
RED 670
Table 469:
Function Pre-fault time Post-fault time Limit time
Disturbance report (RDRE)

Range or value (0.050.30) s (0.15.0) s (0.56.0) s 100 1 ms 30 + 10 (external + internally derived) 96 30 Accuracy See table26 -
Maximum number of recordings Time tagging resolution Maximum number of analog inputs Maximum number of binary inputs Maximum number of phasors in the Trip Value recorder per recording Maximum number of indications in a disturbance report Maximum number of events in the Event recording per recording Maximum number of events in the Event list Maximum total recording time (3.4 s recording time and maximum number of channels, typical value) Sampling rate Recording bandwidth
96 150 1000, first in - first out 340 seconds (100 recordings) at 50 Hz, 280 seconds (80 recordings) at 60 Hz 1 kHz at 50 Hz 1.2 kHz at 60 Hz (5-300) Hz
14.7
14.7.1
Event list (RDRE)

Introduction
Continuous event-logging is useful for monitoring of the system from an overview perspective and is a complement to specific disturbance recorder functions. The event list logs all binary input signals connected to the Disturbance report function. The list may contain of up to 1000 time-tagged events stored in a ring-buffer. The event list information is available in the IED and is reported to higher control systems via the station bus together with other logged events in the IED. In absence of any software tool the information seeker may use the local HMI to view the event list.
14.7.2
When a binary signal, connected to the disturbance report function, changes status, the event list function stores input name, status and time in the event list in
RED 670
771
chronological order. The list can contain up to 1000 events from both internal logic signals and binary input channels. If the list is full, the oldest event is overwritten when a new event arrives. The list can be configured to show oldest or newest events first with a setting on the LHMI. The event list function runs continuously, in contrast to the event recorder function, which is only active during a disturbance. The name of the binary input signal that appears in the event recording is the userdefined name assigned when the IED is configured. The same name is used in the disturbance recorder function (DR), indications (IND) and the event recorder function (ER). The event list is stored and managed separate from the disturbance report information (ER, DR, IND, TVR and FL).
14.7.3
Function block
The object has no function block of its own. It is included in the DRP- block and uses information from the DRBx- block.
14.7.4
Input signals
The event list logs the same binary input signals as configured for the Disturbance Report function.
14.7.5
Technical data
Table 470:
Function Buffer capacity Resolution Accuracy Maximum number of events in the list
Event list (RDRE)

Value 1000 1 ms Depending on time synchronizing
14.8
14.8.1
Indications (RDRE)
Introduction
To get fast, condensed and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in the secondary system it is important to know e.g. binary signals that have
772
RED 670
changed status during a disturbance. This information is used in the short perspective to get information via the LHMI in a straightforward way. There are three LEDs on the LHMI (green, yellow and red), which will display status information about the IED and the Disturbance Report function (trigged). The Indication list function shows all selected binary input signals connected to the Disturbance Report function that have changed status during a disturbance. The indication information is available for each of the recorded disturbances in the IED and the user may use the Local Human Machine Interface (LHMI) to get the information.
14.8.2
The LED indications display this information: Green LED:
Steady light Flashing light Dark In Service Internal fail No power supply
Yellow LED:
Steady light Flashing light A disturbance report is triggered The IED is in test mode or in configuration mode
Red LED:
Steady light Trigged on binary signal N with SetLEDN=On
Indication list: The possible indicated signals are the same as the ones chosen for the disturbance report function and disturbance recorder The indication function tracks 0 to 1 changes of binary signals during the recording period of the collection window. This means that constant logic zero, constant logic one or state changes from logic one to logic zero will not be visible in the list of indications. Signals are not time tagged. In order to be recorded in the list of indications the:
RED 670
773
the signal must be connected to binary input (DRB1-6) function block the DRP parameter Operation must be set On the DRP must be trigged (binary or analog) the input signal must change state from logical 0 to 1 during the recording time.
Indications are selected with the indication mask (IndicationMask) when configuring the binary inputs. The name of the binary input signal that appears in the Indication function is the userdefined name assigned at configuration of the IED. The same name is used in disturbance recorder function (DR), indications (IND) and event recorder function (ER).
14.8.3
Function block
14.8.4
Input signals
The indication function may log the same binary input signals as the Disturbance Report function.
14.8.5
Technical data
Table 471:
Function Buffer capacity Maximum number of indications presented for single disturbance Maximum number of recorded disturbances
Indications
Value 96 100
14.9
14.9.1
Event recorder (RDRE)

Introduction
Quick, complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in the secondary system is vital e.g. time tagged events logged during disturbances. This information is used for different purposes in the short term (e.g. corrective actions) and in the long term (e.g. Functional Analysis). The event recorder logs all selected binary input signals connected to the Disturbance Report function. Each recording can contain up to 150 time-tagged events.
774
RED 670
The event recorder information is available for the disturbances locally in the IED. The information may be uploaded to the PCM 600 (Protection and Control IED Manager) and further analyzed using the Disturbance Handling tool. The event recording information is an integrated part of the disturbance record (Comtrade file).
14.9.2
When one of the trig conditions for the disturbance report is activated, the event recorder logs every status change in the 96 selected binary signals. The events can be generated by both internal logical signals and binary input channels. The internal signals are time-tagged in the main processor module, while the binary input channels are time-tagged directly in each I/O module. The events are collected during the total recording time (pre-, post-fault and limit time), and are stored in the disturbance report flash memory at the end of each recording. In case of overlapping recordings, due to PostRetrig = On and a new trig signal appears during post-fault time, events will be saved in both recording files. The name of the binary input signal that appears in the event recording is the userdefined name assigned when configuring the IED. The same name is used in the disturbance recorder function (DR), indications (IND) and event recorder function (ER). The event record is stored as a part of the disturbance report information (ER, DR, IND, TVR and FL) and managed via the LHMI or PCM 600.
14.9.3
Function block
14.9.4
Input signals
The event recorder function logs the same binary input signals as the Disturbance Report function.
14.9.5
Technical data
RED 670
775
Table 472:
Function Buffer capacity
Event recorder (RDRE)

Value Maximum number of events in disturbance report Maximum number of disturbance reports 150 100 1 ms Depending on time synchronizing
Resolution Accuracy
14.10
14.10.1
Trip value recorder (RDRE)

Introduction
Information about the pre-fault and fault values for currents and voltages are vital for the disturbance evaluation. The Trip value recorder calculates the values of all selected analog input signals connected to the Disturbance report function. The result is magnitude and phase angle before and during the fault for each analog input signal. The trip value recorder information is available for the disturbances locally in the IED. The information may be uploaded to the PCM 600 (Protection and Control IED Manager) and further analyzed using the Disturbance Handling tool. The trip value recorder information is an integrated part of the disturbance record (Comtrade file).
14.10.2
The trip value recorder (TVR) calculates and presents both fault and pre-fault amplitudes as well as the phase angles of all the selected analog input signals. The parameter ZeroAngleRef points out which input signal is used as the angle reference. The calculated data is input information to the fault locator (FL). When the disturbance report function is triggered the sample for the fault interception is searched for, by checking the non-periodic changes in the analog input signals. The channel search order is consecutive, starting with the analog input with the lowest number. When a starting point is found, the Fourier estimation of the pre-fault values of the complex values of the analog signals starts 1.5 cycle before the fault sample. The estimation uses samples during one period. The post-fault values are calculated using the Recursive Least Squares (RLS) method. The calculation starts a few samples after
776
RED 670
the fault sample and uses samples during 1/2 - 2 cycles depending on the shape of the signals. If no starting point is found in the recording, the disturbance report trig sample is used as the start sample for the Fourier estimation. The estimation uses samples during one cycle before the trig sample. In this case the calculated values are used both as prefault and fault values. The name of the analog input signal that appears in the Trip value recorder function is the user-defined name assigned when the IED is configured. The same name is used in the Disturbance recorder function (DR). The trip value record is stored as a part of the disturbance report information (ER, DR, IND, TVR and FLOC) and managed in via the LHMI or PCM 600.
14.10.3
Function block
14.10.4
Input signals
The trip value recorder function uses analog input signals connected to DRA1-3 (not DRA4).
14.10.5
Technical data
Table 473:
Function Buffer capacity Maximum number of analog inputs Maximum number of disturbance reports
Trip value recorder (RDRE)

Value 30 100
14.11
14.11.1
Disturbance recorder (RDRE)

Introduction
The Disturbance Recorder function supplies fast, complete and reliable information about disturbances in the power system. It facilitates understanding system behavior and related primary and secondary equipment during and after a disturbance. Recorded information is used for different purposes in the short perspective (e.g. corrective actions) and long perspective (e.g. Functional Analysis). The Disturbance Recorder acquires sampled data from all selected analog input and binary signals connected to the Disturbance Report function (maximum 40 analog
RED 670
777
and 96 binary signals). The binary signals are the same signals as available under the event recorder function. The function is characterized by great flexibility and is not dependent on the operation of protection functions. It can record disturbances not detected by protection functions. The disturbance recorder information for the last 100 disturbances are saved in the IED and the Local Human Machine Interface (LHMI) is used to view the list of recordings. The disturbance recording information can be uploaded to the PCM 600 (Protection and Control IED Manager) and further analyzed using the Disturbance Handling tool.
14.11.2
Disturbance recording (DR) is based on the acquisition of binary and analog signals. The binary signals can be either true binary input signals or internal logical signals generated by the functions in the IED. The analog signals to be recorded are input channels from the Transformer Input Module (TRM), Line Differential communication Module (LDCM) through the Signal Matrix Analog Input (SMAI) and possible summation (Sum3Ph) function blocks and some internally derived analog signals. For details, refer to section "Disturbance report (RDRE)". DR collects analog values and binary signals continuously, in a cyclic buffer. The pre-fault buffer operates according to the FIFO principle; old data will continuously be overwritten as new data arrives when the buffer is full. The size of this buffer is determined by the set pre-fault recording time. Upon detection of a fault condition (triggering), the disturbance is time tagged and the data storage continues in a post-fault buffer. The storage process continues as long as the fault condition prevails - plus a certain additional time. This is called the postfault time and it can be set in the disturbance report. The above mentioned two parts form a disturbance recording. The whole memory, intended for disturbance recordings, acts as a cyclic buffer and when it is full, the oldest recording is overwritten. The last 100 recordings are stored in the IED. The time tagging refers to the activation of the trigger that starts the disturbance recording. A recording can be trigged by, manual start, binary input and/or from analog inputs (over-/underlevel trig). A user-defined name for each of the signals can be set. These names are common for all functions within the disturbance report functionality.
14.11.2.1
Memory and storage

When a recording is completed, a post recording processing occurs. This post-recording processing comprises:
778
RED 670
Saving the data for analog channels with corresponding data for binary signals Add relevant data to be used by the Disturbance Handling tool (part of PCM 600) Compression of the data, which is performed without losing any data accuracy Storing the compressed data in a non-volatile memory (flash memory)
The recorded disturbance is now ready for retrieval and evaluation. The recording files comply with the Comtrade standard IEC 60255-24 and are divided into three files; a header file (HDR), a configuration file (CFG) and a data file (DAT). The header file (optional in the standard) contains basic information about the disturbance i.e. information from the Disturbance Report functions (ER, TVR and FL). The Disturbance Handling tool use this information and present the recording in a user-friendly way. General: Station name, object name and unit name Date and time for the trig of the disturbance Record number Sampling rate Time synchronization source Recording times Activated trig signal Active setting group
Analog: Signal names for selected analog channels Information e.g. trig on analog inputs Primary and secondary instrument transformer rating Over- or Undertrig: level and operation Over- or Undertrig status at time of trig CT direction
Binary: Signal names Status of binary input signals
The configuration file is a mandatory file containing information needed to interpret the data file. For example sampling rate, number of channels, system frequency, channel info etc. The data file, which also is mandatory, containing values for each input channel for each sample in the record (scaled value). The data file also contains a sequence number and time stamp for each set of samples.
RED 670
779
14.11.2.2 IEC 60870-5-103
The communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 may be used to poll disturbance recordings from the IED to a master (i.e. station HSI). The standard describes how to handle 8 disturbance recordings, 8 analog channels (4 currents and 4 voltages) using the public range and binary signals. The last 8 recordings, out of maximum 100, are available for transfer to the master. When the last one is transferred and acknowledged new recordings in the IED will appear, in the master points of view (even if they already where stored in the IED). To be able to report 40 analog channels from the IED using IEC 60870-5-103 the first 8 channels are placed in the public range and the next 32 are placed in the private range. To comply the standard the first 8 must be configured according to table 474.
Table 474:
Signal IL1 IL2 IL3 IN UL1 UL2 UL3 UN
Configuration of analog channels

Disturbance recorder DRA1 DRA1 DRA1 DRA1 DRA1 DRA1 DRA1 DRA1 INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8
The binary signals connected to DRB1-DRB6 are reported by polling. The function blocks include function type and information number.
14.11.3
Function block
The object has no function block of its own. It is included in the DRP-, DRAx and DRBx- block.
14.11.4

For signals see section, in Disturbance report, "Input and output signals".
14.11.5
Setting parameters
For Setting parameters see table 465 - table 468.
14.11.6
780
Technical data
Table 475:
Function Buffer capacity
Disturbance recorder (RDRE)

Value Maximum number of analog inputs Maximum number of binary inputs Maximum number of disturbance reports 40 96 100 340 seconds (100 recordings) at 50 Hz 280 seconds (80 recordings) at 60 Hz
Maximum total recording time (3.4 s recording time and maximum number of channels, typical value)
RED 670
781
782
Section 15 Metering
Section 15 Metering
About this chapter
This chapter describes among others, Pulse counter logic which is a function used to meter externally generated binary pulses. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals, and technical data are included for each function.
15.1
Pulse counter logic (GGIO)

Function block name: PCx-ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: PCGGIO IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
15.1.1
Introduction
The pulse counter logic function counts externally generated binary pulses, for instance pulses coming from an external energy meter, for calculation of energy consumption values. The pulses are captured by the binary input module and then read by the pulse counter function. A scaled service value is available over the station bus. The special Binary input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities must be ordered to achieve this functionality.
15.1.2
The registration of pulses is done for positive transitions (0->1) on one of the 16 binary input channels located on the Binary Input Module (BIM). Pulse counter values are sent to the station HMI with predefined cyclicity without reset. The integration time period can be set in the range from 30 seconds to 60 minutes and is synchronized with absolute system time. Interrogation of additional pulse counter values can be done with a command (intermediate reading) for a single counter. All active counters can also be read by the LON General Interrogation command (GI) or IEC 61850.
RED 670
783
Section 15 Metering
The pulse counter in REx670 supports unidirectional incremental counters. That means only positive values are possible. The counter uses a 32 bit format, that is, the reported value is a 32-bit, signed integer with a range 0...+2147483647. The counter is reset at initialization of the IED. The reported value to station HMI over the station bus contains Identity, Value, Time, and Pulse Counter Quality. The Pulse Counter Quality consists of: Invalid (board hardware error or configuration error) Wrapped around Blocked Adjusted
The transmission of the counter value by SPA can be done as a service value, that is, the value frozen in the last integration cycle is read by the station HMI from the database. The pulse counter function updates the value in the database when an integration cycle is finished and activates the NEW_VAL signal in the function block. This signal can be connected to an Event function block, be time tagged, and transmitted to the station HMI. This time corresponds to the time when the value was frozen by the function. The pulse counter function requires a binary input card, BIMp, that is specially adapted to the pulse counter function. Figure 387 shows the pulse counter function block with connections of the inputs and outputs.
SingleCmdFunc OUTx SingleCmdFunc OUTx I/O-module Pulse INPUT OUT Pulse length >1s Reset counter PulseCounter BLOCK INVALID RESTART READ_VAL BLOCKED NEW_VAL BI_PULSE RS_CNT NAME SCAL_VAL EVENT INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4
IEC EVENT
SMS settings 1.Operation = Off/On 2.tReporting = 0s...60min 3.Event Mask = No Events/Report Events 4.Scale = 1-90000
Database Pulse counter value: 0...2147483647

en05000744.vsd
Figure 387:
Overview of the pulse counter function
The BLOCK and READ_VAL inputs can be connected to Single Command blocks, which are intended to be controlled either from the station HMI or/and the local HMI. As long as the BLOCK signal is set, the pulse counter is blocked. The signal connected 784 Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B RED 670
Section 15 Metering
to READ_VAL performs one additional reading per positive flank. The signal must be a pulse with a length >1 second. The BI_PULSE input is connected to the used input of the function block for the Binary Input Module (BIM). The NAME input is used for a user-defined name with up to 13 characters. The RS_CNT input is used for resetting the counter. Each pulse counter function block has four binary output signals that can be connected to an Event function block for event recording: INVALID, RESTART, BLOCKED and NEW_VAL. The SCAL_VAL signal can be connected to the IEC Event function block. The INVALID signal is a steady signal and is set if the Binary Input Module, where the pulse counter input is located, fails or has wrong configuration. The RESTART signal is a steady signal and is set when the reported value does not comprise a complete integration cycle. That is, in the first message after IED startup, in the first message after deblocking, and after the counter has wrapped around during last integration cycle. The BLOCKED signal is a steady signal and is set when the counter is blocked. There are two reasons why the counter is blocked: The BLOCK input is set, or The Binary Input Module, where the counter input is situated, is inoperative.
The NEW_VAL signal is a pulse signal. The signal is set if the counter value was updated since last report. The SCAL_VAL signal consists of value, time and status information.
15.1.3
Function block
PC01PCGGIO BLOCK READ_VAL BI_PULSE RS_CNT NAME INVALID RESTART BLOCKED NEW_VAL SCAL_VAL en05000709.vsd
Figure 388:
PC function block
15.1.4
RED 670
785
Section 15 Metering
Table 476:
Signal BLOCK READ_VAL BI_PULSE RS_CNT
Input signals for the PCGGIO (PC01-) function block

Description Block of function Initiates an additional pulse counter reading Connect binary input channel for metering Resets pulse counter value
Table 477:
Signal INVALID RESTART BLOCKED NEW_VAL SCAL_VAL
Output signals for the PCGGIO (PC01-) function block

Description The pulse counter value is invalid The reported value does not comprise a complete integration cycle The pulse counter function is blocked A new pulse counter value is generated Scaled value with time and status information
15.1.5
Setting parameters
Table 478:
Parameter Operation EventMask
Basic general settings for the PCGGIO (PC01-) function

Range Off On NoEvents ReportEvents Off RisingEdge Falling edge OnChange 1.000 - 90000.000 Step Default Off NoEvents Unit Description Operation Off/On Report mask for analog events from pulse counter Pulse counter criteria
CountCriteria
RisingEdge
Scale
0.001
1.000
Scaling value for SCAL_VAL output to unit per counted value Measured quantity for SCAL_VAL output
Quantity
Count ActivePower ApparentPower ReactivePower ActiveEnergy ApparentEnergy ReactiveEnergy 0 - 3600
Count
tReporting
60
Cycle time for reporting of counter value
15.1.6
786
Technical data
Section 15 Metering
Table 479:
Function Input frequency
Pulse counter logic (GGIO)

Setting range See Binary Input Module (BIM) (03600) s Accuracy -
Cycle time for report of counter value
15.2
Energy metering and demand handling (MMTR)

Function block name: ETPx ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: ETPMMTR IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
15.2.1
Introduction
Outputs from measurement function (MMXU) can be used to calculate energy. Active as well as reactive values are calculated in import respectively export direction. Values can be read or generated as pulses. Maximum demand power values are also calculated by the function.
15.2.2
The instantaneous values outputs of active and reactive power from the Measurements (CVMMXU) function block are used and integrated over a selected time tEnergy to measure the integrated energy. The energy values are presented as communication outputs but also as pulsed output which can be connected to a pulse counter. Values are in Ws resp Vars. Outputs are available for forward as well as reverse direction. The accumulated energy values can be reset from the HMI reset menu or with input RSTACC. The maximum demand values for active and reactive power are calculated for the set time tEnergy and the maximum value is stored in a register available over communication and from outputs MAXPAFD, MAXPARD, MAXRAFD, MAXRARD for the active and reactive power forward and reverse direction until reset with input RSTDMD or from the LHMI reset menu.
RED 670
787
Section 15 Metering
SVR1 CVMMXU
PINST QINST
P Q
ETP1 ETPMMTR
TRUE FALSE FALSE
STACC RSTACC RSTDMD
en07000121.vsd
Figure 389:
Connection of the energy metering function to the outputs of the measuring function
15.2.3
Function block
ETP1ETPMMTR P Q STACC RSTACC RSTDMD ACCST EAFPULSE EARPULSE ERFPULSE ERRPULSE EAFALM EARALM ERFALM ERRALM EAFACC EARACC ERFACC ERRACC MAXPAFD MAXPARD MAXPRFD MAXPRRD en07000120.vsd
Figure 390:
ETP function block
15.2.4

Table 480:
Signal P Q STACC RSTACC RSTDMD
Input signals for the ETPMMTR (ETP1-) function block

Description Measured active power Measured reactive power Start to accumulate energy values Reset accumulated energy values. Level sensitive used by ch: reset maximum demand
788
RED 670
Section 15 Metering
Table 481:
Signal ACCST EAFPULSE EARPULSE ERFPULSE ERRPULSE EAFALM EARALM ERFALM ERRALM EAFACC EARACC ERFACC ERRACC MAXPAFD MAXPARD MAXPRFD MAXPRRD
Output signals for the ETPMMTR (ETP1-) function block

Description Start of accumulating energy values. Accumulated forward active energy pulse Accumulated reverse active energy pulse Accumulated forward reactive energy pulse Accumulated reverse reactive energy pulse Alarm for active forward energy exceed limit in set interval Alarm for active reverse energy exceed limit in set interval Alarm for reactive forward energy exceed limit in set interval Alarm for reactive reverse energy exceed limit in set interval Accumulated forward active energy value in KWh Accumulated reverse active energy value in kWh Accumulated forward reactive energy value in kVArh Accumulated reverse reactive energy value in kVArh Maximum forward active power demand value for set interval Maximum reverse active power demand value for set interval Maximum forward reactive power demand value for set interval Maximum reactive power demand value in reverse direction
15.2.5
Setting parameters
Table 482:
Parameter Operation StartAcc
Basic general settings for the ETPMMTR (ETP1-) function

Range Off On Off On 1 Minute 5 Minutes 10 Minutes 15 Minutes 30 Minutes 60 Minutes 180 Minutes 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Step Default Off Off Unit Description Operation Off/On Activate the accumulation of energy values Time interval for energy calculation
tEnergy
1 Minute
tEnergyOnPls tEnergyOffPls
0.001 0.001
1.000 0.500
s s
Energy accumulated pulse ON time in secs Energy accumulated pulse OFF time in secs Pulse quantity for active forward accumulated energy value
EAFAccPlsQty
0.001 - 10000.000
0.001
100.000
MWh
RED 670
789
Section 15 Metering
Parameter EARAccPlsQty Range 0.001 - 10000.000 Step 0.001 Default 100.000 Unit MWh Description Pulse quantity for active reverse accumulated energy value Pulse quantity for reactive forward accumulated energy value Pulse quantity for reactive reverse accumulated energy value
ERFAccPlsQty
0.001 - 10000.000
0.001
100.000
MVAr h
ERVAccPlsQty
0.001 - 10000.000
0.001
100.000
MVAr h
Table 483:
Parameter EALim ERLim DirEnergyAct
Advanced general settings for the ETPMMTR (ETP1-) function

Range 0.001 10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 Forward Reverse Forward Reverse Off On 0.001 - 10000.000 0.001 - 10000.000 Step 0.001 0.001 Default 1000000.000 1000.000 Forward Unit MWh MVAr h Description Active energy limit Reactive energy limit Direction of active energy flow Forward/ Reverse Direction of reactive energy flow Forward/ Reverse Enable of zero point clamping detection function Zero point clamping level at active Power Zero point clamping level at reactive Power Preset Initial value for forward active energy Preset Initial value for reverse active energy Preset Initial value for forward reactive energy Preset Initial value for reverse reactive energy
DirEnergyReac
Forward
EnZeroClamp
On
LevZeroClampP LevZeroClampQ
0.001 0.001
10.000 10.000
MW MVAr
EAFPrestVal EARPrestVal ERFPresetVal
0.000 - 10000.000 0.000 - 10000.000 0.000 - 10000.000
0.001 0.001 0.001
0.000 0.000 0.000
MWh MWh MVAr h MVAr h
ERVPresetVal
0.000 - 10000.000
0.001
0.000
790
RED 670
Section 16 Station communication

About this chapter
This chapter describes the functions and protocols used on the interfaces to the substation automation and substation monitoring buses. The way these work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data are included for each function.
16.1
Overview
Each IED is provided with a communication interface, enabling it to connect to one or many substation level systems or equipment, either on the Substation Automation (SA) bus or Substation Monitoring (SM) bus. Following communication protocols are available: IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol LON communication protocol SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol DNP3.0 communication protocol
Theoretically, several protocols can be combined in the same IED.
16.2
16.2.1
IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol

Introduction
Single or double optical Ethernet ports for the new substation communication standard IEC61850-8-1 for the station bus are provided. IEC61850-8-1 allows intelligent devices (IEDs) from different vendors to exchange information and simplifies SA engineering. Peer- to peer communication according to GOOSE is part of the standard. Disturbance files uploading is provided. When double Ethernet ports are activated, make sure that the two ports are connected to different subnets. For example: Port 1 has IP-address 138.227.102.10 with subnet mask 255.255.255.0 and port 2 has IPaddress 138.227.103.10 with subnet mask 255.255.255.0
RED 670
791
Section 16 Station communication 16.2.2

16.2.2.1
Generic single point function block (SPGGIO)

Introduction
The SPGGIO function block is used to send one single logical signal to other systems or equipment in the substation.
16.2.2.2
Upon receiving a signal at its input, the SPGGIO function block will send the signal over IEC 61850-8-1 to the equipment or system that requests this signal. To be able to get the signal, one must use other tools, described in the Application Manual, Chapter 2: Engineering of the IED and define which function block in which equipment or system should receive this information.
16.2.2.3
Function block
SP01SPGGIO BLOCK IN NAME en07000124.vsd
Figure 391:
SP function block
792
RED 670
MP01SP16GGIO BLOCK IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8 IN9 IN10 IN11 IN12 IN13 IN14 IN15 IN16 NAME1 NAME2 NAME3 NAME4 NAME5 NAME6 NAME7 NAME8 NAME9 NAME10 NAME11 NAME12 NAME13 NAME14 NAME15 NAME16 NAMEOR
en07000125.vsd
Figure 392:
MP function block
16.2.2.4

Table 484:
Signal IN
Input signals for the SPGGIO (SP01-) function block

Description Input status
Table 485:
Signal BLOCK IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7
Input signals for the SP16GGIO (MP01-) function block

Description Block of function Input 1 status Input 2 status Input 3 status Input 4 status Input 5 status Input 6 status Input 7 status
RED 670
793

Signal IN8 IN9 IN10 IN11 IN12 IN13 IN14 IN15 IN16 Description Input 8 status Input 9 status Input 10 status Input 11 status Input 12 status Input 13 status Input 14 status Input 15 status Input 16 status
Table 486:
Signal NAMEOR
Output signals for the SP16GGIO (MP01-) function block

Description User define string for logic OR output signal
16.2.2.5
Setting parameters
16.2.3
16.2.3.1
Generic measured values function block (MVGGIO)

Introduction
The MVGGIO function block is used to send the instantaneous value of an analog output to other systems or equipment in the substation. It can also be used inside the same IED, to attach a RANGE aspect to an analog value and to permit measurement supervision on that value.
16.2.3.2
Upon receiving an analog signal at its input, the MVGGIO block will give the instantaneous value of the signal and the range, as output values. In the same time, it will send over IEC61850-8-1 the value and the deadband, to other equipment or systems in the substation.
794
RED 670

MV01MVGGIO IN VALUE RANGE en05000408.vsd
Figure 393:
MV function block
16.2.3.4

Table 487:
Signal BLOCK IN
Input signals for the MVGGIO (MV01-) function block

Description Block of function Analogue input value
Table 488:
Signal VALUE RANGE
Output signals for the MVGGIO (MV01-) function block

Description Magnitude of deadband value Range
16.2.3.5
Setting parameters
Table 489:
Parameter MV db
Basic general settings for the MVGGIO (MV01-) function

Range 1 - 300 Step 1 Default 10 Unit Type Description Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit
MV zeroDb MV hhLim
0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000
1 0.001
500 90.000
m% -
MV hLim
0.001
80.000
High limit
MV lLim
0.001
-80.000
Low limit
MV llLim
0.001
-90.000
Low Low limit
RED 670
795

Parameter MV min Range -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000 Step 0.001 Default -100.000 Unit Description Minimum value
MV max
0.001
100.000
Maximum value
MV dbType
Dead band
Reporting type
MV limHys
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits)
16.2.4
Setting parameters
Table 490:
Parameter Operation GOOSE
Basic general settings for the IEC61850-8-1 (IEC1-) function

Range Off ON Front OEM311_AB OEM311_CD Step Default Off OEM311_AB Unit Description Operation Off/On Port for GOOSE communication
16.2.5
Technical data
Table 491:
Function Protocol Communication speed for the IEDs

Value IEC 61850-8-1 100BASE-FX
16.3
16.3.1
LON communication protocol

Introduction
An optical network can be used within the Substation Automation system. This enables communication with the IED through the LON bus from the operators workplace, from the control center and also from other terminals. The LON protocol is specified in LonTalkProtocol Specification Version 3 from Echelon Corporation and is designed for communication in control networks. These networks are characterized by high speed for data transfer, short messages (few bytes), peer-to-peer communication, multiple communication media, low
796
RED 670
maintenance, multivendor equipment, and low support costs. LonTalk supports the needs of applications that cover a range of requirements. The protocol follows the reference model for open system interconnection (OSI) designed by the International Standardization Organization (ISO). In this document the most common addresses for commands and events are available. Other addresses can be found in a separate document, refer to section "Related documents". It is assumed that the reader is familiar with the LON communication protocol in general.
16.3.2
The speed of the network depends on the medium and transceiver design. With protection and control devices, fiber optic media is used, which enables the use of the maximum speed of 1.25 Mbits/s. The protocol is a peer-to-peer protocol where all the devices connected to the network can communicate with each other. The own subnet and node number are identifying the nodes (max. 255 subnets, 127 nodes per one subnet). The LON bus links the different parts of the protection and control system. The measured values, status information, and event information are spontaneously sent to the higher-level devices. The higher-level devices can read and write memorized values, setting values, and other parameter data when required. The LON bus also enables the bay level devices to communicate with each other to deliver, for example, interlocking information among the terminals without the need of a bus master. The LonTalk protocol supports two types of application layer objects: network variables and explicit messages. Network variables are used to deliver short messages, such as measuring values, status information, and interlocking/blocking signals. Explicit messages are used to transfer longer pieces of information, such as events and explicit read and write messages to access device data. The benefits achieved from using the LON bus in protection and control systems include direct communication among all terminals in the system and support for multi-master implementations. The LON bus also has an open concept, so that the terminals can communicate with external devices using the same standard of network variables.
Introduction of LON protocol
For more information see LON bus, LonWorks Network in Protection and Control, Users manual and Technical description, 1MRS 750035-MTD EN.
LON protocol
Configuration of LON Lon Network Tool (LNT 505) is a multi-purpose tool for LonWorks network configuration. All the functions required for setting up and configuring a LonWorks
RED 670
797
network is easily accessible on a single tool program. For details see the Operators manual. Activate LONCommunication Activate LON communication in the PST Parameter Setting Tool under Settings -> General settings > Communication > SLM configuration > Rear optical LON, where ADE should be set to ON. Add LON Device Types LNT A new device is added to LON Network Tool from the Device menu or by installing the device from the ABB LON Device Types package for LNT 505, with the SLDT IED 670 package version 1p2 r03. LON net address To be able to establish a LON connection with the 670IEDs, the IED has to be given a unique net address. The net address consists of a subnet and node number. This is accomplished with the LON Network Tool by creating one device for each IED. Vertical communication Vertical communication describes communication between the monitoring devices and protection and control IEDs. This communication includes sending of changed process data to monitoring devices as events and transfer of commands, parameter data and disturbance recorder files. This communication is implemented using explicit messages. Events and indications Events sent to the monitoring devices are using explicit messages (message code 44H) with unacknowledged transport service of the LonTalk protocol. When a signal is changed in the 670IED, one message with the value, quality and time is transmitted from terminal. Binary events Binary events are generated in event function blocks EV01 to EV20 in the 670IEDs. The event function blocks have predefined LON addresses. table 492 shows the LON addresses to the first input on the event function blocks. The addresses to the other inputs on the event function block are consecutive after the first input. For example, input 15 on event block EV17 has the address 1280 + 14 (15-1) = 1294. For double indications only the first eight inputs 18 must be used. Inputs 916 can be used for other type of events at the same event block. As basic, 3 event function blocks EV01-EV03 running with a fast loop time (3 ms) is available in the 670IEDS. The remaining event function blocks EV04-EV09 runs with a loop time on 8 ms and EV10-EV20 runs with a loop time on 100 ms. The event blocks are used to send binary signals, integers, real time values like analogue data from measuring functions and mA input modules as well as pulse counter signals. 16 pulse counter value function blocks PC01 to PC16 and 24 mA input service values function blocks SMMI1_In1 to 6 SMMI4_In1 to 6 are available in the 670IEDs.
798
RED 670
The first LON address in every event function block is found in table 492
Table 492:
Function block EV01 EV02 EV03 EV04 EV05 EV06 EV07 EV08 EV09 EV10 EV11 EV12 EV13 EV14 EV15 EV16 EV17 EV18 EV19 EV20
LON adresses for Event functions

First LON address in function block 1024 1040 1056 1072 1088 1104 1120 1136 1152 1168 1184 1200 1216 1232 1248 1264 1280 1296 1312 1328
Event masks The event mask for each input can be set individually from the Parameter Setting Tool (PST) Under: Settings > General Settings > Monitoring > Event function as. No events OnSet, at pick-up of the signal OnReset, at drop-out of the signal OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal AutoDetect, event system itself make the reporting decision, (reporting criteria for integers has no semantic, prefer to be set by the user)
The following type of signals from application functions can be connected to the event function block. Single indication Directly connected binary IO signal via binary input function block (SMBI) is always reported on change, no changed detection is done in the event function block. Other RED 670 Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B 799
Boolean signals, for example a start or a trip signal from a protection function is event masked in the event function block. Double indications Double indications can only be reported via switch-control (SCSWI) functions, the event reporting is based on information from switch-control, no change detection is done in the event function block. Directly connected binary IO signal via binary input function block (SMBI) is not possible to handle as double indication. Double indications can only be reported for the first 8 inputs on an event function block. 00 generates an intermediate event with the read status 0 01 generates an open event with the read status 1 10 generates a close event with the read status 2 11 generates an undefined event with the read status 3
Analog value All analog values are reported cyclic, the reporting interval is taken from the connected function if there is a limit supervised signal, otherwise it is taken from the event function block.
Figure 394:
Connection of protection signals for event handling.
Command handling
800
RED 670
Commands are transferred using transparent SPA-bus messages. The transparent SPA-bus message is an explicit LON message, which contains an ASCII character message following the coding rules of the SPA-bus protocol. The message is sent using explicit messages with message code 41H and using acknowledged transport service. Both the SPA-bus command messages (R or W) and the reply messages (D, A or N) are sent using the same message code. It is mandatory that one device sends out only one SPA-bus message at a time to one node and waits for the reply before sending the next message. For commands from the operator workplace to the IED for apparatus control, i.e. the function blocks type SCSWI 1 to 32, SXCBR 1 to 18and SXSWI 1 to 28; the SPA addresses are according to table 493
Horizontal communication
Network variables are used for communication between REx 5xx and 670IEDs. The supported network variable type is SNVT_state (NV type 83). SNVT_state is used to communicate the state of a set of 1 to 16 Boolean values. The multiple command send function block (MTxx) is used to pack the information to one value. This value is transmitted to the receiving node and presented for the application by a multiple command function block (CMxx). At horizontal communication the input BOUND on the event function block (MTxx) must be set to 1. There are 10 MT and 60 CM function blocks available. The MT and CM function blocks are connected using Lon Network Tool (LNT 505). This tool also defines the service and addressing on LON. This is an overview description how to configure the network variables for 670IEDs. Configuration of LON network variables Configure the Network variables according to your application from the LON network Tool. For more details see LNT 505 in Operators manual. The following is an example of how to configure network variables concerning e.g. interlocking between two 670IEDs.
LON BAY E1 BAY E3 BAY E4
MT07
CM09
CM09
en05000718.vsd
Figure 395:
Examples connections between MT and CM function blocks in three terminals.
RED 670
801
The network variable connections are done from the NV Connection window. From LNT window select Connections -> NVConnections -> New
en05000719.vsd
Figure 396:
The network variables window in LNT.
There are two ways of downloading NV connections. Either you use the drag-anddrop method where you select all nodes in the device window, drag them to the Download area in the bottom of the program window and drop them there. Or the traditional menu selection, Configuration -> Download...
802
RED 670
en05000720.vsd
Figure 397:
The download configuration window in LNT.
Communication ports
The serial communication module (SLM) is used for SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 and LON communication. This module is a mezzanine module, and can be placed on the Main Processing Module (NUM). The serial communication module can have connectors for two plastic fiber cables (snap-in) or two glass fiber cables (ST, bayonet) or a combination of plastic and glass fiber. Three different types are available depending on type of fiber. The incoming optical fiber is connected to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing optical fiber to the TX transmitter output. When the fiber optic cables are laid out, pay special attention to the instructions concerning the handling, connection, etc. of the optical fibers. The module is identified with a number on the label on the module.
Table 493:
Name BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD Table continued on next page
SPA addresses for commands from the operator workplace to the IED for apparatus control
Function block SCSWI01 SCSWI02 SCSWI02 SCSWI04 SCSWI05 SCSWI06 SCSWI07 SCSWI08 SCSWI09 SPA address 1 I 5115 1 I 5139 1 I 5161 1 I 5186 1 I 5210 1 I 5234 1 I 5258 1 I 5283 1 I 5307 Description SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command
RED 670
803

Name BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL Table continued on next page Function block SCSWI10 SCSWI11 SCSWI12 SCSWI13 SCSWI14 SCSWI15 SCSWI16 SCSWI17 SCSWI18 SCSWI19 SCSWI20 SCSWI21 SCSWI22 SCSWI23 SCSWI24 SCSWI25 SCSWI26 SCSWI27 SCSWI28 SCSWI29 SCSWI30 SCSWI31 SCSWI32 SCSWI01 SCSWI02 SCSWI03 SCSWI04 SCSWI05 SCSWI06 SCSWI07 SCSWI08 SCSWI09 SCSWI10 SPA address 1 I 5331 1 I 5355 1 I 5379 1 I 5403 1 I 5427 1 I 5451 1 I 5475 1 I 5499 1 I 5523 1 I 5545 1 I 5571 1 I 5594 1 I 5619 1 I 5643 1 I 5667 1 I 5691 1 I 5715 1 I 5739 1 I 5763 1 I 5787 1 I 5811 1 I 5835 1 I 5859 1 I 5107 1 I 5131 1 I 5153 1 I 5178 1 I 5202 1 I 5226 1 I 5250 1 I 5275 1 I 5299 1 I 5323 Description SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command
804
RED 670

Name CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL Table continued on next page Function block SCSWI11 SCSWI12 SCSWI13 SCSWI14 SCSWI15 SCSWI16 SCSWI17 SCSWI18 SCSWI19 SCSWI20 SCSWI21 SCSWI22 SCSWI23 SCSWI24 SCSWI25 SCSWI26 SCSWI27 SCSWI28 SCSWI29 SCSWI30 SCSWI31 SCSWI32 SPA address 1 I 5347 1 I 5371 1 I 5395 1 I 5419 1 I 5443 1 I 5467 1 I 5491 1 I 5515 1 I 5537 1 I 5563 1 I 5586 1 I 5611 1 I 5635 1 I 5659 1 I 5683 1 I 5707 1 I 5731 1 I 5755 1 I 5779 1 I 5803 1 I 5827 1 I 5851 Description SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command
RED 670
805

Name SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, SELOpen+ILO=10, SELClose+ILO=11, SELOpen+SCO=20, SELClose+SCO=21, SELOpen+ILO+SCO=30, SELClose+ILO+SCO=31 SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. Table continued on next page Function block SCSWI01 SPA address 1 I 5105 Description SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command Note: Send select command before operate command
SCSWI02 SCSWI03 SCSWI04 SCSWI05 SCSWI06 SCSWI07 SCSWI08 SCSWI09 SCSWI10 SCSWI11 SCSWI12 SCSWI13 SCSWI14 SCSWI15 SCSWI16 SCSWI17 SCSWI18 SCSWI19 SCSWI20 SCSWI21 SCSWI22
1 I 5129 1 I 5151 1 I 5176 1 I 5200 1 I 5224 1 I 5248 1 I 5273 1 I 5297 1 I 5321 1 I 5345 1 I 5369 1 I 5393 1 I 5417 1 I 5441 1 I 5465 1 I 5489 1 I 5513 1 I 5535 1 I 5561 1 I 5584 1 I 5609
SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command
806
RED 670

Name SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, ExcOpen+ILO=10, ExcClose+ILO=11, ExcOpen+SCO=20, ExcClose+SCO=21, ExcOpen+ILO+SCO=30, ExcClose+ILO+SCO=31 ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. Table continued on next page Function block SCSWI23 SCSWI24 SCSWI25 SCSWI26 SCSWI27 SCSWI28 SCSWI29 SCSWI30 SCSWI31 SCSWI32 SCSWI01 SPA address 1 I 5633 1 I 5657 1 I 5681 1 I 5705 1 I 5729 1 I 5753 1 I 5777 1 I 5801 1 I 5825 1 I 5849 1 I 5106 Description SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command Note: Send select command before operate command
SCSWI02 SCSWI02 SCSWI04 SCSWI05 SCSWI06 SCSWI07 SCSWI08 SCSWI09 SCSWI10 SCSWI11 SCSWI12
1 I 5130 1 I 5152 1 I 5177 1 I 5201 1 I 5225 1 I 5249 1 I 5274 1 I 5298 1 I 5322 1 I 5346 1 I 5370
SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command
RED 670
807

Name ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. Sub Value Function block SCSWI13 SCSWI14 SCSWI15 SCSWI16 SCSWI17 SCSWI18 SCSWI19 SCSWI20 SCSWI21 SCSWI22 SCSWI23 SCSWI24 SCSWI25 SCSWI26 SCSWI27 SCSWI28 SCSWI29 SCSWI30 SCSWI31 SCSWI32 SXCBR01 SPA address 1 I 5394 1 I 5418 1 I 5442 1 I 5466 1 I 5490 1 I 5514 1 I 5536 1 I 5562 1 I 5585 1 I 5610 1 I 5634 1 I 5658 1 I 5682 1 I 5706 1 I 5730 1 I 5754 1 I 5778 1 I 5802 1 I 5826 1 I 5850 2 I 7854 Description SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameter for position to be substituted Note: Send the value before Enable SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted
Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Table continued on next page
SXCBR02 SXCBR03 SXCBR04
2 I 7866 2 I 7884 2 I 7904
808
RED 670

Name Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Table continued on next page Function block SXCBR05 SXCBR06 SXCBR07 SXCBR08 SXCBR09 SXCBR10 SXCBR11 SXCBR12 SXCBR13 SXCBR14 SXCBR15 SXCBR16 SXCBR17 SXCBR18 SXSWI01 SXSWI02 SXSWI03 SXSWI04 SXSWI05 SXSWI06 SXSWI07 SXSWI08 SXSWI09 SXSWI10 SPA address 2 I 7923 2 I 7942 2 I 7961 2 I 7980 3I7 3 I 26 3 I 45 3 I 56 3 I 74 3 I 94 3 I 120 3 I 133 3 I 158 3 I 179 3 I 196 3 I 216 3 I 235 3 I 254 3 I 272 3 I 292 3 I 310 3 I 330 3 I 348 3 I 359 Description SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted
RED 670
809

Name Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Enable Function block SXSWI11 SXSWI12 SXSWI13 SXSWI14 SXSWI15 SXSWI16 SXSWI17 SXSWI18 SXSWI19 SXSWI20 SXSWI21 SXSWI22 SXSWI23 SXSWI24 SXSWI25 SXSWI26 SXSWI27 SXSWI28 SXCBR01 SPA address 3 I 378 3 I 397 3 I 416 3 I 435 3 I 454 3 I 473 3 I 492 3 I 511 3 I 530 3 I 549 3 I 568 3 I 587 3 I 606 3 I 625 3 I 644 3 I 663 3 I 682 3 I 701 2 I 7855 Description SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for substitute enable command Note: Send the Value before Enable SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command
Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Table continued on next page
SXCBR02 SXCBR03 SXCBR04 SXCBR05 SXCBR06
2 I 7865 2 I 7885 2 I 7903 2 I 7924 2 I 7941
810
RED 670

Name Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Table continued on next page Function block SXCBR07 SXCBR08 SXCBR09 SXCBR10 SXCBR11 SXCBR12 SXCBR13 SXCBR14 SXCBR15 SXCBR16 SXCBR17 SXCBR18 SXSWI01 SXSWI02 SXSWI03 SXSWI04 SXSWI05 SXSWI06 SXSWI07 SXSWI08 SXSWI09 SXSWI10 SXSWI11 SXSWI12 SPA address 2 I 7962 2 I 7979 3I8 3 I 25 3 I 46 3 I 55 3 I 75 3 I 93 3 I 121 3 I 132 3 I 159 3 I 178 3 I 197 3 I 215 3 I 234 3 I 252 3 I 271 3 I 290 3 I 309 3 I 328 3 I 347 3 I 360 3I 379 3 I 398 Description SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command
RED 670
811

Name Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Table continued on next page Function block SXSWI13 SXSWI14 SXSWI15 SXSWI16 SXSWI17 SXSWI18 SXSWI19 SXSWI20 SXSWI21 SXSWI22 SXSWI23 SXSWI24 SXSWI25 SXSWI26 SXSWI27 SXSWI28 SXCBR01 SXCBR02 SXCBR03 SXCBR04 SXCBR05 SXCBR06 SXCBR07 SXCBR08 SPA address 3 I 417 3 I 436 3 I 455 3 I 474 3 I 493 3 I 512 3 I 531 3 I 550 3 I 569 3 I 588 3 I 607 3 I 626 3 I 645 3 I 664 3 I 683 3 I 702 2 I 7853 2 I 7864 2 I 7883 2 I 7905 2 I 7922 2 I 7943 2 I 7960 2 I 7981 Description SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command
812
RED 670

Name Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Table continued on next page Function block SXCBR09 SXCBR10 SXCBR11 SXCBR12 SXCBR13 SXCBR14 SXCBR15 SXCBR16 SXCBR17 SXCBR18 SXSWI01 SXSWI02 SXSWI03 SXSWI04 SXSWI05 SXSWI06 SXSWI07 SXSWI08 SXSWI09 SXSWI10 SXSWI11 SXSWI12 SXSWI13 SXSWI14 SPA address 3I6 3 I 27 3 I 44 3 I 57 3 I 73 3 I 92 3 I 122 3 I 131 3 I 160 3 I 177 3 I 198 3 I 214 3 I 236 3 I 253 3 I 273 3 I 291 3 I 311 3 I 329 3 I 349 3 I 358 3 I 377 3 I 396 3 I 415 3 I 434 Description SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command
RED 670
813

Name Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Function block SXSWI15 SXSWI16 SXSWI17 SXSWI18 SXSWI19 SXSWI20 SXSWI21 SXSWI22 SXSWI23 SXSWI24 SXSWI25 SXSWI26 SXSWI27 SXSWI28 SPA address 3 I 453 3 I 472 3 I 491 3 I 510 3 I 529 3 I 548 3 I 567 3 I 586 3 I 605 3 I 624 3 I 643 3 I 662 3 I 681 3 I 700 Description SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command
16.3.3
Setting parameters
Table 494:
Parameter Operation
General settings for the NVLON (NV---) function

Range Off On Step Default Off Unit Description Operation
Table 495:
Parameter Operation TimerClass
General settings for the LON (ADE1-) function

Range Off On Slow Normal Fast Step Default Off Slow Unit Description Operation Timer class
814
RED 670
Section 16 Station communication 16.3.4 Technical data

Table 496:
Function Protocol Communication speed
LON communication protocol

Value LON 1.25 Mbit/s
16.4
16.4.1
SPA communication protocol

Introduction
In this section the most common addresses for commands and events are available. Other addresses can be found in a separate document, refer to section "Related documents". It is assumed that the reader is familiar with the SPA communication protocol in general.
16.4.2
The SPA bus uses an asynchronous serial communications protocol (1 start bit, 7 data bits + even parity, 1 stop bit) with data transfer rate up to 38400 bit/s. Recommended baud rate for each type of terminal will be found in the Technical reference manual. Messages on the bus consist of ASCII characters.
Introduction of SPA protocol
The basic construction of the protocol assumes that the slave has no self-initiated need to talk to the master but the master is aware of the data contained in the slaves and, consequently, can request required data. In addition, the master can send data to the slave. Requesting by the master can be performed either by sequenced polling (e.g. for event information) or only on demand. The master requests slave information using request messages and sends information to the slave in write messages. Furthermore, the master can send all slaves in common a broadcast message containing time or other data. The inactive state of bus transmit and receive lines is a logical "1".
SPA protocol
The tables below specify the SPA addresses for reading data from and writing data to an IED 670 with the SPA communication protocol implemented. The SPA addresses for the mA input service values (MI03-MI16) are found in table497
RED 670
815
Table 497:
Function block MI03-CH1 MI03-CH2 MI03-CH3 MI03-CH4 MI03-CH5 MI03-CH6 MI04-CH1 MI04-CH2 MI04-CH3 MI04-CH4 MI04-CH5 MI04-CH6 MI05-CH1 MI05-CH2 MI05-CH3 MI05-CH4 MI05-CH5 MI05-CH6 MI06-CH1 MI06-CH2 MI06-CH3 MI06-CH4 MI06-CH5 MI06-CH6 MI07-CH1 MI07-CH2 MI07-CH3 MI07-CH4 MI07-CH5 MI07-CH6 MI08-CH1 MI08-CH2 MI08-CH3 MI08-CH4 MI08-CH5 MI08-CH6 MI09-CH1 MI09-CH2
SPA addresses for the MIM (MI03-MI16) function

SPA address 4-O-6508 4-O-6511 4-O-6512 4-O-6515 4-O-6516 4-O-6519 4-O-6527 4-O-6530 4-O-6531 4-O-6534 4-O-6535 4-O-6538 4-O-6546 4-O-6549 4-O-6550 4-O-6553 4-O-6554 4-O-6557 4-O-6565 4-O-6568 4-O-6569 4-O-6572 4-O-6573 4-O-6576 4-O-6584 4-O-6587 4-O-6588 4-O-6591 4-O-6592 4-O-6595 4-O-6603 4-O-6606 4-O-6607 4-O-6610 4-O-6611 4-O-6614 4-O-6622 4-O-6625
816
RED 670

Function block MI09-CH3 MI09-CH4 MI09-CH5 MI09-CH6 MI10-CH1 MI10-CH2 MI10-CH3 MI10-CH4 MI10-CH5 MI10-CH6 MI11-CH1 MI11-CH2 MI11-CH3 MI11-CH4 MI11-CH5 MI11-CH6 MI12-CH1 MI12-CH2 MI12-CH3 MI12-CH4 MI12-CH5 MI12-CH6 MI13-CH1 MI13-CH2 MI13-CH3 MI13-CH4 MI13-CH5 MI13-CH6 MI14-CH1 MI14-CH2 MI14-CH3 MI14-CH4 MI14-CH5 MI14-CH6 MI15-CH1 MI15-CH2 MI15-CH3 MI15-CH4 MI15-CH5 Table continued on next page SPA address 4-O-6626 4-O-6629 4-O-6630 4-O-6633 4-O-6641 4-O-6644 4-O-6645 4-O-6648 4-O-6649 4-O-6652 4-O-6660 4-O-6663 4-O-6664 4-O-6667 4-O-6668 4-O-6671 4-O-6679 4-O-6682 4-O-6683 4-O-6686 4-O-6687 4-O-6690 4-O-6698 4-O-6701 4-O-6702 4-O-6705 4-O-6706 4-O-6709 4-O-6717 4-O-6720 4-O-6721 4-O-6724 4-O-6725 4-O-6728 4-O-6736 4-O-6739 4-O-6740 4-O-6743 4-O-6744
RED 670
817

Function block MI15-CH6 MI16-CH1 MI16-CH2 MI16-CH3 MI16-CH4 MI16-CH5 MI16-CH6 SPA address 4-O-6747 4-O-6755 4-O-6758 4-O-6759 4-O-6762 4-O-6763 4-O-6766
The SPA addresses for the pulse counter values PC01 PC16 are found in table 498
Table 498:
Function block PC01 PC02 PC03 PC04 PC05 PC06 PC07 PC08 PC09 PC10 PC11 PC12 PC13 PC14 PC15 PC16
SPA addresses for the PCGGIO (PC01-PC16 function)

SPA address CNT_VAL 3-O-5834 3-O-5840 3-O-5846 3-O-5852 3-O-5858 3-O-5864 3-O-5870 3-O-5876 3-O-5882 3-O-5888 3-O-5894 3-O-5900 3-O-5906 3-O-5912 3-O-5918 3-O-5924 SPA address NEW_VAL 3-O-5833 3-O-5839 3-O-5845 3-O-5851 3-O-5857 3-O-5863 3-O-5869 3-O-5875 3-O-5881 3-O-5887 3-O-5893 3-O-5899 3-O-5905 3-O-5911 3-O-5917 3-O-5923
I/O modules To read binary inputs, the SPA-addresses for the outputs of the I/O-module function block are used, i.e. the addresses for BI1 BI16. The SPA addresses are found in a separate document, refer to section "Related documents". Single command function The IEDs may be provided with a function to receive signals either from a substation automation system or from the local human-machine interface, HMI. That receiving function block has 16 outputs that can be used, for example, to control high voltage apparatuses in switchyards. For local control functions, the local HMI can also be used.
818
RED 670
The single command function consists of three function blocks; CD01 CD03 for 16 binary output signals each. The signals can be individually controlled from the operator station, remote-control gateway, or from the local HMI on the IED. The SPA addresses for the single command function (CD) are shown in Table 3. For the single command function block, CD01 to CD03, the address is for the first output. The other outputs follow consecutively after the first one. For example, output 7 on the CD02 function block has the 5O533 address. The SPA addresses for the single command functions CD01 CD03 are found in table 499
Table 499:
Function block CD01-Cmd1 CD01-Cmd2 CD01-Cmd3 CD01-Cmd4 CD01-Cmd5 CD01-Cmd6 CD01-Cmd7 CD01-Cmd8 CD01-Cmd9 CD01-Cmd10 CD01-Cmd11 CD01-Cmd12 CD01-Cmdt13 CD01-Cmd14 CD01-Cmd15 CD01-Cmd16 CD02-Cmd1 CD02-Cmd2 CD02-Cmdt3 CD02-Cmd4 CD02-Cmd5 CD02-Cmd6 CD02-Cmd7 CD02-Cmd8 CD02-Cmd9 CD02-Cmd10 CD02-Cmd11 CD02-Cmd12 Table continued on next page
SPA addresses for the SingleCmd (CD01-CD03) function

SPA address CMD Input 4-S-4639 4-S-4640 4-S-4641 4-S-4642 4-S-4643 4-S-4644 4-S-4645 4-S-4646 4-S-4647 4-S-4648 4-S-4649 4-S-4650 4-S-4651 4-S-4652 4-S-4653 4-S-4654 4-S-4672 4-S-4673 4-S-4674 4-S-4675 4-S-4676 4-S-4677 4-S-4678 4-S-4679 4-S-4680 4-S-4681 4-S-4682 4-S-4683 SPA address CMD output 5-O-511 5-O-512 5-O-513 5-O-514 5-O-515 5-O-516 5-O-517 5-O-518 5-O-519 5-O-520 5-O-521 5-O-522 5-O-523 5-O-524 5-O-525 5-O-526 5-O-527 5-O-528 5-O-529 5-O-530 5-O-531 5-O-532 5-O-533 5-O-534 5-O-535 5-O-536 5-O-537 5-O-538
RED 670
819

Function block CD02-Cmd13 CD02-Cmd14 CD02-Cmd15 CD02-Cmd16 CD03-Cmd1 CD03-Cmd2 CD03-Cmd3 CD03-Cmd4 CD03-Cmd5 CD03-Cmd6 CD03-Cmd7 CD03-Cmd8 CD03-Cmd9 CD03-Cmd10 CD03-Cmd11 CD03-Cmd12 CD03-Cmd13 CD03-Cmd14 CD03-Cmd15 CD03-Cmd16 SPA address CMD Input 4-S-4684 4-S-4685 4-S-4686 4-S-4687 4-S-4705 4-S-4706 4-S-4707 4-S-4708 4-S-4709 4-S-4710 4-S-4711 4-S-4712 4-S-4713 4-S-4714 4-S-4715 4-S-4716 4-S-4717 4-S-4718 4-S-4719 4-S-4720 SPA address CMD output 5-O-539 5-O-540 5-O-541 5-O-542 5-O-543 5-O-544 5-O-545 5-O-546 5-O-547 5-O-548 5-O-549 5-O-550 5-O-551 5-O-552 5-O-553 5-O-554 5-O-555 5-O-556 5-O-557 5-O-558
Table 499 SPA addresses for the signals on the single command functions Figure 398 shows an application example of how the user can, in a simplified way, connect the command function via the configuration logic circuit in a protection terminal for control of a circuit breaker. A pulse via the binary outputs of the terminal normally performs this type of command control. The SPA addresses to control the outputs OUT1 OUT16 in CD01 are shown in table 499
820
RED 670
Figure 398:
Application example showing a simplified logic diagram for control of a circuit breaker.
The MODE input defines if the output signals from CD01 shall be off, steady or pulsed signals. This is set in Parameter Setting Tool (PST) under: Setting > General Settings > Control > Commands > Single Command. Event function This event function is intended to send time-tagged events to the station level (e.g. operator workplace) over the station bus. The events are there presented in an event list. The events can be created from both internal logical signals and binary input channels. All must The internal signals are time tagged in the main processing module, while the binary input channels are time tagged directly on each I/O module. The events are produced according to the set event masks. The event masks are treated commonly for both the LON and SPA channels. All events according to the event mask are stored in a buffer, which contains up to 1000 events. If new events appear before the oldest event in the buffer is read, the oldest event is overwritten and an overflow alarm appears. Two special signals for event registration purposes are available in the terminal, Terminal Restarted (0E50) and Event buffer overflow (0E51). The input parameters can be set individually from the Parameter Setting Tool (PST) under: Setting > General Setting > Monitoring > Event Function as. No events OnSet, at pick-up of the signal OnReset, at drop-out of the signal OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal AutoDetect, event system itself make the reporting decision, (reporting criteria for integers has no semantic, prefer to be set by the user)
The Status and event codes for the Event functions are found in table 500
RED 670
821
Table 500:
Event block EV01 Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Input 9 Input 10 Input 11 Input 12 Input 13 Input 14 Input 15 Input 16 EV02 EV03 EV20
Status and event codes

Status Single indication1) Double indication Set event Reset event Intermedia Closed 10 Open 01 Undefined te 00 11 22E33 22E35 22E37 22E39 22E41 22E43 22E45 22E47 22E49 22E51 22E53 22E55 22E57 22E59 22E61 22E63 23E.. 24E.. 41E.. 22E32 22E34 22E36 22E38 22E40 22E42 22E44 22E46 22E48 22E50 22E52 22E54 22E56 22E58 22E60 22E62 23E.. 24E.. 41E.. 22E0 22E4 22E8 22E12 22E16 22E20 22E24 22E28 23E.. 24E.. 41E.. 22E1 22E5 22E9 22E13 22E17 22E21 22E25 22E29 23E.. 23E.. 41E.. 22E2 22E6 22E10 22E14 22E18 22E22 22E26 22E30 23E.. 24E.. 41E.. 22E3 22E7 22E11 22E15 22E19 22E23 22E27 22E31 23E.. 24E.. 41E..
22O1 22O2 22O3 22O4 22O5 22O6 22O7 22O8 22O9 22O10 22O11 22O12 22O13 22O14 22O15 22O16 230.. 240.. 410..
1) These values are only applicable if the Event mask is masked OFF. Connection of signals as events Signals coming from different protection and control functions and shall be sent as events to the station level over the SPA-bus (or LON-bus) are connected to the Event function block according to figure 399
822
RED 670
Figure 399:
Connection of protection signals for event handling.
Note that corresponding Event mask must be set to an applicable value via the Parameter Setting Tool (PST), under: Settings > General Settings > Monitoring > Event Function as. No events OnSet, at pick-up of the signal OnReset, at drop-out of the signal OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal AutoDetect, event system itself make the reporting decision, (reporting criteria for integers has no semantic, prefer to be set by the user)
16.4.2.1
Communication ports
The serial communication module (SLM) is used for SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 and LON communication. This module is a mezzanine module, and can be placed on the Analog/Digital conversion module (ADM). The serial communication module can have connectors for two plastic fiber cables (snap-in) or two glass fiber cables (ST, bayonet) or a combination of plastic and glass fiber. Three different types are available depending on type of fiber. The incoming optical fiber is connected to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing optical fiber to the TX transmitter output. When the fiber optic cables are laid out,
RED 670
823
pay special attention to the instructions concerning the handling, connection, etc. of the optical fibers. The module is identified with a number on the label on the module. The procedure to set the transfer rate and slave number can be found in the Installation and commissioning manual for respective IED.
16.4.3
Design
When communicating locally with a Personal Computer (PC) in the station, using the rear SPA port, the only hardware needed for a station monitoring system is: Optical fibres Opto/electrical converter for the PC PC
When communicating remotely with a PC using the rear SPA port, the same hardware is needed plus telephone modems. The software needed in the PC, either local or remote, is PCM 600. When communicating between the LHMI and a PC, the only hardware required is a front-connection cable.
16.4.4
Setting parameters
Table 501:
Parameter SlaveAddress BaudRate
General settings for the SPA (SPA1-) function

Range 1 - 899 300 Bd 1200 Bd 4800 Bd 9600 Bd 19200 Bd 38400 Bd 57600 Bd Step 1 Default 30 9600 Bd Unit Description Slave address Baudrate on serial line
Table 502:
Parameter SlaveAddress BaudRate
General settings for the SPAviaSLM (SPA1-) function

Range 1 - 899 300 Bd 1200 Bd 4800 Bd 9600 Bd 19200 Bd 38400 Bd Step 1 Default 30 9600 Bd Unit Description Slave address Baudrate on serial line
824
RED 670
Table 503:
Parameter Operation SlaveAddress
General settings for the SPAviaLON (SPA4-) function

Range Off On 1 - 899 Step 1 Default Off 30 Unit Description Operation Slave address
16.4.5
Technical data
Table 504:
Function Protocol Communication speed Slave number
SPA communication protocol

Value SPA 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400 Bd 1 to 899
16.5
16.5.1

Introduction
The IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol is mainly used when a protection terminal communicates with a third party control or monitoring system. This system must have software that can interpret the IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages.
16.5.2
16.5.2.1
General
The IEC 60870-5-103 is an unbalanced (master-slave) protocol for coded-bit serial communication exchanging information with a control system, and with a data transfer rate up to 38400 bit/s. In IEC terminology a primary station is a master and a secondary station is a slave. The communication is based on a point-to-point principle. The master must have software that can interpret the IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages.
Introduction of IEC 608705103 protocol
The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol implementation in IED 670 consists of these functions: Event handling Report of analog service values (measurements) Fault location Command handling
RED 670
825
Autorecloser ON/OFF Teleprotection ON/OFF Protection ON/OFF LED reset Characteristics 1 - 4 (Setting groups)
File transfer (disturbance files) Time synchronization
For detailed information about IEC 60870-5-103, refer to the IEC60870 standard part 5: Transmission protocols, and to the section 103: Companion standard for the informative interface of protection equipment.
IEC 60870-5-103
The tables in the following sections specify the information types supported by the IED 670 products with the communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 implemented. To support the information, corresponding functions must be included in the protection and control IED. Commands in control direction Terminal commands in control direction, I103IEDCMD Command block in control direction with defined terminal signals. Number of instances: 1 Command block use PARAMETER as FUNCTION TYPE. INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each output signals.
Info. no 19 23 24 25 26 Message LED Reset Activate setting group 1 Activate setting group 2 Activate setting group 3 Activate setting group 4 Supported Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Function commands in control direction, pre-defined I103CMD Function command block in control direction with defined output signals. Number of instances: 1 FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block. INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each output signals.
Info. no. 16 17 18 Message Auto-recloser on/off Teleprotection on/off Protection on/off Supported Yes Yes Yes
826
RED 670

Function commands in control direction, user-defined, I103UserCMD Function command blocks in control direction with user-defined output signals. Number of instances: 4 FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block in private range. Default values are defined in private range 1 - 4. One for each instance. INFORMATION NUMBER is required for each output signal. Default values are 1 - 8.
Info. no. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Message Output signal 01 Output signal 02 Output signal 03 Output signal 04 Output signal 05 Output signal 06 Output signal 07 Output signal 08 Supported Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Status Terminal status indications in monitor direction, I103IED Indication block for status in monitor direction with defined terminal functions. Number of instances: 1 Indication block use PARAMETER as FUNCTION TYPE. INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each input signals.
Info. no. 19 23 24 25 26 21 Message LED reset Setting group 1 active Setting group 2 active Setting group 3 active Setting group 4 active Test mode active Supported Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Function status indications in monitor direction, user-defined, I103UserDef Function indication blocks in monitor direction with user-defined input signals. Number of instances: 20 FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block in private range. Default values are defined in private range 5 - 24. One for each instance. RED 670 Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B 827
INFORMATION NUMBER is required for each input signal. Default values are defined in range 1 - 8
Info. no. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Message Input signal 01 Input signal 02 Input signal 03 Input signal 04 Input signal 05 Input signal 06 Input signal 07 Input signal 08 Supported Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Supervision indications in monitor direction, I103Superv Indication block for supervision in monitor direction with defined functions. Number of instances: 1 FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block. INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for output signals.
Info. no. 32 33 37 38 46 47 Message Measurand supervision I Measurand supervision U I>>back-up operation VT fuse failure Group warning Group alarm Supported Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Earth fault indications in monitor direction, I103EF Indication block for earth fault in monitor direction with defined functions. Number of instances: 1 FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block. INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each output signal.
Info. no. 51 52 Message Earth fault forward Earth fault reverse Supported Yes Yes
Fault indications in monitor direction, type 1, I103FltDis Fault indication block for faults in monitor direction with defined functions. 828 Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B RED 670
The instance type is suitable for distance protection function. FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block. INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each input signal. Number of instances: 1
Info. no. 64 65 66 67 84 69 70 71 68 74 75 78 79 80 81 82 76 77 73 Message Start L1 Start L2 Start L3 Start IN General start Trip L1 Trip L2 Trip L3 General trip Fault forward/line Fault reverse/busbar Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Zone 5 Signal transmitted Signal received SCL, Fault location in ohm Supported Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Fault indications in monitor direction, type 2, I103FltStd Fault indication block for faults in monitor direction with defined functions. The instance type is suitable for linediff, transformerdiff, overcurrent and earthfault protection functions. FUNCTION TYPE setting for each block. INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each input signal. Number of instances: 1
Info. no. 64 65 66 Message Start L1 Start L2 Start L3 Supported Yes Yes Yes
RED 670
829

Info. no. 67 84 69 70 71 68 74 75 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 Message Start IN General start Trip L1 Trip L2 Trip L3 General trip Fault forward/line Fault reverse/busbar Breaker failure Trip measuring system L1 Trip measuring system L2 Trip measuring system L3 Trip measuring system N Over current trip I> Over current trip I>> Earth fault trip IN> Earth fault trip IN>> Supported Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Autorecloser indications in monitor direction, I103AR Indication block for autorecloser in monitor direction with defined functions. Number of instances: 1 FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block. INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each output signal.
Info. no. 16 128 130 Message Autorecloser active CB on by Autorecloser Autorecloser blocked Supported Yes Yes Yes
Measurands Function blocks in monitor direction for input measurands. Typically connected to monitoring function, for example to power measurement CVMMXU. Measurands in public range, I103Meas Number of instances: 1 The IED will report all valid measuring types depending on connected signals. Upper limit for measured currents, active/reactive-power is 2.4 times rated value. Upper limit for measured voltages and frequency is 1.2 times rated value. 830 Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B RED 670

Info. no. 148 144, 145, 148 148 147 148 148 148 145, 146 147 146, 148 146, 148 148 Message IL1 IL2 IL3 IN, Neutral current UL1 UL2 UL3 UL1-UL2 UN, Neutral voltage P, active power Q, reactive power f, frequency Supported Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Measurands in private range, I103MeasUsr Number of instances: 3 FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block in private range. Default values are defined in private range 25 27. One for each instance. INFORMATION NUMBER parameter for each block. Default value 1.
Info. no. Message Meas1 Meas2 Meas3 Meas4 Meas5 Meas6 Meas7 Meas8 Meas9 Supported Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Disturbance recordings The following elements are used in the ASDUs (Application Service Data Units) defined in the standard. Analog signals, 40-channels: the channel number for each channel has to be specified. Channels used in the public range are 1 to 8 and with: RED 670 IL1 connected to channel 1 on disturbance function block DRA1 IL2 connected to channel 2 on disturbance function block DRA1 IL3 connected to channel 3 on disturbance function block DRA1 831
IN connected to channel 4 on disturbance function block DRA1 VL1E connected to channel 5 on disturbance function block DRA1 VL2E connected to channel 6 on disturbance function block DRA1 VL3E connected to channel 7 on disturbance function block DRA1 VEN connected to channel 8 on disturbance function block DRA1
Channel number used for the remaining 32 analog signals are numbers in the private range 64 to 95. Binary signals, 96-channels: for each channel the user can specify a FUNCTION TYPE and an INFORMATION NUMBER. Disturbance Upload All analog and binary signals that are recorded with disturbance recorder will be reported to the master. The last eight disturbances that are recorded are available for transfer to the master. A successfully transferred disturbance (acknowledged by the master) will not be reported to the master again. When a new disturbance is recorded by the IED a list of available recorded disturbances will be sent to the master, an updated list of available disturbances will be sent whenever something has happened to disturbances in this list. I.e. when a disturbance is deleted (by other client e.g. SPA) or when a new disturbance has been recorded or when the master has uploaded a disturbance. Deviations from the standard Information sent in the disturbance upload is specified by the standard; however, some of the information are adapted to information available in disturbance recorder in Rex67x. This section describes all data that is not exactly as specified in the standard. ASDU23 In list of recorded disturbances (ASDU23) an information element named SOF (status of fault) exists. This information element consists of 4 bits and indicates whether: Bit TP: the protection equipment has tripped during the fault Bit TM: the disturbance data are currently being transmitted Bit TEST: the disturbance data have been recorded during normal operation or test mode. Bit OTEV: the disturbance data recording has been initiated by another event than start/pick-up
The only information that is easily available is test-mode status. The other information is always set (hard coded) to:
832
RED 670
TP TM OTEV
Recorded fault with trip. [1] Disturbance data waiting for transmission [0] Disturbance data initiated by other events [1]
Another information element in ASDU23 is the FAN (fault number). According to the standard this is a number that is incremented when a protection function takes action. In Rex67x FAN is equal to disturbance number, which is incremented for each disturbance. ASDU26 When a disturbance has been selected by the master; (by sending ASDU24), the protection equipment answers by sending ASDU26, which contains an information element named NOF (number of grid faults). This number should indicate fault number in the power system, i.e. a fault in the power system with several trip and auto-reclosing has the same NOF (while the FAN should be incremented). NOF is in Rex67x, just as FAN, equal to disturbance number. To get INF and FUN for the recorded binary signals there are parameters on the disturbance recorder for each input. The user must set these parameters to whatever he connects to the corresponding input. Interoperability, physical layer
Supported Electrical Interface EIA RS-485 number of loads Optical interface glass fibre plastic fibre Transmission speed 96000 bit/s 19200 bit/s Link Layer DFC-bit used Connectors connector F-SMA connector BFOC/2.5 No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
RED 670
833

Interoperability, application layer
Supported Selection of standard ASDUs in monitoring direction ASDU 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 23 26 27 28 29 30 31 Time-tagged message Time-tagged message with rel. time Measurands I Time-tagged message with rel. time Identification Time synchronization End of general interrogation Measurands II Generic data Generic identification List of recorded disturbances Ready for transm. of disturbance data Ready for transm. of a channel Ready for transm of tags Transmission of tags Transmission fo disturbance data End of transmission Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Selection of standard ASDUs in control direction ASDU 6 7 10 20 21 24 25 Time synchronization General interrogation Generic data General command Generic command Order for disturbance data transmission Acknowledgement for distance data transmission Yes Yes Yes No Yes No Yes Yes
Selection of basic application functions Test mode Blocking of monitoring direction Disturbance data Private data Generic services No Yes Yes Yes No
834
RED 670

16.5.2.2 Communication ports
The serial communication module (SLM) is used for SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 and LON communication. This module is a mezzanine module, and can be placed on the Analog/Digital conversion module (ADM). The serial communication module can have connectors for two plastic fiber cables (snap-in) or two glass fiber cables (ST, bayonet) or a combination of plastic and glass fiber. Three different types are available depending on type of fiber. The incoming optical fiber is connected to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing optical fiber to the TX transmitter output. When the fiber optic cables are laid out, pay special attention to the instructions concerning the handling, connection, etc. of the optical fibers. The module is identified with a number on the label on the module.
16.5.3
Function block
BLOCK ICMAI103IEDCMD 19-LEDRS 23-GRP1 24-GRP2 25-GRP3 26-GRP4 en05000689.vsd
ICMDI103CMD BLOCK 16-AR 17-DIFF 18-PROT en05000684.vsd
BLOCK
ICM1I103UserCMD OUTPUT1 OUTPUT2 OUTPUT3 OUTPUT4 OUTPUT5 OUTPUT6 OUTPUT7 OUTPUT8 en05000693.vsd
IEV1I103IED BLOCK 19_LEDRS 23_GRP1 24_GRP2 25_GRP3 26_GRP4 21_TESTM en05000688.vsd
RED 670
835
IS01I103UsrDef BLOCK INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 en05000694.vsd
ISU1I103Superv BLOCK 32_MEASI 33_MEASU 37_IBKUP 38_VTFF 46_GRWA 47_GRAL en05000692.vsd
ISEFI103EF BLOCK 51_EFFW 52_EFREV en05000685.vsd
IZ01I103FltDis BLOCK 64_STL1 65_STL2 66_STL3 67_STIN 84_STGEN 69_TRL1 70_TRL2 71_TRL3 68_TRGEN 74_FW 75_REV 78_ZONE1 79_ZONE2 80_ZONE3 81_ZONE4 82_ZONE5 76_TRANS 77_RECEV 73_SCL FLTLOC ARINPROG en05000686.vsd
836
RED 670
IFL1I103FltStd BLOCK 64_STL1 65_STL2 66_STL3 67_STIN 84_STGEN 69_TRL1 70_TRL2 71_TRL3 68_TRGEN 74_FW 75_REV 85_BFP 86_MTRL1 87_MTRL2 88_MTRL3 89_MTRN 90_IOC 91_IOC 92_IEF 93_IEF ARINPROG en05000687.vsd
IAR1I103AR BLOCK 16_ARACT 128_CBON 130_UNSU en05000683.vsd
IMM1I103Meas BLOCK IL1 IL2 IL3 IN UL1 UL2 UL3 UL1L2 UN P Q F en05000690.vsd
IMU1I103MeasUsr BLOCK INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 en05000691.vsd
16.5.4
RED 670

Table 505:
Signal BLOCK 16_ARACT 128_CBON 130_UNSU
Input signals for the I103AR (IAR1-) function block

Description Block of status reporting Information number 16, auto-recloser active Information number 128, circuit breaker on by auto-recloser Information number 130, unsuccessful reclosing
Table 506:
Signal BLOCK
Input signals for the I103IEDCMD (ICMA-) function block

Description Block of commands
Table 507:
Signal BLOCK
Input signals for the I103CMD (ICMD-) function block

Table 508:
Signal BLOCK 19_LEDRS 23_GRP1 24_GRP2 25_GRP3 26_GRP4 21_TESTM
Input signals for the I103IED (IEV1-) function block

Description Block of status reporting Information number 19, reset LEDs Information number 23, setting group 1 is active Information number 24, setting group 2 is active Information number 25, setting group 3 is active Information number 26, setting group 4 is active Information number 21, test mode is active
Table 509:
Signal BLOCK
Input signals for the I103UserCMD (ICM1-) function block

Table 510:
Signal BLOCK INPUT1 INPUT2
Input signals for the I103UsrDef (IS01-) function block

Description Block of status reporting Binary signal Input 1 Binary signal input 2
838
RED 670

Signal INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 Description Binary signal input 3 Binary signal input 4 Binary signal input 5 Binary signal input 6 Binary signal input 7 Binary signal input 8
Table 511:
Signal BLOCK 32_MEASI 33_MEASU 37_IBKUP 38_VTFF 46_GRWA 47_GRAL
Input signals for the I103Superv (ISU1-) function block

Description Block of status reporting Information number 32, measurand supervision of I Information number 33, measurand supervision of U Information number 37, I high-high back-up protection Information number 38, fuse failure VT Information number 46, group warning Information number 47, group alarm
Table 512:
Signal BLOCK 51_EFFW 52_EFREV
Input signals for the I103EF (ISEF-) function block

Description Block of status reporting Information number 51, earth-fault forward Information number 52, earth-fault reverse
Table 513:
Signal BLOCK 64_STL1 65_STL2 66_STL3 67_STIN 84_STGEN 69_TRL1 70_TRL2 71_TRL3 68_TRGEN 74_FW
Input signals for the I103FltDis (IZ01-) function block

Description Block of status reporting Information number 64, start phase L1 Information number 65, start phase L2 Information number 66, start phase L3 Information number 67, start residual current IN Information number 84, start general Information number 69, trip phase L1 Information number 70, trip phase L2 Information number 71, trip phase L3 Information number 68, trip general Information number 74, forward/line
RED 670
839

Signal 75_REV 78_ZONE1 79_ZONE2 80_ZONE3 81_ZONE4 82_ZONE5 76_TRANS 77_RECEV 73_SCL FLTLOC ARINPROG Description Information number 75, reverse/bus Information number 78, zone 1 Information number 79, zone 2 Information number 79, zone 3 Information number 79, zone 4 Information number 79, zone 5 Information number 76, signal transmitted Information number 77, signal recevied Information number 73, fault location in ohm Faultlocator faultlocation valid (LMBRFLO-CALCMADE) Autorecloser in progress (SMBRREC- INPROGR)
Table 514:
Signal BLOCK 64_STL1 65_STL2 66_STL3 67_STIN 84_STGEN 69_TRL1 70_TRL2 71_TRL3 68_TRGEN 74_FW 75_REV 85_BFP 86_MTRL1 87_MTRL2 88_MTRL3 89_MTRN 90_IOC 91_IOC 92_IEF 93_IEF ARINPROG
Input signals for the I103FltStd (IFL1-) function block

Description Block of status reporting Information number 64, start phase L1 Information number 65, start phase L2 Information number 66, start phase L3 Information number 67, start residual curent IN Information number 84, start general Information number 69, trip phase L1 Information number 70, trip phase L2 Information number 71, trip phase L3 Information number 68, trip general Information number 74, forward/line Information number 75, reverse/bus Information number 85, breaker failure Information number 86, trip measuring system phase L1 Information number 87, trip measuring system phase L2 Information number 88, trip measuring system phase L3 Information number 89, trip measuring system neutral N Information number 90, over current trip, stage low Information number 91, over current trip, stage high Information number 92, earth-fault trip, stage low Information number 93, earth-fault trip, stage high Autorecloser in progress (SMBRREC- INPROGR)
840
RED 670
Table 515:
Signal BLOCK INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9
Input signals for the I103MeasUsr (IMU1-) function block

Description Block of service value reporting Service value for measurement on input 1 Service value for measurement on input 2 Service value for measurement on input 3 Service value for measurement on input 4 Service value for measurement on input 5 Service value for measurement on input 6 Service value for measurement on input 7 Service value for measurement on input 8 Service value for measurement on input 9
Table 516:
Signal BLOCK IL1 IL2 IL3 IN UL1 UL2 UL3 UL1L2 UN P Q F
Input signals for the I103Meas (IMM1-) function block

Description Block of service value reporting Service value for current phase L1 Service value for current phase L2 Service value for current phase L3 Service value for residual current IN Service value for voltage phase L1 Service value for voltage phase L2 Service value for voltage phase L3 Service value for voltage phase-phase L1-L2 Service value for residual voltage UN Service value for active power Service value for reactive power Service value for system frequency
Table 517:
Signal 19-LEDRS 23-GRP1 24-GRP2 25-GRP3 26-GRP4
Output signals for the I103IEDCMD (ICMA-) function block

Description Information number 19, reset LEDs Information number 23, activate setting group 1 Information number 24, activate setting group 2 Information number 25, activate setting group 3 Information number 26, activate setting group 4
RED 670
841
Table 518:
Signal 16-AR 17-DIFF 18-PROT
Output signals for the I103CMD (ICMD-) function block

Description Information number 16, block of autorecloser Information number 17, block of differential protection Information number 18, block of protection
Table 519:
Signal OUTPUT1 OUTPUT2 OUTPUT3 OUTPUT4 OUTPUT5 OUTPUT6 OUTPUT7 OUTPUT8
Output signals for the I103UserCMD (ICM1-) function block

Description Command output 1 Command output 2 Command output 3 Command output 4 Command output 5 Command output 6 Command output 7 Command output 8
16.5.5
Setting parameters
Table 520:
Parameter SlaveAddress BaudRate RevPolarity CycMeasRepTim e
General settings for the I103SLM (IECC-) function

Range 0 - 255 9600 Bd 19200 Bd Off On 1.0 - 3600.0 Step 1 0.1 Default 30 9600 Bd On 5.0 Unit Description Slave address Baudrate on serial line Invert polarity Cyclic reporting time of measurments
Table 521:
Parameter FUNTYPE
General settings for the I103IEDCMD (ICMA-) function

Range 1 - 255 Step 1 Default 255 Unit FunT Description Function type (1-255)
Table 522:
Parameter FUNTYPE
General settings for the I103CMD (ICMD-) function

842
RED 670
Table 523:
Parameter FUNTYPE
General settings for the I103IED (IEV1-) function

Table 524:
Parameter PULSEMOD T FUNTYPE INFNO_1 INFNO_2 INFNO_3 INFNO_4 INFNO_5 INFNO_6 INFNO_7 INFNO_8
General settings for the I103UserCMD (ICM1-) function

Range 0-1 0.200 - 60.000 1 - 255 1 - 255 1 - 255 1 - 255 1 - 255 1 - 255 1 - 255 1 - 255 1 - 255 Step 1 0.001 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Default 1 0.400 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Unit Mode s FunT InfNo InfNo InfNo InfNo InfNo InfNo InfNo InfNo Description Pulse mode 0=Steady, 1=Pulsed Pulse length Function type (1-255) Information number for output 1 (1-255) Information number for output 2 (1-255) Information number for output 3 (1-255) Information number for output 4 (1-255) Information number for output 5 (1-255) Information number for output 6 (1-255) Information number for output 7 (1-255) Information number for output 8 (1-255)
Table 525:
Parameter FUNTYPE INFNO_1
General settings for the I103UsrDef (IS01-) function

Range 1 - 255 1 - 255 Step 1 1 Default 5 1 Unit FunT InfNo Description Function type (1-255) Information number for binary input 1 (1-255) Information number for binary input 2 (1-255) Information number for binary input 3 (1-255) Information number for binary input 4 (1-255) Information number for binary input 5 (1-255)
INFNO_2
1 - 255
InfNo
INFNO_3
1 - 255
InfNo
INFNO_4
1 - 255
InfNo
INFNO_5
1 - 255
InfNo
RED 670
843

Parameter INFNO_6 Range 1 - 255 Step 1 Default 6 Unit InfNo Description Information number for binary input 6 (1-255) Information number for binary input 7 (1-255) Information number for binary input 8 (1-255)
INFNO_7
1 - 255
InfNo
INFNO_8
1 - 255
InfNo
Table 526:
Parameter FUNTYPE
General settings for the I103Superv (ISU1-) function

Table 527:
Parameter FUNTYPE
General settings for the I103EF (ISEF-) function

Table 528:
Parameter FUNTYPE
General settings for the I103FltDis (IZ01-) function

Table 529:
Parameter FUNTYPE
General settings for the I103FltStd (IFL1-) function

Table 530:
Parameter FUNTYPE INFNO
General settings for the I103MeasUsr (IMU1-) function

Range 1 - 255 1 - 255 Step 1 1 Default 25 1 Unit FunT InfNo Description Function type (1-255) Information number for measurands (1-255) Rated value for measurement on input 1 Rated value for measurement on input 2
RatedMeasur1
0.05 10000000000.00 0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
RatedMeasur2
0.05
1000.00
844
RED 670

Parameter RatedMeasur3 Range 0.05 10000000000.00 0.05 10000000000.00 0.05 10000000000.00 0.05 10000000000.00 0.05 10000000000.00 0.05 10000000000.00 0.05 10000000000.00 Step 0.05 Default 1000.00 Unit Description Rated value for measurement on input 3 Rated value for measurement on input 4 Rated value for measurement on input 5 Rated value for measurement on input 6 Rated value for measurement on input 7 Rated value for measurement on input 8 Rated value for measurement on input 9
RatedMeasur4
0.05
1000.00
RatedMeasur5
0.05
1000.00
RatedMeasur6
0.05
1000.00
RatedMeasur7
0.05
1000.00
RatedMeasur8
0.05
1000.00
RatedMeasur9
0.05
1000.00
Table 531:
Parameter RatedIL1 RatedIL2 RatedIL3 RatedIN RatedUL1 RatedUL2 RatedUL3 RatedUL1-UL2 RatedUN RatedP RatedQ RatedF FUNTYPE
Basic general settings for the I103Meas (IMM1-) function

Range 1 - 99999 1 - 99999 1 - 99999 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 - 2000.00 0.00 - 2000.00 0.00 - 2000.00 50.0 - 60.0 1 - 255 Step 1 1 1 1 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 10.0 1 Default 3000 3000 3000 3000 230.00 230.00 230.00 400.00 230.00 1200.00 1200.00 50.0 1 Unit A A A A kV kV kV kV kV MW MVA Hz FunT Description Rated current phase L1 Rated current phase L2 Rated current phase L3 Rated residual current IN Rated voltage for phase L1 Rated voltage for phase L2 Rated voltage for phase L3 Rated voltage for phase-phase L1-L2 Rated residual voltage UN Rated value for active power Rated value for reactive power Rated system frequency Function type (1-255)
RED 670
845
Section 16 Station communication 16.5.6 Technical data

Table 532:
Function Protocol Communication speed

Value IEC 60870-5-103 9600, 19200 Bd
16.6
16.6.1
Automation bits (AUBI)

Introduction
The AUBI function block (or the automation bits function block) is used within the CAP tool in order to get into the configuration the commands coming through the DNP3.0 protocol. In this respect, this function block plays the same role as the BinGOOSEReceive (for IEC61850) or MultiCmdReceive (for LON).
16.6.2
The AUBI function block have 32 individual outputs which each can be mapped as a Binary Output point in DNP. The output is operated by a "Object 12" in DNP. This object contains parameters for control-code, count, on-time and off-time. To operate a AUBI output point you send a control-code of latch-On, latch-Off, pulse-On, pulseOff, Trip or Close. The remaining parameters will be regarded were appropriate. ex: pulse-On, on-time=100, off-time=300, count=5 would give you 5 positive 100 ms pulses, 300 ms apart. There is a BLOCK inputs signal, which will disable the operation of the function, in the same way the setting Operation: On/Off does. That means that upon activation of the BLOCK input, all 32 CMDBITxx outputs will be set on 0. The BLOCK acts like an overriding, the function still receiving data from the DNP master. Upon deactivation of BLOCK, all the 32 CMDBITxx outputs will be set by the DNP master again, momentarily. For the AUBI, the PSTO input determines the operator place. The command can be written to the block while in Remote. If PSTO is in Local then no change is applied to the outputs.
846
RED 670
Section 16 Station communication 16.6.3 Function block

ABI1AutoBits BLOCK PSTO NAME1 NAME2 NAME3 NAME4 NAME5 NAME6 NAME7 NAME8 NAME9 NAME10 NAME11 NAME12 NAME13 NAME14 NAME15 NAME16 NAME17 NAME18 NAME19 NAME20 NAME21 NAME22 NAME23 NAME24 NAME25 NAME26 NAME27 NAME28 NAME29 NAME30 NAME31 NAME32 CMDBIT1 CMDBIT2 CMDBIT3 CMDBIT4 CMDBIT5 CMDBIT6 CMDBIT7 CMDBIT8 CMDBIT9 CMDBIT10 CMDBIT11 CMDBIT12 CMDBIT13 CMDBIT14 CMDBIT15 CMDBIT16 CMDBIT17 CMDBIT18 CMDBIT19 CMDBIT20 CMDBIT21 CMDBIT22 CMDBIT23 CMDBIT24 CMDBIT25 CMDBIT26 CMDBIT27 CMDBIT28 CMDBIT29 CMDBIT30 CMDBIT31 CMDBIT32
en06000504.vsd
Figure 400:
AUBI function block
16.6.4

Table 533:
Signal BLOCK PSTO
Input signals for the AutoBits (ABI1-) function block

Description Block of function Operator place selection
Table 534:
Signal CMDBIT1 CMDBIT2 CMDBIT3 CMDBIT4 CMDBIT5
Output signals for the AutoBits (ABI1-) function block

Description Command out bit 1 Command out bit 2 Command out bit 3 Command out bit 4 Command out bit 5
RED 670
847

Signal CMDBIT6 CMDBIT7 CMDBIT8 CMDBIT9 CMDBIT10 CMDBIT11 CMDBIT12 CMDBIT13 CMDBIT14 CMDBIT15 CMDBIT16 CMDBIT17 CMDBIT18 CMDBIT19 CMDBIT20 CMDBIT21 CMDBIT22 CMDBIT23 CMDBIT24 CMDBIT25 CMDBIT26 CMDBIT27 CMDBIT28 CMDBIT29 CMDBIT30 CMDBIT31 CMDBIT32 Description Command out bit 6 Command out bit 7 Command out bit 8 Command out bit 9 Command out bit 10 Command out bit 11 Command out bit 12 Command out bit 13 Command out bit 14 Command out bit 15 Command out bit 16 Command out bit 17 Command out bit 18 Command out bit 19 Command out bit 20 Command out bit 21 Command out bit 22 Command out bit 23 Command out bit 24 Command out bit 25 Command out bit 26 Command out bit 27 Command out bit 28 Command out bit 29 Command out bit 30 Command out bit 31 Command out bit 32
16.6.5
Setting parameters
Table 535:
Parameter Operation
Basic general settings for the AutoBits (ABI1-) function

Range Off On Step Default Off Unit Description Operation Off / On
Table 536:
Parameter Operation
Basic general settings for the DNP3 (DNP--) function

Range Off ON Step Default Off Unit Description Operation mode Off / On
848
RED 670
Table 537:
Parameter Operation BaudRate
Basic general settings for the DNP3Ch1RS485 (DNC1-) function

Range Off Serial-Mode 300 Bd 600 Bd 1200 Bd 2400 Bd 4800 Bd 9600 Bd 19200 Bd Four-wire Two-wire Step Default Off 9600 Bd Unit Description Operation mode Baud-rate for serial port
WireMode
Two-wire
RS485 wire mode
Table 538:
Parameter DLinkConfirm
Advanced general settings for the DNP3Ch1RS485 (DNC1-) function

Range Never Sometimes Always 0.000 - 60.000 0 - 255 0.000 - 60.000 5-8 1-2 No Even Odd No Yes 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Step Default Never Unit Description Data-link confirm
tDLinkTimeout DLinkRetries tRxToTxMinDel DataBits StopBits Parity
0.001 1 0.001 1 1 -
2.000 3 0.000 8 1 Even
s s -
Data-link confirm timeout in s Data-link maximum retries Rx to Tx minimum delay in s Data bits Stop bits Parity
RTSEnable tRTSWarmUp tRTSWarmDown tBackOffDelay tMaxRndDelBkOf
0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001
No 0.000 0.000 0.050 0.100
s s s s
RTS enable RTS warm-up in s RTS warm-down in s RS485 back-off delay in s RS485 maximum back-off random delay in s
RED 670
849
Table 539:
Parameter Operation
Basic general settings for the DNP3Ch2TCPIP (DNC2-) function

Range Off TCP/IP UDP-Only 1 - 65535 1 - 65535 Step Default Off Unit Description Operation mode
TCPIPLisPort UDPPortAccData
1 1
20000 20000
TCP/IP listen port UDP port to accept UDP datagrams from master UDP portfor initial NULL response UDP port to remote client/master
UDPPortInitNUL UDPPortCliMast
1 - 65535 0 - 65535
1 1
20000 0
Table 540:
Parameter Operation

1 1
20000 20000
TCP/IP listen port UDP port to accept UDP datagrams from master UDP port for initial NULL response UDP port to remote client/master
1 - 65535 0 - 65535
1 1
20000 0
Table 541:
Parameter Operation

1 1
20000 20000
1 - 65535 0 - 65535
1 1
20000 0
850
RED 670
Table 542:
Parameter Operation

1 1
20000 20000
1 - 65535 0 - 65535
1 1
20000 0
Table 543:
Parameter Operation SlaveAddress MasterAddres Obj1DefVar Obj2DefVar
Basic general settings for the DNP3Mast1RS485 (DNM1-) function

Range Off ON 0 - 65519 0 - 65519 1:BISingleBit 2:BIWithStatus 1:BIChWithoutTim e 2:BIChWithTime 3:BIChWithRelTi me 1:DIChWithoutTim e 2:DIChWithTime 3:DIChWithRelTi me 1:BO 2:BOStatus 1:BinCnt32 2:BinCnt16 5:BinCnt32WoutF 6:BinCnt16WoutF Step 1 1 Default Off 1 1 1:BISingleBit 3:BIChWithRelTi me Unit Description Operation Off / On Slave address Master address Object 1, default variation Object 2, default variation
Obj4DefVar
3:DIChWithRelTi me
Object 4, default variation
Obj10DefVar Obj20DefVar
2:BOStatus 5:BinCnt32WoutF
Object 10, default variation Object 20, default variation
RED 670
851

Parameter Obj22DefVar Range 1:BinCnt32EvWou tT 2:BinCnt16EvWou tT 5:BinCnt32EvWith T 6:BinCnt16EvWith T 1:AI32Int 2:AI16Int 3:AI32IntWithoutF 4:AI16IntWithoutF 5:AI32FltWithF 6:AI64FltWithF 1:AI32IntEvWoutF 2:AI16IntEvWoutF 3:AI32IntEvWithF T 4:AI16IntEvWithF T 5:AI32FltEvWithF 6:AI64FltEvWithF 7:AI32FltEvWithF T 8:AI64FltEvWithF T Step Default 1:BinCnt32EvWou tT Unit Description Object 22, default variation
Obj30DefVar
3:AI32IntWithoutF
Obj32DefVar
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
Table 544:
Parameter ValMasterAddr AddrQueryEnbl tApplConfTout ApplMultFrgRes
Advanced general settings for the DNP3Mast1RS485 (DNM1-) function

Range No Yes No Yes 0.00 - 60.00 No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes Off Class 1 Class 2 Class 1 and 2 Class 3 Class 1 and 3 Class 2 and 3 Class 1, 2 and 3 Step 0.01 Default Yes Yes 10.00 Yes Unit s Description Validate source (master) address Address query enable Application layer confim timeout Enable application for multiple fragment response Confirm each multiple fragment Unsolicited response enabled Unsolicited response sends when on-line Unsolicited response, event class mask
ConfMultFrag UREnable URSendOnline UREvClassMask
Yes Yes No Off
852
RED 670

Parameter UROfflineRetry Range 0 - 10 Step 1 Default 5 Unit Description Unsolicited response retries before off-line retry mode Unsolicited response retry delay in s Unsolicited response off-line retry delay in s Unsolicited response class 1 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 1 event buffer timeout Unsolicited response class 2 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 2 event buffer timeout Unsolicited response class 3 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 3 event buffer timeout Delete oldest event when buffer is full Time synch timeout before error status is generated Time synchronization request after timeout Allow DNP to set time in IED Use average of 3 time requests Enable paired point Select timeout
tURRetryDelay tUROfflRtryDel UREvCntThold1
0.00 - 60.00 0.00 - 60.00 1 - 100
0.01 0.01 1
5.00 30.00 5
s s -
tUREvBufTout1
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
UREvCntThold2
1 - 100
tUREvBufTout2
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
UREvCntThold3
1 - 100
tUREvBufTout3
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
DelOldBufFull tSynchTimeout
No Yes 1 - 3600
No 1800
TSyncReqAfTout DNPToSetTime Averag3TimeReq PairedPoint tSelectTimeout
No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes 1.0 - 60.0
0.1
Yes No No Yes 30.0
Table 545:
Parameter Operation SlaveAddress MasterAddres ValMasterAddr
Basic general settings for the DNP3Mast2TCPIP (DNM2-) function

Range Off ON 0 - 65519 0 - 65519 No Yes Step 1 1 Default Off 1 1 Yes Unit Description Operation Off / On Slave address Master address Validate source (master) address
RED 670
853

Parameter MasterIP-Addr MasterIPNetMsk Obj1DefVar Obj2DefVar Range 0 - 18 0 - 18 1:BISingleBit 2:BIWithStatus 1:BIChWithoutTim e 2:BIChWithTime 3:BIChWithRelTi me 1:DIChWithoutTim e 2:DIChWithTime 3:DIChWithRelTi me 1:BO 2:BOStatus 1:BinCnt32 2:BinCnt16 5:BinCnt32WoutF 6:BinCnt16WoutF 1:BinCnt32EvWou tT 2:BinCnt16EvWou tT 5:BinCnt32EvWith T 6:BinCnt16EvWith T 1:AI32Int 2:AI16Int 3:AI32IntWithoutF 4:AI16IntWithoutF 5:AI32FltWithF 6:AI64FltWithF 1:AI32IntEvWoutF 2:AI16IntEvWoutF 3:AI32IntEvWithF T 4:AI16IntEvWithF T 5:AI32FltEvWithF 6:AI64FltEvWithF 7:AI32FltEvWithF T 8:AI64FltEvWithF T Step 1 1 Default 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 1:BISingleBit 3:BIChWithRelTi me Unit Description Master IP-address Master IP net mask Object 1, default variation Object 2, default variation
Obj4DefVar
3:DIChWithRelTi me
Obj22DefVar
1:BinCnt32EvWou tT
Obj30DefVar
3:AI32IntWithoutF
Obj32DefVar
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
854
RED 670
Table 546:
Parameter AddrQueryEnbl tApplConfTout ApplMultFrgRes
Advanced general settings for the DNP3Mast2TCPIP (DNM2-) function

Range No Yes 0.00 - 60.00 No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes Off Class 1 Class 2 Class 1 and 2 Class 3 Class 1 and 3 Class 2 and 3 Class 1, 2 and 3 0 - 10 Step 0.01 Default Yes 10.00 Yes Unit s Description Address query enable Application layer confim timeout Enable application for multiple fragment response Confirm each multiple fragment Unsolicited response enabled Unsolicited response sends when on-line Unsolicited response, event class mask
Yes Yes No Off
UROfflineRetry
Unsolicited response retries before off-line retry mode Unsolicited response retry delay in s Unsolicited response off-line retry delay in s Unsolicited response class 1 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 1 event buffer timeout Unsolicited response class 2 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 2 event buffer timeout Unsolicited response class 3 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 3 event buffer timeout Delete oldest event when buffer is full Time synch timeout before error status is generated
0.00 - 60.00 0.00 - 60.00 1 - 100
0.01 0.01 1
5.00 30.00 5
s s -
tUREvBufTout1
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
UREvCntThold2
1 - 100
tUREvBufTout2
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
UREvCntThold3
1 - 100
tUREvBufTout3
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
No Yes 1 - 3600
No 1800
RED 670
855

Parameter TSyncReqAfTout DNPToSetTime Averag3TimeReq PairedPoint tSelectTimeout tBrokenConTout tKeepAliveT Range No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes 1.0 - 60.0 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 Step 0.1 1 1 Default Yes No No Yes 30.0 0 10 Unit s s s Description Time synchronization request after timeout Allow DNP to set time in IED Use average of 3 time requests Enable paired point Select timeout Broken connection timeout Keep-Alive timer
Table 547:
Parameter Operation SlaveAddress MasterAddres ValMasterAddr MasterIP-Addr MasterIPNetMsk Obj1DefVar Obj2DefVar

Range Off ON 0 - 65519 0 - 65519 No Yes 0 - 18 0 - 18 1:BISingleBit 2:BIWithStatus 1:BIChWithoutTim e 2:BIChWithTime 3:BIChWithRelTi me 1:DIChWithoutTim e 2:DIChWithTime 3:DIChWithRelTi me 1:BO 2:BOStatus 1:BinCnt32 2:BinCnt16 5:BinCnt32WoutF 6:BinCnt16WoutF Step 1 1 1 1 Default Off 1 1 Yes 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 1:BISingleBit 3:BIChWithRelTi me Unit Description Operation Off / On Slave address Master address Validate source (master) address Master IP-address Master IP net mask Object 1, default variation Object 2, default variation
Obj4DefVar
3:DIChWithRelTi me
856
RED 670

Obj30DefVar
3:AI32IntWithoutF
Obj32DefVar
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
Table 548:

Yes Yes No Off
UROfflineRetry
Unsolicited response retries before off-line retry mode
RED 670
857

Parameter tURRetryDelay tUROfflRtryDel UREvCntThold1 Range 0.00 - 60.00 0.00 - 60.00 1 - 100 Step 0.01 0.01 1 Default 5.00 30.00 5 Unit s s Description Unsolicited response retry delay in s Unsolicited response off-line retry delay in s Unsolicited response class 1 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 1 event buffer timeout Unsolicited response class 2 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 2 event buffer timeout Unsolicited response class 3 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 3 event buffer timeout Delete oldest event when buffer is full Time synch timeout before error status is generated Time synchronization request after timeout Allow DNP to set time in IED Use average of 3 time requests Enable paired point Select timeout Broken connection timeout Keep-Alive timer
tUREvBufTout1
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
UREvCntThold2
1 - 100
tUREvBufTout2
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
UREvCntThold3
1 - 100
tUREvBufTout3
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
No Yes 1 - 3600
No 1800
TSyncReqAfTout DNPToSetTime Averag3TimeReq PairedPoint tSelectTimeout tBrokenConTout tKeepAliveT
No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes 1.0 - 60.0 0 - 3600 0 - 3600
0.1 1 1
Yes No No Yes 30.0 0 10
s s s
Table 549:
Parameter Operation SlaveAddress MasterAddres ValMasterAddr

Range Off ON 0 - 65519 0 - 65519 No Yes Step 1 1 Default Off 1 1 Yes Unit Description Operation Off / On Slave address Master address Validate source (master) address
858
RED 670

Parameter MasterIP-Addr MasterIPNetMsk Obj1DefVar Obj2DefVar Range 0 - 18 0 - 18 1:BISingleBit 2:BIWithStatus 1:BIChWithoutTim e 2:BIChWithTime 3:BIChWithRelTi me 1:DIChWithoutTim e 2:DIChWithTime 3:DIChWithRelTi me 1:BO 2:BOStatus 1:BinCnt32 2:BinCnt16 5:BinCnt32WoutF 6:BinCnt16WoutF 1:BinCnt32EvWou tT 2:BinCnt16EvWou tT 5:BinCnt32EvWith T 6:BinCnt16EvWith T 1:AI32Int 2:AI16Int 3:AI32IntWithoutF 4:AI16IntWithoutF 5:AI32FltWithF 6:AI64FltWithF 1:AI32IntEvWoutF 2:AI16IntEvWoutF 3:AI32IntEvWithF T 4:AI16IntEvWithF T 5:AI32FltEvWithF 6:AI64FltEvWithF 7:AI32FltEvWithF T 8:AI64FltEvWithF T Step 1 1 Default 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 1:BISingleBit 3:BIChWithRelTi me Unit Description Master IP-address Master IP net mask Object 1, default variation Object 2, default variation
Obj4DefVar
3:DIChWithRelTi me
Obj22DefVar
1:BinCnt32EvWou tT
Obj30DefVar
3:AI32IntWithoutF
Obj32DefVar
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
RED 670
859
Table 550:

Yes Yes No Off
UROfflineRetry
Unsolicited response retries before off-line retry mode Unsolicited response retry delay in s Unsolicited response off-line retry delay in s Unsolicited response class 1 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 1 event buffer timeout Unsolicited response class 2 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 2 event buffer timeout Unsolicited response class 3 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 3 event buffer timeout Delete oldest event when buffer is full Time synch timeout before error status is generated
0.00 - 60.00 0.00 - 60.00 1 - 100
0.01 0.01 1
5.00 30.00 5
s s -
tUREvBufTout1
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
UREvCntThold2
1 - 100
tUREvBufTout2
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
UREvCntThold3
1 - 100
tUREvBufTout3
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
No Yes 1 - 3600
No 1800
860
RED 670

Parameter TSyncReqAfTout DNPToSetTime Averag3TimeReq PairedPoint tSelectTimeout tBrokenConTout tKeepAliveT Range No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes 1.0 - 60.0 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 Step 0.1 1 1 Default Yes No No Yes 30.0 0 10 Unit s s s Description Time synchronization request after timeout Allow DNP to set time in IED Use average of 3 time requests Enable paired point Select timeout Broken connection timeout Keep-Alive timer
Table 551:
Parameter Operation SlaveAddress MasterAddres ValMasterAddr MasterIP-Addr MasterIPNetMsk Obj1DefVar Obj2DefVar

Range Off ON 0 - 65519 0 - 65519 No Yes 0 - 18 0 - 18 1:BISingleBit 2:BIWithStatus 1:BIChWithoutTim e 2:BIChWithTime 3:BIChWithRelTi me 1:DIChWithoutTim e 2:DIChWithTime 3:DIChWithRelTi me 1:BO 2:BOStatus 1:BinCnt32 2:BinCnt16 5:BinCnt32WoutF 6:BinCnt16WoutF Step 1 1 1 1 Default Off 1 1 Yes 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 1:BISingleBit 3:BIChWithRelTi me Unit Description Operation Off / On Slave address Master address Validate source (master) address Master IP-address Master IP net mask Object 1, default variation Object 2, default variation
Obj4DefVar
3:DIChWithRelTi me
RED 670
861

Obj30DefVar
3:AI32IntWithoutF
Obj32DefVar
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
Table 552:

Yes Yes No Off
UROfflineRetry
Unsolicited response retries before off-line retry mode
862
RED 670

Parameter tURRetryDelay tUROfflRtryDel UREvCntThold1 Range 0.00 - 60.00 0.00 - 60.00 1 - 100 Step 0.01 0.01 1 Default 5.00 30.00 5 Unit s s Description Unsolicited response retry delay in s Unsolicited response off-line retry delay in s Unsolicited response class 1 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 1 event buffer timeout Unsolicited response class 2 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 2 event buffer timeout Unsolicited response class 3 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 3 event buffer timeout Delete oldest event when buffer is full Time synch timeout before error status is generated Time synchronization request after timeout Allow DNP to set time in IED Use average of 3 time requests Enable paired point Select timeout Broken connection timeout Keep-Alive timer
tUREvBufTout1
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
UREvCntThold2
1 - 100
tUREvBufTout2
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
UREvCntThold3
1 - 100
tUREvBufTout3
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
No Yes 1 - 3600
No 1800
TSyncReqAfTout DNPToSetTime Averag3TimeReq PairedPoint tSelectTimeout tBrokenConTout tKeepAliveT
No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes 1.0 - 60.0 0 - 3600 0 - 3600
0.1 1 1
Yes No No Yes 30.0 0 10
s s s
16.7
16.7.1
Single command, 16 signals (CD)

Introduction
The IEDs can receive commands either from a substation automation system or from the local human-machine interface, LHMI. The command function block has outputs that can be used, for example, to control high voltage apparatuses or for other user defined functionality.
RED 670
863
Section 16 Station communication 16.7.2 Principle of operation

The single command function consists of a function block CD for 16 binary output signals. The outputs can be individually controlled from a substation automation system or from the local HMI. Each output signal can be given a name with a maximum of 13 characters from the CAP configuration tool. The output signals can be of the types Off, Steady, or Pulse. This configuration setting is done via the LHMI or PCM 600 and is common for the whole function block. The length of the output pulses are 100 ms. In steady mode the function block has a memory to remember the output values at power interruption of the IED. Also a BLOCK input is available used to block the updating of the outputs. The output signals, here OUT1 to OUT16, are then available for configuration to built-in functions or via the configuration logic circuits to the binary outputs of the IED.
16.7.3
Function block
CD01SingleCmd BLOCK NAME1 NAME2 NAME3 NAME4 NAME5 NAME6 NAME7 NAME8 NAME9 NAME10 NAME11 NAME12 NAME13 NAME14 NAME15 NAME16 OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 OUT8 OUT9 OUT10 OUT11 OUT12 OUT13 OUT14 OUT15 OUT16
en05000698.vsd
16.7.4

Table 553:
Signal BLOCK
Input signals for the SingleCmd (CD01-) function block

Description Block single command function
864
RED 670
Table 554:
Output signals for the SingleCmd (CD01-) function block

Description Single command output 1 Single command output 2 Single command output 3 Single command output 4 Single command output 5 Single command output 6 Single command output 7 Single command output 8 Single command output 9 Single command output 10 Single command output 11 Single command output 12 Single command output 13 Single command output 14 Single command output 15 Single command output 16
16.7.5
Setting parameters
Table 555:
Parameter Mode
Basic general settings for the SingleCmd (CD01-) function

Range Off Steady Pulsed Step Default Off Unit Description Operation mode
16.8
16.8.1
Multiple command (CM) and Multiple transmit (MT)

Introduction
The IED may be provided with a function to send and receive signals to and from other IEDs via the interbay bus. The send and receive function blocks has 16 outputs/ inputs that can be used, together with the configuration logic circuits, for control purposes within the IED or via binary outputs. When it is used to communicate with other IEDs, these IEDs have a corresponding Multiple transmit function block with 16 outputs to send the information received by the command block.
RED 670
865
Section 16 Station communication 16.8.2 Principle of operation

Two multiple transmit function blocks MT01-MT02 and 8 slow multiple transmit function blocks MT03-MT10 are available in IED 670. Sixteen signals can be connected and they will then be sent to the multiple command block in the other IED. The connections are set with the LON Network Tool (LNT). Twelve multiple command function block CM12 with fast execution time and 48 multiple command function blocks CM13-CM60 with slower execution time are available in the IED 670s. The multiple command function block has 16 outputs combined in one block, which can be controlled from other IEDs. The output signals, here OUT1 to OUT16, are then available for configuration to built-in functions or via the configuration logic circuits to the binary outputs of the terminal. The command function also has a supervision function, which sets the output VALID to 0 if the block did not receive data within set maximum time.
16.8.3
16.8.3.1
Design
General
The output signals can be of the types Off, Steady, or Pulse. The setting is done on the MODE settings, common for the whole block, from the PCM 600 setting tool. 0 = Off sets all outputs to 0, independent of the values sent from the station level, that is, the operator station or remote-control gateway. 1 = Steady sets the outputs to a steady signal 0 or 1, depending on the values sent from the station level. 2 = Pulse gives a pulse with one execution cycle duration, if a value sent from the station level is changed from 0 to 1. That means that the configured logic connected to the command function blocks may not have a cycle time longer than the execution cycle time for the command function block.
16.8.4
Function block
866
RED 670
CM01MultiCmd BLOCK ERROR NEWDATA OUTPUT1 OUTPUT2 OUTPUT3 OUTPUT4 OUTPUT5 OUTPUT6 OUTPUT7 OUTPUT8 OUTPUT9 OUTPUT10 OUTPUT11 OUTPUT12 OUTPUT13 OUTPUT14 OUTPUT15 OUTPUT16 VALID en06000007.vsd
Figure 401:
CM function block
MT01MultiTransm BLOCK INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 ERROR
en06000008.vsd
Figure 402:
MT function block
16.8.5

Table 556:
Signal BLOCK
Input signals for the MultiCmd (CM01-) function block

Description Block of function
RED 670
867
Table 557:
Signal BLOCK INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16
Input signals for the MultiTransm (MT01-) function block

Table 558:
Signal ERROR NEWDATA OUTPUT1 OUTPUT2 OUTPUT3 OUTPUT4 OUTPUT5 OUTPUT6 OUTPUT7 OUTPUT8 OUTPUT9 OUTPUT10 OUTPUT11 OUTPUT12 OUTPUT13 OUTPUT14
Output signals for the MultiCmd (CM01-) function block

Description MultiReceive error New data is received Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Output 9 Output 10 Output 11 Output 12 Output 13 Output 14
868
RED 670

Signal OUTPUT15 OUTPUT16 VALID Description Output 15 Output 16 Output data is valid
Table 559:
Signal ERROR
Output signals for the MultiTransm (MT01-) function block

Description MultiSend error
16.8.6
Setting parameters
Table 560:
Parameter tMaxCycleTime
General settings for the MultiCmd (CM01-) function

Range 0.050 - 200.000 Step 0.001 Default 11.000 Unit s Description Maximum cycle time between receptions of input data Minimum cycle time between receptions of input data Mode for output signals Pulse length for multi command outputs
tMinCycleTime
0.000 - 200.000
0.001
0.000
Mode tPulseTime
Steady Pulsed 0.000 - 60.000
0.001
Steady 0.200
Table 561:
Parameter tMaxCycleTime
General settings for the MultiTransm (MT01-) function

Range 0.000 - 200.000 Step 0.001 Default 5.000 Unit s Description Maximum time interval between transmission of output data Minimum time interval between transmission of output data
tMinCycleTime
0.000 - 200.000
0.001
0.000
RED 670
869
870
Section 17 Remote communication

About this chapter
This chapter describes the Binary signal transfer function and associated hardware functionality. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals, and technical data are included for each function.
17.1
Binary signal transfer to remote end

Function block name: BSR--, BST-ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: BSDGGIO IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
Function block name: BRx--;BTx-ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: BSTGGIO
17.1.1
Introduction
The remote end data communication is used either for the transmission of current values together with maximum 8 binary signals in the line differential protection in RED670, or for transmission of only binary signals, up to 192 signals, in the other 600 series IEDs. The binary signals are freely configurable and can thus be used for any purpose e.g. communication scheme related signals, transfer trip and/or other binary signals between IEDs. Communication between two IEDs requires that each IED is equipped with an LDCMs (Line Data Communication Module). The LDCMs are then interfaces to a 64 kbit/s communication channel for duplex communication between the IEDs. Each IED can be equipped with up to four LDCMs, thus enabling communication with four remote IEDs.
RED 670
871
Section 17 Remote communication 17.1.2 Principle of operation

The communication is made on standard ITU (CCITT) PCM digital 64 kbit/s channels. It is a two-way communication where telegrams are sent every 5 ms (same in 50 Hz and 60 Hz), exchanging information between two IEDs. The format used is C37.94 and one telegram consists of start and stop flags, address, data to be transmitted, Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) and Yellow bit (which is associated with C37.94).
Start flag 8 bits Information n x 16 bits CRC 16 bits Stop flag 8 bits
en01000134.vsd
Figure 403:
Data message structure
The start and stop flags are the 0111 1110 sequence (7E hexadecimal), defined in the HDLC standard. The CRC is designed according to the standard CRC16 definition. The optional address field in the HDLC frame is not used instead a separate addressing is included in the data field. The address field is used for checking that the received message originates from the correct equipment. There is always a risk that multiplexers occasionally mix the messages up. Each terminal in the system is given a number. The terminal is then programmed to accept messages from a specific terminal number. If the CRC function detects a faulty message, the message is thrown away and not used in the evaluation. When the communication is used for line differential purpose, the transmitted data consists of three currents, clock information, trip-, block- and alarm-signals and eight binary signals which can be used for any purpose. The three currents are represented as sampled values. When the communication is used exclusively for binary signals, the full data capacity of the communication channel is used for the binary signal purpose which gives the capacity of 192 signals.
17.1.3
Function block
The function blocks are not represented in CAP 531 configuration tool. The signals appear only in the SMT tool when a LDCM is included in the configuration with the function selector tool. In the SMT tool they can be mapped to the desired virtual input (SMBI) of the IED670 and used internally in the configuration.
872
RED 670
CRM1LDCMRecBinStat COMFAIL YBIT NOCARR NOMESS ADDRERR LNGTHERR CRCERROR TRDELERR SYNCERR REMCOMF REMGPSER SUBSTITU LOWLEVEL en07000043.vsd
CRM2LDCMRecBinStat COMFAIL YBIT NOCARR NOMESS ADDRERR LNGTHERR CRCERROR TRDELERR SYNCERR REMCOMF REMGPSER SUBSTITU LOWLEVEL en07000044.vsd
Figure 404:
CRM function blocks
CRB1LDCMRecBinStat COMFAIL YBIT NOCARR NOMESS ADDRERR LNGT HERR CRCERROR REMCOMF LOWLEVEL en05000451.vsd
Figure 405:
CRB function block
17.1.4

Table 562:
Signal COMFAIL YBIT NOCARR NOMESS ADDRERR Table continued on next page
Output signals for the LDCMRecBinStat (CRM1-) function block

Description Detected error in the differential communication Detected error in remote end with incoming message No carrier is detected in the incoming message No start and stop flags identified for the incoming message Incoming message from a wrong terminal
RED 670
873

Signal LNGTHERR CRCERROR TRDELERR SYNCERR REMCOMF REMGPSER SUBSTITU LOWLEVEL Description Wrong length of the incoming message Identified error by CRC check in incoming message Transmission time is longer than permitted Indicates when echo synchronication is used Remote terminal indicates problem with received message Remote terminal indicates problem with GPS synchronization Link error, values are substituted Low signal level on the receive link
Table 563:
Signal COMFAIL YBIT NOCARR NOMESS ADDRERR LNGTHERR CRCERROR TRDELERR SYNCERR REMCOMF REMGPSER SUBSTITU LOWLEVEL
Output signals for the LDCMRecBinStat (CRM2-) function block

Description Detected error in the differential communication Detected error in remote end with incoming message No carrier is detected in the incoming message No start and stop flags identified for the incoming message Incoming message from a wrong terminal Wrong length of the incoming message Identified error by CRC check in incoming message Transmission time is longer than permitted Indicates when echo synchronication is used Remote terminal indicates problem with received message Remote terminal indicates problem with GPS synchronization Link error, values are substituted Low signal level on the receive link
Table 564:
Signal COMFAIL YBIT NOCARR NOMESS ADDRERR LNGTHERR CRCERROR REMCOMF LOWLEVEL
Output signals for the LDCMRecBinStat (CRB1-) function block

Description Detected error in the differential communication Detected error in remote end with incoming message No carrier is detected in the incoming message No start and stop flags identified for the incoming message Incoming message from a wrong terminal Wrong length of the incoming message Identified error by CRC check in incoming message Remote terminal indicates problem with received message Low signal level on the receive link
874
RED 670
Section 17 Remote communication 17.1.5 Setting parameters

Table 565:
Parameter ChannelMode
Basic general settings for the LDCMRecBinStat (CRM1-) function

Range Off On OutOfService 0 Step Default On Unit Description Channel mode of LDCM, 0=OFF, 1=ON, 2=OutOfService Terminal number used for line differential communication Terminal number on remote terminal Diff Synchronization mode of LDCM, 0=ECHO, 1=GPS Operation mode when GPS synchroniation signal is lost Com Synchronization mode of LDCM, 0=Slave, 1=Master Transmission power for LDCM, 0=Low, 1=High Summation mode for transmitted current values
TerminalNo
0 - 255
RemoteTermNo DiffSync
0 Echo GPS Block Echo
1 -
0 - 255 Echo
GPSSyncErr
Block
CommSync
Slave Master LowPower HighPower CT-GRP1 CT-GRP2 CT-SUM CT-DIFF1 CT-DIFF2 5 - 500
Slave
OptoPower
LowPower
TransmCurr
CT-GRP1
ComFailAlrmDel
100
ms
Time delay before communication error signal is activated Reset delay before communication error signal is reset Time delay before switching in redundant channel Time delay before switching back from redundant channel Asymmetric delay when communication use echo synch. Max allowed transmission delay Compression range
ComFailResDel
5 - 500
100
ms
RedChSwTime
5 - 500
ms
RedChRturnTime
5 - 500
100
ms
AsymDelay
-20.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
ms
MaxTransmDelay CompRange
0 - 40 0-10kA 0-25kA 0-50kA 0-150kA
1 -
20 0-25kA
ms -
RED 670
875

Parameter MaxtDiffLevel DeadbandtDiff InvertPolX21 Range 200 - 2000 200 - 1000 Off On Step 1 1 Default 600 300 Off Unit us us Description Maximum time diff for ECHO back-up Deadband for t Diff Invert polarization for X21 communication
Table 566:
Basic general settings for the LDCMRecBinStat (CRM2-) function

Range Off On OutOfService 0 Step Default On Unit Description Channel mode of LDCM, 0=OFF, 1=ON, 2=OutOfService Terminal number used for line differential communication Terminal number on remote terminal Diff Synchronization mode of LDCM, 0=ECHO, 1=GPS Operation mode when GPS synchroniation signal is lost Com Synchronization mode of LDCM, 0=Slave, 1=Master Transmission power for LDCM, 0=Low, 1=High Summation mode for transmitted current values
TerminalNo
0 - 255
RemoteTermNo DiffSync
0 Echo GPS Block Echo
1 -
0 - 255 Echo
GPSSyncErr
Block
CommSync
Slave Master LowPower HighPower CT-GRP1 CT-GRP2 CT-SUM CT-DIFF1 CT-DIFF2 RedundantChann el 5 - 500
Slave
OptoPower
LowPower
TransmCurr
CT-GRP1
ComFailAlrmDel
100
ms
Time delay before communication error signal is activated Reset delay before communication error signal is reset Time delay before switching in redundant channel Time delay before switching back from redundant channel
ComFailResDel
5 - 500
100
ms
RedChSwTime
5 - 500
ms
RedChRturnTime
5 - 500
100
ms
876
RED 670

Parameter AsymDelay Range -20.00 - 20.00 Step 0.01 Default 0.00 Unit ms Description Asymmetric delay when communication use echo synch. Max allowed transmission delay Compression range
MaxTransmDelay CompRange
0 - 40 0-10kA 0-25kA 0-50kA 0-150kA 200 - 2000 200 - 1000 Off On
1 -
20 0-25kA
ms -
MaxtDiffLevel DeadbandtDiff InvertPolX21
1 1 -
600 300 Off
us us -
Maximum time diff for ECHO back-up Deadband for t Diff Invert polarization for X21 communication
Table 567:
Basic general settings for the LDCMRecBinStat (CRB1-) function

Range Off On OutOfService 0 Step Default On Unit Description Channel mode of LDCM, 0=OFF, 1=ON, 2=OutOfService Terminal number used for line differential communication Terminal number on remote terminal Com Synchronization mode of LDCM, 0=Slave, 1=Master Transmission power for LDCM, 0=Low, 1=High Time delay before communication error signal is activated Reset delay before communication error signal is reset Invert polarization for X21 communication
TerminalNo
0 - 255
RemoteTermNo CommSync
0 Slave Master LowPower HighPower 5 - 500
1 -
0 - 255 Slave
OptoPower
LowPower
ComFailAlrmDel
100
ms
ComFailResDel
5 - 500
100
ms
InvertPolX21
Off On
Off
RED 670
877
878
Section 18 Hardware
Section 18 Hardware
About this chapter
This chapter includes descriptions of the different hardware modules. It includes diagrams from different elevations indicating the location of connection terminals and modules.
18.1
18.1.1
Overview
Variants of case- and HMI display size
xx04000458.eps
Figure 406:
1/2 19 case with medium HMI display.
RED 670
879
Section 18 Hardware
xx04000459.eps
Figure 407:
1/2 19 case with small HMI display.
Figure 408:
xx05000763.eps
Figure 409:
880
RED 670
Section 18 Hardware
xx04000460.eps
Figure 410:
xx04000461.eps
Figure 411:
18.1.2
Case from the rear side
RED 670
881
Section 18 Hardware
Table 568:
Designations for 1/2 x 19 casing with 1 TRM slot
Module PSM BIM, BOM, SOM or IOM BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM or GSM SLM IRIG-B 1) OEM RS485 or LDCM 2) 3) LDCM 2) TRM
Rear Positions X11 X31 and X32 etc. to X51 and X52 X51, X52 X301:A, B, C, D X302 X311:A, B, C, D X312 X313 X401
1) IRIG-B installation, when included in seat P30:2 2) LDCM installation sequence: P31:2 or P31:3 3) RS485 installation, when included in seat P31:2 Note! 1 One LDCM can be included depending of availability of IRIG-B respective RS485 modules.
882
RED 670
Section 18 Hardware
Table 569:
Module PSM BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM or MIM BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM, MIM or GSM SLM IRIG-B or LDCM 1) 2) LDCM 2) OEM RS485 or LDCM 2) 3) LDCM 2) TRM
Rear Positions X11 X31 and X32 etc. to X101 and X102 X101, X102 X301:A, B, C, D X302 X303 X311:A, B, C, D X312 X313 X401
1) IRIG-B installation, when included in seat P30:2 2) LDCM installation sequence: P31:2, P31:3, P30:2 and P30:3 3) RS482 installation, when included in seat P31:2 Note! 2-4 LDCM can be included depending of availability of IRIG-B respective RS485 modules.
RED 670
883
Section 18 Hardware
Table 570:
Module PSM BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM or MIM BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM, MIM or GSM SLM IRIG-B or LDCM 1,2) LDCM 2) OEM RS485 or LDCM 2) 3) LDCM 2) LDCM 2) LDCM 2) TRM 1 TRM 2
Rear Positions X11 X31 and X32 etc. to X71 and X72 X71, X72 X301:A, B, C, D X302 X303 X311:A, B, C, D X312 X313 X322 X323 X401 X411
1) IRIG-B installation, when included in seat P30:2 2) LDCM installation sequence: P31:2, P31:3, P32:2, P32:3, P30:2 and P30:3 3) RS485 installation, when included in seat P31:2 Note! 2-4 LDCM can be included depending of availability of IRIGB respective RS485 modules.
Table 571:
884
RED 670
Section 18 Hardware
Module PSM BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM or MIM BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM, MIM or GSM SLM IRIG-B or LDCM 1,2) LDCM 2) OEM RS485 or LDCM 2) 3) LDCM 2) TRM
Rear Positions X11 X31 and X32 etc. to X161 and X162 X161, X162 X301:A, B, C, D X302 X303 X311:A, B, C, D X312 X313 X401
1) IRIG-B installation, when included in seat P30:2 2) LDCM installation sequence: P31:2, P31:3, P30:2 and P30:3 3) RS485 installation, when included in seat P31:2 Note! 2-4 LDCM can be included depending of availability of IRIG-B respective RS485 modules.
RED 670
885
Section 18 Hardware
Table 572:
Designations for 1/1 x 19 casing with 2 TRM slots
Module PSM BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM or MIM BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM, MIM or GSM SLM IRIG-B or LDCM 1,2) LDCM 2) OEM RS485 or LDCM 2) 3) LDCM 2) LDCM 2) LDCM 2) TRM 1 TRM 2
Rear Positions X11 X31 and X32 etc. to X131 and X132 X131, X132 X301:A, B, C, D X302 X303 X311:A, B, C, D X312 X313 X322 X323 X401 X411
1) IRIG-B installation, when included in seat P30:2 2) LDCM installation sequence: P31:2, P31:3, P32:2, P32:3, P30:2 and P30:3 3) RS485 installation, when included in seat P31:2 Note! 2-4 LDCM can be included depending of availability of IRIG-B respective RS485 modules.
18.2
18.2.1
Hardware modules
Overview
Table 573:
Module Combined backplane module (CBM)
Basic modules, always included

Description A backplane PCB that carries all internal signals between modules in an IED. Only the TRM is not connected directly to this board. A backplane PCB that forms part of the IED backplane with connectors for TRM, ADM etc. Including a regulated DC/DC converter that supplies auxiliary voltage to all static circuits. An internal fail alarm output is available.
Universal backplane module (UBM) Power supply module (PSM)
886
RED 670
Section 18 Hardware
Module Numerical module (NUM) Description Module for overall application control. All information is processed or passed through this module, such as configuration, settings and communication. The module consists of LED:s, an LCD, a push button keyboard and an ethernet connector used to connect a PC to the IED. Transformer module that galvanically separates the internal circuits from the VT and CT circuits. It has 12 analog inputs. Slot mounted PCB with A/D conversion.
Local Human machine interface (LHMI)
Transformer input module (TRM)
Analog digital conversion module (ADM)
Table 574:
Module
Application specific modules

Description Module with 16 optically isolated binary inputs Module with 24 single outputs or 12 double-pole command outputs including supervision function Module with 8 optically isolated binary inputs, 10 outputs and 2 fast signalling outputs. Modules used for digital communication to remote terminal. Used for SPA/LON/IEC 608705103 communication PMC board for IEC 61850 based communication. Analog input module with 6 independent, galvanically separated channels. Used to provide the IED with GPS time synchronization. Module with 6 fast static outputs and 6 change over output relays. Module with 2 inputs. One is used for handling both pulse-width modulated signals and amplitude modulated signals and one is used for optical input type ST for PPS time synchronization.
Binary input module (BIM) Binary output module (BOM) Binary I/O module (IOM) Line data communication modules (LDCM), short range, medium range, longrange, X21 Serial SPA/LON/IEC 60870-5-103 communication modules (SLM) Optical ethernet module (OEM) mA input module (MIM) GPS time synchronization module (GSM) Static output module (SOM) IRIG-B Time synchronization module
18.2.2
18.2.2.1
Combined backplane module (CBM)

Introduction
The combined backplane module (CBM) carries signals between modules in an IED.
18.2.2.2
Functionality
The Compact PCI makes 3.3V or 5V signaling in the backplane possible. The CBM backplane and connected modules are 5V PCI-compatible.
RED 670
887
Section 18 Hardware
Some pins on the Compact PCI connector are connected to the CAN bus, to be able to communicate with CAN based modules. If a modules self test discovers an error it informs other modules using the Internal Fail signal IRF.
18.2.2.3
Design
There are two basic versions of the CBM: with 3 Compact PCI connectors and a number of euro connectors depending on the IED case size. One Compact PCI connector is used by NUM and two are used by other PCI modules, for example two ADMs in IEDs with two TRMs. See figure 413 with 2 Compact PCI connectors and a number of euro connectors depending on the IED case size. One Compact PCI connector is used by NUM and one is used by for example an ADM in IEDs with one TRM. See figure 412
Each PCI connector consists of 2 compact PCI receptacles. The euro connectors are connected to the CAN bus and used for I/O modules and power supply.
2
en05000516.vsd
Figure 412:
Pos Description 1 2 CAN slots CPCI slots
CBM for 1 TRM.
888
RED 670
Section 18 Hardware
2 en05000755.vsd
Figure 413:
Pos Description 1 2 CAN slots CPCI slots
CBM for 2 TRM.
en05000756.vsd
Figure 414:
Pos Description 1 CBM
CBM position, rear view.
RED 670
889
Section 18 Hardware 18.2.3

18.2.3.1
Universal backplane module (UBM)

Introduction
The Universal Backplane Module (UBM) is part of the IED backplane and is mounted above the CBM. It connects the Transformer input module (TRM) to the Analog digital conversion module (ADM) and the Numerical module (NUM).
18.2.3.2
Functionality
The Universal Backplane Module connects the CT and VT analog signals from the transformer input module to the analog digital converter module. The Numerical processing module (NUM) is also connected to the UBM. The ethernet contact on the front panel as well as the internal ethernet contacts are connected to the UBM which provides the signal path to the NUM board.
18.2.3.3
Design
It connects the Transformer input module (TRM) to the Analog digital conversion module (ADM) and the Numerical module (NUM). The UBM exists in 2 versions. for IEDs with two TRM and two ADM. It has four 48 pin euro connectors and one 96 pin euro connector, see figure 416 for IEDs with one TRM and one ADM. It has two 48 pin euro connectors and one 96 pin euro connector, see figure 417.
The 96 pin euro connector is used to connect the NUM board to the backplane. The 48 pin connectors are used to connect the TRM and ADM.
890
RED 670
Section 18 Hardware
TRM
ADM
NUM
AD Data
X1 X2 X4
X3
RS485 X10 X10
Front port
Ethernet
LHMI connection
Ethernet X5
en05000489.vsd
Figure 415:
UBM block diagram.
en05000757.vsd
Figure 416:
UBM for 1 TRM.
en05000758.vsd
Figure 417:
UBM for 2 TRM.
RED 670
891
Section 18 Hardware
en05000759.vsd
Figure 418:
Pos Description 1 UBM
UBM position, rear view.
18.2.4
18.2.4.1
Power supply module (PSM)

Introduction
The power supply module is used to provide the correct internal voltages and full isolation between the terminal and the battery system. An internal fail alarm output is available.
18.2.4.2
Design
There are two types of the power supply module. They are designed for different DC input voltage ranges see table 575. The power supply module contains a built-in, selfregulated DC/DC converter that provides full isolation between the terminal and the external battery system.
892
RED 670
Section 18 Hardware
Block diagram
Input connector
Filter
Power supply
Supervision
99000516.vsd
Figure 419:
PSM Block diagram.
18.2.4.3
Technical data
Table 575:
Quantity Auxiliary dc voltage, EL (input) Power consumption Auxiliary DC power in-rush
PSM - Power supply module

Rated value EL = (24 - 60) V EL = (90 - 250) V 50 W typically < 5 A during 0.1 s Nominal range EL 20% EL 20% -
18.2.5
18.2.5.1
Numeric processing module (NUM)

Introduction
The Numeric processing module (NUM), is a CPU-module that handles all protection functions and logic. For communication with high speed modules, e.g. analog input modules and high speed serial interfaces, the NUM is equipped with a Compact PCI bus. The NUM is the compact PCI system card i.e. it controls bus mastering, clock distribution and receives interrupts.
Backplane connector
RED 670
893
Section 18 Hardware
18.2.5.2 Functionality
The NUM, Numeric processing module is a high performance, standard off-the-shelf compact-PCI CPU module. It is 6U high and occupies one slot. Contact with the backplane is via two compact PCI connectors and an euro connector. The NUM has one PMC slot (32-bit IEEE P1386.1 compliant) and two PC-MIP slots onto which mezzanine cards such as SLM or LDCM can be mounted. To reduce bus loading of the compact PCI bus in the backplane the NUM has one internal PCI bus for internal resources and the PMC/PC-MIP slots and external PCI accesses through the backplane are buffered in a PCI/PCI bridge. The application code and configuration data are stored in flash memory using a flash file system. The NUM is equipped with a real time clock. It uses a capacitor for power backup of the real time clock. No forced cooling is used on this standard module because of the low power dissipation.
894
RED 670
Section 18 Hardware
18.2.5.3 Block diagram
Compact Flash
Logic
PMC connector PC-MIP
Memory
Ethernet
North bridge PCI-PCIbridge
CPU
en04000473.vsd
Figure 420:
Numeric processing module block diagram
18.2.6
Local human-machine interface (LHMI)

Refer to Chapter "Local human-machine interface" for information.
18.2.7
18.2.7.1
Transformer input module (TRM)

Introduction
The transformer input module is used to galvanically separate and transform the secondary currents and voltages generated by the measuring transformers. The module has twelve inputs in different combinations of currents and voltage inputs.
Backplane connector
UBM connector
RED 670
895
Section 18 Hardware
Alternative connectors of Ring lug or Compression type can be ordered.
18.2.7.2
Design
The transformer module has 12 input transformers. There are several versions of the module, each with a different combination of voltage and current input transformers. Basic versions: 6 current channels and 6 voltage channels 7 current channels and 5 voltage channels 9 current channels and 3 voltage channels 12 current channels 6 current channels
The rated values of the current inputs are selected at order. The TRM is connected to the ADM and NUM via the UBM. Configuration of the input and output signals, please refer to section "Signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI)".
18.2.7.3
Technical data
Table 576:
Quantity Current Operative range Permissive overload Burden Ac voltage Operative range Permissive overload Burden Frequency
*)
TRM - Energizing quantities, rated values and limits

Rated value Ir = 1 or 5 A (0-100) x Ir 4 Ir cont. 100 Ir for 1 s *) < 150 mVA at Ir = 5 A < 20 mVA at Ir = 1 A Ur = 110 V (0340) V 420 V cont. 450 V 10 s < 20 mVA at 110 V fr = 50/60 Hz 5% 0.5288 V Nominal range (0.2-40) Ir
max. 350 A for 1 s when COMBITEST test switch is included.
896
RED 670

18.2.8.1
Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization (ADM)

Introduction
The Analog/Digital module has twelve analog inputs, 2 PC-MIP slots and 1 PMC slot. The PC-MIP slot is used for PC-MIP cards and the PMC slot for PMC cards according to table 577. The OEM card should always be mounted on the ADM board. The UBM connects the ADM to the transformer input module (TRM).
Table 577:
PC-MIP cards LDCM LR-LDCM MR-LDCM X21-LDCM IRIG-B RS485
PC-MIP cards and PMC cards

PMC cards SLM OEM 1 ch OEM 2 ch
18.2.8.2
Design
The Analog digital conversion module input signals are voltage and current from the transformer module. Shunts are used to adapt the current signals to the electronic voltage level. To gain dynamic range for the current inputs, two shunts with separate A\D channels are used for each input current. In this way a 20 bit dynamic range is obtained with a 16 bit A\D converter. Input signals are sampled with a sampling freqency of 5 kHz at 50 Hz system frequency and 6 kHz at 60 Hz system frequency. The A\D converted signals goes through a filter with a cut off frequency of 500 Hz and are reported to the numerical module (NUM) with 1 kHz at 50 Hz system frequency and 1,2 kHz at 60 Hz system frequency.
RED 670
897
Section 18 Hardware
AD1 AD2
1.2v
AD3 AD4
Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 Channel 9 Channel 10 Channel 11 Channel 12
PMC
level shift
PC-MIP
2.5v
PCI to PCI PC-MIP
en05000474.vsd
Figure 421:
The ADM layout
898
RED 670

18.2.9.1
Binary input module (BIM)

Introduction
The binary input module has 16 optically isolated inputs and is available in two versions, one standard and one with enhanced pulse counting capabilities on the inputs to be used with the pulse counter function. The binary inputs are freely programmable and can be used for the input of logical signals to any of the functions. They can also be included in the disturbance recording and event-recording functions. This enables extensive monitoring and evaluation of operation of the IED and for all associated electrical circuits.
18.2.9.2
Design
The Binary input module contains 16 optical isolated binary inputs. The voltage level of the binary input is selected at order. For configuration of the input signals, please refer to section "Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI)". A signal discriminator detects and blocks oscillating signals. When blocked, a hysteresis function may be set to release the input at a chosen frequency, making it possible to use the input for pulse counting. The blocking frequency may also be set. Figure 422 shows the operating characteristics of the binary inputs of the four voltage levels. The standard version of binary inputs gives an improved capability to withstand disturbances and should generally be used when pulse counting is not required.
RED 670
899
Section 18 Hardware
[V] 300
176 144 88 72 38 32 19 18 24/30V 48/60V 110/125V 220/250V

xx06000391.vsd
Figure 422:
Voltage dependence for the binary inputs

Guaranteed operation Operation uncertain No operation
This binary input module communicates with the Numerical module (NUM) via the CAN-bus on the backplane. The design of all binary inputs enables the burn off of the oxide of the relay contact connected to the input, despite the low, steady-state power consumption, which is shown in figure 423 and 424.
900
RED 670
Section 18 Hardware
[mA] 30
1 35 70 [ms]
en07000104.vsd
Figure 423:
Approximate binary input inrush current for the standard version of BIM.
[mA] 30
1 3.5 7.0 [ms]

en07000105.vsd
Figure 424:
Approximate binary input inrush current for the BIM version with enhanced pulse counting capabilities.
RED 670
901
Section 18 Hardware
Opto isolated input
Process connector
Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input
Microcontroller
Opto isolated input

CAN
Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input
99000503.vsd
Figure 425: Block diagram of the Binary input module.
18.2.9.3
Technical data
902
RED 670
Backplane connector
Process connector
Opto isolated input
Memory
Section 18 Hardware
Table 578:
Quantity Binary inputs DC voltage, RL
BIM - Binary input module

Rated value 16 24/40 V 48/60 V 110/125 V 220/250 V max. 0.05 W/input max. 0.1 W/input max. 0.2 W/input max. 0.4 W/input 10 pulses/s max Blocking settable 140 Hz Release settable 130 Hz Nominal range RL 20% RL 20% RL 20% RL 20% -
Power consumption 24/40 V 48/60 V 110/125 V 220/250 V Counter input frequency Oscillating signal discriminator
Table 579:
BIM - Binary input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities

Rated value 16 24/40 V 48/60 V 110/125 V 220/250 V max. 0.05 W/input max. 0.1 W/input max. 0.2 W/input max. 0.4 W/input 10 pulses/s max 40 pulses/s max Blocking settable 140 Hz Release settable 130 Hz Nominal range RL 20% RL 20% RL 20% RL 20% -
Power consumption 24/40 V 48/60 V 110/125 V 220/250 V Counter input frequency Balanced counter input frequency Oscillating signal discriminator
18.2.10
18.2.10.1
Binary output modules (BOM)

Introduction
The binary output module has 24 independent output relays and is used for trip output or any signalling purpose.
18.2.10.2
Design
The binary output module (BOM) has 24 software supervised output relays. Each pair of relays have a common power source input to the contacts, see figure 426. This should be considered when connecting the wiring to the connection terminal on the back of the IED.
RED 670
903
Section 18 Hardware
The high closing and carrying current capability allows connection directly to breaker trip and closing coils. If breaking capability is required to manage fail of the breaker auxiliary contacts normally breaking the trip coil current, a parallel reinforcement is required. For configuration of the output signals, please refer to section "Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO)".
Output module
3
xx00000299.vsd
Figure 426:
Relay pair example
1 Output connection from relay 1 2 Output signal power source connection 3 Output connection from relay 2
904
RED 670
Section 18 Hardware
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Process connector
Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay
Relay
Trip and Signal relays 24 250 V AC, DC 1000 V rms 8A 10 A
Microcontroller
Memory
99000505.vsd
Figure 427:
Block diagram of the Binary Output Module
18.2.10.3
Technical data
Table 580:
Binary outputs Max system voltage Test voltage across open contact, 1 min Current carrying capacity Continuous 1s Table continued on next page
BOM - Binary output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)
Function or quantity
Backplane connector
Process connector
CAN
RED 670
905
Section 18 Hardware
Function or quantity Making capacity at inductive load with L/R>10 ms 0.2 s 1.0 s Breaking capacity for AC, cos j>0.4 Breaking capacity for DC with L/R < 40 ms Trip and Signal relays 30 A 10 A 250 V/8.0 A 48 V/1 A 110 V/0.4 A 220 V/0.2 A 250 V/0.15 A
18.2.11
18.2.11.1
Static binary output module (SOM)

Introduction
The static binary output module has six fast static outputs and six change over output relays for use in applications with high speed requirements.
18.2.11.2
Design
The Static output module (SOM) have 6 normally open (NO) static outputs and 6 electromechanical relay outputs with change over contacts. The SOM consists mainly of: An MCU A CAN-driver 6 static relays outputs 6 electromechanical relay outputs A DC/DC converter Connectors interfacing CAN-bus to backplane CBM IO-connectors to binary outputs (2 pcs.)
The following parts are supervised: Interruption in relay coil Short circuit of relay coil Driver failure
906
RED 670
Section 18 Hardware
Drive & Read back Drive & Read back
Process connector
Drive & Read back Drive & Read back Drive & Read back Drive & Read back
Codeflash
MCU
CANdriver
Drive & Read back Drive & Read back
Process connector
DC/DC
Drive & Read back
Drive & Read back
Internal_fail_n AC_fail_n RCAN_ID Sync
Drive & Read back
Reset
Drive & Read back
en07000115.vsd
Figure 428:
Block diagram of the static output module
Backplane connector
RED 670
907
Section 18 Hardware
Figure 429:
Connection diagram of the static output module
18.2.11.3
Technical data
Table 581: SOM - Static output module data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)
Trip and Signal relays 6 6 250 V AC, DC 1000 V rms 8A 10 A
Function or quantity Static binary outputs Electromechanical relay outputs Max system voltage Test voltage across open contact, 1 min Current carrying capacity Continuous 1s Static binary outputs: Making capacity at capacitive load with the maximum capacitance of 0.2 mF 0.2 s 1.0 s Electromechanical relay outputs: Making capacity at inductive load with L/R>10 ms 0.2 s 1.0 s Breaking capacity for AC, cos j>0.4 Breaking capacity for DC with L/R < 40 ms
20 A 10 A
20 A 10 A 250 V/8.0 A 48 V/1 A 110 V/0.4 A 125 V/0.35 A 220 V/0.2 A 250 V/0.15 A <1 ms
Operating time, Static outputs
908
RED 670

18.2.12.1
Binary input/output module (IOM)

Introduction
The binary input/output module is used when only a few input and output channels are needed. The ten standard output channels are used for trip output or any signalling purpose. The two high speed signal output channels are used for applications where short operating time is essential. Eight optically isolated binary inputs cater for required binary input information.
18.2.12.2
Design
The binary input/output module is available in two basic versions, one with unprotected contacts and one with MOV (Metal Oxide Varistor) protected contacts. Inputs are designed to allow oxide burn-off from connected contacts, and increase the disturbance immunity during normal protection operate times. This is achieved with a high peak inrush current while having a low steady-state current, see figure 423. Inputs are debounced by software. Well defined input high and input low voltages ensures normal operation at battery supply earth faults, see figure 422. The voltage level of the inputs is selected when ordering. I/O events are time stamped locally on each module for minimum time deviance and stored by the event recorder if present. The binary I/O module, IOM, has eight optically isolated inputs and ten output relays. One of the outputs has a change-over contact. The nine remaining output contacts are connected in two groups. One group has five contacts with a common and the other group has four contacts with a common, to be used as single-output channels, see figure 430. The binary I/O module also has two high speed output channels where a reed relay is connected in parallel to the standard output relay. For configuration of the input and output signals, please refer to section "Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI)" and section "Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO)". The making capacity of the reed relays are limited.
RED 670
909
Section 18 Hardware
Figure 430:
Binary in/out module (IOM), input contacts named XA corresponds to rear position X31, X41, etc. and output contacts named XB to rear position X32, X42, etc.
The binary input/output module version with MOV protected contacts can for example be used in applications where breaking high inductive load would cause excessive wear of the contacts. The test voltage across open contact is lower for this version of the binary input/output module.
910
RED 670
Section 18 Hardware
xx04000069.vsd
Figure 431:
IOM with MOV protection, relay example
18.2.12.3
Technical data
Table 582:
IOM - Binary input/output module

Rated value 8 24/40 V 48/60 V 110/125 V 220/250 V max. 0.05 W/input max. 0.1 W/input max. 0.2 W/input max. 0.4 W/input Nominal range RL 20% RL 20% RL 20% RL 20% -
Power consumption 24/40 V 48/60 V 110/125 V 220/250 V
Table 583:
IOM - Binary input/output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)
Trip and signal relays 10 250 V AC, DC 1000 V rms Fast signal relays (parallel reed relay) 2 250 V AC, DC 800 V DC
Function or quantity Binary outputs Max system voltage Test voltage across open contact, 1 min Current carrying capacity Continuous 1s Making capacity at inductive load with L/R>10 ms 0.2 s 1.0 s Breaking capacity for AC, cos > 0.4 Breaking capacity for DC with L/R < 40 ms
8A 10 A
8A 10 A
30 A 10 A 250 V/8.0 A 48 V/1 A 110 V/0.4 A 125 V/0.35 A 220 V/0.2 A 250 V/0.15 A -
0.4 A 0.4 A 250 V/8.0 A 48 V/1 A 110 V/0.4 A 125 V/0.35 A 220 V/0.2 A 250 V/0.15 A 10 nF
Maximum capacitive load
RED 670
911
Section 18 Hardware
Table 584:
IOM with MOV - contact data (reference standard: IEC 60255-23)

Trip and Signal relays IOM: 10 250 V AC, DC 250 V rms Fast signal relays (parallel reed relay) IOM: 2 250 V AC, DC 250 V DC
Function or quantity Binary outputs Max system voltage Test voltage across open contact, 1 min Current carrying capacity Continuous 1s Making capacity at inductive loadwith L/R>10 ms 0.2 s 1.0 s Breaking capacity for AC, cos j>0.4 Breaking capacity for DC with L/R < 40 ms
8A 10 A
8A 10 A
30 A 10 A 250 V/8.0 A 48 V/1 A 110 V/0.4 A 220 V/0.2 A 250 V/0.15 A -
0.4 A 0.4 A 250 V/8.0 A 48 V/1 A 110 V/0.4 A 220 V/0.2 A 250 V/0.15 A 10 nF
Maximum capacitive load
18.2.13
18.2.13.1
Line data communication module (LDCM)

Introduction
The line data communication module (LDCM) is used for communication between the IEDs situated at distances <150 km or from the IED to optical to electrical converter with G.703 interface located on a distances <3 km away. The LDCM module sends and rereceives data, to and from another LDCM module. The IEEE/ ANSI standard format is used. The line data communication module is used for binary signal transfer. The module has one optical port with ST connectors see figure 432. The line data communication module is used for binary signal transfer. Each module has one optical port, one for each remote end to which the IED communicates. Alternative cards for Long range (1550 nm single mode), Medium range (1310 nm single mode) and Short range (900 nm multi mode) are available. Class 1 laser product. Take adequate measures to protect the eyes. Never look into the laser beam.
912
RED 670
Section 18 Hardware
18.2.13.2 Design
The LDCM is a PCMIP type II single width format module. The LDCM can be mounted on: the ADM the NUM
ID
ST
IO-connector
ST
32,768 MHz
16.000 MHz
en07000087.vsd
Figure 432:
The SR-LDCM layout. PCMIP type II single width format with two PCI connectors and one I/O ST type connector
X1
ADN 2841 2.5V ID
DS 3904
DS 3904
FPGA 256 FBGA
PCI9054 TQ176
MAX 3645
3 2
en06000393.vsd
Figure 433:
The MR-LDCM and LR-LDCM layout. PCMIP type II single width format with two PCI connectors and one I/O FC/PC type connector
18.2.13.3
Technical data
RED 670
913
Section 18 Hardware
Table 585:
Characteristic Type of LDCM Type of fibre
Line data communication modules (LDCM)

Range or value Short range (SR) Graded-index multimode 62.5/125 mm or 50/125 mm 820 nm 11 dB (typical distance about 3 km *) 7 dB (typical distance about 2 km *) Type ST C37.94 Medium range (MR) Long range (LR) Singlemode 8/125 mm Singlemode 8/125 mm
Wave length Optical budget Graded-index multimode 62.5/125 mm, Graded-index multimode 50/125 mm
1310 nm 20 dB (typical distance 80 km *)
1550 nm 26 dB (typical distance 120 km *)
Optical connector Protocol
Type FC/PC C37.94 implementation **) Synchronous 2 Mb/s / 64 kbit/s Internal or derived from received signal
Type FC/PC C37.94 implementatio n **) Synchronous 2 Mb/s / 64 kbit/s Internal or derived from received signal
Data transmission Transmission rate / Data rate Clock source
Synchronous 2 Mb/s / 64 kbit/s Internal or derived from received signal
*) depending on optical budget calculation **) C37.94 originally defined just for multimode; using same header, configuration and data format as C37.94
18.2.14
18.2.14.1
Galvanic X.21 line data communication (X.21-LDCM)

Introduction
The galvanic X21 line data communication module is used for connection to telecommunication equipment, for example leased telephone lines. The module supports 64 kbit/s data communication between IED:s. Examples of applications: Line differential protection Binary signal transfer
18.2.14.2
Design
The galvanic X.21 line data communication module uses a ABB specific PC*MIP Type II format.
914
RED 670
Section 18 Hardware
en07000196.vsd
Figure 434:
1
Overview of the X.21 LDCM module

3
en07000195.vsd
Figure 435:
The X.21 LDCM module external connectors
1. 2. 3.
Ground selection connector for IO, screw terminals, 2-pole Ground pin X.21: Micro D-sub 15 pole female connector according to the V11 (X.27) balanced version
Soft ground To avoid ground loops when the grounds are connected, a soft ground connection for the IO-ground can be used. This is handled in the ground selection connector. Three different kinds of grounding principles can be set: 1. 2. 3. No ground - leave the connector without any connection Direct ground - connect the ground pin directly to earth Soft ground - connect the two pins to each other
RED 670
915
Section 18 Hardware
X.21 connector
Table 586:
Pin number 1 2 3 4 6 8 9 10 11 13 5,7,12,14,15
Pinout for the X.21 communication connector

Signal Shield (ground) TXD A Control A RXD A Signal timing A Ground TXD B Control B RXD B Signal timing B Not used
18.2.14.3
Functionality
The data format is HDLC. The speed for the transmission of the messages used is 64 kbit/s. A maximum of 100 meter of cable is allowed to ensure the quality of the data (deviation from X.21 standard cable length). Synchronization The X.21 LDCM works like a DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) and is normally expecting synchronization from the DCE (Data Circuit Equipment). The transmission is normally synchronized to the Signal Element Timing signal when a device is a DTE. When the signal is high it will read the data at the receiver and when the signal is low it will write data to the transmitter. This behaviour can be inverted in the control register. Normally an external multiplexer is used and it should act like the master. When two X.21 LDCM is directly communicating with each other one must be set as a master generating the synchronization for the other (the slave). The DTE Signal Element Timing is created from the internal 64 kHz clock. The Byte Timing signal is not used in ABB devices.
916
RED 670
Section 18 Hardware
18.2.14.4 Technical data
Table 587:
Quantity Connector, X.21 Connector, ground selection Standard Communication speed Insulation Maximum cable length
Galvanic X.21 line data communication module (X.21-LDCM)

Range or value Micro D-sub, 15-pole female, 1.27 mm (0.050") pitch 2 pole screw terminal CCITT X21 64 kbit/s 1 kV 100 m
18.2.15
18.2.15.1
Serial SPA/IEC 60870-5-103 and LON communication module (SLM)

Introduction
The serial communication module (SLM) is used for SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 and LON communication. The module has two communication ports, one for serial communication and one dedicated for LON communication.
18.2.15.2
Design
The SLM is a PMC card and it is factory mounted as a mezzanine card on the NUM module. Three variants of the SLM is available with different combinations of optical fiber connectors, see figure 436. The plastic fiber connectors are of snap-in type and the glass fiber connectors are of ST type.
Figure 436:
A
The SLM variants

Snap in connector for plastic fiber
RED 670
917
Section 18 Hardware
B 1 2
ST connector for glass fiber LON port SPA/IEC 60870-5-103 port
Figure 437:
1 2 3 4
The SLM layout overview

Receiver, LON Transmitter, LON Receiver, SPA/IEC 60870-5-103 Transmitter, SPA/IEC 60870-5-103
18.2.15.3
Technical data
Table 588:
Quantity Optical connector Fibre, optical budget Fibre diameter
SLM LON port

Range or value Glass fibre: type ST Plastic fibre: type HFBR snap-in Glass fibre: 11 dB (1000 m typically *) Plastic fibre: 7 dB (10 m typically *) Glass fibre: 62.5/125 mm Plastic fibre: 1 mm
*) depending on optical budget calculation
918
RED 670
Section 18 Hardware
Table 589:
Quantity Optical connector
SLM SPA/IEC 60870-5-103 port

Range or value Glass fibre: type ST Plastic fibre: type HFBR snap-in Glass fibre: 11 dB (3000ft/1000 m typically *) Plastic fibre: 7 dB (80ft/25 m typically *) Glass fibre: 62.5/125 mm Plastic fibre: 1 mm
Fibre, optical budget Fibre diameter
*) depending on optical budget calculation
18.2.16
18.2.16.1
Galvanic RS485 communication module

Introduction
The Galvanic RS485 communication module (RS485) is used for DNP3.0 communication. The module has one RS485 communication port. The RS485 is a balanced serial communication that can be used either in 2-wire or 4-wire connections. A 2-wire connection uses the same signal for RX and TX and is a multidrop communication with no dedicated Master or slave. This variant requires however a control of the output. The 4-wire connection has separated signals for RX and TX multidrop communication with a dedicated Master and the rest are slaves. No special control signal is needed in this case.
18.2.16.2
Design
The RS485 is a PMC card and it is factory mounted as a mezzanine card on the NUM module. The internal structure of the RS485 can be seen in figure 438:
FPGA
Wishbone interconnect switch
32 MHz
PCI-con
Internal bus PCI-bus PCIController Local bus to wishbone Status Register ID-chip Control Register
UART Isolation
RS485 tranceiver Rx
PCI-con
Isolation
Termination
Info Register Isolated DC/DC Soft ground
Figure 438:
The internal structure of the RS485 card
RS485 connector pinouts
The arrangement for the pins in the RS485 connector (figure 439) are presented in table 590: RED 670 Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B 919
2-pole connector
6-pole-connector
Isolation
Tx
Section 18 Hardware
Table 590:
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6
The arrangement for the pins

Name 4-wire TX+ TX T-Term R-Term RX RX+ Description Receive/transmit high or transmit high Receive/transmit Termination resistor for transmitter (and receiver in 2wir case) (connect to TX+) Termination resistor for receiver (connect to RX+) Receive low Receive high
Name 2-wire RS485+ RS485 Term N.A. N.A. N.A.
Angle bracket
Screw terminal X3
Screw terminal X1
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6
RS485 PWB
Backplane
Figure 439:
RS485 connector
2-wire: Connect pin 1 to pin 6 and pin 2 to pin 5 Termination (2-wire): Connect pin 1 to pin 3 Termination (4-wire): Connect pin 1 to pin 3 and pin 4 to pin 6
Soft ground connector pinouts
A second 2-pole screw connector is used for the connection of IO-ground. It can be used in two combinations like: Unconnected: No ground of the IO-part . Soft grounded: The IO is connected to the GND with an RC net parallel with a MOV
18.2.16.3
Technical data
920
RED 670
Section 18 Hardware
Table 591:
Quantity
Galvanic RS485 communication module

Range or value 240019200 bauds RS-485 6-pole connector Soft ground 2-pole connector
Communication speed External connectors
18.2.17
18.2.17.1
Optical ethernet module (OEM)

Introduction
The optical fast-ethernet module is used to connect an IED to the communication buses (like the station bus) that use the IEC 61850-8-1 protocol. The module has one or two optical ports with ST connectors.
18.2.17.2
Functionality
The Optical Ethernet module (OEM) is used when communication systems according to IEC6185081 have been implemented.
18.2.17.3
Design
The Optical Ethernet module (OEM) is a PMC card and mounted as a mezzanine card on the ADM. The OEM is a 100base Fx module and available as a single channel or double channel unit.
PCI - bus Connector EEPROM Ethernet Controller 100Base-FX Receiver PCI - PCI Bridge 100Base-FX Transmitter
ST fiber optic connectors
ID chip EEPROM IO - bus Connector
100Base-FX Transmitter Ethernet Controller 100Base-FX Receiver ST fiber optic connectors
en04000472.vsd
Figure 440:
OEM block diagram.
RED 670
921
Section 18 Hardware
ID chip
LED
25MHz oscillator
Ethernet cont.
Transmitter
Receiver
Ethernet cont.
Transmitter
25MHz oscillator
PCI to PCI bridge
en05000472.vsd
Figure 441:
OEM layout, standard PMC format 2 channels
18.2.17.4
Technical data
Table 592:
Quantity Number of channels Standard Type of fiber Wave length Optical connector Communication speed
OEM - Optical ethernet module

Rated value 1 or 2 IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-FX 62.5/125 mm multimode fibre 1300 nm Type ST Fast Ethernet 100 MB
18.2.18
18.2.18.1
mA input module (MIM)

Introduction
The milli-ampere input module is used to interface transducer signals in the 20 to +20 mA range from for example OLTC position, temperature or pressure transducers.The module has six independent, galvanically separated channels.
18.2.18.2
Design
The Milliampere Input Module has six independent analog channels with separated protection, filtering, reference, A/D-conversion and optical isolation for each input making them galvanically isolated from each other and from the rest of the module. For configuration of the input signals, please refer to section "Signal matrix for mA inputs (SMMI)".
922
RED 670
PCI bus
LED
IO bus
Receiver
Section 18 Hardware
The analog inputs measure DC current in the range of +/- 20 mA. The A/D converter has a digital filter with selectable filter frequency. All inputs are calibrated separately The filter parameters and the calibration factors are stored in a non-volatile memory on the module. The calibration circuitry monitors the module temperature and starts an automatical calibration procedure if the temperature drift is outside the allowed range. The module communicates, like the other I/O-modules on the serial CAN-bus.
Protection & filter
A/D Converter Volt-ref
Optoisolation DC/DC Optoisolation DC/DC Optoisolation DC/DC
Process connector
Protection & filter
Protection & filter
Protection & filter
Optoisolation DC/DC
Protection & filter
Optoisolation DC/DC
Protection & filter
Optoisolation DC/DC
Memory
Microcontroller
99000504.vsd
Figure 442:
MIM block diagram
18.2.18.3
Technical data
Backplane connector
CAN
RED 670
923
Section 18 Hardware
Table 593:
Quantity: Input range Input resistance
MIM - mA input module

Rated value: 5, 10, 20mA 0-5, 0-10, 0-20, 4-20mA Rin = 194 Ohm 4W 0.1 W Nominal range: -
Power consumption each mA-board each mA input
18.2.19
18.2.19.1
GPS time synchronization module (GSM)

Introduction
This module includes the GPS receiver used for time synchronization. The GPS has one SMA contact for connection to an antenna.
18.2.19.2
Design
The GPS time synchronization module is 6U high and occupies one slot. The slot closest to the NUM shall always be used. The GSM consists of CAN carrier module (CCM) GPS clock module (GCM) GPS receiver unit
The CCM is a carrier board for the GCM mezzanine PMC card and GPS unit, see figure 444. There is a cable between the external antenna input on the back of the GCM and the GPS-receiver. This is a galvanic connection vulnerable to electromagnetic interference. The connector is shielded and directly attached to a grounded plate to reduce the risk. The second cable is a flat cable that connects the GPS and the GCM. It is used for communication between the GCM and the GPS-receiver. All communication between the GCM and the NUM is via the CAN-bus. The CMPPS signal is sent from the GCM to the rest of the time system to provide 1s accuracy at sampling level.
924
RED 670
Section 18 Hardware
PMC GPS antenna GPS receiver GPS clock module

CMPPS
CAN controller
CAN
en05000675.vsd
Figure 443:
GSM block diagram
en07000086.vsd
Figure 444:
1 GPS receiver
A CCM with the GCM and GPS mounted with cables
Backplane CAN connector
RED 670
925
Section 18 Hardware
2 GPS Clock module (GCM) 3 CAN carrier module (CCM) 4 Antenna connector
18.2.19.3
Technical data
Table 594:
Function Receiver Time to reliable time reference with antenna in new position or after power loss longer than 1 month Time to reliable time reference after a power loss longer than 48 hours Time to reliable time reference after a power loss shorter than 48 hours
GPS time synchronization module (GSM)

Range or value <30 minutes <15 minutes <5 minutes Accuracy 1s relative UTC
18.2.20
18.2.20.1
GPS antenna
Introduction
In order to receive GPS signals from the satellites orbiting the earth a GPS antenna with applicable cable must be used.
18.2.20.2
Design
The antenna with a console for mounting on a horizontal or vertical flat surface or on an antenna mast. See figure 445
926
RED 670
Section 18 Hardware
2 3
xx04000155.vsd
Figure 445:
where: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Antenna with console
GPS antenna TNC connector Console, 78x150 mm Mounting holes 5.5 mm Tab for securing of antenna cable Vertical mounting position Horizontal mounting position
Always position the antenna and its console so that a continuous clear line-of-sight visibility to all directions is obtained, preferably more than 75%. A minimum of 50% clear line-of-sight visibility is required for un-interrupted operation.
RED 670
927
Section 18 Hardware
99001046.vsd
Figure 446:
Antenna line-of-sight
Antenna cable Use a 50 ohm coaxial cable with a male TNC connector in the antenna end and a male SMA connector in the receiver end to connect the antenna to GSM. Choose cable type and length so that the total attenuation is max. 26 dB at 1.6 GHz. Make sure that the antenna cable is not charged when connected to the antenna or to the receiver. Short-circuit the end of the antenna cable with some metal device, when first connected to the antenna. When the antenna is connected to the cable, connect the cable to the receiver. REx670 must be switched off when the antenna cable is connected.
18.2.20.3
Technical data
Table 595:
Function Max antenna cable attenuation Antenna cable impedance Lightning protection Antenna cable connector
GPS Antenna and cable

Value 26 db @ 1.6 GHz 50 ohm Must be provided externally SMA in receiver end TNC in antenna end
928
RED 670

18.2.21.1
IRIG-B time synchronization module IRIG-B

Introduction
This module includes the IRIG-B time synchronization and the PPS time synchronization.
18.2.21.2
Design
The IRIG-B module have two inputs. One input is for the IRIG-B that can handle both a pulse-width modulated signal (also called unmodulated) and an amplitude modulated signal (also called sine wave modulated). The other is an optical input type ST for PPS to synchronize the time between several protections.
32 MHz FPGA OPTO_INPUT PCI-bus PCI-Controller
Registers
PCI-con
4 mm barrier
ID-chip Capture1 Capture2
Amplitude modulator Isolated receiver Zero-cross detector
ZXING
IO-con
MPPS PPS CMPPS TSU Isolated DC/DC 5 to +- 12V
en06000303.vsd
Figure 447:
IRIG-B block diagram
RED 670
BNCconnector
IRIGDecoder
IRIG_INPUT
STconnector
PCI-con
929
Section 18 Hardware
A1
C C
Y2
3 2
en06000304.vsd
Figure 448:
IRIG-B PC-MIP board with top left ST connector for PPS 820 nm multimode fibre optic signal input and lower left BNC connector for IRIG-B signal input
18.2.21.3
Technical data
Table 596:
Quantity Number of channels IRIG-B Number of channels PPS Electrical connector IRIG-B Optical connector PPS Type of fibre
IRIG-B
Rated value 1 1 BNC Type ST 62.5/125 m multimode fibre
18.3
18.3.1
Dimensions
Case without rear cover
930
RED 670
C
O O
ST
DC//DC
A1
Section 18 Hardware
D A
F
C
xx04000448.vsd
G H
Figure 449:
Case without rear cover Figure 450:
xx04000464.vsd
Case without rear cover with 19 rack mounting kit
Case size (mm) A 6U, 1/2 x 19 6U, 3/4 x 19 6U, 1/1 x 19 265.9 265.9 265.9
B 223.7 336.0 448.3
C 201.1 201.1 201.1
D 252.9 252.9 252.9
E 205.7 318.0 430.3
F 190.5 190.5 190.5
G 203.7 316.0 428.3
H 465.1
J 187.6 187.6 187.6
K 482.6
The H and K dimensions are defined by the 19 rack mounting kit
18.3.2
Case with rear cover
RED 670
931
Section 18 Hardware
K
D A
G
C
xx05000501.vsd
J
xx05000502.vsd
Figure 451:
Case with rear cover.
Figure 452:
Case with rear cover and 19 rack mounting kit.
xx05000503.vsd
Figure 453:
Rear cover case with details.
Case size (mm) A 6U, 1/2 x 19 6U, 3/4 x 19 6U, 1/1 x 19 265.9 265.9 265.9
B 223.7 336.0 448.3
C 242.1 242.1 242.1
D 255.8 255.8 255.8
E 205.7 318.0 430.3
F 190.5 190.5 190.5
G 203.7 316.0 428.3
H 465.1
J 228.6 228.6 228.6
K 482.6
The H and K dimensions are defined by the 19 rack mounting kit.
932
RED 670
Section 18 Hardware
Case size (inches) 6U, 1/2 x 19 6U, 3/4 x 19 6U, 1/1 x 19 A 10.47 10.47 10.47 B 8.81 13.23 17.65 C 9.53 9.53 9.53 D 10.07 10.07 10.07 E 8.10 12.52 16.86 F 7.50 7.50 7.50 G 8.02 12.4 16.86 H 18.31 J 9.00 9.00 9.00 K 19.00
The H and K dimensions are defined by the 19 rack mounting kit.
18.3.3
Flush mounting dimensions
A B
E D
xx04000465.vsd
Figure 454:
Flush mounting
Cut-out dimensions (mm) A +/-1 210.1 322.4 434.7 B +/-1 254.3 254.3 254.3 C 4.0-10.0 4.0-10.0 4.0-10.0 D 12.5 12.5 12.5
Case size Tolerance 6U, 1/2 x 19" 6U, 3/4 x 19" 6U, 1/1 x 19"
E = 188.6 mm without rear protection cover, 229.6 mm with rear protection cover
RED 670
933
Section 18 Hardware 18.3.4 Side-by-side flush mounting dimensions
xx06000182.vsd
Figure 455:
A 1/2 x 19 size IED 670 side-by-side with RHGS6.
A
G
C
xx05000505.vsd
Figure 456:
Panel-cut out dimensions for side-by-side flush mounting
934
RED 670
Section 18 Hardware 18.3.5 Wall mounting dimensions
A B E
en04000471.vsd
Figure 457:
Wall mounting
Case size (mm) 6U, 1/2 x 19 6U, 3/4 x 19 6U, 1/1 x 19
A 292.0 404.3 516.0
B 267.1 379.4 491.1
C 272.8 272.8 272.8
D 390.0 390.0 390.0
E 243.0 243.0 243.0
18.3.6
External resistor unit for high impedance differential protection

WARNING! - USE EXTREME CAUTION!Dangerously high voltages might be present on this equipment, especially on the plate with resistors. Do any maintenance ONLY if the primary object protected with this equipment is de-energized. If required by national low/standard enclose the plate with resistors with a protective cover or in a separate box!
RED 670
935
Section 18 Hardware
[6.97]
[4.02]
[1.48]
[0.33]
[18.31] [18.98]
[0.79]
[7.68]
Dimension mm [inches]
xx06000232.eps
Figure 458:
[1.50]
Dimension drawing of a one phase impedance resistor unit
[10.47]
[7.50]
[0.33]
[18.31] [18.98]
[0.79]
[7.68]
[inches]
en06000234.eps
Figure 459:
Dimension drawing of a three phase high impedance resistor unit
18.4
18.4.1
18.4.1.1
Mounting alternatives
Flush mounting
Overview
All IED sizes, 1/2 x 19, 3/4 x 19 and 1/1 x 19 and RHGS6 6U 1/4 x 19, cases, can be flush mounted. Only a single case can be mounted in each cut-out on the cubicle panel, for class IP54 protection. The flush mounting kit are utilized for IEDs of sizes: 1/2 x 19, 3/4 x 19 and 1/1 x 19 and are also suitable for mounting of RHGS6, 6U 1/4 x 19 cases.
936
RED 670
Section 18 Hardware
Flush mounting cannot be used for side-by-side mounted IEDs when IP54 class must be fulfilled. Only IP20 class can be obtained when mounting two cases side-by-side in one (1) cut-out.
To obtain IP54 class protection, an additional factory mounted sealing must be ordered when ordering the IED.
18.4.1.2
Mounting procedure for flush mounting

1 7
2 6 3 4 5
xx06000246.vsd
Figure 460:
PosNo 1
Flush mounting details.

Description Sealing strip, used to obtain IP54 class. The sealing strip is factory mounted between the case and front plate. Fastener Groove Screw, self tapping Quantity Type -
2 3 4
4 4
2,9x9,5 mm
RED 670
937
Section 18 Hardware
5 6 7
Joining point of sealing strip (rear view) Panel Screw
M5x25
18.4.2
18.4.2.1
19 panel rack mounting

Overview
All IED sizes can be mounted in a standard 19 cubicle rack by using the for each size suited mounting kit which consists of two mounting angles and fastening screws for the angles. The mounting angles are reversible which enables mounting of IED size 1/2 x 19 or 3/4 x 19 either to the left or right side of the cubicle. Please note that the separately ordered rack mounting kit for side-byside mounted IEDs, or IEDs together with RHGS cases, is to be selected so that the total size equals 19.
When mounting the mounting angles, be sure to use screws that follows the recommended dimensions. Using screws with other dimensions than the original may damage the PCBs inside the IED.
938
RED 670
Section 18 Hardware
18.4.2.2 Mounting procedure for 19 panel rack mounting
2
1a
1b
xx04000452.vs d
Figure 461:
PosNo 1a, 1b 2
19 panel rack mounting details

Quantity 2 8 Type M4x6
Description Mounting angels, which can be mounted, either to the left or right side of the case. Screw
18.4.3
18.4.3.1
Wall mounting
Overview
All case sizes, 1/2 x 19, 3/4 x 19 and 1/1 x 19, can be wall mounted. It is also possible to mount the IED on a panel or in a cubicle. When mounting the side plates, be sure to use screws that follows the recommended dimensions. Using screws with other dimensions than the original may damage the PCBs inside the IED.
RED 670
939
Section 18 Hardware
If fiber cables are bent too much, the signal can be weakened. Wall mounting is therefore not recommended for communication modules with fiber connection; Serial SPA/IEC 60870-5-103 and LON communication module (SLM), Optical Ethernet module (OEM) and Line data communication module (LDCM).
18.4.3.2
Mounting procedure for wall mounting

3 2 1 4
5 6 xx04000453.vs d
Figure 462:
PosNo 1 2 3 4 5 6
Wall mounting details.

Description Bushing Screw Screw Mounting bar Screw Side plate Quantity 4 8 4 2 6 2 Type M4x10 M6x12 or corresponding M5x8 -
18.4.3.3
How to reach the rear side of the IED

The IED can be equipped with a rear protection cover which is recommended to use with this type of mounting. See figure 463.
940
RED 670
Section 18 Hardware
To reach the rear side of the IED, a free space of 80 mmis required on the unhinged side.
View from above 1 3
80 mm
en06000135.vsd
Figure 463:
PosNo 1 2 3
How to reach the connectors on the rear side of the IED.

Description Screw Screw Rear protection cover Type M4x10 M5x8 -
18.4.4
18.4.4.1
Side-by-side 19 rack mounting

Overview
IED case sizes, 1/2 x 19 or 3/4 x 19 and RHGS cases, can be mounted side-by-side up to a maximum size of 19. For side-by-side rack mounting, the side-by-side mounting kit together with the 19 rack panel mounting kit must be used. The mounting kit has to be ordered separately. When mounting the plates and the angles on the IED, be sure to use screws that follows the recommended dimensions. Using screws with other dimensions than the original may damage the PCBs inside the IED.
RED 670
941
Section 18 Hardware
18.4.4.2 Mounting procedure for side-by-side rack mounting
2 1
xx04000456.vsd
Figure 464:
PosNo 1 2, 3 4
Side-by-side rack mounting details.

Description Mounting plate Screw Mounting angle Quantity 2 16 2 Type M4x6 -
18.4.4.3
IED 670 mounted with a RHGS6 case

An 1/2 x 19 or 3/4 x 19 size IED can be mounted with a RHGS (6 or 12 depending on IED size) case. The RHGS case can be used for mounting a test switch of type RTXP 24. It also has enough space for a terminal base of RX 2 type for mounting of, for example, a DC-switch or two trip relays.
942
RED 670
Section 18 Hardware
xx06000180.vsd
Figure 465:
IED 670 (1/2 x 19) mounted with a RHGS6 case containing a test switch module equipped with only a test switch and a RX2 terminal base.
18.4.5
18.4.5.1
Side-by-side flush mounting

Overview
It is not recommended to flush mount side by side mounted cases if IP54 is required. If your application demands side-by-side flush mounting, the side-by-side mounting details kit and the 19 panel rack mounting kit must be used. The mounting kit has to be ordered separately. The maximum size of the panel cut out is 19. With side-by-side flush mounting installation, only IP class 20 is obtained. To reach IP class 54, it is recommended to mount the IEDs separately. For cut out dimensions of separately mounted IEDs, see section "Flush mounting".
When mounting the plates and the angles on the IED, be sure to use screws that follows the recommended dimensions. Using screws with other dimensions than the original may damage the PCBs inside the IED.
Please contact factory for special add on plates for mounting FT switches on the side (for 1/2 19" case) or bottom of the relay.
RED 670
943
Section 18 Hardware
18.4.5.2 Mounting procedure for side-by-side flush mounting
1 2
3 4
xx06000181.vsd
Figure 466:
Side-by-side flush mounting details (RHGS6 side-by-side with 1/2 x 19 IED).

Description Mounting plate Screw Mounting angle Quantity 2 16 2 Type M4x6 -
PosNo 1 2, 3 4
18.5
18.5.1
Technical data
Enclosure
Table 597:
Material Front plate Surface treatment Finish
Case
Steel sheet Steel sheet profile with cut-out for HMI Aluzink preplated steel Light grey (RAL 7035)
944
RED 670
Section 18 Hardware
Table 598:
Front
Water and dust protection level according to IEC 60529

IP40 (IP54 with sealing strip) IP20
Rear, sides, top and bottom
Table 599:
Case size 6U, 1/2 x 19 6U, 3/4 x 19 6U, 1/1 x 19
Weight
Weight 10 kg 15 kg 18 kg
18.5.2
Connection system
Table 600:
Connector type Terminal blocks of feed through type Terminal blocks suitable for ring lug terminals
CT and VT circuit connectors

Rated voltage and current 250 V AC, 20 A 250 V AC, 20 A Maximum conductor area 4mm2 4 mm2
Table 601:
Connector type
Binary I/O connection system

Rated voltage 250 V AC 300 V AC Maximum conductor area 2.5 mm2 2 1 mm2 3 mm2
Screw compression type Terminal blocks suitable for ring lug terminals
Because of limitations of space, when ring lug terminal is ordered for Binary I/O connections, one blank slot is necessary between two adjacent IO cards. Please refer to the ordering particulars for details.
18.5.3
Influencing factors
RED 670
945
Section 18 Hardware
Table 602:
Parameter
Temperature and humidity influence

Reference value +20 C 10%-90% 0%-95% -40 C to +70 C Nominal range -10 C to +55 C 10%-90% Influence 0.02% /C -
Ambient temperature, operate value Relative humidity Operative range Storage temperature
Table 603:
Dependence on
Auxiliary DC supply voltage influence on functionality during operation

Reference value max. 2% Full wave rectified Within nominal range Influence 12% of EL 20% of EL 24-60 V DC 20% 90-250 V DC 20% No restart Correct behaviour at power down <180 s 0.01% /% 0.01% /%
Ripple, in DC auxiliary voltage Operative range Auxiliary voltage dependence, operate value Interrupted auxiliary DC voltage Interruption interval 050 ms 0 s
Restart time
Table 604:
Dependence on
Frequency influence (reference standard: IEC 602556)

Within nominal range fr 2.5 Hz for 50 Hz fr 3.0 Hz for 60 Hz 2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr 2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr Influence 1.0% / Hz 1.0% 6.0%
Frequency dependence, operate value Harmonic frequency dependence (20% content) Harmonic frequency dependence for distance protection (10% content)
18.5.4
Type tests according to standard

Table 605:
Test 1 MHz burst disturbance Ring wave immunity test Surge withstand capability test Electrostatic discharge Direct application Indirect application Table continued on next page
Electromagnetic compatibility
Type test values 2.5 kV 2-4 kV 2.5 kV, oscillatory 4.0 kV, fast transient 15 kV air discharge 8 kV contact discharge 8 kV contact discharge Reference standards IEC 60255-22-1, Class III IEC 61000-4-12, Class III ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 IEC 60255-22-2, Class IV IEC 61000-4-2, Class IV
946
RED 670
Section 18 Hardware
Test Electrostatic discharge Direct application Indirect application Fast transient disturbance Surge immunity test Power frequency immunity test Power frequency magnetic field test Damped oscillatory magnetic field test Radiated electromagnetic field disturbance Radiated electromagnetic field disturbance Radiated electromagnetic field disturbance Conducted electromagnetic field disturbance Radiated emission Conducted emission Type test values 15 kV air discharge 8 kV contact discharge 8 kV contact discharge 4 kV 1-2 kV, 1.2/50 ms high energy 150-300 V, 50 Hz 1000 A/m, 3 s 100 A/m 20 V/m, 80-1000 MHz 20 V/m, 80-2500 MHz 35 V/m 26-1000 MHz 10 V, 0.15-80 MHz 30-1000 MHz 0.15-30 MHz Reference standards ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1
IEC 60255-22-4,Class A IEC 60255-22-5 IEC 60255-22-7, Class A IEC 61000-4-8, Class V IEC 61000-4-10, Class V IEC 60255-22-3 EN 61000-4-3 IEEE/ANSI C37.90.2 IEC 60255-22-6 IEC 60255-25 IEC 60255-25
Table 606:
Test Dielectric test
Insulation
Type test values 2.0 kV AC, 1 min. 5 kV, 1.2/50 ms, 0.5 J >100 MW at 500 VDC Reference standard IEC 60255-5
Impulse voltage test Insulation resistance
Table 607:
Test Cold test Storage test Dry heat test
Environmental tests
Type test value Test Ad for 16 h at -25C Test Ad for 16 h at -40C Test Bd for 16 h at +70C Test Ca for 4 days at +40 C and humidity 93% Test Db for 6 cycles at +25 to +55 C and humidity 93 to 95% (1 cycle = 24 hours) Reference standard IEC 60068-2-1 IEC 60068-2-1 IEC 60068-2-2 IEC 60068-2-78 IEC 60068-2-30
Damp heat test, steady state Damp heat test, cyclic
Table 608:
Test Immunity Emissivity
CE compliance
According to EN 50263 EN 50263 EN 50178
Low voltage directive
RED 670
947
Section 18 Hardware
Table 609:
Test Vibration Shock and bump Seismic
Mechanical tests
Type test values Class I Class I Class I Reference standards IEC 60255-21-1 IEC 60255-21-2 IEC 60255-21-3
948
RED 670
Section 19 Labels
Section 19 Labels
About this chapter
This chapter includes descriptions of the different labels and where to find them on the IED.
19.1
Different labels
1 2 3 4 5 6 6 7
xx06000574.eps
RED 670
949
Section 19 Labels
1 2 3 4 5 6
Product type, description and serial number Order number, dc supply voltage and rated frequency Optional, customer specific information Manufacturer Transformer input module, rated currents and voltages Transformer designations
Ordering and serial number
950
RED 670
Section 19 Labels
1 2 3
4
en06000573.eps
1 2 3
Warning label Caution label Class 1 laser product label
Warning label
RED 670
951
952
Section 20 Connection diagrams

This chapter includes diagrams of the IED with all slot, terminal block and optical connector designations. It is a necessary guide when making electrical and optical connections to the IED.
RED 670
953
954
RED 670
RED 670
955
956
RED 670
RED 670
957
958
RED 670
RED 670
959
960
RED 670
RED 670
961
962
RED 670
RED 670
963
964
RED 670
RED 670
965
966
RED 670
RED 670
967
968
RED 670
Section 21 Time inverse characteristics

About this chapter
This chapter describes current dependant time delay functionality. Both ANSI and IEC Inverse time curves and tables are included.
21.1
Application
In order to assure time selectivity between different overcurrent protections in different points in the network different time delays for the different relays are normally used. The simplest way to do this is to use definite time delay. In more sophisticated applications current dependent time characteristics are used. Both alternatives are shown in a simple application with three overcurrent protections connected in series.
I>
Figure 467:
I>
I>
xx05000129.vsd
Three overcurrent protections connected in series

Stage 3
Time Stage 2 Stage 2
Stage 1
Stage 1
Stage 1
Fault point position
en05000130.vsd
Figure 468:
Definite time overcurrent characteristics
RED 670
969
Time
Fault point position

en05000131.vsd
Figure 469:
Inverse time overcurrent characteristics with inst. function
The inverse time characteristic makes it possible to minimize the fault clearance time and still assure the selectivity between protections. To assure selectivity between protections there must be a time margin between the operation time of the protections. This required time margin is dependent of following factors, in a simple case with two protections in series: Difference between pick-up time of the protections to be co-ordinated Opening time of the breaker closest to the studied fault Reset time of the protection Margin dependent of the time-delay inaccuracy of the protections
Assume we have the following network case.

A1 B1
Feeder
I>
I>
Time axis
t=0
t=t1
t=t2
t=t3
en05000132.vsd
Figure 470:
where: t=0 t=t1 t=t2
Selectivity steps for a fault on feeder B1
is The fault occurs is Protection B1 trips is Breaker at B1 opens
970
RED 670
t=t3
is Protection A1 resets
In the case protection B1 shall operate without any intentional delay (instantaneous). When the fault occurs the protections start to detect the fault current. After the time t1 the protection B1 send a trip signal to the circuit breaker. The protection A1 starts its delay timer at the same time, with some deviation in time due to differences between the two protections. There is a possibility that A1 will start before the trip is sent to the B1 circuit breaker. At the time t2 the circuit breaker B1 has opened its primary contacts and thus the fault current is interrupted. The breaker time (t2 - t1) can differ between different faults. The maximum opening time can be given from manuals and test protocols. Still at t2 the timer of protection A1 is active. At time t3 the protection A1 is reset, i.e. the timer is stopped. In most applications it is required that the delay times shall reset as fast as possible when the current fed to the protection drops below the set current level, the reset time shall be minimized. In some applications it is however beneficial to have some type of delayed reset time of the overcurrent function. This can be the case in the following applications: If there is a risk of intermittent faults. If the current relay, close to the faults, starts and resets there is a risk of unselective trip from other protections in the system. Delayed resetting could give accelerated fault clearance in case of automatic reclosing to a permanent fault. Overcurrent protection functions are sometimes used as release criterion for other protection functions. It can often be valuable to have a reset delay to assure the release function.
21.2
21.2.1
Mode of operation
The function can operate in a definite time delay mode or in a current dependent inverse time delay mode. For the inverse time characteristic both ANSI and IEC based standard curves are available. Also programmable curve types are supported via the component inputs: p, A, B, C pr, tr, and cr. Different characteristics for reset delay can also be chosen. If current in any phase exceeds the set start current value (here internal signal startValue), a timer, according to the selected operate mode, is started. The component
RED 670
971
always uses the maximum of the three phase current values as the current level used in timing calculations. In case of definite time the timer will run constantly until the trip time is reached or until the current drops below the reset value (start value minus the hysteresis) and the reset time has elapsed. For definite time delay curve index no 5 (ANSI/IEEE Definite time) or 15 (IEC Definite time) are chosen. The general expression for inverse time curves is according to equation 174.
A t[ s ] = + Bk i p -C in >
where: p, A, B, C are constants defined for each curve type, in> k i is the set start current for step n, is set time multiplier for step n and is the measured current.
(Equation 174)
For inverse time characteristics a time will be initiated when the current reaches the set start level. From the general expression of the characteristic the following can be seen:
(top - B k )
i p - C = Ak in >
(Equation 175)
where: top is the operation time of the protection
The time elapsed to the moment of trip is reached when the integral fulfils according to equation 176, in addition to the constant time delay:
i p in > - C dt A k 0
t
(Equation 176)
For the numerical protection the sum below must fulfil the equation for trip.
972
RED 670
Dt
i( j ) p - C A k j =1 in >
n
(Equation 177)
where: j=1 is the first protection execution cycle when a fault has been detected, i.e. when
i in >
Dt n
>1
is the time interval between two consecutive executions of the protection algorithm, is the number of the execution of the algorithm when the trip time equation is fulfilled, i.e. when a trip is given and is the fault current at time j
i (j)
For inverse time operation, the inverse-time characteristic is selectable. Both the IEC and ANSI/IEEE standardized inverse-time characteristics are supported. The list of characteristics in table 610 matches the list in the IEC 61850-7-4 spec.
Table 610:
Curve name Curve name ANSI Extremely Inverse ANSI Very Inverse ANSI Normal Inverse ANSI Moderately Inverse ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse ANSI Long Time Very Inverse IEC Normal Inverse IEC Very Inverse IEC Inverse IEC Extremely. Inverse IEC Short Time Inverse IEC Long Time Inverse
Curve name and index no.

Curve index no. 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
For the ANSI/IEEE characteristics the inverse time curves are defined according to table 611:
RED 670
973
Table 611:
Inverse time curves for ANSI/IEEE characteristics

A 28.2 19.61 0.0086 0.0515 64.07 28.55 0.086 B 0.1217 0.491 0.0185 0.1140 0.250 0.712 0.185 C 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 p 2.0 2.0 0.02 0.02 2.0 2.0 0.02
Parameter/operationMode 1 = ANSI Extremely inverse 2 = ANSI Very inverse 3 = ANSI Inverse 4 = ANSI Moderately inverse 6 = ANSI Long-time extremely inverse 7 = ANSI Long-time very inverse 8 = ANSI Long-time inverse
For the IEC characteristics the inverse time curves are defined according to table 612:
Table 612: Inverse time curves for IEC characteristics
A(b) 0.14 13.5 0.14 80.0 0.05 120 B 0 0 0 0 0 0 C 1 1 1 1 1 1 p (a) 0.02 1.0 0.02 2.0 0.04 1.0
Parameter/operationMode 9 = IEC Normal inverse 10 = IEC Very inverse 11 = IEC Inverse 12 = IEC Extremely inverse 13 = IEC Short-time inverse 14 = IEC Long-time inverse
For the IEC curves there is also a setting of the minimum time delay of operation, see figure 471.
974
RED 670
Operate time
tnMin
Current
en05000133.vsd
Figure 471:
Minimum time delay operation for the IEC curves
In order to fully comply with IEC curves definition setting parameter tMin shall be set to the value which is equal to the operating time of the selected IEC inverse curve for measured current of twenty times the set current pickup value. Note that the operating time value is dependent on the selected setting value for time multiplier k. In addition to the ANSI and IEC standardized characteristics, there are also two additional curves available; the 18 = RI time inverse and the 19 = RD time inverse. The 18 = RI time inverse curve emulates the characteristic of the electromechanical ASEA relay RI. The curve is described by equation 179:
k t[ s ] = in > 0.339 - 0.235 i

where: in> k i is the set start current for step n, is set time multiplier for step n and is the measured current.
(Equation 179)
The 19 = RD time inverse curve gives a logarithmic delay, as used in the Combiflex protection RXIDG. The curve enables a high degree of selectivity required for
RED 670
975
sensitive residual earth fault current protection, with ability to detect high resistive earth faults. The curve is described by equation 180:
t[ s ] = 5.8 - 1.35 ln
i k in >
(Equation 180)
where: in> k i is the set start current for step n, is set time multiplier for step n and is the measured current
If the curve type is chosen as 17 the user can make a tailor made inverse time curve according to the general equation 181.
A t[ s ] = + Bk i p -C in >
(Equation 181)
Also the reset time of the delayed function can be controlled. We have the possibility to choose between three different reset type delays. Available alternatives are listed in table 613.
Table 613:
Curve name Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI Reset
Reset type delays

Curve index no. 1 2 3
If instantaneous reset is chosen the timer will be reset directly when the current drops below the set start current level minus the hysteresis. If IEC reset is chosen the timer is reset the timer will be reset after a set constant time when the current drops below the set start current level minus the hysteresis. If ANSI reset time is chosen the reset time will be dependent of the current after fault clearance (when the current drops below the start current level minus the hysteresis). The timer will reset according to equation 182.
976
RED 670
tr t[ s ] = i 2 -1 in >
where: The set value tr is the reset time in case of zero current after fault clearance.
(Equation 182)
The possibility of choice of reset characteristics is to some extent dependent of the choice of time delay characteristic. For the independent time delay characteristics (type 5 and 15) the possible delay time settings are instantaneous (1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset). For ANSI inverse time delay characteristics (type 1 - 4 and 6 - 8) all three types of reset time characteristics are available; instantaneous (1), IEC (2 = set constant time reset) and ANSI (3 = current dependent reset time). For IEC inverse time delay characteristics (type 9 - 14) the possible delay time settings are instantaneous (1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset). For the customer tailor made inverse time delay characteristics (type 17) all three types of reset time characteristics are available; instantaneous (1), IEC (2 = set constant time reset) and ANSI (3 = current dependent reset time). If the current dependent type is used settings pr, tr and cr must be given, see equation 183:
tr t[ s ] = i pr - cr in >
(Equation 183)
For RI and RD inverse time delay characteristics (type 18 and 19) the possible delay time settings are instantaneous (1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset).
21.3
Inverse characteristics
RED 670
977
Table 614:
Function
Inverse time characteristics ANSI

Range or value k = 0.05-999 in steps of 0.01 unless otherwise stated Accuracy -
Operate characteristic:
t =
A P ( I - 1)
+ B k
Reset characteristic:
t = tr
2
(I
-1
I = Imeasured/Iset ANSI Extremely Inverse no 1 ANSI Very inverse no 2 ANSI Normal Inverse no 3 ANSI Moderately Inverse no 4 ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse no 6 ANSI Long Time Very Inverse no 7 ANSI Long Time Inverse no 8 A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0, tr=29.1 A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0, tr=21.6 A=0.0086, B=0.0185, P=0.02, tr=0.46 A=0.0515, B=0.1140, P=0.02, tr=4.85 A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0, tr=30 A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0, tr=13.46 k=(0.01-1.20) in steps of 0.01 A=0.086, B=0.185, P=0.02, tr=4.6 ANSI/IEEE C37.112, class 5 + 30 ms
Table 615:
Function
Inverse time characteristics IEC

Range or value k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01 Accuracy -
Operate characteristic:
t =
A P k ( I - 1)
I = Imeasured/Iset Time delay to reset, IEC inverse time IEC Normal Inverse no 9 IEC Very inverse no 10 IEC Inverse no 11 IEC Extremely inverse no 12 IEC Short-time inverse no 13 IEC Long-time inverse no 14 Table continued on next page (0.000-60.000) s A=0.14, P=0.02 A=13.5, P=1.0 A=0.14, P=0.02 A=80.0, P=2.0 A=0.05, P=0.04 A=120, P=1.0 0.5% of set time 10 ms IEC 60255-3, class 5 + 40 ms
978
RED 670

Function Customer defined characteristic no 17 Operate characteristic: Range or value k=0.5-999 in steps of 0.1 A=(0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001 B=(0.00-20.00) in steps of 0.01 C=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1 P=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001 TR=(0.005-100.000) in steps of 0.001 CR=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1 PR=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001 k=(0.05-999) in steps of 0.01 Accuracy IEC 60255, class 5 + 40 ms
t =
A P (I - C )
+ B k
Reset characteristic:
t = TR
PR
(I
- CR
I = Imeasured/Iset RI inverse characteristic no 18

t = 1 k
IEC 60255-3, class 5 + 40 ms
0.339 -
0.236 I
I = Imeasured/Iset Logarithmic inverse characteristic no 19

t = 5.8 - 1.35 In
k=(0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01
IEC 60255-3, class 5 + 40 ms
k
I
I = Imeasured/Iset
RED 670
979
Table 616:
Function Type A curve:
Inverse time characteristics for Two step undervoltage protection (PUVM, 27)
Range or value k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01 Accuracy Class 5 +40 ms
t =
U < -U
U<
U< = Uset U = UVmeasured Type B curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01

2.0
t =
k 480
32 U < -U - 0.5 U <
+ 0.055
U< = Uset U = Umeasured Programmable curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01 A = (0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001 B = (0.50-100.00) in steps of 0.01 C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of 0.1 D = (0.000-60.000) in steps of 0.001 P = (0.000-3.000) in steps of 0.001
kA +D t = P U < -U -C B U <
U< = Uset U = Umeasured
980
RED 670
Table 617:
t =
Inverse time characteristics for Two step overvoltage protection (POVM, 59)
U -U > U>
U> = Uset U = Umeasured Type B curve:

t =
k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01
k 480
32 U - U > - 0.5 U >
2.0
- 0.035
k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01
Type C curve:
t =
k 480
32 U - U > - 0.5 U >
3.0
- 0.035
k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01 A = (0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001 B = (0.50-100.00) in steps of 0.01 C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of 0.1 D = (0.000-60.000) in steps of 0.001 P = (0.000-3.000) in steps of 0.001
Programmable curve:
t = kA +D
B U - U > U >
-C
RED 670
981
Table 618:
t =
Inverse time characteristics for Two step residual overvoltage protection (POVM, 59N)
U -U > U>
U> = Uset U = Umeasured Type B curve:

t =
k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01

k 480
2.0
32 U - U > - 0.5 U >
- 0.035
Type C curve:
t =
k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01

k 480
3.0
32 U - U > - 0.5 U >
- 0.035
Programmable curve:
t =
kA
B U - U > U >
-C
+D
k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01 A = (0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001 B = (0.50-100.00) in steps of 0.01 C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of 0.1 D = (0.000-60.000) in steps of 0.001 P = (0.000-3.000) in steps of 0.001
982
RED 670
100
10
k= 15 10 7 5 3 2
0.1
0.5
0.01
10
100
I/I>
xx05000764.vsd
Figure 472:
ANSI Extremely inverse
RED 670
983
100
10
k= 15 10
7 5 3 2 1
0.1
0.5
0.01
10
100
I/I>
xx05000765.vsd
Figure 473:
ANSI Very inverse
984
RED 670
100
10
k= 15 10
7 5 3 2 1
0.1
0.5
0.01
10
100
I/I>
xx05000766.vsd
Figure 474:
ANSI Inverse
RED 670
985
100
k=
10
15 10 7 5 3 2
1 0.5
0.1
0.01
10
100
I/I>
xx05000767.vsd
Figure 475:
Moderately inverse
986
RED 670
100
10
k= 1.1 0.9 0.7
0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1
0.1
0.05
0.01
10
100 I/I>
xx05000768.vsd
Figure 476:
IEC Normal inverse
RED 670
987
100
10
1
k= 1.1 0.9 0.7 0.5 0.3
0.1
0.2 0.1 0.05
0.01
10
100
I/I>
xx05000769.vsd
Figure 477:
Very inverse
988
RED 670
100
10
k=
0.1
1.1 0.9 0.7 0.5 0.3 0.2
0.01
10
0.1 0.05
100
I/I>
xx05000770.vsd
Figure 478:
Extremely inverse
RED 670
989
990
Section 22 Glossary
Section 22 Glossary
About this chapter
This chapter contains a glossary with terms, acronyms and abbreviations used in ABB technical documentation.
22.1
Glossary
AC A/D converter ADBS ADM ANSI AR ArgNegRes ArgDir ASCT ASD AWG BBP BFP BIM BOM BR BS BSR BST C37.94 CAN CAP 531 Alternating current Analog to digital converter Amplitude dead -band supervision Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization American National Standards Institute Autoreclosing Setting parameter/ZD/ Setting parameter/ZD/ Auxiliary summation current transformer Adaptive signal detection American Wire Gauge standard Busbar protection Breaker failure protection Binary input module Binary output module External bi-stable relay British standard Binary signal transfer function, receiver blocks Binary signal transfer function, transmit blocks IEEE/ANSI protocol used when sending binary signals between IEDs Controller Area Network. ISO standard (ISO 11898) for serial communication Configuration and programming tool 991
RED 670
Section 22 Glossary
CB CBM CCITT
Circuit breaker Combined backplane module Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and Telephony. A United Nations sponsored standards body within the International Telecommunications Union. CAN carrier module Capacitive Coupled Voltage Transformer Protection Current Transformer class as per IEEE/ ANSI Combined mega pulses per second Close-open cycle Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves two twisted pairs making it possible to transmit information in both directions Standard format according to IEC 60255-24 Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves four twisted pairs of with two are used for transmitting data in both directions, and two pairs for transmitting clock signals Central processor unit Carrier receive Cyclic redundancy check Carrier send Current transformer Capacitive voltage transformer Delayed auto-reclosing Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (The US developer of the TCP/IP protocol etc.) Dead bus dead line Dead bus live line Direct current Discrete Fourier transform Small switch mounted on a printed circuit board Dead line live bus Distributed Network Protocol as per IEEE/ANSI Std. 1379-2000 Disturbance recorder Dynamic random access memory Disturbance report handler RED 670
CCM CCVT Class C CMPPS CO cycle Co-directional
COMTRADE Contra-directional
CPU CR CRC CS CT CVT DAR DARPA DBDL DBLL DC DFT DIP-switch DLLB DNP DR DRAM DRH 992
Section 22 Glossary
DSP DTT EHV network EIA EMC EMF EMI EnFP ESD FOX 20 FOX 512/515 FOX 6Plus G.703
Digital signal processor Direct transfer trip scheme Extra high voltage network Electronic Industries Association Electro magnetic compatibility Electro motive force Electro magnetic interference End fault protection Electrostatic discharge Modular 20 channel telecommunication system for speech, data and protection signals Access multiplexer Compact, time-division multiplexer for the transmission of up to seven duplex channels of digital data over optical fibers Electrical and functional description for digital lines used by local telephone companies. Can be transported over balanced and unbalanced lines Communication interface module with carrier of GPS receiver module General interrogation command Gas insulated switchgear Generic object oriented substation event Global positioning system GPS time synchronization module High level data link control, protocol based on the HDLC standard Plastic fiber connector Human machine interface High speed auto reclosing High voltage High voltage direct current Integrating dead band supervision International Electrical Committee IEC Standard, Instrument transformers Part 6: Requirements for protective current transformers for transient performance
GCM GI GIS GOOSE GPS GSM HDLC protocol HFBR connector type HMI HSAR HV HVDC IDBS IEC IEC 60044-6
RED 670
993
Section 22 Glossary
IEC 60870-5-103 IEC 61850 IEEE IEEE 802.12 IEEE P1386.1
Communication standard for protective equipment. A serial master/slave protocol for point-to-point communication Substation Automation communication standard Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers A network technology standard that provides 100 Mbits/s on twisted-pair or optical fiber cable PCI Mezzanine card (PMC) standard for local bus modules. References the CMC (IEEE P1386, also known as Common mezzanine card) standard for the mechanics and the PCI specifications from the PCI SIG (Special Interest Group) for the electrical EMF Electro Motive Force. Intelligent electronic device Intelligent gas insulated switchgear Binary input/output module When several occurrences of the same function are available in the IED they are referred to as instances of that function. One instance of a function is identical to another of the same kind but will have a different number in the IED user interfaces. The word instance is sometimes defined as an item of information that is representative of a type. In the same way an instance of a function in the IED is representative of a type of function. 1. Internet protocol. The network layer for the TCP/IP protocol suite widely used on Ethernet networks. IP is a connectionless, best-effort packet switching protocol. It provides packet routing, fragmentation and re-assembly through the data link layer. 2. Ingression protection according to IEC standard Ingression protection, according to IEC standard, level 20 Ingression protection, according to IEC standard, level 40 Ingression protection, according to IEC standard, level 54 Internal fail signal InterRange Instrumentation Group Time code format B, standard 200 International Telecommunications Union Local area network High voltage software module Liquid crystal display Line differential communication module Local detection device RED 670
IED I-GIS IOM Instance
IP
IP 20 IP 40 IP 54 IRF IRIG-B: ITU LAN LIB 520 LCD LDCM LDD 994
Section 22 Glossary
LED LNT LON MCB MCM MIM MPM MVB NCC NUM OCO cycle OCP OEM OLTC OV Overreach
Light emitting diode LON network tool Local operating network Miniature circuit breaker Mezzanine carrier module Milli-ampere module Main processing module Multifunction vehicle bus. Standardized serial bus originally developed for use in trains. National Control Centre Numerical module Open-close-open cycle Overcurrent protection Optical ethernet module On load tap changer Over voltage A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault condition. For example a distance relay is over-reaching when the impedance presented to it is smaller than the apparent impedance to the fault applied to the balance point, i.e. the set reach. The relay sees the fault but perhaps it should not have seen it. Peripheral component interconnect, a local data bus Pulse code modulation Protection and control IED manager Mezzanine card standard Process interface for sensors & actuators PCI Mezzanine card Permissive overreach transfer trip Bus or LAN used at the process level, that is, in near proximity to the measured and/or controlled components Power supply module Parameter setting tool Potential transformer or voltage transformer ratio Permissive underreach transfer trip Synchrocheck relay, COMBIFLEX 995
PCI PCM PCM 600 PC-MIP PISA PMC POTT Process bus PSM PST PT ratio PUTT RASC RED 670
Section 22 Glossary
RCA REVAL RFPP RFPE RISC RMS value RS422 RS485 RTC RTU SA SC SCS SCT SLM SMA connector SMS SNTP
Relay characteristic angle Evaluation software Resistance for phase-to-phase faults Resistance for phase-to-earth faults Reduced instruction set computer Root mean square value A balanced serial interface for the transmission of digital data in point-to-point connections Serial link according to EIA standard RS485 Real time clock Remote terminal unit Substation Automation Switch or push-button to close Station control system System configuration tool according to standard IEC 61850 Serial communication module. Used for SPA/LON/IEC communication. Subminiature version A, A threaded connector with constant impedance. Station monitoring system Simple network time protocol is used to synchronize computer clocks on local area networks. This reduces the requirement to have accurate hardware clocks in every embedded system in a network. Each embedded node can instead synchronize with a remote clock, providing the required accuracy. Strmberg protection acquisition, a serial master/slave protocol for point-to-point communication Switch for CB ready condition Switch or push-button to trip Neutral point of transformer or generator Static VAr compensation Trip coil Trip circuit supervision Transmission control protocol. The most common transport layer protocol used on Ethernet and the Internet. Transmission control protocol over Internet Protocol. The de facto standard Ethernet protocols incorporated into 4.2BSD RED 670
SPA SRY ST Starpoint SVC TC TCS TCP TCP/IP 996
Section 22 Glossary
Unix. TCP/IP was developed by DARPA for internet working and encompasses both network layer and transport layer protocols. While TCP and IP specify two protocols at specific protocol layers, TCP/IP is often used to refer to the entire US Department of Defense protocol suite based upon these, including Telnet, FTP, UDP and RDP. TEF TNC connector TPZ, TPY, TPX, TPS Underreach Time delayed earth-fault protection function Threaded Neill Concelman, A threaded constant impedance version of a BNC connector Current transformer class according to IEC A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault condition. For example a distance relay is under-reaching when the impedance presented to it is greater than the apparent impedance to the fault applied to the balance point, i.e. the set reach. The relay does not see the fault but perhaps it should have seen it. See also Overreach. Process interface components that deliver measured voltage and current values Coordinated universal time. A coordinated time scale, maintained by the Bureau International des Poids et Mesures (BIPM), which forms the basis of a coordinated dissemination of standard frequencies and time signals. UTC is derived from International Atomic Time (TAI) by the addition of a whole number of "leap seconds" to synchronize it with Universal Time 1 (UT1), thus allowing for the eccentricity of the Earth"s orbit, the rotational axis tilt (23.5 degrees), but still showing the Earth"s irregular rotation, on which UT1 is based. The Coordinated Universal Time is expressed using a 24-hour clock and uses the Gregorian calendar. It is used for aeroplane and ship navigation, where it also sometimes known by the military name, "Zulu time". "Zulu" in the phonetic alphabet stands for "Z" which stands for longitude zero. Undervoltage Weak end infeed logic Voltage transformer A digital signalling interface primarily used for telecom equipment Three times zero-sequence current. Often referred to as the residual or the earth-fault current Three times the zero sequence voltage. Often referred to as the residual voltage or the neutral point voltage
U/I-PISA UTC
UV WEI VT X.21 3IO 3UO
RED 670
997
998

Ajustes Rele 670 ABB

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ajustes Rele 670 ABB

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Technical reference manual Line differential protection IED RED 670

Copyright 2007 ABB. All rights reserved

Local human-machine interface.....................................35

Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B

Input and output signals.........................................................51 Setting parameters.................................................................51

Basic IED functions........................................................55

Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B

Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B

Impedance protection ..................................................147

Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B

Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B

Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B

Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B

Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B

Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B

Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B

Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B

Section 10 Secondary system supervision.....................................471

Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B

Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B

Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B

Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B

Section 12 Scheme communication...............................................631

Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B

Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B

Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B

Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B

Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B

Section 16 Station communication.................................................791

Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B

Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B

Section 17 Remote communication................................................871

Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B

Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B

Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B

Connection system....................................................................945 Influencing factors.....................................................................945 Type tests according to standard..............................................946

Section 20 Connection diagrams...................................................953 Section 21 Time inverse characteristics.........................................969

Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B

Introduction to the technical reference manual

Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B

About the technical reference manual

Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B

Design of the Technical reference manual (TRM)

Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B

Logic diagram example with -int signals

Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B

STCND & & & & & &

STNDL1L2-cont. STNDL2L3-cont. STNDL3L1-cont. STNDL1N-cont. STNDL2N-cont. STNDL3N-cont. >1 STNDPE-cont.

1L1L2 1L2L3 1L3L1 1L1N 1L2N 1L3N

>1 1--VTSZ 1--BLOCK >1 & 1--STND BLK-cont.

Logic diagram example with an outgoing -cont signal

STNDL1N-cont. STNDL2N-cont. STNDL3N-cont. STNDL1L2-cont. STNDL2L3-cont. STNDL3L1-cont.

Logic diagram example with an incoming -cont signal

Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B

IEC 61850 - 8 -1 Logical Node

Example of a function block

Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B

Section 1 Introduction 1.1.4 Intended audience

Latest versions of the described documentation can be found on www.abb.com/substationautomation

Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B

Section 1 Introduction 1.1.6 Revision notes

Technical reference manual 1MRK505183-UEN rev. B